The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutPROJECT MANUAL VOLUME 1 r_ --- , -., �+' s x 1 '"�a, z, .may, E ,�• - �4. -' s- ;. '� 5 g`� ��` „! 4-;:Lr� - - €.�s -;r: r' -' -. F Y 2020 �" • w Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids Modifications City Contract No. 994 Project Manual City of Waterloo, IA .i� Issued for Bid December 16, 2019 Volume 1 of 2 PROJECT MANUAL F.Y. 2020 WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT BIOSOLIDS MODIFICATIONS CITY CONTRACT NO. 994 CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA VOLUME 1 OF 2 Prepared by: STRAND ASSOCIATES, INC.® 910 West Wingra Drive Madison, WI 53715 www.strand.com Issued for Bid December 16, 2019 STRAND ASSOCIATES' _ CERTIFICATION PAGE - F.Y. 2020 WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT BIOSOLIDS MODIFICATIONS CITY CONTRACT NO. 994 - CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA _ 'I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly ‘witilliwil licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa. - Pt"RANDALL A,'''.0-..:. FOR STRAND ASSOCIATES, INC,® , co: ......- .7..17'11 WIRTZ z= '-------7, .." J'i - 1 111426 lel_ - . 16137 .//U Cet- ' / ‘,..* '' Signature Date ...., ,i ., ,... Randall A. Wirtz, Ph.D, P.d., ENV SP iio /*OWN License Number 16137 - Iiiii/si,iitIk0 My license renewal date is December 31, 2021 SEAL Specification sections covered by this seal: All sections unless otherwise noted. I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa. ,,,,......Ri-,.,i,.*•*..4-,,.„Ai.44%:„.,, 11. FOR STRAND ASSOCIATES, INC. ' : SCOTT ...-Z•S. tr.HERKERT : - ..; / 676 r. %....0 :. P24 1 t_r7,47 Signature :‘ Date - V:;› •••• ,r17, /-'''/ Scott G. Herkert, P.E. -- ... License Number: P24676 My license renewal date is December 31, 2021 SEAL . Specification sections covered by this seal: Divisions 02 through 13, 31, and 32. I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of. Iowa. - "' <Z ..... -'...,'Ye '''1. zi, ▪ t• A,,,i''. SHANE P % -S' FOR STRAND ASSOCIATES, INC,® 4,: cri)i . '.. os P ' ..... . 11161.-./0141 Signature Date . , Shane P. Zenz, P.E. License Number: 21579 My license renewal date is December 31, 2020 SEAL Specification sections covered by this seal, Divisions 26, 28, and Section 40 70 00, SECTION 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS F.Y. 2020 WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT BIOSOLIDS MODIFICATIONS CITY CONTRACT NO. 994 CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA VOLUME 1 OF 2 Pages Through BIDDING REQUIREMENTS NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING NPH- 2 NOTICE TO BIDDERS NB- 5 INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS IB- 10 SRF REQUIRED FRONT—END SPECIFICATIONS WITH DAVIS BACON REQUIREMENTS (EXHIBIT 12A, INCLUDING ATTACHMENTS 1 THROUGH 9) SRF-33 FORM OF BID OR PROPOSAL BF- 8 INFORMATION NEEDED FOR IOWA CONSTRUCTION SALES TAX EXEMPTION CERTIFICATE STE- 1 BID BOND BB- 1 NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVITS NCA- 2 EQUAL OPPORTUNITY CLAUSE EOC- 2 TITLE VI CIVIL RIGHTS CR- 1 BIDDER STATUS FORM RB- 2 CONTRACTOR'S OR SUBCONTRACTOR'S AFFIRMATIVE ACTION PROGRAM AA- 9 ITEMS OF POTENTIAL MBE/WBE PARTICIPATION M- 1 SUBCONTRACTOR'S BID REQUEST FORM M- 2 LETTER TO BE USED WHEN SOLICITING FOR SUBCONTRACTOR QUOTES M- 3 LETTER OF INTENT TO BID M- 4 PRE-BID CONTACT INFORMATION FORM INSTRUCTIONS M- 5 PRE-BID CONTACT INFORMATION FORM M- 6 CERTIFIED MBE CONTRACTORS M- 8 CERTIFIED WBE CONTRACTORS M- 9 STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS SQ- 2 EROSION CONTROL CERTIFICATION EC- 1 GENERAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS GSP- 5 SPECIAL PROVISIONS SP- 4 DIVISION 01—GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-11 CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS 01 29 00- 2 COORDINATION, FIELD ENGINEERING, AND MEETINGS 01 31 00- 3 SUBMITTALS 01 33 00-11 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 01 41 00- 2 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01 42 00- 6 QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00- 2 Section 00 01 10-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 TABLE OF CONTENTS Continued Pages Through TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00- 4 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS 01 52 13- 4 TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 57 00- 3 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01 60 00- 4 CUTTING, PATCHING, AND ALTERATIONS 01 73 29- 6 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00- 3 STARTING OF SYSTEMS 01 91 00- 8 PERMITS 2 FEDERAL WAGE RATES 18 DIVISION 02—SITE WORK DEMOLITION 02 41 00- 5 DIVISION 03—CONCRETE CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIR 03 01 30- 3 CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 11 00- 4 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03 20 00- 5 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-16 STRUCTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE 03 41 00- 5 PRECAST CONCRETE HOLLOW CORE PLANKS 03 41 13- 5 DIVISION 04—MASONRY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04 01 20- 4 MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT 04 05 13- 3 UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM 04 20 00- 8 DIVISION 05—METALS STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00- 7 METAL DECKING 05 30 00- 3 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00- 8 HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS 05 52 00- 2 GRATING 05 53 00- 3 ANCHOR BOLTS AND POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS 05 56 00- 4 DIVISION 06—WOOD AND PLASTIC WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING 06 11 10- 2 — FIBERGLASS FABRICATIONS 06 60 00- 2 FIBERGLASS GRATING 06 61 10- 2 DIVISION 07—THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07 14 00- 3 BOARD INSULATION 07 21 12- 2 VAPOR AND AIR BARRIER 07 26 00- 1 Section 00 01 10-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 TABLE OF CONTENTS Continued Pages Through PREFORMED METAL PANEL 07 42 13.13- 2 INSULATED WALL PANELS 07 42 13.19- 8 SINGLE-PLY ROOFING—FULLY ADHERED 07 53 23.16- 4 PREPARATION FOR REROOFING 07 56 00- 1 SHEET METAL ROOFING (BID ALTERNATIVE NO. 1) 07 61 00- 4 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07 62 00- 3 MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES 07 71 00- 2 GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS .. 07 71 23- 2 FIRESTOPPING 07 84 00- 3 CAULKING AND SEALANTS .. 07 90 00- 3 DIVISION 08—DOORS AND WINDOWS STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 00- 3 FIBERGLASS DOORS AND FRAMES 08 22 10- 3 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08 31 13- 2 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08 33 23- 2 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08 36 13- 3 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 51 13- 2 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00- 3 GLAZING 08 81 00- 2 DIVISION 09—FINISHES PAINTING 09 91 00-10 CHEMICAL-RESISTANT COATING 09 96 35- 2 DIVISION 10—SPECIALTIES MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 10 00 20- 1 PLASTIC AND METAL SIGNS 10 14 00- 3 FIRST AID KIT 10 43 16- 1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES 10 44 43- 2 DIVISION 12—FURNISHINGS FLOOR MATS 12 48 43- 1 DIVISION 13—SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION FRP FLAT PANEL COVER SYSTEM (BID ALTERNATIVE NO. 3) 13 34 23.25- 7 DIVISION 20—COMMON FIRE SUPPRESSION, PLUMBING, AND HVAC REQUIREMENTS — IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION, PLUMBING, AND HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 20 05 53- 5 EQUIPMENT INSULATION FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC 20 07 16- 6 PIPING INSULATION FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC 20 07 19- 7 Section 00 01 10-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 -- TABLE OF CONTENTS Continued Pages Through DIVISION 21—FIRE SUPPRESSION WATER-BASED FIRE PROTECTION (BID ALTERNATIVE NO. 2) 21 11 00-13 DIVISION 22—PLUMBING GENERAL PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 05 19- 4 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23- 3 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 22 11 00- 6 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 22 13 16- 5 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 13 19- 5 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 30 00- 2 COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 42 00- 2 DIVISION 23—HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 23- 5 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 23 05 93- 5 DUCTWORK INSULATION FOR HEATING, AIR CONDITIONING, AND VENTILATION 23 07 13- 5 HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 07 19- 6 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION 23 09 13- 5 FACILITY FUEL GAS PIPING 23 11 23- 9 HYDRONIC PIPING (BID ALTERNATIVE NO. 4) 23 21 13-12 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES (BID ALTERNATIVE NO. 4) 23 21 16- 3 HYDRONIC PUMPS (BID ALTERNATIVE NO. 4) 23 21 23- 4 REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 23 00- 4 HVAC WATER TREATMENT (BID ALTERNATIVE NO. 4) 23 25 00- 3 DUCTWORK 23 31 00- 5 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00- 4 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 23 34 23- 5 LOUVERS AND VENTS 23 37 08- 3 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 23 37 13- 3 BREECHINGS, CHIMNEY, AND STACKS 23 51 00- 4 FIRE TUBE BOILERS (BID ALTERNATIVE NO. 4) 23 52 39- 5 FUEL-FIRED DUCT HEATERS 23 55 13- 4 FUEL-FIRED UNIT HEATERS 23 55 33- 4 PACKAGED AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER UNITS 23 62 13- 4 FAN COIL UNITS 23 73 13- 6 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS 23 81 26- 5 AIR COILS 23 82 16- 3 UNIT HEATERS 23 82 39- 3 Section 00 01 10-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 TABLE OF CONTENTS Continued Pages Through VOLUME 2 OF 2 DIVISION 26—ELECTRICAL GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 05 00- 9 — MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE 26 05 13- 7 WIRE 26 05 19- 9 INSTRUMENT AND COMMUNICATION WIRE AND CABLE 26 05 23- 6 SECONDARY GROUNDING 26 05 26- 4 SUPPORTING DEVICES 26 05 29- 2 CONDUIT 26 05 33- 9 BOXES 26 05 35- 4 UNDERGROUND CONCRETE DUCT BANKS 26 05 43- 3 MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES 26 05 44- 2 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 05 53- 5 SHORT-CIRCUIT, COORDINATION, AND ARC FLASH ASSESSMENT 26 05 73- 7 CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION 26 09 00-59 _ CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION DRAWINGS 26 09 10- 3 SCADA SYSTEM I/O LISTING 26 09 90-21 LIQUID-FILLED TRANSFORMERS 26 12 19- 8 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE METAL-ENCLOSED SWITCHGEAR 26 13 23-10 LOW-VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS (GROUP-MOUNTED) 26 14 15-10 MOTOR CONTROL 26 24 19-13 HINGED-COVER ENCLOSURES 26 27 16- 2 WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26- 3 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 26 28 00- 3 DISCONNECT SWITCHES 26 28 16- 2 — SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPD) 26 43 13- 4 LIGHTING 26 51 13- 7 SPARE PARTS 26 95 10- 2 DIVISION 28—ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 28 46 00-20 DIVISION 31—EARTHWORK SITE CLEARING AND STRIPPING 31 10 00- 2 EXCAVATION, FILL, BACKFILL, AND GRADING 31 23 00- 7 DEWATERING 31 2319- 3 SLOPE PROTECTION AND EROSION CONTROL 31 25 00- 7 GEOTEXTILES 31 3219- 1 RIPRAP 31 37 00- 2 HELICAL PILE FOUNDATIONS 31 62 16.11-10 Section 00 01 10-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 TABLE OF CONTENTS Continued Pages Through DIVISION 32—EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS AGGREGATE BASE COURSE 32 11 23- 2 HOT MIX ASPHALT PAVING 32 11 26- 4 SEEDING AND SODDING 32 92 19- 5 STONE MUCH AND EDGING 32 94 00- 2 DIVISION 33—UTILITIES BURIED PIPING INSULATION 33 07 19- 4 BURIED PIPING AND APPURTENANCES 33 30 10-17 DIVISION 40—PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS SLUICE GATES 40 05 59.20- 4 PIPING AND APPURTENANCES 40 23 10-26 MECHANICAL INSULATION 40 42 13- 5 CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION EQUIPMENT 40 70 00-11 DIVISION 41—MATERIAL PROCESSING AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT SHAFTLESS SCREW CONVEYORS 41 12 13- 9 HOISTS AND CRANES 41 22 23- 6 DIVISION 43—PROCESS GAS AND LIQUID HANDLING, PURIFICATION, AND STORAGE EQUIPMENT TRI-LOBE POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT BLOWERS 43 11 33- 8 PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS 43 23 57- 8 SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS 43 25 10- 9 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC CHEMICAL TANKS 43 41 45- 4 DIVISION 46—WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT MACERATORS 46 24 13- 6 POLYMER FEED EQUIPMENT 46 33 33- 6 CHEMICAL PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL EQUIPMENT (BID ALTERNATIVE NO. 2) 46 33 42- 5 SUBMERSIBLE MIXERS 46 41 23- 6 COARSE BUBBLE DIFFUSERS 46 51 21- 4 DEWATERING CENTRIFUGE EQUIPMENT 46 76 33-19 DRAWINGS STANDARD DETAIL—PIPE GATE 01-975- 30A STANDARD DETAIL—STORM SEWER MANHOLES AND INLETS 01-975- 41A STANDARD DETAIL—SANITARY SEWER APPURTENANCES 01-975- 43A STANDARD DETAIL—CURB RAMP AND TRUNCATED DOMES 01-975- 85A STANDARD DETAIL—STORM SEWER OUTFALL 01-975-149A STANDARD DETAIL—PROJECT SIGN LAYOUT 01-975-158A Section 00 01 10-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 — TABLE OF CONTENTS Continued Pages Through CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS GS-14 SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS SGS- 5 FORM OF CONTRACT C- 4 PERFORMANCE BOND PFB- 2 PAYMENT BOND PB- 3 APPENDICES (NOT PART OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS) GEOTECHNICAL REPORT 61 DRAWINGS OF PHYSICAL CONDITIONS (PROVIDED ELECTRONICALLY) 1970 SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANT IMPROVEMENTS PHASE IV 50 F.Y. 1989 WPCP PHASE I, CITY CONTRACT NO. 372 34 F.Y. 1990 WPCP SLUDGE DEWATERING IMPROVEMENTS, CITY CONTRACT NO. 388 23 F.Y. 1990 WPCP PHASE 1 - STEP 2 INTERMEDIATE CLARIFIER AND PUMP STATION, CITY CONTRACT NO. 387 34 F.Y. 1996 WATERLOO SATELLITE AND NEW ADMINISTRATION BUILDING WPCF, CITY CONTRACT NO. 486 224 F.Y. 1996 FLOW EQUALIZATION BASINS FOR WPCF, CITY CONTRACT NO. 499 40 F.Y. 1996 RAW WASTEWATER PUMP BUILDING FOR WPCF, CITY CONTRACT NO. 500 95 F.Y. 1996 BAR SCREEN BUILDING, CITY CONTRACT NO. 513 51 F.Y. 1998 EASTON AVENUE, CITY CONTRACT NO. 549 285 F.Y. 1998 ANAEROBIC DIGESTERS, CITY CONTRACT NO. 550 175 F.Y. 2007 ODOR CONTROL AND HVAC REPLACEMENT, CITY CONTRACT NO. 653 19 F.Y. 2011 DISINFECTION FACILITIES EASTON AVENUE, CITY CONTRACT NO. 817 66 F.Y. 2014 BELT FILTER PRESS ADDITION, CITY CONTRACT NO. 869 60 F.Y. 2016 FLOW EQUALIZATION FACILITY OVERFLOW CONNECTION TO SATELLITE WPCF, CITY CONTRACT NO. 880 15 F.Y. 2017 WPCF UPGRADE TO INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS SYSTEM, CITY CONTRACT NO. 929 8 END OF SECTION Section 00 01 10-7 4463.004/City Contract No.994 NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING ON PROPOSED PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, FORM OF CONTRACT, AND ESTIMATE OF COST FOR THE F.Y. 2020 WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT BIOSOLIDS MODIFICATIONS IN THE CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA CITY CONTRACT NO. 994 RECEIVING OF BIDS Sealed proposals will be received by the City Clerk of the City of Waterloo, Iowa, at her office in the City Hall of the said City on the 23rd day of January 2020, until 1 P.M. for the construction of the F.Y. 2020 Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids Modifications, City Contract No. 994 as described in detail in the plans and specifications now on file in the Office of the City Clerk. OPENING OF BIDS All proposals received will be opened in the First Floor Conference Room at City Hall, in the City of Waterloo, Iowa, on the 23rd day of January 2020, at 1 P.M., and the proposals will be acted upon at such later time and place as may then be fixed by the City Council. PUBLIC HEARING Notice is hereby given that the Council of said City will conduct a public hearing on the proposed plans, specifications, form of contract, and estimate of cost for the construction of the above-described improvement project at 5:30 P.M. on the 27th day of January 2020, said hearing to be held in the Harold E. Getty Council Chambers in City Hall in said City. The proposed plans, specifications, form of contract, and estimate of cost for said improvements heretofore prepared by the City Engineering Department are now on file in the office of the City Clerk for public examination and any person interested therein may file written objection thereto with the City Clerk before the date set for said hearing, or appear and make objection thereto with the City Clerk before the date set for said hearing, or appear and make objection thereto at the meeting above set forth. The NOTICE TO BIDDERS can be viewed at the following locations: 1) City of Waterloo web site at http://ci.waterloo.ia.us/ - 2) Plan rooms: Master Builders of Iowa 221 Park Street, PO Box 695 Des Moines, IA 50303 McGraw Hill Construction Dodge 3315 Central Ave. Hot Springs, AR 71913 Reed Construction Data 30 Technology Parkway South, Ste. 500 Norcross, GA 30092 NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING Section NPH-1 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 3) Plan Room Web sites: Master Builders of Iowa web site at www.mbionline.com Dodge Lead web site: http://dodgeprojects.construction.com/ Reed Const. Data Lead web site: http://www.cmdgroup.comiproject-leads/ SCOPE OF WORK The work shall include the following items: 1. This project is an upgrade to the biosolids processes at the City of Waterloo Wastewater Treatment Plant. This Work includes construction of a new centrate equalization tank; construction of new biosolids truck loading bays; construction of a new chemical storage building; modifications to existing tanks for waste activated sludge (WAS) and primary sludge storage; installation of new WAS pumps; installation of new primary sludge pumps; installation of new WAS storage blowers; installation of new WAS transfer pumps; installation of aeration piping and diffused air mixing system for WAS storage; installation of new gravity belt thickener (GBT) polymer systems; installation of new thickened WAS (TWAS) pumps; installation of new digester feed pumps and macerators; installation of new blended sludge tank mixers; installation of new chemical storage tanks and feed equipment; installation of new hot water boilers; installation of new biosolids dewatering feed pumps; installation of new dewatering centrifuges, installation of new shaftless screw conveyor system; installation of new dewatering polymer tanks and feed systems; installation of new centrate mixers and pumps; installation of new doors on several process buildings; miscellaneous site grading, piping, landscaping and paving work; heating ventilation and air condition work; interior process, plumbing and fire protection piping and appurtenances; interior painting and finishing work; electrical and controls work; and demolition work. Published pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 26 of the City Code of Iowa and upon order to the City Council of said Waterloo, Iowa, on the day of , CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA BY: City Clerk END OF SECTION ..- NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING Section NPH-2 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 NOTICE TO BIDDERS FOR THE TAKING OF CONSTRUCTION BIDS FOR THE F.Y. 2020 WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT BIOSOLIDS MODIFICATIONS IN THE CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA CITY CONTRACT NO. 994 RECEIVING OF BIDS Sealed proposals will be received by the City Clerk of the City of Waterloo, Iowa, at her office in the City Hall of the said City on the 23rd day of January 2020, until 1 P.M. for the construction of the F.Y. 2020 Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids Modifications, City Contract No. 994, as described in detail in the plans and specifications now on file in the Office of the City Clerk. OPENING OF BIDS All proposals received will be opened in the First Floor Conference Room at City Hall, in the City of Waterloo, Iowa, on the 23rd day of January 2020, at 1 P.M. and the proposals will be acted upon at such later time and place as may then be fixed by the City Council. PUBLIC HEARING The Council of said City will conduct a public hearing on the proposed plans, specifications, form of contract, and estimate of cost for the construction of the above-described improvement project at 5:30 P.M. on the 27th day of January 2020, said hearing to be held in the Harolc E. Getty Council Chambers in City Hall in said City. SCOPE OF WORK This project is an upgrade to the biosolids processes at the City of Waterloo Wastewater Treatment Plant. This Work includes construction of a new centrate equalization tank; construction of new biosolids truck loading bays; construction of a new chemical storage building; modifications to existing tanks for waste activated sludge (WAS) and primary sludge storage; installation of new WAS pumps; installation of new primary sludge pumps; installation of new WAS storage blowers; installation of new WAS transfer pumps; installation of aeration piping and diffused air mixing system for WAS storage; installation of new gravity belt thickener (GBT) polymer systems; installation of new thickened WAS (TWAS) pumps; installation of new digester feed pumps and macerators; installation of new blended sludge tank mixers; installation of new chemical storage tanks and feed equipment; installation of new hot water boilers; installation of new biosolids dewatering feed pumps; installation of new dewatering centrifuges, installation of new shaftless screw conveyor system; installation of new dewatering polymer tanks and feed systems; installation of new centrate mixers and pumps; installation of new doors on several process buildings; miscellaneous site grading, piping, landscaping and paving work; heating ventilation and air condition work; interior process, plumbing and fire protection piping and appurtenances; interior painting and finishing work; electrical and controls work; and demolition work. BEGINNING AND COMPLETION DATES The work under the proposed contract shall be commenced within ten (10) working days after receipt of "Notice to Proceed." Work will be substantially complete within 670 calendar days after the date when the Contract Time commences to run and will be completed and ready for final payment within 730 calendar days after the date when the Contract Time commences. NOTICE TO BIDDERS Section NB-1 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 METHOD OF PAYMENT TO CONTRACTOR The Contractor will be paid against monthly estimates in cash on the basis of ninety-five percent (95%) of the work as it is completed and materials delivered and work approved. Final payment will be made thirty-one (31) days after completion of the work and acceptance by the Council. Before final payment is made, vouchers showing that all subcontractors and workmen and all persons furnishing materials have been fully paid for such materials and labor will be required unless the City is satisfied that material, men and laborers have been paid. The Contractor is hereby notified that if the City does not have cash on hand to pay monthly pay estimates, according to Chapter 384.57 of the Code of Iowa, payment may be made by anticipatory warrants issued bearing a rate of interest not exceeding that permitted by Chapter 74A, Code of Iowa. PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS Plans and Specifications governing the construction of the proposed improvements have been prepared by Strand Associates, Inc.® (CONSULTANT), which plans and specifications and also the prior proceedings of the City Council referring to and defining said proposed improvements are hereby made a part of this notice, and the proposed contract by reference shall be executed in compliance therewith. Complete digital Project Bidding Documents are available at www.strand.com or at www.questcdn.com. Download the digital Bidding Documents by inputting Quest project number #6619042 on the website's Project Search page. Please contact QuestCDN.com at (952) 233-1632 or info@questcdn.com for assistance with free membership registration, downloading, and working with this digital project information. Optional paper copies of the Plans and Specifications are available from Strand Associates, Inc.®, 910 West Wingra Drive, Madison, WI 53715, upon the receipt of a $150 refundable deposit. Deposits will be refunded if the plans are returned in usable condition (i.e., generally free of highlights, ink markings, tears, stickers, water stains and soiling) to the Engineer's Office by the end of the 14th consecutive day after the project has been awarded. No deposits will be refunded for any requests or plans received after the 14th consecutive day, which includes plans returned via mail service. Plan holders are responsible for ascertaining when the project has been awarded. If the plan holder is the prime contractor or a subcontractor or supplier of the prime contractor that has been awarded the project, Plans and Specifications do not need to be returned to receive the deposit. The prime contractor must submit a list of its subcontractors and suppliers for the City and consulting engineer to verify eligibility for the refundable deposit. All Bidders submitting a sealed Bid shall obtain the Bidding Documents from QuestCDN.com or from Strand Associates, Inc.® Bidders who submit a Bid must be a Plan Holder of record at the Issuing Office. Bids from Bidders who are not on the Plan Holders List may be returned as not being responsive. Plan Holders are requested to provide an e-mail address if they wish to receive addenda and other information electronically. Plan Holders are requested to designate whether they are a prime contractor, subcontractor, or supplier if they want this information posted on the project Plan Holders List. The City has the right to reject any bids that do not have current bidding documents included in the Bid submission. Upon award of project, the prime contractor, its subcontractors and suppliers shall be supplied with the needed number of plans and specifications at no additional cost. NOTICE TO BIDDERS Section NB-2 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 CONTRACT AWARD A contract will be awarded to the qualified bidder submitting the lowest bid with any combination of bid alternatives selected by the City. The City reserves the right to reject any or all bids, re-advertise for new bids, and to waive informalities in the bids submitted that might be in the best interest of the City. Bids may be held by the City of Waterloo, Iowa, for a period not to exceed thirty (30) days from the day of the opening of bids for the purpose of reviewing the bids and investigating the qualifications of Bidders, prior to awarding the contract. By virtue of statutory authority, a preference will be given to products and provisions grown and coal produced with the State of Iowa and preference will be given to local domestic labor n the construction of the improvement. PROPOSALS SUBMITTED The Bidder shall submit bids on the items listed in the proposal. The bidder shall clearly write or type the lump sum in numerals on the blanks provided. BID SECURITY REQUIRED All bids must be accompanied in a separate envelope by a certified or cashier's check drawn on an Iowa bank, or a bank chartered under the laws of the United States, a certified share draft drawn on a credit union in Iowa or chartered under the laws of the United States, or bid bond, (on the form furnished by the City) payable to the City of Waterloo, Iowa, in the sum of not less than five percent (5%) of the bid submitted, which certified check, certified share draft or bid bond will be held as security that the Bidder will enter into a Contract for the construction of the work and will furnish the required bonds, and in case the successful Bidder shall fail or refuse to enter into the Contract and furnish the — required bonds, Bidder's bid security may be retained by said City as agreed upon licuidated damages. If bid bond is used, it must be signed by both the Bidder and the surety or surety's agent. Signature of surety's agent must be supported by accompanying Power of Attorney. PERFORMANCE & PAYMENT BONDS The successful Bidder will be required to furnish a "Performance Bond" and a "Payment Bond" within ten (10) days after forms are presented to Bidder in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the contract price, said bond to be issued by a responsible surety approved by the City Council and shall guarantee the faithful performance of the contract and the terms and conditions therein contained, and shall guarantee the prompt payment of all materials and labor and protect and save harmless the City from claims of any kind caused by the operations of the contractor. MAINTENANCE BOND Before the Contractor shall be entitled to receive final payment for work done under this contract, it shall execute and file a bond in the penal sum of not less than 100% of the total amount of the contract, same to be known as "Maintenance Bond," and which bond must be approved by the City Council, and which bond is in addition to the bond given by the Contractor to guarantee the completion of the work. NOTICE TO BIDDERS Section NB-3 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 CONTRACT COMPLIANCE PROGRAM / SUBCONTRACTING The program proposes numerical projections regarding utilization of Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) and Women Business Enterprise (WBE) as Subcontractors, vendors and suppliers in the performance of Contracts awarded by the City of Waterloo, Iowa. — A goal of at least ten percent (10%) for MBE participation on all City funded construction projects that are estimated at $50,000.00 or more. A goal of at least two percent (2%) for WBE participation on all City funded construction projects that are estimated at $50,000.00 or more. Any project funded in part or in total with federal funds shall follow the respective agencies contract compliance program and goals. The Prime Contractor shall make "good-faith efforts" to meet the Contract Compliance MBE/WBE goals. The MBE/WBE subcontractors, suppliers or vendors must provide the Prime Contractor a reasonably competitive price for the service being rendered or the Contractor is not required to accept their bid. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES Time is an essential element of this contract. It is important that the work be diligently pursued to completion. If the work is not completed within the specified contract period plus authorized extensions, the contractor shall pay to the City Liquidated Damages in the amount of two thousand dollars ($2,000) per day, for each day, as further described herein in excess of the authorized time. Days beyond the specified completion date for which Liquidated Damages will be charged will be working days that the contractor does, or could have worked, from Monday through Saturday. Sundays will be counted only if work is performed. Partial working days will be considered as a full working day. Days not chargeable for Liquidated Damages will include rain days, Sunday if no work is done, and legal holidays. Working days will cease to be charged when only punch list items remain to be completed. Punch list items do not include contract bid items or approved change/extra work orders. When the Contractor believes the project to be substantially completed, a written notice stating the same shall be submitted to the Engineer and a request made for a Punch List. If the work under the Contract extends beyond the normal construction season for such work the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer in writing a request that working days counted toward the project be suspended until work is resumed the following construction season. This amount is not construed as a penalty. These damages are for the cost to the City of providing the required additional inspection, engineering and contract administration. PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE Before the work is commenced on this contract, a conference shall be held for the purpose of discussing the contract. The conference shall be attended by the prime contractor, subcontractors and City Officials. BIDDER STATUS Attention of Bidders is called to compliance with the provisions of the Resident Bidder/Non-Resident Bidder requirements. Each Bidder submitting a bid shall execute and include with the bid, a Bidder Status Form in the form herein provided. NOTICE TO BIDDERS Section NB-4 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 Failure to submit a fully completed Bidder Status Form with the bid may result in the oid being deemed nonresponsive and rejected. SALES TAX EXEMPTION CERTIFICATES Contractors and approved subcontractors will be provided a Sales Tax Exemption Certification to purchase building materials or supplies in the performance of construction contracts let by the City of Waterloo. PROJECT CONTACT The Strand Associates, Inc.® project contact is Sam Hocevar and can be contacted at Strand Associates, Inc.®, 910 West Wingra Drive, Madison, WI 53715, (608) 251-4843 regarding the project. All bidding-related questions are to be submitted via e-mail to sam.hocevarstrand.com. Posted pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 26 of the City Code of Iowa. CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA END OF SECTION NOTICE TO BIDDERS Section NB-5 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. EXPLANATIONS TO BIDDERS Any explanation desired by a bidder regarding the meaning or interpretation of the Notice to Bidders, Plans, Specifications, etc., must be requested in writing and with sufficient time allowed for a reply to reach Bidders before submission of their bids. Any interpretation made will be in the form of an amendment of the Notice to Bidders, Plans, Specifications, etc., and will be furnished to all prospective bidders. Its receipt by the Bidder must be acknowledged in the space provided on the Proposal Form or by letter or telegram received before the time set for opening of bids. Oral explanations or instructions given before the award of the contract will not be binding. 2. EXAMINATION OF PROPOSED WORK Bidders should visit the site and take such other steps as may be reasonably necessary to ascertain the nature and location of the work, and the general and local conditions which can affect the work or the cost thereof. Failure to do so will not relieve Bidders from responsibility for estimating properly the difficulty or cost of successfully performing the work. The owner will assume no responsibility for any understanding or representation concerning conditions made by any of its officers or agents prior to the execution of the contract, unless included in the Notice to Bidders, the Specifications or related documents. 3. PREPARATION OF BIDS a. Bids shall be submitted on the forms furnished, or copies thereof, and must be manually signed. If erasures or other changes appear on the forms, each erasure or change must be initialed by the person signing the bid. The Bidder has the option to submit a computer-generated spreadsheet in lieu of the portion of the Form of Bid or Proposal, which includes the Bid Item Number, Description, Unit, Estimated Quantity, Unit Bid Price, Total Bid Price, and Total Bid. The computer-generated spreadsheet shall include all of the information listed in that portion of the Form of Bid or Proposal as well as bear the signature of the Prime Contractor submitting the bid. For the Bidders who submit a computer-generated spread-sheet, the TOTAL BID (with alternatives, if applicable) shall also be indicated in the space(s) provided on the Form of Bid or Proposal. b. The Bid Form may provide for submission of a price or prices for ore or more items, which may be lump sum bids, alternate prices, schedule items resulting in a bid on a unit -- of construction or a combination thereof, etc. When the Bid Form exp icitly requires that the Bidder bid on all items, failure to do so will disqualify the bid. When submission of a price on all items is not required, Bidders should insert the words "no bid" in the space provided for any item on which no price is submitted. c. Unless called for, alternate bids will not be considered. d. Modifications of bids already submitted will be considered if received at the office designated in the Notice to Bidders by the time set for closing of bids. Telegraphic modifications will be considered, but should not reveal the amount of the original or revised bid. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Section IB-1 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 e. In preparing its bid, the Bidder shall specify the price, written legibly in ink or with the typewriter, at which Bidder proposes to do each item of work. The unit price shall be stated in figures in the blank space provided (i.e., $7.14). In items where unit price is required, the total amount of each item shall be computed at the unit prices bid for the quantities given on the Bid Form and stated in figures in the blank space provided. If the Bidder chooses to submit the unit prices, total bid price, and total bid on a computer-generated spreadsheet, all numbers shall be easily legible. f. Any changes or alterations made in the Bid Form, or any addition thereto, may cause the rejection of the bid. No bid will be considered which contains a clause in which the contractor reserves the right to accept or reject a contract awarded to contractor by the City Council of Waterloo. Bids in which the unit prices are obviously unbalanced may be rejected. g. If the Bidder does not qualify as a resident Bidder, the nonresident Bidder shall specify on the project proposal whether any preference to resident Bidders, including but not limited to any preference to Bidders, the imposition of any type of labor force preference, or any other form of preferential treatment to Bidders or laborers from that state or foreign country is in effect in the nonresident Bidder's state or country of domicile at the time of a bid submittal. 4. SUBMISSION OF BIDS a. A bid must be sealed in a separate envelope and marked to indicate its contents and be accompanied by the bid security in a separate envelope. If forwarded by mail, the two envelopes shall be placed in a third and mailed to the City Clerk/Auditor. All bids must be filed with the City Clerk/Auditor of the City of Waterloo at their office in the City Hall before the time specified for closing bids. b. Bids received prior to the advertised hour of opening will be securely kept sealed. The officer whose duty it is to open them will decide when the specified time has arrived, and no bid received thereafter will be considered; except that when a bid arrives by mail after the time fixed for opening, but before the reading of all other bids is completed, and it is shown to the satisfaction of the City of Waterloo, Iowa, that the non-arrival on time was due solely to delay in the mails for which the Bidder was not responsible, such bid will be received and considered. c. Bidders are cautioned that, while telegraphic modifications of bids may be received as provided above, such modifications, if not explicit and if in any sense subject to misinterpretation, shall made the bid so modified or amended, subject to rejection. 5. LATE BIDS AND MODIFICATIONS OR WITHDRAWALS Bids and modifications or withdrawals thereof received at the office designated in the Notice to Bidders after the exact time set for closing of bids will not be considered. However, a modification which is received from an otherwise successful Bidder, and which makes the terms of the bid more favorable to the City of Waterloo, will be considered at any time it is received and may therefore be accepted. Bids may be withdrawn by written or telegraphic request received from Bidders prior to the time set for closing of bids. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Section IB-2 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 6. PUBLIC OPENING OF BIDS Bids will be publicly opened at that time and place set for opening in the Notice to Bidders. Their content will be made public for the information of Bidders and others interested who may be present either in person or by representative. 7. BID SECURITY REQUIRED All bids must be accompanied in a separate envelope by a certified or cashier's check drawn on an Iowa bank or a bank chartered under the laws of the United States, a certified share draft drawn on a credit union in Iowa or chartered under the laws of the United States, or bid bond (on the form furnished by the City) payable to the City of Waterloo, Iowa, in the sum of not less than five percent (5%) of the bid submitted, which certified check, certified share draft or bid bond will be held as security that the Bidder will enter into a Contract for the construction of the work and will furnish the required bonds, and in case the successful Bidder shall fail or refuse to enter into the Contract and furnish the required bond, Bidder's bid security may be retained by said City as agreed upon liquidated damages. If bid bond is used, it must be signed by both the Bidder and the surety or surety's agent. Signature of surety's agent must be supported by accompanying Power of Attorney. 8. COLLUSIVE AGREEMENTS a. Each Bidder submitting a bid shall execute and include with the bid. a Non-Collusion Affidavit in the form herein provided, to the effect that Bidder has not colluded with any other person, firm, or corporation in regard to any bid submitted. b. Each Bidder submitting a bid shall have each proposed subcontractor, if any, execute and submit to the City Contract Compliance Officer by 5 P.M. the business day following the day bids on this project are due, a Non-Collusion Affidavit it the form herein provided, to the effect that Bidder has not colluded with any othe- person, firm, or corporation in regard to any bid submitted. Before executing any subcontract, the successful Bidder shall submit the name of any proposed subcontractor for approval by the City. 9. MINORITY AND/OR WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISE SUBCONTRACTORS a. CITY OF WATERLOO AND/OR WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISE PRE-BID CONTACT INFORMATION FORM The City of Waterloo Minority and/or Women Business Enterprise Pre-Bid Contact Information Form shall be submitted with the Form of Bid or Proposa . Failure to do so shall be grounds for the bid being rejected if subcontracting is proposed by the prime contractor. 10. MBE/WBE CONTRACT COMPLIANCE PROGRAM PURPOSE The purpose of the Contract Compliance Program (hereinafter called program) is to act as an impetus for increasing the participation of minority and women disadvantaged business enterprise (MBE/WBE) in City awarded construction contracts. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Section IB-3 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 The Program does not propose to eliminate any bonafide contractor or subcontractor from bidding on City contracts, but it will hopefully serve as a needed stimulus to help local MBE/WBE's grow and eventually become mainstream contractors and subcontractors. This Contract Compliance Program does not propose to include any set-aside or quotas, but only flexible goals where "good-faith efforts" are required by the contractor to use MBE/WBE subcontractors. This Program shall not eliminate the need for contractors to continue their "good-faith efforts" in using MBE/WBE subcontractors on City contracts estimated at less than $50,000. The City of Waterloo will make every effort to reduce in-house construction and maintenance work that would be more cost effectively performed by the private sector and, thus, would allow additional bidding opportunities for MBE/WBE firms. The City Contract Compliance Officer shall be advised of all City of Waterloo awarded construction contracts. DEFINITIONS Goals: A flexible numerically expressed objective which contractors are required to make "good-faith efforts." The key to the requirement is to make documented efforts. Goals are neither set-a-sides nor a device to achieve proportional representation or equal results. Numerical goals do not create set-a-sides for specific groups, nor are they designed to achieve proportional representation or equal results. Rather, the goal-setting process in affirmative action planning is used to target and measure the effectiveness of affirmative action efforts to eradicate and prevent discrimination. Quota: A flat numerical requirement that the contractor is required to meet in order to obtain the benefit or be in compliance. The numerical goal component of affirmative action programs is not designed to be, nor may it properly or lawfully be interpreted as, permitting unlawful preferential treatment and quotas with respect to persons of any race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. The regulations at 41 CFR 60-2.12(a), 60-2.15 and 60-2.30, specifically prohibit discrimination and the use of goals as quotas. (U.S. Department of Labor) Set-Aside: An arrangement in which a particular contract is reserved for competition solely among minority and women business enterprises. Contractor. As used in this document means contractor, subcontractor, supplier, vendor, and professional service provider. Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) Any business, which is at least 51%, owned by one or more minorities and whose management and daily business operations are controlled by one or more such individuals and is on the current State Unified Certification List, or were listed on the City INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Section IB-4 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 of Waterloo Certified MBE/WBE Contractors list as of July 1, 2002. Women Business Enterprise (WBE): Any business which is at least 51% owned by one or more women and whose management and daily business operations are controlled by one or more such individuals and is on the current State Unified Certification List, or were listed on the City of Waterloo Certified MBE/WBE Contractors list as of July 1, 2002. Minority: Any person or persons who are considered as socially and economically disadvantaged because of their identity as a group member without regard to their individual qualities. The groups include: Black American, Hispanic American, Native Americans, Eskimos, Aleuts, and Asian-Pacific Americans. 13 C.F.R. 124-1.1(c)(3)(ii)(1983). Lowest Responsible Bidder: Bidder who has offered the lowest bid and who has exhibited skill relative to the type of work bid on, judgment, financial responsibility, and evidence of working with the Affirmative Action Employment Program and the Contract Compliance Program. Broker: One buying or selling for others on commission or other fee basis without maintaining a warehouse or other similar inventory storage facility. Good Faith Efforts: The successful Bidder shall be selected on the basis of having submitted the lowest — responsible bid. The obligation of the Bidder is to make good faith efforts. The Bidder can demonstrate that it has done so by the following: _ 1. The Prime Contractor met the project goal - No action necessary. 2. If the Prime Contractor failed to meet the goal, they must submit documentation of good faith efforts. CONTRACT COMPLIANCE PROGRAM SUBCONTRACTING The program proposes numerical projections or goals regarding utilization of Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) and Women Business Enterprise (WBE) as subcontractors in the performance of contracts awarded by the City of Waterloo, Iowa. A goal of at least 10% for MBE participation on all City funded construction projects that are estimated at $50,000 or more and projects under $50,000 where applicable at the Contract Compliance Officer's discretion. There is at least 2% WBE goal on City funded projects. Any project which is funded solely or in part with Federal funds shall follow the respective agencies contract compliance program and goals. Any project which is funded solely or in part with State funds shall follow the respective agencies contract compliance program and goals. The City of Waterloo Contract Compliance Program is for City awarded construction contracts only. The prime contractor shall make "good-faith efforts" to meet the Contract Compliance MBE/WBE goals. The MBE/WBE subcontracts must provide the prime contractor a reasonably competitive price for the service being rendered or the contractor is not required to accept the bid. Administrative Reconsideration: INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Section IB-5 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 As part of this reconsideration, the Bidder will have the opportunity to provide written documentation or arguments concerning the issue of whether they made adequate good faith efforts to meet the goals. The Bidder will have the opportunity to meet in person with the City of Waterloo's Administrative Reconsideration Committee to discuss the issue of whether they made adequate good faith efforts. The Administrative Reconsideration Committee will forward a written decision on reconsideration to the Mayor and City Council, explaining the basis for finding that the Bidder did or did not meet the goal or make adequate good faith efforts to do so. Documentation required will include but is not limited to the following: * Making portions of the work available for MBE/WBE subcontracting. * Evidence of negotiating with MBE/WBE firms. * MBE/WBE quotes obtained and non-MBE/WBE quotes used. * Reasons agreements were not reached. * Follow-up after initial solicitations. * Efforts to assist in obtaining equipment, supplies and materials (at competitive prices), bonding, lines of credit, insurance, etc. * Evidence of past compliance or non-compliance by same contractor. The Contract Compliance Officer will determine the weight to be given to each item listed above (supported by appropriate documentation) based on overall program goals. RESPONSIBILITIES City of Waterloo A. The City Contract Compliance Officer has the responsibility to assure the City's compliance with Federal, State and Municipal regulations. B. The City Contract Compliance Officer is responsible for maintaining a current directory of certified firms. Certification of MBE/WBE/DBE contractors is through the Iowa Department of Transportation and its Unified Certification Program. Only firms certified based on guidelines prescribed in 49 CFR Part 26 and provisions of this agreement, shall be recognized as certified by the City of Waterloo. C. The City Contract Compliance Officer is responsible for making available a list of future project information notices to MBE/WBE firms. D. The City Contract Compliance Officer shall send notices to appropriate MBE/WBE firms in the directory of each bid solicitation with opening date. E. The City Contract Compliance Officer will receive MBE/WBE Letter(s) of Intent to — Bid and within two (2) business days forward the complete list of MBE/WBE bidders who submitted a Letter of Intent to Bid to prime contractors. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Section IB-6 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 Prime Contractors In order to be in compliance with the guidelines of this program, the prime contractor must show good-faith efforts in following the MBE/WBE Contract Compliance Program. Good-faith efforts include, but are not limited to, the following: A. Prime contractors shall send solicitation letters (Form CCO-3) to appropriate MBE/WBE (those certified in directory prepared by City Contract Compliance Officer) at least seven (7) working days prior to bid date. Letters should identify specific items to be subcontracted. A minimum of three (3) disadvantaged business contacts must be made and documented, if there are at least three disadvantaged businesses offering services in the area to be subcontracted (See City of Waterloo MBE/WBE Certification List). If less than three (3) are offering the services to be subcontracted, then a contact is required for any that are listed as providing that service. If the Prime Contractor submits a MBE/WBE contact not on the City's MBE/WBE list, attach a copy of the MBE/WBE/DBE Certifications from another government agency. B. If a prime contract Bidder is unable to identify MBE/WBE firms to perform portions of the work, the City Contract Compliance Officer should be contacted for assistance immediately. C. Prime contract Bidders may solicit MBE/WBE proposals by telephone or personal interviews, but all such contacts shall be confirmed by Certified Mail, or subcontract bid request forms (Form CCO-2). D. If any MBE/WBE business submitting bids is not selected for subcontract award, documentation must accompany the "MBE/WBE Business Enterprise Pre-Bid Contact Information Form" (Form CCO-4 and CCO-4A) on why the MBE/WBE was not selected. These reasons could include: a. Not low bid. Copies of the competing bids may be required for verification. b. MBE/WBE did not bid, withdrew bid or non-responsive. c. Documentation of other business-related reason for not selecting the MBE/WBE business for a subcontract. d. Prime contractor self performs work. e. Any other reason relied on by prime. The Contract Compliance Officer will determine the weight to be given to each item listed above (supported by appropriate documentation) based on overall program goals. MBE/WBE Firms A. MBE/WBE firms shall be certified by the Iowa Department of Transportation as owners and controllers of their respective businesses, or were listed on the City of Waterloo Certified MBE/WBE Contractors list as of July 1, 2002. B. MBE/WBE firms must perform the work on the project; they cannot act as a broker by subcontracting the work out to others. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Section IB-7 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 C. Each MBE/WBE firm planning to submit quotes on construction projects with goals, shall submit a Letter of Intent to Bid (Form CCO-5) to the City Contract Compliance Officer seven (7) working days prior to bid opening, listing specific items which the MBE/WBE firm is interested in bidding. If sufficient Letters of Intent to Bid are not received by the City Contract Compliance Officer seven (7) working days prior to bid opening, goals on subject project will be reduced accordingly. Agreements between the Bidder/proposer and a MBE/WBE in which the MBE/WBE promises not to provide subcontracting quotations to other Bidders/proposers are prohibited. NON-COMPLIANCE OF CONTRACTORS A. Noncompliance exists when the contractor's actions are not consistent with the requirements of the Contract Compliance Program in the areas of employment and subcontracting. B. A Bidder's failure to show good-faith efforts to meet project goals or a failure to use certified MBE/WBE firms may be grounds for finding its bid not responsible. C. The Contract Compliance Officer shall submit to City Council his/her recommendation on any non-compliant contract in writing. NOTICE TO PROCEED Notice to proceed on any project with goals will not be issued until City Contract Compliance Officer determines the lowest responsible Bidder has used good-faith efforts to comply with this Compliance Program and the bid was responsive. CONCLUSION This program repeals or revises all sections of previous Waterloo Contract Compliance Programs. 11. EMPLOYMENT AND BUSINESS OPPORTUNITY To the greatest extent feasible, suppliers, subcontractors, and low income workers owning businesses or living in the Waterloo area must be given priority in supplying materials, bidding for subcontract work, or applying for employment by the contractor on this project. Opportunities for training and for employment arising in connection with this project, shall to the greatest extent feasible be made available to lower income persons residing in the project area. The contract area is the City of Waterloo. The City of Waterloo will require the contractor to document its efforts in securing lower income workers living in the project area and in purchasing supplies from, and awarding subcontracts to, businesses owned by persons residing in the project area. 12. STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS Each Bidder shall, upon request of the City of Waterloo, Iowa, submit on the form furnished for that purpose (a copy of which is included in the contract documents), a statement of Bidder's qualifications, Bidder's experience record in constructing the type of improvements embraced, and Bidder's organization and equipment available for the work contemplated; and, when INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Section IB-8 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 specifically requested, a detailed financial statement. The City of Waterloo, Icwa, shall have the right to take such steps as it deems necessary to determine the ability of the Bidder to perform their obligations under the contract, and the Bidder shall furnish the City of Waterloo, Iowa, all such information and data for this purpose as it may request. The right is reserved to reject any bid where an investigation of the available evidence or information does not satisfy the City of Waterloo, Iowa, that the Bidder is qualified to carry out properly the terms of the contract. 13. AWARD OF CONTRACT a. Award of contract will be made to that responsive and responsible Bidder whose bid, conforming to the Specifications, is most advantageous to the City of Waterloo; price and other factors considered. The intention is to award the contract at the time of opening bids, but the right is reserved to postpone such action for a reasonable time, not exceeding thirty (30) days. b. The City Council may, when in its interest, reject any or all bids or waive any informality in bids received. c. The Bidder shall submit bids on all the items listed in the proposal and shall state the unit bid price in words in the blank spaces provided beneath the item description. Should there be any discrepancy between the unit bid price in words and listed numeral unit bid price, the City of Waterloo shall consider the unit bid price in words as being the valid unit bid price. A computer-generated spreadsheet as herein provided shall also be acceptable. Proposals requiring mathematical computations to determine unit prices or totals will be rejected. A contract will be awarded to the qualified Bidder submitting the lowest total bid for the BASE BID plus ALTERNATE(S) chosen by the City as indicated in the NOTICE TO BIDDERS. d. When a contract for a public improvement is to be awarded to the lowest responsive and responsible Bidder, a resident Bidder shall be allowed a preference as against a nonresident Bidder from a state or foreign country if that state or foreign country gives or requires any preference to Bidders from that state or foreign country including but not limited to any preference to Bidders, the imposition of any type of labor force preference, or any other form of preferential treatment to Bidders or laborers from that state or foreign country. The preference allowed shall be equal to the preference given or required by the state or foreign country in which the nonresident Bidder is a resident. In the instance of a resident labor force preference, a nonresident Bidder shall apply the same resident labor force preference to a public improvement in this state as would be required in the construction of a public improvement by the state or foreign country in which the nonresident Bidder is a resident. 14. EXECUTION OF AGREEMENT, BONDS, AND CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE a. Subsequent to the award and within ten (10) days after the prescribed forms are presented for signature, the successful Bidder shall execute and deliver to the City of Waterloo, Iowa, an agreement in the form included in the contract documents in such number of copies as the City of Waterloo, Iowa, may require. b. Having satisfied all conditions of award as set forth elsewhere in these documents, the successful Bidder shall, within the period specified in paragraph "a' above, furnish a surety bond and a payment bond in a penal sum not less than the amount of the contract as awarded, as security for the faithful performance of the contract and terms and INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Section IB-9 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 conditions therein contained and shall guarantee the prompt payment of all persons, firms, or corporations to whom the contractor may become legally indebted for labor, materials, tools, equipment, or services of any nature including utility and transportation services, employed or used by him in performing the work. The bonds shall protect and save harmless the City from claims and damages of any kind caused by the operations of the contractor and shall also guarantee the maintenance of the contract improvements for the period stated in the Notice of Hearing from and after completion of said improvements and their acceptance by the City. Such bonds shall be in the same form as that included in the contract documents and shall bear the same date as, or a date subsequent to that of the agreement. The current Power of Attorney for the person who signs for any surety company shall be attached to such bonds. c. The successful Bidder shall, within the period specified in paragraph "a" above, furnish a certificate of insurance for approval in amounts of not less than the amounts specified in the General Specifications for Construction, Section F. No. 4 "Liability Insurance." The certificate of insurance shall be furnished in such number of copies as the City of Waterloo may require. The City of Waterloo shall be named as an "Additional Insured." The contractor shall similarly submit its subcontractor's certificates of insurance in the amounts for approval before each commences work. The contractor shall carry or require that there be Workmen's Compensation Insurance for all their employees and those of its subcontractors engaged in work at the site, in accordance with State Workmen's Compensation Laws. d. The failure of the successful Bidder to execute such agreement and to supply the required bond or bonds within ten (10) days after the prescribed forms are presented for signature, or within such extended period as the City of Waterloo, Iowa, may grant, based upon reasons determined sufficient by the City of Waterloo, Iowa, may either award the contract to the next lowest Bidder or re-advertise for bids, and may charge against the Bidder the difference between the amount of the bid in the amount for which a contract for the work is subsequently executed, irrespective of whether the amount thus due exceeds the amount of the bid guaranty. If a more favorable bid is received by re-advertising, the defaulting Bidder shall have no claim against the City of Waterloo, Iowa, for a refund. 15. BIDDER STATUS Attention of Bidders is called to the requirement of complying with the provisions of the Resident Bidder/Non-Resident Bidder requirement. Each Bidder submitting a bid shall execute and include with the bid, a Bidder Status Form in the form herein provided. Failure to submit a fully completed Bidder Status Form with the bid may result in the bid being deemed nonresponsive and rejected. 16. OPINION OF PROBABLE COST The opinion of probable cost for the Project as of December 1, 2019 is $16,275,000. END OF SECTION INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Section IB-10 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 — SRF Required Front-End Specifications This packet includes the special requirements that apply only to projects — subject to "American Iron and Steel" requirements enacted by Congress on January 17, 2014. Please consult with the DNR Project Manager to determine if the AIS requirements apply. If not, Attachment 9 may be removed. Attachment 1: Certification of Non-Segregated Facilities Form (to be completed and signed by Prime Contractor and submitted with the bid) — Attachment 2: Statement in Advertisement for Bids on Debarment and Suspension/Certification Regarding Debarment and — Suspension Form (to be completed and signed by Prime Contractor and submitted with the bid) — Attachment 3: Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Certification Form (to be completed and signed by Prime Contractor and submitted with the bid) -- Attachment 4: DBE Program Subcontractor Performance Form (to be completed and signed by Prime and DBE Subcontractor for each subcontract and submitted with the bid) Attachment 5: DBE Program Subcontractor Utilization Form (to be completed and signed by Prime Contractor and submitted with the bid) Attachment 6: DBE Program Subcontractor Participation Form (for voluntary use of DBEs) — Attachment 7: Other Federal Requirements Language A. Standard Equal Employment Opportunity Specifications B. Federal Labor Standards Provisions (including Davis-Bacon — prevailing wage rates) C. Preservation of Open Competition and Government Neutrality D. Historical and Archeological Finds — E. Prohibitions on Procurement from Violating Facilities Attachment 8: Right of Entry and Records Retention — Attachment 9: Use of American Iron and Steel Please note: The Davis Bacon wage determination received from the Iowa Finance Authority must also be included in the front-end specifications. — STATE REVOLVING FUND Section SRF-1 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 Attachment 1 SRF Required Front-End Specifications (This form must be completed and signed by Prime Contractor and submitted with the bid.) U.S. Environmental Protection Agency Certification of Non-Segregated Facilities (Applicable to contracts, subcontracts, and agreements with applicants who are themselves performing Federally assisted construction contracts, exceeding $10,000 which are not exempt from the provisions of the Equal Opportunity clause.) By the submission of this bid, the bidder, offeror, applicant, or subcontractor certifies that he does not maintain or provide for his employees any segregated facilities at any of his establishments, and that he does not permit his employees to perform their services at any location, under his control, where segregated facilities are maintained. He certifies further that he will not maintain or provide for his employees any segregated facilities at any of his establishments, and that he will not permit his employees to perform their services at any location, under his control, where segregated facilities are maintained. The bidder offeror, applicant, or subcontractor agrees that a breach of this certification is a violation of the Equal Opportunity clause in this contract. As used in this certification, the term "segregated facilities" means any waiting rooms, work areas, restrooms and washrooms, restaurants and other eating areas, time clocks, locker rooms and other storage or dressing areas, parking lots. drinking fountains, recreation or entertainment areas, transportation, and housing facilities provided for employees which are segregated by explicit directive or are in fact segregated on the basis of race, creed, color, or national original, because of habit, local custom, or otherwise. He further agrees that (except where he has obtained identical certifications from proposed subcontractors for specific time periods) he will obtain identical certifications from proposed subcontractors prior to the award of subcontracts exceeding $10,000 which are not exempt from the provisions of the Equal Opportunity clause; that he will retain such certifications in his files; and that he will - forward the following notice to such proposed subcontractors (except where the p^oposed subcontractors have submitted identical certifications for specific time periods): NOTICE TO PROSPECTIVE SUBCONTRACTORS OF REQUIREMENT FOR CERTIFICATIONS OF NON-SEGREGATED FACILITIES _ A Certification of Non-segregated Facilities, as required by the May 9, 1967, order (33 F.R. 7808, May 28, 1968) on Elimination of Segregated Facilities, by the Secretary of Labor, must be submitted prior to the award of a subcontract exceeding $10,000 which is not exempt from the provisions of the Equal Opportunity clause. The certification may be submitted either for each subcontract or for all subcontracts during a period (i.e., quarterly, semiannually, or annually). Signature Date Name and Title of Signer (Please Type) NOTE: The penalty for making false statements in offers is prescribed in 18 U.S.C. 1001. EPA-7 5720-4.2 STATE REVOLVING FUND Section SRF-2 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 Attachment 2 SRF Required Front-End Specifications (This form must be completed and signed by the Prime Contractor and submitted with the bid.) Debarments and Suspensions Any bidder or equipment supplier whose firm or affiliate is listed in on the U.S. General Services Administration Excluded Parties List System web site at http://www.epls.gov/ will be prohibited from the bidding process. Anyone submitting a bid who is listed on this web site will be determined to be a non-responsive bidder in accordance with 40 CFR Part 31. United States Environmental Protection Agency Washington, DC 20430 Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, and Other Responsibility Matters The prospective participant certifies to the best of its knowledge and belief that it and the principals: (a) Are not presently debarred, suspended, proposed for debarment, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from covered transactions by any Federal department or agency; (b) Have not within a three year period preceding this proposal been convicted of or had a civil judgment rendered against them for commission o f fraud or a criminal offense in connection with obtaining, attempting to obtain, or performing a public (Federal, State, or local) transaction or contract under a public transaction: violation of Federal or State antitrust statutes or commission of embezzlement, theft, forgery, bribery, falsification or destruction of records, making false statements, or receiving stolen property; (c) Are not presently indicted for otherwise criminally or civilly charged by a government entity (Federal, State, or local) with commission of any of the offenses enumerated in paragraph (1) (b) of this certification; and (d) Have not within a three-year period preceding this application/proposal had one or more public transaction s (Federal, State, or local) terminated or cause or default. I understand that a false statement on this certification may be ground for rejection of this proposal or termination of the award. In addition, under 18 U SC Sec. 10 01, a false statement ma y result in a fine of up to $10,000 or imprisonment for up to 5 years, or both. Typed Name & Title of Authorized Representative Signature of Authorized Representative Date 7 I am unable to certify to the above statements. My explanation is attached. y- EPA Form 5700-49 (11-88) STATE REVOLVING FUND Section SRF-3 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 Attachment 3 SRF Required Front-End Specifications (This form must be completed and signed by Prime Contractor and submitted with the bid.) Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) Solicitation It is EPA's policy that recipients of EPA financial assistance through the State Revolving Fund programs award a "fair share" of subagreements to small, minority and women-owned businesses, collectively know as Disadvantaged Business Enterprises (DBEs). Iowa's Fair Share goals are: Minority-Owned Business Women-Owned Business Enterprise (MBE) Goal Enterprise (WBE) Goal Construction 1.7% 2.2% Supplies 0.6% 5.6% Services 2.5% 11.3% Goods/Equipment 2.5% 10.4% Average 1.8% 7.4% Only work performed by certified DBEs can be counted toward the goals. In Iowa DBEs must be certified through the Iowa Department of Transportation (IDOT). Information o'i certification requirements and a list of certified DBEs is on the IDOT website at http://www.iowadot.gov/contracts/contracts eeoaa.htm. Prime contractors' DBE requirements for SRF projects include: • Taking affirmative steps for DBE participation • Documenting the efforts and the proposed utilization of certified DBEs PROJECT INFORMATION SRF Applicant: Bidder: Address: Contact Person: Signature: Phone Number: E-Mail Address: Check if Prime Contractor is: n Minority-Owned 1 Women-Owned STATE REVOLVING FUND Section SRF-4 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 GOOD FAITH EFFORTS CHECKLIST Please complete the checklist to determine if you have complied with the requirenrent to make good faith efforts to ensure that certified DBEs have the opportunity to compete fc- procurements funded by EPA financial assistance funds. Bidders/offerers must rr ake good faith _ efforts prior to submission of bids/proposals. 1. Did you ensure that DBEs are made aware of contracting opportunities to the fullest extent practicable through outreach and recruitment activities? n Yes No 2. Did you make information on forthcoming opportunities available to DBEs and arrange time frames for contracts and establish delivery schedules, where the requirements pe-mit, in a way that encourages and facilitates participation by DBEs in the competitive process? This includes, whenever possible, posting solicitation for bids or proposals for a minimum of 30 c:alendar days before the bid or proposal closing date. n Yes n No 3. Did you consider in the contracting process whether firms competing for large contracts could subcontract with DBEs? This will include dividing total requirements, when economically feasible, into smaller tasks or quantities to permit maximum participation by DBEs in the competitive process. n Yes n No 4. Did you encourage contracting with a consortium of DBEs when a contract is too large for one of these firms to handle individually? ❑ Yes No 5. Did you use the services of the Small Business Administration and the Minority Business Development Agency of the Department of Commerce to identify potential subcor tractors? 7 Yes 7 No 6. List the potential DBE subcontractors that were contacted. Only list those that are certified through the Iowa Department of Transportation. Name How Contacted Response (e.g did not respond, (e.g. letter, phone not interested, not competitive) call, fax, e-mail) PROPOSED UTILIZATION OF DBE SUBCONTRACTORS Please include Attachments 4 and 5 to document the proposed utilization of certified DBE subcontractors. _ STATE REVOLVING FUND Section SRF-5 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION PROVISIONS Several contract provisions are required to prevent unfair practices that adversely affect DBEs. These include: 1. Prime Contractor must pay its Subcontractor for satisfactory performance no more than 30 days from the Prime Contractor's receipt of payment from the SRF loan recipient. 2. Prime Contractor must notify the SRF loan recipient in writing prior to terminat on of a DBE subcontractor for convenience. 3. Prime Contractor must employ the six Good Faith Efforts to solicit a replacement subcontractor if a DBE subcontractor fails to complete work under a subcontract for any reason. STATE REVOLVING FUND Section SRF-6 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 Attachment 4 SRF Required Front-End Specifications (This form must be completed and signed by Prime and DBE Subcontractor for each subcontract and submitted with the bid.) OMB Control No: 2090-0030 Approved 8/13/2013 Approval Expires 8/31/2015 United States Environmental Protection Agency Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Program DBE Subcontractor Performance Form This form is intended to capture the DBE' subcontractor's2 description of work to be performed and the price of the work submitted to the prime contractor. An EPA Financial Assistance Agreement recipient must require its prime contractor to have its DBE subcontractors complete this form and include all completed forms in the prime contractor's bid or proposal package. Subcontractor Name Project Name Bid/Proposal No. Assistance Agreement ID No. Pain' of Contact (if known) Address Telephone No. Email Address Prime Contractor Name Issuing/Funding Entity Contract Item Description of Work Submitted to the Prime Contractor Involving Pri ;e of Work Submitted to Number Construction, Services, Equipment or Supplies :he Prime Contractor DBE Certified by DOT SBA Meets/exceeds EPA certification stan lards? Other: YES NO Jnknown 'A DBE is a Disadvantaged, Minority, or Woman Business Enterprise that has been certified by an entity fron which EPA accepts certification as described in 40 CFR 33.204-33.205 or certified by EPA. EPA accepts certifications from entit es that meet or exceed EPA certification standards as described in 40 CFR 33.202. 2Subcontractor is defined as a company, firm,joint venture, or individual who enters into an agreement with E contractor to provide services pursuant to an EPA award of financial assistance. EPA Form 6100-3 (DBE Subcontractor Performance Form) — Page 1 STATE REVOLVING FUND Section SRF-7 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 OMB Control No: 2090-0030 Approved 8/13/2013 Approval Expires 8/31/2015 United States Environmental Protection Agency Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Program DBE Subcontractor Performance Form I certify under penalty of perjury that the forgoing statements are true and correct. Signing this forni does not signify a commitment to utilize the subcontractors above. I am aware of that in the event of a replacement )f a subcontractor, I will adhere to the replacement requirements set forth in 40 CFR Part 33 Section 33.302 (c). — Prime Contractor Signature Print Name Title Date Subcontractor Signature Print Name Title Date The public reporting and recordkeeping burden for this collection of information is estimated to average three (3) hours per response. Send comments on the Agency's need for this information, the accuracy of the provided burden estimates, and any suggested methods for minimizing respondent burden, including through the use of automated collection techniques to the Director, Collection Strategies Division, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency(2822T), 1200 Pennsylvania Ave., NW, Washington, D.C. 20460. Include the OMB control number in any correspondence. Do not send the completed form to this address. EPA Form 6100-3 (DBE Subcontractor Performance Form) — Page 2 STATE REVOLVING FUND Section SRF-8 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 -- Attachment 5 SRF Required Front-End Specifications (This form must be completed and signed by Prime Contractor and submitted with the bid -- if utilizing DBE subcontractors) OMB Control No: 2090-0030 Approved 8/13/2013 Approval Expires 8/31/2015 United States Environmental Protection Agency Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Program DBE Subcontractor Utilization Form This form is intended to capture the prime contractor's actual and/or intended use of identified certified DBE1 subcontractors2 and the estimated dollar amount of each subcontract. An EPA Financial Assistance Agreement Recipient - must require its prime contractors to complete this form and include it in the bid or proposal package. Prime contractors should also maintain a copy of this form on file. Prime Contractor Name Project Name Bid/Proposal No. Assistance Agreement ID No. Poin of Contact (if known) Address Telephone No. Email Address Issuing/Funding Entity I have identified potential DBE certified subcontractors YES NO If yes, please complete the table below. If no, please explain: Subcontractor Company Address/Phone/Email Estimated Dol ar Currently DBE Name/Company Amount Certified? Name - Continue on back if needed 1A DBE is a Disadvantaged, Minority, or Woman Business Enterprise that has been certified by an entity fron which EPA accepts certification as described in 40 CFR 33.204-33.205 or certified by EPA. EPA accepts certifications from entit es that meet or exceed - EPA certification standards as described in 40 CFR 33.202. 2Subcontractor is defined as a company, firm,joint venture, or individual who enters into an agreement with E contractor to provide services pursuant to an EPA award of financial assistance. EPA Form 6100-4 (DBE Subcontractor Utilization Form)— Page 1 STATE REVOLVING FUND Section SRF-9 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 OMB Control No: 2090-0030 Approved 8/13/2013 Approval Expires 8/31/2015 r United States Environmental Protection Agency Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Program DBE Subcontractor Utilization Form I certify under penalty of perjury that the forgoing statements are true and correct. Signing this form does not signify a commitment to utilize the subcontractors above. I am aware of that in the event of a replacement of a subcontractor, I will '" adhere to the replacement requirements set forth in 40 CFR Part 33 Section 33.302 (c). Prime Contractor Signature Print Name Title Date The public reporting and recordkeeping burden for this collection of information is estimated to average three (3) hours per response. Send comments on the Agency's need for this information, the accuracy of the provided burden estimates, and any suggested methods for minimizing respondent burden, including through the use of automated collection — techniques to the Director, Collection Strategies Division, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency(2822T), 1200 Pennsylvania Ave., NW, Washington, D.C. 20460. Include the OMB control number in any correspondence. Do not send the completed form to this address. EPA Form 6100-4 (DBE Subcontractor Utilization Form)—Page 2 — STATE REVOLVING FUND Section SRF-10 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 Attachment 6 SRF Required Front-End Specifications (This form is not required for bidding. It is for the voluntary use of DBE Subcontractors.) OMB Control No: 2090-0030 Approved 8/13/2013 Approval Expires 8/31/2015 United States Environmental Protection Agency Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Program DBE Subcontractor Participation Form An EPA Financial Assistance Agreement Recipient must require its prime contractors to provide this form to its DBE subcontractors. This form gives a DBE1 subcontractor2 the opportunity to describe work received and/or report any concerns regarding the EPA-funded project (e.g. in areas such as termination by prime contractor, late payments, etc.). The DBE subcontractor can, as an option, complete and submit this form to the EPA DBE Coordinator at any time during the project period of performance. Subcontractor Name Project Name Bid/Proposal No. Assistance Agreement ID No. Pain' of Contact (if known) Address Telephone No. Email Address Prime Contractor Name Issuing/Funding Entity Contract Item Description of Work Received from the Prime Contractor Involving -amount Received by Number Construction, Services, Equipment or Supplies Prime Contractor 'A DBE is a Disadvantaged, Minority, or Woman Business Enterprise that has been certified by an entity fron which EPA accepts certification as described in 40 CFR 33.204-33.205 or certified by EPA. EPA accepts certifications from entit•s that meet or exceed - EPA certification standards as described in 40 CFR 33.202. 2Subcontractor is defined as a company,firm,joint venture, or individual who enters into an agreement with e contractor to provide services pursuant to an EPA award of financial assistance. EPA Form 6100-2 (DBE Subcontractor Participation Form) — Page 1 STATE REVOLVING FUND Section SRF-11 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 OMB Control No: 2090-0030 Approved 8/13/2013 Approval Expires 8/31/2015 United States Environmental Protection Agency Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Program DBE Subcontractor Participation Form Please use the space below to report any concerns regarding the above EPA-funded project: Subcontractor Signature Print Name Title Date EPA FORM 6100-2 (DBE Subcontractor Participation Form) Return to: Regional Coordinator, Small Business Utilization, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Region 7, 11201 Renner Blvd., Lenexa, KS 66219 The public reporting and recordkeeping burden for this collection of information is estimated to average three (3) hours per response. Send comments on the Agency's need for this information, the accuracy of the provided burden estimates, and any suggested methods for minimizing respondent burden, including through the use of automated collection techniques to the Director, Collection Strategies Division, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency(2822T), 1200 Pennsylvania Ave., NW, Washington, D.C. 20460. Include the OMB control number in any correspondence. Do not send the completed form to this address. EPA Form 6100-2 (DBE Subcontractor Participation Form)—Page 2 STATE REVOLVING FUND Section SRF-12 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 Attachment 7 SRF Required Front-End Specifications Other Federal Requirements Language A. Standard Federal Equal Employment Opportunity Construction Contract Specifications (Executive Order 11246) 1. As used in these specifications: a. "Covered area" means the geographical area described in the solicitation from which this contract resulted; b. "Director" means Director, Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs, United States Department of Labor, or any person to whom the Director delegates authority; c. "Employer identification number" means the Federal Social Security number used — on the Employer's Quarterly Federal Tax Return, U.S. Treasury Department Form 941. d. "Minority" includes: (i) Black (all persons having origin in any of the Black African racial groups not of Hispanic origin); (ii) Hispanic (all persons of Mexican, Puerto Rican, Cuban, Central or South American or other Spanish Culture or origin, regardless of race); (iii) Asian and Pacific Islander (all persons having origins in any of the original peoples of the Far East, Southeast Asia, the Indian Sub-continent, or the Pacific Islands); and (iv) American Indian or Alaskan Native (all persons having origins in any of the original peoples of North America and maintaining identifiable tribal affiliations through membership and participation or community identification). 2. Whenever the Contractor, or any Subcontractor at any tier subcontracts a portion of the work involving any construction trade, it shall physically include in each subcontract in excess of $10,000 the provisions of these specifications and the Notice which contains the applicable goals for minority and female participation and which is set forth in the solicitations from which this contract resulted. 3. If the Contractor is participating (pursuant to 41 CFR 6-4.5) in a Hometown Plan approved by the U.S. Department of Labor in the covered area either individually or through an association, its affirmative action obligations on all work in the Plan area (including goals and timetables) shall be in accordance with that Plan for those trades which have unions participating in the Plan. Contractors must be able to demonstrate their participation in and compliance with the provisions of any such Hometown Plan. Each Contractor or Subcontractor participating in an approved Plan is individually required to comply with its obligations under the EEO clause, and to make a good faith effort to achieve each goal under the Plan in each trade in which it has employees. The overall good faith performance by other Contractors or Subcontractors toward a goal in an approved Plan does not excuse any covered Contractor's or Subcontractor's failure to take good faith efforts to achieve the Plan goals and timetables. 4. The Contractor shall implement the specific affirmative action standards provided in paragraphs 7a through p of these specifications. The goals set forth in the solicitation from which this contract resulted are expressed as percentages of the total hours of employment and training of minority and female utilization the Contractor should reasonably be able to achieve in each construction trade in which it has employee in the covered area. Covered construction contractors performing construction work in geographical areas where they do not have a STATE REVOLVING FUND Section SRF-13 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 Federal or federally assisted construction contract shall apply the minority and female goals established for the geographical area where the work in being performed. Goals are published periodically in the Federal Register in notice form, and such notices may be obtained from any Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs office or from Federal procurement contracting officers. The Contractor is expected to make substantially uniform progress in meeting its goals in each craft during the period specified. 5. Neither the provisions of any collective bargaining agreement, nor the failure by a union with whom the Contractor has a collective bargaining agreement, to refer either minorities or women shall excuse the Contractor's obligations under these specifications, Execjtive Order 11246, or the regulations promulgated pursuant thereto. 6. In order for the nonworking training hours of apprentices and trainees to be counted in meeting the goals, such apprentices and trainees must be employed by the Contractor during the training period, and the Contractor must have made a commitment to employ the apprentices and trainees at the completion of their training, subject to the availability of employment opportunities. Trainees must be trained pursuant to training programs approved by the U.S. Department of Labor. 7. The Contractor shall take specific affirmative actions to ensure equal emp' oyment opportunity. The evaluation of the Contractor's compliance with these specifications shall be based upon its effort to achieve maximum results from its actions. The Contractor shall document these efforts fully, and shall implement affirmative action steps at least is extensive as the following: a. Ensure and maintain a working environment free of harassment, intimidation, and coercion at all sites, and in all facilities at which the Contractor employees are assigned to work. The Contractor, where possible will assign two or more women to each construction project. The Contractor shall specifically ensure that all foremen, superintendents, and other on-site supervisory personnel are aware of and carry out the Contractor's obligation to maintain such a working environment, with specific attention to minority or female individuals working at such sites or in such facilities. b. Establish and maintain a current list of minority and female recruitment sources, provide written notification to minority and female recruitment sources and to community organizations when the Contractor or its unions have employment opportunities available and maintain a record of the organizations' responses. c. Maintain a current file of the names, addresses and telephone numbers of each minority and female off-the-street applicant and minority or female referral from a union, a recruitment source or community organization and of what action was taken with respect to each such individual. If such individual was sent to the union hiring hall for referral and was not referred back to the Contractor by the union or, if referred, not employed by the Contractor, this shall be documented in the file with the reason therefore, along with whatever additional actions the Contractor may have taken. d. Provide immediate written notification to the Director when the union or unions with which the Contractor has a collective bargaining agreement has not referred to the Contractor a minority person or woman sent by the Contractor, or when the Contractor has other information that the union referral process has impeded the Contractor's effort, to meet its obligations. e. Develop on-the-job training opportunities and/or participate in training programs for the area which expressly include minorities and women, including upgrading programs and apprenticeship and trainee programs relevant to the Contractor's employment needs, especially those programs funded or approved by the Department of Labor. The STATE REVOLVING FUND Section SRF-14 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 Contractor shall provide notice of these programs to the source complied Lnder 7b above. f. Disseminate the Contractor's EEO policy by providing notice of the policy to unions and training programs and requesting their cooperation in assisting the Contractor in meeting its EEO obligations; by including it in any policy manual and collective bargaining agreement; by publicizing it in the company newspaper, annual report, etc.; by specific review of the policy with all management personnel and with all minority and female employees at least once a year; and by posting the company EEO policy on bulletin boards accessible to all employees at each location where construction work is performed. g. Review, at least annually, the company's EEO policy and affirmative action obligations — under these specifications with all employees having any responsibility for hiring, assignment, layoff, termination or other employment decisions including specific review of these items with onsite supervisory personnel such as Superintendents, General Foremen, etc., prior to the initiation of construction work at any job site. A written record shall be made and maintained identifying the time and place of these meetings, persons attending, subject matter discussed, and disposition of the subject matter. h. Disseminate the Contractor's EEO policy externally by including it in any advertising in the news media, specifically including minority and female news media, and providing written notification to and discussing the Contractor's EEO policy with other Contractors and Subcontractors with whom the Contractor does or anticipates doing business. i. Direct its recruitment efforts, both oral and written, to minority, female and community organizations, to schools with minority and female students and to minority and female recruitment and training organizations serving the Contractor's recruitment area and employment needs. Not later than one month prior to the date for the acceAance of applications for apprenticeship or other training by any recruitment source; the Contractor shall send written notification to organizations such as the above, describing the openings, screening procedures, and test to be used in the selection process. j. Encourage present minority and female employees to recruit other minority persons and women and, where reasonable, provide after school, summer and vacation employment to minority and female youth both on the site and in other areas of a Contractor's workforce. k. Validate all tests and other selection requirements where there is an obligation to do so under 41 CFR Part 60-3. 1. Conduct, at least annually, an inventory and evaluation at least of all mir iority and female personnel for promotional opportunities and encourage these emphyees to seek or to prepare for, through appropriate training, etc., such opportunities. m. Ensure that seniority practices, job classifications work assignments an;1 other personnel practices, do not have a discriminatory effect by continually mor itoring all personnel and employment related activities to ensure that the EEO policy and the Contractor's obligations under these specifications are being carried out. n. Ensure that all facilities and company activities are nonsegregated except that separate or single-user toilet and necessary changing facilities shall be provided to — assure privacy between the sexes. o. Document and maintain a record of all solicitations of offers for subcontracts from minority and female construction contractors and suppliers, including circulation of solicitations to minority and female contractor associations and other business associations. p. Conduct a review, at least annually, of all supervisors' adherence to am: performance under the Contractor's EEO policies and affirmative action obligations. STATE REVOLVING FUND Section SRF-15 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 8. Contractors are encouraged to participate in voluntary associations which assist in fulfilling one or more of their affirmative action obligations (7a through p). The efforts of a contractor association, joint contractor-union, contractor-community, or other similar group of which the contractor is a member and participant, may be asserted as fulfilling any one or more of its obligations under 7a through p of these Specifications provided that the contractor actively participates in the group, makes every effort to assure that the group has a positive impact on the employment of minorities and women in the industry, ensures that the concrete benefits of the program are reflected in the Contractor's minority and female workforce participation, makes a good faith effort to meet its individual goals and timetables, and can provide access to documentation which demonstrates the effectiveness of actions taken on behalf of the Contractor. The obligation to comply, however, is the Contractor's and failure of such a group to fulfill an obligation shall not be a defense for the Contractor's noncompliance. 9. A single goal for minorities and a separate single goal for women have been established. The Contractor, however, is required to provide equal employment opportunity and to take affirmative action for all minority groups, both male and female, and all women, both minority and non-minority. Consequently, the Contractor may be in violation of the Executive Order if a particular group is employed in a substantially disparate manner (for example, even though the Contractor has achieved its goals for women generally, the Contractor may be in violation of the Executive Order if a specific minority group of women is underutilized). 10. The Contractor shall not use the goals and timetable or affirmative action :,tandards to discriminate against any person because of race, color, religion, sex, or national c-igin. 11. The Contractor shall not enter into any Subcontract with any person or firm debarred from Government contracts pursuant to Executive Order 11246. 12. The Contractor shall carry out such sanctions and penalties for violation of these specifications and of the Equal Opportunity Clause, including suspension, termination and cancellation of existing subcontracts as may be imposed or ordered pursuant to Executive Order 11246, as amended, and its implementing regulations, by the Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs. Any Contractor who fails to carry out such sanctions and penalties shall be in violation of these specifications and Executive Order 11246, as amended. 13. The Contractor, in fulfilling its obligations under these specifications, shall mplement specific affirmative action steps at least as extensive as those standards prescribed in paragraph 7 of these specifications so as to achieve maximum results from its efforts to ensure equal employment opportunity. If the Contractor fails to comply with the requirements of the Executive Order, the implementing regulations, or these specifications, the Director shall proceed in accordance with 41 CFR 60-4.8. 14. The Contractor shall designate a responsible official to monitor all employment related activity to ensure that the company EEO policy is being carried out, to submit reports relating to the provisions hereof as may be required by the Government and to keep records. Records shall at least include for each employee the name, address, telephone numbers, construction trade, union affiliation if any, employee identification number when assigned, social security number, race, sex, status (e.g., mechanic, apprentice, trainee, helper, or laborer), dates of changes in status, hours worked per week in the indicated trade, rate of pay, and locations at which the work was performed. Records shall be maintained in an easily understandable and retrievable form; however, to the degree that existing records satisfy this requirement, contractors shall not be required to maintain separate records. STATE REVOLVING FUND Section SRF-16 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 15. Nothing herein provided shall be construed as a limitation upon the application of other laws which establish different standards of compliance or upon the application of requirements for the hiring of local or other area residents (e.g., those under the Public Works Employment Act of 1977 and the Community Development Block Grant Program). Federal Register, Vol. 43, No. 68 - Friday, April 7, 1978 (Corrected May 5, 1978). Effective Date: May 8, 1978 Federal Register, Vol. 45, No. 194. Paragraph 4, revised October 3, 1980 Effective Date: September 30, 1980 APPENDICES A and B-80 Notice of Requirement for Affirmative Action To Ensure Equal Employment Opportunity (Executive Order 11246) 1. The Offeror's or Bidder's attention is called to the "Equal Opportunity Clause" and the "Standard Federal Equal Employment Specifications" set forth herein. 2. The goals and timetables for minority and female participation, expressed in percentage terms for the Contractor's aggregate workforce in each trade on all construction work in the covered area, are as follows: (See Appendix B-80 and Appendix A Below) These goals are applicable to all the Contractor's construction work (whether or not it is Federal or federally assisted) performed in the covered area. If the contractor performs construction work in a geographical area located outside of the covered area, it shall apply the goals established for such geographical area where the work is actually performed. With regard to this second area, the contractor also is subject to the goals for both its federally involved and non- federally involved construction. The Contractor's compliance with the Executive Order and in the regulations in 41 CFR Part 60-4 shall be based on its implementation of the Equal Opportunity Clause, specific affirmative action obligations required by the specifications set forth in 41 CFR 60-4.3(a), and its efforts to _ meet the goals. The hours of minority and female employment and training must be substantially uniform throughout the length of the contract, and in each trade, and the contractor shall make a good faith effort to employ minorities and women evenly on each of its projects. The transfer of minority or female employees or trainees from Contractor to Contractor or from project to project for the sole purpose of meeting the Contractor's goals shall be a violation of the contract, the Executive Order and the regulations in 41 CFR Part 60-4. Compliance with the goals will be measured against the total work hours performed. 3. The Contractor shall provide written notification to the Director of the Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs within 10 working days of award of any construction -- subcontract in excess of$10,000 at any tier for construction work under the contract resulting from this solicitation. The notification shall list the name, address and telephone number of the subcontractor, employer Identification number of the subcontractor, estimated dollar amount of the subcontract, and the geographical area in which the subcontract is to be performed. STATE REVOLVING FUND Section SRF-17 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 4. As used in this Notice, and in the contract resulting from this solicitation, the "covered area" is (State of Iowa). APPENDIX A The following goals and timetables for female utilization shall be included in all Fe ierai and federally assisted construction contracts and subcontracts in excess of $10,000. The goals are applicable to the contractor's aggregate on-site construction workforce whether or not part of that workforce is performing work on a Federal or federally assisted construction c ontract or subcontract. Area covered: Goals for Women apply nationwide. Timetable Goals (percent) From Apr. 1, 1978 until March 31, 1979 3.1 From Apr. 1, 1979 until March 31, 1980 5.0 From Apr. 1, 1980 until March 31, 1981 6.9 Published, Federal Register May 5, 1978 APPENDIX B-80 Until further notice, the following goals for minority utilization in each construction craft and trade shall be included in all Federal or federally assisted construction contracts and subcontracts in excess of $10,000 to be performed in the respective geographical areas. The goals are applicable to each nonexempt contractor's total onsite construction workforce, regardless of whether or not part of that workforce is performing work in a Federal, federally assisted or nonfederally related project, contract or subcontract. Construction contractors which are participating in an approved Hometown Plan (see 41 CFR 60-4.5) are required to comply with the goals of the Hometown Plan with regard to construction work they perform in the area covered by the Hometown Plan. With regard to all their other covered construction work, such contractors are required to comply with the applicable SMSA of EA goal contained in this appendix B-80. STATE REVOLVING FUND Section SRF-18 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 Economic Areas State: Iowa Goal 096 Dubuque IA: SMSA Counties: 2200 Dubuque, IA 0.6 IA Dubuque Non-SMSA Counties 0.5 IA Allamakee, IA Clayton, IA Delaware, IA, Jackson IA, Winneshiek 099 Davenport Rock Island Moline, IA-IL: SMSA Counties: 1960 Davenport Rock Island Moline, IA-IL 4.6 IL Henry, IL Rock Island Moline, IA Scott Non-SMA Counties 3.4 IL Carroll, IL Hancock, IL Henderson, IL ,Mercer, IL Whiteside, IA Clinton, A Des Moines, IA Henry, IA Lee, IA Louisa, IA, Muscatine, MO Clark 100 Cedar Rapids, IA: SMSA Counties: 1360 Cedar Rapids, IA 1.7 IA Linn Non-SMSA Counties 1.5 IA Benton, IA Cedar, IA Iowa, IA Johnson, IA, Jones, IA, Washington 101 Waterloo, IA: SMSA Counties: 8920 Waterloo-Cedar Falls, IA 4.7 IA Black Hawk Non-SMSA Counties 2.0 IA Bremer, IA Buchanan, IA Butler, IA Cerro Gordo, IA Chickasaw, IA Fayette, IA Floyd, IA Franklin, IA Grundy, IA Hancock, IA Hardin, IA Howard, IA Mitchell, IA Winnebago, IA Worth 102 Fort Dodge, IA: Non-SMSA Counties 0.4 IA Buena Vista, IA Calhoun, IA Carroll, IA Clay, IA Dickinson, IA Emmet, IA Greene, IA Hamilton, IA Humboldt, IA Kossuth, IA Palo Alto, IA Pocahontas, IA Sac, IA Webster, IA Wright 103 Sioux City, IA: SMSA Counties: 7720 Sioux City, IA-NE 1.9 IA Woodbury, NE Dakota STATE REVOLVING FUND Section SRF-19 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 Non-SMSA Counties 1.2 IA Cherokee, IA Crawford, IA Ida, IA Monona, IA O'Brien, IA Plymouth, IA Sioux, NE Antelope, NE Cedar, NE Cuming, NE Dixon, NE Knox, NE Madison, NE Pierce, NE Stanton, NE Thurston, NE Wayne, SD Bon Homme, SD Clay, SD Union, SD Yankton 104 Des Moines, IA: SMSA Counties: 2120 Des Moines, IA 4.5 IA Polk, IA Warren Non SMSA Counties: 2.4 IA Adair, IA Appanoose, IA Boone, IA Clarke, IA Dallas, IA Davis, IA Decatur, IA Guthrie, IA Jasper, IA Jefferson, IA Keokuk, IA Lucas, IA Madison, IA Mahaska, IA Marion, IA Marshall, IA Monroe, IA Poweshiek, IA Ringgold, IA Story, IA Tama, IA Union, IA Van Buren, IA Wapello, IA Wayne 143 Omaha, NE: SMSA Counties: 5920 Omaha, NE-IA 7.6 IA Pottawattamie, NE Douglas, NE Sarpy Non-SMSA Counties ... 5.3 IA Adams, IA Audubon, IA Cass, IA Fremont, IA Harrison, IA Mills, IA Montgomery, IA Page, IA Shelby, IA Taylor, NE Burt, NE Cass, NE Colfax, NE Dodge, NE ='latte, NE Saunders, NE Washington Published, Federal Register October 3, 1980 B. Federal Labor Standards Provisions (including Davis-Bacon prevailing wage rates) Applicability The Project or Program to which the construction work covered by this contract pertains is being assisted by the United States of America and the following Federal Labor Standards Provisions are included in this Contract pursuant to the provisions applicable to such Federal assistance. (1) Minimum wages. (i) All laborers and mechanics employed or working upon the site of the work will be paid unconditionally and not less often than once a week, and without subsequent deduction or rebate on any account (except such payroll deductions as are permitted by regulations issued by the Secretary of Labor under the Copeland Act (29 CFR part 3)), the full amount of wages and bona fide fringe benefits (or cash equivalents thereof) due at time of payment computed at rates not less than those contained in the wage determination of the Secretary of Labor which is attached hereto and made a part hereof, regardless of any contractual relationship which may be alleged to exist between the contractor and such laborers and mechanics.Contributions made or costs reasonably anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits under section 1(b)(2) of the Davis-Bacon Act on behalf of laborers or mechanics are considered wages paid to such laborers or mechanics, subject to the provisions of paragraph (a)(1)(iv) of this section; also, regular contributions made or costs incurred for more than a weekly period (but not less often than quarterly) under plans, funds, or programs which cover the particular weekly period, are deemed to be constructively made or incurred during such weekly period. Such laborers and mechanics shall be paid the appropriate wage rate and fringe benefits on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed, without regard to skill, STATE REVOLVING FUND Section SRF-20 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 except as provided in Sec. 5.5(a)(4). Laborers or mechanics performing work in more than one classification may be compensated at the rate specified for each classification for the time actually worked therein: Provided, That the employer's payroll records accurately set forth the time spent in each classification in which work is performed. The wage determination (including any additionalclassification and wage rates conformed under paragraph (a)(1)(ii) of this section) and the Davis-Bacon poster (WH-1321) shall be posted at all times by the contractor and its subcontractors at the site of the work in a prominent and accessible place where it can be easily seen by the workers. (ii)(A) The contracting officer shall require that any class of laborers or mechanics, including helpers, which is not listed in the wage determination and which is to be employed under the contract shall be classified in conformance with the wage determination. The contracting officer shall approve an additional classification and wage rate and fringe benefits therefore only when the following criteria have been met: (1) The work to be performed by the classification requested is not performed b i a classification in the wage determination; and (2) The classification is utilized in the area by the construction industry; and (3) The proposed wage rate, including any bona fide fringe benefits, bears a reasonable relationship to the wage rates contained in the wage determination. (B) If the contractor and the laborers and mechanics to be employed in the classification (if known), or their representatives, and the contracting officer agree on the classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits where appropriate), a report of the action taken shall be sent by the contracting officer to the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division, Employment Standards Administration, U.S. Department of Labor, Washington, DC 20210. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will approve, modify, or disapprove every additional classification action within 30 days of receipt and so advise the contracting officer or will notify the contracting officer within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary. (C) In the event the contractor, the laborers or mechanics to be employed in the classification or their representatives, and the contracting officer do not agree on the proposed classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits, where appropriate), the contracting officer shall refer the questions, including the views of all interested parties and the recommendation of the contracting officer, to the Administrator for determination. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will issue a determination within 30 days of _ receipt and so advise the contracting officer or will notify the contracting officer within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary. (D) The wage rate (including fringe benefits where appropriate) determined pursuant to paragraphs (a)(1)(ii) (B) or (C) of this section, shall be paid to all workers performing work in the classification under this contract from the first day on which work is performed in the classification. (iii) Whenever the minimum wage rate prescribed in the contract for a class of laborers or mechanics includes a fringe benefit which is not expressed as an hourly rate, the contractor shall either pay the benefit as stated in the wage determination or shall pay another bona fide fringe benefit or an hourly cash equivalent thereof. (iv) If the contractor does not make payments to a trustee or other third person, the contractor may consider as part of the wages of any laborer or mechanic the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing bona fide fringe benefits under a plan or program, Provided, _�. That the Secretary of Labor has found, upon the written request of the contractor, that the applicable standards of the Davis-Bacon Act have been met. The Secretary of La::)or may require the contractor to set aside in a separate account assets for the meeting of obligations under the plan or program. STATE REVOLVING FUND Section SRF-21 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 (2) Withholding. The EPA shall upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld from the contractor under this contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime contractor, or any other federally-assisted contract subject to Davis-Bacon prevailing wage requirements, which is held by the same prime contractor, so much of the accrued payments or advances as may be considered necessary to pay laborers and mechanics, including apprentices, trainees, and helpers, employed by the contractor or any subcontractor the full amount of wages required by the contract. In the event of failure to pay any laborer or mechanic, including any apprentice, trainee, or helper, employed or working on the site of the work, all or part of the wages required by the contract, the EPA may, after written notice to the contractor, sponsor, applicant, or owner, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds until such violations have ceased. (3) Payrolls and basic records. (i) Payrolls and basic records relating thereto shall be maintained by the contractor during the course of the work and preserved for a period of three years thereafter for all laborers and mechanics working at the site of the work. Such records shall contain the name, address, and social security number of each such worker, his or her correct classification, hourly rates of wages paid (including rates of contributions or costs anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits or cash equivalents thereof of the types described in section 1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis-Bacon Act), daily and weekly number of hours worked, deductions made and actual wages paid. Whenever the Secretary of Labor has found under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(iv) that the wages of any laborer or mechanic include the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing benefits under a plan or program described in section 1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis-Bacon Act, the contractor shall maintain records which show that the commitment to provide such benefits is enforceable, that the plan or program is financially responsible, and that the plan or program has been communicated in writing to the laborers or mechanics affected, and records which show the costs anticipated or the actual cost incurred in providing such benefits. Contractors employing apprentices or trainees under approved programs shall maintain written evidence of the registration of apprenticeship programs and certification of trainee programs, the registration of the apprentices and trainees, and the ratios and wage rates prescribed in the applicable programs. (ii)(A) The contractor shall submit weekly for each week in which any contract work is performed a copy of all payrolls to the (write in name of appropriate federal agency) if the agency is a party to the contract, but if the agency is not such a party, the contractor will submit the payrolls to the applicant, sponsor, or owner, as the case may be, for transmission to the (write in name of agency). The payrolls submitted shall set out accurately and completely all of the information required to be maintained under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(3)(i), except that full social security numbers and home addresses shall not be included on weekly transmittals. Instead the payrolls shall only need to include an individually identifying number for each employee (e.g., the last four digits of the employee's social security number). The required weekly payroll information may be submitted in any form desired. Optional Form WH-347 is available for this purpose from the Wage and Hour Division Web site at http://www.dol.gov/esa/whd/forms/wh347instr.htm or its successor site. The prime contractor is responsible for the submission of copies of payrolls by all subcontractors. Contractors and subcontractors shall maintain the full social security number and current address of each covered worker, and shall provide them upon request to the (write in name of appropriate federal agency) if the agency is a party to the contract, but if the agency is not such a party, the contractor will submit them to the applicant, sponsor, or owner, as the case may be, for transmission to the (write in name of agency), the contractor, or the Wage and Hour Division of the Department of Labor for purposes of an investigation or audit of compliance with prevailing wage requirements. It is not a violation of this section for a prime contractor to require a subcontractor to provide addresses and social security numbers to the prime contractor for its STATE REVOLVING FUND Section SRF-22 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 own records, without weekly submission to the sponsoring government agency (o the applicant, sponsor, or owner). (B) Each payroll submitted shall be accompanied by a "Statement of Compliance," signed by the contractor or subcontractor or his or her agent who pays or supervises the payment of the persons employed under the contract and shall certify the following: (1) That the payroll for the payroll period contains the information required to be provided under Sec. 5.5 (a)(3)(ii) of Regulations, 29 CFR part 5, the appropriate information is being maintained under Sec. 5.5 (a)(3)(i) of Regulations, 29 CFR part 5, and that such information is correct and complete; (2) That each laborer or mechanic (including each helper, apprentice, and trainee) employed on the contract during the payroll period has been paid the full weekly wages earned, without rebate, either directly or indirectly, and that no deductions have been made either directly or indirectly from the full wages earned, other than permissible deductions as set forth in Regulations, 29 CFR part 3; (3) That each laborer or mechanic has been paid not less than the applicable wage rates and fringe benefits or cash equivalents for the classification of work performed, as spe;ified in the applicable wage determination incorporated into the contract. (C) The weekly submission of a properly executed certification set forth on the reverse side of Optional Form WH-347 shall satisfy the requirement for submission of the "Staterient of Compliance" required by paragraph (a)(3)(ii)(B) of this section. (D) The falsification of any of the above certifications may subject the contractor or subcontractor to civil or criminal prosecution under section 1001 of title 18 and section 231 of title 31 of the United States Code. (iii) The contractor or subcontractor shall make the records required under paragraph (a)(3)(i) of this section available for inspection, copying, or transcription by authorized representatives of the EPA or the Department of Labor, and shall permit such representatives to interview employees during working hours on the job. If the contractor or subcontractor fails to submit the required records or to make them available, the Federal agency may, after written notice to the contractor, sponsor, applicant, or owner, take such action as may be necessary tc cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds. Furthermore, failure to submit the required records upon request or to make such records available may ie grounds for debarment action pursuant to 29 CFR 5.12. (4) Apprentices and trainees--(i) Apprentices. Apprentices will be permitted to v\ork at less than the predetermined rate for the work they performed when they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a bona fide apprenticeship program registered with tie U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration, Office of Apprenticeship Training, Employer and Labor Services, or with a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Office, or if a person is employed in his or her first 90 days of probationary employment as an apprentice in such an apprenticeship program, who is not individually registered in the program, but who has been certified by the Office of Apprenticeship Training, Employer and Labor Services or a State Apprenticeship Agency (where appropriate) to be eligible for probationary employment as an apprentice. The allowable ratio of apprentices to journeymen on the job site in any craft classification shall not be greater than the ratio permitted - to the contractor as to the entire work force under the registered program. Any worker listed on a payroll at an apprentice wage rate, who is not registered or otherwise employed as stated above, shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any apprentice performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. Where a contractor is performing construction on a project in a locality other than that in which its program is registered, the ratios and wage rates (expressed in percentages of the journeyman's STATE REVOLVING FUND Section SRF-23 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 hourly rate) specified in the contractor's or subcontractor's registered program shall be observed. Every apprentice must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the registered program for the apprentice's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeymen hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Apprentices shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the apprenticeship program. If the apprenticeship program does not specify fringe benefits, apprentices must be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination for the applicable classification. If the Administrator determines that a different practice prevails for the applicable apprentice classification, fringes shall be paid in accordance with that determination. In the event the Office of Apprenticeship Training, Employer and Labor Services, or a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Office, withdraws approval of an apprenticeship program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize apprentices at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. (ii) Trainees. Except as provided in 29 CFR 5.16, trainees will not be permitted to work at less -- than the predetermined rate for the work performed unless they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a program which has received prior approval, evidenced by formal certification by the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration. The ratio of trainees to journeymen on the job site shall not be greater than permitted under the plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration. Every trainee must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the approved program for the trainee's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeyman hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Trainees shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the trainee program. If the trainee program does not mention fringe benefits, trainees shall be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination unless the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division determines that there is an apprenticeship program associated with the corresponding journeyman wage rate on the wage determination which provides for less than full fringe benefits for apprentices. Any employee listed on the payroll at a trainee rate who is not registered and participating in a training plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rateon the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any trainee performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. In the event the Employment and Training Administration withdraws approval of a training program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize trainees at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. (iii) Equal employment opportunity. The utilization of apprentices, trainees and journeymen under this part shall be in conformity with the equal employment opportunity requirements of Executive Order 11246, as amended, and 29 CFR part 30. (5) Compliance with Copeland Act requirements. The contractor shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR part 3, which are incorporated by reference in this contract. (6) Subcontracts. The contractor or subcontractor shall insert in any subcontracts the clauses contained in 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1) through (10) and such other clauses as the (write in the name of the Federal agency) may by appropriate instructions require, and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime contractor shall be responsible for the compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with all the contract clauses in 29 CFR 5.5. (7) Contract termination: debarment. A breach of the contract clauses in 29 CFR 5.5 may be grounds for termination of the contract, and for debarment as a contractor and a subcontractor as provided in 29 CFR 5.12. STATE REVOLVING FUND Section SRF-24 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 (8) Compliance with Davis-Bacon and Related Act requirements. All rulings anc interpretations of the Davis-Bacon and Related Acts contained in 29 CFR parts 1, 3, and 5 are herein incorporated by reference in this contract. (9) Disputes concerning labor standards. Disputes arising out of the labor standards provisions of this contract shall not be subject to the general disputes clause of this contract. Such disputes shall be resolved in accordance with the procedures of the Department of Labor set forth in 29 CFR parts 5, 6, and 7. Disputes within the meaning of this clause include disputes between the contractor (or any of its subcontractors) and the contracting agency, the U.S. Department of Labor, or the employees or their representatives. (10) Certification of eligibility. (i) By entering into this contract, the contractor certifies that neither it (nor he or she) nor any person or firm who has an interest in the contractor's firm is a person or firm ineligible to be awarded Government contracts by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1). (ii) No part of this contract shall be subcontracted to any person or firm ineligibl, for award of a Government contract by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 OFF 5.12(a)(1). (iii) The penalty for making false statements is prescribed in the U.S. Criminal Code, 18 U.S.C. 1001. (b) Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act. The Agency Head shall cause or require the contracting officer to insert the following clauses set forth in paragraphs (b)(1) (2), (3), and (4) of this section in full in any contract in an amount in excess of$100,000 and subject to the overtime provisions of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act. These clauses shall be inserted in addition to the clauses required by Sec. 5.5(a) or 4.6 of part 4 of this title. As used in this paragraph, the terms laborers and mechanics include watchmen and guards. (1) Overtime requirements. No contractor or subcontractor contracting for any part of the contract work which may require or involve the employment of laborers or mechanics shall require or permit any such laborer or mechanic in any workweek in which he or she is employed on such work to work in excess of forty hours in such workweek unless such laborer or mechanic receives compensation at a rate not less than one and one-half times the basic rate of pay for all hours worked in excess of forty hours in such workweek. (2) Violation; liability for unpaid wages; liquidated damages. In the event of any violation of the clause set forth in paragraph (b)(1) of this section the contractor and any subcontractor responsible therefor shall be liable for the unpaid wages. In addition, such contractor and subcontractor shall be liable to the United States (in the case of work done under contract for the District of Columbia or a territory, to such District or to such territory), for liquidated damages. Such liquidated damages shall be computed with respect to each individual laborer or mechanic, including watchmen and guards, employed in violation of the clause set forth in paragraph (b)(1) of this section, in the sum of$10 for each calendar day on which such individual was required or permitted to work in excess of the standard workweek c f forty hours without payment of the overtime wages required by the clause set forth in paragraph (b)(1) of this section. (3) Withholding for unpaid wages and liquidated damages. The loan recipient shall upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld, from any moneys payable on account of work performed by the contractor or subcontractor under any such contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime contractor, or any other federally-assisted contract subject to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, which is held by the same prime contractor, such sums as may be determined to be necessary to satisfy any liabilities of such contractor or subcontractor for unpaid wages and liquidated damages as provided in the clause set forth in paragraph (b)(2) of this section. (4) Subcontracts. The contractor or subcontractor shall insert in any subcontracts the clauses set forth in paragraph (b)(1) through (4) of this section and also a clause requiring the STATE REVOLVING FUND Section SRF-25 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime contractor shall be responsible for compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with the clauses set forth in paragraphs (b)(1) through (4) of this section. (c) In addition to the clauses contained in paragraph (b), in any contract subject only to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act and not to any of the other statutes cited in Sec. 5.1, the Agency Head shall cause or require the contracting officer to insert a clause requiring that the contractor or subcontractor shall maintain payrolls and basic payroll records during the course of the work and shall preserve them for a period of three years from the completion of the contract for all laborers and mechanics, including guards and watchmen, working on the contract. Such records shall contain the name and address of each such employee, social security number, correct classifications, hourly rates of wages paid, daily and weekly number of hours worked, deductions made, and actual wages paid. Further, the Agency Head shall cause or require the contracting officer to insert in any such contract a clause providing that therecords to be maintained under this paragraph shall be made available by the contractor or subcontractor for inspection, copying, or transcription by authorized representatives of the EPA and the Department of Labor, and the contractor or subcontractor will permit such representatives to interview employees during working hours on the job. C. Preservation of Open Competition and Government Neutrality Towards Government Contractors' Labor Relations on Federal and Federally Funded Construction Projects (Executive Order 13202, as amended by Executive Order 13208) Executive Order 13202, signed February 17, 2001 and amended April 4, 2001, requires all executive agencies that issue grants to ensure Government neutrality toward contractors' labor relations. This applies to recipients of SRF assistance. The Executive Order prohibits discrimination against contractors and their employees in construction contracts based upon labor affiliation or lack thereof. SRF assistance recipients and any construction managers acting on their behalf must ensure that bidding specifications, project agreements, and other controlling documents c:o not require, prohibit, or otherwise discriminate, with respect to labor affiliation or lack thereof. D. Historical and Archeological Finds If, during the course of construction, evidence of deposits of historical or archeological interest is found, the contractor shall cease operations affecting the find. The owner shall then notify the - State Revolving Fund Environmental Review Specialist, who shall in turn notify the State Historic Preservation Office. The SRF shall consult with the SHPO and other interested parties to determine the proper course of action regarding the discovery. No further disturbance of the -- deposits shall ensue until the SRF Environmental Review Specialist determines that the project activities in that area may proceed. Compensation to the contractor, if any, for lost time or changes in construction to avoid the find, shall be determined in accordance with changed conditions or change order provisions of the specifications. Authority for this derives from the National Historic Preservation Act (16 U.S.C. §§ 470 et seq.) and 36 CFR Part 800. If human remains are discovered then state law also applies IC 263B. STATE REVOLVING FUND Section SRF-26 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 E. Prohibitions on Procurement from Violating Facilities (Section 306, Clean Air Act; Section 508, Clean Water Act; Executive Order 11738) Both the Clean Water Act and the Clean Air Act prohibit federal agencies from extending assistance by way of loans or contracts to persons who have been convicted of violations of either law. Executive Order 11738 was issued to coordinate enforcement by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, which shall designate facilities which have given rise to a conviction for an offense under the criminal provisions of the Clean Air Act and the Clean Water Act. The Executive Order also prohibits agencies from extending assistance to facilities, that are not in compliance with either Act. SRF assistance recipients may not procure goods, services, or materials from sur pliers listed by the EPA as violators. The Excluded Parties Listing System is located at http://epls.arnet.qov. Attachment 8 SRF Required Front-End Specifications Right of Entry and Records Retention The recipient shall provide access at all times for the Department of Natural Resources, the Iowa Finance Authority, the state auditor, and the U.S. EPA Office of the Inspector General to all project records and documents for inspection and audit purposes for a period of three years after the date of last loan payment. The same access to the project site(s) shall be provided for inspection purposes. 92.8 (2).6.e. State inspections. Personnel of the department shall have the right to examine all construction aspects of the project, including materials and equipment delivered and stored on site for use on the project. STATE REVOLVING FUND Section SRF-27 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 Attachment 9 SRF Required Front-End Specifications "American Iron and Steel" Requirements H.R. 3547, the "Consolidated Appropriations Act, 2014," enacted January 17, 2014 by the U.S. Congress, includes "American Iron and Steel" provisions that require Clean Water and Drinking Water State Revolving Fund assistance recipients of these funds to use iron and :steel produced in the United States. H.R. 3547 includes the following language in Division G, Title IV, under the headir g, "Use of American Iron and Steel": Sec. 436. (a)(1) None of the funds made available by a State water pollution control revolving fund as authorized by title VI of the Federal Water Pollution Control Act (33 U.S.C. 1381 et seq.) or made available by a drinking water treatment revolving loan fund as authorized by section 1452 of the Safe Drinking Water Act (42 U.S.C. 300j-12) shall be used for a project for the construction, alteration, maintenance, or repair of a public water system or treatment works unless all of the iron and steel products used in the project are produced in the United States. (2) In this section, the term "iron and steel products" means the following products made primarily of iron and steel: lined or unlined pipes and fittings, manhole coverE and other municipal castings, hydrants, tanks, flanges, pipe clamps and restraints, valvE:::•s, structural steel, reinforced precast concrete, and construction materials. (b) Subsection (a) shall not apply in any case or category of cases in which tr e Administrator of the Environmental Protection Agency (in this section referrec to as the "Administrator") find that- - (1) applying subsection (a) would be inconsistent with the public interest; (2) iron and steel products are not produced in the United States in sufficient and reasonably available quantities and of a satisfactory quantity; or (3) inclusion of iron and steel products produced in the United States will increase the cost of the overall project by more than 25 percent. (c) If the Administrator receives a request for a waiver under this section, the Administrator shall make available to the public on an informal basis a copy of the request and information available to the Administrator concerning the request, and shall allow for informal public input on the request for at least 15 days prior to making a finding based on the request. The Administrator shall make the request and accompanying information available by electronic means, including on the official public Internet Web site of the Environmental Protection Agency. The final guidance and any published waivers are found at: http://water.epa.gov/grants funding/aisrequirement.cfm. In particular the contractor should pay attention to the guidance for documentation of compliance. There is also a waiver for incidental items; in order to qualify for this waiver the total materials and costs for the project must be tracked and incidental items identified. STATE REVOLVING FUND Section SRF-28 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 Sample "American Iron and Steel"Contract Language In order to fulfill the requirements, the assistance recipient must in good faith design the project and solicit bids for construction with U.S.-made iron and steel. The following information will be included in any contracts resulting from this request for bids: The Contractor acknowledges to and for the benefit of the City of ("Purchaser") and the State of Iowa (the "State") that it understands the goods and services under this Agreement are being funded with monies made available by the Clean Water State Revolving Fund and/or Drinking Water State Revolving Fund and such law contains provisions commonly known as "American Iron and Steel;" that requires all of the iron and steel products used in the project to be produced in the United States ("American Iron and Steel Requirement") including iron and steel products provided by the Contactor pursuant to this Agreement. The Contractor hereby represents and warrants to and for the benefit of the Purchaser and the State that (a) the Contractor has reviewed and understands the American Iron and Steel Requirement, (b) all of the iron and steel products used in the project will be and/or have been produced in the United States in a manner that complies with the American Iron and Steel Requirement, unless a waiver of the requirement is approved, and (c) the Contractor will provide -- any further verified information, certification or assurance of compliance with this paragraph, or information necessary to support a waiver of the American Iron and Steel Requirement, as may be requested by the Purchaser or the State. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement, any failure to comply with this paragraph by the Contractor shall permit the Purchaser or State to recover as damages against the Contractor any loss, expense, or cost(including without limitation attorney's fees) incurred by the Purchaser or State resulting from any such failure (including without limitation any impairment or loss of funding, whether in whole or in part, from the State or any damages owed to the State by the Purchaser). While the Contractor has no direct contractual privity with the State, as a lender to the Purchaser for the funding of its project, the Purchaser and the Contractor agree that the State is a third-party beneficiary and neither this paragraph (nor any other provision of this Agreement necessary to give this paragraph force or effect) shall be amended or waived without the prior written consent of the State. Sample Certifications As indicated in the contract language, it will be the responsibility of the Contractor to obtain certifications that the products and materials used in the project are U.S.-made. EPA recommends the use of a step certification process for documenting compliance with AIS requirements, similar to one used by the Federal Highway Administration. Step certification creates a paper trail which documents the location of the manufacturing process involved with the production of steel and iron materials. Each handler (supplier, fabricator, manufacturer, processor, coater, etc.) of the iron and steel products certifies that their step in the process was domestically performed. The following information is provided as a sample letter of step certification for AIS compliance. Documentation must be provided on company letterhead. In this example, there may be multiple letters from different manufacturers if one manufacturer did not perform all of the steps. STATE REVOLVING FUND Section SRF-29 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 Date Company Name Company Address City, State Zip Subject: American Iron and Steel Step Certification for Project(XXXXXXXXXX) I, (company representative), certify that the (melting,bending, coating, galvanizing, cutting, etc.) process for(manufacturing or fabricating) the following products and/or materials shipped or provided for the subject project is in full compliance with the American Iron and Steel requirement as mandated in EPA's State Revolving Fund Programs. Item, Products and/or Materials: 1. Xxxx 2. Xxxx 3. Xxxx Such process took place at the following location: If any of the above compliance statements change while providing material to this project we will immediately notify the prime contractor and the engineer. Signed by company representative Alternatively, the final manufacturer that delivers the iron or steel product to the worksite, vendor, or contractor, may provide a certification asserting that all manufacturing processes — occurred in the U.S. and providing detailed information on the steps involved. The following is a template for this type of final certification. STATE REVOLVING FUND Section SRF-30 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 Covered and Non-Covered Items The EPA issued a waiver for de minimus incidental components of eligible water and wastewater infrastructure projects. Funds used for such de minimus incidental components cumulatively may comprise no more than a total of 5% of the total cost of the materials used in _ and incorporated into a project. The cost of an individual incidental item may not exceed 1% of the total cost of the materials used in and incorporated into a project. De minimus incidental items include miscellaneous, generally low-cost components that are essential for, but incidental to, the construction and are incorporated into the physical structure of the project. For many of these incidental components, the country of manufacture and the availability of alternatives are not readily or reasonably identifiable prior to procurement in the normal course of business. For others, the country of manufacture may be known but the miscellaneous character in conjunction with the low cost, individually and (in total) as typically procured in bulk, mark them as properly incidental. Examples of incidental components could include small washers, screws, fasteners (i.e., nuts and bolts), miscellaneous wire, corner bead, ancillary tube, etc. Examples of items that are clearly not incidental include significant process fittings (i.e., tees, elbows, flanges, and brackets), distribution system fittings and valves, force main valves, pipes, treatment and storage tanks, large structural supports, etc. Assistance recipients should in consultation with their contractors determine the items to be covered by this waiver, must retain relevant documentation (i.e. invoices) as to those items, and must summarize in reports to the State of Iowa the types and/or categories of items to which this waiver is applied, the total cost of incidental components for each type or category, and the calculations by which they determined the total cost of materials used in and incorporated into the project. The successful bidder will fill out the materials spreadsheet (shown below) and submit it to the assistance recipient to indicate covered and non-covered items proposed to be procured for the project. American Iron and Steel Materials Spreadsheet—to be Submitted by Successful Bidder Iowa Department of Natural Resources-May 2014 Based on EPA Memorandum(4/15/2014): De MinimusWaver of Section 436 of P.L,113-76,Consolidated Appropriation Acts(CAA),2014 .seantf Protect: r lined/unlined pipes or f€ttingst Bidder: Manhole covers I Date Municipal castings *Covered Pr.Pipes clamps or restraints pipesor fittings;manhole covers;municipal castings;pipe clamps and restraints;valves;structure,steel;hydrants, tanks;flange Valves instruction materials. Structural steel **Incidental Hydrants 4h,low-cost items,often procured in bulk,such as washers,screws,fasteners,small amounts of wire,etc. Tanks Flanges Description of Other Bid Amount Bid Amount Documentation Item is incidental and Reinforced precast concrete aoducts if Not Included in Covered Products Incidentals Vifill be Obtained will be Claimed under Construction materials Covered Products de l inimus Narver*- 1 Lt _ 2 U 3 4 5 0 6 -_ _ ., 0 i 7 - i LI 0 Q 9 U in STATE REVOLVING FUND Section SRF-32 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 At the end of construction, the contractor will submit a final list showing covered and non- covered items. American Iron and Steel Materials Spreadsheet with de Minimusitema Iowa Department of Natural Resources-May 2014 Based on EPA Memorandum(4/15/2414): De Minimus Waiver of Section 436 of P.L 113-76,Consolidated Appropriation Acts(CAA),2014 Project: Contractor: Submitted By: Date: Final De Minimus List Q Total Materials Total Amount Covered Percent(must be 5 t or less of Cost: Under de Minimus Waiver total materials cost) *Covered Products include:lined or unlined pipes or fittings;manhole covers;municipal castings;pipe clamps and restraints;valves;structural steel;hydrants, tanks;flanges;reinforced precast concrete;construction materials. **Incidental Reins are miscellaneous,generally low-cost items,often procured in bulk,such as washers,screws,fasteners,small amounts of wire,etc. Covered Products* Description if Not Included Date Dollar Amount Dollar Amount Documentation Incidental** in Covered Products Purchased Covered Incidentals Received Products 12 == E U 3 4 = - _ 1 LI 5 6 n [ I These documents are available on-line at http://www.iowasrf.com/about srf/use-of-american- iron-and-steel/. STATE REVOLVING FUND Section SRF-33 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 FORM OF BID OR PROPOSAL F.Y. 2020 WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT BIOSOLIDS MODIFICATIONS CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA CITY CONTRACT NO. 994 Honorable Mayor and City Council Waterloo, Iowa 1. The undersigned, being a Corporation existing under the laws of the State of , a Partnership consisting of the fo lowing partners: , having familiarized (himself) (themselves) (itself) with the existing conditions on the pr.)ject area affecting the cost of the work, and with all the contract documents listed in the Table of Contents and Addenda (if any), as prepared by the City Engineer of the City of Waterloo now on file in the office of the City Clerk, City Hall, Waterloo, Iowa, hereby proposes to furnish all supervision, technical personnel, labor, materials, machinery, tools, appurtenances, equipment, and services, including utility and transportation services required to construct and complete this F.Y. 2020 Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids Modifications, City Contract No. 994, all in accordance with the above-listed documents and for the lump sum base bid cost: LUMP SUM BASE BID: Dollars $ (Words) (Numbers) - See Section 01 29 00-Contract Considerations for discussion of cash allo.vances to include in the Bid. Contract award will be made based on the Lump Sum Base Bid or Lump Sum Base Bid with any combination of Bid Alternatives selected. The price for all Base Bid Equipment items shall be included in the Lump Sum Base Bid. Bid Alternatives will be addec or deducted from the Lump Sum Base Bid, if they are accepted, prior to Notice of Award being made. CITY reserves the right to accept or reject any Bid Alternatives or Equipment Alternatives to -. the Lump Sum Base Bid. Should CITY wish to consider Bid Alternatives isted, Bidder may be required to provide additional information prior to Notice of Award. Consideration of Equipment Alternatives of the selected Bidder will be made by CITY withir 60 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement. If a Bid Equipment Alternative is selected by CITY, the awarded Contrac price will include the selected Alternative(s). FORM OF BID Section BF-1 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 2. Bid Alternatives BID ALTERNATIVE NO. 1: CONTRACTOR shall include in the cost of the Bid Alternative ALL work associated with providing the scope listed below. The price of$ shall be deducted from the Contract Lump Sum Base Bid if CITY elects to have CONTRACTOR eliminate the addition of the metal canopy, framing, wall panels, concrete walls and footings associated with the outdoor biosolids loadout area located between the Dewatering Building (Structure 330) and the Centrate Equalization Tanks (Structure 350)as indicated in the Drawings and in the Specifications as specified in Section 07 61 00—Sheet Metal Roofing and Section 41 12 13—Shaftless Screw Conveyors. BID ALTERNATIVE NO. 2: CONTRACTOR shall include in the cost of the Bid Alternative ALL work associated with providing the scope listed below. The price of $ shall be deducted from the Contract Lump Sum Base Bid if CITY elects to have CONTRACTOR eliminate the addition of the Chemical Building (Structure 300) and related items as indicated in the Drawings and in the Specifications as specified in SECTION 21 11 00—Water-Based Fire Protection, Section 22 30 00—Plumbing Equipment, Section 46 33 42—Chemical Phosphorus Removal Equipment and Section 43 41 45—Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Chemical Tanks. BID ALTERNATIVE NO. 3: CONTRACTOR shall include in the cost of the Bid Alternative ALL work associated with providing the scope listed below. The price of$ shall be deducted from the Contract Lump Sum Base Bid if CITY elects to have CONTRACTOR eliminate the addition of Primary Sludge Pumps (P-3-15-1 and P-3-15-2) and associated piping, modifications to existing WAS Well No. 2 and No. 3 and related items in the WAS Building (Structure 170) as indicated in the Drawings and in the Specifications as specified in Section 13 34 23.25—FRP Flat Panel Cover System and Section 43 23 57—Progressing Cavity Pumps. BID ALTERNATIVE NO. 4: CONTRACTOR shall include in the cost of the Bid Alternative ALL work associated with providing the scope listed below. The price of$ shall be deducted from the Contract Lump Sum Base Enid if CITY elects to have CONTRACTOR eliminate the replacement of Boilers No. 1 and No. 3 (M-, 11 24 1 and M-11-24-3), recirculation pumps (P-11-31-1 and P-11-31-2), associated piping modifications and related items in the Digester Control Building (Structure 310) as indicated in the Drawings and in the Specifications as specified in Section 23 21 16—Hydronic Piping Specialties, Section 23 21 23—Hydronic Pumps, Section 23 25 00—HVAC Water Treatment, and Section 23 52 39—Fire Tube Boilers. FORM OF BID Section BF-2 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 3. Equipment Alternatives The name of the Base Bid equipment manufacturer which Bidder shall include n the Lump Sum Base Bid is listed for each equipment item. Where an alternative manufacturer is Irsted, Bidder shall include an add or deduct to the price of the equipment that Bidder included in the Lump Sum Base Bid. Where spaces are provided, Bidder may also bid other alternative manufacturers by writing in the alternative manufacturer's name. Equipment Alternative Bid prices shall include the entire cost of the Alternative, including cost for engineering changes to accommodate the Alternative, and additional work to be performed which is not shown on the Drawings, but which is required as a result of selection of the Alternative. Whether or not an alternative manufacturer is offered to one or more of the Baye Bid equipment manufacturers provided for in the Bid Form, Bidder shall write (in numbers) the r rice for providing the Base Bid equipment manufacturer, as included in the Lump Sum Base Bid. When more than one Base Bid equipment manufacturer name is listed for an item, Bidder shall circle the name of the equipment manufacturer selected for the Lump Sum Base Bid and write in the price for the selected equipment. FORM OF BID Section BF-3 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 E > a� LL m c�C Ut N C - C -p m Q c v a) m L c6 o o2 c) L > CD -0 L O CO— CO C U C a) 0 o N + < coCZ Q C L Co + + + + + + + + + + + + a) 2 > c O a)• m — c Q Co 0 w CA I— Cm a o Z z CC W c m L 2 I— a) a) m co - . J E -c au,) c O Q •2- C Co pU I— C_� m ) - Z w a) E a) \ W = �j o ci) cc) 2 N a o o - E cri 0 J 0 W U U 'M6_ Mom_ C W L CD W L MN y--,L .. cn a) (^')` 76 L O o W � W W O Q) y-a I U E — a) C C C U co a i C > E C L -CO C E C cy)>' E < E 2 C — E Co f6 O a) E ,- CT) L C X a) >, 0 ❑ Q0 C L :...� "a 0 0 w U C a) a) N � 16 w m � � o � � 0 oWoX 'a cp CCe a) a) >, a) C � � L < O Eu) OS 00O -, Ocn � YOQ cn LL m > OD I U cn La a) a>i a) �, E Qc L a_ N Q o Q.-. ESQ v `- CD Oc) > CC � � wM CD E o., CV >_ CO ,--- U CO0_ LC) . O co CO U O a) co O)co 4) co v) CO CD CO CnN ) 0_ E � C � ._ `- � LLB Qo � o � � o � o a) o � o 0o m— n /Y L co N (� ^O �Z c U) ^O r)cu OS CC Q m U ❑ w L: C SRF Template American Iron and Steel Certification Letter STATE / On Manufacturer's Letterhead IRO & IRON& i t EL.INC. STEEL I959 Sty Drive LS C. Ironille,OH 1 MATERIAL CERTIFICATION April 30,2015 RE: Job Name: Waterprojecty lle, Iowa—2015 State Revolving Fund Water Infrastnxtire Project SRF Project Ntunber C 19 09 9 01 References the SRF Project I certify that the processes for manufacturing or fabricating the following prc<lucts and'ormaterials provickd for the subject project took place at the following U.S_ locations: Quantity Description Manufacturing Processes Location Where Processes Occurred 3 count AB123456 4 Crate Valve Melting poured.machined ironville. OH 60 countXY654321 Reinforced Concrete Melted,rolled_ fabricated Steel City.IA Manhole 6.0 count = XZ123456 Manhole Cover Melted,cast:finished Stainless_MS 1' linear feet AB6321 e Iron Water Melted,rolled;finished met.'.zn,CA ' Pipe I further certify that products anc ior materials are in full cowlianc e with the SAmericanecifies Iron and teel requirements as mandated the US_Environmental the Protection gent State Revolving Fund program_ If any of the above Manufacturing compliance st ems change while providing material to this project we will Processes and immediately note the supplier, prime contractor, consulting engineer, or project the U.S. owner_ Locations Specifies the On behalf of IRON L'STEEL, ., Where They Products and Were Quantities Paw& o� Performed Signature of Jane Smith Manufacturer's Product Quality Manager Representative STATE REVOLVING FUND Section SRF-31 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 __ E > a) LL ca m , ▪ Cl) a ctQ c a) m cc O o2 i a) > a) __ o— m E U 73 a) a) all •c cA .-- CO Q c CO Lco CC — — L a) 2 .= U Q ct 2 NI- C) C) 0 z ,._., -c Io C L_ o a) CO m E -c C o a c O U wa) E (1) , 73 c � o o c cn 0 - E cfi — U c o J 1- 64 64 64 64 — 73 73 m ` m a) N _0 a) Cl) i y--' Cl) a) fB 0 c0 c m v •— m0 E EPaiEo a) Li Eccv) .La) X •a � T.) 0 = cii.12 vs- c cn W J a) E a, •• 4E w o co m moo E. cr) 0 Cl) L cn a) a) .. Cl) C) _ N CD CO .— L coE aE xN ❑ (N c CO a) a 0-) 2 a) a) cC "' � C) NNi- ILC) 0 N- cr) CLwV' E �t � � ccNI- co — V(73 > o a) o a) o 9 E o CD _ca) °) � o oo aria °) 0 2 CC 2 — Y 0 4. Cash Allowances The following Cash Allowances shall be included in the Lump Sum Base Bid. The Cash Allowances for non Lump Sum items shall be equal to the product of the quantity included in the Lump Sum Base Bid and the Unit Price. The Cash Allowances will be adjusted in the event that estimated quantities to be included in the Lump Sum Base Bid are different from final measured quantities. A single Unit Price shall be bid for each item. Failure to include one or more of the following Unit Price items may result in rejection of the entire Bid as nonconforming. For items with a quantity of 1,the Cash Allowance shall be adjusted based on actual final costs. CASH ALLOWANCES Estimated Total Bid Price Quantity Included Included in the in the Item Lump Sum Lump Sum Number Description Base Bid Unit Bid Unit Prig e Base Bid 1. Concrete Surface Repair—Top of Wall 10 CF $ $ Repairs Section 03 01 30 2. Concrete Surface Repair—Wall Vertical 10 CF $ $ Surface and Underside of Slab Repairs Section 03 01 30 3. Concrete Surface Repair—Top of Slab 10 CF $ Repairs Section 03 01 30 4. Masonry Restoration and Cleaning-100% 8,000 SF $ $ Repointing Section 04 01 20 5. Masonry Restoration and Cleaning— 1,000 LF $ $ <100% Repointing Section 04 01 20 6. Brick Replacement 250 SF $ $ Section 04 01 20 7. Excavation, Backfill, and Grading— 1,500 CY $ $ Unsuitable Foundation Material for Structures Section 31 23 00 8. Excavation, Backfill, and Grading— 500 CY $ $ Unsuitable Foundation Material for Utility Trenches Section 31 23 00 FORM OF BID Section BF-6 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 5. In submitting this bid, the Bidder understands that the right is reserved by the Cit} of Waterloo, Iowa, to reject any or all bids. If written notice of the acceptance of this bid is maiLd, telegraphed, or delivered to the undersigned within thirty(30)days after the opening thereof, or at any time thereafter before this bid is withdrawn, the undersigned agrees to execute and deliver an agreement in the prescribed form and furnish the required bond and certificate of the insurance within ten (10) days after the agreement is presented to him for signature, and start work within ten (10)days after"Notice to Proceed" is issued. 6. Security in the sum of Dollars ($ ) in the form of -, is submitted herewith in accordance with the INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS. 7. Attached hereto is a Non-Collusion Affidavit of Prime Contractor. 8. Attached hereto is a Resident Bidder Certification ( ), or Non-Resident 3idder Certification ( ). (Mark one.) 9. The Bidder is prepared to submit a financial and experience statement upon request. 10. The Prime Contractor and Subcontractor(s), which have performed an aggregate of $10,000.00 in work for the City in the current calendar year, are prepared to submit an AAP or Update and an EOC, within ten (10) days of notification that the bid submitted is lowest and acceptable. 11. The Bidder has received the following Addendum or Addenda: Addendum No. Date 12. The Bidder shall list the MBE/WBE subcontractor(s), amount of subcontracts and bid items on the City of Waterloo Minority and/or Women Business Pre-bid Contact Information Form submitted with this Form of Bid or Proposal. The apparent low Bidder shall submit a list of all other Subcontractor(s) to be used on this Project to the City of Waterloo by 5:00 p.m. the business day following the day Bids on this Project are due along with the Non-Collusion Affidavits of AM Subcontractor(s). The Contractor shall submit information on subcontractors on "SUBCONTRACTOR REQUEST AND APPROVAL" Form to be provided by CITY prior to approval of contract. �- The subcontractors listed on this proposal and/or submitted to the Contract Compliance Officer cannot be changed except for the following reasons: -� 1) The City of Waterloo does not approve the subcontractors. 2) The subcontractors submit in writing that they cannot fulfill their subcontr acts. 13. The Bidder has filled in all blanks on this proposal. Those blanks not applicable are marked "none" or"NA". 14. The Bidder has attached all applicable forms. 15. CITY reserves the right to select alternates, delete line items, and/or to reduce q lantities prior to the award of a contract due to budgetary limitations. FORM OF BID Section BF-7 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 (Name of Bidder) (Date) BY: Title Official Address: (Including Zip Code): I.R.S. No. END OF SECTION FORM OF BID Section BF-8 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 INFORMATION NEEDED FOR IOWA CONSTRUCTION SALES TAX EXEMPTION CERTIFICATE. CONTRACTOR NAME: ADDRESS: (Check One) PRIME SUBCONTRACTOR FEDERAL ID#: PROJECT NAME: PROJECT CONTRACT NO.: DESCRIPTION OF WORK: ❑ Brickwork ❑ Landscaping ❑ Carpentry ❑ Painting ❑ Concrete ❑ Paving ❑ Drywall-Plaster-Insulation ❑ Plumbing ❑ Electrical ❑ Roofing-Siding-Sheet Metal ❑ Excavation/Grading ❑ Windows ❑ Flooring ❑ Wrecking-Demolition ❑ Heavy Construction ❑ Other (Please specify) ❑ Heating-Ventilating-Air Cond ❑ SALES TAX EXEMPTION Section STE-1 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 BID BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we, as Principal, and as Surety are held and firmly bound unto the CITY OF WATERLOO , Iowa, herei rafter called "OWNER." In the penal sum Dollars ($ ) lawful money of the United States, for the ,)ayment of which sum will and truly be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, a:iministrators, and successors, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. The condition of this obli_ration is such that whereas the Principal has submitted the accompanying bid dated the day of , 20 , for NOW, THEREFORE, (a) If said Bid shall be rejected, or in the alternate, (b) If said Bid shall be accepted and the Principal shall execute and deliver a contract in the form specified and shall furnish a bond for his faithful performance of said contract, and for the payment of all persons performing labor or furnishing materials in connection therewith, and shall in all other respects perform the agreement created by the acceptance of said Bid, Then this obligation shall be void, otherwise the same shall remain in force ar d effect; it being expressly understood and agreed that the liability of the Surety for any and all clain'3 hereunder shall, in no event, exceed the penal amount of this obligation as herein stated. By virtue of statutory authority, the full amount of this bid bond shall be forfeited to the Owner in liquidation of damages sustained in the event that the Principal fails to execute the contract and provide the bond as provided in the specifications or by law. The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligations of said Surety and its bond shall be in no way impaired or affected by any extension of the time within which the Owner may accept such Bid or execute such contract; and said Surety does hereby waive notice of any such extension. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and the Surety, have hereunto set their har is and seals, and such of them as are corporations, have caused their corporate seals to be hereto affixed and these presents to be signed by their proper officers this day of , A.D. 20 (Seal) Principal By (l itle) (Seal) Witness Surety By Witness Attorney-in-fact BID BOND Section BB-1 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT OF PRIME BIDDER — State of ) )ss County of ) , being first duly sworn, deposes and says that: 1. He is (Owner, Partner, Officer, Representative, or Agent) , of , the Bidder that has submitted the attached Bid; 2. He is fully informed respecting the preparation and contents of the attached Bid and of all pertinent circumstances respecting such Bid; 3. Such Bid is genuine and is not a collusive or sham Bid; 4. Neither the said Bidder nor any of its officers, partners, owners, agents, representatives, employees, or parties in interest, including this affiant, has in any way colluded, conspired, connived or agreed, directly or indirectly, with any other Bidder, firm or person to submit a collusive or sham Bid in connection with the Contract for which the attached Bid has been submitted or to refrain from bidding in connection with such Contract, or has in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion or communication or conference with any other Bidder, firm or person to fix the price or prices in the attached Bid or of any other Bidder, or, to fix any overhead, profit or cost element of the bid price or the bid price of any other Bidder, or to secure through any collusion, conspiracy, connivance, or unlawful agreement any advantage against the City of Waterloo, Iowa, or any person interested in the Proposed Contract; and 5. The price or prices quoted in the attached Bid are fair and proper and are not tainted by any collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement on the part of the Bidder or any of its agents, representatives, owners, employees, or parties in interest, including this affiant. (Signed) Title Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , 20 Title My commission expires NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT Section NCA-1 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT OF SUBCONTRACTOR State of ) ss: County of , being first duly sworn, deposes and says that: 1. He is (Owner, Partner, Officer, Representative, or Agent) of hereinafter referred to as the "Subcontractor;" 2. He is fully informed respecting the preparation and conter is of the subcontractor's proposal submitted by the subcontractor to , contract pertaining to the project in • (City or County and State) 3. Such subcontractor's proposal is genuine and is not a collusiv or sham proposal; 4. Neither the subcontractor nor any of its officers, partners, owners, agents, representatives, employees, or parties in interest, including this affiant, has in any way colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed, directly or indirectly, with any other bidder, firm or person to submit a collusive or sham proposal in connection with such contract or to refrain from submitting a proposal in connection with such contract, or has in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by unlawful agreement or connivance with any other bidder, firm or person to fix the price or prices in said subcontractor's proposal, or to fix any overhead, profit or cost element of the price of prices in said subcontractor's proposal, or to secure through collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement any advantage against the City of Waterloo, Iowa, or any person interested in the proposed contract; and 5. The price or prices quoted in the subcontractor's proposal are fair and proper and are not tainted by any collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement on the part of the bidder or any of its agents, representatives, owners, employees, or parties in interest, including this affiant. (Signed) Title Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , 20 Title My commission expires END OF SECTION NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT Section NCA-2 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 EQUAL OPPORTUNITY CLAUSE (As provided in Executive Order No. 11246) All contractors, subcontractors, vendors and suppliers of goods and services doing business with the City and value of said business equals or exceeds ten thousand dollars ($10,000.00) annually agree as follows: 1. The contractors, subcontractor, vendor and supplier of goods and services will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, creed, sex, national origin, economic status, age, mental or physical handicap, political opinions or affiliations. The contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier will develop an Affirmative Action program to ensure that applicants are employed and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, creed, color, sex, national origin, religion, economic status, age, mental or physical disability, political opinions or affiliations. Such actions shall include but not be limited to the following: a. Employment b. Upgrading c. Demotion or Transfer d. Recruitment and Advertising e. Layoff or Termination — f. Rates of Pay or Other Forms of Compensation g. Selection for Training Including Apprenticeship 2. The contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier of goods and services will in all solicitations or advertisements for employees, state that all qualified applicants will receiv,) consideration for employment without regard to race, creed, color, sex, national origin, religion economic status, age, mental or physical disabilities, political opinion or affiliations. 3. The contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier or his/her collective bargaining representative will send to each labor union or representative of workers which he/she has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice advising said labor union or workers' representative of the contractor's commitment under this sec tion. 4. The contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier of goods and services 011 comply with all published rules, regulations, directives, and order of the City of Waterloo Affirmative Action Program Contract Compliance Provisions. 5. The contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier of goods and services will furnish and file compliance reports within such time and upon such forms as provided by the Affirmative Action Officer. Said forms will elicit information as to the policies, procedures, patterns, and practices of each subcontractor as well as the contractor himself/herself and said contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier will permit access to his/her employment books, records and accounts to the City's Affirmative Action Officer, for the purpose of investigation to ascertain compliance with this contract and with rules and regulations of the City's Affirmative Action Program—Contract Compliance Provisions relative to Resolution No. 24664. 6. In the event of the contractor's non-compliance with the non-discrimination clauses of this contract or with any of such rules, regulations and orders, this contract may be canceled, terminated or suspended in whole or in part and the contractor may be declared ineligible for further contracts in accordance with procedures authorized by the City Council. EQUAL OPPORTUNITY CLAUSE Section EOC-1 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 7. The contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier of goods and services will include, or incorporate by reference, the provisions of the non-discrimination clause in every contract, subcontract or purchase order unless exempted by the rules, regulations or orders of the City's Affirmative Action Program, and will provide in every subcontract, or purchase order that said provisions will be binding upon each contractor, subcontractor, or supplier. 8. We, the undersigned, recognize that we are morally and legally committed to non-discrimination in employment. Any person who applies for employment with our company will not be discriminated against because of race, creed, color, sex, national origin, economic status, age, mental or physical disabilities. (Signed) (Appropriate Off cial) (Title) (Da:e) END OF SECTION EQUAL OPPORTUNITY CLAUSE Section EOC-2 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 TITLE VI CIVIL RIGHTS During the performance of this contract, the contractor (for itself), its assignees, and s.accessors in interest (hereinafter referred to as the "contractor") agrees as follows: 1. Compliance with Regulations: The contractor shall comply with the Regulations relative to non-discrimination in Federally assisted programs of the DOT Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 21, as they may be amended from time to time, (hereinafter referred to as the Regulations), which are herein incorporated by reference and made a part of this contract. 2. Nondiscrimination: The contractor, with regard to the work performed by it during the contract, shall not discriminate on the grounds of race, color, national origin, sex, age, or disability in the selection and retention of subcontractors, including procurement of materials and leases of equipment. The contractor shall not participate either directly or indirectly in the discrimination prohibited by section 21.5 of the Regulations, including employment practices when the contract covers a program set forth in Appendix B of the Regulations. 3. Solicitations for Subcontracts, Including Procurement of Materials and Equipment: In all solicitations either by competitive bidding or negotiation made by the contractor for work to be performed under a subcontract, including procurement of materials or leases of equipment, each potential subcontractor or supplier shall be notified by the contractor of the contractor's obligations under this contract and the Regulations relative to non-discrimination on the grounds of race, color, national origin, sex, age, or disability. 4. Information and Reports: The contractor shall provide all information and reports required by the Regulations or directives issued pursuant there to, and shall allow access to its books, records, accounts, other sources of information, and its facilities as may be determined by the Contracting Authority, the Iowa DOT, or FHWA to be pertinent to ascertain compliance with such Regulations, orders and instructions. Where any information required of a contractor is in the exclusive possession of another who fails or refuses to furnish this information the contractor shall so certify to the Contracting Authority, the Iowa DOT, or the FHWA as appropriate, and shall set forth what efforts it has made to obtain the information. 5. Sanctions for Noncompliance: In the event of the contractor's noncompliance with the nondiscrimination provisions of this contract, the Contracting Authority, the lov.'a DOT, or the FHWA shall impose such contract sanctions as they may determine to be appropriate, including, but not limited to: a. Withholding of payments to the contractor under the contract until the .ontractor — complies, and/or b. Cancellation, termination, or suspension of the contract, in whole or in part. 6. Incorporation of Provisions: The contractor shall include the provisions of paragraphs (1) through (6) in every subcontract, including procurement of materials and leases of equipment, unless exempt by the Regulations, or directives issued pursuant thereto. The contractor shall take such action with respect to any subcontract or procurement as the Contracting Authority, the Iowa DOT, or the FHWA may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions including sanctions for non-compliance: Provided, however, that, in the event of a contractor becomes involved in, or it threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor or supplier as a result of such direction, the contractor may request the Contracting Authority or the Iowa DOT to enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the Contracting Authority or the Iowa DOT; and, in addition, the contractor may request the United States to enter into such litigation to protect the interest of the United States. TITLE VI CIVIL RIGHTS Section CR-1 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 Bidder Status Form — To be completed by all bidders Part A Please answer"Yes" or"No" for each of the following: — ❑ Yes ❑ No My company is authorized to transact business in Iowa. (To help you determine if your company is authorized, please review the worksheet on the next page). ❑ Yes ❑ No My company has an office to transact business in Iowa. — ❑ Yes ❑ No My company's office in Iowa is suitable for more than receiving mail, telephone calls, and e-mail. ❑ Yes ❑ No My company has been conducting business in Iowa for at least 3 years prior to the first request for bids on this project. - ❑ Yes ❑ No My company is not a subsidiary of another business entity or my company is a subsidiary of another business entity that would qualify as a resident bidder in Iowa. If you answered "Yes" for each question above, your company qualifies as a resident bidder. Please complete Parts B and D of this form. If you answered "No"to one or more questions above, your company is a nonresident bidder. Please complete Parts C and D of this form. — To be completed by resident bidders Part B My company has maintained offices in Iowa during the past 3 years at the following addresses: Dates: / / to / / Address: City, State, Zip: Dates: / / to / / Address: City, State, Zip: Dates: / / to / / Address: You may attach additional sheet(s) if needed. City, State, Zip: To be completed by non-resident bidders Part C 1. Name of home state or foreign country reported to the Iowa Secretary of State: 2. Does your company's home state or foreign country offer preferences to resident bidders, resident labor force preferences or any other type of preference to bidders or laborers? ❑ Yes El No 3. If you answered "Yes"to question 2, identify each preference offered by your company's home state or foreign country and the appropriate legal citation. You may attach additional sheet(s) if needed. To be completed by all bidders Part D I certify that the statements made on this document are true and complete to the best of my knowledge and I know that my failure to provide accurate and truthful information may be a reason to reject my bid. Firm Name: Signature: Date: You must submit the completed form to the governmental body requesting bids per 875 Iowa Administrative Code Chapter 156.This form has been approved by the Iowa Labor Commissioner. RB-1 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 Worksheet: Authorization to Transact Business This worksheet may be used to help complete Part A of the Resident Bidder Status form. If at least one of the following describes your business, you are authorized to transact business in Iowa. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is currently registered as a contractor with the Iowa Division of Labor. -- ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a sole proprietorship and I am an Iowa resident for Iowa income tax purposes. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a general partnership or joint venture. More than 50 percent of the general — partners or joint venture parties are residents of Iowa for Iowa income tax purposes. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is an active corporation with the Iowa Secretary of State and has paid all fees required by the Secretary of State, has filed its most recent biennial report, and has not filed articles of dissolution. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a corporation whose articles of incorporation are filed in a state other than Iowa, — the corporation has received a certificate of authority from the Iowa secretary of state, has filed its most recent biennial report with the secretary of state, and has neither received a certificate of withdrawal from the secretary of state nor had its authority revoked. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a limited liability partnership which has filed a statement of qualification in this state and the statement has not been canceled. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a limited liability partnership which has filed a statement of qualification in a state other than Iowa, has filed a statement of foreign qualification in Iowa and a statement of cancellation has not been filed. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a limited partnership or limited liability limited partnership which has filed a certificate of limited partnership in this state, and has not filed a statement of termination. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a limited partnership or a limited liability limited partnership whose certificate of limited partnership is filed in a state other than Iowa, the limited partnership or limited liability limited partnership has received notification from the Iowa secretary of state that the application for certificate of authority has been approved and no notice of cancellation has been filed by the limited partnership or the limited liability limited partnership. 0 Yes ❑ No My business is a limited liability company whose certificate of organization is filed in Iowa and has not filed a statement of termination. - ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a limited liability company whose certificate of organization is filed in a state other than Iowa, has received a certificate of authority to transact business in Iowa and the certificate has not been revoked or canceled. RB-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 Revised Febru iry 2003 CONTRACTOR'S OR SUBCONTRACTOR'S AFFIRMATIVE ACTION PROGRAM Check box that applies to party completing program: ( ) General Contractor ( ) Subcontractor Section A to be completed by GENERAL CONTRACTORS only: A. Name of Company Address of Company Zip Telephone Number ( ) Federal ID Number (if no Federal ID Number, Owner/President's Social Secur ty Number) Name of Equal Employment Officer Name of Project Project Contract Number Estimated Construction Work Dates / Start Fini >h Section B to be completed by SUBCONTRACTORS only: B. Name of General or Prime Contractor Name of Subcontractor Subcontractor's Address Zip Subcontractor's Telephone Number ( ) Subcontractor's Federal ID Number (if no Federal ID Number Owner/President's Social Security Number) Name of Equal Employment Officer AFFIRMATIVE ACTION Section AA-1 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 C. Remainder of program to be completed by party completing program, Either Prime or Subcontractor. 1. The Owners and/or Principals of your company: Ethnic — Name Address Position Sex Oricin 2. Other Areas of Interest: If your company has branches or subsidiaries, or if your compar y is a branch or subsidiary of a parent organization, give the following information: Type of Name Address Affiliation Degree II. EMPLOYER'S POLICY (Please read carefully.) A. We, the undersigned, recognize that we are morally and legally committed to nondiscrimination in employment. Any person who applies for employment with our company will not be discriminated against because of race, color, creed, sex, national origin, economic status, age, mental or physical handicap. B. The employment policies and practices of the undersigned are to recruit and hire employees without discrimination, and to treat them equally with respect to compensation and opportunities for advancement, including training, upgrading, promotion, and transfer. However, we realize the inequities associated with employment training, upgrading, contracting and subcontracting for minorities and women and we will direct our efforts to correcting any deficiencies to the maximum extent possible. The same will be required of our SUBCONTRACTORS and suppliers. C. We submit this program to assure compliance with Executive Order 1- 246, as amended, and other subsequent orders that may pertain to equal employme It opportunity and merit employment policies, fully realizing that our qualification an i/or merit system should be evaluated and revised, if necessary. D. We agree to put forth the maximum effort to achieve full employmer t and utilization of capabilities and productivity of all our citizens without regard to race creed, color, sex, national origin, economic status, age, and mental or physical handicap . AFFIRMATIVE ACTION Section AA-2 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 E. will give training (Name of Company) and employment opportunities to local residents of Waterloo, Iowa, to the greatest extent feasible. III. AFFIRMATIVE ACTION A. rE•cognizes that the (Name of Company) effective application of a policy of merit employment involves more than just a policy statement, and (Name of Company) will, therefore, re-evaluate our Affirmative Action Program to e isure that equal employment opportunities are available on the basis of individual melt, and to actively encourage minorities, women and local residents to seek employment with our company on this basis. B. will undertake the (Name of Company) following six (6) steps to improve our Affirmative Action Program: 1. Minority Recruitment and Employment; 2. Local Recruitment and Employment; 3. Disabled Veteran and Vietnam Era Veteran Recruitment and E nployment; 4. Handicapped Recruitment and Employment; 5. Female Recruitment and Employment; and 6. Training, Upgrading and Promotional Opportunities. C. will take (Name of Company) whatever steps are necessary to ensure that our total work force has idequate minority, female, and local representation. We will utilize the following methods in our recruitment attempts: 1. Local advertising media (newspapers, radio, TV); 2. Community organizations (churches, clubs, schools); 3. Public and private institutions in the area (UNI, Hawkeye Comn unity College); 4. Job Service of Iowa; and 5. Other. D. will seek qualified minority, (Name of Company) female, and local group applicants for all job categories and will make asserted efforts to increase minority, female and group representation in occupations at the higher levels or skill and responsibility. E. All sources of employment used shall be aware that we are an Equal Employment Opportunity Employer. Labor organizations representing our employees will be notified of our Equal Employment Opportunity Policy and Affirmative Action Program. AFFIRMATIVE ACTION Section AA-3 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 F. Training, upgrading, promotion and transfer activities at all levels wi i be monitored to ensure that full consideration has been given to qualified minority, female, and local group employees. G. wily encourage other (Name of Company) companies with whom we are associated and/or do business, to do the same and we will assist them in their efforts. H. has taken the following (Name of Company) Affirmative Action to ensure that minority, female, local contractors and/or suppliers were provided opportunities to negotiate and/or bid on this project: (if none, write "NONE") 1. 2. I. As a result of the above efforts, we have involved minority, female, and local contractors and/or suppliers in the following areas of subcontracting: (if none, write "NONE") 1. 2. J. will require approved (Name of Company) Affirmative Action Programs from all nonexempt contractors who propose to work on this project and will take whatever steps are necessary to ensure that non-minority contractors have adequate representation of minority, female and local persons in their total work force. K. In further accordance with rules and guidelines issued pursuant to Executive Order 11246 as amended, we establish the goals for our company, based on parity percentages supplied by the City, and we realize these goals will be reviewed on an annual basis. L. II keep records of (Name of Company) specific actions relative to recruitment, employment, training, upgrading and promotion and will provide the City of Waterloo with any information relative to same, including activities of our SUBCONTRACTORS and suppliers as necessary or when requested. M. Parity figures for companies located in Waterloo are as follows: Minority Parity = .08 (8(3/0) N. Affirmative Action (Name of Company) AFFIRMATIVE ACTION Section AA-4 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 Employment Goals: The definition of Affirmative Action Goals is as follows: "Goals may not be rigid and inflexible quotas which must be met, but must be targets, reasonably attainable by means of applying every good faith effort to make all aspects of the entire Affirmative Action Program work." For the year 2019, please submit percentage targets for employi ig minorities and women. If you already have reached your target for hiring minorities aid women, please submit that percentage. *Goals for Minorities: Goals for Women: 0/0 *Your affirmative action goals should be between 1% and 10% or n lore for minorities and 1% and 5% or more for women. Please be advised that the goals or targets are purely your estimation of how many women and minorities your company can reasonably expect to hire in 2019. Note, that none of the goals are rigid or inflexible. They are targets that your company calculates as reasonably attainable. This will help the City in its monitoring procedures as required by City of Waterloo Resolution No. 1984-142(4). AFFIRMATIVE ACTION Section AA-5 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 CONTRACTOR'S TOTAL WORK FORCE (WATERLOO) HOURLY NAME AND ADDRESS JOB CATEGORY RACE SE K WAGE INDICATE: DISABLED VETERAN: DV VIETNAM ERA VETERAN: VV HANDICAPPED: H AFFIRMATIVE ACTION Section AA-6 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 We hereby certify that we are in compliance with all City and Federal Affirmati.e Action Regulations and agree to accept all liability for failure to comply. Respectfully submitted, - By: Company Executive Date By: Equal Employment Opportunity Officer Date City of Waterloo Affirmative Action Officer Approved Disapproved Reason: _ By: Date: END OF SECTION AFFIRMATIVE ACTION Section AA-7 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 DESCRIPTION OF JOB CATEGORIES 1. Officials/Manager: Occupations in which employees set broad policies exercise overall responsibility for execution of all policies, or direct individual departments or special phases of the agency's operations or provide specialized consultation on a regional, district or area basis. Includes: department heads, bureau chiefs, division chiefs, directors, deputy directors, controllers, examiners, wardens, superintendents, unit supervisors, sheriffs, police and fire chiefs and inspectors and kindred workers. 2. Professionals: Occupations which require specialized and theoretical knowledge which is usually required through college training or thorough work experience and other training which provides comparable knowledge. Includes: personnel and labor relations workers, social workers, doctors, psychologists, registered nurses, economists, dietitians lawyers, system analysts, accountants, engineers, employment and vocational rehabilitation counselors, teachers or instructors, police and fire captains and lieutenants and kindred workers. 3. Technicians: Occupations which require a combination of basic scie Itific or technical knowledge and manual skill which can be obtained through specialized post secondary school education and through equivalent on-the-job training. Includes: computer programmers and operations, draftsmen, surveyors, licensed practical nurses, photographs radio operators, technical illustrators, police and fire sergeants and kindred workers. 4. Office/Clerical: Workers are responsible for internal and external commu iication, recording and retrieval of data and/or information and other paper work required in E l office. Includes: bookkeepers, messengers, office machine operators, clerk-typists, stenographers, court transcribers, hearing reporters, statistical clerks, dispatchers, license distribu-ors, payroll clerks and kindred workers. 5. Skilled Craft Workers: Workers perform jobs which require special rr:3nual skill and a thorough and comprehensive knowledge of the processes involved in t )e work which is acquired through on-the-job training programs. Includes: Mechanics and repairman, electricians, heavy equipment operators, stationary engineers, skilled mac hine occupations, carpenters, compositors and typesetters and kindred workers. 6. Sales Workers: Occupations engaging wholly and primarily in direct selling. Includes: advertising agents and salesman, insurance agents and brokers, real E state agents and brokers, stock and bond salesmen, demonstrators, salesmen and sales cle-ks, grocery clerks and cashier checkers, and kindred workers. 7. Operatives (semi-skilled): Workers who operate machine or processing equipment or perform other factory-type duties of intermediate skill level which can be mastered in a few weeks and require only limited training. Includes: apprentices (auto mechanics), plumbers, building trades, metal working trades, bricklayers, carpenters, electricians, machinists, mechanics, printing trades, etc., operatives, attendants (auto service and parking), plasterers, chauffeurs, deliverymen and furnacemen, heaters (metal), laundry and dry cleaning operatives, milliners, mine operatives and laborers, motormen, oilers and greasers, (except auto painters), (except construction and maintenance), photographic process workers, stationary .fireman, truck and tractor drivers, weavers, (textile), welders and flame cutters and kindred workers. AFFIRMATIVE ACTION Section AA-8 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 8. Laborers (unskilled): Workers in manual occupations which generally require no special training. Perform elementary duties that may be learned in few days and require the application of little or no independent judgment. Includes: garage laborers, car washers and greasers, gardeners (except farm) and groundskeepers, longshoremen, and stevedores, lumbermen, craftsmen and woodchoppers, laborers performing lifting, digging, mixing, loading and pulling operations and kindred workers. 9. Apprentices: Persons employed in a program including work training and re ated instruction to learn a trade or craft which is traditionally an apprenticeship, regardless of whether the program is registered with a Federal or State agency. 10. Trainees (on-the-job): Production. . . persons in formal training for craftsmen when not trained under apprentice programs--operative laborer, and service occupations. White Collar. . . persons engaged in formal training for clerical, managE:rial, professional, technical, sales, office and clerical occupations. END OF SECTION AFFIRMATIVE ACTION Section AA-9 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 ITEMS OF POTENTIAL MBE/WBE PARTICIPATION NOTICE TO PROSPECTIVE BIDDERS: The following are items from the F.Y. 2020 Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids MODIFICATIONS, City Contract No. 994, that have a potential for MBE/WBE ='articipation. This listing, however, is not intended to be all encompassing; to preclude MBE/WBE Contractors from bidding on any items of the Proposal as a Subcontractor or the entire Proposal as a F—ime Contractor. BID ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT EST. QTY. 1 ALL WORK DESCRIBED LS 1.00 MBE/WBE GOALS FOR THIS PROJECT IMPORTANT: Prime Contract Bidders should be aware that ten percent (10%) MBE goal and a two percent (2%) WBE goal is attached to this project. "Certified Return Receipt" letters are no longer needed with the bid showing proof of contacting MBE or WBE Subcontractors, but the Pre-Bid Contact Information Form must be filled out completely. City of Waterloo Contract Compliance Officer: Contract Compliance Officer Community Development Board Carnegie Annex, Suite 202 620 Mulberry Street Waterloo, IA 50703 Phone: (319) 291-4429 ITEMS OF POTENTIAL Section M-1 MBE-WBE PARTICIPATION 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 SUBCONTRACTOR'S BID REQUEST FORM PRIME BIDDER'S LETTERHEAD Contract No.: Letting Date: I, (subcontractor's name), hereby attest that I have been solicited for a bid on (project name) in the area of (description of work and bid item no.). (Prime contractor) has informed me that if I am interested in bidding, a subcontracting bid proposal must be submitted to the company office by (date) and (time). Subcontractor's C )mpany Name Date Subcontractor's S gnature Date Prime Bidder's Sic:nature SUBCONTRACTOR'S BID REQUEST FORM Section M-2 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 LETTER TO BE USED WHEN SOLICITING FOR SUBCONTRACTOR QUOTES Subcontractor Company Name Address RE: Contract No.: Dear (Prime Contractor's Company Name) is presently soliciting for the following work in cc nnection with the above referenced project. (Insert bid Item Nos. and Description of Work) (Prime Contractor's Company Name) is an Equal Opportunity Employer, and all qualif ed bidders will not be discriminated against due to race, religion, color, sex, or origin. If interested in bidding your proposal must be turned in to this office by and (Date) (Time) Sincerely, (Prime Contractor's Representative) SUBCONTRACTOR QUOTES Section M-3 Form COO- 3 (11/28/2001) 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 LETTER OF INTENT TO BID (MBE/WBE LETTER) According to the Current MBE/WBE Contract Compliance Program - 2002, all MBE WBE Contractors interested in submitting subcontractor quotes on construction projects with goals MUST submit a LETTER OF INTENT TO BID to the City of Waterloo Contract Compliance Officer at least seven (7) days prior to bid opening. The LETTER OF INTENT TO BID must list the specific items which the MBE/V.BE Contractor is interested in bidding. Letter should include the following: Name of Project: Your Company Name: Address: Phone: Date: List of Specific items to be bid: Item No. Description: Item No. Description: Item No. Description: Item No. Description: Item No. Description: (Subcontractor's Company Name and authorized signature) Return this LETTER OF INTENT TO BID to: Contract Compliance Officer Community Development Board 620 Mulberry St. Carnegie Annex, Suite 202 Waterloo, IA 50703 Phone: (319) 291-4429 Form CCO-5 (06-20-2002) _ LETTER OF INTENT TO BID Section M-4 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 p 77 15 • a)o_+� CZa) C a) a' • a C U '_ U Cc)-} ° UE W jRI -p QE Q 0 a) U) U) ID 0 Z + p m O "p c _ Q o o 0 - w ' -0 2 CU — 0, L woo L p ^� 0_ O co N-too c U O ,E U ID o L - a) co )) a) c 0 LL a) c Q LO Q0 ..... L m C (...) - - 0U p co ) P f C m C Z E U ca) Li.' 0O D Ea)Wa) a,p � O EQ> U e -- 0 -0 E 0 > m -O inQ � � oa Li co � � cnmo� °� U mC mLp m E ° +O'> ) U ) L - coL m ° -; Q 0L C� O W .� LL >O �, c `~ �Q- c -oCiom ZZ.L 2 cn a � oU � a) a2 p �vQc om = cnCDZ ml — U) a - m - U Ecm o co c QE cn cn 0 O 0o CD lil - U) a) O a +� H N U a) c ° �_ Q U) C LL Q C }' p Z p C) CO cn U) L coC If 0 on Q .i-- L ++ .0 ° •m H L o L C � W � -C o Cam ( •- 0 L E E Q � � °_ � H U 4- c , U) Q- m � L W W m > U) m C O o a) V) U Q m _ Z m L U a) W CDC 2 ' -c mo C U) >,� a Ce > m 0U p cn • 0 L C = 0 D 0 -0 _, m CC W O CO m U) `� - Cl) w 3 D cc W CO N C v C) ° o U) m _C L •�.. '� `n � jai m p ° � U o Z Z m J .V < m 'Cr] - cn U s C Z Wcn O po � >, = - a) -0 � w w � � Wo m E mQ�. � � cn U) a) ' o U � CO c > W 2m r'CSco cm < U U) c C) c o Wa 5 - �- ZOc -°D a) -c a) vi Cl) 2 � 45w co . > � 00 to o �' 2 lc HQ E CW 'C 0 LU Ecn -c " 2 > °) ' c0n00 a) v � � 2 -E-' � mm � C E Z ° C L �-•' p U C, L2 U) CO l co U ?§ a) p O E Cl) U }' p U o C }' co O Z C ' a) O E cW QL .E D c >>� .> Up) > o_ p � � c� W U)0 0 LLB Emu) o m > � � 35co coQ � � � MI— a) N -2 m ZOO p m 0 E U c p C 0- (2 c p o p L Z m ho U `� ° tea) °cts � � o -ao �' �o � � = V) CD (/)) 0 WQ omU Q -cL Da) a) - Opco aL oo o o mZ ° ° -0m Hi -°D Empo ° m wc •� � � >, 00 � � cLQ) O U 2 0 ,_ ECU Z � c cn � Lc apoo � Omc � o vQ D UE O }' a) cfmm a) - � �' ou_ E0a) pa) UQ L CC U mL U � > hoc a) � pa) }' ZcnCL U3 ccn = ° - • I- 0 cam ° o C ° up, o -Co m � O ° co Z CO o0 u, a) m a) Q UU >,`- L °C E. � � D, o m ° � � � � � �j o co u/') p o Q p o Q N � C -C, � Y � c o ° -C o L c m 7 c a' o m E fw ° c � u) ° p E D- +' Q 0 cc po ° � dap , -- ° cn p pU � Qu, � L a . c 0 o a >' Uc -a w ^ � cn � , ° U E m � 0Eppcn O ° � � O o C N N U •N N N N ° o C'Z ° '7 E ) O _ U) m Z ._ cncna) � � c Wm5U c -oUp •- - Do• c — cnCpp � O _ . 0 -0 o U) Q. N ( m c a) c > m '( EVE 3 � a) � § CO o c -°D � p >' m , wcfl � o cn E 0w � � Q o �� Q- � a) +; _ > a) c °Q 2 0 U p N H O 'D W _0 '— O W o N > L N u) .Q O U) a) �' — C up) U O o O N c " 4- o Z > °' m c U >, m - a.) ,.... u' cnZ U) — �. cn L la c LF E Q moo _ ° 2 a) W a) D' 2 u' CO Q m U � p m u, 0 . o o 0 cO c a) O a) � O C ) O a,c � � M° o ° W cCU � Vo� c ° u°, p CO Q,= a) °' Z CO o � � w > " o ° m m °' o a) U) U) L � U � •° m c c EO a'� Z o ° D o }' m � ° L, co cm � m • Lmvi CO L co H CD 13 ° O -D Z co ,_ C U ° •U U Q -CD L H m C o N Q m a) `� U Q >` U a) L a) p a) -c p a) L, p O p U o W L.Li C D� Q cc G i U p).L D U 'p — L _ ++ +-� -0 a) >., p m — , E — E m m m E c p o p D m O OO m — m S_ Q L O a) O O E CO .c)-8 o �, z Q Ca mEYD- E +' p � p2 C � 000 � w }. mUE >,Um o U � o uu. L l m W m 0 -o E _c o .to 2 3 W O O 'C C V L E c o p O i � LL N U, 0 o Q - - m — Z 2 O 0- < m m % m ° m U } U O E +-' E .c mW v >, — W 2 2 2U co `n U ° LU O N .� U) CO m — O m m U m U a) ++ — C� U Q � o' w p C � U � �� o Q c _c o � o r U E E ° E .o CO a) E .g oW oa) _cW mLU O C 0 C � U Oc o� .i .— c — = D) o Q w p m U Z H pp — Z N W O � ° O a d . m , .N N up) U) 2 M O .4 L W H 0 U) T U U �' D- MU_ o D) a) ca cn } a) a) c� co 'O 0 Q a) co (0 L a)o_ aL C co = o a 8 E a) LU +-. 4- U) o -0 (,) (n 0 "cs '- CI) - N N 0 _ COO E 0 N O Q) G44 0 o o 40 m a) i L U co • Or p O O LU ° .: y Q Q Q (ten Q -d C o 0 o E = w 8 U z o c, ai O o co a) E r � o c >, m _ df co _o • c — ,� 0 o� 0 Q Q m L = _C u) a) . a) o >, 0 ' J .O a) O CO a) — d L (A Q o +' " , N m �cp o > v 0 a) o W co o E ai o E c im ~ Z WCe Q � o • (n ooco to H O a) Q = m cn Ce Z - � UJ 0a .aZ o3 o � o 0 � O CJ0 � CIaio ) W W oO ca -000 c4 rn � a vv (n � � a) V' a4 '0 o Z 2 m m C ° ° ° a :: Z WCe 0 .c o § W J AC � ; O o ai ° ° a V .n � � E an c ° O � .yC...) EF U a) W u) ( o 1— = Z a) L EL..) cu O U? OY (o a) V) III Ce jWW � .� ° um m cn Zo . WI j1- o > n OO HW o om1- a W , t oLIa) � ' Z = Z Li.' Z m � i - a) -0Q z r'i� o a -O CO4- (1) yCO co c13 -2 C fn C a) co 0Ce o . o '' O O m CO W n V >+ ° cv CL Z m -p a/ I— O N —O 2 8 - C a) u_ a.) co a z �� 0 ( a O W m C ° '— � � ,_NO m (n Wm Ca p Q CC o1 0 coCOC O C o L W Q On al wO � 73 '— W 2a) a J ° N E � - 1- Q m Urn L � _c a- Q C C.) o >. CO O L LO c3 J o c L � 2 Jo O o a, W LAN - 1— a ' Z a, a = Q a 0 c -c Cq v Z cfl co o�Eof NU o oc ° Um o O c u wz . o o •(�1.5 m � _� O L O A N . C ,p Q •1 U a o f L Cn C U OU C L ��l�r`�e� U LL1 >. O N O a) 0 ' 0i Z >+ L a) +�+ L U ,/ o W O a) ,`A 1i �Q E ° C m � = }' o�0 . a) LU o�a .i o 0 = J 0 o o a) o Z CO 0 V) Q O >- o 2 C -0 ,_ � CERTIFIED MBE CONTRACTORS CARTER ELECTRIC 725 Adams Street Waterloo, IA 50703 Phone: (319) 232-9808 Pager: (319) 235-4021 Contact: Derrick Carter Specializing in: ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR CULPEPPER ELECTRIC 1731 Cottage Grove Avenue Waterloo, IA 50707 Phone: (319) 235-0885 Fax: (319) 236-8177 Contact: Martin Culpepper Certified: City of Waterloo Certified MBE, Licensed Electrician Specializing in: ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR DANIELS HOME IMPROVEMENT 339 Albany Street Waterloo, IA 50703 Phone: (319) 961-1659 Contact: Sammy Daniels Specializing in: ALL TYPES OF CONCRETE FLATWORK, POURED WALLS—ALL TYPES, FOC TINGS, LIGHT DEMOLITION D.C. CORPORATION 426 Beech Street Waterloo, IA 50703 Phone: (319) 493-2542 FAX: (319) 236-0515 Contact: Terry Phillips Certified: City of Waterloo Certified MBE, Iowa DOT, TSB Certified Specializing in: COMMERCIAL AND RESIDENTIAL DEMOLITION, CONCRETE PAVING, DRIVE WAYS, TRUCKING (ALL TYPES), GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CERTIFIED MBE CONTRACTORS Section M-7 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 GREER'S WORKS 2003 Plainview Street Waterloo, IA 50703 Phone: (319) 233-4701 Contact: Willie Greer Specializing in: DRIVEWAYS, SIDEWALKS, CARPENTRY, ROOFING, GENERAL CONSTRUCTION ION OLD GREER'S WORKS 2309 Springview Street Waterloo, IA 50707 Phone: (319) 233-2150 Contact: David L. Greer, Sr. Specializing in: ROOFING & GENERAL CONSTRUCTION QUICK CONSTRUCTION 217 Bates Street Waterloo, IA 50703 Phone: (319) 215-4166 Contact: Leroy Harrington Specializing in: ALL TYPES OF CONCRETE FLATWORK AND GENERAL CONSTRUCTION D & D CONSTRUCTION 1124 West Donald Street Waterloo, IA 50703 Phone: (319) 961-4208 Contact: Darrell E. Caldwell, Sr. Specializing in: ROOFING AND GENERAL CONSTRUCTION E. CASTRO ROOFING 702 Riehl Street Waterloo, IA 50701 Phone: (319) 215-5683 Contact: Emillio Castro Specializing in: ROOFING, SIDING, GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CERTIFIED MBE CONTRACTORS Section M-8 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 CERTIFIED WBE CONTRACTORS ATLAS PAINTING, INC. 911 Sycamore Street P.O. BOX 65 Waterloo, IA 50704 Phone: (319) 232-9164 Specializing in: COMMERCIAL AND INDUSTRIAL PAINTING WATCO CONSTRUCTION, INC. 2920 Texas Street Waterloo, IA 50702 Phone: (319) 233-7481 Certified: City of Waterloo WBE Contact: Patricia J. Kimball Specializing in: STORM SEWER, INLETS, DRAIN TILE, WATER MAIN, SANITARY SEWER, IN-)AKE STRUCTURES PETERMAN & HAES CARPET ONE 4003 University Waterloo, IA 50701 Phone: (319) 233-6131 Fax: (319) 233-6133 Certified: City of Waterloo WBE Email: JR11486(c�cfu.net Contact: Carol Reese Specializing in: FLOOR COVERING CERTIFIED WBE CONTRACTORS Section M-9 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS (To be submitted by the Bidder only upon the specific request of the City of Waterloo, Iowa.) All questions must be answered, and the date given must be clear and comprehensiv_,. This statement must be notarized. If necessary, questions may be answered on separate attached sr eets. The Bidder may submit any additional information it desires. 1. Name of bidder. 2. Permanent main office address. 3. When organized. 4. If a corporation, when incorporated. 5. How many years have you been engaged in the contracting business under yc:lur present firm or trade name? 6. Contracts on hand: (Schedule these, showing amount of each contract and tr•3 appropriate anticipated dates of completion.) 7. General character of work performed by your company. 8. Have you ever failed to complete any work awarded to you? If so, where and Nhy? 9. Have you ever defaulted on a contract? If so, where and why? 10. List the more important projects recently completed by your company, stating •ne approximate cost for each, and the month and year completed. 11. List your major equipment available for this contract. 12. Experience in construction work similar in importance to this project. 13. Background and experience of the principal members of your organization, inc luding the officers. 14. Credit available: $ 15. Give bank reference: 16. Will you, upon request, fill out a detailed financial statement and furnish any o her information that may be required by the City of Waterloo, Iowa? 17. The undersigned hereby authorizes and requests any person, firm, or corporation to furnish any information requested by the City of Waterloo, Iowa, in verification of the recitals comprising this Statement of Bidder's Qualifications. STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS Section SQ-1 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 Dated at , this day of , 20 . (Name of Bidder) By: Title: State of ss: County of , being duly sworn deposes and says that t is of (Name of Organization) and that the answers to the foregoing questions and all statements therein contained are true and correct. Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , 20 . Notary Public My commission expires STATEMENT OF BIDDERS QUALIFICATIONS Section SQ-2 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 SECTION 00 55 10 EROSION CONTROL CERTIFICATION Dated: TO: (OWNER) ADDRESS: PROJECT: OWNER'S CONTRACT NO.: DESCRIPTION: I certify under penalty of law that I understand the terms and conditions of the National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) Permit that authorizes the storm water discharges associated with industrial activities from the construction site and as detailed in the Contract Documents. Further, by my signature, I understand that I am becoming a co-permittee, along with the owner(s) and other contractors and subcontractors signing such certifications, to the Iowa Department of Natural Resources NPDES General Permit No. 2 for "Storm Water Discharge Associated with Ind.astrial Activity for Construction Activities" at the project site. As a co-permittee, I understand that I, and my company, are legally required under the Clean Water Act and the Code of Iowa, to ensure compliai ice with the terms and conditions of the storm water pollution prevention plan developed under this NPDES permit and the terms of this NPDES permit. I agree to indemnify and hold the City harmless from any claims, demands, suits, causes of action, settlements, fines, or judgments and costs of litigation, including, but not limited to, reE sonable attorneys fees and costs of investigation and arising from a condition, obligation, or requirement assumed or to be performed by CONTRACTOR for storm water pollution and erosion control. Fines and other costs incurred against the City for CONTRACTOR's failure to prc vide the required erosion control practices will be paid by CONTRACTOR. (CONTRACTOR) By: (Authorized Signature) (Title) END OF SECTION _ EROSION CONTROL CERTIFICATION Section EC-1 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 GENERAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS 1. SCOPE OF WORK The work covered by this contract consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, and materials and performing all operations, in connection with the F.Y. 2020 Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids Modifications, City Contract No. 994, in accordance with these specifications. The Specifications are dated December 16, 2019. They have the general title of F.Y. 2020 Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids Modifications, City Contract No. 994. The following Drawings are part of the Contract Documents: Drawings titled: "F.Y. 2020 Wastewater Treatment Plant Biosolids Modifications, City Contract No. 994," Sheets No. 1 through 142, prepared by Strand Associates, Inc.' and Drawings listed in the table of contents that are bound with the Special Provisions. The standard specifications of the City of Waterloo are to be used along with the special provisions described herein and shall be considered as part of the Contract Documents. The 2017 Standard Specifications for the Iowa Statewide Urban Design Specifications program (as referenced) are to be used along with the special provisi )ns and General Specifications for Construction described herein and shall be considered pE rt of the Contract Documents. 2. CONFLICTING SPECIFICATIONS All requirements of other specifications contained in the contract documents .vhich conflict with the provisions of the special provisions will be considered void. 3. DUMPING AREAS Excess material resulting from construction operations shall be hauled to the County Landfill or other area secured by the Contractor and approved by the City Engineer. Rubble, rubbish, trees, brush, and other unsuitable backfill material, as designated by the City Engineer, shall be hauled to the County Landfill. All Landfill charges are to be considered incidental to the contract and are the responsibility of the Contractor. 4. CONSTRUCTION DAMAGE The Contractor shall exercise care during construction operations to ensure the safety and protection to existing features located near or within the limits of construction. Damage caused by negligence or poor workmanship, as determined by the Engineer, shall be considered the Contractor's responsibility. 5. REMOVED MATERIALS All materials removed as part of this Contract shall remain the property of the City unless the City determines that he materials are not salvageable and the City does not want to retain ownership of the materials. Materials designated in the field by the Engineer as nonsalvageable shall be hauled and disposed of by the Contractor at no cost to the City. All other materials shall GENERAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS Section GSP-1 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 be transported to locations as directed by the Engineer. No separate measur-3ment or payment will be made for hauling or disposing of removed materials and it shall be cot sidered incidental to applicable items. 6. OVERHAUL Overhaul will not be paid for "surplus material" obtained from any of the items of construction under this contract. The cost of overhaul will be considered as incidental to tr e items to which it applies. 7. MAILBOXES/STOP SIGNS The Contractor shall notify the United States Postal Department of mailboxes, which interfere with any part of the work before removing them, and the Contractor will relocate them as required by the Postmaster. The removal and replacement of mailboxes will not be considered for direct payment but will be considered incidental to the item to which it applies. The removal and replacement of stop signs will not be considered for direct payment but will be considered incidental to the item to which it applies. 8. PAY ITEMS All pay items are listed in the proposal and shall include the purchase of all materials, delivery of these materials, and furnishing all labor, plant and miscellaneous work needed to make the item complete. All such cost shall be incidental to the proposed item to which it applies and shall not be considered for separate payment. 9. BREAKDOWN OF LUMP SUM CONTRACT PRICE ITEMS The Contractor shall, immediately upon execution and delivery of the contra:A, before the first estimate for payment is made, deliver to the City Engineer a detailed estimate giving a complete breakdown of the lump sum contract prices. The submitted breakdown shall be approved by the City Engineer prior to any payment of any lump sum price item. 10. PERMISSION TO HAUL OVER STREETS, RAILROADS AND HIGHWAYS The Contractor will be required to secure, from the proper authorities, permission or permit which may be required to haul over streets, highways, railroads or private property, and any hauling operations of the Contractor shall be subject to the requirements of such permits, permission, and to all applicable regulations, laws, and ordinances governing hauling and movement of equipment over streets, railroads, highways and private property. Any costs or inconvenience caused by obtaining any necessary permits or permission shall be considered completely covered by the price bid for the items in the proposal. 11. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULING The City Engineer shall approve Contractor's work schedule prior to starting. All revisions shall also be approved. The City Engineer may change the schedule to accon modate changing construction conditions. The Contractor shall coordinate the work under this contract with contractor; performing work under other contracts which may be performed concurrently. GENERAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS Section GSP-2 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 The Contractor shall be responsible to notify the Police, Fire, Street and Engineering Departments of the closing and opening of streets. The Contractor shall commence work within ten (10) days after receipt of the "Notice to Proceed" and diligently execute the work of the contract to completion. 12. PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE Before any work is started, the Contractor shall arrange with the City Engin aer to hold a pre- construction conference to discuss problems and schedules of contracts. 13. UNDERGROUND UTILITIES It is the responsibility of the Contractor to obtain the location of gas lines, water lines, electric, telephone, and cable television cables or wires from the various utility companies and the City electrician before starting any excavation. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to any underground utilities. The Contractor shall expose those utilities indicated on the plans so that elevations may be determined before beginning construction. This work shall be considered incidental to other items of work. If the Contractor believes that additional costs have been incurred due to a utility being improperly located, the resolution of the additional costs incurred shall be n ade between the Contractor and the respective utility company. 14. TRAFFIC SIGNS AND STREET SIGNS The Contractor shall contact the City of Waterloo Traffic Operations Department to have any street sign that will be affected by construction removed and replaced when the work has been completed. 15. TRAFFIC CONTROL DURING CONSTRUCTION The Contractor shall, at its own expense and without further or other order, provide, erect and maintain, at all times during the progress and suspension of the work and until completion and final acceptance thereof, suitable and requisite barricades, signs or other adequate protection, as required by the latest edition of Part VI of the "Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices" and shall provide, keep and maintain such barricades, signs, etc., as may be required or as may be ordered by the Engineer, to ensure the safety of the public as well as those engaged on the work. All barricading plans shall be reviewed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall determine, provide and obtain approval from the City Engineer on all detour locations for all street closings, barricades and posting prior to construction. These shall meet requirements of the City Police Traffic Department. The Contractor shall notify the City Engineer's Office and the Police, Fire and Street Departments when the street is closed for construction. All barricading shall be in accordance with the latest edition of Part VI of the "Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices." Encapsulated lens sheeting is not required on this project. GENERAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS Section GSP-3 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 16. GRADES, LINES, LEVELS AND SURVEYS All necessary grades, lines, levels and surveys shall be established and -naintained by the Contractor. The Contractor shall verify all grades, lines, levels and dimensions as sowr on the drawings, and he shall report any errors or inconsistencies in the same to the Cit Engineer before commencing work. 17. SAFETY OF WORKERS AND PUBLIC The Contractor shall, at all times, take necessary precautions to protect the life and health of all persons employed on this project and the public. He shall provide necessary safety devices and safeguards in accordance with latest and best accident prevention practices. All such protection shall be furnished to employees without cost. No direct measurement of payment shall be made for this protection, but sf all be considered incidental to other items of work. The public shall be kept outside of any work ,irea. 18. CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT FOR PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT Section IX "Construction Equipment" of the "Specifications for Concrete Pavi ‘g, Widening, and Curb and Gutter" of the Standard Specifications for Municipal Public Works C( nstruction, City of Waterloo, Iowa, shall be amended as follows: Iowa Department of Transportation standard specification Section 2301.07 Construction Equipment For Portland Cement Concrete Pavement shall apply with the following exception to Section 2301.07.A.7.b Finishing Machine: The first sentence shall read as "A finishing machine will be required on all uniform width slabs ten (10) feet or more in wic:h upon which a continuous line of forms more than one hundred fifty (150) feet in length may be set, except for intersections or otherwise approved by the Engineer." 19. WORKING ON SATURDAYS, SUNDAYS AND LEGAL HOLIDAYS The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing forty-eight (48) hours in advance if work on Saturday is planned. By noon the Friday before the planned Saturday work, tre Contractor shall confirm the Saturday work schedule with the project inspector. Work on Sunday requires prior approval of the Engineer in accordance vrith the Waterloo Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall not work the following days due .:o City holidays: GENERAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS Section GSP-4 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 Holiday 2020 2021 New Year's Day Wednesday, January 1 Friday, January 1 Martin Luther King, Jr. Day Monday, January 20 Monday, January 18 President's Day Monday, February 17 Monday, February 15 Good Friday Friday, April 10 Friday, April 2 Memorial Day Monday, May 25 Monday, May 31 Independence Day Saturday, July 4 Sunday, July 4 Labor Day Monday, September 7 Monday, September 6 Veteran's Day Wednesday, November 11 Thursday, November 11 Thanksgiving Day Thursday, November 26 Thursday, November 25 Day After Thanksgiving Friday, November 27 Friday, November 26 Christmas Eve Thursday, December 24 Friday, December 24 Christmas Day Friday, December 25 Saturday, December 25 GENERAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS Section GSP-5 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 SPECIAL PROVISIONS MISCELLANEOUS 1. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES Time is an essential element of this contract. It is important that the work be diligently pursued to completion. If the work is not completed within the specified contract perk d, plus authorized extensions, the Contractor shall pay to the City Liquidated Damages in the amount of $2,000 per day, for each day, as further described herein, in excess of the authorized time. Days beyond the specified completion date for which Liquidated Damages v.ill be charged will be working days that the Contractor does, or could have worked from Monday through Saturday. Sundays will be counted only if work is performed. Partial working days will be considered as a full working day. Days not chargeable for Liquidated Damages will include rain days, Sundays, if no work is done, and legal holidays. Working days will cease to be charged when only punch list items remain to be completed. Punch list items do not include contract bid items or approved change/extra w )rk orders. When the Contractor believes the project to be substantially completed, a written notice stating the same shall be submitted to the Engineer and a request made for a Punch List. If the work under the Contract extends beyond the normal construction season for such work, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer in writing a request that working days counted toward the project be suspended until work is resumed the following construction season. This amount is not construed as a penalty. These damages are for the c cst to the City of providing the required additional inspection, engineering and contract adminis:ration. 2. PERCENT OF CONTRACT TO BE PERFORMED BY PRIME CONTRACTOR The Prime Contractor shall be required to perform at least 30 percent of the total contract amount of this project. Purchasing of materials for subcontractors will not be an acceptable method for the prime contractor to meet the 30 percent requirement. 3. STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION Storm water pollution prevention has become an important issue on cor struction projects. Therefore, the City is requiring that the storm sewer system on this project be protected in order to reduce and minimize the impact of sediment-laden runoff flowing into the storm sewer system. The contractor is responsible for providing all storm water pollution control measures needed to protect the storm sewer and all property in the vicinity of the project from runoff and/or sediment. Should the protection not be provided or not maintained, the contractor will be required to remove sediment from the inlets or storm sewer and/or surrounding properties at its own expense. The materials shall be removed in such a manner as to prevent further contamination of the storm sewer system and subsequent impairment of downstream receiving waters of the sewer. SPECIAL PROVISIONS Section SP-1 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 4. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS The Standard Specifications, which are referenced in the contract documents, are designated as follows: SUDAS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS—"2017 Standard Specifications for the Iowa Statewide Urban Design and Specifications Program" (unless otherwise noted) and current revisions thereof. IDOT STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS—"Standard Specifications for Higl• way and Bridge Construction, Iowa Department of Transportation, Ames, Iowa, Series 2015" (unless otherwise noted) and current revisions thereof. WATERLOO STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS—"Standard Specifications for Municipal Public Works Construction, City of Waterloo, Iowa." 5. SPECIAL PROVISIONS Standard Specifications are amended by the Technical Specifications liste i in the Table of Contents and included herein as part of the Specification booklet. In these Specifications, references to CITY and CONTRACTOR are definvd in the General Specifications for Construction. References to CONSULTANT are as defined in the Supplemental General Specifications for Construction. 6. HIERARCHY In resolving inconsistencies among two or more sections of the Corract Documents, precedence shall be given in the following order: First: WRITTEN AMENDMENTS Second: AGREEMENTS Third: CHANGE ORDERS Fourth: ADDENDA Fifth: SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Sixth: GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Seventh: SPECIAL PROVISIONS Eighth: DRAWINGS Ninth: P&IDS Tenth: STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS Figure dimensions (numerical) on Drawings shall take precedence over dims Tnsions measured utilizing a scale. 7. SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS The following reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site are known to the City: 1. Report dated May 20, 2019, prepared by Terracon Consultants, Inc ., of Cedar Falls, Iowa, titled: Geotechnical Engineering Report—Wastewater Treatmelt Plant Biosolids Modifications—Waterloo, Iowa" consisting of 61 pages. SPECIAL PROVISIONS Section SP-2 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 The technical data in the above report(s), upon which the CONTRACTOR ma/ relay, consists of boring methods, level of subsurface water, boring logs, laboratory test methoc:s and results, and boring locations all as of the date made. CONSULTANT accepts no responsibility for accuracy of the soil data or water level information. Soil information, including with these Contract Documents, was not obtained for the purposes of designing excavations and trenches. Soil information was used by CONSULTANT for design purposes only. CONTRACTOR shall assure itself by personal estimation as to subsurface conditions and shall provide its own investigations and make its own assumption to comply with OSHA and any other laws and regulations regarding excavation and trenching requirements. The reports identified above are not part of the Contract Documents, but the "technical data" contained therein upon which CONTRACTOR may rely, as expressly identified and established above, are incorporated in the Contract Documents by reference. CONTRACTOR is not entitled to rely upon any other information and data known to or identified by CITY or CONSULTANT. 8. PHYSICAL CONDITIONS The following drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surfa or subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities) are known to CITY: 1. Drawings dated November 1970, by Veenstra & Kimm of West Des Moines, Iowa, titled: "Sewage Treatment Plant Improvements—Phase IV," consisting of 50 pages — numbered 1065-1 to 1065-50, inclusive. 2. Drawings dated February 1989, by Brice, Petrides—Donohue, titled: 'Fiscal Year 1989 Water Pollution Control Plant Improvements Phase I," consistilg of 34 pages numbered 1 to 34, inclusive. 3. Drawings dated May 1990, by Brice, Petrides-Donohue, titled: F.Y. 1990 Water Pollution Control Plant Sludge Dewatering Improvements," consisting of 23 pages numbered 1 to 23, inclusive. 4. Drawings dated May 1990, by Brice, Petrides-Donohue, titled: "F.Y. 1990 Water Pollution Control Plant Improvements Phase I-Step 2," consisting of 34 pages numbered 1 to 34, inclusive. 5. Drawings dated May 1995 by Rust Environment & Infrastructure Inc, titled: "F.Y. 1996 Waterloo Satellite Water Pollution Control Facilities," consistin i of 224 pages -� numbered 1 to 224, inclusive. 6. Drawings dated November 1995 by Rust Environment & Infrastructure Inc., titled: "F.Y. 1996 Flow Equalization Basins for Water Pollution Control Facilities," consisting of 36 pages numbered 1 to 36, inclusive. 7. Drawings dated November 1995 by Rust Environment & Infrastructure Inc., titled: "F.Y. 1996 Raw Wastewater Pump Building for Water Pollution Control Facilities," consisting of 95 pages numbered 1 to 95, inclusive. SPECIAL PROVISIONS Section SP-3 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 8. Drawings dated February 1996 by Rust Environment & Infrastructure Inc., titled: "F.Y. 1996 Bar Screen Building for Water Pollution Control Facilit es," consisting of 51 pages numbered 1 to 51, inclusive. 9. Drawings dated August 1998 by Rust Environment & Infrastructure Inc. of Waterloo, Iowa, titled: "F.Y. 1998 Easton Avenue Water Pollution Control Facilities," consisting of 285 pages numbered 1 to 273, inclusive. 10. Drawings dated November 1999 by EarthTech of Waterloo, Iowa, titled: "F.Y. 1998 Anaerobic Digesters Water Pollution Control Facilities," consistir g of 175 pages numbered 1 to 175, inclusive. 11. Drawings dated June 2006 by EarthTech of Waterloo, Iowa, titled "F.Y. 2007 Odor Control and HVAC Replacement Water Pollution Control Facilities," consisting of 19 pages numbered 1 to 19, inclusive. 12. Drawings dated March 2012 by AECOM of Waterloo, Iowa, titled: "F.Y 2011 Disinfection Facilities Easton Avenue Water Pollution Control Facility," consisting of 66 pages numbered 1 to 66, inclusive. 13. Drawings dated March 2014 by AECOM of Waterloo, Iowa, titled: "F. {. 2014 Belt Filter Press Addition Water Pollution Control Facilities," consisting of 60 paces numbered 1 to 60, inclusive. 14. Drawings dated September 2017 by AECOM of Waterloo, Iowa, titled: "F.Y. 2016 Flow Equalization Facility Overflow Connection to Satellite WPCF," consisting of 15 pages numbered 1 to 15, inclusive. 15. Drawings dated March 2017 by AECOM of Waterloo, Iowa, titled: `F.Y. 2017 Water Pollution Control Facilities Upgrade to Instrumentation and Controls -,ystem" consisting of 8 pages numbered 1 to 8, inclusive. None of the contents of such drawings include technical data on which CC NTRACTOR may rely. The drawings identified above are not part of the Contract Documents. SPECIAL PROVISIONS Section SP-4 4463.004/City Contract No. 994 SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 DIVISION ONE -- A. The requirements of Division 01 apply to all sections of the Contract(s). 1.02 PROJECT SCOPE A. CONTRACTOR shall provide all items, articles, materials, operations or methods mentioned or scheduled on the Drawings or herein specified: including all labor, supervision, equipment, incidentals, taxes, and permits necessary to complete the Work as described within the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall install all items provided by CITY as mentioned or scheduled on the Drawings or herein specified. 1.03 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS—INTENT AND USE A. Intent of Documents: 1. Singular notations and specifications shall be considered plural wl.ere application is reasonably inferred. 2. Mention or indication of extent of work under any division or Specification section is done only for convenience of CONTRACTOR and shall not be construed as describing all work required under that division or section. 3. Some individual sections may contain a list of related sections. The list of related sections in individual sections is provided for the convenience of CONTRACTOR and is not necessarily all-inclusive. CONTRACTOR may not rely upon this listing for determination of scope of work. Other sections of the Specifications not referenced in individual sections shall apply as required for proper performance of the Work. 4. Command type sentences may be used in the Contract Documents. These sentences refer to and are directed to CONTRACTOR. 5. Symbols for various elements and systems are shown on the Drawings. Should there be any doubt regarding the meaning or intent of the symbols used, a written interpretation shall be obtained from CONSULTANT. B. Use of Documents: 1 . CONTRACTOR shall examine all Specifications and Drawings for the Work, including those that may pertain to Work CONTRACTOR does not normally perform with its own — forces. 2. CONTRACTOR shall use all of the Project Drawings and Specifications: a. For a complete understanding of the Project. b. To determine the type of construction and systems required. c. For coordination with other contractors. d. To determine what other work may be involved in various parts of phases. e. To anticipate and notify others when work by others will be requir ;d. f. And all other relevant matters related to the project. 3. CONTRACTOR is also bound by all requirements of the Contract Doc uments which are applicable to, pertain to, or affect its Work as may be shown or inferred by the entire set of Project Drawings and Specifications. -� Section 01 11 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1.04 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS A. In general, the following contract completion Milestones shall be followed. See Agreement for specific dates: 1. Substantial Completion: CONTRACTOR shall by that date, have the entire project substantially completed. B. General Information and Requirements: 1 . Currently, wastewater treatment at the City of Waterloo Water Pollution Control Facility consists of two equalization basins and two treatment facilities;the Easton Avenue Plant and the Satellite Plant. The facility receives wastewater from two separate dedicated trunk lines. Industrial wastewater for the northeast section of the City, currently consisting of pretreated wastewater from Tyson and Eagle Tanning, is sent to the Satellite Plant, while the rest of the City's wastewater is sent to the Easton Avenue Plant via the other trunk line. Industrial wastewater arriving at the Satellite Plant can be treated at the Satellite Plant or diverted to the Easton Avenue Plant. The Satellite Plant is currently not in operation and all wastewater is treated at the Easton Plant. Wastewater treatment at the Easton Avenue Plant consists of preliminary screening, grit removal, primary clarification, activated sludge aeration, final clarification, and ultraviolet disinfection. Treated effluent is discharged to the Cedar River via a diffuser. When in operation, the Satellite Plant receives pretreated industrial wastewater and consists of activated sludge aeration and final clarification. When not in operation, wastewater from the Satellite Plant trunk line is routed directly to the Easton Plant aeration basins, bypassing the headworks and primary clarification. Sludge handling and disposal currently consists of the following: Waste activated sludge (WAS) is removed from the Easton and Satellite return activated sludge (RAS) headers for wasting using automated control valves and flow meters. The WAS is pumped to three WAS Tanks in the WAS Building (Structure 170) for storage until it is pumped to three gravity belt thickeners (GBTs) located in the Thickener Building (Structure 180). Scum from the final clarifiers is also pumped to the WAS Tanks in the WAS Building. The WAS Tanks are mixed using coarse-bubble aeration and three positive displacement blowers. Thickened activated sludge (TAS or TWAS) is pumped from the GBTs by using three TWAS transfer pumps to the three TAS or blended sludge (BSL) tanks at the TAS Building/Digester Feed Building (Structure 190). In these tanks, the TAS or BSL is mixed with the primary sludge from the Easton Plant and primary scum to provide a consistent feed to the anaerobic digesters. Primary sludge is pumped to the TAS or BSL tanks using three rotary lobe pumps. Prior to pumping, the primary sludge passes through two sludge grinders. Mixing is provided in the TAS or BSL tanks with four vertical shaft mixers. Sludge is pumped from the TAS or BSL tanks to the six anaerobic digesters using four progressive cavity pumps. The anaerobic digestion system uses a temperature-phased anaerobic digestion (TPAD) process with two thermophilic primary digesters (Digester Nos. 3 and 6) and four mesophilic secondary digesters. Digesters Nos. 1 and 4 are equipped with floating covers for digester gas storage. Section 01 11 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 The digesters are heated using a hot water boiler system. l he TPAD system produces a Class A biosolids. Digested sludge (DSL) is pumped from the digesters to the Sludge Storage Tank (Structure 320) where it is stored until it is dewatered using three belt filter presses located in the Dewatering Building (Structure 330). The dewatered sludge is land applied by a contract hauler. 2. Wastewater treatment during construction must be continuous and the treatment efficiency must be equal to that achieved prior to the start of construction. 3. It shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR to not in any way impair the normal treatment or operating efficiency of the facilities, regardless of the work underway. No bypassing of raw or partially treated wastewater to receiving stream shall occur at any time as a result of construction. In general, this requires that new facilities be complete and ready for service or that temporary facilities be provided prior to removing existing units from service for modification or repair. CONTRACTOR shall provide all temporary piping, bypass pumping, and temporary construction required to complete the Work. 4. Operation of existing treatment facilities will be the responsibility of CITY. CONTRACTOR shall cooperate with CITY's staff at all times. A minimum of 48 hours prior to making any process or electrical connections to existing facilities or modification or demolition of existing facilities, CONTRACTOR shall notify CITY in writing. For any outage noted in this construction sequence, CONTRACTOR shall notify CITY in writing a minimum of 7 days prior to the outage.At the time of notification, CONTRACTOR shall submit a schedule for completion of the Work, including a description of measures that will be taken to minimize the impact to existing facilities. 5. Except as specified, CITY will drain existing tanks to the level of the lowest existing drain line or will remove tank contents using existing piping and pumping equipment. Subsequent cleaning or further draining and/or pumping shall be provided by CONTRACTOR. If there exists sludge, grit, or other residue that cannot be drained or pumped in its present state, it shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR to remove and dispose of this material at a licensed landfill. 6. Access: CONTRACTOR shall maintain roadways open at all times to meet CITY's requirements, including access for sludge hauling vehicles and chemical deliveries. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for maintaining roadways in drivable condition, _ including placement of temporary stone and gravel and providing drainage as necessary. All CITY-owned roadways around the treatment facility shall be cleaned of construction site materials, soil, and debris as necessary. 7. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, new facilities shall be completed and ready for service and placed into successful operation before existing facilities are taken out of service for modification/upgrading. No more than one existing treatment unit may be taken out of service at a time when making piping interconnections, etc., so that the remaining units are available for treatment. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate taking units out of service and placing units back in service with CITY. 8. CONTRACTOR shall not commence work on any deductive alternative(s) until requesting and obtaining CITY's written authorization. 9. CONTRACTOR shall maintain plant site roadways open at all times to meet CITY's requirements, including access for magnesium hydroxide deliveries to the Magnesium Hydroxide Building (Structure 115) and for polymer for the deliveries to both the Thickener Building (Structure 180) and the Dewatering Building (Structure 330). CONTRACTOR shall maintain access for poly-aluminum chloride deliveries to the Easton Blower Building (Structure 210). -- Section 01 11 00-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 10. Outage Plan: CONTRACTOR shall submit for review, a detailed outage plan which includes time scheduled for work activities necessary to remove unit processes, tanks, piping, electrical service, equipment, or structure from service. The plan shall be in writing and also in the form of a bar graph. The outage plan shall be coordinated with the work construction schedule and shall be updated monthly. The outage plan shall follow the construction sequence specified herein and shall include the length of time required to complete said work. The length of time unit processes are out of service shall be minimized. To that end, all new equipment, tools, and materials required for the Work shall be readily available when outage is implemented to minimize down time of unit processes. 11. Temporary pumping shall be provided for any outage greater than the allowable outage time as described below. Firm capacity temporary pumping (largest pump out of service) shall include all pumps, controls, and piping required to operate the system. CONTRACTOR shall either provide a control system capable of controlling the pumping system (including connection of alarms to CITY's existing SCADA system) to CITY's satisfaction or shall provide staff to man the pumping system 24 hours per day, or shall reimburse CITY to provide staff to operate the pumping system 24 hours per day. C. Construction Sequence: 1. The following construction sequence is provided as a general guideline for the information and for the benefit of CONTRACTOR. This construction sequence is not intended to dictate means, method of construction, or direct construction activities. This construction sequence is a conceptual general construction sequence with minimum recommended outage, shutdowns, and operating units to be maintained in service. The general construction sequence is projected to allow the Work to be completed while maintaining treatment of the wastewater treatment plant. It is not intended to be all inclusive and does not list all work elements or details that are required to complete the Work, complete treatment processes, or place unit processes in service. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for implementing any additional details required, including temporary piping, bypass pumping, or temporary construction at no additional cost to CITY. 2. CONTRACTOR may propose alternate sequence or modifications to this sequence. CITY will review the proposed modification and determine if such modification of the sequence interferes with the proper operation of the treatment activities. Any modifications to this general construction sequence shall be proposed in writing and shall be approved by CITY prior to their implementations. 3. General Construction Sequence Organized by Structure: a. Structure 170—WAS Building: Work at this structure may begin upon notice to proceed. CONTRACTOR shall notify CITY in writing of all outages a minimum of seven days prior to proposed outage. Outages subject to CITY approval. (1) Three gravity belt thickeners, three existing WAS wells or two new WAS storage tanks, and three thickener feed pumps shall always be in service between November 1 and April 30. (2) To maintain at least two gravity belt thickeners always in service between May 1 and October 31, two thickener feed pumps shall always be in service. Maintain two existing WAS Wells in Structure 170 in service between May 1 and October 31 until new WAS Storage Tanks (Structure 175), WAS Transfer Pumping Station (Structure 176), and WAS Transfer Tank are substantially complete. Existing WAS Well No. 1 and existing Thickener Feed Pump No. 1 may be removed from service first to allow renovations at WAS Well No. 1 and installation of new Thickener Feed Pump No. 1. Section 01 11 00-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 (3) To provide air to new WAS Storage Tanks (Structure 175), CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary air piping or relocate existing air piping as required to allow WAS Blower Nos. 1 and 2 to be dedicated to WAS Well No. 2 or WAS Well No. 3. WAS Blower Nos. 1 and 2 shall each be dedicated to a single WAS Well. After temporary air piping is installed, CONTRACTOR may remove existing WAS Blower No. 3 to install new WAS Blower No. 2. CONTRACTOR — shall relocate existing electrical conduit and wiring as required to maintain existing WAS Blower Nos. 1 and 2 in service. (4) After all new GBT Feed Pumps and the WAS Transfer Tank are in service, work may proceed on the Primary Sludge Transfer Tanks and the Primary Sludge Transfer Pumps. b. Structure 175—WAS Storage Tanks: Work at this structure may be jin upon notice to proceed. c. Structure 176—WAS Transfer Pumping Station: Construction of this structure may begin upon notice to proceed. d. Structure 180—Thickening Building: Work at this structure may begin upon notice to — proceed. CONTRACTOR shall notify CITY in writing of all outages a minimum of seven days before proposed outage. Outage subject to CITY approval. (1) CITY typically operates the gravity belt thickeners seven days a week throughout the year. Three gravity belt thickeners shall always be in service between November 1 and April 30. (2) At least two gravity belt thickener systems shall always remain in service. (3) Polymer is required for gravity belt thickener operation. CONTRACTOR shall maintain either the existing or new polymer feed systems in service associated with the GBTs in service at all times, except for a 24-hour outage time allowed for making connections once per week. (4) Existing dry polymer prep system and associated polymer mix control panel may be removed from service to construct new polymer feed system. CONTRACTOR shall provide access for CITY furnished liquid polymer deliveries into the two existing polymer tanks (T-10-18-1 and T-10-18-2). CONTRACTOR shall temporarily relocate existing polymer tank (T-10-18-2) and CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary piping between this relocated tank and existing polymer feed systems (M-10-20-1 to 3) to maintain existing operations as acceptable to CITY. e. Structure 190—Digester Feed Building: Work at this structure may begin upon notice to proceed. Existing TAS Pump Nos. 1 and 2 along with Blended Sludge Well Nos. 1 and 2 may be taken out of service upon notice to proceed.After Digester Feed Pump Nos. 1 and 2 plus Blended Sludge Storage Tank Nos. 1 and 2 plus the new 6-inch BSL piping to the Digesters are in service, existing TAS Pump Nos. 3 and 4 along with Blended Sludge Well No. 3 may be taken out of service. f. Structure 300—Chemical Storage Building: Work at this structure may begin upon _. notice to proceed. g. Structure 310—Digester Control Building: Work at this structurE may begin upon notice to proceed. (1) At least two boilers shall always remain in service except fc a 24 hour outage time allowed for making connections once per week. Outac:es to be approved by CITY. (2) Existing HVAC unit in the Boiler Room shall be removed by CONTRACTOR to allow access and egress for boiler replacement. CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary heating and ventilation in Boiler Room until existing HVAC unit is reinstalled and placed in service by CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR -- Section 01 11 00-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 shall maintain minimum 45°F ambient temperature in Boiler Room and other rooms served by this HVAC unit. (3) To maintain two boilers in service when Boiler No. 1 is out of service, CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary piping to bypass Boiler No. 1 so Boiler Nos. 2 and 3 are connected to the hot water system. Existing piping shall be removed to allow Boiler No. 1 to be removed. h. Structure 325—Sludge Storage Pump Building: Work at this structure may begin upon notice to proceed. The Belt Filter Press Feed Pump dedicated to each Belt Filter Press shall remain in service until its associated Belt Filter Press is taken out of service. Thickener Feed Pump associated with Belt Press No. 3 shall be replaced when Centrifuge No. 1 and No. 2 are in service. i. Structure 330—Dewatering Building: Work at this structure may begin upon notice to proceed. CONTRACTOR shall notify CITY in writing of all outages a minimum of 7 days prior to proposed outage. Outages subject to CITY approval. (1) The following sequence may be employed to dewater digested sludge using existing Belt Filter Presses and the new Centrifuges specified herein. (a) One of the following combinations of equipment shall remain in service, except for up to 7 individual days outage time allowed to make connections in a four week time period. i. Two belt filter presses. ii. One belt filter press and one centrifuge. iii. Two centrifuges. (b) Prior to demolition of the existing loadout bay, CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary piping from the discharge of Dewatered Sludge Pump No. 1 and No. 2 to the west side of the Dewatering Room extending 10 feet outside the building with necessary fittings and piping to discharge dewatered biosolids to contract hauler's trucks. CONTRACTOR shall connect 1-inch W2 at beginning of each discharge pipe with isolation valve to fluidize biosolids in the discharge pipe. (c) Belt Filter Press No. 2 may be removed from service upon notice to proceed. (d) After Centrifuge No. 2 is in service using new dewatering polymer system No. 2 and discharging dewatered biosolids into the contract hauler's trucks using temporary piping or using the the new Truck Bays for seven days, as acceptable to CITY, CONTRACTOR may take Belt Filter Press No. 1 out of service. (e) Polymer is required for Belt Filter Press and Centrifuge operation. CONTRACTOR shall maintain either the existing or new polymer feed systems in service at all times, except for a 24-hour outage time allowed for making connections once per week. (f) Existing dry polymer mixing system and associated electrical equipment may be removed from service to construct new dewatering polymer systems. CONTRACTOR shall provide access for CITY furnished liquid polymer deliveries into the two existing polymer solution storage tanks. CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary piping between the two existing polymer solution storage tanks to the existing polymer solution feed units delivering polymer to in service belt filter presses. (g) Centrate Equalization (Structure 350) shall be placed into service prior to any Centrifuge being placed into service. Section 01 11 00-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 (2) Alternatively, CONTRACTOR may provide one trailer mounted dewatering unit with capacity to dewater digested sludge equal to the capacity of existing Belt Filter Press No. 3. (a) One of the following combinations of equipment shall remain in service, except for up to 7 individual days outage time allowed to make connections in a four week time period. - i. Two belt filter presses. ii. One belt filter press and one trailer mounted dewatering unit. iii. One belt filter press and one centrifuge. iv. One trailer mounted dewatering unit and one centrifuge. v. Two centrifuges. (b) Prior to demolition of the existing loadout bay, CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary piping from the discharge of lewatered sludge pumps associated with dewatering equipment to remain in service to the west side of the dewatering room, extending 10 feet c Jtside the building with pipes and fittings necessary to discharge dewatered biosolids to contract hauler's trucks. (c) CONTRACTOR shall provide trailer mounted dewater ng capacity equal to at least one existing belt filter press operated 4( hours per week. CONTRACTOR shall provide all temporary piping and electrical connections for trailer mounted dewatering unit in a weather proof structure. CONTRACTOR shall operate the temporary dewatering unit for no more than 40 hours per week, Monday through Friday from 7 A.M. to 5 P.M. Dewatered biosolids shall be conveyed into contract hauler's trucks. (3) Alternatively, CONTRACTOR may provide two trailer me unted dewatering units with total capacity to dewater digested sludge equal to twice the capacity of existing Belt Filter Press No. 3. (a) One of the following combinations of equipment shall remain in service, except for up to 7 individual days outage time allowed to make connections in a four week time period. Two trailer mounted dewatering units. ii. Two belt filter presses. iii. One belt filter press and one trailer mounted d,_;watering unit. iv. One belt filter press and one centrifuge. v. One trailer mounted dewatering unit and one centrifuge. vi. Two centrifuges. (b) Prior to demolition of the existing loadout bay, CONTRACTOR shall -- provide temporary piping from the discharge of dewatered sludge pumps associated with dewatering equipment to remain in service to the west side of the dewatering room, extending 10 feet outside the building with pipes and fittings necessary to discharge dewatered biosolids to contract hauler's trucks. (c) Each trailer mounted dewatering unit shall have capacity equal to at least one existing belt filter press operated 40 hours per week. CONTRACTOR shall provide all temporary piping and electrical connections for trailer mounted dewatering units in a weather proof structure. CONTRACTOR shall operate the temporary dewatering units for no more than 40 hours per week, Monday through Friday from 7 A.M. to 5 P.M. Dewatered biosolids shall be conveyed into contract hauler's trucks. Section 01 11 00-7 4463.004/City Contract No.994 new 330MCC-1A shall be installed and shall temporarily power the existing 330MCC-1 via the new 400-amp generator receptacle breaker in 330MCC-1A. Once the new 330MCC-1A is energized by the new transformer PMT-1, deenergize the existing PMT-1 transformer during an outage time as specified in 1.04.C.3.i.(1).(a) and provide temporary power feeder from the new 330MCC-1 A 400-amp generator receptacle circuit breaker to the main circuit breaker in the existing 330MCC-1. Temporarily disable circuit breaker kirk key interlocks in new 330P.ICC-1A in order to power both the new and existing 330MCC-1 at the same time. 1 .05 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE A. General: 1. The "area of the site" referred to in these Specifications shall be as shown on the Drawings. If the "area of the site" is not shown, CITY's property lines, the Project right-of-way and/or any easements obtained for the Project shall He considered the "area of the site." 2. Construction activities shall be confined within the "area of the site" limits. 3. CONTRACTOR shall not disturb the existing levee surrounding the plant. No materials may be stored on the levee. 4. From the start of work to completion CONTRACTOR is responsible for the care of the site and the premises which are affected by operations of Work of this Contract. 5. Except for permanent site improvements provided under the Contract, CONTRACTOR shall restore property disturbed during the Work, to the conditions which previously existed. 6. Work in occupied spaces shall be restricted to specified Work and essential activities, such as making necessary connections and extending services or constructing temporary access ways. Such work shall be scheduled in advance with CITY. B. Parking and Deliveries: 1. CONTRACTOR is responsible for control of traffic by vehicles and persons within the limits of its operations. 2. Parking for employees, subcontractors, and agents of CONTRACTOR shall be in areas subject to approval of CITY as shown on the Drawings. 3. Access to the site for delivery of construction material or equipment shall be subject to approval of CITY at locations shown on the Drawings. 1.06 EXISTING SERVICES, OVERHEAD UTILITIES, AND UNDERGROUND FACILITIES INCLUDING STRUCTURES A. Interruption of existing services and systems including heating, ventilating, air conditioning, water, sanitary, lighting and power, signal and security systems, and similar work shall be kept to an absolute minimum and shall be limited to times approved by CITY. B. If deemed necessary by CITY, such work shall be accomplished after CITY's normal office hours. C. Work shall not commence until all labor, materials, and equipment are available so Work can continue without interruption or delay. D. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted services or Underground Facilities be encountered during installation, notify CITY and consult with utility CITY immediately. -- Section 01 11 00-9 4463.004/City Contract No.994 E. Cooperate with CITY and utility companies in keeping respective services and Underground Facilities in operation and repair any damage. F. CONTRACTOR shall not interrupt existing services and Underground Facilities occupied and used by CITY or others, except when permitted in writing by CITY. G. Any accidental interruption of services and Underground Facilities shall be repaired immediately, including provision of temporary facilities until permanent repairs can be made. H. Iowa Law (Chapter 480, Iowa Code) requires, among other provisions, that before excavation or demolition begins, reasonable advance notice (not less than 48 hours prior to the start of the excavation or demolition) of the intent to excavate or demolish be provided to the CITYs of the Underground Facilities in and near the construction area whose facilities may be affected by the excavation or demolition. As part of this notification requirement, CONTRACTOR shall contact Iowa One Call (811 or 1-800-292-8989). CONTRACTOR shall be aware that not all CITYs participate in the Iowa One Call program. A call to this agency shall not absolve CONTRACTOR of the requirements of this statute. CONTRACTOR shall comply with all others provisions of the statute though not enumerated herein. I. Locations and elevations of services and Underground Facilities as shown on the Drawings are approximate. It shall be CONTRACTOR's responsibility to determine their exact location when in their vicinity. To this end, CONTRACTOR shall proceed with caution in the excavation and preparation of the Site so the exact location of services and Underground Facilities can be determined. CONTRACTOR shall include in the Contract Price any costs for temporary or permanent relocations of such services and Underground Facilities required to complete the Work unless specifically indicated otherwise in the Specifications. J. Where potential grade conflicts might occur with existing services and Underground Facilities, CONTRACTOR shall uncover such services and Underground Facilities sufficiently in advance of construction so that elevations may be determined to allow any necessary adjustments to be made. K. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with overhead utility companies prior to the Work. CONTRACTOR shall provide all necessary temporary and permanent support relocation or temporary and permanent restraint to maintain overhead utilities in service. L. CONTRACTOR shall keep an accurate and complete record of all such services and Underground Facilities encountered and shall provide CITY a copy of this record.The record shall include a description of the item encountered, opinion as to conditions, and adequate measurements and depths so that the item can be located in the future. M. CONTRACTOR shall inspect all services and Underground Facilities for condition and soundness. Unsound conditions shall be reported to CITY immediately after exposing. CONTRACTOR shall not proceed with the Work until the service or facility CITY has been notified. Service or facility CITY shall then be given time to inspect and correct, if required, the service or Underground Facility. CONTRACTOR may make claim under the provisions of the General Specifications should CONTRACTOR feel a price or time adjustment is justified. N. Any additional costs incurred because of failure of CONTRACTOR to report the condition of any and all existing services and Underground Facility encountered shall be paid for by CONTRACTOR. Section 01 11 00-10 4463.004/City Contract No.994 O. Whenever CONSULTANT feels it is necessary to explore and excavate to determine the location of existing services and Underground Facilities, CONTRACTOR shall make explorations and excavations for such purposes. If CONTRACTOR is required to perform additional Work in making the explorations and excavations, extra compensation will be allowed as provided for in the General Specifications. 1.07 PROTECTION OF WORK AND IMPROVEMENTS A. CONTRACTOR shall protect the property of CITY, existing improveme its, and the Work installed by CONTRACTOR and others from abuse, damage, dust, debris, and other objectionable materials resulting from construction activities. B. CONTRACTOR shall provide suitable covers, partitions, or other dust and fume containment devices to suit construction operations. C. CONTRACTOR shall keep property, existing improvements, and the Work including structures, mains, fittings, and accessories free from dirt and foreign matter at all times. D. CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary plugging of openings, holes, and pipe ends that are existing or that CONTRACTOR has installed. E. Property, improvements, and Work damaged by CONTRACTOR shell be repaired or replaced by CONTRACTOR to the satisfaction of CITY. 1.08 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS A. Easements were not obtained for this Project. CONTRACTOR shall confine its operations, equipment and storage areas to the lands and rights-of-way in which the Project is to be located. CONTRACTOR may enter into written agreements with property✓ CITYs for use of other lands during construction. Copies of such agreements shall be prop, ded to CITY. PART 2—PRODUCTS NOT APPLICABLE — PART 3—EXECUTION NOT APPLICABLE END OF SECTION -- Section 01 11 00-11 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 01 29 00 CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Cash allowances. 2. Measurement and Payment—Unit Prices. 3. Measurement and Payment—Lump Sum. 1.02 CASH ALLOWANCES A. Refer to sections of the specifications identified in the Form of Bid or Proposal for specific information on use of cash allowances. B. The Bid shall include the amount equal to the specified quantity times the unit price. 1.03 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT—UNIT PRICES A. Measurement methods are delineated in the individual Specification sections. B. CONTRACTOR shall take measurements and compute quantities. CONSULTANT will check measurements and quantities. C. Incidental Items of Work: Any items of Work shown on the Drawings or called for in the Specifications, but not included in the Bid Form, shall be considered incidental items of Work. The cost of incidental items of Work shall be included in the prices bid for adjacent Work. 1.04 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT—LUMP SUM A. Payment for Lump Sum projects will be based on the accepted schedule of values for the project. B. An acceptable schedule of values will include the following features: 1. Schedule shall list the installed value of the component parts of the work in sufficient detail to serve as a basis for computing values for progress payments during construction. Schedule shall be subdivided as necessary by specification section and work area. 2. Identify each line item with the number and title of the respective Specification Section. 3. For each major line item list sub-values of major products or operations under the item. 4. For the various portions of the work: a. Each item shall include a directly proportional amount of CONTRACTOR's overhead and profit. b. For items on which progress payments will be requested for stored materials, break down the value into: (1) The cost of the materials, delivered and unloaded, with taxes paid. Paid invoices are required for materials upon request by CONSULTANT. (2) The total installed value. Section 01 29 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 5. The sum of all values listed in the schedule shall equal the total Contract Sum. 6. Schedule shall include a separate listing of general items such as bonds, insurance, mobilization, demobilization, field supervision, and record documents. C. Once a schedule of values is accepted, it shall not be revised, except for changes associated with subsequently executed change orders. D. No separate measurement for payment will be performed for Lump Sum Nork. E. CONTRACTOR shall estimate percentage of Work completed. CONSULTANT will review CONTRACTOR's estimate of quantity of Work completed. F. Payment will be made based on the percentage of the Contract completed less retainage and/or liquidated damages. G. Unless noted otherwise, all Work described in the Specifications and or shown on the Drawings shall be included in the Lump Sum Bid. H. Some technical specification sections may include payment provisions. These provisions are in addition to the provisions of this section which apply to all of the WDrk. PART 2—PRODUCTS NOT APPLICABLE PART 3—EXECUTION NOT APPLICABLE END OF SECTION Section 01 29 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 01 31 00 COORDINATION, FIELD ENGINEERING, AND MEETINGS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Coordination. 2. Field engineering. 3. Progress meetings. 4. Preinstallation meeting. 1.02 COORDINATION A. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the work to provide an efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. See Section 01 11 00—Summary of Work for specific construction sequence. B. CONTRACTOR shall verify utility requirements and characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities and coordinate Work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service such equipment. C. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are indicated diagrammatically on the Drawings and shall follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with line of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. D. In finished areas, except as otherwise indicated, CONTRACTOR shall conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction and coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. E. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate completion and cleanup of Work of separate sections in preparation for substantial completion and for portions of Work designated for CITY's occupancy. F. After CITY occupancy of premises, CONTRACTOR shall coordinate access to Site for correction of defective Work and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents to minimize disruption of CITY's activities. 1.03 FIELD ENGINEERING A. CONTRACTOR shall locate and protect property stakes, legal survey monuments, benchmarks, and survey control and reference points. CONTRACTOR shall pay for replacement of disturbed property stakes and legal survey monuments by a Registered Land Surveyor acceptable to CITY and for replacement of benchmarks and survey control and reference points provided by CONSULTANT. Section 01 31 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1.05 PREINSTALLATION MEETING A. When required in individual specification sections, CONTRACTOR shall convene a preinstallation meeting at Work Site prior to commencing Work of the section. B. CONTRACTOR shall require attendance of parties directly affecting or affected by work of the specific section. C. CONTRACTOR shall notify CONSULTANT seven days in advance of meeting date. D. CONTRACTOR shall prepare agenda and preside at meeting: 1. Review conditions of installation, preparation, and installation procedures. 2. Review coordination with related work. E. CONTRACTOR shall record minutes and distribute copies to participants within 2 days after meeting; two copies to CONSULTANT, participants, and those affected by decisions made. PART 2—PRODUCTS NOT APPLICABLE PART 3—EXECUTION NOT APPLICABLE END OF SECTION Section 01 31 00-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTALS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Whenever possible throughout the Contract Documents, the minimum acceptable quality of workmanship and materials has been defined either by manufacturer's name and catalog number or by reference to recognized industry standards. 2. To facilitate CONTRACTOR's understanding of the design intent, procedures have been established for advance submittal of design data and for its review or rejection by CONS ULTANT. 3. The type of submittal requirements specified in this section include construction progress schedule, submittal schedule, shop drawings, product data, samples, maintenance manuals, and other miscellaneous work-related submittals. B. Related work described elsewhere: More detailed requirements for submittals are described in other sections of these specifications for some materials and equipment. They are to be considered additional requirements to supplement the requirements specified in this section. C. Definitions: "Electronic Submittal" is defined as any submittal transmitted electronically to CONSULTANT for review. 1.02 IDENTIFICATION OF SUBMITTALS A. CONTRACTOR shall completely identify each submittal and resubmittal L:y showing at least the following information: 1. Name and address of submitter, plus name and telephone number of the individual who may be contacted for further information. 2. Name and location of project and identification number. 3. Drawing number and specifications section number to which the sub nittal applies. 4. Include the date of each submittal or resubmittal. 1.03 GROUPING OF SUBMITTALS A. Unless otherwise specifically permitted by CONSULTANT, CONTRACTOR shall make all submittals in groups containing all associated items so that information is available for checking each item when it is received. B. Partial submittals may be rejected as not complying with the provisions of the Contract Documents. 1.04 TIMING OF SUBMITTALS A. CONTRACTOR shall make all submittals far enough in advance of scheduled dates of installation to provide required time for reviews, for securing necessary approval, for possible revision and resubmittal, and for placing orders and securing delivery. -- Section 01 33 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. The review period for submittals that are received after 3 P.M. shall commence on the following business day. 1.05 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS AND SUBMITTAL SCHEDULES A. Submit preliminary schedules within 10 days of the effective date of the Agreement. B. Revise schedules incorporating any comments provided at the schedule review conference and resubmit. C. As a minimum, the construction progress schedule shall consist of a horizontal bar chart with a separate line for each major portion of Work or operation, identifying first workday of each week. D. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, identifying Work of separate stages and other logically grouped activities. Indicate the early and late start, early and late finish, float dates, and duration for each activity. Identify activities that are on the critical path. E. Include line items for milestones (if any), Substantial, and Final Completion. F. Submit updated schedules with each Application for Payment, identifying changes since previous version. G. Indicate estimated percentage of completion for each item of Work at each submission. H. Indicate submittal dates required for shop drawings, product data, samples, and product delivery dates. 1.06 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Shop drawings shall include specially prepared technical data for this project including drawings, diagrams, performance curves, data sheets, schedules, templates, patterns, reports, calculations, instructions, measurements, and similar information not in standard printed form for general application to a range of similar projects. Shop drawings shall be submitted for all manufactured or fabricated items. See individual technical sections for special requirements. B. CONTRACTOR shall make all shop drawings accurately to scale and sufficiently large to show all pertinent aspects of the item and its method of connection to the work. C. Shop drawings shall be checked, approved, and stamped by CONTRACTOR before transmittal to CONSULTANT for review and approval. D. Complete shop drawings and descriptive data shall be submitted on all manufactured or fabricated items prior to 50% completion of the Work. Applications for payment beyond 50% of the Contract amount will not be recommended for payment until all shop drawings are submitted, including the required hard copies, or a revised schedule for any remaining submittals is agreed to by CITY and CONSULTANT. E. CONTRACTOR shall submit shop drawings following the electronic submittal procedure described below. If electronic submittal is impossible, CONTRACTOR may request CONSULTANT to review hard copy submittals on a limited basis. CONSULTANT may request to review hard copy submittals on a limited basis for submittals that are over Section 01 33 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 100 pages in length. If CONSULTANT agrees to or requests hard copy submittal review, CONTRACTOR shall submit six color copies of shop drawings and descriptive data to CONSULTANT for approval. Three copies of these will be returned to CONTRACTOR if approved. If shop drawings are not approved or if they are stamped "Approved as Noted-Resubmit," two corrected copies will be returned to CONTRACTOR for use in resubmittal. If CONTRACTOR desires more than three approved copies, submitted quantity shall be increased accordingly. F. Hard copy shop drawings shall be submitted in 3-ring binders or 3-tab report covers. G. Shop drawings submitted to CONSULTANT will be reviewed and stamped "Approved," "Approved as Noted," "Approved as Noted-Resubmit," or "Not Approved." CONTRACTOR shall resubmit the above number of corrected shop drawings for all shop drawings stamped "Approved as Noted-Resubmit" and "Not Approved" and will continue this process until shop drawings are stamped "Approved" or "Approved as Noted." If drawings are stamped "Approved as Noted-Resubmit," fabrication may proceed in accordance with the marked-up shop drawings. Installation shall not proceed until shop drawings have been resubmitted and stamped "Approved" or"Approved as Noted." H. If shop drawings are stamped "Approved as Noted" or "Approved as Noted-Resubmit" and CONTRACTOR does not agree with revisions or cannot conform with revisions, fabrication shall not proceed and shop drawings shall be resubmitted with explanation of CONTRACTOR's position. I. All shop drawings used for construction site activities shall bear the"Apprc red" or"Approved as Noted" stamp of CONSULTANT. J. Arrangements may be made between CONTRACTOR and CONSULTANT to provide additional copies of"Approved" shop drawings for field activity purposes. K. Electronic Submittal Procedures: 1. Summary: a. Shop drawing and product data submittals shall be transmitted tc CONSULTANT in electronic (PDF) format using Submittal Exchange, or equal, website service designed specifically for transmitting submittals between construction team members, or equal. b. The intent of electronic submittals is to expedite the construction process by reducing paperwork, improving information flow, and decreasing turnaround time. — c. The electronic submittal process is not intended for color samples, color charts, or physical material samples. 2. Procedures: -- a. CONTRACTOR shall review and apply electronic stamp certifying that the submittal complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents including verification of manufacturer/product, dimensions and coordination of information with other parts of the work. b. CONTRACTOR shall transmit each submittal to CONSULTANT using the Submittal Exchange website, www.submittalexchange.com, or equal. c. CONSULTANT review comments will be made available on the Submittal Exchange website for downloading. CONTRACTOR will receive email nc tice of completed review. d. Distribution of reviewed submittals to subcontractors and suppliers is the responsibility of CONTRACTOR. -- Section 01 33 00-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 e. Electronically submitted shop drawings shall follow the following format: (1) Filenames for the shop drawing submittals shall follow a XX XX XX.YYY Z. Description convention where XX XX XX is the specification section number, YYY is the submittal number, .Z is the resubmittal number, and description is a short description of what the submittal includes. Submittals shall be consecutively numbered in direct sequence of submittal. Resubmittals shall be consecutively numbered with the first submittal numbered with an -0 and the first resubmittal numbered with a -1. (a) Example file name: 03 20 00.016-1. Structure 10 Concrete Reinforcement. This would be the first revision of the sixteenth submittal and contain information on concrete reinforcement. (2) All files shall be delivered in PDF format with a minimum resolution of 300 dpi unless otherwise requested by CONSULTANT. Scanned in material shall be scanned in color and any markings by CONTRACTOR shall be made in red. Pages shall be rotated to the appropriate position for easy reading on a computer monitor such that the majority of text is vertical. (3) Files shall be delivered without security features activated. (4) Shop Drawings shall be uploaded as individual files. Files combined into a zip drive are not acceptable. All pages of one submittal should be contained in one file. (5) The file shall open to a cover page containing, at a minimum, the following information: (a) CONTRACTOR's stamp. (b) Name, e-mail, and telephone number of the individual who may be contacted for further information. (c) Project number. (d) Submittal number. (e) Submission date, if resubmittal, all previous submission dates. (f) Index detailing contents and the total number of pages in the submittal. f. Once a shop drawing has been "Approved" or"Approved as Noted," CONTRACTOR shall provide three hard color copies of the "Approved" or"Approved as Noted," shop drawings to CONSULTANT. CONTRACTOR is responsible for the hard copy color replication of CONSULTANT's "Approved" or "Approved as Noted," shop drawings for use by CONTRACTOR. Hard copy shop drawings shall be submitted in 3-ring binders or 3-tab report covers. 3. Costs: a. CONTRACTOR shall include the full cost of Submittal Exchange, or equal, project subscription in their proposal. This cost shall be included in the Contract amount. Contact Submittal Exchange at 1-800-714-0024 to verify cost prior to Bid. b. At CONTRACTOR's option, training is available from Submittal Exchange regarding use of website and PDF submittals. Contact Submittal Exchange at 1-800-714-0024. c. Internet Service and Equipment Requirements: (1) Email address and Internet access at CONTRACTOR's main office. (2) Adobe Acrobat (www.adobe.com), Bluebeam PDF Revu (www.bluebeam.com), or other similar PDF review software for applying electronic stamps and comments. L. CONTRACTOR is fully responsible for obtaining any and all copyright permission associated with conversion of shop drawing information to electronic format. M. Shop drawings shall include verification that the item meets applicable codes and standards. Section 01 33 00-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1.07 COLORS AND PATTERNS A. Unless the precise color and pattern is specifically described in the Contract Documents, whenever a choice of color or pattern is available in a specified product, CONTRACTOR shall submit accurate color charts and pattern charts to CONSULTANT for CITY's review and selection. B. Unless all available colors and patterns have identical wearing capabilities and are identically suited for the installation, CONTRACTOR shall completely describe the relative capabilities of each. 1.08 SAMPLES AND FIELD MOCKUPS A. CONTRACTOR shall provide samples and field mockups where noted or specified. B. Samples are physical examples which illustrate materials, equipment, or workmanship and establish standards by which the work will be judged. C. Samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate the functional characteristics of the product and full range of color, texture, and pattern. D. Samples shall have labels firmly attached, bearing the following informati an: 1. Name of project. 2. Description of product and finish. 3. Name of CONTRACTOR. 4. Trade name and number of product. 5. Standards met by the product. E. Approval of samples must be obtained prior to proceeding with any work aIected by material requiring sample approval. F. Samples, unless otherwise noted, become the property of CITY. G. In situations specifically approved by CONSULTANT, the retained sample may be used in the construction as one of the installed items. H. Field Mockups: 1. CONTRACTOR shall erect field mockups at the project site in a location acceptable to CONSULTANT and CITY. 2. When accepted by CONSULTANT, the mockup will become the basis for comparison of the actual work. 3. Remove mockup at conclusion of the work if it was not incorporated nto the work. 1.09 PRODUCT DATA A. CONTRACTOR shall provide product data as required to supplement shop drawings. B. Product data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams, and other information furnished by CONTRACTOR to illustrate a material, product, or system for some portion of the work. Section 01 33 00-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. CONTRACTOR shall collect required product data into one submittal for each unit of work or system. D. CONTRACTOR shall include manufacturer's standard printed recommendations for application and use, compliance with standards, performance characteristics, wiring and piping diagrams and controls, component parts, finishes, dimensions, required clearances, and other special coordination requirements. E. CONTRACTOR shall mark each copy of standard printed data to identify pertinent products, models, options, and other data. F. CONTRACTOR shall supplement manufacturer's standard data to provide information unique to the work. 1.10 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Make any corrections or changes in the submittals required by CONSULTANT. B. Shop Drawings and Product Data: 1. Revise initial drawings or data and resubmit as specified for initial submittal. 2. Itemize in a cover letter any changes which have been made other than those requested by CONSULTANT. C. CONTRACTOR shall furnish required submittals with sufficient information and accuracy to obtain required approval of an item with no more than three submittals. CONSULTANT will record CONSULTANT's time for reviewing a fourth or subsequent submittal of Shop Drawings, a sample, or other item requiring approval, and CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for CONSULTANT's charges to CITY for such time. CITY may impose a set-off -- against payments due to CONTRACTOR to secure reimbursement for such charges. D. If CONTRACTOR requests a change of a previously approved submittal item, CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for CONSULTANT's charges to CITY for its review item, and CITY may impose a set-off against payments due to CONTRACTOR to secure reimbursement for such charges, unless the need for such change is beyond the control of CONTRACTOR. 1.11 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS A. Manufactured articles, materials, and equipment shall be stored, commissioned, operated, applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned, and conditioned as directed by the manufacturer, unless specified to the contrary. B. Wherever specifications call for work to be performed or materials to be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions or directions, CONTRACTOR shall furnish copies as required for shop drawings of those instructions or directions to CONSULTANT before installing the material or performing the work. 1.12 MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Prior to 75% completion of the Contract or at a minimum of 45 days prior to the scheduled start-up date of any individual item of equipment, whichever is earlier, CONTRACTOR shall furnish to CONSULTANT four complete copies of a maintenance manual for all equipment Section 01 33 00-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 _ furnished. Applications for payment beyond 75% of the contract amount will not be recommended for payment until all maintenance manuals are subm tted or a revised schedule for remaining maintenance manuals is agreed to by CITY and CONSULTANT. B. The manuals shall include manufacturer's instructions for maintenance and operation for each item of mechanical and electrical equipment. Manuals shall be specific for the equipment as installed; provide project specific inserts as required. Manuals shall contain: operation instructions, lubrication schedules, types and quantities, preventative maintenance program, spare parts list, parts lists, I.D. No. and exploded views, assembly instructions, parts supplier location, trouble shooting and startup procedures and, where applicable, test data and curves. C. All sheets shall have reduced dimensions as described for shop drawl igs, and shall be furnished in 3-ring binders or 3-tab report covers. D. CONTRACTOR is responsible for producing an electronic version of the Equipment Operations and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals Manual. The Electronic Equipment O&M Manual shall be delivered in Portable Document Format (PDF). The entire manual may be converted to PDF via scanning or other method of conversion. Drawings or other graphics must be converted to PDF format and made part of the PDF document. T1-e CONTRACTOR shall provide all Equipment O&M Manuals in the electronic format as defi ied below. — E. The filename for the Equipment O&M Manual submittal will be provided with the request for final Equipment O&M Manuals. Filenames use convention (XX XX XX_YYY.PDF)where XX XX XX is the specification section number , YYY is an ID number. No one file shall be larger than 10 MB. If technical problems require that the submittal be divided ii to more than one file, a letter extension shall be added to the end of each filename. F. (Example: 40 23 1001 a.pdf). The number of files shall be kept to a minimum. Equipment O&M Manuals that span more than one file shall have the final Bookmark "Return to Table of Contents" which shall take the User to the first file on the Equipment O&M Manual. G. All text (word processed), spreadsheets, and electronic graphics shal be delivered in portable document format(*.PDF). The resolution of all scanned images slall be a minimum of 300 dpi unless otherwise requested by CONSULTANT. Scanned images shall be — processed with the "original image with hidden text" option (Adobe Acrobat 6 or higher). This results in a clear image and provides for optical character recognition (OCR) and word search functionality. Graphical files shall be fully searchable. All submittals must be indexed with the Adobe Catalog feature. Placement and structure of index files shall be in accordance with Adobe's recommendations to minimize problems when transferring files. Successful searches for words or strings in the PDF document shall demonstrate proof of OCR. H. Rotate pages viewed in landscape to the appropriate position for easy reading on a computer monitor. I. Bookmarks shall be created in the navigation frame for each entry in the Table of Contents. Three levels deep is usually enough (i.e., "Chapter", "Section", "Subsection"); however, complex submittals like instrumentation and electrical may be required at the discretion of CONSULTANT. When setting bookmarks for Chapter level heading, the page shall be displayed at Full Page. Section and Subsection level heading pages shall be displayed as a magnified view. Bookmarks shall be displayed as subordinate (to other Lookmarks in their hierarchy set so that only the Chapter level headings are displayed. -- Section 01 33 00-7 4463.004/City Contract No.994 J. Thumbnails shall be generated and embedded in each PDF file. K. Files shall be delivered without Security features activated. Password protected files will be unacceptable. L. The opening view for PDF files shall be set as follows: 1. Initial View: Bookmarks and Page 2. Magnification: Fit In Window 3. Page Layout: Single Page M. The file shall open to the cover page of the Equipment O&M Manual with bookmarks to the left. The first bookmark shall be the name of Equipment O&M Manual. N. The submittal shall be delivered on CD after all Equipment O&M Manuals have been received and reviewed. Each CD shall be labeled, at a minimum, as follows, including: 1) CD-ROM disks, 2)jewel cases, and 3) hard copies. 1. Manufacturer name, point of contact, telephone number, facsimile number, and e-mail address as appropriate. 2. Equipment name and/or O&M title spelled out in complete words. Example "Operations and Maintenance Manual" "Horizontal Centrifugal Nonclog Pump" 3. Specifications section number. 4. Project name. 5. Date and File Name: Example "12-20-07," "19876_01.pdf." O. CONTRACTOR shall reprocess any portion of the document that does not view or print to CITY's satisfaction. P. CONTRACTOR is fully responsible for obtaining any and all copyright permissions associated with conversion of this information to electronic format. Q. Each maintenance manual shall include a completed equipment maintenance summary form for each type and size of equipment being furnished that requires power, lubrication, or maintenance. Equipment Summary forms are located at the end of this section. PART 2—PRODUCTS NOT APPLICABLE PART 3—EXECUTION NOT APPLICABLE END OF SECTION Section 01 33 00-8 4463.004/City Contract No.994 EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE SUMMARY FORM(') Equipment No.: Specification Section: Equipment Name: Building Name: Room No.: Plant Location: Manufacturer: Address: Phone: Service Representative: Address: Phone: Fax: Make: Model: Serial No.: Type: — Size: Equipment Speed: Capacity: Operating Range: Material: Alarms: Drive Ratio: Motor Speed: Service Factor: Volts: Phase: hp: Efficiency: Motor Type: Motor Sensors: Motor Manufacturer: Model: Motor Frame: Insulation Class: FLA: LRA: (1) Complete as applicable; attach supplementary pages as necessary. Section 01 33 00-9 4463.004/City Contract No.994 Maintenance Requirements (Use additional sheets if more space is needed.) LUBRICATION Generic Type Estimated Annual Item of Lubricant Supplier Frequency Quantity PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE Item Action Frequency Reference SUGGESTED MINIMUM SPARE PARTS LIST Manufacturer Part No. Quantity Unit Description Section 01 33 00-10 4463.004/City Contract No.994 The following information is included in O&M Manual: Check or mark N/A 1. Recommended installation, adjustment, calibration, and troubleshooting. 2. Complete internal and connection wiring diagrams. 3. Complete parts lists, by generic title and identification number, with exploded views of each assembly. 4. Disassembly, overhaul, and reassembly instructions. 5. Recommended prestart checks. 6. Recommended start procedure. 7. Recommended shutdown procedure for both short and long term. 8. Recommended operating precautions that include safety for personnel and equipment. 9. Recommended standing maintenance procedure. END OF SECTION -- Section 01 33 00-11 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 01 41 00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. OSHA requirements. 2. Roadway limits. 3. Permits. 4. Wage rates. 5. American Iron and Steel requirements. 6. Inspections. 1.02 OSHA REQUIREMENTS A. All work including site safety, equipment, materials, and fabricated items provided under the Contract shall comply with the provisions of the "Occupational Safety and Health Act." 1.03 ROADWAY LIMITS A. CONTRACTOR shall comply with roadway weight restrictions including seasonal weight restrictions. 1.04 PERMITS A. The following permits were obtained by CITY: 1. Iowa Department of Natural Resources (IDNR) Preliminary Site Investigation Approval. 2. IDNR Construction Permit (Iowa Department of Natural Resources; pending). 3. NEPA Categorical Exclusion (Iowa State Revolving Fund; pending). B. They are included as attachments to this division. CONTRACTOR shall comply with all provisions of these permits and shall be responsible for notifications as required by these permits. CONTRACTOR shall obtain all other permits required for the Work. Where the requirements of any permit is more restrictive than the Drawings or the Specifications, the permit requirements shall govern. C. The following permits will be required from CITY. However, CITY will waive fees associated with these permits: 1. Building permit. 2. Demolition permit. 3. Tank permit. 4. Fire protection system permit. 5. Plumbing permit. 6. HVAC permit. 7. Electrical permit. D. Any permits required for dewatering operations shall be obtained and paid for by CONTRACTOR. Section 01 41 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 E. CONTRACTOR shall obtain Site Disturbance/Erosion Control Permits as necessary to accommodate CONTRACTOR's specific means and methods for completing the Work. CONTRACTOR shall comply with all requirements of the Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) which will be provided electronically to CONTRACTOR. 1.05 WAGE RATES A. CONTRACTOR shall comply with the attached Federal Wage Rates. B. Not less than the prevailing wage rates for this area shall be paid to the workers employed to do the Work under this Contract. C. See Wage Rate Forms bound at the end of Division 01. 1.06 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL REQUIREMENTS A. CONTRACTOR shall comply with the American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements of the Consolidated Appropriations Act of 2014 (Public Law 113-76). CONTRACTOR shall submit, with each shop drawing, step certification that regulated iron and steel products meet AIS requirements. A sample certification letter is enclosed. Certification letters shall include the following at minimum: 1. Identification of the product. 2. City and State where the product was manufactured. 3. Reference to CITY and/or project. 4. Signature of authorized manufacturer employee. 5. Reference to current AIS requirements. B. The Consolidated Appropriations Act of 2014 (Public Law 113-76) does grant the possibility of a De Minimis waiver if certain conditions are met as described in Attachment 9 of the "SRF Required Front-End Specifications" included in these specifications. C. CONTRACTOR shall provide required AIS documentation prior to instal ation of regulated iron and steel product. 1.07 INSPECTIONS A. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for coordinating all required inspect ons and reporting inspection results to CITY. PART 2—PRODUCTS NOT APPLICABLE PART 3—EXECUTION NOT APPLICABLE END OF SECTION Section 01 41 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 01 42 00 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Reference Standards: a. Throughout the Contract Documents, reference is made to codes and standards which establish qualities and types of workmanship and materials, and which establish methods for workmanship and materials, and which establish methods for testing and reporting on the pertinent characteristics. b. Where materials or workmanship are required by these Contract Documents to meet or exceed the specifically named code or standard, it is CONTRACTOR's responsibility to provide materials and workmanship which meet or exceed that specifically named code or standard. c. It is also CONTRACTOR's responsibility, when so required by the Contract Documents, to deliver to CONSULTANT all required proof that the material or workmanship, or both, meet or exceed the requirements of the specifically named code or standard. 2. Definitions: a. A substantial amount of specification language constitutes definitions for terms found in other Contract Documents, including the Drawings which must be recognized as diagrammatic in nature and not completely descriptive of requirements indicated thereon. b. Certain terms used in the Contract Documents are defined generally in this section to supplement definitions of the Agreement, General Specifications, Supplemental General Specifications, Special Provisions, and other general contract documents. c. Definitions and explanations of this section are not necessarily either complete or exclusive, but are general for the Work. B. Related Work Described Elsewhere: The specific naming of codes or standards occurs on the Drawings and in other sections of these Specifications. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Familiarity with Pertinent Codes and Standards: 1. It is CONTRACTOR's responsibility to verify the requirements of the specifically named codes and standards and to verify that the items procured for use in this Work meet or exceed the specified requirements. 2. When required by individual sections of these specifications, CONTRACTOR shall obtain a copy of each pertinent code or standard and maintain the copies at the job site during submittals, planning, and progress of the Work until Substantial Completion of the Work is attained. B. Overlapping or Conflicting Requirements: 1. Where compliance with two or more industry standards or sets of requirements are specified, and the overlapping of those standards or requirements establishes different or conflicting minimums or levels of quality, the most stringent requirement (which is Section 01 42 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 generally recognized to be also most costly) is intended and will bt enforced, unless more detailed language written directly into Contract Documents clec rly indicates that a less stringent requirement is acceptable. 2. Refer all uncertainties to CONSULTANT for decision before proceed ng. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Applicable standards of the construction industry are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference as if copied directly into the Contract Documents, or as if published copies were bound herewith. B. Standards referenced directly in the Contract Documents or by governing regulation, have precedence over nonreferenced standards which are recognized in industry for applicability to the Work. C. Nonreference standards are hereby defined to have no particular applicability to the work except as a general measurement of whether the Work complies with standards recognized in the construction industry. D. Reference standards and codes listed in these specifications may include, but are not necessarily limited to, standards or codes published by the following agencies and organizations: 1. AA Aluminum Association 1525 Wilson Boulevard, Arlington, VA 22209 2. AAMA American Architectural Manufacturer's Association 1827 Walden Office Square Suite 550, Schaumberg, IL. 60173-4268 3. AASHTO American Association of State Highway & Transportation Officials 444 North Capitol Street NW Suite 249, Washington, CO 20001 4. ACI American Concrete Institute 38800 Country Club Drive, Farmington Hills, MI 48331 -3439 5. Al Asphalt Institute 2696 Research Park Drive, Lexington, KY 40511-848C 6. AISC American Institute of Steel Construction One East Wacker Drive Suite 700, Chicago, IL 60601-' 802 7. AISI American Iron and Steel Institute 25 Massachusetts Avenue NW Suite 800, Washington. DC 20001 8. ANSI American National Standards Institute 25 West 43rd Street, New York, NY 10036 9. APA American Plywood Association 7011 South 19th, Tacoma, WA 98466-5333 -- Section 01 42 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 10. API American Petroleum Institute 1220 L Street NW, Washington, DC 20005-4070 11. ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute 4100 North Fairfax Drive Suite 200, Arlington, VA 22203 12. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning Engineers 1791 Tullie Circle NE, Atlanta, GA 30329 13. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers Two Park Avenue, New York, NY 10016-5990 14. ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering 901 Canterbury Suite A, Westlake, OH 44145 15. ASTM ASTM International 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohoken, PA 19428-2959 16. AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute 46179 Westlake Drive Suite 120, Potomac Falls, VA 20165-5874 17. AWPA American Wood Protection Association P.O. Box 361784, Birmingham, AL 35236-1784 18. AWS American Welding Society 8669 Doral Boulevard Suite 130, Doral, FL 33166 19. AWWA American Water Works Association 6666 West Quincy Avenue, Denver, CO 80235 20. BHMA Builder's Hardware Manufacturers Association 355 Lexington Avenue 15th floor, New York, NY 10017 21. BIA Brick Industry Association 1850 Centennial Park Drive Suite 301, Reston, VA 20191 22. CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 9333 North Plum Grove Road, Schaumburg, IL 60173 23. EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association 25 North Broadway, Tarrytown, NY 10591 24. FM FM Global FM Global Corporate Offices, 270 Central Avenue, Johnston, RI 02919 25. FTI Facing Tile Institute Box 8880, Canton, OH 44711 Section 01 42 00-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 • 26. GA Gypsum Association 6525 Belcrest Road Suite 480, Hyattsville, MD 20782 27. GANA Glass Association of North America 800 SW Jackson Street Suite 1500, Topeka, KS 6661,2-1200 28. ICC International Code Council 500 New Jersey Avenue NW 6th Floor, Washington, Doti; 20001 29. IES Illuminating Engineering Society 120 Wall Street, Floor 17, New York, NY 10005-4001 30. MIL Military Specifications Naval Publications and Forms Center 5801 Tabor Avenue, Philadelphia, PA 19120 31. NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturf.Ts 800 Roosevelt Road Building C Suite 312, Glen Elly 1, IL 60137 32. NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association 13750 Sunrise Valley Drive, Herndon, VA 20171-4662 33. NECA NECA National Electrical Contractors Association 3 Bethesda Metro Center Suite 1100, Bethesda, MD 2 )814 34. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association 1300 North 17th Street Suite 1752, Rosslyn, VA 2220,c 35. NFPA National Fire Protection Association 1 Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02169-7471 36. NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (U.S. Department of Commerce), 100 Bureau Drive, St)p 1070 Gaithersburg, MD 20899-1070 37. NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association 10255 West Higgins Road Suite 600, Rosemont, IL 60 )18-5607 38. NSF National Sanitation Foundation International P.O. Box 130140, 789 North Dixboro Road, Ann Arbc,r, MI 48113-0140 39. OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration 200 Constitution Avenue NW, Washington, DC 20210 40. PCA Portland Cement Association 5420 Old Orchard Road, Skokie, IL 60077 41. PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute 200 West Adams Street Suite 2100, Chicago, IL 6060E -� Section 01 42 00-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 42. SAE Society of Automotive Engineers SAE World Headquarters 400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA 15096-0001 43. SDI Steel Deck Institute P.O. Box 25, Fox River Grove, IL 60021 44. SDI Steel Door Institute 30200 Detroit Road, Westlake, OH 44145-1987 45. SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Assoc. 401 North Michigan Avenue Suite 2400, Chicago, IL 60611 46. SJI Steel Joist Institute 234 Cheves Street, Florence, SC 29501 47. SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association 4201 Lafayette Center Drive, Chantilly, VA 20151-1219 48. SSPC Society for Protective Coatings 40 24th Street 6th Floor, Pittsburgh, PA 15222-4656 49. TCA Tile Council of America 100 Clemson Research Boulevard, Anderson, SC 29625 50. UL Underwriters Laboratories 333 Pfingston Road; Northbrook, IL 60062 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. For CITY's records, CONTRACTOR shall submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, and similar documents, correspondence and records established in conjunction with compliance with standards and regulations bearing upon performance of the Work. 1.05 DEFINITIONS A. Indicated: 1. The term "indicated" is a cross-reference to details, notes, or schedules on the drawings, to other paragraphs or schedules in the specifications and to similar means of recording requirements in the Contract Documents. 2. Where terms such as "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" are used in lieu of "indicated", it is for the purpose of helping the reader locate cross-reference, and no limitation is intended except as specifically noted. B. Approve (or Words of Similar Nature): 1. Where used in conjunction with CONSULTANT's response to submittals, requests, applications, inquiries, reports, and claims by CONTRACTOR, the meaning of the term "approve" will be held to the limitation of CONSULTANT's responsibilities to evaluate, in general, the Work for compliance with the information in the Contract Documents and Section 01 42 00-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 with the design concept of the Project as a functioning whole as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents (unless there is a specific statement indicating otherwise). The use of any such term or adjective is not intended to and shall not be effective to assign to CONSULTANT any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work. 2. In no case will '`approval" by CONSULTANT be interpreted as a release of CONTRACTOR from responsibility to fulfill requirements of the Contract Documents. C. Minimum Requirements: 1. Indicated requirements are for a specific minimum acceptable level of quality or quantity, as recognized in the industry. 2. Actual work must comply with (or within specified tolerances) or exceed minimums. _ 3. CONTRACTOR shall refer uncertainties to CONSULTANT before proceeding. D. Abbreviations: Abbreviations, where not defined in the Contract Documents, will be interpreted to mean the normal construction industry terminology. PART 2—PRODUCTS NOT APPLICABLE PART 3—EXECUTION NOT APPLICABLE END OF SECTION -- Section 01 42 00-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 01 45 00 QUALITY CONTROL PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Includes: 1. Quality Assurance—Control of Installation. 2. Tolerances. 3. Manufacturers' Field Services and Reports. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE—CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. CONTRACTOR shall monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship to produce Work of specified quality. B. CONTRACTOR shall comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR shall request clarification from CONSULTANT before proceeding. D. CONTRACTOR shall comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Work shall be performed by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. F. CONTRACTOR shall secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, or disfigurement. 1.03 TOLERANCES A. CONTRACTOR shall monitor tolerance control of installed products to produce acceptable work and shall not permit tolerances to accumulate. B. CONTRACTOR shall comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR shall request clarification from CONSULTANT before proceeding. C. CONTRACTOR shall adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place. 1.04 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS A. When specified in individual specification sections or when requested by CONSULTANT, CONTRACTOR shall require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, and quality of workmanship. Section 01 45 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 v B. CONTRACTOR shall submit qualifications of observer to CONSULTANT days in advance of required observations. C. CONTRACTOR shall report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions. D. CONTRACTOR shall submit report in duplicate within 30 days c f observation to CONSULTANT for information. PART 2—PRODUCTS NOT APPLICABLE PART 3—EXECUTION NOT APPLICABLE END OF SECTION Section 01 45 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Temporary utilities. 2. Temporary stairs and access. 3. Temporary support facilities. 4. Construction sign. 5. Removal of temporary facilities. B. CONTRACTOR shall arrange for and provide temporary facilities as required for proper and expeditious prosecution of the Work. C. CONTRACTOR shall pay all costs, except as otherwise specified, until final acceptance of the Work unless CITY makes arrangements for use of completed portions of the Work after substantial completion. D. CONTRACTOR shall make all temporary connections to utilities and services in locations acceptable to CITY and local authorities having appropriate jurisdiction. 1. Furnish all necessary labor and materials. 2. Make all installations in a manner subject to the acceptance of such authorities and CITY. 3. Maintain such connections. 4. Remove temporary installation and connection when no longer required. 5. Restore services and sources of supply to proper operating conditions. 1.02 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Temporary Toilets: CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain sanitary temporary chemical toilets located where approved by CITY and in sufficient number required for the work force employed by CONTRACTOR. B. Temporary Electrical Services: 1. CONTRACTOR shall make all necessary arrangements, furnish, install, and maintain necessary temporary electrical services at the Site. Services shall be a minimum of 200 amperes, 1 phase, 3 wire, 120/240 volt temporary power and lighting system adequate for the construction of this Project and in accordance with OSHA Requirements for Construction Projects. Installation of the temporary power and lighting system is to begin upon notification to proceed and shall be installed and routed in a manner so as not to interfere with construction of the Project. CONTRACTOR shall remove all temporary services when Project is complete. 2. The temporary light and power system shall include temporary service poles, metering facilities, driven ground, fused main disconnect switch, panelboards, branch circuits, outlets and lamps, and the maintenance thereof. Section 01 50 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3. Construction areas, aisles, stairs, and ramps shall be illuminated to 5 fc. Construction shops, storerooms, mechanical, and electrical rooms shall be illuminated to 10 fc. Offices illuminated to 30 fc. 4. Temporary lights shall be equipped with heavy-duty electric cords and lamp guards. They must not be suspended by the power supply cord unless it is designed for this use. 5. Provide one general purpose, 20 ampere, 120 volt, single phase, grounding type — receptacle outlet for every 1,000 feet of floor space and tank area. The maximum length of a 20 ampere, 120 volt lighting or power circuit shall not be greater than 200 feet from panelboard to farthest outlet. All single-phase receptacle outlet circuits shall have approved ground-fault circuit interrupter protection. 6. All utility charges for installation of the temporary services shall be paid for by CONTRACTOR. All metering installation charges and all energy charges for electric current used for temporary lighting and power are to be paid by CON TRACTOR. 7. No permanent electrical equipment or wiring shall be used without express written permission of CITY. Such approval, if given, shall not affect guarantee period. If CITY authorizes use of permanent service facilities, CONTRACTOR sha ! pay all metering costs until acceptance or occupancy (whichever occurs first) of building by CITY. C. Weather Protection and Temporary Heat: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide weather protection to protect the W:)rk from damage because of freezing, rain, snow, and other inclement weather. 2. CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary heat within buildings, without cost to CITY, from the time the buildings or portions thereof are enclosed until the Project is accepted or occupied by CITY, whichever occurs first. The building work is to be heated during construction so a minimum temperature of 50°F is maintained at all times. Temporary heating equipment shall be properly vented. 3. Tanks that are constructed and existing tanks taken out of service as part of the Work shall be protected by CONTRACTOR from damage because of frost by insulating, enclosure, heating, or a combination of methods as required. 4. No permanent heating equipment shall be used on a temporary basis without express written permission by CITY. Such approval, if given, shall not affect the guarantee period. If CITY authorizes use of permanent heating equipment, CONTRACTOR shall pay all related energy costs until acceptance or occupancy (whichever occurs first) of the building by CITY. D. Temporary Telephone Service: CONTRACTOR shall provide, without extra cost to CITY, telephone services at the Site for phones and computer modems specified in Section 01 52 13—Field Offices and Sheds for the duration of the Work at the Site. Also provide service as required for CONTRACTOR's use. Party making toll calls shall pay for same. E. Temporary Water: CONTRACTOR shall supply its own water during construction. CONTRACTOR shall also provide its own piping, valves, and appurtenances for its requirements. Connection to the existing water system shall be coordinated with CITY and shall meet all code requirements including disinfection and backflow prevention. CITY will waive charges for water reasonably used by CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall minimize wasteful use. — F. Temporary Fire Protection: CONTRACTOR and Subcontractor(s) who rr aintain or provide an enclosed shed or trailer shall provide and maintain in operating ordE r in each shed or trailer a minimum of one fire extinguisher. More extinguishers shal be provided as Section 01 50 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 necessary. Fire extinguishers shall be minimum dry chemical, nonfreezing-type, UL rating 2A-30BC, with 10-pound capacity for Class A, B, and C fires. G. CONTRACTOR's and Subcontractor(s)' personnel shall refrain from smoking during excavation, laying pipe, backfilling, and other work at the Site which may involve potential contact with explosive vapors or gasoline products. 1.03 TEMPORARY STAIRS AND ACCESS A. CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain all equipment such as temporary stairs, ladders, ramps, runways, chutes, and so on as required for proper execution of the Work. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for providing its own scaffolds, hoists, etc. B. All such apparatus, equipment, and construction shall meet all requirements of OSHA, the labor laws, and other applicable State and local laws. Provide stairs with handrails. As soon as possible and where applicable, permanent stairs shall be installed. C. As soon as permanent stairs are created, provide temporary protective treads, handrails, and shaft protection. D. Provide barricades at hazardous locations, complete with signs, temporary general lighting, warning lights, and similar devices as required. 1.04 TEMPORARY SUPPORT FACILITIES A. CONTRACTOR shall provide whatever facilities and services which may be needed to properly support primary construction process and meet compliance requirements and governing regulations. B. CONTRACTOR shall not use permanent facilities except as otherwise indicated, unless authorized by CITY. 1.05 CONSTRUCTION SIGN A. Furnish and erect a construction sign to be maintained and kept in place until completion of the Contract. B. The sign shall be minimum 4 feet high by 8 feet wide, constructed by a professional sign painter, and shall show the name of the Project, CITY, all prime contractors and CONSULTANT. CONSULTANT will furnish a sketch showing the printing. CITY will select colors of paint required. General sign layout shall be as shown on Drawing 01-975-158A attached at the end of these Specifications or as required by IDNR. 1.06 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Remove temporary materials, equipment, services, and construction as soon as practicable but no later than just prior to substantial completion inspection. B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities and restore existing facilities used during construction to specified, or to original, condition. Section 01 50 00-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. Minor temporary facilities which interfere with CITY's operations shall be removed at the end of each Work period. PART 2—PRODUCTS NOT APPLICABLE PART 3—EXECUTION NOT APPLICABLE END OF SECTION Section 01 50 00-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 01 52 13 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Materials, equipment, and furnishings. 2. Construction. 3. Environmental control. 4. CONTRACTOR office and facilities. 5. CONSULTANT Office. 6. Storage areas and sheds. 7. Preparation. 8. Installation. 9. Maintenance and cleaning. 10. Removal. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, AND FURNISHINGS A. Materials, equipment, and furnishings shall be serviceable, new or used, and adequate for required purpose. 2.02 CONSTRUCTION A. Portable or mobile buildings or buildings shall be constructed with floors raised above ground, securely fixed to foundations, with steps and landings at entrance doors. B. CONTRACTOR shall provide structurally sound, secure, weathertight enclosures for office and storage spaces. C. Temperature transmission resistance of floors, walls, and ceilings shall be compatible with occupancy and storage requirements. D. Exterior materials shall be weather resistant. E. Interior materials in offices shall consist of sheet type materials for walls and ceilings, prefinished or painted; resilient floors and bases. F. Lighting for offices shall be 50 footcandles minimum at desk top height, with exterior lighting at entrance doors. G. Provide appropriate type fire extinguisher at each office and each storage area. H. Interior materials in storage sheds shall be as required to provide specified conditions for storage of products. Section 01 52 13-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.03 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL A. Heating, cooling, and ventilating for offices shall consist of automatic equ pment to maintain comfort conditions; 70°F heating and 78°F cooling. B. Heating and ventilation for storage spaces shall be as needed to ma ntain products in accordance with Contract Documents and to provide adequate lighting foi maintenance and observation of products. 2.04 CONTRACTOR OFFICE AND FACILITIES A. CONTRACTOR shall provide facilities to meet CONTRACTOR's needs ar i to provide space for Project meetings. B. Provide telephone as required for CONTRACTOR's needs. C. Provide furnishings in meeting area. As a minimum, provide conference table and chairs to seat at least eight persons; racks and files for Contract Documents, submittals, and project record documents. 2.05 CONSULTANT OFFICE A. CONTRACTOR shall provide separate trailer for sole use of CONSULTI NT, with separate entrance door with new lock and two keys. B. Minimum area shall be 200 square feet, minimum dimension 8 feet. C. Minimum total area of windows shall be 10% of floor area, with operabl , sash and insect screens. Locate to provide views of construction area. D. Electrical distribution panel shall have two circuits minimum, 110 volt, 60 F z service. Provide minimum four 110 volt duplex convenience outlets, one on each wall. E. Provide minimum single-line touch tone phone and answering machine. F. Provide the following personal computer items: 1. One desktop or laptop PC, Windows compatible, with minimum, 3.0 GhZ Multi Core (latest generation) Intel i5 or i7 processor, 8 GB RAM (or larger), 250 GB Solid State Drive (or larger), GB Ethernet and WiFi NIC, Six USB 2.0 or higher ports, Windows 10, CDR/DVDR Drive. 2. Video Card with 1024 MB RAM capable of displaying a minimum resolution of 1920 x 1080. 3. External 500 GB (or larger) USB 3.0 hard drive with software for backing up computer 4. Setup software and verify software backups and restores the computer and its data files. 5. LCD Display, Minimum 24-inch capable of displaying 1920 x 1080 or higher resolution. 6. Hewlett Packard LaserJet all in one (Printer, Copier, Fax, Scan) with USB and WiFi connectivity. Using Laser Technology (must use toner and not ink). Must accommodate both 8.5 x 11 and 11 x 17 paper. Replenish paper, toner cartridges, ctnd other supplies before fully expended. 7. Microsoft Office software 2016 or higher, compatible with supplied operating system and hardware. -- 8. Current version of Antivirus software with subscription to new updates -� Section 01 52 13-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 9. A broadband high speed internet service provider with minimum download speeds of Ten Mbps; minimum upload speeds of Two Mbps. 10. K Slot or Kensington lock and cable system to deter theft 11. Web Cam compatible with Skype with a resolution of 720p or higher 12. All necessary cables for system configurations. 13. PC, monitor, and printer to be set up, configured, and fully functional for use with communications and Microsoft Office Software. Security lock system installed. G. Provide bottled drinking water dispenser and refill as necessary. H. Provide the following furnishings: 1. One desk, minimum 54-inch by 30-inch, with three drawers. 2. One drafting table, 36-inch by 72-inch, with one equipment drawer. 3. Plan rack to hold working drawings, shop drawings, and record documents. 4. One standard four-drawer legal size metal filing cabinet. 5. Six linear feet of metal bookshelves. 6. One swivel armchair. 7. Two straight chairs. 8. One drafting table stool. 9. One tackboard, 36-inch by 30-inch. 10. One wastebasket. 2.06 STORAGE AREAS AND SHEDS A. Provide storage areas and sheds of size to meet storage requirements for products of individual sections, allowing for access and orderly provision for maintenance and for observation of products to meet requirements of Section 01 60 00—Materials and Equipment. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. CONTRACTOR shall fill and grade sites for temporary structures to provide drainage away from buildings. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. CONTRACTOR shall install office spaces ready for occupancy 15 days after date fixed in Notice to Proceed or as agreed upon by CONSULTANT. B. Provide two hard surfaced parking spaces for use by CONSULTANT, connected to office by hard surfaced walk. 3.03 MAINTENANCE AND CLEANING A. CONTRACTOR shall maintain approach walks free of mud, water, and snow. Section 01 52 13-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.04 REMOVAL A. Upon final acceptance and completion of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall remove field — offices, foundations, utility services, and debris and shall restore areas. — END OF SECTION - — Section 01 52 13-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 01 57 00 TEMPORARY CONTROLS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Dust Control. 2. Water, Erosion, and Sediment Control. 3. Noise Control. 4. Traffic Control. 5. Site Security. 6. Daily Cleanup. PART 2—PRODUCTS NOT APPLICABLE PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 DUST CONTROL A. CONTRACTOR shall execute the Work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. B. CONTRACTOR shall provide positive means to prevent airborne dust from dispersing into atmosphere. C. CONTRACTOR shall provide partitions, enclosures, etc., within buildings as necessary to confine dust and protect adjacent areas. 3.02 WATER, EROSION, AND SEDIMENT CONTROL A. CONTRACTOR shall grade site to drain and shall maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping equipment. B. CONTRACTOR shall protect Site from puddling or running water. C. CONTRACTOR shall provide erosion control measures as necessary to control discharge of sediment laden water to surface waters and wetlands. D. Except as provided for in the document, overland discharge of water from dewatering operations shall not be allowed. Depending on water quality, such water shall either be piped directly to the surface water or shall be directed to sedimentation basins or other such structures or features prior to discharge to surface waters so as not to cause damage to existing ground and improvements, erosion, or deposition in the discharge area. Section 01 57 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 E. CONTRACTOR shall use jute or synthetic netting, silt fences, straw bales, dikes, channels, and other applicable measures to prevent erosion of soils disturbed by its construction operation. F. Restoration of the Site shall proceed concurrently with the construction operation. See Drawings and Specifications for erosion control measures in addition to 'lat which may be required above. G. Erosion control measures shall comply with BMP and Iowa DNR Constru ;tion State Erosion Manual. 3.03 NOISE CONTROL A. Provide methods, means, and facilities to minimize noise produced by construction operations. 3.04 TRAFFIC CONTROL A. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for providing all signs, barricades, f agmen, and other traffic control devices in the construction zone. B. All traffic control measures shall meet the requirements of the current ec tion of the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices, except for exceptions noted in Iowa A dmin.760-130.1. C. Do not close or obstruct roadways without approval of CITY. D. Conduct operations with minimum interference to roadways. E. Maintain two-way traffic on streets at all times. 3.05 SITE SECURITY A. CONTRACTOR shall have the sole responsibility of safeguarding the Site perimeter to prevent unauthorized entry to the Site throughout the duration of the Project. CONTRACTOR shall at all times provide such permanent and temporary fencing or brricades or other measures as may be necessary to restrict unauthorized entry to its ,onstruction area including construction in public rights-of-way or easements. Site securi y measures shall include safeguards against attractive nuisance hazards as a result of con truction activity. B. CONTRACTOR shall at all times be responsible for the security of the Work including materials and equipment. CITY will not take any responsibility for missing or damaged equipment, tools, or personal belongings. CONTRACTOR shall have the sole responsibility of safeguarding the Work and the Site throughout the duration of the Project. 3.06 DAILY CLEANUP A. CONTRACTOR shall clean up the Site and remove all rubbish on a daily oasis. -- Section 01 57 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. CONTRACTOR shall clean up public streets and highways and remove any dirt, mud, or other materials due to project traffic on daily basis and shall comply with all local and state ordinances and permit requirements. END OF SECTION Section 01 57 00-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 01 60 00 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the delivery, har filing, storage and protection of all material and equipment required to complete the Work a:; specified herein. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Specific requirements for the handling and storage of material and equipment are described in other sections of these Specifications. 1.02 PRODUCTS A. Components required to be supplied in quantity within a Specification section shall be the same, and shall be interchangeable. B. CONTRACTOR shall not use materials and equipment removed from existing construction, except as specifically required, or allowed, by the Contract Documents. C. When any construction deviations from the Drawings and/or Specifications necessary to accommodate equipment supplied by CONTRACTOR, result in additional costs to CONTRACTOR or other contractors, such additional costs shall be borne by CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall also pay any additional costs necessary for revisions of Drawings and/or Specifications by CONSULTANT. D. Each major component of equipment shall bear a nameplate giving the r ame and address of the manufacturer and the catalogue number or designation. 1.03 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Materials, products and equipment shall be properly containerized, pack aged, boxed, and protected to prevent damage during transportation and handling. B. CONTRACTOR shall not overload any portion of the structure in the transporting or storage of materials. C. CONTRACTOR shall not damage other construction by careless transp )rtation, handling, spillage, staining or impact of materials. D. CONTRACTOR shall provide equipment and personnel to handle products, including those provided by CITY, by methods to prevent soiling and damage. E. CONTRACTOR shall provide additional protection during handling to pn vent marring and otherwise damaging products, packaging, and surrounding surfaces. F. CONTRACTOR shall handle product by methods to avoid bending or )verstressing. Lift large and heavy components only at designated lift points. Section 01 60 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1.04 DELIVERY AND RECEIVING A. CONTRACTOR shall arrange deliveries of products in accordance with the Progress Schedule, allowing time for observation prior to installation. B. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate deliveries to avoid conflict with the Work and conditions at the Site; work activities of other contractors or CITY; limitations on storage space; availability of personnel and handling equipment and CITY's use of premises. C. CONTRACTOR shall deliver products in undamaged, dry condition, in original unopened containers or packaging with identifying labels intact and legible. D. CONTRACTOR shall clearly mark partial deliveries of component parts of equipment to identify equipment and contents to permit easy accumulation of parts and to facilitate assembly. E. Immediately on delivery, CONTRACTOR shall inspect shipment to review that: 1. Product complies with requirements of Contract Documents and reviewed submittals. 2. Quantities are correct. 3. Accessories and installation hardware are correct. 4. Containers and packages are intact and labels legible. 5. Products are protected and undamaged. 1.05 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. General: 1. CONTRACTOR shall store products, immediately on delivery, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with all seals and labels intact and legible. -- 2. Any additional off-site space required shall be arranged by CONTRACTOR. 3. CONTRACTOR shall allocate the available storage areas and coordinate their use by the trades on the job. 4. CONTRACTOR shall arrange storage in a manner to provide access for maintenance of stored items and for observation. B. In enclosed storage, CONTRACTOR shall: 1. Provide suitable temporary weather tight storage facilities as may be required for materials that will be damaged by storage in the open. 2. Maintain temperature and humidity within ranges stated in manufacturer's instructions. 3. Provide ventilation for sensitive products as required by manufacturer's instructions. 4. Store unpacked and loose products on shelves, in bins, or in neat groups of like items. 5. Store solid materials such as insulation, tile, mechanical and electrical equipment, fittings, and fixtures under shelter, in original packages, away from dampness and other hazards. 6. Store liquid materials away from fire or intense heat and protect from freezing. C. At exterior storage, CONTRACTOR shall: 1. Store unit materials such as concrete block, brick, steel, pipe, conduit, door frames, and lumber off ground, out of reach of dirt, water, mud and splashing. 2. Store tools or equipment that carry dirt outside. 3. Store large equipment so as not to damage the Work or present a fire hazard. 4. Cover products subject to discoloration or deterioration from exposure to the elements, with impervious sheet material and provide ventilation to avoid condensation. Section 01 60 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 5. Completely cover and protect any equipment or material which is prime coated or finish painted with secured plastic or cloth tarps. Store out of reach of dirt, water, mud and splashing. 6. Store loose granular materials on clean, solid surfaces such as pavement, or on rigid sheet materials, to prevent mixing with foreign matter. 7. Provide surface drainage to prevent erosion and ponding of water. 8. Prevent mixing of refuse or chemically injurious materials or liquids. 9. Cover aggregates such as sand and gravel in cold wet weather. 10. Remove all traces of piled bulk materials at completion of work and re•urn site to original or indicated condition. 1.06 MAINTENANCE OF STORAGE A. CONTRACTOR shall periodically inspect stored products on a schedulec basis. B. CONTRACTOR shall verify that storage facilities comply with manufacturer's product storage requirements, and verify that manufacturer required environmental conditions are maintained continually. C. CONTRACTOR shall verify that surfaces of products exposed to the elements are not adversely affected and that any weathering of finishes is acceptable und :tr requirements of Contract Documents. D. CONTRACTOR shall perform scheduled maintenance of equipment in storage as recommended by the manufacturer. A record of the maintenance shall be kept and turned over to CONSULTANT when the equipment is installed. 1.07 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Manufactured articles, materials, and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned, and conditioned as directed by the respective mar jfacturers, unless otherwise specified. B. After installation, CONTRACTOR shall protect all materials and equipment against weather, dust, moisture, and mechanical damage. C. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all damages that occur in connection with the care and protection of all materials and equipment until completion and final acceptance of the Work by CITY. Damaged material and equipment shall be immediately removed from the Site. 1.08 EQUIPMENT WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be nonprorated, include all parts and labor, and be in written form. Warranties shall specifically exclude buyer's indemnification language. Warranty language shall not eliminate manufacturer's responsibility for sizing of the equipment. During warranty period, manufacturer shall be responsible for any travel expenses, outside contractor fees, and rental equipment fees associated with providing warranty service. Manufacturer shall pay expenses incurred for repairs and parts replacement not made by manufacturer if manufacturer's response is not within 72 hours of notification by CITY. Warranty language shall be provided with the shop drawings. -- Section 01 60 00-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1.09 CONCRETE EQUIPMENT BASE A. Cast-in-place concrete equipment bases shall be provided for all new and relocated equipment including electrical control panels, motor control centers, switchgear, etc. Concrete equipment bases shall be provided by CONTRACTOR except where specifically noted to be provided by others. Bases shall be 3 1/2-inch minimum height and shall be a minimum of 3 inches larger than equipment being supported. Grouting of equipment bases shall be as recommended by equipment manufacturer. B. Concrete and grout shall meet applicable sections of the specifications. C. Provide all anchor bolts, metal shapes and templates to be cast in concrete or used to form - concrete for support of equipment. PART 2—PRODUCTS NOT APPLICABLE -, PART 3—EXECUTION NOT APPLICABLE END OF SECTION Section 01 60 00-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 01 73 29 CUTTING, PATCHING, AND ALTERATIONS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all cutting, fitt ng, patching, and other alterations required to complete the Work as specified herein or to: 1 . Make its several parts fit together properly. 2. Uncover portions of the Work to install improperly sequenced Work. 3. Remove and replace defective Work. 4. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Co 'tract Documents. 5. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing. 6. Provide penetrations of surfaces for installation of piping and electric II conduit. 7. Rehabilitate or renovate existing spaces. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI A10 Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE _ A. CONTRACTOR shall perform all cutting, patching, and alterations in stric t accordance with pertinent requirements of these Specifications. B. Except as modified by governing codes, CONTRACTOR shall comply v.ith the applicable provision and recommendations of ANSI A10. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. CONTRACTOR shall submit a written request to CITY well in advance of executing any cutting or alteration which affects the following: 1. Work of CITY or any separate contractor. 2. Structural value or integrity of any element of the Project. 3. Integrity or effectiveness of weather-exposed or moisture-resis:ant elements or systems. 4. Efficiency, operational life, maintenance, or safety of operational eler cents. 5. Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements. B. The request shall include: 1. Description of affected work. 2. The necessity for cutting, patching, or alteration. 3. Effect on work of CITY, any separate contractor, or on the structure or weather-proof integrity of the Project. 4. Description of proposed work to include: a. Scope of cutting, patching, or alteration. b. Trades who will execute the work. c. Products proposed to be used. -� d. Extent of refinishing to be done. 5. Alternatives to cutting and patching. Section 01 73 29-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 6. Written permission of any separate contractor whose work will be affected. C. Submit written notice to CITY designating the date and the time the Work will be uncovered or executed. 1.05 SCHEDULING AND COORDINATION A. All work under this section shall be coordinated with CITY's work forces and those of other contractors and shall be accomplished at times acceptable to CITY. B. Before starting any work relating to existing utilities (electrical, sewer, water, heat, gas, fire lines, etc.) that will temporarily discontinue or disrupt service to the existing building, notify CONSULTANT and CITY 72 hours in advance and obtain CITY's approval before proceeding with this phase of the work. Temporary facilities, if required, shall be in place prior to disruption of service. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 NEW MATERIALS A. For replacement of work removed, CONTRACTOR shall use materials which comply with the pertinent sections of these Specifications. B. All new materials for patching and extending work shall match existing products and work. C. CONTRACTOR shall determine type and quality of existing products by inspection and any necessary testing and workmanship by use of existing as the standard. 2.02 SALVAGEABLE MATERIAL A. Materials or items designated to be reinstalled or to become the property of CITY shall be as specified or as shown on the Drawings. B. CONTRACTOR shall remove such items with care under the supervision of the trade responsible for reinstallation. C. CONTRACTOR shall store these materials (off-site if necessary) and protect from damage until they are incorporated into the new work. D. Items which are not to be reinstalled but are to become the property of CITY shall be removed by CONTRACTOR with care, cleaned, and stored in a location at the Site to be approved by CITY. E. Materials or items damaged in its removal shall be replaced by CONTRACTOR with similar new material at no additional cost to CITY. F. Where existing equipment or fixtures are indicated to be reused, CONTRACTOR shall repair such equipment and refinish as specified elsewhere. Section 01 73 29-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.03 UNSALVAGEABLE MATERIALS A. Materials or items demolished and not designated to become the property of CITY or not designated to be reinstalled shall become the property of CONTRACTOR and shall be removed from the site and legally and properly disposed of by CONTRAC TOR. B. Materials shall be removed by CONTRACTOR in a manner that will avoid damage to materials or equipment to remain. PART 3—EXECUTION _ 3.01 INSPECTION A. CONTRACTOR shall inspect existing conditions including elements subje ;t to movement or damage during cutting, patching, and other alterations. B. After uncovering the work, CONTRACTOR shall inspect conditions affecing installation of new products or performance of new work. C. CONTRACTOR shall report unsatisfactory or questionable conditions to CONSULTANT in writing. D. CONTRACTOR shall not proceed with work until unsatisfactory or quest Dnable conditions are resolved. E. Beginning of cutting, patching, and alterations work means acceptance of t xisting conditions by CONTRACTOR. 3.02 PREPARATION AND PROTECTION A. CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary bracing, shoring, needling, ar d support of the structure during alterations work as necessary to prevent collapse, settling or deflection and to protect persons and property from injury or damage. B. Temporary supports must adequately carry all existing and imposed load. C. CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain temporary protection of surface finishes, equipment, and adjacent work designated to remain where demolition, removal, and new work is being done, connections are being made, materials are being handled, or equipment is being removed. D. CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary partitions or barriers to contain all dust, dirt, and debris from entering into finished areas or areas where CITY is ope ating, storing, or manufacturing products. E. CONTRACTOR shall provide adequate fire protection in accordance; with local Fire Department requirements. F. CONTRACTOR shall provide waterproofing, weather protection, heat, am other facilities for that portion of the work which may be exposed by cutting and patching, d,.molition, or other alterations. �- Section 01 73 29-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 G. CONTRACTOR shall cut, move, or remove items as necessary for access to alterations and renovations work and replace and restore at completion of work. H. CONTRACTOR shall prepare surfaces and remove surface finishes to provide for proper installation of new work and new finishes. I. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for any damage to the existing structure or its contents directly or indirectly by its crews or those of its subcontractors. 3.03 PERFORMANCE A. CONTRACTOR shall accomplish all work of cutting, removal, demolition, patching, or other alterations using only persons skilled in the appropriate trade. B. CONTRACTOR shall execute the work in a careful and orderly manner with the least possible disturbance to the public and to the occupants of the building. C. CONTRACTOR shall execute cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to other work and will provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs. D. CONTRACTOR shall execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide a finished installation to comply with specified products, functions, tolerances, and finishes. E. CONTRACTOR shall fit work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. F. CONTRACTOR shall thoroughly clean and prepare all surfaces to receive new finish or covering to completely remove all dirt, dust, grease, oil, paint, loose materials, and soil. G. CONTRACTOR shall refinish entire surface as necessary to provide an even finish to match adjacent finishes: 1. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection. 2. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. 3.04 DEMOLITION, CUTTING, AND REMOVAL A. Cutting and removal of construction shall be performed by CONTRACTOR so as not to cut or remove more than is necessary and so as not to damage adjacent work. B. CONTRACTOR shall cut out embedded anchorages and attachment items as required to properly provide for patching and repair of the respective finishes.C. CONTRACTOR shall not cut structural work in a manner resulting in a reduction of load-carrying capacity or load/deflection ratio. D. CONTRACTOR shall not cut operational elements and safety components in a manner resulting in decreased performance, shortened useful life, or increased maintenance. E. CONTRACTOR shall not cut work exposed to view(exterior or interior) in a manner resulting in noticeable reduction of visual qualities as determined by CITY. Section 01 73 29-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 F. Construction that is to remain which is loosened, cracked, or otherwise damaged or defaced as a result of careless cutting or demolition and is unsuitable for use intended shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to CITY. G. CONTRACTOR shall clean demolished areas and remove debris, waste and rubbish from the building at the conclusion of each day's work. H. CONTRACTOR shall not let piled waste material endanger the structure. 3.05 PATCHING, EXTENDING, AND MATCHING A. Patching work shall conform to the standards of the Specifications whe e applicable, and where not specified, work shall conform to the highest standards of the a,:)plicable trade. B. CONTRACTOR shall patch construction to match adjacent work unless r jted otherwise. C. Patching or restoration shall be carried to natural breaks (e.g., corners) wherever possible. D. CONTRACTOR shall provide adequate support to substrate for patching •inishes. E. At locations in existing areas where partitions are removed, CONTRAS;TOR shall patch floors, walls, and ceiling with finish material to match adjacent surfaces. F. Transitions: 1. Where new work abuts or finishes flush with existing work, CONTRA TOR shall make the transition as smooth as possible. 2. Patched work shall match adjacent work in texture and appearance ->o as to make the patch or transition invisible to the eye at a distance of 3 feet. 3. Where masonry, tile, plaster, metal, or other finished surface is cut in such a way that a smooth transition is not possible, CONTRACTOR shall terminate the -existing surface in a neat fashion along a straight line at a natural line of division and provide trim appropriate to the finished surface. 4. Where two or more spaces are indicated to become one space, CONTRACTOR shall rework floors and ceilings so that horizontal planes are without ;freaks, steps, or bulkheads, unless shown otherwise. 5. In case of extreme level changes (3 inches or more), revie.v condition with CONSULTANT prior to making transition. 6. CONTRACTOR shall restore existing work that is damaged during patching operations to a condition equal to its construction at the time of the start of work 3.06 UNANTICIPATED MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL WORK EXPOSED A. Where unanticipated mechanical piping or electrical conduit is exposed during removal of partitions or walls, removal or rerouting shall be accomplished by C DNTRACTOR as applicable. 1. Rerouted piping shall be located and shall be connected to maintain all functions in proper operations. 2. Abandoned piping may be left in place where it is buried in floors or w3lis, providing that it is completely disconnected from its source. 3. There shall be no "dead end" gas, water, sewer, or vent piping existin in the completed work. -- Section 01 73 29-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 4. Unless otherwise shown, abandoned piping, ductwork, conduit, or other mechanical or electrical items in chases, vertical enclosures, or concealed above ceilings shall be completely removed. B. Removals, capping, or otherwise terminating services which are abandoned shall be accomplished without additional cost to CITY. C. Relocation of services resulting from unanticipated conflicts of new and existing work in concealed spaces shall be paid for in accordance with the General Specifications. END OF SECTION Section 01 73 29-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 01 77 00 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1 . Closeout procedures. 2. Final cleaning. 3. Adjusting. 4. Project record documents. 5. Warranties. 1.02 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. CONTRACTOR shall provide submittals to CONSULTANT that are required by governing or other authorities. B. CONTRACTOR shall comply with General Specifications and Supplementary General Specifications and complete the following before requesting CONSULTANT's observation of the Work or designated portion thereof for substantial completion. 1 . Submit executed warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreE.ments, inspection certificates, and similar required documentation for specific units )f Work, enabling CITY's unrestricted occupancy and use. 2. Submit record documentation, maintenance manuals, tools, spare parts, keys, and similar operational items. 3. Submit consent of surety (if surety required in Contract). 4. Complete final cleaning, touch-up work of marred surfaces, and remove temporary facilities and tools. 1 .03 FINAL CLEANING A. It is CONTRACTOR's responsibility to completely clean up the inside and outside of all buildings and the construction site at the completion of the Work. B. CONTRACTOR shall clean areas of the building in which painting and finishing work is to be performed just prior to the start of this work and maintain these areas in satisfactory condition for painting and finishing. This cleaning includes: 1. Removal of trash and rubbish from these areas. 2. Broom cleaning of floors. 3. Removal of any plaster, mortar, dust, and other extraneous ma erials from finish surfaces, including but not limited to exposed structural steel, mis.;ellaneous metal, masonry, concrete, mechanical equipment, piping, and electrical equ pment. Section 01 77 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. In addition to the cleaning specified above and the more specific cleaning that may be required in various technical sections of the Specifications, CONTRACTOR shall prepare the Project for occupancy by a thorough cleaning throughout, which shall include the following: 1. Clean interior and exterior glass surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. 2. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned. 3. Replace filters of operating equipment. 4. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. 5. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. 6. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the Site. 1.04 ADJUSTING A. CONTRACTOR shall adjust operating products and equipment to provide smooth and unhindered operation. 1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. CONTRACTOR shall maintain on Site one set of the following record documents to record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change orders and other modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. 6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting. B. CONTRACTOR shall make entries that are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by CITY. C. CONTRACTOR shall store record documents separate from documents used for construction. D. CONTRACTOR shall record information concurrent with construction progress. E. Specifications: CONTRACTOR shall legibly mark and record at each Product section description of actual products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by addenda and modifications. F. Record Drawings: CONTRACTOR shall legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish floor datum. 2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction referenced to visible and accessible features of the work. 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Details not on original Contract drawings. Section 01 77 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1.06 WARRANTIES A. CONTRACTOR shall provide warranties beyond project one-year warra ity as required by technical sections and as follows. B. Submit warranty information as follows: 1. Provide notarized copies. 2. Execute and assemble transferable warranty documents fron Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, and provide Table of Contents and ass,?ruble in three-ring binder with durable cover. 3. Submit with request for certificate of Substantial Completion. 4. For items of work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion provide updated submittal within 10 days after acceptance listing date of acceptance E.s start of warranty period. PART 2—PRODUCTS NOT APPLICABLE PART 3—EXECUTION NOT APPLICABLE END OF SECTION Section 01 77 00-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 01 91 00 STARTING OF SYSTEMS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. General. 2. Equipment and system installation. 3. Starting equipment and systems. 4. Demonstration, instructions, and operator training. 5. Start-up and testing. 6. Equipment systems requiring certification of proper installation. B. CONTRACTOR shall perform the Work described in the following subsections. 1.02 GENERAL A. The number of days for manufacturer's services stated in the Specifications shall be considered as the minimum number of days. Should additional time be required for services because of equipment malfunction or other problem, such time shall be at the expense of CONTRACTOR, with no change in Contract Price. B. "Days" specified shall consist of 8-hour days on-site, excluding travel time. C. CONTRACTOR shall designate and provide one person to be responsible for scheduling, coordinating, and expediting the specified services. Scheduling the services shall be done in cooperation with, and with the prior approval of CONSULTANT and CITY. Such schedule shall be arranged with the appropriate subcontractors, manufacturers, and suppliers with sufficient time to allow their compliance with the service requirements. D. CONTRACTOR shall manage equipment checkout such that checkout has been completed and deficiencies addressed prior to demonstration and training. Scheduling training prior to checkout may result in cancellation when checkout cannot be completed prior to training. 1.03 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Competent and experienced technical personnel shall represent the manufacturers of all equipment and systems for as many days as may be necessary to provide proper installation and to resolve assembly or installation problems at the site that are attributable to, or associated with, the equipment furnished. This requirement applies to manufacturers for all equipment furnished, whether or not specifically set forth in the Specifications. B. Where a manufacturer's certificate is called for in this Specification Section, the manufacturer's representative shall provide the attached certificate stating that the equipment or system has been installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and has been inspected by a manufacturer's authorized representative, that it has been serviced with the proper initial lubricants, that applicable safety equipment has been properly installed, that the proper electrical and mechanical connections have been made, and that Section 01 91 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 any other manufacturer requirements have been met. This certification shall be provided to CONSULTANT and CITY prior to the start-up. This certificate is in addition to the manufacturer's standard startup reports, checklists, and other pertinent information. C. Functional (or run) testing is required for all equipment and systems. The manufacturer's representative shall supervise the functional test, which shall include checking for proper rotation, alignment, speed, excessive vibration, and noisy operation. The Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation shall state that proper adjustments have been made and that the equipment or system is ready for start-up. D. Manufacturer shall demonstrate, using laser alignment equipment, if appropriate, that the installed equipment has been aligned properly. Final acceptance of equipment will not be granted until manufacturer has demonstrated to CONSULTANT that acceptable alignment to tolerances have been achieved. For pumps with motors 7.5 hp and larger, the acceptable shaft alignment tolerances shall be as recommended in the pump manufacturer's written instructions and shall include parallel offset and angular gap measurements. 1.04 STARTING EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Where field testing and start-up services are called for in the Specif cations, or when technical assistance is necessary as a result of any malfunction of the eq .iipment or system furnished, the manufacturer's representative shall provide such services. B. Manufacturer's representative shall also conduct and/or assist with performance testing, as required by the Specifications. These services shall continue until s.,oh times as the applicable equipment or system has been successfully tested for performE nce and has been accepted by CITY for full-time operation. C. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. Coo-dination includes, but is not limited to, communication with subcontractors, supp iers, CITY, and CONSULTANT. CONTRACTOR shall confirm that all necessary work is ;omplete and that the equipment and systems can be operated in conjunction with all associated processes. D. Notify CONSULTANT and CITY a minimum of 7 days prior to start-up of eich item using the attached Equipment Startup and O&M Training Scheduling form. CONTRACTOR shall submit form to CONSULTANT. E. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive �- rotation, belt tension, control sequence, or for other conditions that may cause damage. F. Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. G. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. H. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable manufacturer's representative and CONTRACTOR's personnel in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. I. Require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. Section 01 91 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 J. Equipment manufacturer shall provide a written report covering checkout, testing, inspections, and start-up and shall identify any deficiencies noted. Report shall be submitted to CONSULTANT. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for correcting all deficiencies noted in report. In addition, CONTRACTOR shall submit a fully executed Certificate of Proper Installation form if required in Paragraph 3.01 of this section. 1.05 DEMONSTRATION, INSTRUCTIONS, AND OPERATOR TRAINING A. For all mechanical equipment and systems and where called for in the Specifications, provide a qualified technical representative to provide detailed instructions to CITY's personnel for operation and maintenance of equipment and associated instrumentation. Training services shall include pre-start-up classroom instruction and start-up on-site instruction, as stated in the Specifications. B. Refer to the Specifications for additional training requirements. C. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the pre-start-up training periods with CITY's operating personnel and manufacturers' representatives. 1. Schedule training dates and times with CITY, that are acceptable to the CITY, using equipment, startup, and O&M training form. Normal hours available for training are between 7:30 A.M. to 3 P.M., Monday through Friday, except for holidays. 2. Submit outline and presentation to CONSULTANT at least 7 days in advance of training. 3. Provide name, contact information, and brief synopsis of qualifications of the trainer. 4. If materials above are not provided at least 7 days in advance, training may be canceled. 5. Failure of supplier's or manufacturer's representative to appear for scheduled training, failure to notify CITY 24 hours in advance of need to cancel scheduled training or failure to arrive within 30 minutes of start of scheduled training shall result in reimbursement to CITY for time lost by CITY's personnel in waiting for arrival of manufacturer's representative. Except in case of failure to arrive on time, time will not exceed 1 hour for each employee scheduled to receive training. Failure to arrive on time will be reimbursed by actual time late, up to 1 hour, after 1 hour, training will be rescheduled. CONTRACTOR shall reimburse CITY via a change order. 6. During the training, instructor will dedicate its time solely to training and not start-up services. 7. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with CITY's personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. 8. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, troubleshooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment. 9. Prepare and insert additional data in operation and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. 10. CITY may videotape the training for future internal use. Provide to CITY paper and electronic copies of any media used as part of training. 11. Provide training handouts for each of CITY's personnel present. D. CONTRACTOR shall provide attached Certificate of Operator Training cosigned by CITY and supplier's representative verifying training was accomplished to satisfaction of all parties. Section 01 91 00-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 E. Operation and maintenance manual submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00—Submittals shall be provided prior to operator training. F. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for dormant season at start of dormant season. G. Final payment for various items of equipment will not be made by CITY L ntil the equipment is operating to CITY's satisfaction. H. Where items of equipment are placed into service at different tirr es or sequence, manufacturer's services for start-up, field testing, and supervision shall bE provided for each time or sequence. Training shall be provided prior to or at the time the t rst similar item of equipment is placed in service. 1.06 START-UP AND TESTING A. Prior to acceptance of any portion of the Work, start-up and testing of all equipment and testing of all materials furnished on the Project by CONTRACTOR shall have been conducted in the presence of representatives of CONTRACTOR, CITY, and CONSULTANT and also manufacturer if requested by CITY or CONSULTANT. B. CONTRACTOR shall provide whatever temporary installations and conditions are necessary in order to perform start-up and testing operations on all equipment and materials furnished under the Contract. Temporary connections and equipment necessary during start-up and testing operations shall include, but not be limited to, temporary piping and electrical power and control equipment and devices, temporary connection from various parts of the systems and any other labor, materials, fuel, devices, or items that may be required for start-up and testing operations. Temporary conditions shall include filling with water, if necessary, to check equipment and materials. C. All temporary installations and conditions shall be removed by CONTRACTOR upon completion of start-up and testing. PART 2—PRODUCTS NOT APPLICABLE PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 EQUIPMENT SYSTEMS REQUIRING CERTIFICATION OF PROPER INSTALLATION A. All Special Structures specified in Division 13. B. All equipment specified in Divisions 43 and 46. C. Section 21 11 00—Water-Based Fire Protection. D. All equipment specified in Division 22. -- E. All space and process related heating, cooling, and ventilation equipment and systems specified in Division 23. Section 01 91 00-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 F. Section 26 09 00—Controls and Instrumentation (PART 3—EXECUTION). G. Section 26 13 23—Medium-Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear. H. Section 40 05 59.20—Sluice Gates. I. All Conveying Systems specified in Division 41. END OF SECTION Section 01 91 00-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 TS EQUIPMENT START-UP AND O&M TRAINING SCHEDULING REQUEST FORM STRAND ASSOCIATES, INC.® PROJECT CLIENT CONTRACT CONTRACTOR Date: The following equipment is scheduled for start-up on EQUIPMENT NAME: SPECIFICATION SECTION: MANUFACTURER: MINIMUM HOURS OF TRAINING: DATE O&M MANUALS SUBMITTED: Specification Section 01 91 00 requires that start-up and operation and training be conducted by a qualified manufacturer's representative prior to placing equipment in operation. Review Specification Sections 01 33 00 and 01 45 00 and the individual equipment sections for start-up and training requirements. CITY may find it necessary to propose alternate dates for training based on conflicts with other training and staff availability. The Operation and Maintenance Manuals must be submitted prior to training. After the equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctl'. , submit a written report in accordance with Specification Section 01 45 00. Submit the completed form to CONSULTANT and CITY at least 7 days prior to start-u:) and training. Proposed Training Date: Time of Training: Factory-trained representative giving training: Name(s): Company: Address: Phone: Fax: E-mail: Section 01 91 00-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 CERTIFICATE OF PROPER INSTALLATION Project Equipment Specification Section Contract I hereby certify the equipment supplier/manufacturer has inspected this equipment and that it has been properly installed, adjusted, and calibrated. I further certify this equipment may now be operated for test purposes and/or normal use. -- MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE ._ Signature Date Name (print) Title Representing CONTRACTOR -- Signature Date Name (print) Title This form shall be completed and submitted to CONSULTANT prior to CITY training. Section 01 91 00-7 4463.004/City Contract No.994 CERTIFICATE OF OPERATOR TRAINING Project Equipment Specification Section Contract I hereby certify the equipment supplier/manufacturer has instructed CITY's personnel in the start-up operation and maintenance of this equipment as required in the Specifications. MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE Signature Date Name (print) Title Representing CONTRACTOR Signature Date Name (print) Title CITY I hereby certify that my operating personnel received instruction for start-up, operation, and maintenance of this equipment. -- Signature Date Name (print) Title END SECTION Section 01 91 00-8 4463.004/City Contract No.994 IOWA DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOURCES GOVERNOR KIM REYNOLDS LT.GOVERNOR ADAM GREGG DIRECTOR KAYLA LYON December 2,2019 Brian Bowman 3505 Easton Ave. Waterloo, IA 50702 i RE: Wastewater Facilities Plan Near-term Improvements-F.Y.2020 Biosolids Modifications City of Waterloo DNR Project No. S2017-0342A CWSRF No.CS1920941 01 Subj: Preliminary Site investigation Dear Mr. Bowman: Enclosed is a report of a preliminary site investigation conducted on 10/22/19 for the above-referenced project. The report was prepared by Amber Sauser, Environmental Specialist Senior from our Field Office in Manchester, Iowa. Based upon the conclusions in the report,the site is approvable at this time. Please note that the site approval Is preliminary and that further detailed engineering investigations may warrant additional considerations in the future.This approval in no way relieves the City from the responsibilities of insuring that water quality limitations are met;the plant is designed and constructed in accordance with good engineering judgment,and all applicable agency approvals are obtained. Please feel free to contact me at 515-725-8426 or Iarrv.bryant@dnr.iowa.eov if you have any questions. Sincerely, Larry Bryant Project Manager Wastewater Engineering Section Enclosure cc: Randy Wirtz/Strand Associates,Inc./910 West Wingra Drive/Madison,WI 53715 DNR FO 1 (Manchester, Iowa) DNR Sewage File 6-07-90-0-01 SRF File CS1920941 01 WALLACE BUILDING,502 E 9TH ST, DES MOINES IA 50319 Phone:515-725-8200 www.lowaDNR.gov Fax:515-725-8202 ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES DIVISION ED TORM EY,ADMINISTRATOR _ IOWA DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOURCES ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES DIVISION Field Office 1 909 West Main Suite 4,Manchester, Iowa 52057 Phone:(563)927-2640 FAX: (563)927-2075 REPORT OF INVESTIGATION INVESTIGATION DATE October 22,2019 TO: Larry Bryant, DNR NPDES Engineering Section SUBJECT:Waterloo-Centrate EQ Tank NPDES#0190001 PERSONS CONTACTED: Brian Bowman,City of Waterloo AUTHENTICATION INSPECTOR: ft.4 ft1111 , jzi (i Am er Sumer, Environmental Specialist Senior _ REVIEWER: DATE: n/feCNA 1104 , It fit (( Tom McCarthy,Envlronmen I Specialist Senior File Name: 07 WW Waterloo Site Survey 102219 als OBSERVATIONS/RECOMMENDATIONS: A site survey was conducted for proposed centrate/f ltrate equalization tank at Waterloo's wastewater treatment _ I� Ro plant. I reviewed the documents submitted for this project prior to the visit. On October 22, 2019 I met with Brian Bowman to conduct the site survey while also completing a compliance evaluation inspection. maps submitted1500'separation distance from the middle off the existing facility and not the — _ showed a proposed construction. It was noted that the tank will be installed east of the existing dewaterng building. All separation distances will be met.As noted in the submitted documents,Harold Getty Lake is closer than 400 feet(at 100')from the existing equalization basins.The proposed construction is southeast of the EQ basins. The proposed construction is within the footprint of the current WWTP;therefore,this construction will maintain 90%of the existing separation distances. CONCLUSION:This site is approved at the submitted location. Page 1 of 10 1 General Decision Number: IA190003 01/04/2019 IA3 Superseded General Decision Number: IA20180004 State: Iowa Construction Type: Heavy Sewer/Water Treating Plant Counties: Iowa Statewide. .1 EXCEPT SCOTT COUNTY SEWER AND WATER TREATMENT PLANTS ONLY Note: Under Executive Order (EO) 13658, an hourly minimum wage of $10.60 for calendar year 2019 applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2015. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must pay —1 all workers in any classification listed on this wage determination at least $10.60 per hour (or the applicable wage rate listed on this wage determination, if it is higher) for all hours spent performing on the contract in calendar year 2019. If this contract is covered by the EO and a classification considered necessary for performance of work on the contract does not appear on this wage determination, the contractor must pay workers in that classification at least the wage rate determined through the conformance process set -71 forth in 29 CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii) (or the EO minimum wage rate, if it is higher than the conformed wage rate) . The EO minimum wage rate will be adjusted annually. Please note that this EO applies to the above-mentioned types of contracts entered into by the federal government that are subject to the Davis-Bacon Act itself, but it does not apply to contracts subject only to the Davis-Bacon Related Acts, including those set forth at 29 CFR 5.1 (a) (2) -(60) . Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/04/2019 * SUTA2002-004 12/01/2014 Rates Fringes Carpenters (ALL OF THE STATE OF IOWA, except the named III cities and counties listed below:) $ 24.05 14.29 Carpenters (BURLINGTON AND KEOKUK) $ 27.83 16.29 Carpenters (CLINTON COUNTY, https://www.wdol.gov/wdol/scafiles/davisbacon/IA3.dvb?v=0 2/7/2019 Page 2 of 10 City of Clinton) $ 27.83 16.29 Carpenters (CLINTON, DUBUQUE, JOHNSON, LOUISA, MUSCATNE, DES MOINES, CEDAR and LEE COUNTIES, Except any of the previously named cities) $ 24.05 14.29 Carpenters (COUNCIL BLUFFS) $ 31.98 12.13 Carpenters (DUBUQUE COUNTY (City of Dubuque) ) $ 27.83 16.29 Carpenters (FORT MADISON) $ 27.83 16.29 Carpenters (IOWA CITY) $ 27.83 16.29 ... Carpenters (LINN COUNTY) $ 31.68 16.29 Carpenters (MUSCATINE COUNTY, City of Muscatine) $ 27.83 16.29 Carpenters (POLK COUNTY) $ 35.84 12.13 L. Carpenters (SIOUX CITY) $ 31.98 12.13 Carpenters (WATERLOO/CEDAR FALLS) $ 27.83 16.29 Cement mason (ALL OF THE STATE OF IOWA, except for the named cities and couties listed below:) $ 25.66 9.05 Cement mason (BURLINGTON AND KEOKUK) $ 34.02 10.05 Cement mason (CLINTON COUNTY, City of Clinton) $ 34.02 10.05 Cement mason (CLINTON, DUBUQUE, JOHNSON, LOUISA, MUSCATINE, DES MOINES, CEDAR and LEE COUNTIES, Except any of the previously named cities) $ 27 .01 10.05 L. Cement mason (COUNCIL BLUFFS) $ 31.98 10.05 Cement mason (DUBUQUE COUNTY - (City of Dubuque) ) $ 34.02 10.05 Cement mason (FORT MADISON) $ 32.58 10.05 Cement mason (IOWA CITY) $ 34.02 10.05 Cement mason (LINN COUNTY) $ 34.02 10.05 Cement mason (MUSCATINE COUNTY) $ 34.02 10.05 https://www.wdol.gov/wdol/scafiles/davisbacon/IA3.dvb?v=0 2/7/2019 Page 3 of 10 1 Cement mason (POLK COUNTY) $ 32.58 10.05 Cement mason (SIOUX CITY) $ 31.31 10.05 Cement mason (WATERLOO/CEDAR FALLS) $ 28.81 10.05 IRONWORKER (ALL OF THE STATE OF IOWA, except for the named cities or counties listed below:) $ 23.75 16.37 ., IRONWORKER (BURLINGTON AND KEOKUK) $ 28.58 16.37 IRONWORKER (CLINTON COUNTY, City of Clinton) $ 35.04 16.37 IRONWORKER (CLINTON, DUBUQUE, JOHNSON, LOUISA, MUSCATINE, 1 DES MOINES, CEDAR and LEE COUNTIES, Except any of the previously named cities) $ 23.75 16.37 IRONWORKER (COUNCIL BLUFFS) $ 24.15 16.37 IRONWORKER (DUBUQUE COUNTY .., (City of Dubuque) ) $ 27.53 16.37 IRONWORKER (FORT MADISON) $ 28.58 16.37 -„ IRONWORKER (IOWA CITY) $ 27.53 16.37 IRONWORKER (LINN COUNTY) $ 27.53 16.37 IRONWORKER (MUSCATINE COUNTY) $ 35.04 16.37 IRONWORKER (POLK COUNTY) $ 27.37 16.37 IRONWORKER (SIOUX CITY) $ 18.57 16.37 IRONWORKER (WATERLOO/CEDAR FALLS) $ 27.53 16.37 LABORERS (ALL OF THE STATE OF IOWA, except for the named cities and counties listed below:) $ 23.28 8.60 LABORERS (BURLINGTON AND KEOKUK) $ 28.85 8.60 LABORERS (CLINTON COUNTY, City of Clinton) $ 28.49 8.60 LABORERS (CLINTON, DUUQUE, JOHNSON, LOUISA, MUSCATINE, DES MOINES, CEDAR and LEE ml COUNTIES, Except any of the https://www.wdol.gov/wdol/scafiles/davisbacon/IA3.dvb?v=0 2/7/2019 Page 4 of 10 previously named cities) $ 25.27 8. 60 LABORERS (COUNCIL BLUFFS) $ 25.51 8.60 LABORERS (DUBUQUE COUNTY (City of Dubuque) ) $ 25.41 8.60 LABORERS (FORT MADISON) $ 28.85 8.60 LABORERS (IOWA CITY) $ 27.98 8.60 LABORERS (LINN COUNTY) $ 29.61 8.60 LABORERS (MUSCATINE COUNTY (City of Muscatine) ) $ 28.98 8.60 LABORERS (POLK COUNTY) $ 29.45 8.60 LABORERS (SIOUX CITY) $ 25.63 8.60 6. LABORERS (WATERLOO/CEDAR FALLS) $ 25.63 8.60 L. OPERATOR: Power Equipment (POLK, WARREN, DALLAS, STORY & JASPER COUNTIES) SEWER Class A $ 34.20 13.80 Class B $ 32.50 13.80 Class C $ 30.31 13.80 WATER L. Class A $ 33.93 13.80 Class B $ 32.23 13.80 Class C $ 29.85 13.80 L. Power Equipment Operator (ALL OF THE STATE OF IOWA, except for the named cities and counties listed below:) Class A $ 34.20 13.80 Class B $ 32.50 13.80 Class C $ 30.31 13.80 L. Power Equipment Operator (BURLINGTON AND KEOKUK) Class A $ 32.50 29.95 L. Class B $ 29.75 29.95 Power Equipment Operator (CLINTON COUNTY, City of Clinton) Class A $ 32.50 29.95 Class B $ 29.75 29.95 Power Equipment Operator (CLINTON, LOUISA, MUSCATINE, DES MOINES, CEDAR and LEE COUNTIES, Except any of the previously named cities) Class A $ 32.50 29.95 https://www.wdol.gov/wdol/scafiles/davisbacon/IA3.dvb?v=0 2/7/2019 Page 5 of 10 Class B $ 29.75 29.95 Power Equipment Operator (COUNCIL BLUFFS) SEWER Class A $ 34.20 13.80 Class B $ 32.50 13.80 Class C $ 30.31 13.80 WATER -.1 Class A $ 33.93 13.80 j Class B $ 32.23 13.80 1 Class C $ 29.85 13.80 -i Power Equipment Operator (DUBUQUE COUNTY (Including City of Dubuque) and JOHNSON COUNTY) SEWER Class A $ 34.20 13.80 Class B $ 32.50 13.80 Class C $ 30.31 13.80 WATER Class A $ 33.93 13.80 Class B $ 32.23 13.80 Class C $ 29.85 13.80 Power Equipment Operator (FORT MADISON) Class A $ 32.50 29.95 Class B $ 29.75 29.95 Power Equipment Operator -.4 (IOWA CITY) SEWER Class A $ 34.20 13.80 Class B $ 32.50 13.80 -7 Class C $ 30.31 13.80 WATER Class A $ 33.93 13.80 Class B $ 32.23 13.80 Class C $ 29.85 13.80 { Power Equipment Operator (LINN COUNTY) SEWER Class A $ 34.20 13.80 Class B $ 32.50 13.80 Class C $ 30.31 13.80 WATER I! Class B $ 32.23 13.80 Class C $ 29.85 13.80 Power Equipment Operator (MUSCATINE COUNTY) Class A $ 32.50 29.95 Class B $ 29.75 29.95 Power Equipment Operator (SIOUX CITY) 7 SEWER https://www.wdol.gov/wdol/scafiles/davisbacon/IA3.dvb?v=0 2/7/2019 Page 6 of 10 Class A $ 34.20 13.80 Class B $ 32.50 13.80 Class C $ 30.31 13.80 WATER Class A $ 33.93 13.80 Class B $ 32.23 13.80 Class C $ 29.85 13.80 Power Equipment Operator (WATERLOO/CEDAR FALLS) SEWER Class A $ 34.20 13.80 Class B $ 32.50 13.80 Class C $ 30.31 13.80 WATER Class A $ 33.93 13.80 •• Class B $ 32.23 13.80 Class C $ 29.85 13.80 Truck drivers (ALL OF THE L. STATE OF IOWA, except for the named cities and counties listed below:) $ 21.66 10.50 Truck drivers (BURLINGTON AND KEOKUK) $ 24.59 10.50 Truck drivers (CLINTON COUNTY, City of Clinton) $ 25.03 10.50 Truck drivers (CLINTON, L. DUBUQUE, JOHNSON, LOUISA, MUSCATINE, DES MOINES, CEDAR and LEE COUNTIES, Except anyL. of the previously named cities) $ 22.76 10.50 Truck drivers (COUNCIL BLUFFS) $ 25.68 10.50 L. Truck drivers (DUBUQUE COUNTY (City of Dubuque) ) $ 24.06 10.50 Truck drivers (FORT MADISON) $ 24.59 10.50 Truck drivers (IOWA CITY) $ 26.34 10.50 Truck drivers (LINN COUNTY) $ 27.10 10.50 Truck drivers (MUSCATINE COUNTY) $ 24.59 10.50 -- Truck drivers (POLK COUNTY) $ 25.68 10.50 Truck drivers (SIOUX CITY) $ 23.28 10.50 Truck drivers (WATERLOO/CEDAR FALLS) $ 24.21 10.50 POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR CLASSIFICATIONS https://www.wdol.gov/wdol/scafiles/davisbacon/IA3.dvb?v=0 2/7/2019 Page 7 of 10 CLASS A: Asphalt laydown machine, Asphalt Plant Operator, Asphalt heater-planer unit, Backhoe, Bulldozer, Central Mix Plant, Concrete Pump, Crawler Tractor Pulling Scraper, Dredge Engineer, Dredge Leverman, Front-end Loader (over 2 yds) , Group Equipment Greaser (unsupervised) , Horizontal boring machine, Master Mechanic, Milling Machine, Motor Patrol, Porland Concrete Paver, Power Shovel, Crane & Dragline, Pushcat, Scraper (10 yards & over or finish) , Self-propelled Elevation Grader or Similar Machine, Sideboom Tractor, Subgrader (or equivalent) , Tow Push Boat or Work Boat, Trenching Machine (Cleveland 80 or similar capacity) . CLASS B: Asphalt Distributor, Asphalt Finish Roller, Asphalt Screed, Belt Loader or Similar Machine, Bullfloat, Churn or Rotary Drill, Concrete Widening Machine, Concrete Curbing Machine, Conveyor, Crawler Tractor - Pulling ripper, Disc, Sheepsfoot or Roller, Deckhand/Oiler, Finishing Machine (on concrete) , Flex-plane, forklift, Form Grader, Front-end Loader (under 2 yeards) , Group greaser (supervised) , Haiss loader or similar, Mechanic-welder, Offroad articulated hauler, Paving breaker pumps (over 3") , Screening & wash plant, Skid loader, Spreader Operator, Self-propell Roller (other than asphalt) , Self-propelled vibrating compactor, shoulder machine, Trenching Machine (other than above) , Water wagon on compaction. CLASS C: Asphalt Roller (other than finish) , Boiler, Boom & Winch Truck, Compressor, Concrete Spreader, Belt Placer, Farm Type or Utility Tractor with attachments (under 50 hp) , Group Greaser Light plant, Mechanical Broom, Mechanical Heater, Oiler, Pile Hammer Power Unit, Pump -1 (Other than Dredge) , Pumps (3" and under) , Pumps on well 71 points & deep wells for dewatering, Safety Boat, Truck Crane combination Driver Oiler, Welding Machine. FOOTNOTE: IRONWORKERS: (Setting of all structural steel and reinforcing steel installation) WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. mi Note: Executive Order (EO) 13706, Establishing Paid Sick Leave for Federal Contractors applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any mi solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2017. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must provide employees with 1 hour of paid sick leave for every 30 hours they work, up to 56 hours of paid sick leave each year. Employees must be permitted to use paid sick leave for their own illness, injury or other health-related needs, including preventive care; to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is ill, injured, or has other health-related needs, including preventive care; or for reasons https://www.wdol.gov/wdol/scafiles/davisbacon/IA3.dvb?v=0 2/7/2019 Page 8of1O resulting from, or to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is a victim of, domestic violence, sexual assault, or stalking. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii) ) . The body of each wage determination lists the classification and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical order of "identifiers" that indicate whether the particular LLL... rate is a union rate (current union negotiated rate for local) , a survey rate (weighted average rate) or a union average rate (weighted union average rate) . Union Rate Identifiers A four letter classification abbreviation identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with characters other than "SU" or "UAVG" denotes that the union classification and rate were prevailing for that classification in the survey. Example: L. PLUM0198-005 07/01/2014. PLUM is an abbreviation identifier of the union which prevailed in the survey for this classification, which in this example would be Plumbers. 0198 indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable, i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination. 07/01/2014 is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate, which in this example is July 1, 2014. Union prevailing wage rates are updated to reflect all rate changes in the collective bargaining agreement (CBA) governing L. this classification and rate. Survey Rate Identifiers Classifications listed under the "SU" identifier indicate that no one rate prevailed for this classification in the survey and the published rate is derived by computing a weighted average rate based on all the rates reported in the survey for that classification. As this weighted average rate includes all rates reported in the survey, it may include both union and non-union rates. Example: SULA2012-007 5/13/2014. SU indicates the rates are survey rates based on a weighted average calculation of rates and are not majority rates. LA indicates the State of Louisiana. 2012 is the year of survey on which these classifications and rates are based. The next number, 007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 5/13/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. https://www.wdol.gov/wdol/scafiles/davisbacon/IA3.dvb?v=0 2/7/2019 Page 9 of 10 1 Survey wage rates are not updated and remain in effect until a new survey is conducted. Union Average Rate Identifiers Classification(s) listed under the UAVG identifier indicate that no single majority rate prevailed for those classifications; however, 1000 of the data reported for the classifications was union data. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-0010 08/29/2014. UAVG indicates that the rate is a weighted union average rate. OH indicates the state. The next number, 0010 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 08/29/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. A UAVG rate will be updated once a year, usually in January of each year, to reflect a weighted average of the current negotiated/CBA rate of the union locals from which the rate is based. 1 WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1. ) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can -•• b e: * an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests -71 for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.) and 3.) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7) . Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator https://www.wdol.gov/wdol/scafiles/davisbacon/IA3.dvb?v=0 2/7/2019 Page 10 of 10 U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative L. Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board) . Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor L.200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. END OF GENERAL DECISION 6. hum immo https://www.wdol.gov/wdol/scafiles/davisbacon/IA3.dvb?v=0 2/7/2019 "General Decision Number: IA20190062 11/01/2019 — Superseded General Decision Number: IA20180133 State: Iowa Construction Type: Building County: Black Hawk County in Iowa. BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (does not include single family homes or apartments up to and including 4 stories). Note: Under Executive Order (EO) 13658, an hourly minimum wage of $10.60 for calendar year 2019 applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2015. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must pay all workers in any classification listed on this wage determination at least $10.60 per hour (or the applicable wage rate listed on this wage determination, if it is higher) for — all hours spent performing on the contract in calendar year 2019. If this contract is covered by the EO and a classification considered necessary for performance of work on the contract does not appear on this wage determination, the contractor must pay workers in that classification at least the wage rate determined through the conformance process set forth in 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(ii) (or the EO minimum wage rate,if it is higher than the conformed wage rate). The EO minimum wage rate will be adjusted annually. Please note that this EO applies to the above-mentioned types of contracts entered into by the federal government that are subject to the Davis-Bacon Act itself, but it does not apply to contracts subject only to the Davis-Bacon Related Acts, including those set forth at 29 CFR 5.1(a)(2)-(60). Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/04/2019 1 01/11/2019 -- 2 06/28/2019 3 07/19/2019 4 07/26/2019 5 09/06/2019 6 11/01/2019 BOIL0083-009 01/01/2017 Rates Fringes BOILERMAKER $ 36.56 29.05 BRIA0003-006 05/01/2019 Rates Fringes ..s TILE SETTER $ 24.67 11.45 BRIA0003-026 05/01/2019 BLACK HAWK, BREMER, BUCHANAN, BUTLER, GRUNDY, HARDIN, MARSHALL AND TAMA COUNTIES Rates Fringes BRICKLAYER $ 27.01 14.25 ELECO288-002 06/01/2019 Rates Fringes ELECTRICIAN $ 30.28 12.03 ELEV0033-002 01/01/2019 _ Rates Fringes ELEVATOR MECHANIC $ 44.83 33.705+a+b FOOTNOTES: A. Employer contributes 8% of regular basic hourly rate as - vacation pay credit for employees with more than 5 years of service, and 6% for employees with less than 5 years of service. B. PAID HOLIDAYS: New Year's Day; Memorial Day; Independence Day; Labor Day; Veteran's Day; Thanksgiving Day; Day after Thanksgiving; & Christmas Day. ENGI0150-048 06/01/2019 Rates Fringes POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR Class 1(B) Backhoe/Excavator/Trackhoe; Loader; Paver (All types); Roller $ 35.00 33.30 Class 3 Bobcat/Skid Steer/Skid Loader $ 31.30 33.30 * IRON0089-002 05/01/2019 Rates Fringes IRONWORKER (Ornamental and Structural) $ 28.50 19.72 * IRON0111-002 07/01/2019 Rates Fringes IRONWORKER (Reinforcing) $ 32.50 26.42 LAB00309-010 05/01/2019 Rates Fringes LABORER (Pipelayer) $ 25.75 20.82 PAIN0447-001 05/01/2019 Rates Fringes PAINTER (Brush and Roller) $ 24.95 9.90 SFIA0669-002 04/01/2019 Rates Fringes SPRINKLER FITTER (Fire Sprinklers) $ 36.21 21.99 SUTA2016-037 07/19/2016 •.- Rates Fringes BRICKLAYER $ 24.90 9.60 CARPENTER $ 20.51 8.12 CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER $ 20.74 4.16 ... INSULATOR: Mechanical (Duct, Pipe and Mechanical System - Insulation) $ 23.28 8.91 LABORER: Common or General $ 14.68 2.51 LABORER: Mason Tender - Brick $ 19.39 8.17 OPERATOR: Bulldozer $ 26.13 13.56 OPERATOR: Crane $ 24.15 8.10 OPERATOR: Forklift $ 22.96 7.49 PAINTER: Spray $ 19.76 9.05 PIPEFITTER, Includes HVAC Pipe Installation $ 20.95 9.00 .... PLUMBER $ 25.05 8.97 ROOFER $ 21.92 5.07 SHEET METAL WORKER, Includes HVAC Duct and Unit Installation $ 22.95 9.66 WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. Note: Executive Order (EO) 13706, Establishing Paid Sick Leave for Federal Contractors applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2017. If this contract is covered by the E0, the contractor must provide employees with 1 hour of paid sick leave for every 30 hours they work, up to 56 hours of paid sick leave each year. Employees must be permitted to use paid sick leave for their own illness, injury or other health-related needs, including preventive care; to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is ill, injured, or has other health-related needs, including preventive care; or for reasons resulting from, or to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is a victim of, domestic violence, sexual assault, or stalking. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)). The body of each wage determination lists the classification and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical order of ""identifiers"" that indicate whether the particular rate is a union rate (current union negotiated rate for local), a survey rate (weighted average rate) or a union average rate (weighted union average rate). Union Rate Identifiers A four letter classification abbreviation identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with characters other than ""SU"" or ""UAVG"" denotes that the union classification and rate were prevailing for that classification in the survey. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2014. PLUM is an abbreviation identifier of the union which prevailed in the survey for this classification, which in this example would be Plumbers. 0198 indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable, i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination. 07/01/2014 is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate, which in this example is July 1, 2014. Union prevailing wage rates are updated to reflect all rate changes in the collective bargaining agreement (CBA) governing this classification and rate. Survey Rate Identifiers Classifications listed under the ""SU"" identifier indicate that no one rate prevailed for this classification in the survey and the published rate is derived by computing a weighted average rate based on all the rates reported in the survey for that classification. As this weighted average rate includes all rates reported in the survey, it may include both union and non-union rates. Example: SULA2012-007 5/13/2014. SU indicates the rates are survey rates based on a weighted average calculation of rates and are not majority rates. LA indicates Wawa the State of Louisiana. 2012 is the year of survey on which these classifications and rates are based. The next number, 007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 5/13/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. Survey wage rates are not updated and remain in effect until a new survey is conducted. Union Average Rate Identifiers Classification(s) listed under the UAVG identifier indicate that no single majority rate prevailed for those classifications; however, 100% of the data reported for the classifications was union data. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-0010 08/29/2014. UAVG indicates that the rate is a weighted union average rate. OH indicates the state. The next number, 0010 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 08/29/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. A UAVG rate will be updated once a year, usually in January of each year, to reflect a weighted average of the current negotiated/CBA rate of the union locals from which the rate is based. WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be: * an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.) and 3.) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations i Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 •"E. 2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to: — Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage — payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. END OF GENERAL DECISION" SECTION 02 41 00 DEMOLITION PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: All demolition, removal, and salvage work as shown 01 the drawings or specified herein to include, but not necessarily limited to the following: 1 . Portions of WAS Storage Building (Structure 170), WAS Storage Tank (Structure 175), Thickener Building (Structure 180), Digester Feed Building (Structure 190), Anaerobic Digester Control Building (Structure 310), Sludge Storage Pumping Building (Structure 325), and Dewatering Building (Structure 330) as noted on the drawings. 2. Manholes and precast concrete structures on the site as noted on the drawings. 3. Equipment in various structures as shown on the drawings and specified. 4. Incidental demolition in structures to remain and to site to accommodate new construction. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shill govern work in this section. 1 .02 SUBMITTALS A. CONTRACTOR shall submit permits and notices, if required, authorizing b..ailding demolition. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. CONTRACTOR shall perform demolition, removal, and salvage in conform ity with applicable federal, state, and local safety practices and code requirements. B. CONTRACTOR shall contact all public utilities and shall shut off, cut :and cap all utility services in accordance with utility requirements, codes, rules and regulati ins. C. Obtain and pay for all necessary permits, licenses and certificates requirE J. D. Removal of flammable and combustible liquid storage tanks shall be b. a State certified remover. E. Flammable and combustible liquid storage tank removal shall be in ac cordance with all applicable Federal, State, and local codes. 1.04 SEQUENCE A. No demolition, removal, or salvage work shall commence until approval to proceed has been granted by CITY. Such work shall be completed in accordance with the construction sequence included in Division 01 of these specifications and in accordance with the construction phases of this project and work to be done by other contractors. -� Section 02 41 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Compacted fill shall meet the requirements of Section 31 23 00—Excavation, Fill, Backfill and Grading. B. Pipe fittings and materials shall meet the requirements of Section 33 30 10—Buried Piping and Appurtenances and Section 40 23 10—Piping and Appurtenances. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 BREAKING DOWN AND REMOVING STRUCTURES A. General: 1. All existing structures, with all attached parts and connections, shown on the drawings or specified to be removed or that interfere with the new construction, shall be entirely removed within the limits shown or specified, unless otherwise provided. 2. When a portion of any existing structure is to be retained, CONTRACTOR shall take care during construction operations so as not to impair the value of the retained portion. a. Complete all operations necessary for the removal of any existing structure which might endanger the new construction prior to the construction of the new work. b. Do not use any equipment or devices which might damage structures, facilities, or property which are to be preserved and retained. 3. When existing reinforcing is exposed at the surface of removal areas, CONTRACTOR shall burn back the reinforcing bars 2 inches and patch with nonshrink grout, unless noted otherwise. B. Pavement, Curb, Gutter, Sidewalk, Driveways, Crosswalk, and Similar Structures: 1. Where portions of the existing structure are to be left in the surface of the finished work, CONTRACTOR shall remove the structure to an existing joint, or saw and chip the structure to a true line. 2. Sufficient removal shall be made to provide for proper grades and connections in the new work. C. Walls, Piers, Surface Drains, Foundations, and Similar Masonry Structures: 1. Remove entirely or break down to an elevation at least 2 feet below the earth subgrade within the areas of a road bed and elsewhere to 2 feet below the finished slopes or natural ground, as the case may be. 2. Remove existing construction as required to clear new construction. D. Underground Tanks (Other than Septic Tanks): 1. Remove the contents of underground tanks to allow the complete removal of such tanks. 2. Backfill the resulting hole or pit in accordance with the backfill portion of this section. E. Pipe Culverts: 1. Remove entirely all culverts that are to be removed, except as hereinafter provided for closing culverts. Section 02 41 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2. Remove sidewalls or substructure units in water to an elevation n.) higher than the elevation of the natural stream or lake bed. a. Where grading of the channel is required, remove such units to the proposed finished grade of the stream or lake bed. b. Remove all other endwalls or substructure units down to at least 2 feet below natural or finished ground line, as the case may be. 3. Where existing culverts are to be extended or otherwise incorporated into the new work, remove only such part or parts of the existing culvert as necessary to provide a proper connection to the new work. 4. Remove pipe culverts designated for salvage in a manner that will preclude damage to the culverts. 5. Closing culverts: a. A culvert may be closed instead of being removed if the following conditions apply: (1) If the diameter of the culvert is less than 48 inches. (2) If the top thereof does not come within 5 feet of the elevat on of the finished grade line. (3) If the culvert is in suitable condition. b. Remove the headwall and such parts as would be within 2 feet of she finished grade line. c. Completely fill each end of the culvert with concrete for a distancE from each end of at least 2 feet plus the height of the opening of the structure. 3.02 ABANDONING STRUCTURES A. Tanks, Manholes, Catch Basins, and Inlets: 1. CONTRACTOR shall thoroughly clean structures to be abandoned. 2. CONTRACTOR shall plug existing pipe connections with brick or concrete block masonry or with any grade of concrete having a 28-day compressive strength in excess of 2,000 psi. 3. CONTRACTOR shall remove the walls of the structures to an elevation at least 3 feet below the finished grade line, or to such elevation that may be designated on the drawings or as necessary to clear new construction. 3.03 ABANDONING AND REMOVING UTILITIES AND UNDERGROUND PROCESS PIPING A. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the turning off or unhooking of all utilities and process piping before starting the demolition work. Remove all utility lines, including electrical services and process piping that are shown or specified to be removed. Remove utility lines that are to be abandoned as needed to clear new construction B. The ends of utility lines and process piping shown or specified to be at andoned that are exposed by excavation shall be plugged with concrete to prevent soil nfiltration into the pipes. 3.04 EQUIPMENT A. CONTRACTOR shall remove all equipment specified herein or indicated. B. CONTRACTOR shall remove associated exposed conduit, power wiring, controls, switches, instrumentation, control wiring, control boxes, appurtenances, and their supports serving equipment to be removed. Electrical items shall be removed to their junction with motor Section 02 41 00-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 control center, control panel, or their junction with conduit serving other equipment that is to remain. C. CONTRACTOR shall remove all piping and appurtenances and their supports serving equipment indicated to be removed. Piping shall be removed to its junction with the main service header serving other equipment that is to remain or new equipment as indicated. Remaining piping and tubing shall be fitted with an appropriate blind flange or plug and insulated as required. D. CONTRACTOR shall remove equipment bases, anchor bolts, and other supports serving equipment to be removed. Concrete bases shall be removed to 1 inch below floor elevation and repaired with nonshrink grout plus surfacing to match existing. E. CONTRACTOR shall patch floors, walls, and ceilings as required to match existing or as indicated where equipment, piping, electrical, bases, or supports are removed. F. CONTRACTOR shall remove the following major equipment items or systems. The following list is not intended to be all-inclusive. CONTRACTOR shall remove all items indicated or specified to be removed. 1. Belt Filter Presses No. 1 and No. 2 (Structure 330). 2. Pumps (Structures 170, 180, 190, and 325). 3. Center Feed Clarifier Mixer (Structure 175). 4. Blowers (Structure 170). 5. TAS Mixers (Structure 190). 6. Polymer Tanks (Structures 180 and 330). 7. Polymer Feed Systems (Structures 180 and 330). 8. Boilers No. 1 and No. 3 (Structure 310). 9. Air Compressors (Structure 330). 10. Polymer Prep System (Structures 180 and 330). 3.05 INTERIOR PIPING, DUCTWORK,AND APPURTENANCES A. CONTRACTOR shall remove all piping, ductwork, and appurtenances as indicated. The location and elevations of existing piping are approximate. B. CONTRACTOR shall remove all supports for piping, ductwork, and appurtenances indicated to be removed. Repiping and connections to new piping shall be as specified for new piping. Remaining piping and tubing, not reconnected for new piping, shall be fitted with an appropriate blind flange or plugged and insulated as required. C. CONTRACTOR shall patch all holes resulting from removal of piping, ductwork, appurtenances, and their supports. Patching of concrete shall be with nonshrink grout and as indicated. Patching of masonry shall be with matching material toothed in. Patch other material as indicated. 3.06 SALVAGE A. CITY has first right of refusal to all material, piping, and equipment removed. Section 02 41 00-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. All equipment, material, and piping, except as specified hereinafter, withir the buildings and structures to be demolished and additional items as noted shall be removed by CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall inspect each structure and determine the type and -` amount of equipment, materials, and piping to be removed. C. All equipment, material, and piping, except as specified hereinafter, within the limits of the demolition and additional items noted to be removed, will become the property of CONTRACTOR if CITY does not claim under first right of refusal and shall be removed from the project site. Comply with State and local ordinances and regulations for disposing of materials. D. The following equipment and materials shall be removed and reused in tr e new facilities: 1. Thickener Feed Pump No. 1 (P-10-4-1). 2. Make-Up Air Unit (330-MAU-1). E. All process and mechanical equipment shall be removed and turned over to CITY. 3.07 BACKFILL A. CONTRACTOR shall fill all abandoned structures and excavations resultir g from removal of structures and utilities with compacted fill. See Section 31 23 00—Excav ition, Fill, Backfill, and Grading for required degree of compaction. B. Prior to filling, CONTRACTOR shall break one opening in the floor or wall near the base of each compartment to allow groundwater to freely migrate through the structure. END OF SECTION Section 02 41 00-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 03 01 30 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIR PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Miscellaneous concrete surface repairs. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. C. Repair Locations: As shown on the drawings. D. Allowances: CONTRACTOR shall INCLUDE in the Bid the following quantities of concrete repairs. 1. Top of wall repairs: 10 cubic feet. 2. Wall vertical surface and underside of slab repairs: 10 cubic feet. 3. Top of slab surface repairs: 10 cubic feet. E. Payment to CONTRACTOR for repairs will be adjusted, add or deduct, based upon the actual repairs performed (more or less than allowance quantities) and the unit price(s) bid for these repairs. Unit price(s) shall include all materials, labor, and incidental items associated with completing repairs as noted on drawings and in these specifications. Unit price for wall surface repairs shall include cost for scaffolding, lifts, or other means of access. Before any work included in this allowance begins, CONTRACTOR and CONSULTANT shall �- agree on the extent of work. All other concrete repair work noted on the drawings and in the specifications shall be included in the Lump Sum Bid and is not included in these allowances. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data sheets for each product. C. Submit list of project references as documented in this specification under 1.03 Quality Assurance. Include contact name and phone number of person charged with oversight of each project. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company with minimum 15 years of experience in manufacturing of specified products and systems. 2. Applicator Qualifications: a. Company with minimum of 5 years experience in application of specified products and systems on projects of similar size and scope, and is acceptable to product manufacturer. b. Successful completion of a minimum of five projects of similar size and complexity to specified Work. Section 03 01 30-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: —` 1. Application range of repair mortar is from 20°F (min 7°C) to 85 F (29°C). Follow ACI-recommended concreting practices for hot or cold weather. 2. Ensure that frost or frozen surfaces are thawed and dry. 3. Do not apply material if snow, rain, fog, or mist is anticipated witr in 12 hours after application. Allow surfaces to attain temperature and conditions specified before proceeding with application. PART 2—PRODUCTS — 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Repair materials shall be by BASF Building Systems, or equal. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Top Slab Surface Repairs: Repair mortar shall be one component, early strength gaining, cementitious patching material, MasterEmaco®T415 by BASF Building Systems, or equal. — B. Vertical Wall Surface and Underside of Slab Repairs: Repair mortar shall k e one component, rheoplastic, shrinkage-compensated, fiber-reinforced, cementitious repair mortar, MasterEmaco S 488CI by BASF Building Systems, or equal. C. Top of Wall Repairs: Top of wall repairs shall be cast-in-place concrE to as specified in Section 03 30 00. D. Reinforcing Primer: Unless other wise noted, primer for reinforcing shall be two-component, polymer-modified, cementitious bonding agent, and anticorrosion coating, MasterEmaco® _ P 124 by BASF Building Systems,or equal, where severe wastewater exposure is indicated on the Drawings, primer for reinforcing shall be two-component liquid epoxy bonding agent and anticorrosion coating, MasterEmaco®ADH 326 by BASF Building Systems, or equal. PART 3—EXECUTION — 3.01 IDENTIFICATION A. When various tanks and other structures are removed from service and are available for inspection, CONTRACTOR and CONSULTANT shall observe conditions and identify areas to be repaired. Where practicable, approximate quantities of repair material shall be agreed upon prior to commencement of repairs. Where quantities may be affected by subsurface conditions not visible prior to repairs, quantities shall be determined and agreed upon as soon as practicable after removal of unsound concrete. 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent Work areas and finish surfaces from damage during rep air work. Section 03 01 30-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. Concrete: 1. Remove unsound or delaminated concrete, providing minimum of 1/4-inch (6 mm) substrate profile and 3/4-inch (19 mm) clearance behind corroded reinforcing steel. 2. After removal of concrete, but before placement, mechanically abrade concrete surface to remove bond-inhibiting materials and to provide additional mechanical bond. Do not use method of surface preparation that will fracture concrete. Verify absence of microcracking or bruising according to ICRI Guideline No. 310.2. 3. Sawcut straight edges along repair area perimeters minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) deep to eliminate feather edges. Do not cut reinforcement. 4. Report cracks that appear in interface area of patch or overlay to CONSULTANT, and repair. 5. Continue expansion and control joints through repair or as required, review with CONSULTANT. 6. Dampen base concrete interface to be repaired to saturated surface dry conditions by wetting, fogging, or ponding with clean water for 24 hours. C. Reinforcing Steel: 1. Expose full circumference of corroded steel in areas to be repaired. 2. Remove oxidation and scale from exposed reinforcing steel according to ICRI Technical Guideline No. 310.1R Guide to Surface Preparation for the Repair of Deteriorated Concrete Resulting from Reinforcing Steel Corrosion. 3. To prevent future steel corrosion, coat prepared reinforcing steel with reinforcing primer as specified. 4. Any existing reinforcement displaced by prior demolition operations shall be bent back into place. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Substrate shall be saturated surface dry with no standing water during application. B. Mix components and apply concrete according to manufacturer's instructions. C. Repair areas shall be water-cured for seven days or use an approved curing compound compatible with coatings if area is to be overcoated. END OF SECTION Section 03 01 30-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 03 11 00 CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1—GENERAL 1 .01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Forms for cast-in-place concrete. 2. Form accessories. 3. Openings for other work. 4. Form stripping. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shill govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ACI 117—Tolerances for Concrete Construction. B. ACI 301—Structural Concrete for Buildings. C. ACI 318—Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. D. ACI 347—Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork. E. PS1—Construction and Industrial Plywood. 1.03 DESIGN A. All formwork shall comply with ACI 347 and ACI 301. B. CONTRACTOR shall assume the responsibility for the complete design a id construction of the formwork. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00—Submittals 'or form ties, form coatings, form liners (if any), and any other form accessories. B. Submit geometry of forms for circular structures. Section 03 11 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMS A. Forms shall be of wood, plywood, steel, fiberboard lined, or other approved materials which will produce concrete which meets the specified requirements. The type, size, quality, and shape of all materials of which the forms are made are subject to the review of CONSULTANT. B. Caution shall be exercised in the use of wood or composition forms or form liner to be certain that no chemical reaction will take place which causes a damaging effect on the concrete surface. 2.02 FORM TIES—NONREMOVABLE A. Internal wall ties shall contain positive stops at the required wall thickness. The exterior clamp portions of the tie shall be adjustable in length. Ties shall have cones on the water side of water-containing structures. Ties shall also have cones on the exterior side of all structures which have PVC water-stopped construction joints. Ties shall provide a positive disconnection on both ends 1 to 1 1/2 inches inside the finished face of the concrete. B. All wall ties used in the placement of structures which have PVC or hydrophilic water-stopped construction joints shall contain integral waterstops. All such ties shall be crimped or deformed in such a manner that the bond between concrete and tie cannot be broken in removal of the outer units. This portion of the tie shall not be removed prior to 24 hours after completion of the concrete placement. C. The use of wood spacers and wire ties will not be approved. 2.03 FORM TIES—REMOVABLE A. Taper ties which are designed to be removed entirely from the wall may be used with forms designed for this tie type and spacing. B. Tie holes shall be plugged with either a neoprene plug, Sure-Plug by Dayton Superior, Inc., or an EPDM rubber plug, X-Plug by Sika Greenstreak, or equal. C. Cementitious waterproofing material for patching taper tie holes shall be Hey Di K-11, Xypex Patch-N-Plug, or equal. Taper tie holes above the normal operating water surface shall be patched with mortar mix as specified in Section 03 30 00—Cast-in-Place Concrete for patching tie holes. 2.04 FORM COATINGS A. Provide commercial formulation form-coating compounds that will not bond with, stain, nor adversely affect concrete surfaces requiring bond or adhesion, nor impede the wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or curing compounds. 2.05 CHAMFER STRIPS A. Provide 3/4-inch by 3/4-inch wood or plastic chamfer strips at all exposed corners, except as noted. Section 03 11 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.06 KEYWAYS A. Keyways shall be formed with wood inserts. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTION A. Forms shall conform to the shape, line, grade, and dimensions as showr on the drawings. They shall be mortar-tight and sufficiently rigid to prevent displacement oi sagging between supports and shall support the loads and pressures without deflection from the prescribed lines. They shall be properly braced or tied together so as to maintain position and shape. Spacing of ties shall be recommended by the tie manufacturer. B. Formwork and finished concrete construction shall meet the tolerances specified in ACI 117. C. All exposed curved surfaces shall be formed to the continuous surface of the radius specified. Where segmented forms are proposed, a form system which deviates more than 3/8 inches from a circle through pan edges will not be allowed. - D. Architectural surfaces and surfaces to be fitted with equipment shall be fo med to match the shape intended. Where indicated on the drawings, the form shall be lir ed with minimum 3/8-inch masonite and shimmed as required. E. When forms are placed for successive concrete placement, thorough y clean concrete surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close all joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. F. At the request of CONSULTANT, temporary openings shall be provided at the base of column forms and wall forms and at other points where necessary to facilitate cleaning and observation immediately before depositing concrete. G. Provide inserts and provide openings in concrete form work to accommodate work of other trades. Verify size and location of openings, recesses, and chases with the trade requiring such items. Securely support items to be built into forms. H. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where the slope is too steep to place and vibrate concrete. I. Bevel wood inserts for forming keyways (except in expansion joints where inserts shall have square edges), reglets, recesses, and the like to allow for ease of removal. Inserts shall be securely held in place prior to concrete placement. Unless otherwise shown, chamfer strips shall be placed in the angles of the forms to provide 3/4-inch bevels at exterior edges and corners of all exposed concrete. J. The forms shall be oiled with a field-applied commercial form oil or a factory-applied nonabsorptive liner. Oil shall not stain or impede the wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or curing compounds. The forms shall be coated prior to placing reinforcing steel. Oil on reinforcement will not be permitted. — Section 03 11 00-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 K. All form surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned, patched, and repaired before reusing and are subject to review of CONSULTANT. 3.02 FORM REMOVAL A. Supporting forms and shoring shall not be removed until the member has acquired sufficient strength to support its own weight and the construction live loads on it. B. All form removal shall be accomplished in such a manner that will prevent injury to the concrete. C. Forms shall not be removed before the expiration of the minimum times as stated below or until the concrete has attained its minimum 28-day design strength as confirmed by concrete cylinder tests, unless specifically authorized by CONSULTANT. 1. Wall and vertical faces: 24 hours. 2. Columns: 24 hours. 3. Beams and elevated slabs: 14 days. END OF SECTION Section 03 11 00-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1-GENERAL '1 .01 SUMMARY A. Work includes providing complete, in-place, all steel and fibers required fc r reinforcement of cast-in-place concrete as shown on the Drawings. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 sh-ill govern work in this section. '1.02 REFERENCES A. Applicable standards listed in this section include, but are not necessarily limited to the following: 1. ACI 315-Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures. 2. ACI 318-Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. 3. ASTM A1064-Standard Specifications for Carbon-Steel Wire a ld Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete. 4. ASTM A615-Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 5. ASTM A996-Standard Specification for Rail-Steel and Axle-Steel C eformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcing. 6. ASTM C1116-Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Concrete. 7. CRSI-Manual of Standard Practice. '1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01 33 00-Submittals. B. Provide complete shop Drawings of all material to be furnished and installed under this section: 1. Before fabrication of the reinforcement is begun, CONTRACTOR shall obtain the approval of CONSULTANT on reinforcing bar lists and placing Drawir gs. 2. These Drawings and lists shall show in detail the number, size, len::jth, bending, and arrangement of the reinforcing. Reinforcing supports shall also be to sated on the shop Drawings. 3. Shop Drawings shall be in accordance with ACI 315. '1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Delivery: 1. Deliver reinforcement to the job site bundled, tagged, and marked. 2. Use metal tags indicating bar size, lengths, and other information corresponding to markings shown on placement diagrams. B. Storage: Store reinforcement at the job site on blocks and in a manner t ) prevent damage and accumulation of dirt and excessive rust. - Section 03 20 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Reinforcing bars shall comply with ASTM A615 or A996 Type R, Grade 60. Reinforcing bars required to be welded shall be ASTM A706 low alloy. B. Steel wire and welded wire fabric shall comply with ASTM A1064. Fabric shall be provided in flat sheets. Rolled fabric shall not be used. C. Reinforcement supports including bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcement in place shall be: 1. Wire bar-type supports complying with CRSI recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. 2. For slabs on grade, supports with sand plates, or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs. _. 3. For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces or where the concrete surface will be exposed to weather or moisture, where legs of supports are in contact with forms, supports with either hot-dipped galvanized or plastic protected legs. 4. When supports bear directly on the ground and it is not practical to use steel bar supports, precast concrete blocks may be used to support only the bottom lift of reinforcement. The precast blocks must be solid, be of an equal or higher strength than the concrete being placed, must provide adequate support to the reinforcement, and be of proper height to provide specified reinforcing cover. The use of face bricks, hollow concrete blocks, rocks, wood blocks, or other unapproved objects will not be permitted. D. Fibrous Reinforcing: 1. Fibrous concrete reinforcement shall be Fibermesh 300, manufactured by Propex Concrete Systems, or equal. 2. Reinforcement shall be 100% virgin polypropylene fibrillated, multi-length graded fiber containing no reprocessed olefin materials and specifically manufactured for use as concrete secondary reinforcement. _. 3. Physical Characteristics: a. Specific Gravity: 0.91. b. Fiber Length: Multidesign gradation. E. Mechanical Splices and Threaded Couplers: 1. Mechanical splices shall be Zap Screwlok by Bar Splice Products, Inc., or equal. 2. Threaded couplers and dowel bar replacements shall be Dowel Bar Splicer System by Dayton/Richmond, or equal. 3. Mechanical splices and couplers shall be capable of developing at least 125% of the yield strength of the reinforcing bar. - 2.02 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Fabricate reinforcing bars to conform to required shapes and dimensions with fabrication tolerances which comply with CRSI Manual. 2. In case of fabricating errors, do not rebend or straighten reinforcement in a manner that will injure or weaken the material. Section 03 20 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, all end hook dimensions shall conform with "ACI Standard Hooks." B. Reinforcement with any of the following defects shall be deemed unacce3table and will not be permitted in the work: 1. Bar lengths, depths, and bends exceeding specified fabrication tolernnces. — 2. Bend or kinks not indicated on Drawings or final shop Drawings. 3. Bar with reduced cross section because of excessive rusting or othe' cause. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine the substrate, formwork, and the conditions under which concrete reinforcement is to be placed. B. Correct conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the .vork. C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Comply with the specified standards for details and methods of placing reinforcement and supports. 2. Clean reinforcement to remove loose rust, mill scale, earth, and oth.tr materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete. B. Placing Reinforcement: 1. All reinforcing shall be placed in accordance with Contract Drawir gs and with shop Drawings stamped and approved by CONSULTANT. 2. Position, support, and secure reinforcing against displaceme it by formwork, construction, or concrete placement operations. 3. Support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers as needed. 4. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, the reinforcement is to k e so detailed and placed as to allow the following concrete protection: a. Three inches of cover where the concrete is placed directly against ground. b. Two inches of cover where the concrete is placed in forms but is to be exposed to weather, liquid, or the ground. c. One-inch cover in slabs and walls not exposed to weather, liquid or the ground. — d. One and one-half-inch cover in beams, girders, and column not exposed to weather, liquid, or the ground. This cover applies to beam stirrup s and column ties where applicable. r 5. Reinforcement shall be positioned within ±3/8-inch for members with depth to tension reinforcing from compression face less than or equal to 8 inches. Tolerance shall be ±1/2 inch for members with depth to tension reinforcing from compression face greater than 8 inches. Tolerance on dimension between adjacent bars in slab and wall — reinforcing mats shall be 1 inch. Secure against displacement by anchoring at the supports and bar intersections with wire or clips. Section 03 20 00-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 6. Bars shall be securely tied at all intersections except where spacing is less than 1 foot in each direction when alternate intersections shall be tied. To avoid interference with embedded items, bar spacing may be varied slightly if acceptable to CONSULTANT. Tack welding of reinforcing will not be permitted. 7. Set wire ties so that twisted ends are directed away from exposed concrete surfaces. 8. If reinforcing must be cut because of openings or embedded items in the concrete, additional reinforcing must be provided adjacent to the opening at least equal in cross sectional area to that reinforcing which was cut, and it shall extend a minimum of 36 bars diameters beyond the opening on each side or as shown on the Drawings.At sumps or depressions in slabs, bars shall be bent and/or extended under sumps or depressions. 9. Wall reinforcing mats shall be secured in a vertical plane by providing clearance from forms with bar supports and by using Z-shaped bars at±4 feet on center wired between two mats of steel, spacing and staying both of them. Nails shall not be driven into the forms to support reinforcement and neither shall wire for this purpose come in contact with the forms.Alternate top transverse bars in slab shall be supported by individual bar chairs at approximately 3-foot 0-inch centers. Bottom longitudinal bars shall be supported by continuous bar chairs at approximately 4-foot 0-inch centers. 10. If carrier bars are to be used, CONTRACTOR shall provide reinforcing bars for this purpose in addition to the reinforcing called for by the Drawings and specifications. C. Reinforcement Supports: 1. Strength and number of supports shall be sufficient to carry reinforcement. 2. Do not place reinforcing bars more than 2 inches beyond the last leg of any continuous bar support. 3. Do not use supports as bases for runways for concrete-conveying equipment and similar construction loads. D. Welded Wire Fabric: 1. Install welded wire fabric in as long of lengths as practicable. 2. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh. 3. Fabric shall be supported with bar supports. E. Splices: 1. Provide standard reinforcement splices by lapping ends, placing bars in contact, and tightly wire tying. 2. Lap splices in reinforcing shall be provided as shown on the Drawings. Where lap splice lengths are not shown on the Drawings, provide Class B, Category 1 lap splices in accordance with ACI 318. 3. Adjacent splices of tangential bars in circular slabs and horizontal bars in circular walls shall be staggered a minimum of one full lap splice length or 3 feet,whichever is greater, unless otherwise shown. Stagger dimension shall be measured from center to center of lap splices. 4. For circular walls, horizontal bar lap splices shall not coincide in vertical arrays more frequently than every third bar. 5. Mechanical splices and threaded dowel bar inserts may be used where approved by CONSULTANT. F. Embedded Items: 1. Allow other trades to install embedded items as necessary. 2. Particularly after bottom layer of reinforcing is placed in slabs, allow electrical contractors to install conduit scheduled for encasement in slabs prior to placing upper layer of reinforcing. Section 03 20 00-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 G. Minimum Reinforcing: Where reinforcing is not shown, provide a minimum of No. 4 at 8-inch centers each way in members 10 inches or less in thickness and No. 5 -it 12-inch centers each way in each face in members greater than 10 inches thick. H. Fibrous Reinforcing: 1. Fibrous concrete reinforcing shall be used in all building interior slab- )n-grade concrete and all precast concrete topping, and where shown on the Drawings 2. Add fibers at a minimum rate of 1.5 pounds per cubic yard. 3. Mix concrete in strict accordance with reinforcement manufacturer's ecommendations. END OF SECTION — Section 03 20 00-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. All cast-in-place concrete as shown except as noted otherwise. 2. PVC and hydrophilic waterstops, expansion joint fillers, bonding agents, patching mortars, curing compounds, nonshrink grout, floor sealer, and other related items and accessories. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ACI 211.1—Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete. B. ACI 301—Specifications for Structural Concrete. C. ACI 304R—Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete. D. ACI 305R—Guide to Hot Weather Concreting. E. ACI 306R—Guide to Cold Weather Concreting. F. ACI 308—Specification for Curing Concrete. G. ACI 309—Guide for Consolidation of Concrete. H. ACI 318—Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary. I. ASTM C31—Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. J. ASTM C33—Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. K. ASTM C39—Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. L. ASTM C40—Standard Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete. M. ASTM C88-Standard Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate. N. ASTM C94—Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. O. ASTM C143—Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete. P. ASTM C150—Standard Specification for Portland Cement. Section 03 30 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 �. Q. ASTM C156—Standard Test Method for Water Loss (from a Mortar S[ ecimen) Through Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compounds for Concrete. R. ASTM C172—Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. S. ASTM C231—Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. T. ASTM C260—Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Cor Crete. U. ASTM C309—Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Com.ounds for Curing Concrete. V. ASTM C494—Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. W. ASTM C618—Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcinec Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete. X. ASTM C652—Standard Specification for Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry Jnits Made From Clay or Shale). Y. ASTM D994—Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type). Z. ASTM D1752—Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and Recycled PVC Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Submit the following information: 1. Gradation of fine and coarse aggregate—ASTM C33. 2. Specific gravity and dry rodded density of each aggregate. 3. Test of deleterious substances in fine and coarse aggregate—ASTM 1;33. 4. Design mix of each individual concrete mix to be used. 5. Previous test results or trial batch results with 7- and 28-day compre ;sive strengths for each concrete mix proposed. 6. Certified mill test results for cement identifying brand, type, and cher iistry of cement to be used. 7. Brand, type, principal ingredient, and amount of each admixture to b used. C. It is important that the above data be submitted to CONSULTANT v ell in advance of anticipated concreting operations to avoid any delay in construction. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 CEMENT -- A. Cement shall be Portland cement conforming to ASTM C150. Cement used for structures exposed to wastewater, sludge, combined sewage, or sanitary sewage shall be Type II or Type I/II. All other cement shall be Type I or Type I/II. Type III cement shall be used only when permitted by CONSULTANT. All cement shall be the product of one reputable manufacturer and mill. Section 03 30 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. Cement shall be stored in a dry, weathertight, properly ventilated structure with the floor raised not less than 1 foot above the ground. 2.02 FLY ASH A. All fly ash used as an admixture in Portland cement concrete shall be Class C or F conforming to the requirements of ASTM C618. 2.03 AGGREGATE A. All aggregates shall be washed and shall consist of natural sand, gravel, or crushed rock and shall have clean, hard, durable, uncoated grains of strong minerals. The amounts of deleterious substances present in the fine and coarse aggregate expressed in percentages by weight shall not exceed the following: Aggregate Deleterious Substance Fine Coarse Clay Lumps and Friable Particles 3.0 3.0 Coal and Lignite 0.5 0.5 Mineral finer than No. 200 sieve 3.0 Soft Fragments 3.0 3.0 Chert* --- 5.0 Sum of Chert and Clay Lumps 5.0 * Material classified as chert and having a bulk specific gravity of less than 2.45. The percentage of chert shall be determined on the basis of the weight of chert in the sample retained on a 3/8-inch sieve divided by the weight of the total sample.B. The combined amount of all deleterious substances in an aggregate shall not exceed 5% of the weight of the aggregate. • C. If required by CONSULTANT, sodium sulfate soundness tests (ASTM C88) shall be performed on the aggregate. When the aggregate is subjected to five cycles, the weight loss shall not exceed 12%. Samples of proposed aggregates shall be submitted to an independent laboratory for testing in advance of concrete work.All testing shall be performed in accordance with ASTM C33. Certified test results shall be submitted to CONSULTANT confirming that aggregate complies with all stated specifications. Report shall identify source of aggregate and absorbed water. D. Fine aggregate shall be well-graded from coarse to fine and shall conform to the following requirements: Percentage by Weight Passing 3/8-inch sieve 100 Passing No. 4 sieve 95-100 Passing No. 8 sieve 80-100 Passing No. 16 sieve 50-85 Passing No. 30 sieve 25-60 Passing No. 50 sieve 5-30 Passing No. 100 sieve 0-10 Section 03 30 00-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 -- E. Gradation of fine aggregate shall be reasonably uniform and not subject to the extreme percentages of gradation specified above. The fineness modulus shall be not less than 2.3 or more than 3.1, nor shall the fineness modulus of any sample vary by more than +0.20 from the fineness modulus of the representative sample used in proportioning the concrete. F. If required by CONSULTANT, fine aggregate shall be subjected to the color-metric test for organic impurities (ASTM C40) and shall not produce a color darker than Figure 1, unless they pass the mortar strength test.Aggregate producing color darker than Figure 2 shall not be used in any event. G. Coarse aggregate shall be well-graded from coarse to fine, and when tested by laboratory sieves having square openings, shall conform to the following requirements: Percentage by Weight Aggregate 3/4-inch Stone 1 1/2-inch Stone Passing 2-inch sieve --- 100 Passing 1 1/2-inch sieve --- 90-100 Passing 1-inch sieve 100 20-55 Passing 3/4-inch sieve 90-100 0-15 Passing 3/8-inch sieve 20-55 0-5 Passing No. 4 sieve 0-10 --- Passing No. 8 sieve 0-5 H. The 3/4-inch aggregate shall be used in concrete members no thinner than 4 inches and less than 10 inches thick. A blend of 3/4-inch and 1 1/2-inch aggregate shall be used in members 10 inches thick and thicker with the 3/4-inch aggregate comprising between 35% and 65% of the total course aggregate. When members thinner than 10 inches are placed monolithically with members thicker than 10 inches, the aggregate requirements for the thinner member shall apply. I. Aggregates must be allowed to drain for at least 12 hours before being .ased. The ground upon which aggregates are stored must be hard, firm, well-drained, ind free from all vegetable matter. Various sizes of aggregates must be stored separatel} and if they have become contaminated or merged with each other, they shall not be used. 2.04 WATER A. Water used in mixing concrete shall be clean and free from injurious am )unts of oil, alkali, organic matter, or other deleterious substances. 2.05 ADMIXTURES A. Water Reducing Admixture shall be Master Pozzolith® 200 by BASF Admixtures, Inc., Daracem 19 by Grace, or equal. Water reducing admixture shall conform to ASTM C494, Type A and Type F. Water reducing admixture shall not reduce durabi ty, shall increase strength 10%, and shall not affect bleeding characteristics over reference mix. B. Air-Entraining Admixture shall be equal to MasterAir.® AE 90 by BASF Admixtures, Inc., Darex by Grace Construction Products, or equal. Air-entraining admixtur shall conform to ASTM C260. C. No other admixture will be allowed without written approval of CONSULTANT. All admixture shall be compatible with cement, aggregate, and water used. Section 03 30 00-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.06 PROPORTIONING A. The proportions of aggregate to cement shall be such as to produce a workable mixture that can be thoroughly compacted and that will work readily in the forms and around reinforcement without permitting materials to segregate or excess water to collect on the surfaces. The combined aggregates shall be such that when separated on the No. 4 sieve, the weight passing the sieve shall not be less than 30% nor greater than 50%. B. Concrete of various classes shall have the following maximum water/cement or water/(cement + fly ash) ratio minimum compressive strengths at 28 days and minimum cement and fly ash contents: Maximum Water/ Minimum 28 Day Cement Fly Ash- Cement or Water/ Strength-Pounds Content-Pounds Pounds per Class (Cement+Fly Ash) per Square Inch per Cubic Yard Cubic Yard Type C Type F A 0.45 4,000 564• --- --- A-FA 0.45 4,000 480 110 125 X --- 2,000 376 --- --- C. Except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings or specified, all concrete shall be Class A or Class A-FA concrete. D. All concrete mixes shall be designed for a strength of 15% above that specified to allow for job variations. All mixes shall be designed in accordance with ACI 211.1 by a competent concrete engineer or competent laboratory technician. Required materials test data shall be submitted with design mixes for review and approval by CONSULTANT. Mix computations shall be submitted if requested by CONSULTANT. E. The slump for all concrete shall be 3 inches and concrete with a slump within the range of 2 to 3 1/2 inches will be acceptable unless otherwise stated. F. A water-reducing admixture shall be used in all concrete. A qualified representative of the manufacturer shall be available to assist in proportioning the concrete, advise on the proper addition of the admixture to the concrete, and advise on adjustments of concrete proportions to suit job conditions. G. An air-entraining admixture shall be used in all concrete except as noted. Air content shall be tested by the pressure method as outlined in ASTM C231 and shall be between 4% to 7% by volume. An air-entraining admixture is not required for concrete patching and for concrete floors, equipment pads, and supports in interior heated buildings where the concrete will be protected from freezing during and after construction. H. CONTRACTOR shall submit to CONSULTANT concrete cylinder compressive strength results from previous projects for the same concrete mixes proposed on the current project. If this information is not available, one cubic yard trial batches of each individual mix proposed for use shall be made prior to use in the work. Four test cylinders shall be made for each trial batch, two to be tested at 7 days and two at 28 days. The trial batches shall be made preceding actual placement operations so that the results of the seven-day tests can be obtained. All costs for material, equipment, and labor incurred during design of concrete mixes shall be borne by CONTRACTOR. Section 03 30 00-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 -- I. All aggregates shall be measured by weight. The concrete mixer is to bE equipped with an automatic water-measuring device that can be adjusted to deliver the cesired amount of water. 2.07 WATERSTOPS A. PVC waterstops shall be as manufactured by Greenstreak, Inc., W.R. Meadows, Durajoint, or equal. Provide serrated center bulb-type, nontapered 3/8-inch minimum thickness waterstops manufactured from virgin polyvinyl chloride with no reclaimed/scrapped material or pigment whatsoever conforming to Corps of Engineers CRD-C-572. The waterstop shall have an integral fastening system consisting of hogrings or grommets. For 6-inch PVC waterstops in construction joints, use Greenstreak, Inc. Profile No. 732, or equal. For expansion joints, use Greenstreak, Inc. Profile No. 735, or equal. Where 4-inch PVC _ waterstops are called for in the Drawings, use Greenstreak, Inc. Profile No. 702, or equal. B. Hydrophilic waterstop shall be a flexible hydrophilic natural rubber s::rip composed of nonvulcanized rubber and urethane polymer hydrophilic agent creating a n-loisture-activated, self-healing waterproofing compound. C. Hydrophilic waterstop shall be Adeka Ultraseal, or equal, products as follows: 1. Construction Joints: a. Wall/slab thickness greater than 9 inches with double mat of reinforcing: MC-2010MN (3/4 inch by 3/8 inch) with embedded stainless steel wire mesh for expansion control. The waterstop shall develop a minimum of 400 psi expansion pressure and withstand a minimum 150-foot hydrostatic head. Expansion amount shall not exceed 120%. b. Wall/slab thickness between 4 inches and 9 inches with 1-inch rr nimum cover and single or double mat of reinforcing: KBA-1510FP (9/16 inch by 3/ inch). Expansion amount shall not exceed 30%. 2. Pipe Penetrations: a. Wall/slab thickness between 4 inches and 9 inches and pipe diameter greater than 4 inches and less than or equal to 24 inches: KBA-1510FP (9/16 nch by 3/8 inch). b. Wall/slab thickness greater than 9 inches and pipe diameter greater than 4 inches and less than or equal to 24 inches: MC-2005T (3/4 inches by 3/,6 inches). c. Wall/slab thickness greater than 9 inches and pipe diameter greater than 24 inches: MC-2010MN (3/4 inch by 3/8 inch) with embedded stainless steel wire mesh for expansion control. 2.08 JOINT FILLER A. Expansion joints shall have standard 1/2-inch-thick cork expansion joint filler, W. R. Meadows, or equal, meeting ASTM D1752—Type II. Exceptions to this are expansion joints in exterior concrete walks and between concrete walks and other structures which shall be asphalt expansion joint filler, 1/2-inch-thick, Grace, W.R. Meadows, or equal, meeting ASTM D994. 2.09 BONDING AGENT -- A. Acceptable products include: MasterProtect'v P 110 by BASF fo non-submerged applications, MasterEmaco® P 124 by BASF for submerged locations unless otherwise noted, MasterEmaco®ADH 326 by BASF, or equal for submerged locati)ns where severe _.. wastewater exposure is indcated. Section 03 30 00-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.10 PATCHING ADDITIVE A. Acceptable manufacturers include MasterEmaco®A 660 by BASF, Sonocrete by Sonneborn Contech Co., or equal. 2.11 NONSHRINK GROUT A. Acceptable manufacturers include Dayton Superior, Master Builders, or equal. Grout shall be nonshrink, nonmetallic and shall achieve a strength of 7,500 psi in 28 days. 2.12 CURE—SEAL HARDENER A. Penetrating sealer for interior building floors shall be Ashford Formula by Curecrete Chemical Company, Inc., or equal. See finish schedule for locations to be used. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 MIXING A. Ready-mixed concrete shall be batched, mixed, and delivered in accordance with ASTM C94 and ACI 304R. In general, concrete shall be mixed 50 revolutions at plant, 20 upon arrival at site, and 20 each time water is added; maximum of 110 revolutions at mixing speed. Concrete shall be delivered and discharged within 1 1/2 hours or before the drum has revolved 300 times after introduction of water to the cement and aggregates or the cement to the aggregates. Truck mixers shall be equipped with drum revolution counters. In no event shall concrete which has taken its initial set be allowed to be used. Retempering of concrete is not permitted. B. A representative of CONSULTANT may be at the batching plant periodically to observe the batching and mixing. C. No water shall be added on the job unless required by CONTRACTOR and with the knowledge of CONSULTANT; the amount of water, if added, shall be recorded on all copies of the delivery tickets. If water is added, CONTRACTOR shall verify that the required water-cement ratio is not exceeded. D. Concrete shall have a temperature not less than 60°F nor more than 80°F as delivered to the jobsite. E. With each load of concrete, CONTRACTOR shall obtain delivery tickets and shall make these tickets available for review by CONSULTANT. Delivery tickets shall provide the following information: 1. Date. 2. Name of ready-mix concrete plant, job location, and CONTRACTOR. 3. Type of cement and admixtures, if any. 4. Specified cement content in sacks per cubic yard of concrete and approved concrete mix number or designation. 5. Amount of concrete in load, in cubic yards. 6. Water-cement ratio. 7. Water added at job, if any. 8. Truck number and time dispatched. 9. Number of mixing drum revolutions. Section 03 30 00-7 4463.004/City Contract No.994 F. For job-mixed concrete, all concrete materials shall be mixed in a machine batch mixer for at least 1 1/2 minutes after all ingredients are in the mixer and shall continue until there is a uniform distribution of the materials and the mass is uniform in color and homogeneous. The mixer shall not be loaded beyond the capacity given by the manufacturer and shall be rotated at the speed recommended by the manufacturer. The mixer is to be provided with positive timing device that will positively prevent discharging the mixture until the specified mixing time has elapsed. 3.02 JOINTS A. CONTRACTOR shall place all joints as shown on the Drawings or specified herein. If approved by CONSULTANT, CONTRACTOR may, at his own expense, :Mace construction joints in addition to and at places other than those shown on the Drawings Unless otherwise shown, all joints shall be straight, truly vertical or horizontal, and proper methods shall be employed to obtain this result. B. Where joints are not shown on the Drawings or specified elsewhere, CONTRACTOR shall provide joints as follows: 1. Walls shall have vertical joints at 60 feet on center maximum but not more than 15 feet from corners or intersections and shall have horizontal joints at 15 feet on center maximum. 2. Slabs shall have joints at 20 feet on center maximum in each direction. C. Immediately after completion of the first pour at a joint, the concrete surface, reinforcement, and waterstop projecting beyond the joint shall be thoroughly cleaned and laitance removed. The waterstops shall not be disturbed after the concrete in the first pour at a joint has set. Concrete around waterstops shall be thoroughly compacted by hand spading and vibrating. Immediately before the second pour, all extraneous matter shall be removed from the joint, the waterstop and steel cleaned, and the surface thoroughly wetted. D. Concrete at all joints shall have been in place at least 48 hours before abutting concrete is placed. At least two hours must elapse after depositing concrete in columns or walls before depositing in beams, girders, or slab supported thereon. Beams, girders, brackets, column capital, and haunches shall be considered as part of the floor system ar d shall be placed integrally therewith. 3.03 WATERSTOPS A. Unless noted otherwise, PVC waterstops shall be provided at all expansion joints and at construction joints in floors and walls of structures exposed to ground or liquid on one side and occupied by personnel or nonsubmerged equipment on the other side. B. PVC waterstops shall be made continuous by splicing. Waterstops shall >e spliced using a corner, tee, or cross splice, as applicable, at intersections. Waterstops s lall be mitered to maintain the continuity of the ribs and center bulb. Splices shall be made using a hot metal plate or an electric splicer and full butt weld. Direct flame will not be allowed. Sample field-splices shall be submitted to CONSULTANT for approval prior to cor struction. C. PVC waterstops placed in all joints shall be securely held in place by an acceptable method or as shown on the Drawings. PVC waterstops shall be installed and secured prior to concrete placement. PVC waterstops shall not be inserted into wet concrete. No nails will be permitted through the waterstop. Great care shall be taken when concrete is placed so that the waterstop remains erect and is not bent over. Section 03 30 00-8 4463.004/City Contract No.994 D. Either hydrophilic or PVC waterstop shall be provided at all construction joints in liquid holding tanks and channels that are not adjacent to areas occupied by personnel and at joints between new and existing concrete. Waterstop shall be placed as shown on drawing details, if any, and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.04 BONDING TO EXISTING CONCRETE A. When placing new concrete adjacent to existing concrete, the existing concrete shall be thoroughly roughened, cleaned, and saturated with water 24 hours before pouring new concrete. Existing concrete is defined as concrete more than six months old. At time of new pour, remove any standing water and apply bonding agent. Bonding agent shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.05 PATCHING EXISTING CONCRETE A. When patching existing concrete, remove poor concrete until firm hard concrete is exposed; roughen and clean surface of the existing concrete, clean any exposed reinforcing bars, and pour new concrete. Concrete finish shall match existing concrete. New concrete shall be 4,000 psi 28-day strength mixed with patching additive, mixed according to manufacturer's instructions. Concrete shall not be air-entrained. 3.06 EMBEDDED ITEMS IN CONCRETE A. All sleeves, inserts, anchors, and embedded items required for adjoining work or for its support shall be placed prior to concreting. B. All contractors whose work is related to the concrete or must be supported by it shall be given ample notice and opportunity to introduce and/or furnish embedded items before the concrete is placed. C. Embedded items shall be positioned accurately and supported against displacement. Reinforcing bars shall clear embedded items a minimum of 2 inches. 3.07 PLACING CONCRETE A. Before placing concrete, all equipment, forms, ground, reinforcements, and other surfaces with which the concrete will come in contact are to be thoroughly cleaned of all debris, ice, and water. Ground shall be wetted prior to placement of concrete on it. B. After reinforcement is placed and before concrete is placed over it, CONSULTANT shall be allowed sufficient time to observe the reinforcing. C. Unless otherwise authorized by CONSULTANT, all concrete shall be placed in the presence of CONSULTANT. D. Concrete shall be conveyed from the mixer to the place of final deposit as rapidly as practicable by methods that will prevent the segregation or loss of materials. Chuting for conveying purposes must be accomplished in such a manner as to prevent segregation or loss of materials. Receiving hoppers shall be installed at the chute discharge and at no point in its travel from the mixer to place of final deposit shall the concrete pass through a free vertical drop of more than 3 feet. Elephant trunks or tremies shall be used in all wall pours to prevent coating of forms and reinforcing bars. E. Care shall be taken to avoid an excess of water on the concrete surface. Excess water shall be drained or otherwise removed from the surface. Dry cement or a mixture of cement and sand shall not be sprinkled directly on the surface to absorb water. Section 03 30 00-9 4463.004/City Contract No.994 _, F. Concrete in wall and beam pours shall be deposited in approximately horizontal layers not to exceed 18 inches in thickness. Each layer shall be well worked into the preceding layer while both layers are still soft. G. Concrete shall be deposited as nearly as practicable in its final position to avoid segregation from rehandling or flowing. The maximum allowable lateral movement of the concrete after being deposited is 3 feet. Once concreting is started, it shall be carried c n as a continuous operation until the placing of the section or panel is completed. H. All concrete shall be placed with the aid of mechanical vibrating equipment in accordance with ACI 309. In congested areas, vibration shall be supplemented by hand spading adjacent to the forms. Vibration should secure the desired results within 5 to 15 seconds at intervals of 18 inches apart maximum. The vibrator shall penetrate the preceding layer of concrete. Vibrators shall have a frequency of not less than 10,000 impulses pc' minute when in operation submerged in concrete. I. A sufficient number of spare vibrators shall be kept in ready reserve to provide adequate vibration in case of breakdown of those in use. J. In placing concrete in beams where it is intended to be continuous and monolithic with the slab above, a delay to provide for settlement of the deep concrete shall bE scheduled before placing the upper concrete in the slab. The length of delay shall be as for g as possible and still permit the revibration of the deep concrete. K. Concrete is not to be placed under water. A suitable means shall be prc✓ided for lowering the water level below surfaces upon which concrete is to be placed. This may require excavating approximately 12 inches below the bottom of the concrete surface and refilling with gravel and compacting. The groundwater shall not be allowed to rise to the bottom of the concrete until 24 hours after the concrete pour has been completed. Water shall not be allowed to fall upon or run across the concrete during this period. L. No extra payment will be allowed for dewatering, undercutting, and grave! fill. 3.08 MOIST CURING A. All concrete shall be maintained in a moist condition for at least 7 days aft!.?r being deposited except that for high-early strength concrete, a three-day period will be suff jent. Moist curing shall be accomplished by one of the following methods: 1. Wood forms left in place and kept wet at all times. If the forms are nc t going to be kept wet, they shall be removed as soon as practicable and other metho is of moist curing shall be started without delay. 2. Use of a curing compound conforming to ASTM C309, Type I as approved by CONSULTANT. Curing compound shall be applied at a uniform rate as indicated by the manufacturer sufficient to comply with the requirements of the test water retention of ASTM C156. Curing compound applied to vertical concrete surfaces after forms are removed shall be specially adapted to provide required coverage on the vertical surface. On nonformed surfaces, the curing compound shall be applied immediately after the disappearance of the water sheen after finishing of the concrete. Curing compound shall not be used on concrete surfaces that are to be painted, receive ceramic tile or resilient flooring, or be waterproofed. Care shall be taken not to get curing compound on construction joints, reinforcing steel, and other surfaces against which new concrete will be poured. 3. Use of plastic film. Plastic film shall have a minimum thickness of 4 mils. It shall be placed over the wet surface of the fresh concrete as soon as possik e without marring the surface and shall be weighted so that it remains in contact with all exposed surfaces Section 03 30 00-10 4463.004/City Contract No.994 of the concrete. All joints and edges shall be lapped and weighted. Any tears in the film shall be immediately repaired. 4. Application of wet coverings weighing 9 ounces per square yard such as burlap, cotton mats, or other moisture-retaining fabrics. The covering system shall include two layers and shall be kept continuously moist so that a film of water remains on the concrete surface throughout the curing period. 5. Use of an approved waterproof curing paper. Edges of adjacent sheets shall be overlapped several inches and tightly sealed. 6. Ponding of water or continuous sprinkling of water is permitted. Sprinkling at intervals will not be permitted. 7. Construction joints shall be moist cured by one of the methods listed above except by Method "2." B. The use of moist earth, sand, hay, or another method that may discolor hardened concrete will not be permitted. 3.09 HOT WEATHER CONCRETING A. When the atmospheric temperature exceeds 80°F during concrete placement, this section and ACI 305 shall apply in addition to all other sections of the specifications. B. The temperature of the delivered concrete shall not exceed 85°F. C. Care shall be exercised to keep mixing time and elapsed time between mixing and placement at a minimum. Ready-mix trucks shall be dispatched so as to avoid delay in concrete placement, and the work shall be organized to use the concrete promptly after arrival at the jobsite. D. The subgrade, forms, and reinforcing shall be sprinkled with cool water just prior to placement of concrete. Prior to placing concrete, there shall be no standing water or puddles on the subgrade. E. If approved by CONSULTANT, an admixture for retarding the setting of the concrete may be used. F. Exposed concrete surfaces shall be carefully protected from drying. Continuous water curing is preferred. Curing compounds shall be white pigmented. 3.10 COLD WEATHER CONCRETING A. Conditions of this section shall apply, in addition to all other sections of the specifications, when placing concrete in cold weather. Cold weather is defined as a period when, for more than three successive days, the average daily temperature drops below 40°F. When temperatures above 50°F occur during more than half of any 24-hour period, the period will no longer be regarded as cold weather. The average daily temperature is the average of the highest and lowest temperature during the period from midnight to midnight. Cold weather concreting shall conform to all requirements of ACI 306.1, except as modified by the requirements of these specifications. B. Detailed procedures for the production, placement, protection, curing, and temperature monitoring of concrete during cold weather shall be submitted to CONSULTANT. Cold weather concreting shall not begin until these procedures have been reviewed for conformance with ACI 306.1. Section 03 30 00-1 1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. All concrete materials, forms, ground, mixing equipment, and other surfaces with which the concrete is to come in contact shall be free from frost, and the temperature of contact surfaces shall be 35°F or above. Ground upon which concrete is to be placed shall not be frozen at any depth. D. The mixing water and aggregates shall be heated and when entering the mixer shall have temperatures not exceeding 175°F and 80°F, respectively. Concrete temperature as mixed shall not exceed 80°F and shall typically be between 55°F and 70°F. Concrete, when placed in the forms, shall have a temperature of not less than 50°F. E. Freshly placed concrete shall be protected by adequate covering, insulating, or housing and heating. If heating is used, ambient temperature inside the housing shall be maintained at a minimum of 70°F for 3 days or 50°F for 5 days. The maximum ambient temperature during curing shall not exceed 80°F. If insulating methods are used, recommendations contained in ACI 306R shall be followed. Surface temperature shall be maintained at 50°F for 7 days. After the curing period, the temperature of the concrete shall be reduced uniformly at a rate not to exceed 40°F per 24 hours until outside air temperature is reached. Heating of enclosure shall continue if it is anticipated that the outside air temperature will drop more than 20°F in the next 24 hours. The concrete temperature shall be obtained by attaching a thermometer provided by CONTRACTOR to the concrete surface. Concrete shall be kept moist. F. If heating is used, the housing shall be constructed weathertight and shall be constructed in a manner that will provide uniform air circulation and air temperatures over the complete concrete area that is being cured. Special attention shall be given to the edges and ends of a concrete pour with the housing extending at least 5 feet beyond any concrete surface being protected. The housing shall be in place and heat applied within 2 hours after concrete placement. G. Heating may be by steam or hot air. Heaters shall be vented to outside of the housing. Open burning salamanders will not be permitted. Heating devices shall not be placed so close to the concrete as to cause rapid drying or discoloration from smoke. H. If heating is used, CONTRACTOR shall provide sufficient 24-hour inspection of the heaters to provide compliance with the above-specified temperature requirements during the curing period. CONTRACTOR shall provide maximum-minimum thermometers for CONSULTANT's use. I. The use of calcium chloride, salts, or other chemical admixtures for the pre:ention of freezing is prohibited. J. Salts or other deleterious materials shall not be used on temporary or per nanent structures above concrete surfaces that are being placed, finished, or cured. 3.11 FINISHING A. Flat Work: 1. Light Troweled Finish: Float concrete surface, then power trowel t-ie surface. Hand trowel the surface smooth and free of trowel marks. 2. Hard Troweled Finish: Float concrete surface, then power trowel tie surface. Hand trowel the surface smooth and free of trowel marks. Continue han,:! troweling until a ringing sound is produced as the floor is troweled. 3. Tolerance for concrete floors shall be 1/4 inch within 10 feet in any direction. Straight edge shall be furnished by CONTRACTOR. Section 03 30 00-12 4463.004/City Contract No.994 4. Broom or Belt Finish: Immediately after concrete has received a floated finish, give the concrete surface a coarse transverse scored texture by drawing a broom or burlap belt across the surface. 5. The above finishes shall be used in the following locations: a. Light Troweled Finish: Submerged tank slabs. b. Hard Troweled Finish: Building floors. c. Broom or Belt Finish: Exterior slabs, sidewalks, tops of walls, and tank slabs to receive grout topping. B. Formed Surfaces: 1. Within 2 days after removing forms and prior to application of a curing compound, all concrete surfaces shall be observed and any poor joints, voids, stone pockets, or other defective areas shall be patched at once before the concrete is thoroughly dry. Defective areas shall be chipped away to remove all loose and partially bonded aggregate. The area shall be thoroughly wetted and filled with as dry as practical mortar mix placed to slightly overfill the recess. Mortar shall include a bonding agent. After partial set has taken place, the excess mortar shall be removed flush with the surface on the concrete using a wood float. All patching shall be cured, protected, and covered as specified for concrete. All cracks, leaks, or moist spots that appear shall be repaired. No extra compensation will be allowed CONTRACTOR for such work. 2. The exterior or removal portion of nonremovable ties shall be removed with the use of a special tool designed for this purpose. Cutting or chipping of concrete to permit removal of exterior portion will not be permitted. 3. For nonremovable ties, tie rod holes left by the removal of the exterior portion of the tie and cone shall be thoroughly wetted and filled by ramming with as dry as practical mortar mix in such a manner such that it completely fills the hole. Mortar shall include a bonding agent. All patching shall be cured, protected, and covered as specified for concrete. The holes are to be filled immediately after removal of the exterior portion of the tie. 4. Holes left by removable ties shall be filled by installing a neoprene plug near the center of the wall. The balance of the hole shall be filled with mortar as specified above to within 1 inch of the face of the wall. The remainder of the hole shall be filled with a waterproofing compound.5. All finished or formed surfaces shall conform accurately to the shape, alignment, grades, and sections as shown or prescribed by CONSULTANT. All surfaces shall be free from fins, bulges, ridges, offsets, honeycombing, or roughness. All sharp angles, where required, shall be rounded or beveled.Any formed surface to be painted shall be free of any material that will be detrimental to the paint. The surface of the concrete shall be given one of the following finishes immediately after form stripping: a. Finish A shall be referred to as a sack finish. Surfaces shall be free of contaminants prior to sacking. After wetting the surface, a grout shall be rubbed in using a rubber float or burlap. After the grout hardens sufficiently, it shall be scraped from the surface with the edge of a steel trowel without disturbing the grout in the air holes. After further drying, the surface shall be rubbed with burlap to remove all surface grout. The entire surface shall be finished to secure a continuous, hard, dust-free uniform texture surface free from pinholes and other minor imperfections. Finish A will be required for all unpainted surfaces (See Section 09 91 00 for painted surfaces), interior surfaces of equipment rooms, operation areas, and permanently exposed vertical surfaces. Where steel-faced forms are used to form walls, the portion of wall to receive the sack finish shall first be roughened by brush blasting or other acceptable method to achieve a texture similar to 40 to 60 grit sandpaper. b. Finish B shall be the same as Finish A, except that the final burlap rubbing may be omitted, providing the steel trowel scraping removes the loose buildup from the surface. Finish B shall be provided for waterproof- and moistureproof-coated surfaces. Section 03 30 00-13 4463.004/City Contract No.994 �- c. Finish C shall be referred to as a finish that has surface imperfections less than 3/8 inches in any dimension. Surface imperfections greater than 3/8 inches shall be repaired or removed and the affected areas neatly patched. Finish C or smoother shall be provided for interior surfaces of wet wells, tanks, and channels from 1 foot below minimum water surfaces and down and otherwise unfinished interior surfaces. d. Finish D shall be the finish for surfaces that may be left as they come from the forms, except that tie holes shall be plugged and defects greater than 1/2 inch in any dimension shall be repaired. Finish D shall be provided for surfaces to be buried or covered by other construction such as masonry veneer. C. All precautions shall be taken to protect the concrete from stains or abrasi )ns, and any such damage shall be removed or repaired under this Contract. 3.12 LOADING OF CONCRETE STRUCTURES A. No concrete structure or portion thereof shall be loaded with its design load until the concrete has obtained its specified 28-day compressive strength. This shall include but not be limited to vertical live load, equipment loading, water loading, groundwater loading, and backfill load. Concrete strength at time of loading shall be determined by testing field-cured concrete cylinders. B. Extreme care shall be taken so that construction loads do not exceed de:.ign loading of the structure. 3.13 WATER TEST A. All liquid-retaining structures shall be water-tested by CONTRACTOR before being faced with masonry or backfilled. The structure shall be filled with water, ke full for at least 24 hours, leaks or moist areas marked, and the structure or surrounc ng area drained. Repairs shall be made from the face of the concrete that is subjected t) water pressure. Method of repair shall be reviewed by CONSULTANT. B. Testing of the structure shall not take place until the last concrete placed in the structure has developed 28-day design strength as determined by testing field-cured concrete cylinders. C. After repair, the structure shall again be tested as above. Testing and repair shall continue until all leaks or moist spots have disappeared. Unless otherwise stated, water for testing shall be supplied by CONTRACTOR. 3.14 NONSHRINK GROUT A. Nonshrink, nonmetallic grout shall be used for filling recesses and pocketE left for equipment installation and for setting of base plates. The material used shall be approved by CONSULTANT. Store, mix, and place the nonshrinking compound as recommended by the manufacturer. The minimum compressive strength shall be 5,000 psi at age 7 days and 7,500 psi at age 28 days. 3.15 TESTING AND SAMPLING A. The following tests of fresh concrete shall be performed by CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall prepare, protect, transport, and have tested all cylinders at his expense. 1. Sampling of concrete for slump tests, air tests, temperature tests, and for making concrete test cylinders shall be performed in accordance with ASTM C172. Section 03 30 00-14 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2. Cylinders: a. Three test cylinders shall be made for each pour less than 25 cubic yards, four test cylinders shall be made for each pour between 25 and 100 cubic yards, and eight test cylinders shall be made for each pour in excess of 100 cubic yards. Each concrete mix shall be represented by at least four cylinders for the entire job. Concrete for cylinders shall be collected near the middle of the load and/or as requested by CONSULTANT. b. Cylinders shall be made and tested in accordance with ASTM C31 and ASTM C39, respectively. The cylinders must be kept moist and at temperatures between 60°F and 80°F and shall remain undisturbed and stored in a location free from vibration. In hot weather, the cylinders shall be covered with wet burlap and stored in a shaded area. It is CONTRACTOR's responsibility to provide a suitable protected location for storing cylinders on the jobsite. c. After 24 hours, the cylinders shall be transferred to an independent testing laboratory acceptable to CITY. The cylinders shall be packed in sawdust or other cushioning material for transit to avoid any bumping or jarring of the cylinders. d. Cylinders shall be broken at 7 and 28 days or as requested by CONSULTANT. Test results shall be mailed immediately and directly to CONSULTANT. Test data shall include date and location of pour and concrete mix used. _ 3. Slump Test: CONTRACTOR shall make one slump test near the beginning of all pours with two tests being made for all pours in excess of 25 yards or as requested by CONSULTANT. Slump tests shall conform to ASTM C143. 4. Air Test: a. When air-entrained concrete is used, the air content shall be checked by CONTRACTOR near the beginning of all pours with at least two checks being made for all pours in excess of 25 cubic yards, or as requested by CONSULTANT. b. The air contents shall be checked using the pressure method in accordance with ASTM C231. The pocket-sized alcohol air indicator shall not be used unless it is first used in conjunction with the pressure method test. B. All costs of additional testing and sampling of fresh or hardened concrete needed because of suspected or actual violation of the specifications shall be borne by CONTRACTOR. 3.16 RECORDS A. A record is to be kept of all concrete work. The record shall include the date, location of pour, concrete mix, slump, air content, test cylinder identification, concrete temperature, and ambient air temperature. In addition, for cold weather concreting the record shall include the daily maximum-minimum thermometer readings of all thermometers during the entire curing period for all concrete pours. The project representative will keep this record, and CONTRACTOR shall assist in obtaining needed information. 3.17 SIDEWALKS AND EXTERIOR SLABS A. Sidewalks shall be constructed where shown on the Drawings. They shall be a minimum of 5 inches thick and shall slope away from buildings or structures at a rate of 1/4 inch per foot. Concrete shall be as previously specified. Sidewalks shall be constructed on 3 inches of compacted granular fill. They shall have tooled joints of 1-inch minimum depth at approximately 5-foot centers with 1/2-inch preformed expansion joint filler at approximately 25-foot centers with one at all corners and located anywhere sidewalks abut structures and buildings. 3.18 CONCRETE REMOVAL AND PATCHING A. All areas disturbed as a result of concrete removal or repair shall be patched as specified in Bonding to Existing Concrete. Section 03 30 00-15 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.19 CURING AND SEALING INTERIOR BUILDING FLOORS A. Install cure seal hardener product in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Apply only to those floors noted to be sealed in the finish schedule. B. Where product will be used for moist curing, sealing and hardening, apply to new concrete as soon as the concrete is firm enough to walk on after troweling. Where product will be used for sealing and hardening only, surface must be free of dust, dirt, laitance, curing compounds, and any material that would inhibit the penetration of the product. In some - instances, the floor may need to be stripped and neutralized before appli( ation. C. Spray on at rate of 200 square feet per gallon. D. Keep surfaces wet with cure seal hardener for minimum soak in period of 3 ) minutes, without allowing drying out or becoming slippery. In hot weather, slipperiness nay appear before the 30 minute time period has elapsed. If that occurs, apply more cure seal hardener as required to keep entire surface in a nonslippery state for the first 15 minutes. For the remaining 15 minutes, mist the surface as needed with water to keep the material in a nonslippery state. E. After this period, when treated surface becomes slippery, lightly mis with water until slipperiness disappears. F. Wait for surface to become slippery again and then flush entire surface wit water removing all residue of cure seal hardener. G. Squeegee surface completely dry, flushing any remaining slippery areas until no residue remains. H. Wet vacuum or scrubbing machines may be used to remove residue, provided manufacturer's instructions are followed. I. Protect installed floors until chemical reaction process is complete; at least three months. J. Clean up spills immediately and spot treat stains with good degreaser or )11 emulsifier. K. Protection and cleaning of floors are the responsibility of CONTRACTOR until final completion. Replace concrete that becomes stained because of improper precautions or lack of cleaning END OF SECTION Section 03 30 00-16 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 03 41 00 STRUCTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE PART 1—GENERAL 1 .01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Precast concrete tees, beams, and columns. 2. Connection plates and hangers. 3. Grout packing. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ACI 301—Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. B. ACI 318—Building Code requirements for Reinforced Concrete. C. AWS D1.1—Structural Welding Code. D. AWS D1.4—Structural Welding Code—Reinforcing Steel. E. PCI MNL-116—Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Precast and Prestressed Concrete Products. F. PCI MNL-120—Design Handbook—Precast and Prestressed Concrete. G. PCI MNL-123—Manual on Design of Connections for Precast Prestressed Concrete. H. PCI—Design Handbook—Precast and Prestressed Concrete. I. PCI—Tolerances for Precast and Prestressed Concrete. 1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Size components to withstand design loads in an unrestrained condition as follows: Roof Assembly: All dead loads plus 20 psf live loads plus concentrated loads shown on the drawings plus snow loads and snow drift loads shown on the drawings. Increased loading due to snow drifting at obstructions and changes in roof elevation shall be included in the design. B. Design members exposed to the weather to provide for movement of components without damage, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal or cyclic day/night temperature ranges. C. Design system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of other building structural members, and clearances of intended openings. Section 03 41 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate unit locations, unit identification marks, conne :tion details, edge conditions, bearing requirements, support conditions, dimensions, op enings, openings intended to be field cut, and relationship to adjacent materials. Indic ate design loads, deflections, cambers, and special conditions. B. Product Data: Indicate standard component configuration, design I )ads, deflections, cambers, and bearing requirements. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Fabricator: Company specializing in manufacturing the work of this section with minimum three years experience. Maintain plant records and quality control program during production of precast units. Make records available upon request. B. Erector: Company specializing in erecting the work of this Section approved by fabricator. C. Design precast concrete members under direct supervision of a lice lsed professional engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State of I Ewa. D. Welder: Qualified within previous 12 months in accordance with AWS D1 1. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ACI 318 and the 2015 International Building Code for desigi i load and on-site construction requirements. B. CONTRACTOR shall submit additional copies of shop drawings and structural calculations stamped by a State of Iowa licensed professional engineer for submittal to the Waterloo Building Department by CONSULTANT. 1.07 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section u'ider provisions of Section 01 31 00—Coordination, Field Engineering and Meetings. B. Discuss anchor and weld plate locations, sleeve locations, and cautions regarding cutting or core drilling. 1 .08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Lifting or Handling Devices shall be capable of supporting member in positions anticipated during manufacture, storage, transportation, and erection. B. Mark each member with date of production and final position in structure. C. Protect members to prevent staining, chipping, or spalling of concrete. -- Section 03 41 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1.09 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work of framing components not pretensioned but directly associated with the work of this section. B. Coordinate field cut openings with affected section. C. Coordinate location of hanger tabs and devices for mechanical and electrical work. D. Coordinate location of anchors to be placed in masonry walls. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 FABRICATORS A. The units shall be precast concrete beams and columns as fabricated by Mid-States Concrete Industries, Wells Concrete, or equal. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Materials shall comply with provisions of ACI 301. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Connecting and supporting devices shall be Type 304 stainless steel unless noted otherwise. B. Bearing pads shall be high-density plastic, 1/8 inches thick or neoprene as shown. Neoprene shall be minimum Shore A Durometer of 60. C. Grout shall be nonshrink, nonmetallic, minimum 7,500 psi at 28 days. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Conform to AWS D1.4., PCI MNL-116, PCI MNL-120, and PCI MNL-123. B. Embed anchors, inserts, plates, angles, and other items at locations indicated. C. Provide required openings with a dimension larger than 8 inches and embed accessories provided by other sections at indicated locations. 2.05 FINISHES A. Ensure exposed-to-view finish surfaces of precast concrete members are uniform in color and appearance. B. Cure members under identical conditions to develop required concrete quality, and minimize appearance blemishes such as nonuniformity, staining, or surface cracking. C. Precast Concrete to be painted shall be field abrasive blasted and painted per Section 09 91 00—Painting. Section 03 41 00-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 D. Exposed-to-View Finish (Finish B): Normal plant finish with fins and protrusions removed, ground edges and ends, flat face surfaces. 2.06 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Conform to PCI-Tolerances for Precast and Prestressed Concrete. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and field measuremen.s are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Verify supporting structure is ready to receive work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare support devices for the erection procedure and temporary bracing. 3.03 ERECTION A. Erect members without damage to structural capacity, shape, or finish. Replace or repair damaged members. B. Align and maintain uniform horizontal and end joints as erection progresses. C. Maintain temporary bracing in place until final connection is made. Prot( ct members from staining. D. Provide temporary lateral support to prevent bowing, twisting, or warping jf members. E. Adjust differential camber and elevation between precast members to tolerance before final attachment. F. Install bearing pads. G. Grout units as shown or required. H. Secure units in place. Perform welding, where shown, in accordance with AWS D1.1. :3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Erect members level and plumb within allowable tolerances. Conform to PCI MNL-116. Section 03 41 00-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.05 CUTTING OPENINGS A. Cooperation shall be extended to all trades in permitting the insertion of anchors, hangers, vents, electrical outlets, etc. Holes needed for such devices shall be cut in the field by the various trades. Cuts shall be made with a masonry saw or core drill. The various trades shall be present during installation of the units. All openings not dimensioned or shown on the drawings shall be located by the trades requiring the openings. All openings larger than 8 inches in any dimension shall be made by the precast supplier, and where necessary, hangers shall be furnished by the supplier. All spalling shall be repaired by the precast supplier. It is essential that units which will remain exposed have a neat finished surface. Particular care shall be given to appearance of holes and openings. END OF SECTION Section 03 41 00-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 03 41 13 PRECAST CONCRETE HOLLOW CORE PLANKS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Precast concrete hollow core planks. 2. Connection plates and hangers. 3. Grouting plank joint keys. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 sh ill govern work in this section. '1.02 REFERENCES A. ACI 318-Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. B. ASTM C150-Portland Cement. C. AWS D1.1-Structural Welding Code. D. AWS D1.4-Structural Welding Code-Reinforcing Steel. E. PCI-Manual For The Design of Hollow Core Slabs. F. PCI MNL-116—Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Productior of Precast and Prestressed Concrete Products. G. PCI MNL-120—Design Handbook—Precast and Prestressed Concrete. H. PCI MNL-123—Manual on Design of Connections for Precast Prestressed Concrete. I. PCI-Design Handbook-Precast and Prestressed Concrete. J. PCI-Tolerances for Precast and Prestressed Concrete. 1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Size components to withstand design loads in an unrestrained condition as follows. Roof Assembly: All dead loads plus 20 psf live loads plus concentrated loads shown on the drawings plus snow loads and snow drift loads shown on drawings. At pitched roof structures, the loads will be transmitted to the panels through the roof trusses or attic stud walls. Increased loading due to snow drifting at obstructions and changes in roof elevation shall be included in the design. B. Plank shall be designed in accordance with the PCI-Manual For The Desi jn of Hollow Core Slabs and PCI-Design Handbook. — Section 03 41 13-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. Plank shall be capable of resisting shear forces as a diaphragm. Diaphragm chords will be the masonry bond beams. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate plank locations, unit identification marks, connection details, edge conditions, bearing requirements, support conditions, dimensions, openings, openings intended to be field cut, and relationship to adjacent materials. B. Product Data: Indicate standard component configuration, design loads, deflections, and cambers. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Fabricator: Company specializing in manufacturing the work of this section with three years experience. Maintain plant records and quality control program during production of precast planks. Make records available upon request. B. Erector: Company specializing in erecting the work of this Section approved by fabricator. C. Design precast concrete members in accordance with PCI Manual For The Design of Hollow Core Slabs under direct supervision of a professional engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State of Iowa. D. Welder: Qualified within previous 12 months in accordance with AWS D1.1. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ACI 318 and the 2015 International Building Code for design load and on-site construction requirements. B. CONTRACTOR shall submit additional copies of shop drawings for submittal to the Waterloo Building Department by CONSULTANT. 1.07 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section under provisions of Section 01 31 00—Coordination, Field Engineering and Meetings. B. Discuss anchor and weld plate locations, sleeve locations, and cautions regarding cutting or core drilling. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Lifting or handling devices shall be capable of supporting member in positions anticipated during manufacture, storage, transportation, and erection. B. Mark each member with date of production and final position in structure. Section 03 41 13-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1.09 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work of framing components not post tensioned but directly associated with the work of this section. — B. Coordinate field cut openings with affected section. C. Coordinate location of hanger tabs and devices for mechanical and electrical work. D. Coordinate location of anchors to be placed in masonry walls. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 FABRICATORS A. The plank shall be prestressed hollow-core precast concrete plank as fabricated by Mid-State Concrete Industries, Wells Concrete, or equal. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Materials shall comply with provisions of ACI 318. B. Cement grout for grouting joints shall be one part Portland Cement per ASTM C150, three parts sand and water. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Connecting and supporting devices shall be 304 stainless steel unless noted otherwise. All embedded items and connecting and supporting devices, except steel reinforcing bars and prestressing strands in Structure 300—Chemical Storage Building shall be type 316 stainless steel. B. Bearing pads shall be high-density plastic, 1/8 inch thick. C. Caulk as approved by plank manufacturer. -- 2.04 FABRICATION A. Conform to AWS D1.4., PCI MNL-116, and PCI MNL-120, and PCI MNL-123. B. Embed anchors, inserts, plates, angles, and other items at locations indicated. C. Cut exposed ends flush. 2.05 FINISHES A. Plank to be painted shall be field abrasive blasted and painted as specified in Section 09 91 00—Painting. Section 03 41 13-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.06 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Conform to PCI-Tolerances for Precast and Prestressed Concrete. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that site conditions and supporting structure are ready to receive work and field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare support devices for the erection procedure and temporary bracing. 3.03 ERECTION A. Erect members without damage to structural capacity, shape, or finish. Replace or repair damaged members. B. Align and maintain uniform horizontal and end joints as erection progresses. C. Maintain temporary bracing in place until final connection is made. Protect members from staining. D. Install bearing pads at bearing ends of planks as indicated. E. Adjust differential camber between precast members to tolerance before final attachment and grouting. F. Adjust differential elevation between precast members to tolerance before final attachment. G. Grout plank joints, trowel smooth. Any grout that may have seeped through to the ceiling below shall be removed before it hardens. Grout shall also be placed between masonry and underside of roof plank in spaces created by roof plank camber over all exterior walls and bearing walls. On nonbearing interior walls, a void over 1/2 inch shall be filled with 1/2-inch expansion material and grout the remainder. This grout shall be applied following roofing. It is the intent that a space of 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch be left for caulking as required in Section 07 90 00—Caulking and Sealants. H. Underside of joints between planks that remain exposed shall be caulked as required in Section 07 90 00—Caulking and Sealants. I. Where open cores at end of planks are to remain exposed to view. The cores shall be grouted full for a minimum 6-inch depth to provide finished end of plank. J. Secure units in place. Perform welding, where shown, in accordance with AWS D1.1. 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Erect members level and plumb within allowable tolerances. Conform to PCI MNL-116. Section 03 41 13-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.05 CUTTING OPENINGS A. Cooperation shall be extended to all trades in permitting the insertion of anchors, hangers, vents, electrical outlets, etc. Holes needed for such devices shall be cut in the field by the various trades. Cuts shall be made with a masonry saw or core drill. The various trades shall be present during installation of the roof deck. All openings not dimensioned or shown on the drawings shall be located by the trades requiring the openings. All openings larger than 8 inches in any dimension shall be made by the roof slab supplier, and where necessary, hangers shall be furnished by the supplier. All spalling shall be repaired by the roof plank supplier prior to caulking. It is essential that plank which will remain exposed from below have a neat finished surface. Particular care shall be given to appearance of holes and openings. END OF SECTION -- Section 03 41 13-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 04 01 20 MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Repointing mortar joints. 2. Replacement of damaged brick masonry. 3. Cleaning existing masonry. B. Related sections and divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. C. Allowance: At existing WAS Storage Building and Dewatering Building, CONTRACTOR shall include the assumed quantities for the various types of repair. Cash Allowance unit prices shall include all materials, labor, and incidental items associated with completing repairs. Payment to CONTRACTOR for repairs will be adjusted, add or deduct, based on the actual repairs performed (more or less than quantities below) and the Cash Allowance unit price for the type of repair in question. Before any work included in this allowance begins, CONTRACTOR and CONSULTANT shall agree on the extent of the work. Masonry work such as infill of existing openings, repairs after installation of new lintels, etc., that are noted on the drawings shall be included in the Lump Sum Bid and are not part of this allowance. D. Allowance Quantities: 1. 100% Repointing: 8,000 square feet of wall. 2. <100% Repointing: 1,000 linear feet of mortar joints. 3. Brick Replacement: 250 square feet of brick in-place. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402—Building Requirements for Masonry Structures; American Concrete Institute International; 2002. B. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602—Specification for Masonry Structures; American Concrete Institute International; 2002. C. IMIAWC (CW)—Recommended Practices & Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction; International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council; 1993. D. IMIAWC (HW)—Recommended Practices & Guide Specifications for Hot Weather Masonry Construction; International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council; current edition. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data on mortar mixes. Section 04 01 20-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1 .04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with provisions of ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 and ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602, except where exceeded by requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Restorer: Company specializing in masonry restoration with minimum five years of documented experience on historic masonry buildings. C. CONTRACTOR shall provide approximately a 3-foot by 3-foot test patch area before work begins to establish quality of work for project. 1.05 PREINSTALLATION MEETING A. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section. B. Review conditions of installation, installation procedures, and coordination with related work. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Cold Weather Requirements: Comply with recommendations of IMIAWC (CW). B. Hot Weather Requirements: Comply with IMIAWC Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Hot Weather Masonry Construction. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Perform repointing after cleaning masonry surfaces. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 CLEANING MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agent: Detergent, solvent cleaner, or acid-solution type. 2.02 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1; color as required to produce approved color sample. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C 144. D. Pigments for Colored Mortar: Iron or chromium oxides with demonstrated stability and colorfastness. E. Sand: ASTM C 144. F. Water: Clean and potable. G. Additives: None permitted. — Section 04 01 20-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces to be cleaned and restored are ready for work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protect surrounding elements from damage because of restoration procedures. B. Carefully remove and store removable items located in areas to be restored; reinstall upon completion. C. Separate areas to be protected from restoration areas using means adequate to prevent damage. D. Cover existing landscaping with tarpaulins or similar covers. E. Mask immediately adjacent surfaces with material that will withstand cleaning and restoration procedures. 3.03 REBUILDING A. Cut out damaged and deteriorated masonry with care in a manner to prevent damage to any adjacent remaining materials. B. Cut away loose or unsound adjoining masonry or mortar to provide firm and solid bearing for new work. C. Mortar Mix: ASTM C 270, using the Proportion Specification. Colored to match existing work. D. Exterior, loadbearing masonry: Type N. E. Mixing: Use mechanical batch mixer and comply with referenced standards. F. Ensure that anchors, ties, reinforcing, stone cramps and dowels, and flashings are correctly located and built in. G. Install built-in masonry work to match and align with existing, with joints and coursing true and level, faces plumb and in line. Build in all openings, accessories and fittings. 3.04 REPOINTING A. All exterior masonry on the Dewatering Building (Structure 330) and WAS Storage Building (Structure 170) that is to remain shall be inspected for cracks or "defective" mortar joints. Any mortar joint that is loose, porous, crumbled, cracked, badly weathered (deeper than 1/4 inch behind masonry surface), unbonded to adjacent masonry units, or a potential source of leakage shall be deemed "defective." "Hairline" cracks in the mortar are not considered "defective." B. All cracks and "defective" mortar joints shall be repointed. Section 04 01 20-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. Cut out loose or disintegrated mortar in joints so that the depth equals or exceeds two times the mortar joint thickness or until sound mortar is reached. D. Use power tools only after test cuts determine no damage to masonry units will result. E. Do not damage masonry units. F. When cutting is complete; remove dust and loose material by brushing/with water jet/air jet. G. Premoisten joint and apply mortar. Pack tightly. Form a smooth, compact concave joint to match existing. H. Mortar mix (exterior, nonloadbearing masonry): ASTM C 270, Type N, using the Proportion Specification. Colored to match existing work. I. Prehydrate mortar. J. Mixing: Use mechanical batch mixer and comply with referenced standards. K. Moist-cure for 72 hours. L. Allowances as specified shall apply to this work. 3.05 CLEANING EXISTING MASONRY A. Medium- or Low-Pressure Steam Cleaning: Apply pressure to masonry surfaces, maintaining uniform depth and surface texture throughout. B. Use detergent, solvent, acid solution, or other means to clean areas where steam cleaning does not work. 3.06 PROGRESS AND FINAL CLEANING A. Immediately remove stains, efflorescence, or other excess resulting from the work of this section. B. Remove excess mortar, smears, and droppings as work proceeds and upon completion. C. Clean surrounding surfaces. END OF SECTION Section 04 01 20-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 04 05 13 MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. The work includes mortar and grout for masonry. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Iowa State Building Code (2015 IBC). B. ASTM C91—Masonry Cement. C. ASTM C144—Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. D. ASTM C150—Portland Cement. E. ASTM C207—Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. F. ASTM C404—Aggregates for Masonry Grout. G. ASTM C476—Grout for Masonry H. ASTM C979—Pigments for Integrally Colored Mortar/Concrete. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Submit information on Portland cement, integral waterproofing compound, and hydrated lime for mortar. Include design mix with proportions of materials being used. Submit gradation on aggregates. C. Submit design mix for grout including gradation of aggregates. D. Manufacturer's certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. All cement shall be stored in a dry, weatherproof, properly ventilated structure which will protect it from dampness and freezing. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. See Section 04 20 00—Unit Masonry System, for cold weather requirements. Section 04 05 13-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 MORTAR A. Mortar shall be Type S Portland cement-lime mortar or masonry cement mortar with proportion restrictions as stated in the Iowa State Building Code. Provide integral waterproofing compound in mortar for all exterior masonry mortar. B. Portland cement shall conform to ASTM C150, Type I or III. C. Hydrated lime shall conform to ASTM C207, Type S. D. Masonry cement shall conform to ASTM C91. E. Integral waterproofing compound shall be Dry-Block by W.R. Grace Company, or equal. F. Mortar aggregate for ordinary tile, brick, stone, and block shall consist of clean, sharp sand, conforming to ASTM C144. The sand shall be graded within the following limits: Sieve Number Percent by Weight Passing 4 100 8 95 to 100 16 70 to 100 30 40 to 75 50 10to35 100 2to 15 200 --- G. Sand from any one source shall not vary over the extreme limits shown above. For unusually thin joints, such as occur with a unit having cut or ground edges, the aggregate used shall conform to these specifications except that 95% shall pass a No. 16 sieve. H. Water used in mixing water shall be clean and free of injurious materials. I. Mortar shall be thoroughly mixed until of uniform color and consistency. Only sufficient mortar to meet the immediate requirements of the work shall be mixed at one time. No mortar shall be retempered after it has begun to set, and no partially set mortar shall be used. No antifreeze material shall be used in the mortar to lower the freezing point. J. Colored mortar shall be provided for split face block mortar. Colored mortar shall be Western Colored Masons Blend, premixed and colored as manufactured by Western Lime and Cement Company or equal. Color shall be selected by CITY. White cement and sand will not be required. 2.02 GROUT A. Grout shall conform to ASTM C476—Mortar and Grout for Reinforced Masonry. B. Aggregates shall conform to ASTM C404—Aggregates for Masonry Grout. Section 04 05 13-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. Grout shall have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 2,500 psi with the following proportions: 1. Fine Grout: 1 Portland Cement: 0 to 1/10 lime: 2 1/2 to 3 fine aggregate. 2. Coarse Grout: 1 Portland Cement: 0 to 1/10 lime: 2 1/2 to 3 fine aggregate: 1 to 2 coarse aggregate. D. Fine grout shall be used in spaces with least horizontal dimension greater than 3/4 inches and less than 2 1/2 inches. Coarse grout shall be used in all spaces with least dimensions 2 1/2 inches or greater. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Brace masonry for wet grout pressure. B. Work grout into masonry cores and cavities. C. Where joints occur in grout, they shall be made 2 inches below the block joint so that a key is provided. D. Grout full masonry walls from top of floor to underside of all lintels at openings for a distance of 16 inches adjacent to each side of opening, unless shown otherwise on the drawings. END OF SECTION Section 04 05 13-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Concrete block. 2. Brick. 3. Fluted split-face block. 4. Reinforcement, anchorage, control joints, and accessories. 5. Cold weather requirements. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Iowa State Building Code (2015 IBC). B. ASTM C67—Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile. C. ASTM C90—Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units. D. ASTM C216—Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale). E. ASTM C744—Standard Specification for Prefaced Concrete and Calcium Silicate Masonry Units. F. UL—Fire Resistance Directory. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Variation from the plumb in the lines and surfaces of columns and walls shall not exceed 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in a story height or 20 feet maximum or 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. Variation from plumb for external corners, expansion joints, and other conspicuous lines shall not exceed 1/4 inch in any story or 20 feet maximum or 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. B. Variation from the level of the grades indicated on the drawing for exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines shall not exceed 1/4 inch in any bay or 20 feet or 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. C. Variation of the linear building line from an established position in plan and related portion of columns, walls, and partitions shall not exceed 1/2 inch in any bar or 20 feet maximum or 3/4 inch in 40 feet or more. D. Variation in cross-sectional dimensions of columns and thickness of walls shall not exceed minus 1/4 inch or plus 1/2 inch from the dimensions indicated on the drawings. Section 04 20 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1.04 MOCKUP A. Provide a 4-foot by 4-foot mockup panel of masonry, including anchor accessories and flashings, before any masonry work begins. Location will be indicated by CITY. Mockup panel shall be approved by CITY and used as a sample of the quality of work to be expected on the job. Mockup panel may not remain as part of the work. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Masonry units, when delivered to the site, shall be thoroughly cured and shall be dry. When stored on the site, they shall not be in contact with the ground, shall be kept clean, and shall be covered with waterproof cover. 1.06 COLD WEATHER REQUIREMENTS A. All masonry units delivered to use in freezing weather shall be fully protected by a weathertight covering to prevent accumulation of ice on the units. Loose board covering will not be permitted. B. Cold Weather Protection: 1. Remove any ice or snow formed on masonry bed by carefully applying heat until top surface is dry to the touch. 2. Remove all masonry determined to be frozen or damaged by freezing conditions. 3. Perform the following construction procedure while the work is progressing. When air temperature is from 40°F (4°C) to 32°F (0°C), heat sand or mixing water to produce mortar temperature between 40°F (4°C) and 120°F (49°C): a. When air temperature is from 32°F (0°C) to 25°F (-4°C), heat sand or water to produce mortar temperature between 40°F (4°C) and 120°F (49°C); maintain temperature of mortar on boards above freezing. b. When air temperature is from 25°F(-4°C)to 20°F (-7°C), heat sand and mixing water to produce mortar temperatures between 40°F (4°C) and 120°F (49°C); maintain temperature of mortar on boards above freezing; use salamanders or other heat sources on both sides of walls under construction; use wind breaks when wind is in excess of 15 mph. c. When air temperature is from 20°F (-7°C) and below, heat sand and mixing water to produce mortar temperatures between 40°F (4°C) and 120°F (49°C); provide enclosures and auxiliary heat to maintain air temperature above 32°F (0°C); do not lay units which have a surface temperature of 20°F (-7°C). 4. Perform the following protections for completed masonry and masonry not being worked on: a. When the mean daily air temperature is from 40°F (4°C) to 32°F (0°C), protect masonry from rain or snow for at least 24 hours by covering with weather-restrictive membrane. b. When the mean daily air temperature is from 32°F (0°C) to 25°F (-4°C), completely cover masonry with weather-restrictive membrane for at least 24 hours. c. When the mean daily air temperature is from 25°F (-4°C) to 20°F (-7°C), completely cover masonry with insulating blankets or similar protection for at least 24 hours. d. When mean daily temperature is 20°F (-7°C) and below, maintain masonry temperature above 32°F (0°C) for 24 hours using enclosures, blankets, and supplementary heat. Section 04 20 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE BLOCK A. Concrete block shall be load bearing and shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C90 and the Iowa State Building Code. Bond shall be running bond. Concrete block shall be the two-cell type and shall be made with normal weight aggregate. B. Unless otherwise indicated, interior concrete block at window sills and lintels, pilasters, and the top course of walls at roof lines shall be constructed of solid concrete block, lintel block filled with grout, or the cores of the block filled with grout. Interior block at window sills shall be solid concrete block unless otherwise noted. Bullnose block shall be used at all door, window, and wall corners that remain exposed. C. All interior concrete block walls shall extend to the underside of roof deck or floor above unless noted otherwise. D. Provide sash units with integral dovetail slots at masonry control joints. 2.02 BRICK A. Face brick shall be ASTM C216, latest edition, Grade SW, Type FBS, made from clay, shale, fine clay, or mixture thereof.All brick shall be free from cracks, laminations, and other defects that may interfere with proper laying of brick or impair the strength or permanence of the structure. B. A certificate of conformance as to grade and type shall be supplied by the manufacturer. C. CONTRACTOR shall submit brick samples to CONSULTANT for selection. The bricks to be used for repair of and additions to existing structures shall match the existing brick size, bond, and color. D. Provide all brick masonry to complete work. 2.03 DECORATIVE CONCRETE BLOCK A. Fluted Split-Face Block: 1. Fluted face units shall be used for the Chemical Storage Building (Structure 300) and WAS Storage Building (Structure 170). Smooth face units shall be used where shown on the drawings. Nominal face size of units shall be 8 inches by 16 inches. Nominal thickness shall be as shown on the drawings. 2. Fluted blocks shall have eight-fluted exposed aggregate face with 1/4-inch deep grooves. Product shall be Splyt Face units by King's Material, Inc., or equal. 3. The block shall be made with an integral coloring compound and an integral waterproofing compound. The block shall be made with normal weight aggregate and shall meet ASTM C33 and ASTM C90. 4. The integral waterproofing compound shall be DRY-BLOCK SYSTEM, Block Admixture as manufactured by W.R. Grace & Co., Cambridge, MA, or equal. The admixture manufacturer shall determine the amount of compound to be used. The admixture used in the block shall be of the same manufacture as used in the mortar. Section 04 20 00-3 4463.004!City Contract No.994 5. Block colors and flute geometry shall match existing Digester Feed Building (Structure 190). 2.04 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. For concrete block walls and concrete facing brick and block, masonry wall reinforcement shall be 220 Ladder-Mesh manufactured by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc., Ladder Wire, manufactured by Wire-Bond, or equal. B. For cavity walls, masonry wall reinforcement shall be 265 Ladder Adjustable or manufactured by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc., Ladder Adjustable Tab by Wire-Bond, or equal. C. Wall reinforcement and ties shall be hot-dipped galvanized having a minimum 1.50 ounce/square foot zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A153 Class B2. D. Side rods shall be 9 gauge wire, and cross rods and tabs shall be 9 gauge wire. Maximum spacing of tabs shall be 24 inches. E. Prefabricated corner and tee sections shall be used to form continuous reinforcement around corners and for anchoring abutting walls and partitions. F. Masonry Ties To Concrete Backing: For tying masonry to concrete, unless noted otherwise, use individual dove-tail flat bar or wire anchors, the equivalent of not less than 3/16-inch-diameter steel rods, inserted in slots built into concrete with one tie for not more than 4 1/2 square feet of wall area. Ties in alternate courses shall be staggered. The maximum vertical distance shall not exceed 16 inches. The maximum horizontal distance shall not exceed 36 inches. Ties shall be galvanized. G. Masonry Ties to Stud Walls: Ties shall be minimum 22 gauge corrugated sheet steel, 7/8 inch wide with one tie per 2 square feet of wall area. H. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Where vertical reinforcing bars are required, provide bar positioners by Hohmann and Barnard, or equal. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Cellular or honeycomb cell vents, 2 1/2 inches high, shall be provided at weep holes. Cell vents shall be UV-resistant polypropylene, QV-Quadro-Vent, or equal. B. Vertical expansion control joints shall be located as shown on the drawings. Control joints shall be constructed with a factory-extruded section of rubber equal to RS Series—Rubber Control Joint by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc., Rubber Control Joint by Wire-Bond, or equal, and shall extend for the entire height of the wall. Care shall be taken to ensure that the gap is free of mortar or debris. Control joint shall be caulked on exposed faces with caulk of a color to match mortar. C. See Section 07 62 00—Flashing and Sheet Metal for masonry flashing specifications. D. See Section 07 26 00—Vapor and Air Barrier for air barrier on masonry walls. Section 04 20 00-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 MASONRY WORKMANSHIP A. All masonry shall be laid plumb and true to lines. Brick shall be laid with complete full mortar joints. Mortar beds shall be spread smooth or only slightly furrowed. The ends of brick shall — be buttered with sufficient mortar to fill the end joint. B. All masonry shall be laid in running bond, unless specified otherwise. C. Avoid over-plumbing and pounding of the corners and jambs to fit stretcher units after being set in position. Where an adjustment must be made after the mortar has started to harden, the mortar shall be removed and replaced with fresh mortar. D. In building cavity walls, the cavity shall be kept clean by slightly beveling the mortar bed to incline toward the cavity or by placing wood strips with attached wire pulls on the metal ties. The strips shall be withdrawn and cleaned before placing the next row of metal ties. Any mortar fins that protrude into the cavity space as the wall is built shall be troweled flat onto the inner face of the wythe. E. Where cutting of exposed masonry is necessary, the cuts shall be made with a motor-driven masonry saw or by other methods that provide cuts that are straight and True. F. Where flashing is to be laid on or against masonry, the surface of the masonry shall be smooth and free from projections that might puncture the flashing material. Through-wall flashing shall be placed on a bed of mortar, and mortar shall be placed above the flashing. G. Weep holes spaced 32 inches on center 2 1/2 inches high shall be provided in the first course immediately above all flashing. Weep holes shall be kept free of mortar droppings. H. Outside joints around the perimeter of exterior door and window frames or other wall openings shall be not less than 1/4 inch nor more than 3/8 inch wide and shall be cleaned out to a uniform depth of at least 3/4 inch ready for placement of caulk. I. All walls shall be adequately braced until they are completed and anchored to the roof construction. J. All brick having initial rates of absorption in excess of 0.25 ounce per square inch per minute shall be wetted sufficiently so that the rate of absorption when laid does not exceed this amount.Wetting of units shall be such so that each unit is nearly saturated, surface dry when laid. During freezing weather, units that require wetting shall be sprinkled with warm water just before laying. 3.02 MORTAR JOINTS _ A. All joints shall be laid plumb to lines. Unless specified otherwise, mortar beds shall be full 3/8 inch thick and shall be spread smooth or only slightly furrowed. Vertical joints shall be shoved not over 3/8 inch thick, unless otherwise shown. All joints shall be completely filled. B. Interior and exterior joints shall be tooled concave. All joints shall be tooled to uniform depth and shall be straight and true. Mortar joints shall be cut flush with masonry where rigid thermal insulation will be applied to interior masonry surfaces. Section 04 20 00-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.03 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Reinforcement shall be installed in the first and second bed joint 8 inches apart immediately above lintels and below sills at openings. Elsewhere, spacing shall be at 16-inch vertical intervals or as shown on the drawings. Reinforcement in the second joint above and below openings shall extend 2 feet beyond the jambs. All other reinforcing shall be continuous. This spacing shall also apply to concrete brick and block facing. B. Side rods shall be lapped 6 inches minimum at splices. Reinforcement units shall be of widths required for wall thicknesses as shown. Reinforcement shall be placed to allow for a 5/8-inch mortar cover on the exterior face of walls and 1/2-inch mortar cover on interior faces. C. Vertical reinforcing bars shall be installed using prefabricated bar positioners. Provide one positioner at the top of the first course of block and one additional positioner at a maximum spacing of 200 bar diameters. 3.04 BUILT-IN WORK A. As work progresses, install all built-in work (such as window and door frames, anchor bolts, plates, and lintels) to be provided by other sections. B. Install built-in items plumb and level. C. Bed anchors of metal door frames in adjacent mortar joints. Grout all steel door frames full with mortar except those called for to be "removable." D. Do not use built-in organic materials subject to deterioration. E. Steel members embedded in exterior masonry shall be "buttered" with not less than 1/2 inch of setting mortar on all surfaces. 3.05 JOINING OF WORK A. Where fresh masonry joins masonry that is partially set or totally set, the exposed surface of the set masonry shall be cleaned and lightly wetted so as to obtain the best possible bond with the new work. All loose brick and mortar shall be removed. If it becomes necessary to "stop-off" a horizontal run of masonry, this shall be done only by racking back brick in each course, and if grout is used, stopping grout 4 inches back of the rack. Toothing will not be permitted. 3.06 PROTECTION OF WORK A. During erection, all walls shall be kept dry by covering at the end of each day or shutdown period with a canvas or waterproof covering. Partially completed walls not being worked on shall be similarly protected at all times. All covering shall overhang at least 2 feet on each side of the wall and shall be securely anchored. Section 04 20 00-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.07 MASONRY CONTROL JOINTS A. Provide vertical masonry control joints as detailed on the drawings. B. Where control joint locations are not shown on the drawings, they shall be provided as follows: — 1. Brick veneer: a. Distance from wall corner (maximum): at or near corners. b. Spacing between joints (maximum): 25 feet for panels without openings; 20 feet for panels with openings. c. Additional locations: at changes in wall height. 2. Block veneer: a. Distance from wall corner (maximum): at inside corners and within 4 inches of outside corners. b. Spacing between joints (maximum): 20 feet or 1.5 times veneer height, whichever is less. c. Additional locations: at changes in wall height. 3. Block backup walls and single-wythe block walls: a. Distance from wall corner or intersection (maximum): 12 feet or 0.75 times wall height, whichever is less. b. Spacing between joints: 25 feet or 1.5 times wall height, whichever is less. c. Additional locations: at changes in wall height, at steps on top of foundation walls, and at junctions between shallow and deeper. C. Where control joint locations are not shown on the drawings, joints shall be located at one or both edges of door, window, and louver openings where non-masonry lintels are scheduled. D. Where control joints in concrete masonry block backup walls or concrete masonry, brick or block veneers are not shown on the drawings. Joints shall be located approximately halfway between doors, windows, louver openings, and wall corners less than 12 feet apart or a minimum of 6 feet from the opening or corner and a minimum of 1-foot 4 inches where possible where masonry lintels are scheduled. E. Where control joints in clay brick veneer are not shown on drawings, joints shall be located at the edge of all door, window, and louver openings, and between 2 feet and 6 feet from wall corners. F. Where control joints are not shown on the drawings, joints shall be located at all changes in wall height in all masonry products. 3.08 CLEANING NEW WORK A. Masonry faces to remain exposed shall be wiped with a damp cloth as the work progresses and thoroughly cleaned and pointed upon completion. If stiff brushes and water will not suffice, the surface shall be thoroughly wetted with plain water and then scrubbed with a 5% or 10% solution of hydrochloric acid.Alternatively, a commercial cleaner such as Sure Klean, or equal, may be used. Immediately after, the surface shall be washed to remove all traces of acid. All surfaces not being cleaned shall be protected from the acid. All mortar shall be removed from surfaces other than masonry. -.. Section 04 20 00-7 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.09 EXISTING MASONRY A. Openings in existing walls which are to be filled shall be filled with masonry units to match existing. B. Where possible, new openings in existing masonry shall be sawcut. C. Provide all necessary removals and repairs required for installation of new louvers, fans, openings, etc. D. At lintel bearings of all new openings, grout masonry full for 16 inches full height on both sides of opening. E. Repair all masonry damaged during construction. F. All existing joints in structures to receive repairs or additions, interior and exterior, shall be pointed. Pointing mortar shall be prehydrated Type N. All adjacent surfaces shall be dampened. Joints shall be finished to match existing. G. All existing masonry which will remain exposed shall be cleaned as specified for new masonry. H. New units shall be toothed into existing units. I. Where toothing is not practical or desirable, joint reinforcing may be drilled and anchored into existing mortar joints and carried into new units. J. Masonry reinforcing shall be carried through new units. END OF SECTION Section 04 20 00-8 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Structural carbon steel framing members. 2. Steel base plates and bearing plates. _ 3. Structural steel bolted connections and anchor bolts. 4. Welding of structural steel. 5. Galvanizing of structural steel. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. AISC—Code of Standard Practice—Manual of Steel Construction—Allowable Stress Design (ASD). B. ASTM A36/A36M—Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. C. ASTM A53—Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless. D. ASTM A123—Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. E. ASTM A143—Standard Practice for Safeguarding Against Embrittlement of Hot-Dip Galvanized Structural Steel Products and Procedure for Detecting Embrittlement. F. ASTM A153—Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. G. ASTM A307—Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60000 PSI Tensile Strength. H. ASTM A325—Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. I. ASTM A384—Standard Practice for Safeguarding Against Warpage anc Distortion During Hot-Dip Galvanizing of Steel Assemblies. J. ASTM A385—Standard Practice for Providing High-Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot-Dip). K. ASTM A500—Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. Section 05 12 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 L. ASTM A780—Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings. M. ASTM A992/A992M—Standard Specification for Structural Steel. N. AWS A2.4—Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination. O. AWS D1.1—Structural Welding Code. P. SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council)—Painting Manual. 1.03 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Provide shop drawings with complete details and schedules for fabrication and shop assembly of members. 1. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. .� 2. Indicate welds by AWS symbols, and show size, length, and type of weld. 3. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages. 4. Identify details by reference to sheet and detail number on the drawings. C. Mill Test Reports: Submit indicating structural strength and composition. D. Unless shown otherwise, all connections shall be designed and detailed by the fabricator to support one-half of the total uniform load capacity shown in the tables for uniform load constants in the AISC Specifications. E. Except as shown otherwise, structural steel details shall conform to standard practice as illustrated in Structural Shop Drafting Textbook of the AISC. F. Indicate all temporary bracing or cabling required to stabilize the structural frame during erection. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC Code of Standard Practice. B. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS "Standard Qualifications Procedures." B. CONTRACTOR shall design connections not detailed on the drawings under direct supervision of a professional engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State of Iowa. Provide stamped drawings and calculations for all connections. Section 05 12 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver all materials to job site properly marked to identify the structure for which it is intended and at such intervals to insure uninterrupted progress of the work. Marking shall correspond to markings indicated on the shop drawings. B. Store all members off the ground using pallets, platforms, or other supports. C. Do not store materials on the structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to the members of the supporting structures. D. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary at no additional cost to CITY. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Structural Steel Members: 1. ASTM A36/A36M (channels, angles, plates). 2. ASTM A992-50 (wide flange sections). B. Structural Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B. C. Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B. D. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A307 or ASTM A325, galvanized it accordance with ASTM A123 and A153. E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554 Grade 36. F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS D1.1; E70XX electrodes. For ASTM A992 steel and any other steel with 50 ksi or greater yield strength, use only E7018 or other E70XX electrodes specifically permitted by AWS D1.1. G. Galvanizing: ASTM A123 and A153 for structural steel plates, shapes and bars, and structural steel tubing. ASTM A53 for steel pipe. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fabrication and Assembly: 1. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on the approved shop drawings. _ 2. Properly mark and match-mark materials for field assembly and for identification as to structure and site for which intended. 3. Fabricate for delivery sequence which will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials. 4. Where finishing is required, complete the assembly, including welding of units, before start of finishing operation. 5. Provide finish surfaces of members exposed in the final structure free of markings, burrs, and other defects. Section 05 12 00-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. Connections: 1. Bolts and washers of all types and sizes shall be provided for completion of all field erection. 2. Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance, and quality of welds used in correcting welded work. 3. Assemble and weld built-up sections to produce true alignment of axes without warp. 4. Welding shall be done by the shielded arc process. 5. All welds shall be chipped, ground smooth, and primed immediately after fabrication. C. Holes for Other Work: 1. Provide holes for securing other work to structural steel framing and for the passage of other work through steel framing members as indicated. 2. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing and other specialty items as shown to receive other work. 3. Drill, cut, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. 4. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. 5. Drill holes in all bearing plates. 2.03 FINISHES A. Before shipping, prepare structural component surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 10 as specified in Section 09 91 00—Painting. B. Immediately after surface preparation, shop prime structural steel members in accordance with Section 09 91 00—Painting. Do not prime surfaces that will be field-welded, galvanized, or high-strength bolted with friction-type connection. C. Surfaces which will be inaccessible after assembly or erection shall be field finish coated prior to assembly or erection. D. Do not prime surfaces where galvanizing or field welding is required. E. Galvanizing: 1. All items designated to be galvanized, except piping, shall be hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM Specification A123 and A153. Piping shall be hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A53. Furnish a Certificate of Compliance stating that the galvanizing complies with ASTM Specifications and Standards and all other applicable requirements specified herein. 2. Fabrication of items to be galvanized shall be in accordance with ASTM A143, A384, and A385. Structural steel shall be fabricated generally in accordance with Class 1 guidelines as shown in "Recommended Details for Galvanized Structures" as published by the American Hot Dip Galvanizer's Association, Inc. 3. Galvanized items shall be handled, transported, and stored to prevent damage or staining to the coating. Maintain adequate ventilation and continuous drainage. 4. Silicon content for steel to be hot-dipped galvanized shall be in the range of 0 to 0.04%. 5. Steel work shall be precleaned utilizing a caustic bath, acid pickle and flux, or shall be blast cleaned and fluxed. In either case, all surface contaminants and coatings shall be removed. 6. All welding shall be performed in accordance with the American Welding Society publication D19.0-72, "Welding Zinc Coated Steel." All uncoated weld areas shall be touched up. Section 05 12 00-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION - A. Correct conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work. B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 ERECTION A. General: Comply with AISC Specifications and Code of Standard Practice and as specified herein. B. Surveys: - 1. Establish permanent bench marks necessary for the accurate erection of structural steel. 2. Check elevations of concrete and masonry, bearing surfaces, and locations of anchor bolts and similar items before erection proceeds. C. Temporary Shoring and Bracing: - 1. Provide temporary shoring and bracing members with connection of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads. 2. Provide temporary guidelines to achieve proper alignment of the structures as erection proceeds. 3. Remove temporary connections and members when permanent members are in place and final connections are made. - D. Anchor Bolts: 1. Provide anchor bolts and other connectors for securing structural steel to foundations and other in-place work. 2. Provide templates and other devices as needed for the presetting of bolts and other anchors to accurate locations. E. Setting Bases and Bearing Plates: 1. Clean bearing surfaces free from bond-reducing materials and then roughen to improve bond to surface. 2. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for structural members using wedges, leveling nuts, or other adjusting devices. 3. Tighten anchor bolts after the supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with the edges of the base or bearing plates prior to packing with grout. 4. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases to ensure that no voids remain. 5. Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure in strict compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. F. Field Assembly: 1. Set structural frames accurately to the lines and elevations indicated. Align and adjust the various members forming a part of a complete frame or structure before fastening permanently. -- Section 05 12 00-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2. Clean the bearing surfaces and other surfaces which will be in permanent contact before assembly. 3. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevation and alignment. 4. Level and plumb individual members of the structure within specified AISC tolerances. 5. Comply with AISC Specifications for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. G. Gas Cutting:1. Do not use gas cutting torches in the field for correcting fabricating errors in the structural framing. 2. Cutting will be permitted only on secondary members which are not under stress as acceptable to CONSULTANT. 3. When gas cutting is permitted, finish the sections equal to the sheared appearance. H. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop-primed or galvanized, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. I. Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of weld made, and methods in correcting welding work. 3.03 GALVANIZING REPAIR A. Areas damaged by welding, flame-cutting or during handling, transport, or erection shall be repaired by one of the following methods whenever damage exceeds 3/16 inches in width. 1. Cold Galvanizing Compound: a. Surfaces to be reconditioned with zinc-rich paint shall be clean, dry, and free of oil, grease, and corrosion products. -� b. Areas to be repaired shall be power disc-sanded to bright metal. To ensure that a smooth reconditioned coating can be effected, surface preparation shall extend into the undamaged galvanized coating. c. Touchup paint shall be an organic cold-galvanized compound having a minimum of 94% zinc dust in the dry film. d. The paint shall be spray- or brush-applied in multiple coats until a dry film thickness of 8 mils minimum has been achieved. A finish coat of aluminum paint shall be applied to provide a color blend with the surrounding galvanizing. e. Coating thickness shall be verified by measurements with a magnetic or electromagnetic gauge. 2. Zinc-Based Solder: a. Surfaces to be reconditioned with zinc-based solder shall be clean, dry, and free of oil, grease, and corrosion products. b. Areas to be repaired shall be wire brushed. c. Heat shall be applied slowly and broadly close to but not directly onto the area to be repaired. The zinc-based solder rod shall be rubbed onto the heated metal until the rod begins to melt. A flexible blade or wire brush shall be used to spread the melt over the area to be covered. The zinc-based solder shall be applied in a minimum thickness of 2 mils. d. Coating thickness shall be verified by measurements with a magnetic or electromagnetic gauge. Section 05 12 00-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. CONTRACTOR shall inspect all field-bolted connections in accordance with the AISC Specifications. B. Field Welding: 1. CONTRACTOR shall visually inspect all welds and test during erection of structural steel. 2. CONTRACTOR shall certify welders and conduct inspections and tests as required by applicable standards. 3. CONTRACTOR shall record types and locations of defects found ar d record the work required and performed to correct deficiencies. C. Correction: 1. Correct deficiencies in structural steel work which inspections and test reports have indicated to be not in compliance with the specified requirements. 2. CONTRACTOR shall perform all additional testing required to show compliance of corrected work. END OF SECTION -- Section 05 12 00-7 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 05 30 00 METAL DECKING PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work included: 1. Steel roof decking. 2. Accessories. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. AISI Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. B. AWS D1.1—Structural Welding Code. C. SDI Steel Roof Deck Design Manual. D. Factory Mutual "Loss Prevention Data, 1-28." �. E. ASTM A653—Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. F. ASTM A924—Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic- Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. 1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Metal roof deck shall be designed to support uniform loads specified in SDI load tables for gauge, deck type, and spans shown or specified. B. Deck shall also be designed for SDI construction and concentrated loads. C. Deck shall serve as a diaphragm to resist wind loads. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of decking and accessories, including paint. B. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed drawings suitable for erection purposes showing layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, accessories at openings and edges, size and location of supporting elements, and end and side lap information. Section 05 30 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualification of Welding Work: Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure." PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Steel for galvanized metal deck units shall conform to ASTM A653, Grade A. — B. Sheet metal accessories shall conform to ASTM A653, commercial quality, galvanized. C. Galvanizing shall conform to ASTM A924, G 90. D. Flexible closure strips shall be manufacturer's standard vulcanized, closed cell, synthetic rubber. E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc-dust content paint for repair of damaged galvanized surfaces complying with MIL-P-21035 (Ships). 2.02 FABRICATION A. General: Form deck units in lengths to span three or more supports; however, make provisions for warped roof surface due to slopes. B. Roof deck units shall be 22 gauge wide-rib deck. Depth of 1 1/2 inches; ribs spaced 6 inches o.c.; width of rib opening at roof surface not more than 2 1/2 inches; width of bottom rib surface not less than 1 inch. Comply with SDI "Basic Design Requirements" and Factory Mutual requirements for Class I insulated steel deck roofs. Deck shall be galvanized. C. Steel Closure Strips: 20 gauge, steel specified. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which steel decking is to be installed and notify in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner. — 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Install deck units and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's requirements and as follows: — 1. Steel roof decking work shall be completed in accordance with requirements of the Steel Deck Institute as published in the Steel Roof Deck Design Manual No. 19. Comply with applicable requirements of Factory Mutual "1-28, Class I." — Section 05 30 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2. Attachment of decking to structure shall be accomplished by welding: a. Attachment shall be made to develop diaphragm action. b. Weld using welding washers, if required, for deck gauge. c. Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the drawings, roof deck units shall be fastened to steel supporting members by not less than 5/8-inch-diameter fusion welds or elongated welds of equal strength spaced at a 36/5 pattern with a minimum of two welds per unit at each support. B. Decking shall be placed with ribs perpendicular to the supports unless otherwise noted on the drawings. C. Side Lap Connections: Mechanically fasten side laps at spacing required by diaphragm design or by factory manual. Provide a minimum of two side lap connections per span. D. Closure Strips: Provide steel closure strips as necessary at openings and edges of deck to ensure proper attachment of roof insulation at those locations. E. Touchup Painting: After decking installation, clean scarred areas, welds, and rust spots on both surfaces of the decking, and touchup galvanized surfaces with galvanizing repair paint in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION Section 05 30 00-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Shop-fabricated carbon steel, stainless steel, and aluminum items including lintels, metal stairs, and ladders. 2. Stair treads and nosings. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM A36—Carbon Structural Steel. B. ASTM A53—Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless. C. ASTM A123—Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. D. ASTM A143—Practice for Safeguarding Against Embrittlement of Hot-Dipped Galvanized Structural Steel Products and Procedure for Detecting Embrittlement. E. ASTM A153—Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. F. ASTM A240—Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium Nickel Stainless Steel — Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications. G. ASTM A276—Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. H. ASTM A307—Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60,000 psi Tensile Strength. I. ASTM A384—Practice for Safeguarding Against Warpage and Distortion During Hot-Dip Galvanizing of Steel Assemblies. J. ASTM A385—Practice for Providing High-Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot-Dip). K. ASTM A500—Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seam ess Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. L. ASTM A780—Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings. M. ASTM A992—Structural Steel Shapes. N. ASTM A1008—Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable. Section 05 50 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 O. ASTM A1011—Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, �. Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength. P. ASTM B209—Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. Q. ASTM B211—Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Rolled or Cold Finished Bar, Rod, and Wire. R. ASTM B221—Aluminum and-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles and Tubes. S. AWS A2.0—Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination. T. AWS A5.4—Stainless Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding. U. AWS D1.1—Structural Welding Code—Steel. V. AWS D1.2—Structural Welding Code—Aluminum. W. AWS D1.6—Structural Welding Code—Stainless Steel. X. ASTM F593—Standard Specifications for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs. Y. ASTM F594—Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts. 1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. All fabrications shall meet applicable code requirements including OSHA. 1.04 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, sections, elevations, and details where applicable. C. Mill Test Reports: Submit indicating structural strength and composition. D. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.0 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricate steel members in accordance with AISC Code of Standard Practice. B. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. Section 05 50 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS Standard Qualifications Procedures. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver all materials to job site properly marked to identify the structure for which it is intended and at such intervals to allow uninterrupted progress of the work. Marking shall correspond to markings indicated on the shop drawings. B. Store all members off the ground using pallets, platforms, or other supports. C. Do not store materials on the structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to the members of the supporting structures. D. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary at no additional cost to CITY. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS—CARBON STEEL A. Steel Sections: 1. ASTM A36 (channels, angles, plates). 2. ASTM A992 (wide flange sections). 3. Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B. 4. Tubes: ASTM A500, Grade B. 5. Silicon content of steel members to be hot-dipped galvanized shall oe in the range of 0 to 0.04%. Submit mill test reports confirming compliance. B. Sheet Steel: ASTM A1011. C. Plain Washers: Round carbon steel complying with FS FF-W-92. D. Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A307 Grade A, or galvanized to ASTM A153 for galvanized components for exterior use and where built into exterior walls. E. Lock Washers: Helical spring-type carbon steel complying with FS FF-W•-84. F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS D1.1. E70XX electrodes for carbon steel. For ASTM A992 steel and any other steel with 50 ksi or greater yield strength, use only E7018 or other E70XX electrodes specifically permitted by AWS D1.1. G. Select fasteners for the type, grade, and class required. 2.02 MATERIALS—STAINLESS STEEL A. Unless otherwise noted, all stainless steel bars and shapes shall meet the requirements of ASTM A276 and shall be Type 316L. — Section 05 50 00-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. Unless otherwise noted, all stainless steel bolts shall meet the requirements of ASTM F593 and shall be Type 316L. C. Unless otherwise noted, all stainless steel nuts shall meet the requirements of ASTM F594 and shall be Type 316L. D. If components are not available in Type 316L, other 300 Series type shall be used as approved by CONSULTANT. E. Welding Electrodes: 1. Comply with AWS D1.6. 2. Use ER316L electrodes for 316L stainless steel. 3. Use ER308L electrodes for 304L stainless steel. 2.03 MATERIALS—ALUMINUM A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221, Alloy 6061, Temper T6. B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209, Alloy 3005. C. Aluminum-Alloy Bars: ASTM B211, Alloy 6061, Temper T6. D. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Stainless steel. E. Welding Materials: AWS D1.2; type required for materials being welded. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Stair Treads: Stair treads for aluminum stairs shall be constructed of nonslip grating and shall have an integral nosing. Treads shall be IKG Industries, or equal, serrated, aluminum swage-locked treads with 1 1/4-inch abrasive nosing 2.05 FABRICATION A. Fabrication and Assembly: 1. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on the approved shop drawings. 2. Properly mark and match-mark materials for field assembly and for identification as to structure and site for which intended. 3. Fabricate for delivery sequence which will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials. 4. Where finishing is required, complete the assembly, including welding of units, before start of finishing operation. 5. Provide finish surfaces of members exposed in the final structure free of markings, burrs, and other defects. B. Connections: 1. Bolts and washers of all types and sizes shall be provided for completion of all field erection. 2. Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance, and quality of welds used in correcting welded work. 3. Assemble and weld built-up sections to produce true alignment of axes without warp. Section 05 50 00-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 4. Welding shall be done by the shielded arc process. 5. All welds shall be chipped, ground smooth, and primed immediately after fabrication. C. Workmanship: 1. Use materials of size and thickness shown or, if not shown, of size and thickness to produce strength and durability in the finished product. 2. Work to dimensions shown or accepted on the Shop drawings using proven details of fabrication and support. 3. Form exposed work true to line and level, with accurate angles and surfaces, and with straight sharp edges. 4. Form bent metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing works. 5. Cap all open ends of pipe and structural tubing. 6. Weld corners and seams continuously, complying with AWS recommendations. At exposed connections, grind exposed welds smooth and flush; match and blend with — adjoining surfaces. 7. Provide for anchorage of the type shown. Coordinate with supporting structures. Fabricate and space the anchoring devices to provide adequate support for intended use. 8. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to receive hardware and similar items. 2.06 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATION A. Metal Stairs: 1. Fit and shop-assemble components in largest practical sections for delivery to site. 2. Fabricate components with joints tightly fitted and secured. 3. Supply components for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. 4. Treads and risers for metal pan stairs shall be fabricated with 14 gauge sheet steel, closed risers, treads ready to receive concrete. 5. Aluminum grating stair treads shall be bolted to stringers with aluminum or stainless steel bolts. 6. Aluminum safety treads shall be screwed to aluminum carrier angles. B. Aluminum Ladder: Provide fixed aluminum ladder. Aluminum ladder shall have serrated surface on rungs. 2.07 FINISHES A. Carbon steel surfaces shall be prepared by abrasive blasting to SSPC-SF 10 as specified in Section 09 91 00—Painting. B. Do not prime surfaces where galvanizing or field welding is required. C. Immediately after surface preparation, prime paint carbon steel items with one coat in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and Section 09 91 00—Painting. D. Structural Steel Members: Galvanize after fabrication to the requirements n this section and ASTM A123. �- Section 05 50 00-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 E. Surfaces that will be inaccessible after assembly or erection shall be finish painted prior to assembly or erection. F. Galvanizing: 1. All items, except piping designated to be galvanized, shall be hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM Specification A123 and A153. Piping shall be hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A53. Furnish a Certificate of Compliance stating that the galvanizing complies with ASTM Specifications and Standards and all other applicable requirements specified herein. 2. Fabrication of items to be galvanized shall be in accordance with ASTM A143, A384, and A385. Structural steel shall be fabricated generally in accordance with Class 1 guidelines as shown in Recommended Details for Galvanized Structures as published by the American Hot Dip Galvanizer's Association, Inc. 3. Galvanized items shall be handled, transported, and stored to prevent damage or staining to the coating. Maintain adequate ventilation and continuous drainage. 4. Silicon content for steel to be hot-dipped galvanized shall be in the range of 0 to 0.04%. 5. Steel work shall be precleaned utilizing a caustic bath, acid pickle and flux, or shall be blast cleaned and fluxed. In either case, all surface contaminants and coatings shall be removed. 6. All welding shall be performed in accordance with the American Welding Society publication D19.0-72, Welding Zinc Coated Steel. All uncoated weld areas shall be touched up. G. Aluminum shall have a mill finish unless otherwise specified. Any aluminum in contact with concrete or dissimilar metal shall be coated with multiple coats of bituminous paint, minimum 10 mils dry. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Correct conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Furnish setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages such as concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors which are to be embedded in concrete construction. B. Coordinate delivery of such items to project. C. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Setting Precast Anchorages: 1. Clean bearing surfaces free from bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean the bottom surface of bearing plates. Section 05 50 00-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2. After the bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten and anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with the edge of the bearing plate before packing with grout. 3. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so that no voids remain. B. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction including threaded fasteners for concrete inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors. C. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: 1. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting for installation of miscellaneous metal fabrications. 2. Set work accurately in location, alignment, and elevation and make olumb, level, true, and free from rack measured from established lines and levels. 3. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. 4. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints, grind joints smooth, and touchup shop paint coat or galvanizing repair. 3.04 FIELD WELDING A. Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal arc welding (steel, stainless steel) and gas metal arc welding (aluminum), appearance arid quality of weld made, and methods in correcting welding work. 3.05 TOUCH-UP PAINTING A. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting in accordance with Section 09 91 00—Painting. 3.06 GALVANIZING REPAIR A. Areas damaged by welding, flame-cutting, or during handling, transport, or erection shall be repaired by one of the following methods whenever damage exceeds 3/16 inch in width. 1. Cold Galvanizing Compound: a. Surfaces to be reconditioned with zinc-rich paint shall be clean, dry, and free of oil, grease, and corrosion products. b. Areas to be repaired shall be power disc-sanded to bright metal. So that a smooth -- reconditioned coating can be effected, surface preparation shall extend into the undamaged galvanized coating. c. Touch-up paint shall be an organic cold-galvanized compound having a minimum of 94% zinc dust in the dry film. d. The paint shall be spray- or brush-applied in multiple coats until a dry film thickness of 8 mils minimum has been achieved. A finish coat of aluminum paint shall be applied to provide a color blend with the surrounding galvanizing. e. Coating thickness shall be verified by measurements with a magnetic or electromagnetic gauge. 2. Zinc-Based Solder: a. Surfaces to be reconditioned with zinc-based solder shall be clean, dry, and free of oil, grease, and corrosion products. b. Areas to be repaired shall be wire-brushed. Section 05 50 00-7 4463.004/City Contract No.994 c. Heat shall be applied slowly and broadly close to but not directly onto the area to be repaired. The zinc-based solder rod shall be rubbed onto the heated metal until the rod begins to melt. A flexible blade or wire brush shall be used to spread the melt over the area to be covered. The zinc-based solder shall be applied in a minimum thickness of 2 mils. d. Coating thickness shall be verified by measurements with a magnetic or electromagnetic gauge. 3.07 SCHEDULE A. The following schedule is a list of principal items only. Refer to Drawing details for items not specifically scheduled. B. Guard Posts: Steel pipe, concrete-filled, crowned cap, as detailed-galvanized and field finish paint in accordance with Division 09. C. Lintels: Shop prime paint finish for interior wall lintels; galvanized and field finish paint in accordance with Division 09 for exterior wall lintels. Lintels approved by CONSULTANT shall be placed over all masonry openings. See lintel schedule on the drawings. D. Door Frames for Overhead Door Openings: Jamb angle sections-galvanized and field finish paint in accordance with Division 09. Sill angle sections-galvanized finish. E. Aluminum stairs, serrated aluminum treads and landings. Mill finish. F. Aluminum ladder. END OF SECTION Section 05 50 00-8 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 05 52 00 HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work includes aluminum handrails, railings, fittings, and self-closing gate.. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM A53—Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless. B. ASTM B241—Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Seamless Pipe and Seamless Extruded Tube. 1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Railings, handrails, and self-closing gates shall be designed in accordance with and meet the applicable requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health Act and the Iowa State Building Code (2015 IBC). B. Submit engineering calculations for all rails, posts, and connections demonstrating compliance with the design requirements. Calculations shall be stamped by an Iowa Professional Engineer. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 ALUMINUM RAILING SYSTEM A. Provide a mechanically joined pipe railing system, Tabco 2500 Railing System as manufactured by Tuttle Aluminum and Bronze Co. or equal. B. Rails shall be ASTM B241, Aluminum Alloy 6063-T6, 6005-T5, or 6105-T5, Schedule 40, 1 1/2-inch-diameter pipe extrusion. C. Posts shall be ASTM B241, Aluminum Alloy 6063-T6, 6005-T5, or 6105-T5. Schedule 40, 1 1/2-inch-diameter pipe. D. Furnish and install 4-inch by 1/4-inch toeboards where shown or noted o l the drawings, or where required by OSHA 1910.29(k). E. Furnish and install self-closing aluminum gates with stainless steel torsion springs at openings in railings providing points of access as shown on the drawings. Section 05 52 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 F. Provide expansion joints in railing and toeboards at expansion joints in structures and as necessary to prevent buckling or buildup of stresses. Expansion joints shall occur within 1 foot of posts. G. Finished joints shall be smooth. H. All rails, posts, toeboards, and connectors shall have a M10C22A41 clear anodized finish. I. Posts shall be anchored to the top of walls and decks with a flange base plate. Base plate shall reinforce the bottom end of the post as required to meet OSHA design criteria. J. Stainless steel expansion bolt anchoring system, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, shall be used. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install all railing in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions providing a complete installation. B. Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, and free from distortion or defects. C. Clean all components as recommended by railing manufacturer. D. Self-closing gates shall be installed to slide or swing away from the open edge (toward platform or walking surface). _ END OF SECTION Section 05 52 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 — SECTION 05 53 00 GRATING PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work includes floor and stair tread grating. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM A123—Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. B. NAAMM Metal Bar Grating Manual ANSI NAAMM MBG531 and MBG532. C. ASTM B221-Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Floor grating and plank shall be designed for a maximum deflection of 1/4 inch when supporting a 100 psf uniform load. B. Checkered floor plate thickness shall be determined based on a maximum deflection of L/150 of the short side or a stress of 28,000 psi under a 100 psf uniform load. The larger plate thickness shall govern. Where plate thickness does not meet these requirements, or where a thinner plate is desired, CONTRACTOR shall design and provide welded aluminum stiffeners that, in combination with the provided floor plate, meet these load and deflection requirements. 1.04 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Take all field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 ALUMINUM FLOOR GRATING A. All grating, unless otherwise specified, shall be rectangular bar style, swage-locked aluminum floor grating with serrated surface. B. Acceptable manufacturers include the following or equal: Harsco Industrial, IKG Type S-19-4-BS. Section 05 53 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. All edges of the grating and all openings in the grating for pipe and miscellaneous equipment shall be banded by welding on minimum 1/8-inch-thick bars. The band shall have less depth than the bearing bars to permit drainage. D. Individual sections shall be of a size to permit ease in handling with a maximum length not in excess of 8 feet. Weight of individual sections shall not exceed 75 pounds. E. Where possible, provide a 12-inch-wide section of grating over each stop gate and over each valve operating nut. F. All aluminum grating support angles shall be aluminum. Support angles shall be provided at the bearing ends of all grating. This includes locations such as wall openings and corners. Support angles shall also be provided at the nonbearing ends of grating where shown on the drawings. G. For aluminum grating stair treads, refer to Section 05 50 00—Metal Fabrications. H. Provide 4-inch by 1/4-inch toeboards anchored to edge of grating at all slide gates in grated areas. 2.02 FINISHES A. Protection of Aluminum from Dissimilar Materials: 1. Where aluminum surfaces come into contact with dissimilar metals, surfaces shall be kept from direct contact by painting the dissimilar metal with multiple coats of bituminous paint, minimum 10 mils dry, or other approved insulating material. 2. Where aluminum surfaces come into contact with dissimilar materials such as concrete, masonry, or lime mortar, exposed aluminum surfaces shall be painted with multiple coats of bituminous paint, minimum 10 mils dry, or other approved insulating material. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that opening sizes and dimensional tolerances are acceptable. B. Prior to installation, CONTRACTOR shall inspect supports for correct size, layout, and alignment.Any inconsistencies between contract drawings and supporting structure deemed detrimental to placement shall be reported in writing to CONSULTANT prior to placement. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Place embedded frames and supports in correct position, plumb and level. Provide blocking as required to maintain alignment of sections. B. Seal small gaps between embedded angles at face of wall with backer rod to prevent concrete entry. C. All aluminum floor grating and plank shall be secured to supporting members with aluminum or stainless steel saddle clips supplied by the grating manufacturers. Stud bolts and other hardware shall be supplied by CONTRACTOR. Section 05 53 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 D. Install in accordance with shop drawings and standard installaticn clearances as recommended by the NAAMM Metal Bar Grating Manual. E. Cutting, Filling, and Placement: 1. Perform all cutting and fitting required for installation. 2. Cutouts for circular obstructions are to be at least 2 inches larger in diameter than the obstruction. Cutouts for all piping 4 inches or less shall be made in the field. 3. All rectangular cutouts are to be made to the next bearing bar beyond the penetration with a clearance not to exceed bearing bar spacing. 4. Utilize standard panel widths wherever possible. END OF SECTION — Section 05 53 00-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 05 56 00 ANCHOR BOLTS AND POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Anchor bolts, expansion bolts, adhesive anchors, and screw anchors. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM A36/A36M—Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. B. ASTM F1554—Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi yield strength. C. ICC-ES International Code Council—Evaluation Service. D. AC 193—Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements. E. AC 308—Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete. F. ACI 355.2—Qualification of Post-Installed Mechanical Anchors in Concrete and Commentary. G. ACI 355.4—Qualification of Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete and Commentary. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 ANCHOR BOLTS A. Anchor bolts complete with washers and nuts shall be fabricated as shown or as specified by the equipment manufacturer and unless otherwise indicated shall be hot-dip galvanized carbon steel or 316 stainless steel. Anchor bolts shall, as a minimum, conform to the requirements of ASTM F1554-Grade 36. B. Stainless steel anchor bolts shall be used in all submerged locations, below final grade, and in contact with aluminum and other items not to be painted. Galvanized anchor bolts shall be used elsewhere. 2.02 EXPANSION BOLTS A. Expansion bolts shall be KWIK Bolt TZ by Hilti, Inc., Power-Stud+ SD2, SD4, or SD6 by DeWalt, Strong-Bolt or Strong-Bolt 2 by Simpson Strong-Tie Anchor Systems, or approved equal. B. All expansion bolts shall comply with the Iowa State Building Code (2015 IBC),AC 193, and ACI 355.2. They shall be ICC-ES approved for use in cracked and uncracked concrete. Section 05 56 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. Expansion bolts will not be permitted as substitutes for embedded anchor bolts except with the prior written acceptance of CONSULTANT or where otherwise specifically called for. D. Unless indicated otherwise on the drawings or specified, use the following bolt material for the various installation situations: 1. Stainless Steel: For all submerged locations, below final grade, and in contact with aluminum appurtenances and other items not to be painted. Also for anchoring equipment, unless otherwise specified. 2. Steel: In other locations in contact with items to be painted or encased in concrete. 2.03 ADHESIVE ANCHORS A. Adhesive anchors shall be HIT HY 200 by Hilti, Inc., Red Head C6+ or Red Head A7+ by ITW, Pure 110+ or AC200+ by DeWalt, Set-XP or AT-XP by Simpson Strong-Tie Anchor Systems, or approved equal. B. All adhesive anchors shall comply with the Iowa State Building Code (2015 IBC), AC 308, and ACI 355.4. They shall be ICC-ES approved for use in cracked and urcracked concrete. C. If multiple adhesives will be used due to temperature requirements, all adhesives shall be from the same manufacturer. 2.04 SCREW ANCHORS A. Screw anchors shall be KWIK HUS-EZ by Hilti, Inc., Screw-Bolt by DevValt, Titen-HD by Simpson Strong-Tie Anchor Systems, or approved equal. B. All screw anchors shall comply with the Iowa State Building Code (2015 IBC). They shall be ICC-ES approved for use in cracked and uncracked concrete. 2.05 DROP-IN ANCHORS A. Drop-in anchors shall be HDI-P Drop-In Anchor by Hilti, or equal. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 ANCHOR BOLTS A. Anchor bolts for structural members shall be located as shown and specified. B. Anchor bolts for mechanical equipment shall have embedment length, ecge distances, and spacing as required by the equipment manufacturer. C. All dirt or foreign materials shall be removed prior to embedding into concrete. After anchor bolts have been embedded, their threads shall be protected by grease and by installing the nuts or by other means until the time of installation of the equipment or metal work. Section 05 56 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.02 EXPANSION BOLTS A. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, expansion bolt edge distance and spacing shall be in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions. B. Bolt embedment shall at least equal 6-bolt diameters. C. Installation procedures shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's printed installation instructions. D. Where location of bolts is adjustable, reinforcing steel shall be located prior to drilling holes and bolts shall be located to clear reinforcing steel. 3.03 ADHESIVE ANCHORS A. At locations shown on the drawings, reinforcing bars or threaded rod shall be provided in existing concrete by drilling holes, injecting epoxy adhesive, and inserting the reinforcing bar. _. B. All existing surfaces to receive adhesive anchors, including the entire area in contact with the new concrete, shall be cleaned and roughened to amplitude of 1/4 inch. C. Installation procedures shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's printed installation instructions. D. Where location of anchors is adjustable, reinforcing steel shall be located prior to drilling holes and anchors shall be located to clear reinforcing steel. E. CONTRACTOR shall arrange an anchor manufacturer's representative to provide on-site installation training for installation of their adhesive anchor system products. Submit documentation that all CONTRACTOR's personnel or subcontractors who install adhesive anchors have been trained prior to the announcement of anchor installation. F. Adhesive anchors in horizontal and upwardly inclined orientations to resist sustained tension loads are subject to the following requirements: 1. They shall be installed by personnel certified by an applicable certification program. Certification shall include written and performance tests in accordance with the TM ACl/CRSI Adhesive Anchor Installer Certification program, or equivalent, as approved by CONSULTANT. 2. They require continuous special inspection during installation. CONTRACTOR shall notify CONSULTANT and Special Inspector of the schedule for these anchor installations to permit coordination of inspections. 3.04 SCREW ANCHORS A. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, screw anchor edge distance and spacing shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Anchor embedment shall at least equal 6-bolt diameters. C. Installation procedures shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's printed installation instructions. Section 05 56 00-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 D. Where location of anchors is adjustable, reinforcing steel shall be located prior to drilling holes and anchors shall be located to clear reinforcing steel. END OF SECTION Section 05 56 00-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 06 11 10 WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING PART 1—GENERAL 1 .01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Roof curbs and cants. 2. Wood blocking. 3. Preservative treatment of wood. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ALSC—American Lumber Standards Committee. B. AWPA—American Wood Preservers Association. C. NFPA—National Forest Products Association. D. NLGA—National Lumber Grades Authority. E. SPIB—Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. F. WCLIB—West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. G. WWPA—Western Wood Products Association. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Certification of type of wood and wood treatment to be used. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. All materials shall be thoroughly sealed and protected from weather during transport and at the jobsite. Protect from dampness. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Lumber for roof curbs, cants, and blocking shall be "standard" grade Douglas Fir, No. 2 Southern Pine, or better, graded in accordance with the WWPA, WCLIB, NLGA, or SPIB grading rules as applicable. Lumber shall bear the grading agency's stamp. Section 06 11 10-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. Wood shall be kiln-dried with moisture content not to exceed 19% at time of installation. C. All lumber furnished under this section shall be pressure-treated with a :;hromated copper arsenite (CCA) waterborne preservative to a minimum retention of 0.40 pounds per cubic foot. Acceptable products include Hoover Treated Wood Products CCA, Wood Preserving Co. Osmose CCA, or equal. Cuts shall be treated in the field with a bush-on waterborne preservative compatible with the pressure treatment. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide and install wood curbs, cants, blocking, furring, and grounds cf proper size and shape where shown on the drawings and where required to secure other work or equipment in place. B. Members shall be installed true to lines, level, plumb, and secure. C. Connections and nailing shall be in accordance with the details shown at-lc/or the Iowa State Building Code (2015 IBC) minimum requirements, whichever is more restrictive. D. Apply brush-on wood preservative treatment to cuts in accordance wi:h manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION Section 06 11 10-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 06 60 00 FIBERGLASS FABRICATIONS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work includes fiberglass structural shapes (angles, channels, I-beams, tubes, bars, plates, etc.), fiberglass ladders, and fiberglass handrail. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer of fiberglass structural shapes, ladders, and handrail shall have a minimum of 5 years of verifiable experience in the manufacture and fabrication of pultruded fiberglass structural shapes and fabrications. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 FIBERGLASS STRUCTURAL SHAPES A. Fiberglass structural shapes shall be manufactured by the pultrusion process using the following materials: 1. Vinyl ester resin with flame-retardant additive. 2. Glass fiber reinforcing consisting of both continuous strand mat and continuous strand longitudinal fiber (roving). 3. Surfacing veil of polyester nonwoven fabric. 4. UV inhibitor. B. Acceptable product lines include the following or equal: 1. Extren Series 625 by Strongwell Extren. 2. Pultex Series 1625 by Creative Pultrusions, Inc. 3. Dynaform VEFR system by Fibergrate Composite Structures, Inc. C. Sections shall be constructed of materials recommended for use in a submerged condition in contact with wastewater and with chlorine at any concentration. 2.02 FASTENERS/ADHESIVES A. Unless noted otherwise, all bolts, nuts, and washers shall be Type 316L stainless steel per ASTM F593. Fiberglass bolts, nuts, and washers shall be Dynaform as manufactured by Fibergrate Composite Structures, Inc., FibreBolt as manufactured by Strongwell, or equal. B. Adhesive resin used for joining sections and for sealing cut edges shall be approved for use by the manufacturer. Section 06 60 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.03 FIBERGLASS HANDRAIL A. The fiberglass handrail system shall be fabricated into finished sections by fabricating and joining together the pultruded square tube using molded internal connecting plugs and spiral grooved pultruded rod epoxy bonded and joined together as shown on the drawings. B. Kickplate shall be 4 inches by 1/2-inch by 0.125-inch-thick pultruded fiberglass shape and shall be attached to the handrail posts with nylon drive rivets. Rails and posts shall be 2-inch by 2-inch by 0.156 inch-square tube manufactured by pultrusion process. C. The FRP handrail system shall be designed to meet the configuration and loading requirements of OSHA with a minimum factor of safety on loading of 2.0 Handrail shall be capable of withstanding a load of 200 pounds applied at any point noncurrently, vertically, downward, or horizontally. D. Handrail system shall be Dynarail, fabricated from Dynaform ISOFR, with safety yellow pigment and produced by Fibergrate Composite Structures, Inc., or equa E. All shop fabricated cuts are to be coated with a vinyl ester resin to provide maximum corrosion resistance. Field cuts are to be similarly coated by CONTRACTOR in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Installation/erection of components shall be in accordance with the design drawings and shop drawings. B. All cut edges shall be sealed with a resin recommended by the manufacturer. END OF SECTION -- Section 06 60 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 06 61 10 FIBERGLASS GRATING PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work includes fiberglass grating. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Grating shall be designed to safely support a uniform load of 100 psf with a maximum deflection of 1/4 inch. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 GRATING A. Fiberglass grating and stair treads shall be manufactured by the wet layup (molded) or pultruded process using the following materials: 1. Isophthalic polyester resin with flame-retardant additive. Resin content shall be a minimum of 60% and fiberglass a maximum of 40% by weight. 2. UV inhibitor. B. Acceptable products include the following, or equal: 1. Rectangular bar style: a. Duragrate Series by Strongwell. b. Chemgrate and Fibergrate by Fibergrate Composite Structures, Inc. 2. I-shaped bar styles: a. Duragrate Series by Strongwell. b. Safe-T-Span by Fibergrate Composite Structures, Inc. C. Grating shall be of depth required to meet design requirements. D. Rectangular bar-style grating bars shall be tapered to promote self-cleaning. E. Angular silica particles shall be integrally embedded in the top surface of the grating to create an antislip surface. The tips of the bearing bars and cross bars shall be in the same plane to maximize the antislip top surface area. F. Individual grating sections shall be of a size to permit ease of handling, with a maximum length not in excess of 8 feet. G. Provide 316 stainless steel hold-down clips for all grating unless noted or specified otherwise. Section 06 61 10-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.02 GRATING SUPPORT ANGLES A. Grating support angles shall be provided as detailed on the drawings and in accordance with Section 06 60 00—Fiberglass Fabrications. Support angles shall be provided under all edges of grating. Support angles shall be mitered at corners. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install grating in accordance with design drawings, shop drawing, and grating manufacturer's written instructions. B. Field cut or sanded surfaces shall be coated with resin furnished by the manufacturer and applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Provide a 1/8-inch to 1/4-inch gap between adjacent grating panels. END OF SECTION Section 06 61 10-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 07 14 00 FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Fluid-applied elastomeric waterproofing membrane for belowgrade walls. Fluid-applied waterproofing membrane is required on the earth side of exterior concrete walls that are below grade and are common with rooms, tunnels, or galleries to be occupied by equipment, piping, or personnel. Membrane is not required for walls that are poured directly against an excavated surface. B. Fluid-applied elastomeric waterproofing membrane for belowgrade structures. C. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. NRCA(National Roofing Contractors Association)—Waterproofing Manual. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit two samples of coating system applied to 1/4-inch plywood or similar rigid base. B. Submit list of at least five projects of similar nature by waterproofing applicator that have been installed within the last 5 years, identified with project name, location, and date. C. Submit letter from membrane manufacturer stating that applicator is an approved or certified applicator of its product. D. Submit copies of warranty. 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS OF APPLICATOR A. Membrane applicator shall be approved by the manufacturer and shall have a minimum of 5 years experience in application of fluid-applied waterproofing coatings. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. No waterproofing work shall be performed at ambient temperatures below 40°F. B. No waterproofing work shall be performed during inclement weather or when such weather is imminent. Section 07 14 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1.06 WARRANTY A. Provide installer's 2-year total system warranty of watertightness covering cost (labor and — materials) to repair any leaks in the waterproofing membrane, includir g cost to remove backfill material or other materials concealing the membrane, if required. B. Provide manufacturer's standard 5-year product warranty. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 MEMBRANE A. Membrane shall be a one-part, moisture curing, high solids, VOC-compliant, modified polyurethane waterproofing membrane that can be applied to damp and green concrete. B. Acceptable products include the following, or equal: Tremproof 250 GC manufactured by Tremco. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Cleaners and conditioners, primers, sealants, backer rod, flashing and flashing reinforcements, and other accessories related to the membrane application shall be provided as required by the membrane manufacturer. B. Provide 1/8-inch-thick protection board, Tremco Protection Mat by Tremco, or equal. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Surface preparation shall be in accordance with the membrane manufacturer's recommendations. B. Verify that curing methods used for concrete are compatible with the merbrane system. C. Concrete surfaces shall be free of laitance, loosely adhering materials, oil, curing compounds, and all other contaminants prior to membrane application. Prepare all concrete surfaces by sandblasting followed by vacuum cleaning or by acid etching - 3.02 PRODUCT APPLICATION A. Preparatory work (priming and flashing) must be fully cured in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations prior to coating application. B. Apply coating in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations using approved squeegee, trowel, or spray equipment to produce a 60 mil wet film thickness. This is in addition to the primer and flashing coats. Extend coating over all previously flashed and primed areas. -- Section 07 14 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. The membrane shall be cured as recommended by the manufacturer prior to water testing, backfilling, or allowing foot traffic on surfaces. D. Horizontal surfaces shall be flooded to a depth of 2 inches maintained over a 12-hour period. Any leaks evident after this period shall be repaired and the leaky areas retested until leaks are stopped. E. Apply protection board to all surfaces prior to backfilling. END OF SECTION Section 07 14 00-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 07 21 12 BOARD INSULATION PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work includes board insulation for cavity wall construction, for perimete' foundation walls, and under floor-slabs on-grade. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 sl-all govern work in this section. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 CAVITY WALL INSULATION A. Cavity wall insulation shall be 3-inch-thick polyisocyanurate foam board with foil facing on both sides. Aged thermal resistance (R-value) at 72°F shall be a minimum of 19.0. B. Acceptable products include the following, or equal. DOW Thermax by DOW Corporation. C. Adhesive for adhering insulation to backup wall shall be as recommended by the insulation manufacturer. 2.02 FOUNDATION AND UNDER-SLAB INSULATION A. Foundation and under-slab insulation shall be 2-inch-thick extruded polystyrene closed cell rigid foam board with continuous skins on both sides. Aged thermal resistance (R-value) at 75°F shall be a minimum of 10.0. B. Acceptable products include the following, or equal: 1. Styrofoam Square Edge by Dow Chemical Company. 2. Foamular 250 by UC Industries, Inc. PART 3—EXECUTION — 3.01 INSTALLATION—CAVITY WALLS A. Insulation shall be installed horizontally within the cavity space between masonry wythes. B. Take care during installation so that all insulation boards are butted anc installed between ties and fit flush against inner wythe or backup wall. C. Cut insulation neatly to fit around obstructions across the cavity such as vents, louvers, pipes, and conduits. Section 07 21 12-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 D. Secure insulation in place against backup wall with mastic adhesive and observe label directions. 3.02 INSTALLATION—FOUNDATION WALLS AND UNDER FLOORS A. Rigid insulation shall be laid dry against the foundation walls as backfill is placed. Insulation shall be located at all perimeter frost walls and below-grade walls of buildings and structures containing areas that may be occupied by personnel. B. At perimeter frost wall foundations, insulation shall be as shown on the Drawings.. C. Insulation under edges of slab-on-grade floors shall be 24 inches wide. END OF SECTION Section 07 21 12-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 07 26 00 VAPOR AND AIR BARRIER PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work includes: 1. Vapor barrier under concrete floors on grade. 2. Air barrier in masonry double wythe walls on concrete block backup \vall. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shill govern work in this section. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Vapor barrier for below slabs: Vapor barrier shall consist of 10 mil ASTM E1745 Class B polyethylene sheeting with less than 0.3 perm water vapor permeance ir accordance with ASTM E96. -- B. Permeable air barrier for masonry cavity wall construction shall be fluid applied membrane, ExoAir 230 by Tremco, or equal. Apply to outside face of inner wythe of concrete block prior to installation of rigid insulation. Apply in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Air barrier shall be included in all new cavity wall construction on the project. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION—UNDER CONCRETE FLOORS ON GRADE — A. Provide continuous vapor barrier under concrete floors on grade that are 8 inches or less in thickness, lap all joints a minimum of 12 inches. B. Specific location of vapor barrier (whether directly under slab or under granular cushion) shall be as shown on the drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF AIR BARRIER A. Install air barrier on outside face of inner wythe of concrete block in cavity Nall construction. B. Install air barrier per manufacturer's recommendations and approved deta ls. END OF SECTION -- Section 07 26 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 07 42 13.13 PREFORMED METAL PANEL PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work includes preformed metal siding and accessories. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM B209—Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Provide complete panel layout, jointing pattern and details, fastening methods, and installation details. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Acceptable manufacturers include the following, or equal: Alcoa. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Exterior wall panel shall be 8-inch Rib, or equal, .032-inch aluminum, alloy 3004 conforming to ASTM B209. B. Panel shall have Colorweld 300, or equal, fluoro-polymer finish and a stucco-embossed texture. C. Provide aluminum flashing and enclosures to provide a weather-tight installation. Flashing shall be the same gauge, finish, and texture as the exterior panels unless specified otherwise. Provide EPDM rubber or metal closures as required to provide a weather-tight installation. D. Provide metal lining of window and door openings of same finish and gauge as the exterior panels. E. Provide fasteners as required to secure the siding and accessories. Fasteners shall be No. 14, type 305 stainless steel, cadmium plated hex-head, self tapping screws. Fastener heads shall be factory color coated to match panel finish. Section 07 42 13.13-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 F. All sealants shall be compatible with panel materials. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Panels shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Install panels plumb and true in proper alignment. C. Panels shall be side lapped one corrugation. D. All work shall be weather- and water-tight. E. Fasteners to structural supports shall be spaced a maximum of 8 inches on center. All fasteners shall be applied as recommended by the manufacturer and shall be designed to prevent water leakage through the fastener hole. F. Provide flashing, trim, and sealant around protrusions through panel. G. Caulking and sealing required in connection with the work of this section shall be provided. H. Where uncoated aluminum materials come in contact with dissimilar materials, a bituminous paint or caulking tape shall be installed between the dissimilar materials. 3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Replace panels that have irreparable damage. B. Remove strippable film coating. C. Remove all sharp edges or burrs, and clean all metal of grease, oil, dirt, and stains. END OF SECTION Section 07 42 13.13-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 07 42 13.19 INSULATED WALL PANELS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Foamed-insulation-core concealed fastener metal wall panels, with related metal trim and accessories. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Architectural Manufacturer's Association (AAMA): AAMA 501.2—Quality Assurance and Diagnostic Water Leakage Field Check of Installed Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped Glazing Systems. B. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): ASCE 7—Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. C. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM A 653—Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 2. ASTM A 755—Specification for Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot-Dip Process and Prepainted by the Coil-Coating Process for Exterior Exposed Building Products. 3. ASTM A 792—Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55%Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. 4. ASTM A 240—Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications 5. ASTM C 518—Standard Test Method for Steady State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. 6. ASTM C 1363—Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Materials and Envelope Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus 7. ASTM D 1621—Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics. 8. ASTM D 1622—Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics. 9. ASTM D 2244—Test Method for Calculation of Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates.10. ASTM D 4214—Test Methods for Evaluating Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films. 11. ASTM D 6226—Standard Test Method for Open Cell Content of Rigid Cellular Plastics 12. ASTM E 72—Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building Construction. 13. ASTM E 84—Test Methods for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 14. ASTM E 283—Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. 15. ASTM E 331—Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 16. ASTM E 1592—Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. Section 07 42 13.19-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1. NFPA 259—Test Method for Potential Heat of Building Materials. 2. NFPA 285—Evaluation of Fire Propagation Characteristics of Exterior Non-Load Bearing Wall Assemblies. 3. NFPA 286—Fire Test of Evaluating Conditions of Wall and Ceiling Finish to Roof Fire Growth. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer/Source: Provide metal panel assemblies and accessories from a single manufacturer approved under an accredited third-party quality control program. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Approved manufacturer listed in this Section with minimum ten years' experience in the manufacturing of similar products and successful use in similar applications. C. Installer Qualifications: Experienced Installer certified by metal panel manufacturer with minimum of five years experience with successfully completed projects of a similar nature and scope. Installer's Field Supervisor: Experienced mechanic certified by metal panel manufacturer supervising work on site whenever work is underway. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Prior to erection of framing, conduct preinstallat,on meeting at site attended by CITY, CONSULTANT, metal panel installer, metal panel manufacturer's technical representative, inspection agency and related trade contractors. 1. Coordinate building framing in relation to metal panel system. 2. Coordinate openings and penetrations of metal panel system. 3. Coordinate work of Division 07 and Manufacturer's Accessories with Installation of Metal Panels. 1.05 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets for specified products. B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of metal panels. Include details of each condition of installation, panel profiles, and attachment to building. Provide details at a minimum scale 1-1/2-inch per foot of edge conditions, joints, fastener and sealant placement, flashings, openings, penetrations, and special details. Make distinctions between factory and field assembled work. 1. Include data indicating compliance with performance requirements. 2. Indicate points of supporting structure that must coordinate with metal panel system installation. 3. Include structural data indicating compliance with performance requirements and requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each exposed product specified including sealants. Provide representative color charts of manufacturer's full range of colors. D. Samples for Verification: 1. Provide 12-inch-long section of each metal panel profile. 2. Provide color chip verifying color selection. Section 07 42 13.19-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1.06 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Results: Indicating compliance of products with requirements. B. Qualification Information: For Installer. C. Accreditation Certificate: Indicating that manufacturer is accredited under an accredited third-party Quality Control Program, including IAS AC472 and based upon chapter 17 of the International Building Code (IBC). 1.07 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Executed copy of manufacturer's warranty. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect products of metal panel system during shipping, handling, and storage to prevent staining, denting, deterioration of components or other damage. Protect panels and trim bundles during shipping. Protect painted surfaces with a protective covering before shipping. 1. Deliver, unload, store, and erect metal panels and accessory items without deforming panels or exposing panels to surface damage from weather or construction operations. 2. Store in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Shield foam insulated metal panels from direct sunlight until all components are installed. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit Manufacturer's two (2) year limited warranty providing panels to be free from defects in materials and workmanship, beginning from the date of substantial completion excluding coil coatings (paint finishes)that are covered under a separate warranty. B. CONTRACTOR shall issue a separate warranty against defects in installed materials and workmanship, beginning from the date of substantial completion of the installation. C. Special Panel Finish Warranty: Submit Manufacturer's limited warranty on the exterior paint finish for adhesion to the metal substrate and limited warranty on the exterior paint finish for chalk and fade. Fluoropolymer Two-Coat System: 1. Color fading in excess of 5 for copper, silver metallic and bright red; Hunter units per ASTM D 2244. 2. Chalking in excess of 6 for copper, silver metallic and bright red per ASTM D 4214. 3. Failure of adhesion, peeling, checking, or cracking. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Metl-Span, a Division of NCI Group, Inc.; Kingspan Insulated Panels, or equal. Section 07 42 13.19-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide metal panel system meeting performance requirements as determined by application of specified tests by a qualified testing facility on manufacturer's standard assemblies. B. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of indicated loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, as determined by ASTM E 72 or ASTM E 1592 applied in accordance with ICC AC 04 Section 4, Panel Load Test Option or Section 5, Panel Analysis Option: 1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on applicable building code, wind speed, importance factor, exposure category, and internal pressure coeffi:lent indicated on drawings. Wind Negative Pressure: Certify capacity of metal pa-eels by testing of proposed assembly. 2. Deflection Limits: Withstand inward and outward wind-load design pressures in accordance with applicable building code with maximum deflection of 1/180 of the span with no evidence of failure. C. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide metal panel systems with the following fire-test characteristics determined by indicated test standard as applied by testilg and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: The insulating core shall have been tested per ASTM E 84. The core shall have: a. Flame spread index: 25 or less. b. Smoke developed index: 450 or less. 2. Room Test Performance: FM Global 4880: The panel assembly shall not support a self-propagating fire which reaches any limits of the 50-foot high corner test structure as evidenced by flaming or material damage of the ceiling of the assembly. 3. Fire Propagation: The fire assembly shall meet the requirements of the standard for NFPA 285 4. Fire Growth: The fire assembly shall meet the requirements of the standard for NFPA 286 5. Potential Heat: Determined in accordance with NFPA 259 6. IBC Chapter 26: Panel Performance under the above test methocs, shall meet the requirements of IBC, Chapter on foam plastics. D. Air Infiltration, ASTM E 283: 1. Maximum 0.0002 cfm/sq. ft. (0.001 L/s per sq. m) at static air pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa). 2. Maximum 0.0009 cfm/sq. ft. (0.005 L/s per sq. m) at static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 lbf/ft.2 (300 Pa). 3. Maximum 0.01 cfm/sq. ft. (0.050 L/s per sq. m) at static-air-pressure difference of 20 lbf/sq. ft. (958 Pa). E. Water Penetration Static Pressure: 1. ASTM E 331: No uncontrolled water penetration at a static pressure of 20 lbf/ft.2 (958 Pa). 2. ASTM E 331 Modified (2 hour duration): No uncontrolled water pen,Aration at a static pressure of 6.24 lbf/ft.2 (300 Pa). Section 07 42 13.19-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 F. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from variations in both ambient and internal temperatures. Accommodate movement of support structure caused by thermal expansion and contraction. Allow for deflection and design for thermal stresses caused by temperature differences from one side of the panel to the other. G. Thermal Performance: When tested in accordance with ASTM C 518, Measurement of Steady State thermal Transmission, the panels shall provide a k factor of 0.14 btu/sf/hr/deg F at a 75° F (24° C) mean temperature, as required by code, or 0.126 btu/sf/hr/deg F at a 40° F (4° C) mean temperature. 2.03 INSULATED METAL WALL PANELS A. Concealed Fastener, Insulated Metal Wall Panels with foam core: Structural metal panels consisting of exterior metal sheet and interior metal sheet with matching 4 by 1/8 inch o.c. profile. Factory foamed-in-place polyurethane core in thermally-separated profile, with tongue-and-groove panel edges, attached to supports using concealed fasteners. 1. Basis of Design: Metl-Span, CF Mesa. 2. G-90 galvanized coated steel conforming to ASTM A 653 and/or AZ50 aluminum-zinc alloy coated steel, conforming to ASTM A 792/A 792M, minimum grade 33, prepainted by the coil-coating process per ASTM A 755/A 755M. a. Exterior Face Sheet: 26 gauge thickness, with stucco embossed surface. (1) (2) Finish: Fluoropolymer two-coat system. (3) Color: As selected by CONSULTANT from manufacturer's standard colors. b. Interior Face Sheet: 26 gauge thickness, with stucco embossed surface and Mesa or Light Mesa profile. (1) Finish: Fluoropolymer two-coat system. (2) Color: As selected by CONSULTANT from manufacturer's standard colors. 3. Panel Width: 42 inches (1067 mm) or as shown on drawings. 4. Panel Thickness: 3-inch, as shown on drawings. 5. Insulating Core: Polyurethane with zero ozone depletion potential blowing agent. a. Closed Cell Content: 90% or more as determined by ASTM D 6226. b. Compressive Strength: As required to meet structural performance requirements and with a minimum of 22 psi as determined by ASTM D 1621. c. Shear Strength: As required to meet structural performance requirements and with a minimum of 36 psi as determined by ASTM C 273. d. Tensile Strength: As required to meet structural performance requirements and with a minimum of 41 psi ASTM D 1623. e. Minimum Density: 2.0 pcf (32 kg/m3) as determined by ASTM D 1622 f. Thermal Resistance R-Value: R 23.58°F * hr * ft.2 /Btu (K * sq. m/W) per ASTM C 518 at 75 degrees Fahrenheit mean temperature. 6. Heat Transfer Coefficient (U-factor): U-0.042 Btu/hr * ft.2 * °F (W/K * sq. m) as determined by ASTM C 1363 at 75°F mean temperature. Tested specimen must include at least two engaged side joints. 2.04 METAL WALL PANEL ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide complete metal panel assemblies incorporating trim, copings, fasciae, gutters and downspouts, and miscellaneous flashings. Provide required fasteners, closure strips, and sealants as indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. B. Flashing and Trim: Match material, thickness, and finish of metal panels. Section 07 42 13.19-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. Panel Clips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z180) hot-dip galvanized zinc coating, one-piece, configured for concealment in panel joints, and identical to clips utilized in tests demonstrating compliance with performance requirements. D. Panel Fasteners: Self-drilling or Self-tapping screws and other acceptable fasteners recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Where exposed fasteners cannot be avoided, supply corrosion-resistant fasteners with heads matching color of metal panels by means of factory-applied coating, with weathertight resilient washers. E. Joint Sealers: 1. Sealants: Provide Tape Mastic Sealants, Non-skinning sealants, and Urethane Sealants in accordance with manufacturers standards 2. Vertical Joint Gasket: Manufacturers standard EPDM gasket. Color: Black. 2.05 FABRICATION A. General: Provide factory fabricated and finished metal panels, trim, and accessories meeting performance requirements, indicated profiles, and structural requirements. B. Fabricate metal panel joints configured to accept sealant providing weathertight seal. C. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply w th manufacturer's written instructions, approved shop drawings, and project drawings. 2.06 FINISHES A. Finishes, General: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturer's written instructions. B. Exterior Face Sheet Coil-Coated Finish System: Fluoropolymer Two-Coat System: 0.2 to 0.3 mil primer with 0.7 to 0.8 mil 70 percent PVDF fluoropolymer color coat, AAMA 621, meeting solar reflectance index requirements. Basis of Design: Metl-Span, Fluoropolymer. C. Interior Face Sheet Coil-Coated Finish System: Fluoropolymer Two-Coot System: 0.2-mil primer with 0.7 to 0.8 mil 70 percent PVDF fluoropolymer color coat. Basis of Design: Metl-Span, Fluoropolymer. -- PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine metal panel system substrate with Installer present. Inspect for erection tolerances and other conditions that would adversely affect installation of metal panels. 1. Inspect framing that will support insulated metal panels to determine if support components are installed as indicated on approved shop drawings and are within tolerances acceptable to metal panel manufacturer and installer. Confirm presence of acceptable framing members at recommended spacing to match installation requirements of metal panels. 2. Panel Support Tolerances: Confirm that metal panel supports are within tolerances acceptable to metal panel manufacturer but not greater than the folic wing: a. 1/4 inch in 20 foot in any direction. b. 3/8 inch over any single wall plane. Section 07 42 13.19-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 c. Girt Spacing 8 feet or more: 1/4 inch out only. d. Girt Spacing Less Than 8 feet: 1/8 inch out only. e. CF Architectural girt spacing less than 4 feet: 1/16 inch, inch out only. B. Correct out-of-tolerance work and other deficient conditions prior to proceeding with insulated metal panel installation. 3.02 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION A. Concealed-Fastener Insulated Metal Panels with foam core: Install metal panel system in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, approved shop drawings, and project drawings. Install metal panels in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated. Anchor panels and other components securely in place. Provide for thermal and structural movement. B. Attach panels to metal framing using screws, fasteners, sealants, and adhesives recommended for application by metal panel manufacturer. 1. Fasten metal panels to supports with fasteners at each location indicated on approved shop drawings, at spacing and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer. 2. Cut panels in field where required using manufacturer's recommended methods. 3. Provide weatherproof jacks for pipe and conduit penetrating metal panels. 4. Dissimilar Materials: Where elements of metal panel system will come into contact with dissimilar materials, treat faces and edges in contact with dissimilar materials as recommended by metal panel manufacturer C. Attach panel flashing trim pieces to supports using recommended fasteners and joint sealers. D. Joint Sealers: Install sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of metal panel assemblies. 1. Seal panel base assembly, openings, panel head joints, and perimeter joints using sealants indicated in manufacturer's instructions 2. Seal wall panel joints; apply continuously without gaps in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, approved shop drawings, and project drawings 3. Prepare joints and apply sealants per requirements of Division 07. 3.03 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. General: Install metal panel accessories with positive anchorage to building and weather tight mounting; provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1. Install components required for a complete metal panel assembly, including trim, copings, flashings, sealants, closure strips, and similar items. 2. Comply with details of assemblies utilized to establish compliance with performance requirements and manufacturer's written installation instructions. 3. Set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps,joints, and seams that will be permanently weather resistant. Section 07 42 13.19-7 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to CONSULTANT to perform field tests and inspections and to prepare test reports. B. Water-Spray Test: After completing portion of metal panel assembly including accessories and trim, test 2-bay area selected by CONSULTANT for water penetration, according to AAMA 501.2. 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protective films immediately in accordance with metal panel manufacturer's instructions. Clean finished surfaces as recommender, by metal panel manufacturer. B. Replace damaged panels and accessories that cannot be repaired. END OF SECTION Section 07 42 13.19-8 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 07 53 23.16 SINGLE-PLY ROOFING—FULLY ADHERED PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Vapor retarder. 2. Rigid roof insulation. 3. Protection board. 4. Membrane roofing and related accessories. 5. See drawings for locations of adhered roofing. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. FM 4470 (Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation)—Roof Assembly Classifications. B. NRCA(National Roofing Contractors'Association)—Roofing and Waterproofing Manual. C. UL 790—Fire Hazard Classifications. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 33 00—Submittals for general submittal requirements. B. Submit the following: 1. Tapered insulation layout plan. 2. Roofing layout plan. 3. Flashing,joint, and termination details. 4. Product data for all products specified in this section. 5. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 6. Copy of system warranty. 1.04 QUALITYASSURANCE A. The roofing system must achieve a UL Class B. B. The membrane must be manufactured by the material supplier. Manufacturer's supplying membrane made by others are not acceptable. C. Unless otherwise noted in this specification, the roofing contractor must strictly comply with the manufacturer's current specifications and details. D. The roofing system must be installed by an applicator authorized and trained by the manufacturer in compliance with shop drawings as approved by the manufacturer. The roofing applicator shall be thoroughly experienced and upon request be able to provide Section 07 53 23.16-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 evidence of having at least 5 years successful experience installing single-ply roofing systems and having installed at least one roofing application or several similar systems of equal or greater size within one year. E. Provide adequate number of experienced workmen regularly engaged in this type of work who are skilled in the application techniques of the materials specified. P-ovide at least one thoroughly trained and an experienced superintendent on the job at all times roofing work is in progress. F. Upon completion of the installation, the applicator shall arrange for an inspection to be made by a nonsales technical representative of the membrane manufacturer in order to determine whether or not corrective work will be required before the warranty will be issued. Notify the building owner 72 hours prior to the manufacturer's final inspection. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS OF INSTALLER A. Roofing system shall be installed by a manufacturer-authorized roofing applicator who is thoroughly familiar with the system, and has extensive experience in performing the work of this section. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. The roofing system shall meet UL Class B fire hazard classification. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Furnish to CITY the roofing manufacturer's 15-year total system warranty covering the costs of all labor and materials required to repair any leaks and any defects in the roofing system. All products and applications required by the roof manufacturer to obtain the warranty shall be included in the Bid. CITY will not pay for the roofing system unless the warranty is issued by the manufacturer. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 VAPOR RETARDER A. Vapor retarder shall be a three-ply laminate combining two layers of fire retardant linear low density polyethylene and a high-strength cord grid. Vapor retarder shall conform to UL construction No. 1 fire-resistance requirements. B. Vapor retarder shall be approved by roofing manufacturer for use in the roofing system. Unless prohibited by the roofing manufacturer, acceptable products incl.ade the following, or equal: Griffolyn Tx-1200 FR by Reef Industries. 2.02 ROOF INSULATION A. Roof insulation shall be Type 2, 1.35 pcf molded polystyrene tapered board insulation, followed by 1 1/2-inch-thick layer of extruded polystyrene board insulation. Minimum thickness shall be 1 inch at roof drains. Aged thermal resistance (R-value) at 75°F shall be a minimum of 4.0 per inch of thickness of molded polystyrene tapered board and 5.0 per inch of thickness of extruded polystyrene board. Section 07 53 23.16-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. Slope of tapered insulation shall be as shown on the drawings, but shall not be less than the minimum slope required by the roofing manufacturer. C. Roof insulation shall be approved by roofing manufacturer for use in the roofing system. 2.03 PROTECTION BOARD A. Protection board shall be minimum 1/2-inch structural wood fiberboard approved by the roofing manufacturer for use in this system. 2.04 MEMBRANE, FLASHING,AND ACCESSORIES A. Roofing membrane shall be nonreinforced EPDM, 0.060 inches thick. B. Acceptable systems include the following, or equal: 1. Sure-Seal, Design A Adhered System by Carlise SynTec Systems, Division of Carlise Corporation. 2. RubberGard Adhered System by Firestone Building Products Company. C. Flashing shall be minimum 0.060-inch-thick neoprene or EPDM sheet flashing provided by the roofing manufacturer. All adhesives, sealants, splicing tape, fastening strips, fasteners, pipe flashing boots, walkway pads, and all accessories necessary to complete the system shall be provided by the roofing manufacturer. D. Provide precast concrete splash pads at all new roof drain downspouts. Splash pads shall be of 3,000 psi concrete. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Surfaces on which the roofing system is to be applied shall be clean, smooth, dry, and free of fins, sharp edges, loose and foreign materials, oil, grease, and all contaminants that would be detrimental to the bonding of the roof system. The condition of the roof deck shall be approved by the roofing manufacturer before the membrane is applied. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Wood nailers shall be provided around all roof projections and penetrations except drains, as required by the roof manufacturer. Wood nailers shall be in accordance with Section 06 11 10—Wood Blocking and Curbing. Height of nailers shall be matched to the thickness of the insulation being used. Nailers shall be firmly anchored to the deck to resist a force of 200 pounds per linear foot. A minimum of three anchors shall be used to anchor each length of nailer, with 1/2-inch vent left between length of nailers. Provide approved nailing strip at perimeter of roof. B. The thermal insulation and fiberboard shall be anchored to the metal deck with fasteners approved by the roofing manufacturer. The insulation shall be neatly cut to fit around all roof penetrations and projections. Any other requirements of the roofing manufacturer shall be complied with. Slope of roof insulation shall be as shown on the drawings, but in no case shall be less than the minimum slope required by the roofing manufacturer. Section 07 53 23.16-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. The roofing membrane and accessories shall be furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations. Lap adjacent sheets a minimum of 3 inches. Seams shall be sealed with splicing cement. A bead of lap sealant shall be applied to completely cover the splice edge providing a second independent seam seal. All seams shall be taped with an approved seam tape and installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. D. Flashing shall be provided at all vertical surfaces, roof interruptions, and penetrations in accordance with membrane manufacturer's recommendations and Contract Documents. All flashings and terminations shall be securely fastened in the plane of the roof deck with fasteners recommended by the system manufacturer. Membrane edges or flashing shall be mechanically fastened to the nailer at maximum of 8-inch centers. E. No unit having defects shall be installed. In no event shall more insulation be placed on the surface to be roofed than can be covered with roofing membrane prior to the onset of inclement weather or termination of the day's work. Water must not be allowed beneath any completed section of roof. Temporary water cutoffs may be made by extending the membrane beyond the insulation and setting the end of the membrane in a sealant. All water cutoffs shall be removed prior to proceeding with the next day's word . END OF SECTION Section 07 53 23.16-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 07 56 00 PREPARATION FOR REROOFING PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work includes removal of existing roofing system on buildings as noted on the drawings in preparation for installation of a new membrane roofing system. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. CONTRACTOR shall properly dispose of roofing in accordance with all local, state, and federal regulations. 1.03 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not remove existing roofing membrane when weather conditions threaten the integrity of the building contents or intended continued occupancy. B. Maintain continuous temporary protection prior to and during installation of the new roofing system. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 TEMPORARY PROTECTION MATERIALS A. Provide polyethylene sheeting or other materials required to provide temporary protection in accordance with Section 1.03.B. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. All roof-mounted equipment and appurtenances shall be removed and reinstalled as part of this work. B. All roofing, insulation, and nailers as shown on drawings shall be removed and disposed of by CONTRACTOR. END OF SECTION Section 07 56 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 07 61 00 SHEET METAL ROOFING (BID ALTERNATIVE NO. 1) PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Standing Seam Metal Roof System. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 sh-ill govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM A653—Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. B. SMACNA—Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. C. NRCA—Roofing and Weatherproofing Manual (including construction deta s) and Handbook of Accepted Roofing Knowledge. D. Manufacturer's Handbook of Construction Details. E. AISI "Specifications for the Design of Light—Gauge Cold Formed Steel Structural Member, latest edition." 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 33 00—Submittals for general submittal requirements. B. Shop drawings: Submit fabrication details, jointing details, fastening methods, and termination details. C. Samples: Submit one sample of each type of prefinished and preformed panel showing color and profile match. Provide same for closures. D. Warranty from manufacturer: Submit sample of manufacturer's 20-year warranty on weather tightness, flashing, inclusive. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCES A. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and these specifications. Section 07 61 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Material Manufacturer: Five years documented experience with this type of construction. B. Installer: Five years of satisfactory documental experience in the installation of this type of work. 1.06 WARRANTIES A. Architectural finish coating shall be provided with a 20-year guarantee against cracking, chipping, peeling, and fading. B. Warrant materials and workmanship for 20 years for weather tightness, flashing, inclusive. 1.07 SYSTEM DESIGN A. All components of the paneling system shall be designed in accordance with sound engineering methods and practices. B. The panels shall be designed in accordance with AISI "Specifications for the Design of Light Gauge Cold Form Steel Structural Members," latest edition. C. The paneling system and its attachments shall be designed to support live, snow, and wind loads. D. The panel shall not be considered a safe work platform until completely secured to the structural system. Therefore, walk boards or other safety equipment, as required by safety standards, shall be provided by the erecting contractor to provide worker safety during panel installation. E. Panels shall be designed for 30 psf live load. F. The roof system shall carry UL wind-uplift Class 90 rating. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Metal Roof System: 1. Roof panels shall be roll formed panels of uniform width 12 to 18 inches wide with two major corrugations, 2 1/2 inches high, 16 inches (equal to panel width) on center. 2. Panel materials shall be 24 gauge, hot-dipped galvanized steel (50,000 psi yield), G-90 coating conforming to ASTM A653 specification. B. Fasteners: 1. All connections of panels to structural members, except at eave, shall be made with _. clips with moveable tabs that are seamed into the standing seam side lap. 2. Panel clips shall be fastened to structural members with fasteners as per manufacturer's erection drawings. 3. Panel-to-panel connections shall be made with a positive, field-formed standing double-lock seam, formed by a special seaming device. Section 07 61 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. Underlayment and Eave Protection Membrane: 1. Underlayment for all areas, except along eaves, shall be No. 30 unperforated asphalt saturated felt conforming to ASTM D226. 2. Eave (ice dam) protection applied to 4 feet inside the exterior wall line eaves shall be a sheet membrane of rubberized asphalt bonded to sheet polyethylene 40 mils minimum — total thickness, with strippable release paper.Acceptable products inc ude the following, or equal: a. Ice and Water Shield by W.R. Grace Company. b. Winter Guard Waterproofing Shingle Underlayment by Certainteed Corporation. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS A. Roof panels shall be roll-formed Stand N' Seam panels as manufactured b Fabral, or equal. B. Sealants: Per Section 07 90 00—Caulking and Sealants. C. Flashing at eave, gable, ridge, and penetrations shall be in accordance w th manufacturer's recommendations and Section 07 62 00—Flashing and Sheet Metal. D. Unless shown otherwise on the drawings, provide continuous ridge venting using manufacturer's standard ridge/hip flashing and manufacturer's approved detail. Provide vent material to prevent entry of insects. E. Unless shown otherwise on the drawings, provide snow guards on the roo above all exterior door openings, extending minimum 1 foot beyond each edge of door. Snow guards shall consist of a snow bar mounted to a nonpenetrating clamp attached to the standing seam ribs. Snow bar shall incorporate a prepainted metal strip to match the roof panel color. Acceptable products include Color Guard Snow Guard with prepainted insert and S-5-U clamps by LM Curbs, Longview, Texas, or equal. 2.03 FINISHES A. Finishes on all exterior surfaces shall be a 1.0 mil DFT two-coat, factory-ap plied, 70% Kynar, 500 fluoropolymer coating over an epoxy prime coat. B. All exposed fasteners shall be provided with the same finish as the sheet naterial products. -- C. Colors shall be selected by CITY. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The panels shall be attached to the supporting structurals by means of a clip device. The clip shall occur at the panel major corrugation. B. Panel sidelaps shall be field-seamed by a seaming device; all sidelap sealant shall be factory-applied. — Section 07 61 00-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. Panel endlaps, when required, shall be at least 6 inches and sealed with field-applied sealant. One panel end shall be "swaged" to provide nestible, watertight endlaps. D. Provisions for thermal expansion/contraction movement of the panel shall be accomplished by the use of clips with a moveable tab. The tabs shall be factory-centered on the roof clip to provide full movement in either direction. E. The roof shall provide for thermal expansion/contraction without detrimental effect on the roof panel when there is a 100°F temperature differential between the interior structural framework of the building and the roof panels. END OF SECTION Section 07 61 00-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 07 62 00 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work includes masonry wall flashing, custom-fabricated sheet metal flashing and counter flashing at: Parapet walls; scuppers; roof hatches; roof-mounted equipment; vent stacks; and other locations. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 sh-ill govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM A653—Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc Iran Alloy-Coated (Galvanealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. B. ASTM A924—General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic Coatec: by the Hot-Dip — Process. C. ASTM B32—Solder Metal. D. ASTM B209—Aluminum and Alloy Sheet and Plate. E. ASTM D4586—Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free. F. SMACNA—Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 33 00—Submittals for general submittal requirements. B. Shop drawings: Submit fabrication details, jointing details, fastenir g methods, and termination details. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA standard details and requirerr ents. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Fabricator and installer shall be a company specializing in sheet metal fat: rication work with a minimum of 5 years of verifiable experience in that field. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Kynar 500 coating shall be provided with a 20-year guarantee against c-acking, chipping, peeling, and fading. Section 07 62 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Masonry wall flashing and flashing around windows, doors, and other openings shall be 32 mil of self-adhesive rubberized asphalt integrally bonded to 8 mil of cross-laminated, high- density polyethylene film to provide a minimum 40 mil thick membrane. Flashing shall be PERM-A-BARRIER wall flashing as manufactured by Grace Construction Products, or equal. Provide primer or surface conditioner as recommended by manufacturer. B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: 26 gauge meeting ASTM A525, Grade A with G90 zinc coating. C. Aluminum Sheet: 0.032 inches thick meeting ASTM B209. D. Fasteners: Same material and finish as flashing sheet. Stainless steel fasteners may be used with any flashing material. Provide soft neoprene washers with fasteners. E. Primer: Zinc chromate type. F. Protective Backing Paint: Bituminous type. G. Sealant: See Section 07 90 00—Caulking and Sealants. H. Bedding Compound: Rubber asphalt or butyl type. I. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type I or II. J. Reglets: Galvanized steel or PVC, surface-mounted or recessed, or as shown on the drawings. K. Solder: ASTM B32. Soldering is not permitted on aluminum or stainless steel sheet. 2.02 FABRICATION A. All flashing and fascia shall be formed to the configurations shown on the drawings and/or the applicable manufacturer's details, or in accordance with SMACNA standard details where not shown on the drawings, or in manufacturers details. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from buckles, kinks, or other defects. B. All exposed edges shall be folded or returned on themselves at least 1/2 inch. Corners shall be mitered and seamed. C. Form pieces in the longest possible lengths. Form material with flat lock seams. D. All sections shall be provided with slip joints at 8 feet on center. E. Cleats shall be fabricated of the same materials as the flashing sheets and shall be interlockable with the sheets. F. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch and hemmed to form a drip. Section 07 62 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 G. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18-inch-long legs. Seam or solder for rigidity and seal with sealant. 2.03 FINISH A. Back paint all sheet metal with asphaltum paint where sheet metal surfaces come in contact with masonry or steel. B. Flashing and fascia shall be painted where exposed to view from the ground. Galvanized steel shall be painted in accordance with Section 09 91 00—Painting. Aluminum shall be coated with a Kynar 500 coating system. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Through-wall flashing shall be installed 1/2 inch back of the outside face of the wall, carried through the outside wythe, turned up in the collar, and adhered to back-up wall as shown on the drawings. At no time should any portion of the flashing be allowed to hang or drape beyond the width of the wall. All laps shall be sealed and shall not be less than 3 inches in width. Flashing around openings shall extend at least 3 inches beyond each side of opening. B. Fit flashing tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight n planes, and line accurate to profiles. Seal metal joints watertight. C. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where permitted by CONSULTANT. D. Insert flashings into reglets where shown on the drawings. Seal flashing into reglets with sealant. E. Counter flashing shall be provided at all vertical masonry and/or concrete v.alls which extend above the roof line. The counter flashing shall be installed in a reglet unless otherwise shown. Surface-mounted reglets shall be used where noted. F. CONTRACTOR shall provide copper sleeves for hot pipes penetrating the roof as approved by the roofing manufacturer. The annular space between the sleeve and the pipe shall be — packed with insulation capable of withstanding the maximum temperEture of the pipe. CONTRACTOR to provide a galvanized steel rain collar welded to the hot pipe. END OF SECTION �- Section 07 62 00-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 07 71 00 MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Metal fascia, soffit, gravel stops, and scuppers. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. SMACNA—Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall comply with requirements of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Submit sample panels for selection of anodized or Kynar 500 finish colors. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA standard details. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Kynar 500 coating shall be provided with a 20-year guarantee against cracking, chipping, peeling, and fading. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 FASCIA A. Metal fascia system shall be constructed of 24 gauge galvanized steel and shall include all necessary angles, clips, corners, and other accessories of the same material as the finish panels. B. Acceptable products include the following, or equal: Fascia System by Fabral, Peterson Aluminum Corporation, and shall be made by the same manufacturer as the sheet metal roofing in Section 07 61 00. 2.02 SOFFIT A. Metal soffit system shall be constructed of 0.032-inch-thick aluminum sheet and shall include all necessary channels, angles, clips, flashing, fasteners, and other accessories of the same material as the soffit panels. Soffit panels shall be fully vented to allow for ventilation and shall have stiffener grooves spaced at 6 inches on center. Section 07 71 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. Acceptable products include the following, or equal: Fabral, PAC 750 by Peterson Aluminum Corporation, and shall be made by the same manufacturer as the sheet metal roofing in `- Section 07 61 00. 2.03 GRAVEL STOP A. Gravel stop shall be constructed of 24 gauge Kynar-coated steel fascia with a face height as shown on the drawings and a continuous 22 gauge galvanized steel spring clip. Provide prefabricated mitered corners, splice sections, and all accessories for a complete weathertight installation. B. Acceptable products include the following, or equal: 1. Econosnap Model EC-126 or EC-226 by W.P. Hickman Company. 2. PAC-1-PLY by Peterson Aluminum Corporation. — 2.04 FINISHES A. Finish on all products shall be a 1.0 mil DFT two-coat factory-applied 70% Kynar 500 fluoropolymer coating over an epoxy prime coat. Colors shall be selected by CITY. All exposed fasteners shall be provided with the same finish as the sheet metal products. PART 3—EXECUTION — 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install components in accordance with the drawings and the manufacturer's instructions. B. Installation details shall be such as to allow for thermal expansion and contraction of the components and to provide for a complete weatherproof installation. END OF SECTION Section 07 71 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 07 71 23 GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Aluminum gutters and downspouts. 2. Precast concrete splash pads. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM B209—Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate. B. SMACNA—Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to SMACNA manual for sizing components for a 10-year storm event. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to the 2015 International Building Code or governing local building code for size and method of rainwater discharge. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS A. Gutters and downspouts shall be constructed of 0.032-inch-thick aluminum sheet conforming to ASTM B209 and shall be made from the same manufacturer as the fascia and soffit system. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Anchorage devices shall meet SMACNA or manufacturer's requirements. B. Gutter supports shall be straps and fasteners at maximum 3 feet 0 inches on center. C. Downspout supports shall be brackets of the appropriate size and spacing. D. Fasteners shall be aluminum or stainless steel. Section 07 71 23-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.03 SPLASH PADS A. Splash pads shall be precast concrete of the appropriate size with minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3,000 psi and minimum 5% air entrainment. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Form gutters and downspouts to SMACNA requirements. B. Fabricate with required connection pieces. C. Form sections square, true, and accurate in size, in maximum possible lengths, free of distortion of defects detrimental to appearance or performance. Allow for expansion by providing expansion joints as required. D. Hem exposed edges of metal. E. Fabricate gutter and downspout accessories; seal watertight. 2.05 FINISHES A. Finish on gutters and downspouts shall match finish on fascia system All components, including fasteners and supports, shall be prefinished to match gutters ar downspouts. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install gutters, downspouts, and accessories with manufacturer's instructions. B. Join lengths with formed seams sealed watertight. Flash and seal gutters to downspouts and accessories. C. Install gutters level. D. Seal metal joints watertight. -- E. Set splash pads under downspouts. END OF SECTION — Section 07 71 23-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Silicone firestopping foam for sealing annular spaces around ductwork penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. 2. Silicone firestopping sealant for sealing annular spaces around piping and conduit penetrations through fire-rated assemblies and to seal gaps at intersections of walls and floors/ceilings. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. UL 1479—Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops. B. UL—Fire Hazard Classifications. 1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Firestopping materials and installation shall conform to the 2015 International Building Code requirements, including fire-resistance ratings and surface-burning characteristics. B. Provide certificate of compliance from local building inspector indicating approval of firestopping materials and installation. 1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. A small amount of hydrogen gas is released as the firestopping foam cures. Use forced-air ventilation when installing if areas of installation have less than 2 cubic feet of free air for each pound of liquid mixture being formed. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRESTOPPING FOAM A. Firestopping foam for duct penetrations through fire-rated assemblies shall be a foamed-in-place silicone elastomer produced from two liquid components. B. Acceptable products include the following, or equal: Fire Barrier Rated Foam, FIP 1 Step by 3M Corporation. Section 07 84 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.02 FIRESTOPPING SEALANT A. Firestopping sealant for piping and conduit penetrations through fire-rated assemblies shall be a single-component silicone elastomer. B. Acceptable products include the following, or equal: Fire Barrier Silicone Sealant 2000 by 3M Corporation. 2.03 DAMMING MATERIAL A. Damming material shall be fire-resistant mineral fiber (if left in place) or .Dther combustible material (if removed), as directed by the appropriate fire-tested designs. 2.04 PRIMER AND WRAP STRIP A. Primer for firestopping sealant shall be 3M Corporation, or equal. B. Wrap strip for firestopping sealant shall be 3M Fire Barrier FS-195 Wrap!$trip, or equal. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Firestopping foam and sealant shall be applied according to manufacturer's written instructions and shall achieve a fire rating equal to rating of construction w rich is penetrated. Substrate shall be free of all combustible materials (except damming material for later removal), loose impediment, oil, and other free liquids. B. Install damming material to establish the thickness and hold the firestoppi ig foam/sealant in place. Follow the manufacturer's installation instructions. All gaps or cracks left after damming materials are in place must be sealed. C. Firestopping Foam: Immediately after mixing, dispense liquid foam in c the penetration opening in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions Do not overfill penetration openings with liquid foam. Foam expands approximately three times its original volume during cure. Follow manufacturer's guidelines. If the opening is not filled when the cured foam has completed its expansion, repeat the installation and cure procedure until the — opening is filled to the desired level. Allow 15 minutes between application of each shot. D. Firestopping Sealant: Apply primer and wrap strip in accordance with manufacturer's instructions prior to installing sealant. Apply sealant to a minimum depth cf 1 1/2 inches and with uniform density and texture. E. Remove combustible damming material after foam/sealant has cured Noncombustible damming material may be left in place. Section 07 84 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.02 QUALITY CONTROL A. Firestopping Foam: 1. Perform manufacturer's four-step in-line quality control check at least once daily and upon changing to a new lot of material in order to review performance of both dispensing equipment and foam product prior to installing penetration seals. The four-step quality check includes evaluation for: snap time (cure rate); foam color and uniformity; foam cell structure; and foam density (weight). 2. Check cured penetration seal after 24-hour cure by removing damming materials to examine seal. 3. Cured foam should completely fill penetration. Fill all remaining gaps with freshly mixed foam or firestopping sealant. 4. Recheck after added material has cured 24 hours. 5. Damming materials required to achieve a fire rating must be returned to the penetration. 6. Clean up spills of liquid components with high-flash mineral spirit solvent, following manufacturer's instructions. 7. If necessary, trim excess cured foam with a sharp knife or blade. B. Firestopping Sealant: 1. Check completed work for complete adhesion and seal 48 hours after sealant application. 2. Clean adjacent surfaces of excess sealant using a compatible solvent in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION Section 07 84 00-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 07 90 00 CAULKING AND SEALANTS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Caulking and sealants on the project, including primer s and backer rod material. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM C920—Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall comply with provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Submit color chart for each sealant used on project. Colors will be selected by CONSULTANT. C. Submit copies of warranty. 1.04 WARRANTY A. Caulked joints shall be weathertight and guaranteed watertight by installer for 2 years from the earlier of either the date established for partial utilization or Substantial Completion of the project. Deliver original guarantee to CITY with copies to CONSULTANT. B. Provide manufacturer's standard 5-year product warranty. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 CAULK—NONSUBMERGED APPLICATIONS—GENERAL A. Caulk for nonsubmerged applications in all locations except floor joints siall be a one-part polyurethane sealant. B. Acceptable products include the following, or equal: 1. Masterseal NP1 by BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC. 2. Vulkem 116 by Tremco, Inc. (exterior applications only). 3. Dymonic 100 by Tremco, Inc. Section 07 90 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.02 CAULK—NONSUBMERGED APPLICATIONS—FLOOR JOINTS A. Caulk for floor joints in nonsubmerged applications shall be a one-part, self-leveling, polyurethane sealant. B. Acceptable products include the following, or equal: 1. SL1 by BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC. 2. Vulkem 45 SSL by Tremco, Inc. 2.03 CAULK—SUBMERGED APPLICATIONS A. Caulk in all submerged applications shall be an NSF/ANSI Standard 01 approved two-part, polysulfide base synthetic rubber sealant. B. Acceptable products include the following, or equal: 1. Thiokol 2235M by PolySpec. 2. Sika Duoflex NS by Sika Corporation. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Backer rod shall be flexible, closed-cell polyethylene rod stock sized to be under at least 25% compression when positioned in the joint. In shallow joints and where backer rod is not used, polyethylene bond breaker tape shall be used. It is essential that the caulk bond to the side of the joint but not to the base of the joint. B. Primer(s) shall be used where required by the manufacturer for the specific product(s) used and the specific application(s) intended. Specific product(s) shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. C. Cleaning fluid shall be methyl ethyl ketone (MEK), methyl isopropyl ketone (MIK), or similar solvent material which will not etch or mar metal finishes and shall be the product of a nationally recognized manufacturer, of type expressly recommended for use with the caulking or sealant compound used. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Seal completely all joints around entire perimeter of all openings in all exterior walls (inside and outside faces), including joints at all exterior doors, windows, louvers, sills, and elsewhere as noted on the drawings and as necessary to seal all open joints in the building in a complete manner. Joints in exterior walls shall be caulked in a completely weathertight manner. Joints between interior walls and concrete ceilings and other interior joints shall be caulked as indicated on the drawings. Caulking not specified in other sections shall be performed under this heading. B. All caulking shall be done in accordance with manufacturer's specifications. Allow minimum 28-day curing period for concrete, grout, or mortar prior to caulking unless requested otherwise. Caulking work shall be done before the final coat of paint is applied except at moving joints which shall be finish painted before caulking or caulking shall be protected during painting. All caulking shall occur only when the temperature is above 40°F. Section 07 90 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. Joints shall be thoroughly cleaned and primed before caulking in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Unless otherwise shown, joints shall be square in cross section 1/2-inch by 1/2-inch and shall comply with manufacturer's joint width/depth ratio limitations. D. Backer rod shall be used in all openings 3/4 inches or more in depth and shall be tightly packed to completely fill the space to 1/2-inch back of face. The 1/2-inch shall then be filled with caulking compound. E. Caulking shall be done by hand gun. Compound shall be driven into oint grooves with sufficient pressure to force out all air and fill joint grooves solidly. Caulkirg where exposed shall be free of wrinkles and shall be uniformly smooth. F. At completion of caulking, clean off all excess material from adjoining surfaces and material. Entire installation shall be left in a perfect appearing weathertight condition. END OF SECTION -- Section 07 90 00-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 08 11 00 STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work included: Thermally-insulated steel doors and frames. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI/SD1-100—Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. In addition to shop drawings and product data, indicate type of primer paint to be used and verify compatibility with field paint system specified. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 THERMALLY-INSULATED DOORS A. Thermally-insulated doors shall be hollow full flush, 1 3/4-inch-thick, 16 gauge steel sheet in accordance with ANSI/SD1-100 with polyurethane core rigid reinforcing full thickness. B. Acceptable products include the following, or equal: 1. Ceco Imperial. 2. Curries 707 Series. 2.02 FABRICATION—DOORS A. Doors shall be fully-sealed, continuously-welded construction with all surface welds, joints, and seams filled and ground smooth. B. Tops and bottoms of doors shall be completely closed with 16 gauge channels. Outside edges of doors shall be flush without depressions. No inverted channels will be allowed. C. Mortise, reinforce, drill, and tap doors to receive hardware. Reinforcement shall be welded within the stiles and rails. Reinforce top rails to accommodate closers on either side and reinforce bottom for kickplate. D. Glass in exterior doors shall be 1-inch thick. Section 08 11 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.03 FRAMES A. Steel door frames shall be made of 14 gauge, cold-rolled, prime-quality s:eel in accordance with ANSI/SD1-100. 2.04 FABRICATION—FRAMES A. Fabricate frames as welded unit. Weld joints continuously through full throat width of frames, including rabbets, soffits, and stops; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. B. Welded frames shall be provided with two steel spreaders temporarily attached to the bottom of both jambs to serve as a brace during shipping and handling. Spreader bars are for bracing only and shall not be used to size the frame opening. C. Frames shall be 2 inches by 5 3/4 inches. Frames shall have 4-inch head member at 7 feet 0-inch doors in masonry walls. D. Fabricate frames with hardware reinforcement plates welded in place. E. Provide anchors appropriate to wall type. F. Provide frames for all steel doors. 2.05 FINISH A. Doors and frames shall receive one coat of rust-inhibitive, shop-applied p-imer paint. Primer paint must be compatible with field-paint system specified. B. Frames shall be finish-painted as specified in Section 09 91 00—Painting i;rior to installation. This includes back sides of door frames. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION—FRAMES A. Install frames in accordance with ANSI/SD1-100. — B. Coordinate installation of frames with wall construction for anchor placement. C. Coordinate installation of frames with installation of doors, hardware, joir sealers, and field painting. D. Set all frames as supplied by manufacturer. E. Frames in masonry walls shall be grouted full. Section 08 11 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.02 INSTALLATION—DOORS A. Install doors in accordance with ANSI/SD1-100. B. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames, hardware, glass and glazing, and field painting. C. Set all doors as supplied by manufacturer. Hang all doors allowing for expansion and contraction at time of setting. D. Set all hardware in accordance with templates as supplied by hardware supplier. E. Cover all exposed hardware until completion of painting and finishing. F. Examine hardware at completion; test, oil, grease, and adjust for perfect operation. 3.03 SCHEDULE A. See Door Schedule on drawings. END OF SECTION Section 08 11 00-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 08 22 10 FIBERGLASS DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work includes: 1. Fiberglass doors. 2. Fiberglass frames for nonrated doors. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 sh311 govern work in this section. 1.02 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's 20-year warranty against failure due to corrosion. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable products include the following, or equal: COF RIM Company, Oshkosh, Wisconsin, or equal. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Resins: 1. Manufacturer's formulation for corrosion-resistant resin system wit light-stabilizing additives. 2. Minimum glass fiber to resin ratio: 40%. B. Anchors: Manufacturer's standard stainless steel expansion anchors for existing openings and stainless steel masonry tee anchors for new construction. C. Fasteners: Stainless steel. D. Glazing: Type specified in Section 08 81 00—Glazing; factory installed. 2.03 DOORS A. Thickness: 1 3/4 inches. B. Thermal Insulating Value: Minimum R value of 11. C. Construction: 1. Core: Polyurethane foam for nonfire-rated doors. 2. Face Sheets: FRP molded in one continuous piece, resin reinforced with hand-laid glass fiber mat, nominal 0.120 inches thick, minimum 15 mil gel-coated surface. Section 08 22 10-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3. Stiles and rails shall be 1 1/2 inch square pultruded fiberglass tubes. Provide polymer blocking for all hardware reinforcing. D. Door Edges: Smooth, seamless finish. E. Seals: Intumescent seals factory-applied around perimeter required for all fire doors. 2.04 FIBERGLASS FRAMES A. Provide fiberglass frames for nonrated doors. B. Construction: One-piece pultruded fiberglass-reinforced plastic, minimum 1/4-inch wall thickness, jamb-to-head joints mitered and reinforced with FRP clips and stainless steel fasteners; providing for performance equivalent to 16 gauge steel frames. C. Frame Profile: 5 3/4 inches deep, 2 inches wide face; double-rabbeted with 5/8-inch-high stop. Provide 4-inch head frames in masonry openings. D. Finish: Gel-coat 15 mils thickness on all exposed surfaces. Color to match doors. 2.05 WINDOWS A. Stops: Pultruded fiberglass-reinforced plastic construction. B. Glazing: Specified in Section 08 81 00—Glazing. C. Sizes: Manufacturer's standards as indicated in Door Schedule. Window sizes for fire-rated doors shall be limited to that permitted by the applicable building code. D. All fasteners shall be 316 stainless steel. 2.06 HARDWARE A. All doors and frames shall be mortised and reinforced with polymer blocking for all hardware in accordance with manufacturer. B. Remainder as specified in Section 08 71 00—Door Hardware and called for in Door Schedule. C. All fasteners shall be 316 stainless steel. 2.07 FINISH A. Doors shall have a 15 mil gel-coat finish. Finish for frames shall be as specified above. B. Color shall be a custom color selected by CITY. Section 08 22 10-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Set all doors and frames as supplied by manufacturer. Use stainless stee masonry anchors to support frame. B. Hang all doors allowing for expansion and contraction at time of setting. C. Set all hardware in accordance with templates as supplied by hardware sUapplier. D. Examine hardware at completion; test, oil, grease, and adjust for perfect :peration. E. Maintain plumb and level tolerances as specified in manufacturer's installation instructions. 3.02 SCHEDULE A. See Door Schedule on the drawings. END OF SECTION Section 08 22 10-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 08 31 13 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work included: Aluminum floor doors and frame units. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 ALUMINUM FLOOR DOORS AND FRAMES A. Acceptable products include the following, or equal: The Bilco Company, Type K as scheduled. B. Type K doors shall be designed for minimum live load of 150 psf with a maximum deflection of 1/150 of span. C. Doors shall be constructed of stiffened 1/4-inch aluminum diamond-pattern plate. D. Hinges shall be through bolted to the door and frame with tamper-proof Type 316 stainless steel lock bolts. E. Type K doors shall have cast steel cam-action hinges that pivot on torsion bars. Doors shall have smooth controlled operation and not be affected by temperature. F. Provide hold-open arm that automatically locks in open position. Provide snap lock with fixed handle mounted to underside of cover. Provide removable exterior turn/lift handle with spring-loaded ball detent to open cover. All hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel for corrosive environment. 2.02 FINISH A. Aluminum floor doors and frames shall have mill finish.Apply bituminous coating to portions of frames in contact with concrete. B. Steel access doors shall have shop-applied prime coat compatible with field paint system specified. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. All aluminum floor/door openings shall be fitted with a permanently installed, fall-through prevention rail and net system that is easily retractable for access to the opening below. This system shall be Hatch Net 121 as manufactured by Safe Approach, Inc., Poland, Maine, or approved equal. Section 08 31 13-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. The fall-through prevention system shall consist of the following components: 1. A polyester safety net manufactured to ANSI A10.11 specification for personnel nets. 2. Extruded aluminum side rails: Aluminum Alloy 6061-T-6 with an ultimate tensile strength of 18 KSI, a yield strength of 8 KSI, and a shear strength of 12 KSI. 3. 316 stainless steel corner hooks. C. Each net assembly will come with a permanently attached label with the following information: Name of manufacturer, identification of net material, date of manufacture, date of prototype test, name of testing agency, and serial number. D. All stainless steel hardware and instructions necessary for proper inst illation of the net system shall be provided by the net system manufacturer. Installation shal be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. E. The complete assembly, including the net, shall be warranted against defects in material and workmanship for manufacturer's standard time period. F. Hold Open Feature: A Type 316 stainless hold open device shall be pr:)vided to lock the cover in the fully open 90 degree position. G. Hardware: All hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ap::proved submittals. Locate units level, plumb, and in proper alignment with adjacent work. 3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces using methods acceptable to the manufacturer that will not damage finish. B. Test units for proper function and adjust until proper operation is achieved.. — C. Repair finishes damaged during installation. D. Restore finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. 3.03 SCHEDULE A. See Door Schedule on the drawings. END OF SECTION -- Section 08 31 13-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 08 33 23 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work includes insulated overhead coiling door with manual operation, operating hardware, and supports. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM A653—Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to the 2015 International Building Code for motor and motor control requirements. B. Products requiring electrical connection shall be listed and classified by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable manufacturers include the following, or equal: Overhead Door Co. Series 625 Insulated Stormtite door, Raynor Series IF, or equal. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Curtain: 1. Curtain slats shall be Type F-2651 flat crown, pitch 2 5/8 inches, 0.040-inch aluminum. Back cover shall be 0.024-inch aluminum. 2. Slat system shall be integral and foamed in place with polyurethane foam nominal 2-pound density applied between the slat and back cover, rising to bond the slat and back cover into an integral member with a thickness of 3/4 inches. 3. End locks shall be used on alternate slats. Provide wind locks as required for 25 psf design wind load. B. Bottom Bar: The bottom bar shall be two carbon angles, minimum thickness 1/8 inch, bolted back-to-back to reinforce the curtain in the guides, and have a loop-type weather seal. C. Guides: 1. Guides shall be three structural steel angles with a minimum thickness of 3/16 inches. 2. Guides shall be equipped with full door height PVC weather seals contacting the exterior and interior curtain surfaces to minimize air flow. Section 08 33 23-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3. Guides shall be insulated full height and shall be equipped with wind lock bars to meet 25 psf design wind load. D. Brackets: 1. Brackets shall be minimum 3/16-inch-thick steel plate to support the barrel, counterbalance, and hood. 2. Provide intermediate support brackets as necessary. E. Counterbalance: 1. Counterbalance shall be helical torsion springs housed in a steel pipe barrel, supporting the curtain with a deflection limited to 0.03 inches per foot of width. 2. Counterbalance shall be adjustable by means of an external adjust ng tension wheel and designed for minimum 20,000 cycles. F. Hood: 1. The hood shall be aluminum minimum. 2. The hood shall have an internal baffle and an external lintel baffle to retard air infiltration. G. Locking: Manual chain hoist-operated doors shall have chain-keeper locks suitable for padlocking. H. Manual Operator: Chain hoist. 2.03 FINISHES A. The curtain and hood shall receive a UV-resistant powder-coat finish with c olor selected from manufacturer's standard colors. B. All nongalvanized, exposed ferrous surfaces shall receive one coat )f manufacturer's standard factory-applied rust-inhibitive primer compatible with field paint. C. All nongalvanized, ferrous surfaces that will become inaccessible after it stallation shall be finish painted as specified in Section 09 91 00—Painting prior to installatic'i. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Door shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions an 1 standards by an authorized representative. B. Upon completion of installation, operating devices and controls shall be adjusted and lubricated to operate properly. 3.02 SCHEDULE A. See Door Schedule on the drawings. END OF SECTION Section 08 33 23-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 08 36 13 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Electrically operated insulated overhead sectional door. 2. Operating hardware, controls, track, and supports. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM A653—Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. B. ASTM E283—Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors. C. ANSI/NFPA70—National Electrical Code. 1.03 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. Total air leakage through the doorway opening at a wind velocity of 15 mph shall be 0.08 cfm per square foot or less in accordance with ASTM E283. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Submit air leakage test data done by lab in accordance with ASTM E283. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to the Iowa State Building Code (2015 IBC) for motor and motor control requirements. B. Products requiring electrical connection shall be listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. Section 08 36 13-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 INSULATED DOORS A. Thermally insulated sectional overhead doors shall be nominal 2 inches thick, ribbed, embossed panels with 0.016-inch-thick, 27-gauge exterior steel face and minimum 0.015-inch-thick, 28-gauge interior steel face in accordance with ASTM A653 and polyurethane core. B. Acceptable products include the following, or equal: Clopay Intellicore 3720. 2.02 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS A. Electric operator shall be Liftmaster Logic 5.0 Jackshift operator, or equa , 1/3 horsepower, 115 volts, single phase. Operator shall be equipped with quick-release equipment for manual operation in case of emergency or power failure. B. Provide one interior NEMA 12 3-button control station for each door, open/ ;lose/stop, 24-volt circuit. C. Provide one NEMA 4X exterior, surface-mounted, open/close/stop contrc I station for each door. D. Electric operator shall have electric sensing edge to stop and reverse the door upon contacting an object while closing. Sensing edge shall be powered from the electric operator and monitored in accordance with UL 325:2010. Sensing edge shall be as manufactured by Miller Edge Model MGO20Y, with 25 feet of factory-provided cable, or equal. E. Electric operator shall have infrared optoelectronic sensors mounted maximum 6 inches above the floor to stop and reverse the door upon sensing an object while closing. Provide manufacturer's mounting adapters. Sensors shall be powered from the electric operator and monitored in accordance with UL 325:2010. Sensors shall have visible LEDs to indicated power and proper alignment and shall utilize self-adjusting light intensity. Sensors shall be constructed of polypropylene and rated NEMA 4X. Sensors shall be as manufactured by Vitector Model OSE with 50 feet of factory-provided cable, or equal. Sens.rs shall be tested with the electric operator to comply with UL 325:2010. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Provide windows as shown on drawings. B. Provide springs rated at 25,000 cycles. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Insulated doors shall have a thermal break between exterior and interior feces. B. Insulated doors shall have joint seals between sections, jamb seals, top eal, and a U-type threshold gasket. C. Track shall be 2 inches, minimum 14 gauge galvanized steel. Provide h gh-lift track on all sectional overhead doors in Dewatering Building. Section 08 36 13-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 D. Doors with electric operators shall be provided without interior slide lock. 2.05 FINISH A. Exterior face shall be primed with a baked-on polyester primer and finished with a baked-on polyester finish coat. Color shall be selected by CITY. B. Interior face shall be primed and finish-coated with baked-on polyester. Color shall be selected by CITY. C. All other ferrous surfaces, except galvanized surface and working parts of machinery, shall receive one shop-coat of rust-inhibitive metal primer. Primer shall be compatible with field-paint system. Those areas that will become inaccessible after installation shall be finish painted as specified in Section 09 91 00—Painting prior to installation. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Erection shall be performed in accordance with the manufacturer's standards and instructions by their authorized representatives. B. All required casing materials shall be provided by CONTRACTOR. C. Upon completion of installation, operating devices and controls shall be adjusted and lubricated to operate properly. 3.02 SCHEDULE A. See Door Schedule on the drawings. END OF SECTION Section 08 36 13-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 08 51 13 ALUMINUM WINDOWS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work includes exterior and interior extruded aluminum window frames. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. AAMA 101—Specifications for Aluminum Prime Windows and Sliding Glass Doors. B. ASTM E283—Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Wa Is, and Doors. C. ASTM E330—Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Wa Is, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. D. ASTM E331—Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. E. ASTM B221—Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Wire, Shape, and Tube F. AAMA 608.1—Specification and Inspection Methods for Electrolytically Deposited Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design and size components to withstand a minimum static air pressure c:ifference of 90 psf for exterior windows and 60 psf for interior windows in accordance with ASTM E330. B. Limit member deflection to 1/175 with full recovery of glazing materials. -� C. System to accommodate, without damage to components or deterioration of seals, movement between window and perimeter framing, deflection of lintel. D. Limit air leakage through assembly to 0.10 cfm/sq ft of wall area measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 6.24 psf as measured in accordance with ASTM E283. E. Water leakage: None when measured in accordance with ASTM E331 th a test pressure difference of 10 psf. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. Section 08 51 13-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 EXTERIOR WINDOWS A. Exterior window frames shall be 2-inch-deep extruded aluminum, in accordance with ASTM B221, with thermobreak. B. Acceptable products include the following, or equal: 1. Kawneer Sealair 8225T Isolock, Fixed and Casement Windows. 2. Oldcastle Signature Series 12P Fixed and Casement Windows. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Aluminum extrusions shall be not less than 0.125 inches thick. B. All fabrication and erection fasteners shall be 18-8 stainless steel. C. Unless shown otherwise, provide 0.040-inch aluminum sill plates on exterior of window. Finish shall match window. D. Permit internal drainage weep holes and channels to migrate moisture to exterior. Provide internal drainage of glazing spaces to exterior through weep holes. E. Nominal window height and length for all windows shall be as shown in the schedule. CONTRACTOR shall measure all openings and coordinate sizes with window supplier. 2.03 FINISH A. Finish on all exposed aluminum shall be architectural class 1, anodic coating, confirming to AAMA 608.1. Color to be selected by CITY. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Field verify wall opening sizes. B. Frames shall be securely attached to masonry as recommended by the window manufacturer. 3.02 SCHEDULE A. See Window Schedule on the drawings. END OF SECTION Section 08 51 13-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Hardware to fully equip all doors. 2. Thresholds and weatherstripping. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. NFPA 80—Fire Doors and Windows. 1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Hardware shall conform to the Iowa State Building Code for requirem ;nts applicable to fire-rated doors and frames. Hardware shall comply with NFPA 80 and shall be properly stamped or labeled for easy identification. B. Hardware for all buildings shall comply with barrier-free requirements. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 LOCKSETS AND LATCHSETS A. Locksets and latchsets without stainless steel (ss) finish shall be Sarge nt cylindrical type Series 10L, Schlage D Line, Best Access Systems 9K Series, or equal. B. Locksets and latchsets shall have 2 3/4-inch backset. Strikes shall be cur✓ed lip. — C. Lockset and latchset numbers listed in Paragraph 3.02 Schedule are Sargent (listed first) followed by Schlage (listed second in parentheses). -- D. Provide removable core brass 6- or 7-pin cylinders for all locksets and lat:,hsets. 2.02 EXIT DEVICES A. Exit devices shall be Sargent 8815 x ETL Series, or equal, and shall be equipped with reinforced cross bars and functions as indicated on the hardware sets. Tr e exit device shall be operated by a lever from the exterior side. Section 08 71 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.03 HINGES A. Butt hinges shall be Stanley FBB 191, Hager BB 1191, or equal, full mortise, ball bearing, nonferrous, nonrising, loose pin, and flat bottom tip, unless otherwise specified. Provide three 4 1/2-inch by 4 1/2-inch hinges per door for doors 7 feet or less in height with one additional hinge for each additional 30 inches or fraction thereof, unless otherwise specified. Provide additional hinges or heavyweight hinges for all doors that are over 36 inches wide, unless specified otherwise. Finish on aluminum entrance doors shall match framing. 2.04 DOOR CLOSERS A. Door closers shall be LCN Series 1460 for exterior doors and 1461 for interior doors, or equal. Provide aluminum finish on closers. Provide full covers. Door closers for locations noted as (ss) shall have the SRI primer for corrosion resistance. Door closers specified in paragraph 3.02 are LCN. (H-Hold Open). 2.05 OVERHEAD DOOR HOLDERS A. Overhead door holders shall be Glynn Johnson GJ 81 H Series, or equal, unless otherwise specified. Holders for locations noted as (ss) shall be fabricated with stainless steel components. Numbers specified in paragraph 3.02 are Glynn Johnson. 2.06 SURFACE BOLTS A. Surface bolts shall be 8-inch Ives 1630 series, or equal. At doors with (ss) hardware, bolts shall be 8-inch Ives 1640 Series, or equal. 2.07 KICKPLATES A. Kickplates shall be Rockwood, or equal, 6 inches high. Kickplate width shall be 2 inches less than door width. 2.08 DOOR STOPS A. Provide wall- or floor-mounted door stops at all interior doors. Stops shall be Glynn Johnson GJFB-13, GJ60C, or GJ6OW for locations noted as (ss), or equal. 2.09 THRESHOLD AND WEATHERSTRIPPING A. All exterior doors shall be weatherstripped with Reese DS75, National Guard Products, Inc. 156, or equal, weatherstripping. Provide Reese 323C, Pemko 315AN, or -` equal, sweeps; and Reese S425A, Pemko 171A (provide Reese S439A, Pemko 273A, for areas with thicker flooring on one side), or equal, thresholds. Exterior doors without mullion shall have Reese No. 87, Pemko 352A, or equal, positive sealing astragal. 2.10 KEYING A. Doors shall not be keyed. 2.11 FINISH A. Finish for all hardware, except as noted below, shall be US 26D or US 32D where stainless steel (ss) hardware is specified in paragraph 2. Section 08 71 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. Finish for surface bolts shall be US 26D; finish for kickplates shall be 32C C. Where stainless steel (ss) is specified, all hardware, includinc; threshold and weatherstripping, shall be installed with stainless steel fasteners. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide finish hardware to fully equip all doors. B. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.02 SCHEDULE A. Provide the following hardware groups in the amounts indicated on the door schedule or required for a complete and proper installation: Group 1 Exit Device-8815 ETL (ss) Door Closer-1460 (ss) (Parallel Arm) Hinges and Kickplate (ss) Group 2 Surface bolts—One top and bottom Overhead Door Holder GJ 81 H—HD Hinges and Kickplate Group 3 Surface bolts—One top and bottom (ss) Overhead Door Holder GJ 81 H—HD (ss) Hinges and Kickplate (ss) Group 4 Latchset 10U15 (ND10S) Door Closer-1460 BF (Regular Arm) Hinges and Kickplate Group 5 Exit Device 8815 x ETL Door Closer-1460 BF (Regular arm) Hinges and Kickplates END OF SECTION Section 08 71 00-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 08 81 00 GLAZING PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work includes glass and glazing for windows and door lights. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. GANA—Glass Association of North America. 1.03 WARRANTY A. Exterior insulating glass shall be provided with a 10-year warranty against failure of the seal. B. Coated glass shall be provided with a 10-year warranty against peeling, cracking, or deterioration of the coating. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 EXTERIOR GLASS A. Glass in exterior metal windows and exterior door lights shall be 1-inch-thick insulating glass — consisting of two pieces of 1/4-inch float glass separated by a 1/2-inch air space. B. Acceptable manufacturers include the following, or equal: Oldcastle Glass Company, PPG Solarban 70XL. C. Glass shall be Low-E with clear tint outboard light and clear tint inboard light with the following maximum values, or equal. U-Value Shading Coefficient Winter Summer SHGC Clear .32 .28 .26 .27 D. Exterior windows adjacent to doors and exterior door lights shall have tempered glass in compliance with the governing building code. Section 08 81 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.02 GLAZING COMPOUNDS AND ACCESSORIES A. Glazing system shall consist of a polyisobutylene-butyl tape, liquid polymer sealant, and vinyl roll-in strip. B. Acceptable products include the following, or equal: 1. Tremco Vision Strip System. 2. General Electric Silglaze. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Glazing of windows shall be from the interior. B. Accessories such as setting blocks, clips, etc., shall be provided to prope ly set glass. C. Obtain sizes from work at the site or from the manufacturer of work into which the materials will be set. Responsibility for the correctness of measurements shall be assumed by CONTRACTOR. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Comply with "Glazing Manual" by Glass Association of North America (GANA), except as specifically recommended otherwise by manufacturers of the glass and glazing materials. B. Completed installation shall be water- and airtight. END OF SECTION Section 08 81 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 09 91 00 PAINTING PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Surface preparation and application of paints and coatings. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM B117—Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog)Apparatus. B. ASTM D2247—Standard Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100 % Relative Humidity. C. ASTM D3363—Standard Test Method for Film Hardness by Pencil Test. D. ASTM D4060—Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by the Taber Abraser. E. ASTM D4541—Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Testers. F. ASTM D4585—Standard Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings Using Controlled Condensation. G. SSPC—The Society for Protective Coatings—Steel Structures Painting Manual. H. NACE—National Association of Corrosion Engineers. I. ICRI—International Concrete Repair Institute. J. Federal Register—Code of Federal Regulations (CFR). K. Federal Register—Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA). L. Federal Register—Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (CERCLA). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Shop primer proposed for use shall be submitted with all material and equipment submittals. All shop primers shall be of the same generic type and quality as those specified herein. Section 09 91 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. Submit two copies of manufacturer's Safety Data Sheets (SDS) for each type of paint with each shop drawing submittal. SDS sheets shall be posted at the construction site at all times painting is in progress. D. Substitution submittals shall include performance test data, as certified by a qualified testing laboratory, for the ASTM tests specified in paragraph 2.01. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: All paints, surface preparation, and applicat on methods shall conform to federal requirements for allowable exposure to lead and other hazardous substances. B. Prepainting Meeting: 1. A prepainting meeting shall be held immediately following the project preconstruction conference. The prepainting meeting is to be held prior to any material and equipment that requires painting is delivered to the site. 2. CONTRACTOR, the paint subcontractor, and the paint manufacture-'s representative shall be present to review the specifications and project scope. 3. The paint manufacturer's representative shall review progress at the site as requested by CONSULTANT. These are generally expected to be prior to nonthly progress meetings. 1.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Furnish testing apparatus as applicable for observing surface preparation, testing atmospheric conditions and testing coatings, prior to beginning surface preparation. Provide the following apparatus: 1. One set of U.S. Department of Commerce thickness calibration plates, certified by the National Bureau of Standards, to test dry film thickness. 2. One wet-film thickness gauge. 3. One dry-film thickness gauge, Mikrotest III, 0-40 mils with calibration standard approved i by the Bureau of Standards. 4. One Bacharach Sling Psychrometer, Model 12-7011. 5. Tinker and Razor Model M-1 Holiday Detector and recommended wetting agent. 6. One set of SSPC-VIS 1-89 Visual Standards for Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel. B. Provide access via scaffolding or staging for inspection. C. Entire surface of coated submerged concrete shall be tested with holiday cetector. Mark and repair all pinholes, then retest until no pinholes are found. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Materials shall be delivered to the site in original containers with labels intact and seals unbroken. B. Drop cloths shall be used in all areas where painting is done to fully prate, t other surfaces. C. Oily rags and waste must be removed from the building each night or kept in an appropriate metal container. Section 09 91 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. CONTRACTOR shall dry-heat, dehumidify, and ventilate to obtain painting conditions recommended by the paint manufacturer during surface preparation, application, and cure. B. Relative humidity conditions as specified by the paint manufacturer's data sheet shall be adhered to. This includes times in which supplemental heat is used. Supplemental heat shall be indirect-fired hot air furnaces or electric heat. Open-flame heaters shall not be used. C. No unprotected, unheated exterior painting shall be undertaken when damp weather appears probable, nor when the temperature of the substrate is below 55°F, unless approval in writing is received from the paint manufacturer. 1.08 COLOR SELECTIONS A. Provide color charts for all coatings being used on the project. After initial selection of colors by CITY, provide draw down samples of selected colors for CITY's final approval. For stained wood, provide specified wood species sample with selected color for final approval. B. CONTRACTOR shall provide a summary sheet at the completion of the project listing the finish paint products used and the manufacturer's color identification for each item painted. This summary sheet should be submitted to CONSULTANT and CITY for review. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. All materials required for painting shall be types and quality as manufactured by Tnemec Company, Inc., Sherwin Williams Company, International Devoe, Carboline, PPG Protective and Marine Coatings, or equal, unless noted otherwise in the schedule. B. Where thinning is necessary, only the products of the manufacturer furnishing the paint will be allowed. All such thinning shall be done strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. C. Paint and paint products of Tnemec Company and Sherwin Williams, listed in the following specifications, are set up as standard of quality. International Devoe, Carboline, and PPG Protective and Marine Coatings have preapproved equivalent products that shall be used. Other manufacturer's products will be considered as a substitution if CONTRACTOR and paint manufacturer certify that the products offered are recommended for the service intended, are compatible with the shop primers used, are equal in solids content and composition, and are of the same type. Submittal shall include the following performance data as certified by a qualified testing laboratory. ASTM Specifications shall be the latest revision: 1. Abrasion—ASTM D4060, CS-17 Wheel, 1,000 grams load. 2. Adhesion—ASTM D4541. 3. Hardness—ASTM D3363. 4. Humidity—ASTM D2247 and D4585. 5. Salt (Fog) Spray—ASTM B117. Section 09 91 00-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION A. General: 1. All surfaces to be painted shall be prepared as specified herein and by the manufacturer's published data sheet and label directions. The objective shall be to obtain a uniform, clean, and dry surface. 2. No field painting shall be done before the prepared surfaces are observed by CONSULTANT. Surfaces painted without such observation shall be abrasive-blast-cleaned and repainted. 3. Prior to field-blasting, a sample of the blast abrasive shall be provided to CONSULTANT for pH testing. Additional samples of subsequent deliveries or batche of blast abrasive shall be provided to CONSULTANT for pH testing. 4. For on-site abrasive-blasting, low-dust, low-silica content material sr all be used. Coal slag abrasive shall be used on pipe and ferrous materials. Staurolite abrasive shall be used on concrete and concrete block. 5. Quality of surface preparations listed below are considered a r iinimum. If paint manufacturer requires a better preparation for a particular application, it shall be considered a requirement of this specification. 6. All concrete surfaces shall be tested for moisture in accordance with ASTM D4263 and, if necessary, F1869. Surfaces shall also be verified that the pH of the cleaned concrete surface to be coated is within the range of 8 to 11. B. Ferrous Metal: 1. All ferrous metal to be primed in the shop shall have all rust, dust, and mill scale, as well as all other foreign substances, removed by abrasive blasting. Cleaned metal shall be primed or pretreated immediately after cleaning to prevent new rusting. 2. All ferrous metals not primed in the shop shall be abrasive-blasted in the field prior to application of the primer, pretreatment, or paint. 3. Abrasive blasting of metals in the shop shall be in accordance with SSPC-SP 10 Near White Blast Cleaning. Abrasive blasting of metals in the field for immersion service shall be in accordance with SSPC-SP 10 Near White Blast Cleaning. Abrasive blasting of metals in the field for nonimmersion service shall be in accordance with SSPC-SP6 Commercial Blast Cleaning. 4. Solvent cleaning in accordance with SSPC-SP1 shall precede all abrasive-blasting operations. 5. Ductile iron pipe shall be prepared by abrasive blasting per National Association of Pipe Fabricators NAPF 500-03-04 Abrasive Blast Cleaning. 6. Existing motors, pumps, and piping which are to remain and are designated to be repainted shall be power tool cleaned to remove all existing coatings as specified in SSPC-SP15 Commercial Grade Power Tool Cleaning or NAPF 500-03-03 Power Tool Cleaning. 7. Existing ferrous metal materials which are impractical to abrasive-blast onsite and impractical to remove from the site shall be power-tool cleaned o bare metal as specified in SSPC-SP15 Commercial Grade Power Tool Cleaning or NAPF 500-03-03 Power Tool Cleaning. 8. Existing ferrous metal items in nonimmersion conditions to be painted shall be abrasive blasted to remove all existing coatings in accordance with SSPC-SP-6 Commercial Blast Cleaning or NAPF 500-03-04 Abrasive Blast Cleaning. 9. Existing ferrous metal in immersion conditions to be painted shall be abrasive blasted to remove all existing coatings in accordance with SSPC-SP10 Near White Blast Cleaning or NAPF 500-03-04 Abrasive Blast Cleaning. Section 09 91 00-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 10. Prior to finish coating, all primed areas that are damaged shall be cleaned and spot-primed. C. Concrete: 1. All concrete surfaces, including precast concrete to be painted, shall be cleaned of all form oil, curing compound, and other foreign matter. Concrete floors containing oil and grease residues shall be cleaned with detergent to remove all residues. 2. All new concrete and precast concrete walls, floors, and ceilings shall be abrasive-blast cleaned in accordance with SSPC-SP13/NACE No. 6 in order to prepare the surfaces for adherence of the painting systems as specified. Abrasive blasting of concrete shall result in a surface profile in accordance with ICRI No. 03732 at CSP-3 to CSP-5. 3. Bug holes, pits, voids, and cracks shall be filled as specified in Section 03 30 00—Cast-in-Place Concrete without placing a friable sand-cement surface overall. The dried surface shall be stoned down. 4. Paint manufacturer shall observe and approve the surface preparation method and the -- prepared surface prior to painting. 5. After cleaning, the surface shall be washed and all dust, sand, and loose particles shall be removed by vacuuming. If CONTRACTOR elects to blow the surfaces off with air, it shall be oil-free air, and the methods shall conform to OSHA requirements. D. Existing Concrete and Concrete Block: 1. All previously coated walls and ceilings of concrete and concrete block of existing structures, except as noted, shall be pole-sanded and hand-sanded to remove all old peeling paints as well as roughen-up existing paints. 2. All concrete and precast concrete walls,floor, and ceiling which are not currently painted but are scheduled for painting shall be abrasive-blasted in accordance with SSPC-SP13/NACE No. 6. Abrasive blasting of concrete shall result in a texture similar to 40-60 grit sandpaper (ICRI SP3-5). 3. Bug holes, pits, voids, and cracks that are opened up shall be filled with an appropriate filler. 4. Paint manufacturer shall observe and approve the surface preparation method and the prepared surface prior to painting. 5. After cleaning, the surface shall be washed, and all dust, sand, and loose particles shall be removed by vacuuming. If CONTRACTOR elects to blow the surfaces off with air, it shall be oil-free air, and the methods shall conform to OSHA requirements. E. Galvanized: Where galvanized items are not submerged or buried, they shall be cleaned with nonhydrocarbon solvent cleaner (such as Clean N Etch, or equal) in accordance with SSPC-SP1 and shall be abrasive-blasted in accordance with SSPC-SP16 Brush-Off Blast Cleaning. F. Copper: Where copper piping is not submerged or buried, it shall be solvent-cleaned in accordance with SSPC-SP1 and shall be lightly sanded. G. PVC and CPVC: All PVC and CPVC to be painted shall be solvent-cleaned in accordance with SSPC-SP1 and shall be lightly sanded. H. Aluminum: Where listed in the Schedule to be painted, it shall be solvent-cleaned in accordance with SSPC-SP1 and shall be lightly sanded. I. Dust Controls: 1. All motors, pumps, mechanical equipment, and electrical controls shall be wrapped in 6 mil opaque plastic sheeting and taped in place with 3-inch-wide tape where abrasive blasting or spray coating application is being performed. Section 09 91 00-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2. Plastic sheeting shall be provided with continuous filtered clean air supply to create a positive pressure relative to surrounding spaces. -- 3.02 APPLICATION A. All materials shall be used as specified by the manufacturer's publishes data sheets and label directions. B. No paint shall be applied on a wet or damp surface and in no case until the preceding coat is dry and hard. Each coat shall be allowed to dry in accordance with manufacturer's data sheets before the next coat is applied. C. Drying time shall be construed to mean "under normal conditions." Where conditions are other than normal because of the weather or because painting must be done in confined spaces, other drying times will be necessary. D. Additional coats of paint shall not be applied, nor shall units be returned to service until paints are thoroughly dry and cured. E. Steel that will be inaccessible in the completed work shall receive the final coat before enclosure. F. Paint shall be applied to provide an opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. Tops and bottoms of walls and areas that are "cut-in" by brush prior to rolling shall have a uniform appearance in comparison with adjoining surfaces. G. Concrete block walls shall be back-rolled to achieve a pinhole-free surface coat. H. Walls and ceiling surfaces shall receive a minimum of one coat of paint before surface-mounted items such as conduits, boxes, piping, etc., are installed on these surfaces. I. Crevices and other hard-to-apply areas shall be back-rolled/back-brushed in conjunction with application of the first field coat of primer or intermediate coat. This includes, but is not limited to, between pipe flanges, pipe flange/pipe barrel joints, equipment fittings, and other narrow openings. J. No paint shall be applied to new or existing surfaces until joints have been caulked according to Section 07 90 00 requirements, except at moving joints which shall be finish-painted before caulking or caulking shall be protected during painting. K. For PVC and CPVC piping, unions and valves shall not be painted. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Examination of work on the site by the manufacturer's representative sl all be performed when requested by CONSULTANT. 3.04 CLEANING A. All stains and marks shall be removed from other surfaces upon completion of the work. Section 09 91 00-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.05 SCHEDULE A. General: 1. At the completion of the project, all painted surfaces which have been damaged shall be repainted or touched-up. 2. See Finish Schedule on the drawings for an additional reference for areas to be painted. 3. The painter shall use some discretion in what should and should not be painted. Do not paint over labels and other information, bronze, machined surfaces, moving parts where painting may impair movement, hot surfaces which may peel, etc. If in doubt whether a part should be painted, ask CONSULTANT. 4. Products listed first are Tnemec and second are Sherwin Williams. B. New Work: 1. All new work done by all trades shall be painted by CONTRACTOR in accordance with the following schedule and in accordance with paint manufacturer's recommendation. It is the intent of these specifications that all non-galvanized ferrous metal items scheduled for painting be shop-primed. If items are not shop-coated, surfaces shall be prepared and painted in the field as specified. If any items of new construction are not listed, CONTRACTOR shall request paint system from CONSULTANT, and the items shall be painted as part of this Contract without additional cost. 2. Interior concrete block walls and concrete walls: One filler coat of Epoxoblock WB 1254, Kem Cati-Coat HS, and two coats Series 66HS Hi-Build Epoxoline, Macropoxy 646. Note: Paint shall be roller- or brush-applied to concrete sound-absorptive block. 3. All exposed concrete ceilings (ceilings of water-containing tanks are not considered exposed): Two coats of Series 66HS Hi-Build Epoxoline, Macropoxy 646. 4. Cast or ductile iron; not submerged or buried (including pipes to be insulated): One shop coat of 66HS-1255 Hi-Build Epoxoline, Macropoxy 646 Beige as primer; a. Touch-up prime coat prior to finish coating; and apply either: (1) Two coats of 66HS Hi-Build Epoxoline II, Macropoxy 646 for interior surfaces, or (2) One coat of 66HS Hi-Build Epoxoline II, Macropoxy 646, and one coat of 1074 Endura-Shield, Acrolon 218HS for exterior surfaces. 5. Cast or ductile iron, tar coated; buried: Not painted. 6. Cast or ductile iron, submerged: a. One shop coat Series 1 Omnithane (20HS or 66HS-1255 Epoxoline), Dura-Plate 235 Beige as primer. b. Touch-up prime coat prior to finish coating and one stripe coat on all edges of 66HS Epoxoline, Dura-Plate 235. c. Two coats of Series 66HS-Hi-Build Epoxoline II, (one coat) Sher-Glass FF. 7. Steel, machinery, and equipment; not submerged (including pipes to be insulated): a. One shop coat of 66HS-1255 Hi-Build Epoxoline, Macropoxy 646 Beige as primer. b. Touch-up primer prior to finish coat, and either: (1) Two coats of 66HS Hi-Build Epoxoline II, Macropoxy 646 for interior surfaces; or (2) One coat of 66HS Hi-Build Epoxoline II, Macropoxy 646; and one coat of 1074 Endura-Shield, Acrolon 218HS for exterior surfaces. FIRST FIELD COAT SHALL BE APPLIED PRIOR TO INSTALLATION TO SURFACES INACCESSIBLE AFTER INSTALLATION INCLUDING BACK SIDES OF DOOR FRAMES. SEE DIVISION 08 FOR FACTORY-APPLIED DOOR PRIMERS. Section 09 91 00-7 4463.004/City Contract No.994 8. Motors, gear drives, and doors delivered with nonepoxy primers: a. Degrease per SSPC-SP1. b. Lightly hand-sand per SSPC-SP2. c. Apply one coat 135-1255 Chembuild Beige, Macropoxy 646 Beige. d. Apply two finish coats as follows: (1) Two coats of 66HS Hi-Build Epoxoline II, Macropoxy 646 fo• interior surfaces, or (2) One coat of 66HS Hi-Build Epoxoline II, Macropoxy 646 and one coat of 1074 Endura-Shield, Acrolon 218HS for exterior surfaces. 9. Steel, machinery, and equipment, submerged: a. One shop coat Series 1 Omnithane (20HS or 66HS-1255 Epox)line), Dura-Plate 235 Beige as primer. b. Touch-up prime coat prior to finish coating, and one stripe coat on all edges of 66HS Hi-Build Epoxoline, Dura-Plate 235. c. Two coats of 66HS H-Build Epoxoline, (one coat) Sher-Glass FF. 10. Galvanized, copper, brass, CPVC, and PVC; not submerged or buried: a. One coat of 66HS-1255 Hi-Build Epoxoline II, Macropoxy 646, and either: b. Two coats of 66HS Hi-Build Epoxoline, Macropoxy 646 for interior surfaces, or c. One coat of 66HS Hi-Build Epoxoline, Macropoxy 646, and one coat of 1074 Endura-Shield, Acrolon 218HS for exterior surfaces. 11. Insulation of equipment, pipes, and ductwork: a. Two coats of Series 1029 Endurotone, DTM Acrylic B66100. b. Colored PVC jacketing shall not be painted. 12. Galvanized, copper, CPVC, and PVC; submerged or buried: Not pair ted. 13. Aluminum items: a. Exposed areas of structural items such as railings and grating shell not be painted. b. For structural items in contact with concrete, See Division 05. 14. Stainless steel: Not painted. C. Existing Areas: Existing areas damaged by removal of existing work anc/or installation of new work shall be repainted to match existing and in accordance with the schedule for new work. Existing equipment and structures shall be painted in accordance .vith the following schedule and as listed in the Finish Schedule, or as noted on the drawing p. 1. PVC and plastic piping: a. Hand sand. b. Solvent clean. c. Coat in accordance with item 10 of new work. 2. Ductile iron piping: a. Remove existing coating and prepare as specified. b. Coat in accordance with items 4 or 6 of new work with shop primer replaced by field primer. 3. Steel handrails, stairs-interior, monorails, lintels, etc.: a. Remove all existing coatings and prepare as specified. b. Prime and coat per new item 7. 4. Precast and Cast-in-Place Concrete Walls and Ceilings—Interior whicl remain exposed and are currently painted. a. Prepare as specified. b. Coat in accordance with item 3 of new work. 5. Precast and cast-in-place concrete and concrete block walls, ceilings and floors which are currently unfinished. a. Prepare as specified. b. Coat per new items 2 or 3. Section 09 91 00-8 4463.004/City Contract No.994 6. Interior concrete block walls which are currently painted and remain exposed: a. Prepare and overcoat as specified. b. Provide spot masonry filler coat as needed and two finish coats per Item 2 of new work. 7. Drywall: Prepare and finish coat per new item 14 except for primer. 8. Insulation of Equipment and Pipes: Prepare and coat per new item 11. D. Coverage: 1. Dry mil thickness shall conform to those specified. Mil test measurement shall conform to SSPC Steel Structures Painting Manual. Dry Film Thickness (DFT) shall be verified in accordance with SSPC-PA2. 2. The coatings listed will provide the mil thickness given when applied at the coverages listed. Upon the request of CONSULTANT, such surfaces shall be checked by the painter with a calibrated mil thickness gauge and any deficiencies found in the film shall be remedied by additional coat(s) at the expense of CONTRACTOR. 3. On masonry, application rates will vary according to surface texture; however, in no case shall the manufacturer's stated coverage rate be exceeded. On porous surfaces, it shall be the painter's responsibility to achieve a protective and decorative pinhole-free finish either by decreasing the coverage rate or by applying additional coats of paint. 4. Coverages reflect manufacturer's recommendations using spray application techniques. Where brushing or rolling is specified or performed at the discretion of the painter, one additional coat, minimum, will be required to achieve total DFT thickness as specified and recommended by the manufacturer. Dry Mil** Sq. Ft.** Thickness Coverage Per Coat Products 1029 Endurotone, DTM Acrylic B66100 200 66HS Hi-Build Epoxoline II, Macropoxy 646 Steel or Impervious Substrate Primer Coat --- 4.0 Steel or Impervious Substrate Intermediate Coat(s) --- 5.0 Steel or Impervious Substrate Finish coat --- 5.0 135-1255 Chembuild, Macropoxy 646 335 4.0 Steel Doors --- 3.0 1074 Endura-Shield II, Acrolon 218HS --- 2.5 Epoxoblock WB 1254, Kem Cati-Coat HS 80 66HS Hi-Build Epoxoline, Macropoxy 646 250 (Masonry and Concrete) Series1 Omnithane, DuraPlate 235 (Primer) 3.0, 5.0 66HS HI-Build Epoxoline (Submerged) 6.0 Sher-Glass FF (Submerged) 12.0 ** Roller or brush application requires two or more coats to obtain recommended film thickness. No allowance is made here for overspray, waste in handling, mixing, or application. Final total dry film thickness (DFT) shall be equal to that specified. Paint submittals shall note where roller or brush application is proposed and the paint manufacturer's recommendations of number of coats to achieve the required thickness shall be noted. Primer, intermediate and/or final surface colors shall be of contrasting colors to assure coverage. Section 09 91 00-9 4463.004/City Contract No.994 E. Pipe Colors: Colors are to be selected by CITY, with the following piping olors used where applicable. Match existing piping colors, where applicable. Pipe color shal be in accordance with the requirements of the Iowa Administrative Code. WASTEWATER PIPING COLORS Pipe Type 10 States Standards (2014 Wastewater) Raw sludge line Gray Sludge recirculation suction line Brown Sludge drawoff line Brown Sludge recirculation discharge line Brown WAS, TWAS, primary sludge, primary Brown scum/TAN/Sludge Biogas Orange Natural gas Orange Potable water Light Blue Sewage (wastewater) Gray Compressed air Dark Green Instrument air - _ Heating hot water (buildings or Blue with 6-inch red band spaced 30 inches digesters) apart Plumbing drains and vents Black Polymer Unpainted Nonpotable water (including W2) Dark Blue Raw Water - Effluent after clarification - Ferric Chloride Orange Electrical Conduit - F. Shop Finish Painting: The following items shall have factory-applied finishes and will not require field painting. CONTRACTOR shall field touch-up any damaged areas with factory-provided touch-up coating. 1. Sectional overhead doors and overhead coiling doors. 2. Aluminum windows, doors and entrances. 3. Fiberglass doors, equipment, structures, stairs, and railing. 4. Hoists, trolleys, and cranes. 5. Factory-finished HVAC equipment. Rooftop units are to be field-paintf.,d. 6. Chemical feed system pumps and accessories. 7. Submersible pumps. 8. Centrifuge dewatering equipment. 9. Trilobe positive displacement blowers. 10. Compressed air systems (air compressors, after coolers and refrigerant dryer). 11. Aeration equipment. 12. Submersible mixers. 13. Motor control centers. 14. Supervisory control centers. 15. Switchgear. 16. Permanent sump pumps. END OF SECTION Section 09 91 00-10 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 09 96 35 CHEMICAL-RESISTANT COATING PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work includes high-performance chemical-resistant epoxy coating system. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Submit copy of manufacturer's Safety Data Sheets (SDS) for each product. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator shall have minimum 5 year's of satisfactory documented experience on projects of similar size and scope. B. Furnish primers, pretreatments, thinners, and finish coats by the same manufacturer. 1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Storage and application temperatures shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable manufacturers include the following, or equal: Tnemec Company, Inc.; Sherwin Williams. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Primer shall be compatible with coating; Series 201 Epoxoprime, Corobond Epoxy Primer, or equal. B. Coating for floor and tank base in chemical containment area shall be chemical-resistant, Novolac epoxy coatings, Tnemec Series 239 Chemtread, Cor-cote HCR Novolac intermediate coatings,followed by Series 282, Core-Cote HCR FF Novolac top coat or equal. C. Coating for walls, as shown on drawings, shall be Novolac epoxy coating, Tnemec Series 282, Core-Cote HCR FF Novolac, or equal. Section 09 96 35-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Concrete surfaces shall be abrasive cleaned in accordance with SPCC-SP13/NACE No. 6 and provide a surface profile in accordance with ICRI NO. 03732 at CSP-3 to CSP-5. B. A representative of the manufacturer shall observe and approve the surfac preparation prior to application of coating. 3.02 APPLICATION A. Mix components in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Surface and material temperature shall be between 70°F and 90°F during application. C. Coating for Floors and Bases: 1. Primer shall be applied at the rate of 160 square feet per gallon. 2. Intermediate coat shall be applied within 4 to 6 hours of prime coat. intermediate coat shall be applied to 1/4 inch thickness (100 s.f./large kit) and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Top coat shall be applied at 250 square feet per gallon. D. Coating for walls shall be applied as follows: 1. One primer coat (160 square feet per gallon). _ 2. One top coat (180 square feet per gallon). 3. One top coat (250 square feet per gallon). E. Exposed perimeter edges of topcoat, including doorways, drains, traffic aisle sides, etc., shall be "keyed" into substrate to allow full 1/4 inch thickness at these points. Sawcut substrate using power saw with carbide or diamond tip blades. F. Where the concrete floor meets the wall, provide a 45 degree angle cove with a height of 1 to 2 inches. G. Do not install coating over expansion joints. END OF SECTION Section 09 96 35-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 10 00 20 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES PART 1—GENERAL .� 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Neoprene gaskets. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. — PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 NEOPRENE GASKETS A. Furnish and install neoprene gaskets at weir plates and as called for on the drawings. B. Neoprene shall be of the size and thickness shown on the drawings. Minimum thickness shall be 1/8 inch. The material shall be 40-50 durometer premium-grade neoprene. Only virgin polymers shall be used to manufacture the neoprene. A certificate of material quality shall be furnished. C. Where splices are necessary, they shall be butt splices made with a two-part neoprene base-bonding cement. The vulcanizing cement shall be Black Cement by CPR Industries of Carteret, New Jersey, or equal. -` D. At splices in weir plates, provide an additional thickness of neoprene to match the plate material. Bond the additional neoprene to the continuous gasket using the cement specified for splices. E. All gaskets shall be watertight. �. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION Section 10 00 20-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 10 14 00 PLASTIC AND METAL SIGNS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Fire wall signs, danger signs, chemical identification signs chemical fill pipe identification signs, hatch warning sign, building signs, and caution signs. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 sh ill govern work in this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00-Submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate sign styles, lettering font, foreground and background colors, locations, and overall dimensions of each sign. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRE WALL SIGNS A. Marking and identification of all fire walls, fire barriers, fire partitions, srr oke barriers, and smoke partitions or any other wall required to have protected openings snail be effectively and permanently identified with signs or stenciling and shall meet th-) three following requirements: 1. Shall be located in accessible concealed floor, floor-ceiling, or attic spaces. 2. Shall be repeated at intervals not exceeding 30 feet measured horizontally along the wall or partition. Shall be located within 15 feet of the end of each wall and at intervals not exceeding 30 feet measured horizontally along the wall or partition. 3. Shall include lettering not less than 1/2 inch in height, incorporating the suggested wording: "FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER-PROTECT ALL OPENINGS" or other wording. Shall include lettering not less than 3 inches in height with a minimum 3/8-inch - stroke in a contrasting color incorporating the suggested wording: "FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER-PROTECT ALL OPENINGS" or other wording. B. Sign shall indicate fire rating of wall or partition. Refer to code review drawing, included in drawing set, for fire rated partition locations and rating. See schedule below. 2.02 DANGER SIGNS A. CONTRACTOR shall provide danger signs complying with OSHA requirements. Signs shall state Danger-Permit Required Confined Space Do Not Enter. B. Signs shall be fiberglass, Brady Systems, or equal, minimum size 7 incl les by 10 inches. Colors shall be red and black on white. Section 10 14 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.03 CHEMICAL IDENTIFICATION SIGNS A. CONTRACTOR shall provide chemical identification signs at all new chemical feed pipes and at all doors into chemical rooms. B. Signs for the following chemicals shall be provided: Ferric chloride (Structure 300). Provide two total. C. Each sign shall indicate chemical name and color-coded NFPA Fire Diamond numbering/symbols associated with each chemical. D. Signs shall be UV resistant fiberglass with white letters on gray background, manufactured by Brady, or equal. E. Lettering shall be a minimum of 2 inches in height. NFPA Fire Diamond shall be a minimum of 4 inches by 4 inches square. 2.04 CHEMICAL FILL PIPE IDENTIFICATION SIGNS A. CONTRACTOR shall provide two chemical fill pipe identification signs at new chemical feed pipes. B. One sign shall read "Chemical Storage Tank No. 1 (T-10-40-1)." One sign shall read "Chemical Storage Tank No. 2 (T-10-40-2)." Each shall be installed above associated fill pipe. C. Signs shall be UV resistant fiberglass with black letters on a white background, manufactured by Brady, or equal. D. Lettering shall be a minimum of 2 inches in height. 2.05 HATCH WARNING SIGN A. CONTRACTOR shall provide hatch warning signs at all new chemical feed pipes. B. Signs shall read "OPEN HATCH BEFORE FILLING." C. Signs shall be UV resistant fiberglass with black letters on a white background. D. Lettering shall be a minimum of 2 inches in height. 2.06 BUILDING SIGN A. Exterior building signs shall be 6 inches tall, yellow plastic signs. Text shall be 3 1/2 inches tall, black numbering corresponding to building number as shown on the drawings. Color to match existing. Section 10 14 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.07 CAUTION SIGNS A. Place one caution sign at Structure 300 as shown on the drawings. Sign shall include, at a minimum, the wording shown on the drawings. B. Sign shall be Brady Safety Sign, or equal, minimum size 12 inches by 20 inches, and constructed of fiberglass. Mount sign on building with stainless steel screws. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install signs after surfaces are finished in locations as shown on the drawings. 3.02 SCHEDULES A. Provide firewall signs as specified at all fire-rated walls. B. Provide chemical identification sign at chemical feed line and at door to chemical room of — Chemical Storage Building (Structure 300) mounted to exterior face of wa I. C. Provide chemical fill pipe identification signs above associated chemical fill piping quick connects at chemical feed lines of Chemical Storage Building (Structure 350) mounted to exterior face of wall. D. Provide one hatch warning sign at chemical feed line of Chemical Storage Building (Structure 300) mounted to exterior face of wall. E. Provide building sign at north corner of Chemical Storage Building mounted to exterior face of wall facing access road. END OF SECTION — Section 10 14 00-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 10 43 16 FIRST AID KIT PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: First aid kit. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. First aid kit shall be Johnson and Johnson Model No. 8162 wall-mounted (50-person 225-item kit), Conney Safety (888-356-9100), or equal. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. First aid kit shall be wall-mounted. — B. Mount in the Chemical Storage Building where requested by CITY. END OF SECTION Section 10 43 16-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 10 44 43 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Fire extinguishers. 2. Accessories. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI/NFPA 10—Portable Fire Extinguishers. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features, color and finish, «nchorage details, and cabinet dimensions. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide units conforming to NFPA 10 requirements for portable fire extinguishers. B. Provide fire extinguisher, cabinets, and accessories by single manufacturer. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Larsen's Manufacturing Company, Product MP Series. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00—Materials and Equipment. 2.02 EXTINGUISHERS A. Provide four dry-chemical-type, Larsen's MP Series, 10-pound-capacity fire extinguishers. Fire extinguishers shall be UL-approved for Class A, Class B, and Class C fires. Section 10 44 43-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Place extinguishers in brackets where shown on the drawings. C. Mount fire extinguisher so the handle is at 48 inches above the finished floor. D. The fire extinguishers will be located in the following buildings: 1. Chemical Storage Building—Two. — 2. Dewatering Building—Two. END OF SECTION Section 10 44 43-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 12 48 43 FLOOR MATS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Switchboard mats. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 sh,ill govern work in this section. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 DIAMOND-PLATE SWITCHBOARD MATS A. Switchboard mats shall be diamond-plate, high-performance, nonconductive, switchboard matting. Matting shall conform to ANSI/ASTM D-178-01, Type II, Class 2. B. Acceptable manufacturers shall include the following, or equal: Wearwel Carpet, No. 701. Mats shall be 3 feet wide and extend the full length of the equipment. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install mats after cleaning of finish flooring. B. Provide mats for all motor control centers, switchboards, and any other free-standing or pad-mounted electrical equipment. END OF SECTION Section 12 48 43-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 13 34 23.25 FRP FLAT PANEL COVER SYSTEM (BID ALTERNATIVE NO. 3) PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Design, fabrication, delivery, and installation of fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) flat panel sealed cover systems for Primary Sludge Transfer Tanks No. 1 and No. 2 and WAS Transfer Tank (Structure 170). The cover system includes, but is not necessarily limited to: 1. Tank cover deck panels. 2. Structural supports. 3. Flashing and trim. 4. Fasteners and anchors. 5. Bulb gaskets and sealant. 6. Hatches. 7. Other accessories and appurtenances where indicated on the drawings. B. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate required size of cover sections with existing clear opening dimensions. See drawings for general tank size. C. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for verifying all field dimensions for development and approval of the manufacturer's drawings. B. For coordination and compatibility of parts, a single manufacturer shall provide all tank cover materials. C. Tank cover manufacturer shall have full responsibility for products and design. Split responsibility of materials or design is not acceptable. D. Tank cover manufacturer shall have: 1. Minimum of five years proven experience in water treatment applications. 2. Within the last five years completed three jobs of similar tank size and type as those required in this scope. E. Erector shall be regularly engaged in and have a minimum of five years experience with the erection of FRP cover for waste water tanks. F. Welders: Qualified within the past two years in accordance with AWS. Section 13 34 23.25-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1.03 PERFORMANCE TESTING A. Materials shall comply with federal and local laws or ordinances, applicable codes, standards, regulations, and/or regulatory agency requirements including: 1. ASTM D638—Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics. 2. ASTM D790—Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials. 3. ASTM D695—Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plasti, s. 4. ASTM E84—Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. B. Structural framing and deck panels shall meet the performance and de ign criteria listed herein for the spans and conditions indicated on the drawings. Individual units (independent of any foam-filled core) shall demonstrate compliance with design criteria by full-scale testing: 1. FRP Deck Panels: ASTM E72 Test Methods of Conducting Strengt1 Tests of Panels for Building Construction. 2. FRP Structural Components: 3-Point Load Bending Test. 3. Full scale Load and Deflection Test meeting or exceeding the design requirements specified herein may be used in place of tests listed in 1.03 B.1. and ' .03 B.2. 1.04 DESIGN CRITERIA A. FRP flat panel cover system shall be designed for uniform loads 83 shown on the drawings. B. Deflection Limits and Factors of Safety: Dead plus Live Load: Deflection limit of L/120, factor of safety of 2.5. Wind Uplift - Dead Load: Deflection limit of L/60, factor of safety of 1.88. C. Foot Traffic: The tank cover decking shall support incidental foot traffic. D. Lateral Bracing: FRP structural members shall be capable of supportinr.; all design loads without use of lateral bracing. E. Air Infiltration: Tank cover shall be designed as relatively airtight. A minimum 10-inch flanged FRP relief pipe connection shall be provided on the top of th,: tank to relieve negative differential pressure under the cover, as the tank drains and fills. A minimum 6-inch flanged FRP exhaust vent connection shall be provided to allow vE_rnt to exhaust air from under the cover. F. FRP flat panel cover system shall be designed to resist uplift due to wir d as required by the building code. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with provisions of Section 01 33 00—Sty:mittals. B. Submit fabrication drawings showing complete cover system layout and details supports. Include all connection details. Drawings shall bear the stamp of a State of Iowa licensed professional engineer. — C. Submit information regarding cover system materials, including panels, st-uctural supports, trim, hinges, gaskets, fastener and other system materials. -- Section 13 34 23.25-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 D. Submit complete structural calculations showing the governing stresses in all members and connections. Calculations shall bear the stamp of a State of Iowa licensed professional engineer. E. Submit copy of manufacturer's standard cover system guarantee. F. Submit a letter of certification signed and sealed by a licensed structural engineer confirming that the FRP cover is in full compliance with the drawings and specifications including any testing provisions included therein. G. Submit representative samples of FRP deck and framing members. H. Submit operation and maintenance data for FRP cover and hatches. 1.06 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. At the time of delivery, all material shall be inspected, by CONTRACTOR, for shipping and handling damage. Notify the freight company and the manufacturer immediately of any damage. B. Protect surface of FRP units from cuts, scratches, gouges, abrasions, and impacts. Do not use wire slings unless material is fully protected. Use spreader bars when lifting these materials. Do not drag panels or flashing across one another unless separated by a nonscratching spacer. C. FRP panels shall be stored per manufacturer's recommendation. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with manufacturer.D. Replace or repair all damaged material to the satisfaction of CITY prior to cover construction. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Standard One-Year Warranty: Unless otherwise stated below, manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the earlier of either the date established for partial utilization or Substantial Completion of the project. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. FRP flat panel cover system shall be Tuff Span XL Cover System as manufactured by Enduro Composites of Houston, Texas; NEFCO, Inc. of Palm Beach Gardens, Florida; or equal. This listed equipment is part of the Base Bid as indicated on the bid pages and will be considered as establishing the type, function, appearance, and quality required. Section 13 34 23.25-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. The drawings and specifications were prepared based on Enduro Composites. CONTRACTOR shall include in the Bid and shall be responsible for the cost of any changes, including engineering changes, to accommodate the other Base Bid equipment including but not limited to structural, mechanical, and electrical work. C. CONTRACTOR may provide Alternative Bids for equipment from other manufacturers by writing their name into the blank(s) provided on the Bid form. CONTRACTOR shall comply with all provisions regarding substitute items and shall include in the Bid and be responsible for the cost of any changes to accommodate substitute equipment including but not limited to structural, mechanical, and electrical work. CONTRACTOR shall also pay costs of engineering services for review of substitutes and for revisions of drawings and/or specifications by CONSULTANT to accommodate substitutes. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) structural components such as decking, beams, and framing shall be manufactured by pultrusion process. Contact molded or hand-laid-up fiberglass materials are not acceptable as structural components. B. Tank Cover Deck Panels: 1. Resin-type for FRP tank cover decking shall be UV stabilized, isophthalic. General purpose or orthothalic polyester and vinyl ester are not acceptable. 2. Glass fiber reinforcements shall be a minimum of 50% of the material weight. 3. Materials shall be fire-retardant and have a flame spread rating of 25 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 (UL723). 4. Materials shall exhibit these physical properties (at a minimum): a. Tensile Strength (ASTM D638): 30,000 psi. b. Compressive Strength (ASTM D695): 30,000 psi. c. Flexural Strength (ASTM D790): 30,000 psi. 5. The top surface of the tank cover decking shall have a factory-applied, nonskid, and UV-resistant surface. 6. The top surface of the tank cover decking shall be flat and nonprofiled (other than nonskid, gritted surface). 7. Deck panels shall nest with adjacent panels in preformed slots at side-lap conditions. 8. Deck panels shall be sealed at side-laps with factory-installed, nonadhesive 3/4-inch-diameter neoprene bulb gasket (conforming to ASTM C864). Gaskets shall fit into an integral receiving groove and shall not be mechanically attached. To seal cover system, gaskets shall be oriented vertically so they are compressed downward when an adjacent panel is placed into position. 9. For vertical removal and lifting, deck panels shall have integral handles at each end. The integral lift handles shall not protrude vertically above the tank cover surface. 10. Removing panels shall require only the removal of fasteners at deck panel ends. Covers shall be designed as fully removable without having to remove more than • three panels at a time. 11. Panel sections, without hatches, shall weigh no more than 150 pounds each. Size panels accordingly. C. FRP Structural Framing: 1. Resin-type for FRP beams and framing members, where required, shall be UV stabilized vinyl ester. 2. Glass fiber reinforcements shall be a minimum of 50% of the material weight. Section 13 34 23.25-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3. Structural components shall be fire-retardant and have a flame spread rating of 25 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 (UL723). 4. Metallic angles or plates attached to FRP beams or fastening connections shall be 316 stainless steel or 6061-T6 aluminum. D. Flashing and Trim: 1. FRP flashing shall be isophthalic polyester. 2. End flashing shall be factory attached to deck. 3. FRP end flashing shall have integral lift handle. E. Hardware: 1. All fasteners, anchorage, hinges, and other structural accessories located on the underside of cover shall be 316 stainless steel, aluminum or monel. Nonstructural hardware shall be FRP or 316 stainless steel. 2. Other hardware not exposed to underside of tank cover environment and anchor into concrete shall be 304 stainless steel. F. Gaskets and Sealants: 1. Gaskets located along longitudinal side laps between panels shall be 1-inch-diameter neoprene, bulb-type. 2. To properly seal tank perimeter and seams, neoprene gaskets shall be installed underneath all flashing components. All panel side laps and perimeter conditions shall be gasketed. G. Hatches: 1. Hatches shall be raised and fabricated from pultruded fiberglass components and shall be 22 inches by 36 inches with one-leaf hatch door. See drawings for locations. 2. Hatch openings shall be factory-cut into the tank cover decking by manufacturer. 3. Hatch frames shall be fabricated from channel-type framing. Hatch framing shall fit inside tank cover deck panel profile so that a deck panel with hatch can be removed without affecting adjacent panels. �. 4. Hatch lids shall be fully sealed from underside with a 3/8-inch-diameter neoprene bulb gasket that fits onto the hatch curb without adhesive or fasteners. Perimeter hatch curb shall be sealed to decking surface with Sikaflex®-1A sealant. 5. Hatch hinges shall be fabricated from pultruded fiberglass. Hatch lifting handles shall be made of 316 stainless steel or corrosion-resistant plastic. Fasteners shall be 316 stainless steel. 6. Hatch lids shall have a factory-applied nonskid, gritted, and UV-resistant top surface. 7. Hatches shall have a 316 stainless steel hold-open device to prevent door from blowing open or closing on itself. H. All hatches shall be fitted with a permanently installed, fall-through prevention rail and net system that is easily retractable for access to the opening below. This system shall be Hatch Net 121 as manufactured by Safe Approach, Inc., Poland, Maine, or approved �. equal. I. The fall-through prevention system shall consist of the following components: 1. A polyester safety net manufactured to ANSI A10.11 specification for personnel nets. 2. Extruded aluminum side rails: Aluminum Alloy 6061-T-6 with an ultimate tensile strength of 18 KSI, a yield strength of 8 KSI, and a shear strength of 12 KSI. 3. 316 stainless steel corner hooks. Section 13 34 23.25-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 J. Each net assembly will come with a permanently attached label with the following information: Name of manufacturer, identification of net material, date of manufacture, date of prototype test, name of testing agency, and serial number. K. All stainless steel hardware and instructions necessary for proper installation of the net system shall be provided by the net system manufacturer. Installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. L. The complete assembly, including the net, shall be warranted against defects in material and workmanship for manufacturer's standard time period. M. Inlet Vents: Gooseneck ventilation piping for inlet ducts shall be FOP with corrosion resistant insect screen and shall be provided by cover manufacturer. Provide one 6-inch vent for each tank as indicated on the drawings. N. Pipe Penetrations: All new pipe penetrations shall be provided by CONTRACTOR as an integral part of the FRP cover assembly, or as mountable, flanged sections with gaskets onto supplied FRP sheets. 2.01 FINISHES A. The exterior surface of deck panels shall be a satin finish of polyester gel-coat to produce a corrosion-resistant, resin-rich surface free from pits, porosity, or dry, glass. The finish shall protect the FRP covers from UV degradation. Color of finish shall be selected by CITY from available standard colors. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. See Division 01 for requirements related to equipment installation, field quality control, - testing, supervision, and start-up. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Cover sections shall bear on formed concrete ledge at the top of each membrane tank. B. Before placing and attaching components, the erector must confirm the alignment and location of bearing plates, surfaces, brackets, and saddles. All bearing surfaces must be clean and free of debris. C. Before placing the secondary framing members or deck, the erector must check the alignment and location of truss members. D. Erection shall proceed according to sequences shown on the approved drawings. E. If applicable, field-assemble any ledger angles as shown on manufacturer's drawings. Install beam seats or structural and ledger angles in locations showr on the approved drawings. F. Position FRP tank cover beams in locations as shown on the approved manufacturer's drawings. Field modifications (cuts, copes, holes) other than work shown on the drawings Section 13 34 23.25-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 are not allowed without the manufacturer's written consent. Field-cutting shall be indicated on drawings by manufacturer where needed. G. Anchor FRP beams and adjust tank cover components into final position with proper bearing and alignment at joints, laps, and supports before fastening. Refer to the manufacturer's installation instructions for proper fastener selection, fastener location, driving techniques, and pertinent information for fastening equipment. H. Starting at the end shown by manufacturer on field drawings, position and place tank cover deck panels in locations as shown. Field modifications (cuts, copes, holes) other than work shown on the drawings are not allowed without the manufacturer's written consent. I. Fasten or anchor FRP tank cover deck panels into location as shown on approved drawings. END OF SECTION Section 13 34 23.25-7 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 20 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION, PLUMBING, AND HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Perform all work required to furnish and install equipment, valve, pipe, and wire identification with supplementary items necessary for proper installation as specified herein, or shown on the drawings. CONTRACTOR shall identify including but not limited to, _ all equipment, valves, piping, ductwork, dampers, pumps, and wires. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with provisions of Section 01 33 00-Submittals. B. Schedule: 1. Submit valve schedule complete with building number, room number, valve tag numbering system, valve function, valve type, area served, year installed, manufacturer, model number, size, rated pressure, temperature rating and normal position. 2. Valve schedule shall be developed using CITY's valve naming convention. Provide CITY with electronic version (Microsoft Excel) of the valve schedule. 3. Submit equipment schedule complete with building number, room number, equipment tag numbering system, equipment function, equipment type, area served, year installed, manufacturer, model number, size, emergency power (Y or N) and rated capacity. - 1.03 REFERENCES A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by a specific edition date. B. All material, installation, and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references. 1. ASME A13.1-Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. 2. NFPA 13-Installation of Sprinkler Systems. 3. NFPA 14-Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems. 4. NEPA 45-Fire Protection for Laboratories Using Chemicals. 5. 2018 Industrial Plumbing Code. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging with labels clearly dentifying product -- name and manufacturer until ready for installation. B. Storage: Store materials in clean, dry area indoors until ready for installation. C. Handling: Protect materials and finish from damage during handling and installation. - Section 20 05 53-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Equipment tags, valve tags, and pipe markers shall be manufactured by Marking Services, Incorporated, Seton Name Plate Company, WH Brady Company, or Graphic Products, Inc. 2.02 EQUIPMENT TAGS A. Plastic Labels For Equipment (Indoor Application): 1. Use: All equipment purchased by CONTRACTOR or CITY and CONTRACTOR installed included in Division 21, 22, or 23. 2. Materials and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch thick. 3. Character Color: Black. 4. Background Color: White. 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 1 inch by 3 inches. 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch. 7. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. B. Plastic Labels for Equipment (Outdoor Application): 1. Use: All equipment purchased by CONTRACTOR or CITY and CONTRACTOR installed included in Divisions 21, 22, or 23. 2. Material: MS-215 Max-Tek with printed graphics protected by a chemical and UV resistant MS-3000 top laminate. 3. Letter Color: Black. 4. Background Color: White. 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 1 inch by 3 inches. 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch. 7. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. 2.03 LABELING TAGS A. Labeling Tags: Use: Field-mounted devices (Limit switches, Natural gas pressure regulators, etc.). Size: 1-inch by 3-inch. Material: 1/32-inch-thick stainless steel. Character Size: 1/4 inch. Engraving: As requested by CONSULTANT. B. Valve Tags: 1. All new valves shall be tagged. CONTRACTOR shall provide on valves, engraved 2 1/2-inch by 2 1/2-inch plastic laminated tags, Seton "Setonply Series M4550-H," or equal. Colors will be selected by CITY. CONTRACTOR shall affix tags to valves with Brady 38091, or equal, stainless steel wire and Brady 38090, or equal, zinc wire clamps. 2. Valve tags shall be fastened next to valve box cover on valve manholes with stainless steel fasteners. Section 20 05 53-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.04 WIRE MARKERS A. Wire markers shall be permanently attached wraparound adhesive, sleeve- or heat-shrink-type labels. Wire numbering preprinted on the conductor, flag-type labels, and individual wraparound numbers (such as Brady preprinted markers) are not acceptable. B. Wire markers shall be specifically printed for this project using a wire marker printer. Handwritten markers are not acceptable. 2.05 PIPE MARKERS A. Manufacturers: Marking Systems, Inc., Seton Name Plate Company, W.H. Brady Company, or equal. B. Pipe markers shall conform to ANSI A13.1. Arrow markers must have same ANSI background colors as their companion pipe markers or be incorporated into the pipe identification marker. C. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory-fabricated, flexible, semirigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrovi and identification of fluid being conveyed. D. Pipe markers and arrow markers also shall be provided for all piping systems. E. Use Seton Setmark type SNA or Brady Snap-on type identification for all piping systems, up through 6 inches. For piping systems larger than 6 inches, use Seton or Brady strap-on markers, or similar, by Marking Services, Inc. Self-adhesive labels that stick directly to the pipe or insulation jacketing are not acceptable. Provide lettering in accordance with table below. PIPE MARK SIZE CHART Outside Pipe Diameter Minimum Length of Minimum Height (Including Covering) Label Field Color (Inch) of Letters (Inch) 3/4 inch to 1 1/4 inch 8 1/2 1 1/2 inch to 2 inch 8 3/4 2 1/2 inch to 6 inch 12 1 1/4 8 inch to 10 inch 24 2 1/2 - Over 10 inch 32 3 1/2 PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION — A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state, and local requirements and referenced standards and conform to code and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates. C. Install nameplates parallel to equipment lines. D. Affix nameplates with stainless steel screws or sticky-back adhesive. Section 20 05 53-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 E. Affix labeling tags with permanent bonding cement or locking wire ties. Provide 3/8-inch hole to accommodate wire tie. F. Prepare and install neatly typed directions in all panels, including existing panels, where -. work is done under this Contract. G. Four-inch-round, 4-inch-square, and 4 11/16-inch junction boxes concealed above ceilings may be identified with neat lettering on the cover with a permanent-type black marking pen. 3.02 WIRE IDENTIFICATION A. Provide wire markers on each conductor in panelboard gutters, pull boxes, control panels, thermostats, junction boxes, and at load connection. Identify with branch circuit or feeder number for power circuits and with control wire number as indicated on schematic and interconnection diagrams for control wiring. Wire markers shall be permanently attached wraparound adhesive or heat-shrink-type markers. Wire numbering preprinted on the conductor, individual wraparound numbers, and flag-type labels are not acceptable. B. Conductors in pull boxes, motor control centers, control panels, cabinets, and panelboards shall be grouped as to circuits and arranged in a neat manner. All conductors of a feeder or branch circuit shall be grouped, bound together with nylon ties, and identified. Phase identification shall be consistent throughout the system. 3.03 PIPE MARKERS A. Install pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. C. All pipes shall be labeled with a minimum of two labels in each room, crawl space, or compartment. Locate identification at maximum 20-foot centers on straight runs, including risers and drops adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. Labels shall be abbreviated as noted under fluid abbreviations on drawings. D. All piping containing or transporting hazardous or corrosive chemicals shall be identified with labels every 10 feet and with at least two labels in each room, closet, or pipe chase. E. Labels shall identify fluid being conveyed and include flow direction arrow. Provide a double-ended arrow marker when flow can be in either or both directions. F. Indicate delivered water temperature on domestic hot water supply and return lines. G. CONTRACTOR shall include a schedule in its submittal identifying the various pipe designations, abbreviations, and labeling scheme. Colors, text, and piping abbreviations are to be selected by CITY, with the following piping marker scheme used where applicable. Section 20 05 53-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 Pipe Contents Label Colors (Background/Text) Water Lines Nonpotable water Green/White Potable water Green/White Other Lines Acid waste Orange/Black Condensate Blue/White Exhaust Blue/White Fire protection Red/White Heating hot water (buildings or digesters) Green/White Natural gas Brown/White Plumbing drains and vents Green/White END OF SECTION Section 20 05 53-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 20 07 16 EQUIPMENT INSULATION FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work includes insulation for all equipment provided under Division 22—Plumbing and Division 23—HVAC: 1. Rigid formed fiberglass insulation. 2. Formed calcium silicate insulation. 3. Adhesives, mastic, sealants, and reinforcing materials. 4. Jacketing. 5. Accessories. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by a specific edition date. B. All material, installation, and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references. 1. ASTM B117—Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog)Apparatus. 2. ASTM C168—Standard Terminology Relating to Thermal Insulation. 3. ASTM C272—Water Absorption of Core Materials for Sandwich Constructions. 4. ASTM C533—Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation. 5. ASTM C547—Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation. 6. ASTM C518—Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. 7. ASTM C591—Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation. 8. ASTM C612—Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation. 9. ASTM C916—Standard Specification for Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation. 10. ASTM C1071—Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation (Thermal and Sound Absorbing Material). 11. ASTM C1290—Standard Specification for Flexible Fibrous Glass Blanket Insulation Used to Externally Insulate HVAC Ducts. 12. ASTM C1427—Standard Specification for Extruded Preformed Flexible Cellular Polyolefin Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form. 13. ASTM D1000—Methods for Pressure-Sensitive Adhesive-Coated Tapes Used for Electrical and Electronic Applications. 14. ASTM E84—Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 15. ASTM E96—Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 16. FED L-P-535E: Plastic Sheet (Sheeting): Plastic Strip: Poly (Vinyl Chloride) And Poly (Vinyl Chloride-Vinyl Acetate), Rigid. Section 20 07 16-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 17. EPA Method 8260B—Volatile Organic Compounds By Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry (Gc/Ms). 18. NFPA 262—Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for Use in Air-Handling Spaces. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Submit a schedule of all insulating materials to be used on the project, including adhesives, fastening methods, and fitting materials, along with safety data sheets and intended use of each material. Include manufacturer's technical data sheets indicating density, thermal characteristics, jacket type, and manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All insulation or components of this specification section shall meet or exceed the requirements and quality of the items herein specified, or as denoted on the drawings. B. Label all insulating products delivered to the construction site with the manufacturer's name and description of materials. C. Insulation systems shall be applied by experienced contractors. Within the past five years, the contractor shall be able to document the successful completion of a minimum of three projects of at least 50% of the size and similar scope of the work specified in this section. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 60 00—Materials and Equipment. B. Deliver materials to the site in such a manner as to protect the materials from shipping and handling damage. C. Materials that could be damaged by the elements should be packaged in such a manner that they could withstand short-term exposure to the elements during transportation. D. Store materials in a clean, dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage. E. Use all means necessary to protect insulation before, during, and after installation. F. All scratched, dented, and otherwise damaged insulation shall be repaired or replaced as directed by CITY without additional cost to CITY. 1.06 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Unless otherwise indicated, all equipment covering, jackets, insulation, vapor barriers, adhesive, and mastics shall have flame spread rating of 25 or less and smoke spread rating of 450 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. — Section 20 07 16-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. All equipment covering, jackets, insulation, vapor barriers, adhesive, and mastics within active return or supply air plenums shall have flame spread rating of 25 or less and smoke-developed rating of 50 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. C. Exposed insulation with All Service Jacketing shall be painted in accordance with Section 09 91 00—Painting. In lieu of painting All Service Jacket insulation, CONTRACTOR may provide PVC jacketing as specified herein. CONTRACTOR shall not paint PVC jacketing. Where painted insulation transitions to PVC jacketing, CONTRACTOR shall coordinate colors with CITY. Colors shall be in accordance with Section 20 05 53—Identification for Fire Suppression, Plumbing, and HVAC Piping and Equipment. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 RIGID FORMED FIBERGLASS INSULATION A. Acceptable manufacturers are Owens Corning Fiberglas, Johns Manville Micro-Lok, and Knauf Earthwool. B. Insulation shall be mineral fiber type conforming to ASTM C547, Type IV. C. Minimum nominal density shall be of 3.0 lbs/ft3. D. K-factor shall not exceed 0.23 (btu-in)/(hr-ft2-°F) at 75°F mean. E. Insulation shall be rated for service to 850°F. 2.02 FORMED CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION A. Acceptable manufacturers are Johns Manville Thermo-1200, or equal. B. Insulation shall be water resistant, Type 1 rigid hydrous calcium silicate conforming to ASTM C533, Type I. C. Dry density shall be between 12 and 14 Ibs/ft3. D. K-factor shall not exceed 0.44 (btu-in)/(hr-ft2-°F) at 300°F. E. Insulation shall be rated for service range of 0°F to 1,200°F. F. Material shall be visually coded or marked to indicate it is asbestos free. 2.03 ADHESIVES, MASTIC, SEALANTS, AND REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Products shall be compatible with surfaces and materials on which they are applied and shall be suitable for use at operating temperatures of systems to which they are applied. B. Fiberglass Insulation Adhesive. Acceptable Manufacturers: Foster 85-60, Childers CP-127, and Duro Dyne SSG. Section 20 07 16-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. Vapor Retarding Mastic: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Foster 30-65 Vapor Fas, Childers CP-34 and Vimasco 749. 2. For equipment insulation operating below 50°F, mastic water vapor permeance shall be less than 0.03 perms at 45 mils dry film thickness conforming to ASTM E96. 3. Use insulation joint sealant at all joints. Acceptable manufacturers are Foster 95-50 Flextra, Childers CP-76 Chil-Byl, or Pittsburgh Corning CW Sealant. D. Weather Barrier Breather Mastic: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Foster 46-50 Weatherite, Childers Vi-Cril CP-10/CP-11, or Vimasco WC-5. 2. For equipment insulation operating at 50°F or above, mastic water vapor permeance shall be greater than 1.0 perms at 1/16-inch dry film thickness conforming to ASTM E96. E. Sealant for Metal Jacketing. Acceptable Manufacturers: Foster 95-44 Elastolar, Childers CP-76 Chil-Byl, Pittsburgh Corning 727. 2.04 JACKETING A. Self-Adhering Jackets (SAJ): 1. Acceptable manufacturers are 3M VentureClad 1577CW, or equal. 2. Jackets shall be 5-ply, self-adhering multiple laminated waterproofing material with reflective aluminum foil, high density polymer films and cold weather acrylic adhesive providing zero (0.0) moisture permeance. 3. Minimum material thickness shall be 6 mils. 4. Minimum puncture resistance shall be 25 lbs conforming to ASTM D 1000. B. Protective Metal Jackets (PMJ): 1. Acceptable manufacturers are Metal-Clad, or equal. 2. All metal jackets shall include safety edges. 3. Indoor installations: 0.016-inch thick aluminum or 0.010-inch thick 304 stainless steel with safety edge. 4. Outdoor installations: 0.024-inch thick aluminum or 0.016-inch thick 304 stainless steel with safety edge. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. All products shall be compatible with surfaces and materials on which they are applied and be suitable for use at operating temperatures of the systems to which they are applied. B. Adhesives, sealants, and protective finishes shall be as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications specified. C. Insulation bands shall be 3/4-inch wide, constructed of aluminum or stainless steel. Minimum thickness shall be 0.015-inch for aluminum and 0.010-inch for stainless steel. D. Staples shall be clinch style. E. Tack fasteners shall be stainless steel ring grooved shank tacks. F. Joint sealants and metal jacketing sealants shall be non-shrinking and permanently flexible. Section 20 07 16-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. All insulation damaged during construction shall be replaced in accordance with these specifications. B. All insulation shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's written recommendations. Destructive methods such as sheet metal screws are not acceptable. All insulation shall be installed with joints butted firmly together. C. Install insulation with smooth and even surfaces. Poorly fitted joints or use of filler in voids will not be accepted. Provide neatly beveled and coated terminations at all nameplates, uninsulated fittings, or at other locations where insulation terminates. 3.02 VAPOR BARRIER INSTALLATION A. For systems operating at 50°F or above,jackets on insulation may be stapled using outward clinch staples spaced 3 inches apart at least 1/4-inch in from the lap edge. B. Install fabric reinforcing without wrinkles. Overlap seams a minimum of 2 inches. C. Use full length material (as delivered from manufacturer) wherever possible. Scrap piecing of insulation or pieces cut undersize and stretched to fit will not be accepted. D. All insulation ends shall be tapered and sealed regardless of service. E. Vapor barrier jackets shall be applied with a continuous, unbroken vapor seal. Vapor barrier jackets shall not be broken at supports. F. Vapor retarding jacket shall be maintained continuously through all penetrations.3.03 RIGID FORMED FIBERGLASS INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Fittings, valves, unions, flanges, couplings and specialties shall be insulated with factory molded insulation of the same thickness as adjoining insulation. Secure insulation sections with two wraps of nylon filament tape 9-inch to 12-inch on center. On single insulation layer systems and on the outer layer of double insulation layer systems, apply a thin coat of flexible closed cell joint sealant rated for system operating temperatures to all longitudinal and butt insulation joints covering entire face of joint. Allow sealant to fully cure before applying protective covering. Where two layers of insulation are used, do not use sealant on the inner layer or adhere the inner layer to the outer layer. Apply vapor stop bead of joint sealant between equipment and insulation on both sides of valves, expansion/contraction joints, flanges, thermometers/gauges, attached vent and drain lines. Insulate attached non-circulated lines, control lines, vents, etc., for a minimum distance of 6 inches from pipe. Cover insulation with a protective jacket as specified below. Do not penetrate protective covering or insulation with mechanical fasteners. Section 20 07 16-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.04 CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Tightly butt insulation with staggered joints and secure with metal bands or wire. 3.05 PROTECTIVE JACKET INSTALLATION A. Self-Adhering Jackets (SAJ): 1. Install according to manufacturer's recommendations. Cut allowing minimum 4-inch overlap on ends and 6 inches on longitudinal joints. Align parallel to surface. Remove release paper and press flat to surface to avoid wrinkles. Rub entire surface for full adhesion and sealing at joint overlaps. On exterior applications, provide a bead of compatible caulk along exposed edges. 2. Wrap elbows, fittings, valves and butt joints with two layers of vapor retarding tape. Vapor retarding tape shall be compatible with the jacket material used. B. Protective Metal Jacket (PMJ): Lap seams a minimum of 2 inches. Secure with metal bands for end to end joints, and rivets or sheet metal screws for longitudinal joints. Rivets, screws, and bands shall be constructed of the same material as the jacket. Locate seams on bottom for exterior applications. Seal laps with 1/8-inch bead of metal jacketing sealant to prevent water entry. 3.06 EQUIPMENT INSULATION A. Insulation shall not cover equipment access manholes, fittings, nameplates or ASME stamps. Bevel and seal insulation at these locations. B. Provide insulation on equipment as outlined in the schedule below: Equipment Insulation Jacket Thickness Breeching From Equipment Outlet to Calcium Silicate PMJ 2.0" Stack Hot Water Air Separators and Rigid Formed Fiberglass SAJ 1.5" Expansion Tanks END OF SECTION Section 20 07 16-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 20 07 19 PIPING INSULATION FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work includes insulation for all piping provided under Division 22—Plumbing and Division 23—HVAC. 1. Rigid formed fiberglass insulation. 2. Flexible closed cell pipe insulation. 3. Adhesives, mastic, sealants, and reinforcing materials. 4. Jacketing. — 5. Insulation inserts and pipe shields. 6. Accessories. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by a specific edition date. B. All material, installation, and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references. 1. ASTM C168—Standard Terminology Relating to Thermal Insulation. 2. ASTM C272—Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Core Materials for Sandwich Constructions. 3. ASTM C518—Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. 4. ASTM C533—Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation. 5. ASTM C547—Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation. 6. ASTM C591—Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation. 7. ASTM C612—Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation. 8. ASTM C1427—Standard Specification for Extruded Preformed Flexible Cellular Polyolefin Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form. 9. ASTM D1000—Standard Test Methods for Pressure-Sensitive Adhesive-Coated Tapes Used for Electrical and Electronic Applications. 10. ASTM E84—Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 11. ASTM E96—Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 12. FED L-P-535E: Plastic Sheet (Sheeting): Plastic Strip: Poly (Vinyl Chloride) And Poly (Vinyl Chloride-Vinyl Acetate), Rigid. 13. NFPA 262—Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for Use in Air-Handling Spaces. Section 20 07 19-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Submit a schedule of all insulating materials to be used on the project, including adhesives, fastening methods, and fitting materials, along with safety data sheets and intended use of — each material. Include manufacturer's technical data sheets indicating density, thermal characteristics, jacket type, and manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All insulation or components of this specification section shall meet or exceed the requirements and quality of the items herein specified, or as denoted on he drawings. B. Label all insulating products delivered to the construction site with the manufacturer's name and description of materials. C. Insulation systems shall be applied by experienced contractors. Within the past five years, CONTRACTOR shall be able to document the successful completion of a minimum of three projects of at least 50% of the size and similar scope of the work specified in this section. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 60 00—Materials and Equipment. B. Deliver materials to the site in such a manner as to protect the materials from shipping and handling damage. _ C. Materials that could be damaged by the elements should be packaged in such a manner that they could withstand short-term exposure to the elements during transportation. D. Store materials in a clean, dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage. — E. Use all means necessary to protect insulation before, during, and after installation. F. All scratched, dented, and otherwise damaged insulation shall be repaired or replaced as requested by CITY without additional cost to CITY. 1.06 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Unless otherwise indicated, all pipe covering, jackets, insulation, vapor barriers, adhesives, and mastics shall have flame spread rating of 25 or less and smoke spread rating of 450 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. B. All pipe covering, jackets, insulation, vapor barriers, adhesive, and mastics within active return or supply air plenums shall have flame spread rating of 25 or less and smoke-developed rating of 50 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Section 20 07 19-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. Exposed insulation with All Service Jacketing shall be painted in accordance with Section 09 91 00—Painting. In lieu of painting All Service Jacket insulation, CONTRACTOR may provide PVC jacketing as specified herein. All PVC jacketing provided shall come factory finished. CONTRACTOR shall not paint PVC jacketing. Where painted insulation transitions to PVC jacketing, CONTRACTOR shall coordinate colors with CITY. Colors shall be in accordance with Section 20 05 53—Identification for Fire Suppression, Plumbing and HVAC Piping and Equipment and Section 09 91 00—Painting. D. All insulation and associated materials shall be free of asbestos. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 RIGID FORMED FIBERGLASS INSULATION A. Acceptable manufacturers are Johns Manville Micro-Lok, or equal. B. Insulation shall be mineral fiber type conforming to ASTM C547, Type IV. C. Minimum nominal density shall be of 3.0 lbs/ft3. D. K-factor shall not exceed 0.23 (btu-in)/(hr-ft2-°F) at 75°F mean. E. Insulation shall be rated for service to 850°F. 2.02 FLEXIBLE CLOSED CELL PIPE INSULATION A. Acceptable manufacturers are K-flex Insul-tube, Armacell AP/Armaflex, or equal. B. Insulation shall be flexible closed cell type conforming to ASTM C534, Type 1, Grade 1. C. K -factor shall not exceed 0.25 (btu-in)/(hr-ft2-°F) at 75°F mean. D. Insulation shall be rated for service range of -20°F to 220°F on piping or 180°F where adhered to equipment. 2.03 ADHESIVES, MASTIC, SEALANTS, AND REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Products shall be compatible with surfaces and materials on which they are applied and shall be suitable for use at operating temperatures of systems to which they are applied. B. Fiberglass Insulation Adhesive: Acceptable Manufacturers: Foster 85-60, Childers CP-127, and Duro Dyne SSG. C. Sealant for Metal Jacketing: Acceptable Manufacturers: Foster 95-44 Elastolar, Childers CP-76 Chil-Byl, Pittsburgh Corning 727. Section 20 07 19-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.04 JACKETING A. PVC Jackets (PVJ): 1. PVC film, gloss finish one side, semi-gloss other side. 2. PVC film shall conform to FED L-P-535D, Composition A, Type II, Grade GU. 3. PVC jacketing outdoors shall be ultraviolet inhibited. 4. Jacket thickness shall be minimum 0.03 inches. B. Protective Metal Jackets (PMJ): 1. Acceptable manufacturers are Metal-Clad, or equal. 2. All metal jackets shall include safety edges. 3. Indoor installations: 0.016-inch thick aluminum or 0.010-inch thick 304 stainless steel with safety edge. 4. Outdoor installations: 0.024-inch thick aluminum or 0.016-inch thick 304 stainless steel with safety edge. 2.05 INSULATION INSERTS AND PIPE SHIELDS A. Acceptable manufacturers are B-Line, Pipe Shields, or Value Engineerec Products. B. Construct inserts with calcium silicate or polyisocyanurate with minimum 140 psi compressive strength. Piping 12 inches and larger shall be supplemented with high density 600 psi structural calcium silicate insert. Provide 16-gauge galvanized steel shield, 12 inches long. Insert and shield shall include minimum 180-degree coverage on bottom supported piping and full 360 degree coverage on clamped piping. On roller mounted piping and piping designed to slide on support, provide additional load distribution stainless steel plate. In corrosive (NEMA 4x) or hazardous (Class I, Division 1) environments, shields and distribution plates shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel. C. Where contractor proposes shop/site fabricated inserts and shields, submit schedule of materials, thicknesses, gauges and lengths for each pipe size to demonstrate equivalency to pre-engineered/premanufactured product described above. On low temperature systems, high density rigid polyisocyanurate may be substituted for calcium silicate provided insert and shield length and shield gauge are increased to compensate for lower insulation compressive strength. D. Wood blocks will not be accepted. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. All products shall be compatible with surfaces and materials on which they are applied and be suitable for use at operating temperatures of the systems to which they are applied. B. Adhesives, sealants, and protective finishes shall be as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications specified. C. Insulation bands shall be 3/4-inch-wide, constructed of aluminum or stainless steel. Where metal jackets are used, band material shall match jacket material. Minimum thickness shall be 0.015 inch for aluminum and 0.010 inch for stainless steel. -� Section 20 07 19-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 D. Load distributing metal shields shall be constructed of aluminum or stainless steel. Where metal jackets are used, shield material shall match jacket material. Minimum thickness shall be 0.015 inch for aluminum and 0.010 inch for stainless steel. E. Staples shall be clinch style. F. Tack fasteners shall be stainless steel ring grooved shank tacks. G. Joint sealants and metal jacketing sealants shall be non-shrinking and permanently flexible. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. All insulation damaged during construction shall be replaced in accordance with these specifications. B. All insulation shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's written recommendations. Destructive methods such as sheet metal screws are not acceptable. All pipe insulation shall be installed with joints butted firmly together. C. All valves and fittings shall be insulated with mitered sections of insulation equal in density and thickness to adjoining insulation. D. Install insulation with smooth and even surfaces. Poorly fitted joints or use of filler in voids will not be accepted. Provide neatly beveled and coated terminations at all nameplates, uninsulated fittings, or at other locations where insulation terminates. E. All pipe insulation shall be continuous through walls, ceiling or floor openings and through sleeves except where firestop or firesafing materials are required. 3.02 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. For each pipe hanger, provide a hanger block on the bottom half of the pipe in place of the insulation. B. Pipe hangers and supports shall be sized large enough to be installed over the outer surface of the insulation. C. Load distributing metal shields shall be installed around the lower one-third circumference of the insulation and jacket. D. Blocks and shields shall be provided at all supports regardless of orientation, except inserts may be omitted on 3/4 inch and smaller copper piping provided 12-inch long 22-gauge pipe shields are used. Section 20 07 19-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.03 RIGID FORMED FIBERGLASS INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Fittings, valves, unions, flanges, couplings and specialties shall be insulated with factory molded insulation of the same thickness as adjoining insulation. Secure insulation sections with two wraps of nylon filament tape 9-inch to 12-inch on center. On single insulation layer systems and on the outer layer of double insulation layer systems, apply a thin coat of flexible -- closed cell joint sealant rated for system operating temperatures to all longitudinal and butt insulation joints covering entire face of joint. Allow sealant to fully cure before applying protective covering. Where two layers of insulation are used, do not use sealant on the inner layer or adhere the inner layer to the outer layer. Apply vapor stop bead of joint sealant between pipe and insulation on both sides of valves, expansion/contraction joints, flanges, thermometers/gauges, attached vent and drain lines. Insulate attached non-circulated lines, control lines, vents, etc., for a minimum distance of 6 inches from pipe. Cover insulation with a protective jacket as specified below. Do not penetrate protective covering or insulation with mechanical fasteners. 3.04 FLEXIBLE CLOSED CELL INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Where practical, slip insulation on piping during pipe installation while pipe ends are open. Miter cut fittings allowing sufficient length to prevent stretching. Completely seal seams and joints for vapor tight installation. Apply full bed of adhesive to both surfaces. Cover flexible closed cell insulation on systems operating below 40°F with vapor retarding mastic. 3.05 PROTECTIVE JACKET INSTALLATION A. PVC Fitting Covers and Jackets (PVJ): Lap seams and joints a minimum of 2 inches and continuously seal PVC with welding solvent recommended by jacket manufacturer. Lap slip joint ends 4 inches without fasteners where required to absorb expansion and contraction. For sections where vapor retarding jacket is not required and jacket requires routine removal, tack fasteners may be used. Secure PVC fitting covers with tack fasteners. For systems requiring a vapor retarding jacket, apply a 1 1/2-inch band of mastic over ends, throat, seams and penetrations. B. Protective Metal Jacket (PMJ): Lap seams a minimum of 2 inches. Secure with metal bands for end to end joints, and rivets or sheet metal screws for longitudinal joints. Rivets, screws, and bands shall be constructed of the same material as the jacket. Locate seams on bottom for exterior applications. Seal laps with 1/8-inch bead of metal jacketing sealant to prevent water entry. C. Vapor Barriers: 1. On systems operating at 50°F and above, pipe insulation jackets may be stapled using outward clinch staples spaced 3 inches apart at least 1/4 inch in from the lap edge. Mastics used shall be "breather" type allowing passage of water vapor. 2. On systems operating below 50°F and on roof drain lines, insulation laps shall be vapor-sealed using self-sealing lap, lap-seal tape gun, or adhesive Jackets shall be applied with a continuous unbroken vapor seal. Mastics and adhesives used shall be vapor retarding type limiting passage of water vapor. ® Section 20 07 19-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.06 PIPING INSULATION A. Provide insulation on new and existing remodeled piping as indicated in the following schedule: INSULATION THICKNESS BY PIPE SIZE 1"to 1-1/2" 4" to 8" a n d SERVICE INSULATION JACKET < 1" < 1 1/2" to < 4" < 8" Larger Piping within Slabs and Flexible Closed Cell N/A 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" - - Masonry Walls Exterior Process Piping or Rigid Formed PMJ (2) 1" (2) 1" (2) 1" (2) 1" (2) 1" Piping Located in Fiberglass Unconditioned Spaces Refrigerant Suction Flexible Closed Cell NA 1.0" 1.0" 1.5" 1.5" 1.5" Above Grade Stormwater/Roof Flexible Closed Cell N/A 0.5" 0.5" 0.5" 0.5" 0.5" Drains Cooling Coil Condensate Drain Rigid Formed PVJ 0.5" 0.5" 1" 1" 1" Fiberglass Cold Water Rigid Formed PVJ 1" 1" 1" 1" 1" (Potable/Nonpotable) Fiberglass Hot Water Rigid Formed PVJ 1" 1" 1" 1" 1" (Potable/Nonpotable) Fiberglass B. Where schedule indicates multiple layers of insulation, (for example, (2) 1" indicates 2 layers of 1-inch insulation) layers shall be applied with staggered joints. C. For systems with operating fluid temperatures 65°F or less, furnish and install removable flexible closed cell insulation covers, plugs or caps for all mechanical equipment and devices that require access by balancing contractors or service and maintenance personnel. Covers shall be tight fitting to provide a complete vapor retarding barrier. Examples include but are not limited to: 1. Flow sensing devices. 2. Circuit setters. 3. Manual ball valve air vents. 4. Drain valves. 5. Blowdown valves. 6. Pressure/temperature test plugs. 7. Grease fittings. 8. Pump bearing caps. 9. Equipment labels. D. All piping exterior to buildings shall be provided with a PMJ or SAJ jacket. 3.07 SPECIAL AREAS A. All areas indicated on the Drawings as "Hazardous", Class I Division 1, or Class I Division 2 shall include PVJ, SAJ, or PMJ jackets. B. All areas indicated on the Drawings as "Corrosive" or NEMA 4X shall include PVJ or SAJ jackets. END OF SECTION Section 20 07 19-7 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 21 11 00 WATER-BASED FIRE PROTECTION (BID ALTERNATIVE NO. 2) PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: There is one automatic fire sprinkler zone scheduled arid outlined on the drawings. This zone connects to a sprinkler riser. This zone is a wet sprinkler system. The zone begins with a zone control valve with tamper switch, flow switch, 1-inch inspector's test valve, and auxiliary drain valve. B. Provide complete fire protection systems that are compatible with the fire alarm system in accordance with the Factory Mutual Research Approval Guide. The fire protection system shall include all necessary piping, valves, controls, fittings, and hardware for each of the following buildings and the corresponding system types: Building Automatic Fire Sprinkler Zone Chemical Building Wet Pipe System C. Work under this section shall commence with a connection to the potable water service and all interior fire protection systems. D. CONTRACTOR may install additional piping and fittings and valves not shown on the drawings for testing purposes or for the convenience of the installation. Where such materials are installed, they shall comply with the specifications and shall be sized to be compatible with the system design. Remove such installed materials when they interfere with the design conditions. E. Information given herein and on drawings is as exact as could be secured but is not guaranteed. Do not scale drawings for exact dimensions. Where architectural features govern location of work, refer to architectural drawings. Check, verify, and coordinate work with drawings and specifications prepared for other trades. Include all modifications, relocations, or adjustments necessary to complete work or to avoid interference with other trades. F. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Comply with requirements of International Building Code 2012, local fire chief or fire marshal, insurance underwriter, and applicable National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards (latest editions): 1. ASSE 1015—Double Check Backflow Prevention Devices and Double Check Fire Prevention Backflow Prevention Assemblies. 2. NFPA 13—Installation of Sprinkler Systems. 3. NFPA 24—Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances. Section 21 11 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 4. NFPA 25—Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire Protection Systems. 5. NFPA 72—National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code. 6. Underwriters Laboratories Fire Protection Equipment Directory. 7. Current Factory Mutual Approval Guide. 8. Local and State Building, Mechanical and Fire Codes. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All drawings and hydraulic calculations shall be signed and sealed by a registered architect, Professional Engineer, or fire protection systems designer or signed and dated by the contractor responsible for the design and installation of the system, in accordance -- with International Building Code 2012. B. CONTRACTOR shall be licensed by the State of Iowa for installation of sprinkler fire protection systems. C. CONTRACTOR(s) shall submit prequalification evidence of at least five projects of comparable size and scope successfully completed with their Bid. Distortion or misrepresentation of qualification evidence may result in Contract cessation. D. UL and FM Compliance: Unless otherwise indicated, all products shall be listed in the latest publication of Approval Guides for Underwriters Laboratory and Factory Mutual for the service intended. All system components shall be in conformance with applicable NFPA Standards. E. Any installed material not meeting the specification requirements must be replaced with material that meets these specifications without additional cost to CITY. 1.04 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Available water supply data (preliminary) is as follows: Static Residual Flow Pressure Pressure Hydrant ID Location Date Time (gpm) (psi) (psi) Hydrant A Easton Ave 06/11/2019 1:50 PM 1,150 85 65 @ Main Gate Reading hydrant was located offsite at LaGrange and Lincolnway. B. Water test data is preliminary for Bidding purposes. CONTRACTOR shall perform flow tests prior to preparation of design calculations. Test shall be representative of high water-use periods. C. Water test data is preliminary for Bidding purposes. CONTRACTOR shall perform flow tests prior to preparation of design calculations. Test shall be representative of high water-use periods. Section 21 11 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 D. Design fire protection systems in accordance with codes, standards, and regulations noted above. Design sprinkler systems for the most hydraulically remote a-ea based on the following: Area of Total Sprinkler Sprinkler Sprinkler Sprinkler Combined Zone Area System Operation Density Occupancy Rating Inside/Outside Description (sf) Type (sf) (gpm/sf) Classification (°F) Hose (gpm) Zone 1 885 Wet 1,500 0.2 O.H. Group II 105 250 E. Maximum head spacing according to NFPA 13 for each occupancy hazard indicated. F. Hydraulic Calculations: Sprinkler systems which shall be hydraulically designed must be designed a minimum of 10% or 10 psi, whichever is greater, below the available water curve. G. Hose Streams: Add indicated hose streams to all sprinkler zone hydraulic calculations at the base of the riser. H. Water velocity throughout the entire system shall not exceed 20 feet per second. I. Where weld fittings or mechanical grooved fittings are used, use only long radius elbows. J. Fire protection system components shall be rated for minimum operating pressure of 175 psig. K. Corrosive Atmosphere(s): Corrosive atmospheres include chemical storage rooms. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. The provisions outlined in this section shall expand and supplement the requ rements specified in Division 01. Where additional or differing requirements are indicated, :he more stringent provision applies. B. Submittals shall be sent to and approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction prior to submitting to CONSULTANT. Include copy of approval letters in submittal to CONSULTANT. C. Submit fire protection system drawings at minimum scale of 1/8 inch equals 1 foot 0 inches for floor plans and 1/2 inch equals 1 foot 0 inch for details. Drawings shall include water supply locations and size, piping layout and size, sprinkler locations and type, piping and fire protection specialty locations and type, valve stem movement, hanger locations and type, lighting, ductwork, equipment locations and type, valve locations and type, occupancy classes, hydraulic reference points, design areas, hose locations, and discharge densities. Include incidental details not usually shown or specified but necessary for proper installation and operation. Submittal drawings shall be stamped by the designer. D. Prepare floor plans, reflected ceiling plans, elevations, sections, and details to conclusively coordinate and integrate all fire protection installations. Indicate locations where space is limited and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to other trades. -- Section 21 11 00-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 E. Submit hydraulic calculations for water supply and sprinkler systems. Include summary sheet and detailed work sheets. Describe characteristics of water supply and location of effective point used in calculations. Include graph illustration of water supply, hose demand, and sprinkler demand. F. Furnish product submittals for all equipment and systems. Mark general catalog sheets and drawings to indicate specific items being submitted and proper identification of equipment by name and/or number as indicated in the Contract Documents. Where more than one item appears on a manufacturer's catalog sheet, the item(s) to be used shall be indicated by a red marking or an arrow. Include wiring diagrams of electrically powered equipment. G. Material submittals shall include all items listed in the product section and all additional items necessary to provide a complete installation. - 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Assemble material in three-ring or post binders using an index at the front of each volume and tabs for each system or type of equipment. In addition to the Division 1 requirements, include the following information: 1. Copies of all approved submittals along with approval letters. 2. Manufacturer's wiring diagrams for electrically powered equipment. 3. Records of tests performed to certify compliance with system requirements. 4. Certificates of inspection by regulatory agencies. 5. Parts lists for equipment and specialties. 6. Manufacturer's installation, operation, and maintenance recommendations for equipment and specialties. 7. Valve types and locations. 8. Warranties. 9. Additional information as required for records and maintenance of system. -- 10. Lubrication instructions including list/frequency of lubrication. 11. Two copies of NFPA 25 current for the year the system is installed. 1.07 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Maintain at the site an up-to-date marked set of "record" drawings that shall be corrected and delivered to CONSULTANT upon completion. B. Upon completion of the Work and final acceptance by the local authority, CONTRACTOR shall submit record drawings to CITY and CONSULTANT under the provisions of Division 01. 1.08 TRAINING A. Instruct CITY's personnel in the proper operation, maintenance, and testing of systems and equipment provided as part of this project. Include not less than four hours of instruction using the Operation and Maintenance Manuals and Record Drawings during this instruction. Demonstrate testing, start-up, and shutdown procedures for all equipment. All training shall be during normal working hours. Videotape all instructions and provide CITY with copy. Section 21 11 00-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING A. Piping Belowground: See Section 33 30 10—Buried Piping and Appurtenances for — belowground piping. B. Piping Aboveground: 1. Steel Pipe: Black steel pipe welded and seamless, Type F, Grade A ASTM A53; black welded and seamless steel pipe for fire protection use, Type F, AS TM A795; electric resistance welded steel pipe, Grade A, ASTM A135. Threaded light wall pipe and plastic pipe are not acceptable. 2. Pipe Wall Thickness: Threaded pipe shall have a minimum wall thickness of Schedule 40. All other pipe shall have a minimum wall thickness of Schedule 10. Piping 2 inches and under shall be minimum Schedule 40 unless stated otherwise herein. 3. Fittings (2 inches and Under): Cast iron pipe flanges and flanged fittings, Class 125/250, ASTM A126/ANSI B16.4. Malleable iron threaded fittings, Class 150/300, ASTM A197/ANSI B16.3. Standard weight seamless carbon steel weld fittings, ASTM A234 grade, ANSI B16.9. Mechanical grooved fittings with EPDM gaskets, ASTM A536 ductile iron, ASTM A47 malleable iron, or ASTM A53 fabricated steel. Fittings on galvanized pipe systems shall be galvanized. 4. Welding Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials. 5. Finish: Hot-dipped zinc-coated (galvanized) finish on piping and fittings used in dry sprinkler or combined pipe systems, preaction systems, piping exposed to weather, and piping exposed to corrosive environments where indicated in design criteria. Thread or cut groove hot-dipped zinc-coated pipe ends for fitting connections. Indoor dry standpipe systems supplied by fire department connection only may be black steel piping and fittings. C. Unions and Flanges: 1. Unions, flanges, and gasket materials shall have a pressure rating of not less than 175 psig. 2. 2-inch and Smaller Steel: ASTM A197/ANSI B16.3 malleable iron anions with brass seats. Use black malleable iron on black steel piping and galvanized malleable iron on galvanized steel piping. — 3. 2 1/2-inch and Larger Steel: ASTM A181 or A105, Class 150, Grade 1 hot forged steel flanges of threaded, welding neck, or slip-on pattern on black steel and threaded only on galvanized steel. ANSI B16.1 or ANSI B16.5, Class 150 cast iron threaded flanges. -- Use raised face flanges ANSI B16.5 for mating with other raised face flanges or equipment with flat ring or full-face gaskets. Use ANSI B16.1 flat face flanges with full-face gaskets for mating with other flat face flanges on equipment. Provide galvanized flanges on galvanized piping. 4. Rigid or zero flex-type couplings will be used when operating pressures may cause piping to move out of place or sway on hangers. Flexible couplings may be used where piping is properly braced or clamped into a grid position. Section 21 11 00-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 D. Mechanical Grooved Pipe Connections: 1. Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings, as manufactured by Victaulic, Anvil, or equal, may be used with cut steel pipe. Couplings and fittings shall be malleable iron ASTM A47, or ductile iron A536 with painted finish. Fittings used on galvanized steel pipe shall have galvanized finish, ASTM A153. 2. All mechanical grooved pipe material including gaskets, couplings, fittings, and flange adapters shall be from the same manufacturer. 3. Gaskets shall be EPDM, ASTM D2000. Heat-treated carbon steel oval-neck track �. bolts and nuts, ASTM A183 with zinc electroplated finish. Gaskets for dry systems shall be flush seal or flush gap design. 4. "Pipeolets" or similar mechanically attached fittings will not be permitted as fittings. "Weldolets" welded to cross mains in fabrication shops will be permitted as a fitting to supply branch piping only, unless specifically approved for other applications. 5. Fittings and couplings must be suitable for the temperature and pressure involved. In - no case is the final system to have a pressure rating of less than 175 psig. 6. Acceptable fittings and couplings are listed below, based on Victaulic figure numbers: a. Couplings: Standard flexible couplings, Style 77; or lightweight couplings, m. Style 75. Reducing couplings are not acceptable. b. Flanges: Flange adaptor, Style 741, except at lug-type butterfly valves where standard threaded flanges shall be used. 2.02 HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS A. Comply with the requirements of applicable NFPA Standards. Hangers shall be UL-listed and FM-approved, unless otherwise specified. B. Thread length on threaded hanger rods shall not exceed 5-rod diameters at each end. C. Riser clamps shall not protrude more than 2 inches beyond the edge of the hole. The riser clamps need to be only UL listed, Grinnell figure 261, or approved equal. D. Below concrete construction, inserts, expansion cases, or Phillips-type shells shall be installed to support piping smaller than 6 inches. Concrete expansion anchors are to be Hilti Drop-in Anchor, Phillips concrete fasteners, or approved equal. "Kwik" bolts or similar concrete anchors are not permitted. Below concrete construction inserts shall be installed for all piping 6 inches and larger. In lieu of inserts, expansion shields spaced no more than 10 feet apart may be installed in accordance with NFPA 13, Sections 2-6 and A-2-6.3. E. Corrosive Atmosphere Coatings: Factory coat supports and anchors used in corrosive atmospheres with hot dip galvanizing after fabrication, ASTM A123, 1.5 ounces/square foot of surface each side. Mechanical galvanize threaded products, ASTM B695 Class 50, 2.0 mil coating. Field cuts and damaged finishes shall be field-covered with zinc rich paint of comparable thickness to factory coating. F. Equipment Stands: Use structural steel members welded to and supported by pipe supports. Clean, prime, and coat with three coats rust inhibiting alkyd paint or one coat epoxy mastic. Where exposed to weather, treat with corrosive atmosphere coatings. Section 21 11 00-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.03 SPRINKLERS A. Manufacturer: Sprinkler head model numbers establish type and style of head. Products of the following manufacturers, determined to be equal by CONSULTANT, will be accepted: Central Sprinkler Corporation, Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Star Sprinkler Corporation, Viking Corporation, Victaulic, and TYCO. B. All sprinkler heads shall be UL listed and FM approved, fusible link or glass bulb type, cast brass or bronze construction. Provide heads with nominal 1/2-inch discharge orifice except where greater than normal density requires large orifice. C. Select fusible link or glass bulb temperature rating to not exceed maximum ambient temperature rating allowed under normal conditions at installed location and as indicated. Provide ordinary temperature fusible link or glass bulb type except at skylights, sealed display windows, unventilated attics and roof spaces, over cooking equipment, adjacent to diffusers, unit heaters, uninsulated heating pipes or ducts, mechanical rooms, storage rooms, or where otherwise indicated. D. Listed corrosion-resistant sprinkler heads shall be installed in locations where chemicals, moisture, or other corrosive vapors sufficient to cause corrosion of such devices exist. Sprinkler heads located in areas listed in design requirements shall be listed corrosion-resistant heads. E. Sprinkler Cabinets: Provide cabinets complete with required number of spare heads of each type and temperature rating and special wrenches in accordance with NFPA 13. Provide multiple cabinets as required. Cabinet shall be finished steel suitable for wall mounting with hinged cover and adequate space for required spare heads and wrenches. Coordinate cabinet location with CITY's representative. Coordinate quantities with the authority having jurisdiction over the project. 2.04 VALVES A. Manufacturers: Kennedy, Milwaukee, Nibco, Stockham, Victaulic, Viking, and Watts. B. Line Control Valves 2 inches and Smaller: 1. Ball Valves: Bronze 2-piece, threaded or sweat ends, standard port, blowout-proof stem, chrome-plated ball, glass-reinforced seats, UL approved, 250 psi rating. - 2. Butterfly Valve: Bronze body butterfly valve, 175 psig, geared operator, visible position indicator, normally open tamper switch with double wire leads, Buna or Viton seat, stainless steel disc and stem. Equal to Milwaukee Model BB-SC Series. C. Line Control Valves 2 1/2 inches and Larger: 1. Gate Valve: UL listed/FM-approved, outside screw and yoke (OS&Y) gate valves, 175 psig, cast iron body, bronze-mounted, bolted bonnet, rising stem, solid wedge, with normally open tamper switch with double wire leads. Valves shall be capable of being repacked under pressure with valve wide open. Equal to Nibco F-607-OTS. 2. Butterfly Valve: Cast or ductile iron body butterfly valve, lug style or grooved, 175 psig, geared operator, visible position indicator, normally open tamper switch with double wire leads, EPDM resilient seat, EPDM seals, nickel-plated ductile iron disc. Valve assembly to be bubble tight to 175 psig with no downstream flange/pipe Section 21 11 00-7 4463.004/City Contract No.994 attached. Use cap screws for removal of downstream piping while using the valve for system shutoff. Equal to Nibco LD3510-8. D. Test and Drain Valves: 1. Threaded bronze globe type with composition disc, 175 psi WOG. Valves shall be equal to Nibco KT-65 for piping assemblies built on site. Victaulic style 718 or 719 or equal may be installed to save space and assembly time. 2. Drain Valves: UL listed, 3/4-inch minimum, two- or three-piece bronze body ball valve; threaded ends, chrome-plated bronze ball; glass-filled Teflon seat; Teflon packing and threaded packing nut; blowout-proof stem; 400 psig WOG. Low point drain valves shall have, in addition, a 1-inch brass nipple with 3/4-inch male hose threads and cap. 3. Combination test, drain, and pressure relief valves: a. AGF Model 1011ATESTanDRAIN, or equal. b. Valve shall be UL listed and FM approved. c. 3/4-inch minimum size, bronze body and relief valve, Teflon seat, brass ball, stem, and bypass fittings, braided nylon bypass tubing. d. Orifice size shall be determined by sprinkler heads in system. e. Pressure relief valve shall be factory-rated for 175 psi. 2.05 BACKFLOW PREVENTER A. Manufacturers: Ames, Conbraco, Febco, Watts, Beeco, Cla-Val, Wilkinson. B. ASSE 1015 double check backflow preventer with two independent spring-loaded check valves, two isolation ball or gate valves with normally open tamper switches, double wire leads, 4-valved test ports, and lockable valves. Constructed of bronze or epoxy-coated cast iron or stainless steel body with bronze and plastic internal parts, stainless steel springs, silicone rubber valve discs, bronze seats, rated for 175 psig. 2.06 SPECIALTIES A. Supervisory/Tamper Switches: 1. Manufacturer: Potter, System Sensor, or equal. 2. For OS&Y valve or butterfly valve installations, UL listed/FM-approved, to monitor position of valve, tamper-resistant cover screws, single or double SPDT switch contacts, corrosion-resistant, for indoor or outdoor use, NEMA 4 and 6P enclosures. B. Flow Switches: 1. Manufacturer: Potter, System Sensor, or equal. 2. Flow switches shall be UL listed and FM-approved capable of transmitting a signal when the flow of water equals or exceeds the discharge of a single head. Unit shall be vane type, with retard chamber and electrical characteristics compatible with fire alarm system. Provide flow switches for each riser. 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Fire Department Connection: 5-inch Storz connection with 30-degree downward elbow, no -- equal. Section 21 11 00-8 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. Pressure Gauges: 1. Manufacturer: Ametek/U.S. Gauge Division, Ashcroft, Marsh, Taylor, H.O. Trerice, Weiss, Weksler. 2. Cast aluminum, stainless steel, or brass case of not less than 3.5 inches in diameter, double-strength glass window, black lettering on a white background, phosphor bronze bourdon tube with bronze bushings, recalibration from the front of the dial, 99% accuracy over the middle half of the scale, 98.5% accuracy over the remainder of the scale. Include bronze three-way globe valve with plugged outlet for fire inspector's test gauge. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION A. Install pipe, fittings, equipment, and components in accordance with refe-enced standards, manufacturer's recommendations, recognized industry practices, and the authority having jurisdiction. B. General Coordination: Install all piping parallel to building walls and ceilings and at heights that do not obstruct any portion of a window, doorway, stairway, or passageway. Where interferences develop in the field, offset or reroute piping as required to clear such interferences. Coordinate locations of fire protection piping with piping, ductwork, conduit, and equipment of other trades to allow sufficient clearances. In all cases consult drawings for exact location of pipe spaces, ceiling heights, ceiling grid layout, fight fixtures, and grilles before installing piping. _ C. Where piping must be embedded in masonry or concrete, provide protective sleeve covering of elastomeric pipe insulation. — D. Maintain piping, fittings, and fire protection system components in clean condition internally during construction. All material shall be kept at proper temperature to provide proper jointing. Pipe and fittings shall be corresponding materials when assembled. E. Provide clearance for access to valve and piping specialties to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement. F. Pipe shall be hung from building members using concrete inserts or beam clamps. Provide anchors, expansion joints, swing joints and/or expansion loops so that piping may expand and contract without damage to itself, equipment, or building. G. Install sprinkler piping so that the system can be drained in accordance with NFPA 13. Where possible, slope to main drain valve. Where piping not susceptible to freezing cannot be fully drained, install nipple and cap for drainage of less than 5 gallons or ball valve with hose thread outlet and cap for drainage over 5 gallons. Pipe main drain ✓alve, inspector's tests, and auxiliary drains to grade or to air gap sewer receptor. H. Provide 3/32 inches minimum thickness steel nailing plates behind or on either side of piping where the possibility of penetration from nails or drywall screws exists. Section 21 11 00-9 4463.004/City Contract No.994 I. Mitered ells, notched tees, and orange peel reducers are not acceptable. Bushings and reducing couplings are not acceptable. J. Install auxiliary drains at all low points in the system, air vents at all high points in the system, and as required by the referenced standards. Drains and vents shall consist of, as a minimum, a 1-inch ball valve, 1-inch brass nipple with 3/4-inch male hose threads and cap. K. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Where pipes pass through fire-rated wall assemblies, partitions, ceilings, or floors, the fire rating integrity shall be maintained. L. Do not install piping within exterior walls. M. Do not route piping above transformers, panelboards, or switchboards including the required service space for this equipment, unless the piping is serving this equipment. N. Floor and Roof Protection: 1. CONTRACTOR shall take extra precautions to protect the floors and roofs from oil spillage and dripping. Any operation, such as cutting and threading of pipe that can result in dripping of oil and thread cuttings, shall be done over a drain pan that will collect all drippings. Tarpaulins, plywood, or drop cloths shall be used around such piping to prevent workers from tracking oil over the area. Workers shall be cautioned about cleaning their feet. Any liquids, such as oil, that will be used in this work shall be kept in tightly stoppered containers; extreme care shall be used when charging equipment with these materials to avoid any spills. 2. All residual matter deposited on floors, roofs, walls, and other surfaces because of the system installation shall be completely removed. 3.02 WELDED PIPE JOINTS A. Welded joints shall be made in a fabrication shop. No welding is allowed at the project site. B. Make all welded joints by fusion welding in accordance with ASME Codes, ANSI B31, and the International Building Code 2012 where applicable. Electrodes shall be Lincoln, or approved equal, with coating and diameter as recommended by the manufacturer for the type and thickness of work being done. C. "Weldolets" and "Threadolets" may be used for branch takeoffs up to one-half the diameter of the main. 3.03 THREADED PIPE JOINTS A. Joints of threaded pipe shall be made by cutting pipe square and reaming inside. Ream ends of pipe to remove burrs. Clean scale and dirt from interior and exterior of each section of pipe and fitting prior to assembly. Threads shall be cut so that exposed threads shall not exceed three. Exposed threads shall be coated with asphaltum. Use joint compound sparingly. B. Use a thread lubricant or Teflon tape when making joints; no hard setting pipe thread cement or caulking will be allowed. Section 21 11 00-10 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.04 MECHANICAL GROOVED PIPE CONNECTIONS A. Use pipe factory-grooved in accordance with the coupling manufacturer's specifications or field-grooved pipe in accordance with the same specifications using specially designed tools available for the application. Lubricate pipe and coupling gasket, align pipe, and secure joint in accordance with the coupling manufacturer's specifications. 3.05 UNIONS AND FLANGES A. Install a union, flange, or grooved coupling combination at each connection to each piece of equipment and at other items that may require removal for maintenance, repair, or replacement. Where a valve is located at a piece of equipment, locate the flange or union or grooved coupling combination connections on the equipment side of the valve. Concealed unions, flanges, or couplings are not acceptable. 3.06 HANGERS A. Support piping in accordance with NFPA 13, other sections of this specification, and in accordance with all state and local requirements. B. Provide hangers to support all piping in perfect alignment without sagging or interference, to permit free expansion and contraction and to meet the requirements of NFPA 13. Strap hangers, wire hangers, or trapeze hangers will not be acceptable. 3.07 SPRINKLER HEADS A. Install sprinkler heads as recommended by manufacturer. Locate sprinkler heads as indicated on fire protection plan and reflected ceiling plan maintaining minimum clearances from obstructions, ceilings, and walls. Install sprinkler heads level in locations not subject to spray pattern interference. When ducts, lights, or other objects are obstructions to sprinkler distribution, additional heads shall be provided beneath the obstruction. B. All sprinkler heads installed in finished ceilings shall be fed by a swing joint or return bend arrangement for final positioning in ceiling grid pattern during constructior phases. 3.08 GAUGES A. Provide a valved pressure gauge in main fire protection riser, at or near each test connection, and at the top of each piping riser. Provide gauge with a connection having a soft metal seated globe valve arranged for draining pipe between gauge and valve. Install gauges to permit removal and where they will not be subject to freezing. 3.09 VALVES A. Properly align piping before installation of valves. Do not support weight of piping system on valve ends. Mount valves in locations that allow access for operation, servicing, and replacement. Install all valves with the stem in the upright or horizontal position. Valves installed with the stems down will not be accepted. Provide a riser shutoff valve and a capped hose thread drain valve at the bottom of each riser. Provide capped hose thread drain valves to allow draining of each portion of piping. Section 21 11 00-11 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. Provide permanently marked identification signs indicating the portion of the system controlled by each valve. C. Provide tamper switch on each shutoff valve. D. Install locking device with each shutoff valve to prevent inadvertent closing of the valve. Keys shall be indexed to identify valve location. 3.10 SPECIALTY VALVES A. Install fire protection riser in vertical position. Install trim recommended by manufacturer including drain and test valves. Route drains to hub or floor drains. Test and adjust operation of valves, alarms, pressure maintenance devices, and deluge/preaction controls. 3.11 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS A. Fire department connections will be installed in the same location as the double check valve assembly. Mount on wall where indicated and/or as required. Support from structure �. independent of piping. Locate between 2 feet to 3 feet above grade. Fill wall penetration with insulation and caulk exterior and interior face of wall opening weathertight. B. Provide 1/2-inch automatic drip drain on inlet of fire department connection check valve and where indicated. 3.12 TEST CONNECTIONS A. Install test connections sized and located in accordance with NFPA Standards, complete with shutoff valve. Test connections may also serve as drain pipes. B. Provide test connections for each flow switch. Test connections shall discharge to appropriate receptacles. C. When test valves are located remote from the flow switch, the valve shall be identified with a brass tag denoting which flow switch is being tested. 3.13 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS A. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate his work with the Fire Alarm System Supplier(Section 28 46 00). The system (Fire Alarm and Fire Protection) must be compatible as listed in the Factory Mutual Research Approval Guide. 3.14 FINISHES A. See Section 09 91 00—Painting for methods and material required for work under this section. 3.15 TESTING A. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler piping systems in accordance with NFPA 13. Section 21 11 00-12 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. The sprinkler system shall be tested as an entire system or partial system. The system shall be hydrostatically tested at 200 psi for 2 hours. No leakage allowed. All defective joints shall be replaced with new materials. No caulking of defective joints shall be allowed. After defective joints are replaced, the system shall be retested until satisfactory results are obtained. Pipe shall not be concealed until satisfactorily pressure-tested. C. CONSULTANT and CITY shall be notified 24 hours prior to any pressure test. This test shall be performed in the presence of appropriate representatives for CITY and CONSULTANT. A log of tests shall be kept stating who performed test, time and date of test, what section of system was tested, and results of test with properly executed Contractor's Material and Test Certification forms from NFPA 13, Chapter 8. This log shall be kept at the job site and submitted to CONSULTANT for review. D. Flow switches shall be operated to test that proper signals are transmitter to the Fire Alarm System. E. Include tests for tamper switches. 3.16 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify equipment with engraved nameplates. B. Identify interior piping mains not less than once every 25 feet, not less than once in each room, adjacent to each access door or panel, and on both sides of tl'e partition where exposed piping passes through walls or floors. Place flow directiona arrows at each identification location. Provide one piece, preformed construction, nap-around pipe markers fastened by nylon ties at each end of the marker. C. Identify valves with signs according to NFPA rulings. D. Provide a hydraulic design information sign of permanently marked weatherproof metal or engraved nameplate material. Secure to alarm valve with brass chain or nylon wire ties. Information shall include location of the design areas. Include discharge densities, required flow and residual pressure at base of the riser, hose stream demand and fire sprinkler head demand. END OF SECTION Section 21 11 00-13 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 22 05 19 GENERAL PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Piping specialties for all plumbing piping systems unless noted otherwise. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 govern work under this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by a specific edition date. B. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within this specification. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All equipment or components of this specification section shall meet or exceed the requirements and quality of the items herein specified, or as denoted on the drawings. B. Equipment provider shall be responsible for providing certified equipment start-up and, when noted, an in the field certified training session. New start-up shall be for the purpose of determining alignment, lubrication, voltage, and amperage readings. All proper electrical connections, discharge and suction gauge readings. A copy of the start-up report shall be made and sent to both CONTRACTOR and CONSULTANT. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Include data concerning dimensions, required clearances, capacities, materials of construction, ratings, weights, manufacturer's installation requirements, manufacturer's performance limitations, and appropriate identification. C. Submittals for motors associated with equipment specified in this section shall include data sheets from the motor manufacturer. Data sheets from the equipment manufacturer or supplier are not acceptable. D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. E. Submittals must be specific to this project. Generic submittals will not be accepted. Section 22 05 19-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the site in such a manner as to protect the materials from shipping and handling damage. Provide materials on factory provided shipping skids and lifting lugs, if required for handling. B. Materials that could be damaged by the elements should be packaged in such a manner that they could withstand short-term exposure to the elements during transportation. C. Store materials in a clean, dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage. _ D. Use all means necessary to protect equipment before, during, and after installation. E. All scratched, dented, and otherwise damaged units shall be repaired :jr replaced at no additional cost to CITY. 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Include installation instructions, assembly views, lubrication instructions, recommended maintenance schedule and activities. - B. Include replacement and spare parts lists. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Standard One-Year Warranty: Unless otherwise stated below, manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the earlier of either the date established for partial utilization or Substantial Completion of the project. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 THERMOMETERS A. Manufacturers: Ashcroft, H.O. Trerice, Ametek/U. S. Gauge. B. Stem Type: Cast aluminum case, 9-inch scale, clear acrylic window. Adjustable angle brass stem with stem of sufficient length so the end of the stem is near the middle of a pipe without reducing the thickness of any insulation, red indicating fluid, black lettering against a white background, with scale ranges as follows: Service Hot Water Scale Range, °F 30-180 Increment, °F 2 2.02 THERMOMETER SOCKETS A. Brass with threaded connections suitable for thermometer stems and temperature control sensing elements in pipeline. Furnish with extension necks for insulated piping systems. Section 22 05 19-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.03 TEST WELLS A. Similar to thermometer sockets except with a brass cap that threads into the inside of the test well to prevent dirt from accumulating. Secure cap to body with a short chain. Furnish with extension necks, where appropriate, to accommodate the pipe insulation. 2.04 TEST PLUGS A. Brass threaded pressure and temperature test plug with neoprene self-closing valve, valve retainer, brass threaded cap, rated for 150 psi and 0 to 200°F. 2.05 PRESSURE GAUGES A. Manufacturers: Ashcroft, H.O. Trerice, Ametek/U. S. Gauge. B. Cast aluminum case of not less than 4.5 inches in diameter, double strength glass window, black lettering on a white background, phosphor bronze bourdon tube with bronze bushings, recalibration from the front of the dial, 99% accuracy over the middle half of the scale, 98.5% accuracy over the remainder of the scale, with scale range as follows: Service Hot Water Cold Water Compressed Air Scale Range, psig 0-100 0-100 0-200 Increment, psig 1 1 2 C. Pressure Snubbers: Bronze construction, 300 psig working pressure, 1/4-inch size. D. Gauge Valves: Provide ball valves as specified in Section 22 05 23—General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping. 2.06 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Backflow Preventers—Double Check Valve Assembly: 1. The assembly shall meet the requirements of ASSE 1015 and AWWA C510. 2. Top entry access points for each check assembly. 3. Replaceable seats. 4. Test cocks. 5. Rated 175 psi maximum working pressure with continuous temperature range of 33°F to 140°F. 6. Sizes 1/2 inch through 2 inches: Bronze alloy body, bronze strainer, upstream and downstream quarter-turn ball valves, union connections: Watts Regulator Company Series 719. 2.07 FIRE HYDRANTS A. Manufacturer: Clow, Kennedy, Mueller, Waterous. B. FH: AWWA C502 dry barrel hydrant with cast or ductile iron body and standpipe, two field replaceable 2 1/2-inch hose nozzles and chained caps, one field replaceable pumper nozzle and chained cap, 5 1/4-inch compression valve, 0-ring seals, sealed oil reservoir, breakaway safety flange and stem coupling, automatic bronze drain valve, red finish, 6-foot 0-inch minimum bury depth. Verify thread requirements with the local fire department or authority having jurisdiction. Section 22 05 19-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION �- A. Install thermometer in piping systems as indicated on the drawings and or details using a separable socket in each location. B. Install thermometer sockets at each point where a thermometer or temperature control sensing element is located in a pipeline. C. Install test wells in piping systems as indicated on the drawings and/o? details wherever provisions are needed for inserting a thermometer at a later date. D. Install test plugs in piping systems as indicated on the drawings and/o- details wherever provisions are needed for short-term measurement of pressure or temperature. E. Install pressure gauges in locations where indicated on the drawings and/or details, with scale range appropriate to the system operating pressures. Install pressure snubbers in gauge piping for all gauges used on water services. Install gauge valves at each gauge location as close to the main as possible and at each location where a gauge tapping is — indicated. F. Install backflow preventers in accordance with requirements maintaining rr inimum clearance distances for servicing and testing. G. Where backflow preventers requiring registration are installed, provide nitial registration, testing and report filing as required. List the name and address of the building that the backflow preventer installations occur in. H. Set fire hydrants level and plumb. Secure hydrant base and back with poured concrete thrust blocking providing thrust restraint and support of hydrant independent cif piping. Provide 1 cubic yard of granular backfill material around drain valve openings cor free drainage. Provide isolation valve and valve box at each hydrant. Where hydrant is located in paved area or near traffic, provide 6-inch diameter by 8-foot long Schedule 40 ,painted steel pipe bollards filled with concrete around hydrant. END OF SECTION — Section 22 05 19-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 22 05 23 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Valves of all descriptions except where indicated elsewhere. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by a specific edition date. B. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within this specification. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality assurance shall be in accordance with Section 01 40 00—Quality Control. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS A. Performance Requirements: 1. Lead-Free Requirements: All materials that contact potable water shall be lead free. Lead free refers to the wetted surface of pipe, fittings and fixtures in potable water systems that have a weighted average lead content 5.0.25% per the Federal Safe Drinking Water Act as amended January 4th, 2011 Section 1417. 2. ANSI Z21.22—Relief Valves and Automatic Gas Shutoff Devices for Hot Water Supply Systems. 3. ASSE 1003—Water Pressure Reducing Valves for Domestic Water Supply Systems. 4. Where valve types (ball, butterfly, etc.) are specified for individual plumbing services (i.e. domestic water, gas, etc.), each valve type shall be of the same manufacturer unless prior written approval is obtained from CITY. 5. Valves shall be line size unless specifically noted otherwise. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Schedule of all valves indicating type of service, dimensions, materials of construction, and pressure/temperature ratings for all valves shall be used on the project. Temperature ratings specified are for continuous operation. Section 22 05 23-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. All operations and maintenance data shall comply with the submission and content requirements specified under Section 01 33 00—Submittals. — PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 WATER SYSTEM VALVES (DCW, DHW, W2, TW) A. All water system valves to be rated at not less than 125 psig water working aressure at 240°F unless noted otherwise. B. Provide valve extensions for valves installed in all piping with insulation. C. All local shutoff valves serving emergency eyewash and shower stations shall be lockable. D. All valves on potable water supplies shall be suitable for potable water applications. E. Drain Valves: 3/4-inch ball valve with integral threaded hose adapter, sweat or threaded inlet connections, with threaded cap and chain on hose threads, Apollo 7OLF-200-HC, Milwaukee BA-100H or BA-150H, or Nibco T-585-70-HC. 2.02 SPECIALTY VALVES AND VALVE ACCESSORIES A. Gauge Valves: Use 1/4-inch ball valves. Needle valves and gauge uocks will not be accepted. B. Safety Relief Valves: Bronze body, temperature and pressure actuated, stainless steel stem and spring, thermostat with non-metallic coating, test lever, suitable for 125 psig water working pressure at 240°F, sized for full BTUH input and operating pressure of equipment, with valve capacity on metal label. For equipment less than or equal to 200,000 BTUH input, provide AGA, UL or ASME listed and labeled valve. Provide ASME listed and labeled valve for larger equipment. Bell & Gossett, A. W. Cash, Conbraco, Watts, Wilkins. Temperature and pressure relief valve shall be sized per AGA rating for BTUH input. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Properly align piping before installation of valves. Install and test valves in strict accordance with valve manufacturer's installation recommendations. Do not support weight of piping system on valve ends. B. Mount valves in locations which allow access for operation, servicing and replacement. C. Provide valve handle extensions for all valves installed in insulated piping D. Install all valves with the stem in the upright or horizontal position. If possibe, install butterfly valves with the stem in the horizontal position. Valves installed with the stems down will not be accepted. Section 22 05 23-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 E. Prior to flushing of piping systems, place all valves in the full-open position. 3.02 SHUT-OFF VALVES A. Install shut-off valves at each piece of equipment, at each branch take-off from mains for isolation or repair and elsewhere as indicated. 3.03 DRAIN VALVES A. Provide drain valves for complete drainage of all systems. Locations of drain valves include low points of piping systems, downstream of riser isolation valves, equipment locations specified or detailed, other locations required for drainage of systems and elsewhere as indicated. 3.04 SAFETY RELIEF VALVES A. Install relief valves on all pressure vessels and elsewhere as indicated. Inlet and outlet piping connecting to valves must be the same size as valve connections or larger. Pipe discharge to drain where indicated or to floor. END OF SECTION Section 22 05 23-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 22 11 00 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: All pipe, fittings, and appurtenances for domestic (hot anc cold) potable and non-potable water within and to five feet beyond building perimeter. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work under this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by a specific edition date. B. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within this specification. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Order all pipe with each length marked with the name or trademark of the manufacturer and type of pipe; with each shipping unit marked with the purchase order number, metal or alloy designation, temper, size, and name of supplier. B. Any installed material not meeting the specification requirements must be replaced with material that meets these specifications without additional cost to CITY. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. CONTRACTOR shall provide schedule indicating the ASTM, AWWA, or C ISPI specification number of the pipe being proposed along with its type and grade if known at the time of -- submittal, and sufficient information to indicate the type and rating of fitting:;for each service. C. CONTRACTOR shall provide statement from manufacturer on his letterhead that pipe furnished meets the ASTM, AWWA, or CISPI specification contained in this section. D. CONTRACTOR shall provide statement from manufacturer on manufacturer's letterhead that pipe furnished meets requirements for Buy American (AIS). 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE — A. CONTRACTOR shall promptly inspect shipments to review that the material is undamaged and complies with specifications. Section 22 11 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. CONTRACTOR shall cover pipe to prevent corrosion or deterioration while allowing sufficient ventilation to avoid condensation. Materials shall not be stored directly on grade. Pipe, tube, and fitting ends shall be protected so they are not damaged. Where end caps are provided or specified, CONTRACTOR shall take precautions so the caps remain in place. Protect fittings, flanges, and unions by storage inside or by durable,waterproof, above ground packaging. C. Offsite storage agreements will not relieve CONTRACTOR from using proper storage techniques. D. Deliver, store, and protect in accordance with Section 01 60 00—Materials and Equipment. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 DOMESTIC WATER (INCLUDES COLD, HOT, AND TEMPERED) A. Copper Piping and Fittings: Piping smaller than 3 inches in diameter shall be Type K copper water tube, H (drawn) temper, ASTM B88; wrought copper pressure fittings, ANSI B16.22; lead free (<.2%) solder, ASTM B32; flux, ASTM B813; copper phosphorous brazing alloy, AWS A5.8 BCuP. Mechanically formed brazed tee connections may be used in lieu of specified tee fittings for branch takeoffs up to one-half the diameter of the main. B. PVC Piping: 1. Except as otherwise specified, non-potable water piping in corrosive environments shall be constructed of PVC. 2. PVC material shall conform to ASTM D1784, Class 12454-B. PVC piping and fittings shall be PVC 1120, Schedule 80, high impact pipe conforming to ASTM D1785 with bells conforming to ASTM D2672. Solvent weld fittings shall conform to ASTM D2467, and for threaded, ASTM D2464. 3. All piping shall be approved for use by the National Sanitation Foundation. All pipe delivered to the job site shall be properly marked for type, grade, and design stress rating. Expansion joints shall be provided where needed. In general, all joints shall be solvent weld, except where flanges are required or as shown on the drawings or where transition to another pipe material is required. Underground pressure piping shall be installed in compliance with ASTM D2774. 2.02 DIELECTRIC UNIONS AND FLANGES A. Watts Regulator Company, Lochinvar, Wilkins or EPCO Sales, Inc., dielectric unions 2 inches and smaller; dielectric flanges 2 inches and larger; with iron female pipe thread to copper solder joint or brass female pipe thread end connections, non-asbestos gaskets, having a pressure rating of not less than 175 psig at 180°F. 2.03 UNIONS AND FLANGES A. Unions, flanges and gasket materials to have a pressure rating of not less than 150 psig at 180°F. Gasket material for flanges and flanged fittings shall be Teflon type. Treated paper gaskets are not acceptable. B. 2 1/2-Inch and Smaller Copper: ANSI B16.18 cast bronze union coupling or ANSI B15.24 Class 150 cast bronze flanges. Section 22 11 00-2 4463,004/City Contract No.994 PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install pipe and fittings in accordance with reference standards, manufacturers' recommendations, and recognized industry practices. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Cut pipe ends square. Ream ends of piping to remove burrs. Clean s gale and dirt from interior and exterior of each section of pipe and fitting prior to assembly. 3.03 ERECTION A. Install all piping parallel to building walls and ceilings and at heights which do not obstruct any portion of a window, doorway, stairway, or passageway. Where interferences develop in the field, offset or reroute piping as required to clear such interferences. Coordinate locations of plumbing piping with piping, ductwork, conduit and equipment of other trades to allow sufficient clearances. In all cases, consult drawings for exact location of pipe spaces, ceiling heights, door and window openings, or other architectural details before installing piping. B. Where copper or steel piping is embedded in masonry or concrete, providc protective sleeve covering of elastomeric pipe insulation. C. Maintain piping in clean condition internally during construction. D. Provide clearance for installation of insulation, access to valves, and pipirg specialties. E. Provide anchors, expansion joints, swing joints, and/or expansion loops so that piping may expand and contract without damage to itself, equipment, or building. F. Do not route piping through transformer vaults or above transformers, panelboards, or switchboards, including the required service space for this equipment, unless the piping is serving this equipment. _ G. Tracer wire shall be installed on all underground pipe as specified in Section 33 30 10—Buried Piping and Appurtenances. 3.04 THREADED PIPE JOINTS A. Use a thread lubricant or Teflon tape when making joints; no hard setting pipe thread cement or caulking shall be allowed. 3.05 MECHANICAL JOINT PIPE CONNECTIONS A. Comply with AWWA C600/C605 installation requirements. Clean pipe end and socket. Clean and lubricate pipe end, socket, and gasket with soapy water or gasket lubricant. Place gland and gasket, properly oriented, on pipe end. Insert pipe end fully into socket and press gasket evenly into recess keeping joint straight. Press gland evenly against gasket, insert bolts, and hand tighten nuts. Make joint deflection prior to tightening bolts. Evenly tighten bolts in sequence to recommended torque. Section 22 11 00-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.06 MECHANICAL GROOVED PIPE CONNECTIONS A. Use pipe factory grooved in accordance with the coupling manufacturer's specifications or field grooved pipe in accordance with the same specifications using specially designed tools specially designed for the application. Lubricate pipe and coupling gasket, align pipe, and secure joint in accordance with the coupling manufacturer's specifications. 3.07 DOMESTIC WATER A. Maintain piping system in clean condition during installation. Remove dirt and debris from assembly of piping as work progresses. Cap open pipe ends where left unattended or subject to contamination. B. Provide thrust restraints for 3-inch and larger exterior water piping joints, hydrants, caps, plugs, fittings, and bends of 22 1/2 degrees or more. Field apply continuous anti-corrosion coating to rodded restraint components. Protect mechanical joints, nuts and bolts from concrete cover. Cover with 8 mil sheet or tube polyethylene material sleeve. C. Install interior water piping with drain valves where indicated and at low points of system to allow complete drainage. Install shutoff valves where indicated and at the base of risers to allow isolation of portions of system for repair. Do not install water piping within exterior walls. 3.08 DIELECTRIC UNIONS AND FLANGES A. Install dielectric unions or flanges at each point where a copper-to-steel pipe connection is required in domestic water systems. 3.09 UNIONS AND FLANGES A. Install a union or flange at each connection to each piece of equipment and at other items which may require removal for maintenance, repair, or replacement.Where a valve is located -- at a piece of equipment, locate the flange or union connection on the equipment side of the valve. Concealed unions or flanges are not acceptable. 3.10 TESTING AND CLEANING A. General: 1. All new piping shall be tested. All piping, interior or exposed, shall be subject to test before being covered with insulation or paint. All piping and appurtenances shall be watertight or airtight and free from visible leaks. 2. All piping shall be flushed or blown out after installation and prior to testing. CONTRACTOR shall provide all necessary piping connections, water, air, test pumping equipment, water meter, bulkheads, valves, pressure gauge and other equipment, materials, and facilities necessary to complete the specified tests, flushing, sterilization. CONTRACTOR shall also provide all temporary sectionalizing devices and vents as required. 3. All new and parts of existing altered, extended, or repaired plumbing system piping shall be tested for leaks and defects. Piping being tested shall not leak nor show any loss in test pressure for duration specified. 4. In cases of minor installation and repairs where specified water and/or air test procedures are deemed impractical, CONTRACTOR shall perform alternate testing procedures if acceptable to CONSULTANT. Alternate testing procedures for minor Section 22 11 00-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 installation and repairs may include visual evaluation of installed components by CONSULTANT during a simulation of use. 5. The water used for tests shall be obtained from a potable source of supply. 6. Prepare testing reports. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each segment, complete with diagram or clear description of applicable portion of piping. After testing has been accepted for portions thereof, certify in writing the time, date, name, and title of the persons reviewing the test. This shall also include the description of what portion of the system has been accepted. A complete record shall be maintained of all testing that has been accepted and shall be made available at the jobsite. Upon completion of the work, all records and certifications regarding testing shall be submitted to CONSULTANT before final payment is made. 7. Verify systems are complete, flushed, and clean prior to testing. solate or remove components subject to damage or not rated for test pressure. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, ext€,nded, or repaired. Leave piping uninsulated, uncovered, and unconcealed until it has ben tested. Where any portion of piping system must be concealed before completion of entire system, the portion shall be tested separately as specified for the entire system prior to concealment. CONTRACTOR shall expose all untested covered or concealed piping. 8. Gauges used for testing shall have increments as follows: a. Tests requiring a pressure of 10 psi or less shall use a testing gauge having increments of 0.10 psi or less. b. Tests requiring a pressure of greater than 10 psi but less than c:r equal to 100 psi shall use a testing gauge having increments of 1 psi or less. c. Tests requiring a pressure of greater than 100 psi shall use a testing gauge having increments of 2 psi or less. 9. Separately test above- and belowground piping. 10. Do not introduce test water into piping systems when exposure to freezing temperatures is possible. 11. Do not introduce test water into sections of piping located above existing sensitive areas and/or equipment that may be damaged or contaminated by water leakage. Coordinate with CITY to determine areas and/or equipment considered as being sensitive. 12. Defective work or material shall be reworked and replaced and test repeated. Repairs shall be made with new materials. Pipe dope, caulking, tape, dresser couplings, etc., shall not be used to correct deficiencies. 13. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for cleaning up any leakage during flushing, testing, repairing, and disinfecting to the original condition any building parts subjected to spills or leakage. 14. If required for the additional pressure load under test, provide temporary restraints at fittings or expansion joints. Backfill underground pressure mains prior to testing with the exception of thrust restrained valves that may be exposed to isolate potential leaks. 15. For hydrostatic tests, use clean water and remove all air from the piping being tested by means of air vents or loosening of flanges/unions. Measure and record test pressure at the high point in the system. 16. For air or nitrogen tests, gradually increase the pressure to not more than one-half of the test pressure; then increase the pressure in steps of approximately one-tenth of the test pressure until the required test pressure is reached. Examine all joints and connections with a soap bubble solution or equivalent method. System will not be accepted until it can be demonstrated that there is no measurable loss of test pressure during the test period. Section 22 11 00-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. Domestic Water System: 1. Subject piping system to a hydrostatic pressure of at least 100 pounds per-square-inch gauge, but not less than the operating pressure under which it is to be used. During test period, all pipe, fittings and accessories in the particular piping system that is being tested shall be carefully observed. If leaks are detected, such leaks shall be stopped and the hydrostatic test shall again be applied. This procedure shall be repeated until no leaks are detected. EXCEPTION: Piping located above sensitive areas and/or equipment that may be damaged or become contaminated due to test water leakage shall be tested with oil-free air in lieu of water. 2. After completion of the testing, all new and/or altered water piping systems shall be thoroughly sterilized with a solution containing not less than 50 parts per million of available chlorine. Do not exceed 150 parts per million at any time. Introduce chlorine into the supply stream at a rate sufficient to provide a uniform concentration throughout the system. All outlets shall be opened and closed several times. When the specified level of chlorine is detected at every outlet in the system, close all valves to prevent release of water from the system for 24 hours. At the completion of the 24-hour disinfection period, test every outlet for a minimum chlorine residual of 50 parts per million. This minimum residual must be present to proceed with flushing. Flush the system with clean water at a sufficient velocity until the residual chlorine detected at every outlet is within 0.2 parts per million or the normal water supply's level. 3. Sufficient samples must be taken no sooner than 24 hours after sterilization and flushing to represent the extent and complexity of the affected water system, along with a control sample to indicate municipal water quality at the time of testing. Send water samples to an accredited and/or certified laboratory to perform qualitative and quantitative bacteriological analysis in accordance with AWWA C651 or in accordance with Plumbing Code. CONTRACTOR shall obtain written certification from the independent testing agency stating that the water samples meet federal and state guidelines for safe drinking water. Failure to fully comply with the above procedures will result in a requirement to repeat the procedure until acceptable results are achieved, at no additional cost to CITY. 4. Isolate or bypass equipment that would be detrimentally affected by disinfecting solution. Isolate all other sections of the domestic water system not being disinfected to prevent migration of chlorine. 5. Prior to injection of chlorine into the piping system, strategically place signs stating "Heavily Chlorinated Water-Do Not Drink," and protect all outlets to prevent use during disinfection and flushing procedures. 6. A bacteria test may not be necessary for small scale work. However, disinfection is required. Examples of small scale work are less than 20 feet of pipe, replacement and/or installation of a sink, drinking fountain, eyewash, backflow preventer, isolation valve, etc. Disinfect individual parts, fixtures, isolation valves, pipes, etc. by swabbing with full strength bleach (5.25%) or soaking for at least 30 minutes in a 500-ppm chlorine solution. Materials should then be thoroughly rinsed before putting into service. Initial Final Test Test Test System Medium Pressure Duration Pressure Duration Aboveground Domestic or Water N/A 100 psig 8 hours Nonpotable Water END OF SECTION Section 22 11 00-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 22 13 16 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY -- A. Work Included: All plumbing pipe and pipe fittings for this project within and up to 5 feet from the building foundation wall. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work under this section. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality assurance shall be in accordance with Section 01 45 00—Quality Control. B. Order all copper, cast iron, steel, PVC, and polyethylene pipe with each length marked with the name or trademark of the manufacturer and type of pipe; with each shipping unit marked with the purchase order number, metal or alloy designation, temper, size, and name of supplier. C. Any installed material not meeting the specification shall be replaced with material that meets these specifications without additional cost to CITY. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. CONTRACTOR shall provide schedule indicating the ASTM or CISPI specification number of the pipe being proposed along with its type and grade if known at the time of submittal, and sufficient information to indicate the type and rating of fittings for each service. C. CONTRACTOR shall provide statement from manufacturer on manufacturer's letterhead that pipe furnished meets the ASTM or CISPI specification contained in this section. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Promptly inspect shipments to review that the material is undamaged and complies with -� specifications. B. Cover pipe to prevent corrosion or deterioration while allowing sufficient ventilation to avoid condensation. Do not store materials directly on grade. Protect pipe, tube, and fitting ends so they are not damaged. Where end caps are provided or specified, take precautions so the caps remain in place. Protect fittings,flanges, and unions by storage inside or by durable, waterproof, aboveground packaging. C. Offsite storage agreements will not relieve CONTRACTOR from usinj proper storage techniques. — Section 22 13 16-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 D. Storage and protection methods must allow inspection to verify products. 1.05 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Use only new material, free of defects, rust, and scale, and meeting the latest revision of ASTM or CISPI specifications as listed in this specification. B. Construct all piping for the highest pressures and temperatures in the respective system. C. Non-metallic piping will be acceptable only for the services indicated. It will not be acceptable in ventilation plenum spaces, including plenum ceilings. D. Where weld fittings or mechanical grooved fittings are used, use only long radius elbows having a centerline radius of 1.5 pipe diameters. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT A. Aboveground PVC shall not be used where smoke generation, noise transmission, or physical abuse/durability are an issue. B. Interior Gravity: PVC plastic pipe, Schedule 40, Class 12454-B (PVC 1120), ASTM D1785; PVC plastic drain, waste and vent pipe and fittings, ASTM D2665; socket fitting patterns, ASTM D3311; primer, ASTM F656; solvent cement, ASTM D2564. 2.02 ACID WASTE AND VENT (STRUCTURE 300 CHEMICAL ROOM) A. Polypropylene pipe and fittings, Schedule 40,ASTM F1412; Type 110 or 210, ASTM D4101; flame retardant (<5 sec and 5 mm)ASTM D635; electrofusion socket fittings; fitting patterns, ASTM D3311. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install pipe and fittings in accordance with reference standards, manufacturers recommendations and recognized industry practices. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Cut pipe ends square. Ream ends of piping to remove burrs. Clean scale and dirt from interior and exterior of each section of pipe and fitting prior to assembly. 3.03 ERECTION A. Install all piping parallel to building walls and ceilings and at heights which do not obstruct any portion of a window, doorway, stairway, or passageway. Where interferences develop in the field, offset or reroute piping as required to clear such interferences. Coordinate locations of plumbing piping with piping, ductwork, conduit and equipment of other trades to allow Section 22 13 16-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 sufficient clearances. In all cases, consult drawings for exact location of p pe spaces, ceiling heights, door and window openings, or other architectural details before installing piping. B. Where copper or steel piping is embedded in masonry or concrete, provide protective sleeve covering of elastomeric pipe insulation. -- C. Maintain piping in clean condition internally during construction. D. Provide clearance for installation of insulation, access to valves and pipirg specialties. E. Provide anchors, expansion joints, swing joints and/or expansion loops ; o that piping may expand and contract without damage to itself, equipment, or building. F. Do not route piping through transformer vaults or above transformers, panelboards, or switchboards, including the required service space for this equipment, unless the piping is serving this equipment G. Install all valves and piping specialties, including items furnished by others, as specified and/or detailed. Provide access to valves and specialties for maintenance. Make connections to all equipment, fixtures and systems installed by others where same requires the piping services indicated in this section. 3.04 THREADED PIPE JOINTS A. Use a thread lubricant or teflon tape when making joints; no hard setting pipe thread cement or caulking will be allowed. 3.05 SOLVENT WELDED PIPE JOINTS A. Install in accordance with ASTM D2855 "Making Solvent Cemented Joints With PVC Pipe and Fittings". Saw cut piping square and smooth. Tube cutters may be used if they are fitted with wheels designed for use with PVC/CPVC pipe that do not leave a raised bead on pipe exterior. Support and restrain pipe during cutting to prevent nicks and scratches. Bevel ends 10-15 degrees and deburr interior. Remove dust, drips, moisture, grease and other superfluous materials from pipe interior and exterior. Check dry fit of pipe and fittings. Reject materials which are out of round or do not fit within close tolerance. Use heavy body solvent cement for large diameter fittings. B. Maintain pipe, fittings, primer, and cement between 40 and 100 degrees during application and curing.Apply primer and solvent using separate daubers (3-inch and smaller piping only) or clean natural bristle brushes about half the size of the pipe diameter. Apply primer to the fitting socket and pipe surface with a scrubbing motion. Check for penetration and reapply as needed to dissolve surface to a depth of 4 to 5 thousandths. Apply solvent cement to the fitting socket and pipe in an amount greater than needed to fill any gap. While both surfaces are wet, insert pipe into socket fitting with a quarter turn to the bottom of the socket. Solvent cement application and insertion must be completed in less than 1 minute. Minimum of 2 installers is required on piping 4 inches and larger. Hold joint for 30 seconds or until set. Reference manufacturer recommendations for initial set time before handling and for full curing time before pressure testing. Cold weather solvent/cement may be utilized only under unusual circumstances. Section 22 13 16-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.06 MECHANICAL HUBLESS PIPE CONNECTIONS A. Place the gasket on the end of one pipe or fitting and the clamp assembly on the end of the other pipe or fitting. Firmly seat the pipe or fitting ends against the integrally molded shoulder inside the neoprene gasket. Slide the clamp assembly into position over the gasket. Tighten fasteners to manufacturers recommended torque. 3.07 MECHANICAL JOINT PIPE CONNECTIONS A. Comply with AWWA C600/C605 installation requirements. Clean pipe end and socket. Clean and lubricate pipe end, socket and gasket with soapy water or gasket lubricant. Place gland and gasket, properly oriented, on pipe end. Insert pipe end fully into socket and press gasket evenly into recess keeping joint straight. Press gland evenly against gasket, insert bolts and hand tighten nuts. Make joint deflection prior to tightening bolts. Evenly tighten bolts in sequence to recommended torque. 3.08 PUSH-ON GASKETED PIPE CONNECTIONS A. Clean pipe end, bell, gasket seat and gasket of dirt or debris. Coat end of pipe and gasket with gasket lubricant. Pipe shall be supported off the ground so lubricant does not pick up dirt. Push spigot end into gasket bell with levered pipe joining tool recommended by pipe manufacturer. Large diameter exterior mains may be joined by pushing end of pipe section with backhoe against wood blocking over pipe end. Insert to fully seated position or to reference mark on pipe. 3.09 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT A. Verify invert elevations and building elevations prior to installation. Install exterior piping pitched to drain at indicated elevations and slope. Install interior piping pitched to drain at minimum slope of 1/4-inch per foot where possible and in no case less than 1/8-inch per foot for piping 3 inches and larger.B. Install exterior piping below predicted frost level and not less than 5-foot bury depth to top of pipe wherever possible. Where piping is located above predicted frost level, provide frost protection in accordance with SPS 382.30(11)(c). C. Flush piping inlets (floor drains, hub drains, mop basins, fixtures, etc.)with high flow of water at completion of project to demonstrate full flow capacity. Remove blockages and make necessary repairs where flow is found to be impeded. 3.10 PIPING SYSTEM LEAK TESTS A. Drainage and Vent System: 1. Subject gravity drainage and vent piping and joints to a vertical water column pressure of at least 10 feet. If after 2 hours, the level of the water has been lowered by leakage, the leaks must be found and stopped and the water level shall again be raised to the level described and the test repeated until, after a 2-hour retention period, there shall be no perceptible lowering of the water level in the system being tested. 2. Piping located above sensitive areas and/or equipment that may be damaged or become contaminated because of test water leakage shall be tested with air. Air test may also be performed when allowed by CONSULTANT. Isolate the test section from all other sections and slowly fill pipe with oil-free air until there is a uniform gauge Section 22 13 16-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 pressure of 5 pounds per square inch. The air pressure shall be regulated to prevent the pressure inside the pipe from exceeding 5.0 psig. This pressure shall be held for a test period of at least 15 minutes.Any adjustments to the test pressure required because of changes in ambient temperature or the seating of gaskets shall be made prior to the beginning of the test period. 3. Should the completion of these tests leave any reasonable question of a doubt relative to the integrity of the installation, additional tests or measures shall be performed to demonstrate the reliability of these systems to CONSULTANT. 4. Test plugs must extend outside the end of pipe to provide a visible indication for removal after the test has been completed. 5. Each floor drain P-trap that has successfully passed pressure testir g shall be proven clean and free of debris as follows: a. A request shall be submitted to CITY, identifying the quantity and ocation of drain(s) to be observed. b. Vacuum out each floor drain P-trap. An observation of the trap shall be performed to verify that the trap is debris free. c. Perform a free-flowing test by pouring two 5-gallon buckets of water down the floor drain. d. After confirming that the floor drain trap is clean and free of debris, review that the trap is filled with water. e. At the discretion of CONSULTANT, an observation of the trap us ng a sewer scope may be required in addition to, or in lieu of, a vacuum procedure. 6. CITY may require that any portion of the drainage, waste, and vent systems installed be proven undamaged, clean and free of debris. Verification of the interior condition of piping shall be accomplished using a sewer scope or other method as acceptable to CONSULTANT. B. Isolate or remove components from system which are not rated for test ::pressure. Perform final testing for medical and lab gas with all system components in place. Test piping in sections or entire system as required by sequence of construction. Do not insulate or conceal pipe until it has been successfully tested. C. If required for the additional pressure load under test, provide temporary r)straints at fittings or expansion joints. D. For hydrostatic tests, use clean water and remove all air from the piping being tested by means of air vents or loosening of flanges/unions. Measure and record test pressure at the high point in the system. E. Inspect system for leaks. Where leaks occur, repair the area with new materials and repeat the test; caulking will not be acceptable. F. Entire test shall be witnessed by CITY or CONSULTANT. Test Final Test System Medium Pressure Duration Sanitary Waste and Vent Water 10 feet water 2 hours Acid Waste and Vent Water 10 feet water 2 hours END OF SECTION Section 22 13 16-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 22 13 19 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: This section includes specifications for floor drains, roof drains, cleanouts, hub drains, trench drains and other miscellaneous plumbing specialties. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 govern work under this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by a specific edition date. B. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All equipment or components of this specification section shall meet or exceed the requirements and quality of the items herein specified, or as denoted on the drawings. B. Equipment provider shall be responsible for providing certified equipment start-up and, when noted, an in the field certified training session. New start-up shall be for the purpose of determining alignment, lubrication, voltage, and amperage readings. All proper electrical connections, discharge and suction gauge readings. A copy of the start-up report shall be made and sent to both CONTRACTOR and to CONSULTANT. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Include data concerning dimensions, required clearances, capacities, materials of construction, ratings, weights, manufacturer's installation requirements, manufacturer's performance limitations, and appropriate identification. C. Submittals for motors associated with equipment specified in this section shall include data sheets from the motor manufacturer. Data sheets from the equipment manufacturer or supplier are not acceptable. D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. — E. Submittals must be specific to this project. Generic submittals will not be accepted. Section 22 13 19-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the site in such a manner as to protect the materials from shipping and handling damage. Provide materials on factory provided shipping skids and lifting lugs, if required for handling. B. Materials that could be damaged by the elements should be packaged in such a manner that they could withstand short-term exposure to the elements during transportation. C. Store materials in a clean, dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage. D. Use all means necessary to protect equipment before, during, and after ii 7stallation. E. All scratched, dented, and otherwise damaged units shall be repaired or replaced at no additional cost to CITY. 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Include installation instructions, assembly views, lubrication instructions, recommended maintenance schedule and activities. B. Include replacement and spare parts lists. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Standard One-Year Warranty: Unless otherwise stated below, manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the earlier of either the date established for partial utilization or Substantial Completion of the project. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 FLOOR DRAINS A. All floor drains shall be furnished and installed with all options and accessories required for a leak-free installation within the particular construction in which they are to be mounted. B. (FD-1): Floor drains in finished areas or tiled areas, where shown on the drawings, shall be Zurn ZN-415, Type H, or Wade Model 1300-1-11, or Josam 32100-HP-7-2. with 6-inch round adjustable strainer top with integral clamping frame and secured heelproof grate. Provide polished nickel bronze top. Provide square grate for tiled floors. — C. (FD-2): PP Floor Drain: Provide Zurn Model Z9A-FD4 FRPP-210 floor drain-flame retardant polypropylene body with bottom outlet, polypropylene combination membrane clamp, sediment bucket and deep flanged gate. Provide with polypropylene P-trap and 3 feet 0 inches of polypropylene pipe. Transition to building drainage system with Zurn Z9A-C coupling system. D. Each drain shall be provided with a trap. A minimum of one cleanout shall be provided for each single or common leader. Section 22 13 19-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.02 TRAP GUARDS (STRUCTURE 300 SPRINKLER ROOM) A. Manufacturer: ProSet Systems Trap Guard, Jay R. Smith Quad Close, Sure Seal or approved equal. B. Flexible elastomeric PVC construction diaphragm trap guard for installation in new and existing floor drains, hub drains, and trench drains. Trap guard to prevent trap evaporation and waste backflow. Size as applicable to the drain outlet size, up to 4-inch size. 2.03 HUB DRAINS A. (HD-1): Provide Kusel Equipment, AWI Manufacturing, or Jay R. Smith 304 316 stainless steel hub drain. Drain shall consist of fully welded components. Portions of drain visible in final installation shall be blasted clean to remove discoloration and provide a uniform finished appearance. All pipe shall be sourced from the United States. Pipe thickness shall be Schedule 40. 2.04 ROOF DRAINS A. Roof drains shall be furnished and installed with all options and accessories required for a waterproof installation within the particular construction in which they are mounted. B. Roof drains shall be Zurn ZC-100, Wade W-3000, or Josam 21500. Drain shall include underdeck flashing clamp ring, adjustable extension, and gravel stop. All components, including dome, shall be made of cast iron. C. Provide roof drain leader and downspout of same size as roof drain or larger if required by code. Downspout shall extend through the exterior wall 4 inches at a point 16 inches above grade unless noted otherwise. Roof drain leaders and downspouts shall be Schedule 40 PVC. D. All roof drain domes shall be cast iron. 2.05 TRENCH DRAINS A. TD-1: 1. Manufactured trench drains shall be ACO Drain FG200 Fiberglass System by ACO Polymer Products, Series Z882 by Zurn, or equal. 2. Channels shall be made of fiberglass or high density polyethylene. Channel width shall be minimum 8 inches. Channels shall have 1.0% slope. 3. Frame channels and ends shall be black-coated steel. Grates shall be ductile iron, slotted, with minimum Class C rating and H-20 Loading, and with bolt-down system. 2.06 CLEANOUTS A. Manufacturers shall be Zurn, Wade, Jay R. Smith, Josam, or Kusel. B. Each cleanout shall be gas- and watertight. C. Cleanouts that are elevated shall include a membrane flashing flange to prevent leakage to the lower floor. Section 22 13 19-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 D. Interior concrete floor areas: Enameled cast iron body with round or square adjustable scoriated polished nickel bronze cover, tapered threaded ABS closure plug. Zurn ZN-1400. E. Interior exposed vertical stacks: Line-type cleanout tee with cast iron Jody and tapered threaded ABS closure plug; Zurn Z-1445. F. Interior horizontal lines: Cast iron hub with tapped ferrule and tapered, thrE:aded ABS or PVC closure plug, or no-hub coupling and blind plug. 2.07 VENT FLASHINGS A. Manufacturers: Semco, Oatey. B. Formed 3 lb./sq. ft. lead flashing with minimum base size of 15 inches by 17 inches. — C. Single Ply Membrane Roofs: Flashing boot of material compatible with r,Dofing membrane with base flange for adhering to membrane and stainless steel drawband f,:)r securing to vent pipe. 2.08 DOWNSPOUT BOOT A. 18 inches long, cast iron body, and support strap for transition from expo/;ed downspout to underground pipe. Provide Jay R. Smith Figure 1785 or 1786 depending 01 downspout size. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate location and setting of plumbing specialties with adjacent con, truction. Install in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. B. Set floor drains, roof drains, trench drains and cleanouts level and plumb a ijusted to finished floor elevation, roof elevation or finished wall location. Locate where serviceable. Allow minimum of 18 inches clearance around cleanouts for rodding. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with graphite and oil, teflon tape or waterproof grease. Install trap primer connections where indicated. Provide deep seal traps on floor drains and hub drains installed in mechanical rooms, penthouses, rooms with excessive positive or negative pressure, and as indicated on drawings. C. Trap guards shall be provided as indicated on the drawings. D. Set backwater valves on undisturbed soil or compacted granular backfill, level and plumb with top adjusted to finished floor elevation. Test and adjust valve for proper operation.Allow minimum 18-inch clearance for servicing. E. Install safing at floor drains above grade. Extend 12 inches beyond drains in all directions. Cover entire floor in showers and extend 6 inches up in walls above curbs and to a height of 6 feet (3 inches wide each direction) in corners. Install on concrete floor that is smooth and free of debris. Seal all joints and connect to drain body clamp. Safing is subject to standing -� Section 22 13 19-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 water leak test. Install safing at all built-up shower installations. (Note: spray-on and brush applied liquid safing is not acceptable). F. Flash vent penetrations through roof. Turn down top of lead flashing into vent pipe. Tighten drawband of membrane boot to vent pipe. Adhere base flashing to deck or membrane. Provide waterproof patch around penetration on existing roofs. END OF SECTION Section 22 13 19-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 22 30 00 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This section includes specifications for water heaters, portable sump pumps, and other equipment used for plumbing applications. B. Related Sections and Division: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall c;overn work under this section. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Field inspection and testing to be performed under provisions of Section 01 45 00—Quality Control. B. Inspect completed installation for physical damage. 1.03 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. Included in sdbmittals shall be detailed control wiring diagrams that show logic circuits for the unit, as \ell as all external connections. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 WATER HEATERS (BID ALTERNATIVE NO. 2) A. Electric Instantaneous Water Heater (300-WH-01): 1. Manufacturers: Eemax (E), or equal. 2. Type: Wall-mounted, tankless, UL listed, instantaneous electric water heater with digital microprocessing temperature control capable of maintaining outlet temperature of one degree accuracy, LED temperature display, 150 psig pressure rating, and capable of supplying multiple lavatories. Model AP039480. 3. Performance: a. Storage: None. b. Input: 480-volt, 47-amp, three-phase, 39 kW. c. Minimum recovery rate: 13-degree temperature rise at 2.0 gpm. 4. Element shall be replaceable cartridge insert nickel chrome material. 5. Accessories: a. Provide Watts LFTWH, or equal, tankless water heater service vE.ive. Pipe service, shutoff, drain, and relief valves in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Service valve installation shall include provisions for water heater purge and vinegar wash. Hot side: Watts LFTWH-UT/UTS-H-RV, or equal. Cold side: Watts LFTWH-UT/UTS-C, or equal. b. Set pressure relief valves in accordance with local regulations. c. Provide Amtol ST-1 expansion tank, no equal. — Section 22 30 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.02 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT A. Sump Pumps: 1. Manufacturers: Portable submersible sump pump shall be Perfecta Model TIGFI32-9NL, as manufactured by BJM Corporation, Old Saybrook, Connecticut, or equal. Submersible pump shall be capable of being submerged in and capable of pumping up to 42% ferric chloride, 30% ferrous chloride, ferrous sulfate, or 50% aluminum sulfate. Pump material shall be Noryl with impeller made of fiberglass-reinforced Noryl, titanium rotor shaft, 0-rings made of Viton, double lip seals made of Viton with epoxy-coated 316 stainless steel hardware. Oil-filled, 115-volt, 60 Hz, single phase, 0.4 hp motor shall be provided with thermal breaker incorporated in motor windings to shut off power before overheating due to locked rotor or long periods of running dry. Provide type 5200W power cord with 3-prong plug. Furnish and install complete sump pump system specified herein and placed in Structure 300. The complete system shall include pumps, electric float controls, and 30-foot PVC discharge hose with threaded connection as sized below. 2. Schedule: Max. Capacity Max. TDH Discharge Model No. (gpm) (ft) Connection TIGF32-9NL 46 27 1 1/4-inch NPT-F PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install plumbing equipment where indicated in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Coordinate equipment location with piping, ductwork, conduit and equipment of other trades to allow sufficient clearances. Locate equipment and arrange plumbing piping to provide access space for servicing all components. B. Size temperature and relief valves per CSA ratings. Pipe temperature and pressure relief valves to newest floor drain. C. Startup and test equipment adjusting operating and safety controls for proper operation. D. Provide isolation valves at plumbing equipment. END OF SECTION Section 22 30 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 22 42 00 COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This section includes specifications for plumbing fixtures, faucets and trim. 1.02 REFERENCE A. Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work under this section. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Substitution of Materials: Refer to Section 01 60 00—Materials and Equip vent. B. Plumbing products requiring approval by the State of Wisconsin Dept. of Safety and Professional Services must be approved or have pending approval at the time of shop drawing submission. 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Include data concerning sizes, utility sizes, rough in-dimensions, capacities, materials of construction, ratings, weights, trim, finishes, manufacturer's installation requirements, manufacturer's performance limitations, and appropriate identification. PART 2—PRODUCTS — 2.01 PLUMBING FIXTURES A. Manufacturers: Fixture descriptions establish fixture type, quality, materials, features and size. Products of the following manufacturers determined to be equal by CONSULTANT will be accepted: Emergency Eyewash Fountains and Showers: Bradley, Guardian, or Haws. B. Emergency Showers: 1. Manufacturers: Bradley (B), Guardian (G), Haws (H), or equal. 2. Unit shall be hydrostatically tested to meet or exceed ANSI Z358. 3. All units shall be identified with a high-visibility sign made from r gid polyethylene, Brady B-450, V-style 45-degree, 12-inch by 18-inch Brady 49043 49044, or equal. Provide one sign at each unit. 4. ESEW-1: Corrosion-resistant safety station with ABS plastic shower head, ABS plastic bowl, cast aluminum powder-coated flag handle, PVC floor flange, 2-inch IPS Schedule 80 PVC pipe and fittings, 1-inch IPS and 1/2-inch IPS U.S.-lade PVC-coated brass stay-open ball valve, and polished stainless steel pull rod. U'iit shall have two polypropylene "GS" spray heads with integral "flip-top" dust covers, strainer, and 1.8 gpm flow control orifice mounted on chrome stainless stee head assembly. Model No. (B) 519-310PVC, (G) G1992, or (H) 8336. Section 22 42 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 5. ESEW-2: Provide ANSI compliant, grade mounted, insulated and heat traced safety shower with integral eye/facewash, stainless steel piping, brass valves, 120 VAC self-regulating heat trace cable, NEMA 3R waterproof alarm, and ABS jacket. Model shall be equal to Bradley S19-304 Halo Heat Trace or Haws 8317CTFP. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install plumbing fixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Set level and plumb. Secure in place to counters, floors and walls providing solid bearing and secure mounting. Bolt fixture carriers to floor and wall. Secure rough-in fixture piping to prevent movement of exposed piping. B. Install each fixture with trap easily removable for servicing and cleaning. Install fixture stops in readily accessible location for servicing. C. Install barrier free fixtures in compliance with IBC 1108 and 3408, COMM 52, 69 and Federal ADA Accessibility Guidelines. Install barrier free lavatory traps parallel and adjacent to wall and supplies and stops elevated to 27 inches above floor to avoid contact by wheelchair users. D. Each fixture shall have a stop valve installation to control the fixture. Stop valves shall be heavy duty type with brass stems and screwed or sweat inlet connections. Compression type inlets are not acceptable. E. Seal openings between walls, floors and fixtures with mildew-resistant silicone sealant same color as fixture. F. Protect fixtures during construction. At completion clean plumbing fixtures and trim using manufacturer's recommended cleaning methods and materials. END OF SECTION Section 22 42 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 23 05 23 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Valve specifications for all Division 23 systems unless oil erwise noted. B. Related Section and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 govern work under this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Contractors shall submit a schedule of all valves indicating type of set✓ice, dimensions, materials of construction, and pressure/temperature ratings for all valves to be used on the project. Temperature ratings specified are for continuous operation. 1 .03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. All operations and maintenance data shall comply with the submis>ion and content — requirements specified under Section 01 33 00—Submittals. 1.04 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Where valves are specified for individual mechanical services (i.e., hot water heating, steam, etc.) all valves shall be of the same manufacturer. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Manufacturers: Acceptable manufacturers are Apollo, Bell & Gossett, Crane, Danfoss-Flomatic, DeZurik, Fisher, Grinnell, Jamesbury, Milwaukee, Nibco, Vogt, Watts. 2.02 WATER SYSTEM VALVES (HHW) A. All water system valves to be rated at not less than 125 psig water working pressure at 240°F unless noted otherwise. B. Balancing Valves: 1. Balancing valves 2 inches and smaller shall be Bell and Gossett Model CB, or equal, with bronze body, brass ball orifice with 0-ring stem seal, and glass- and carbon-filled seat rings. Ball orifice shall be bidirectional calibrated and provide positive shutoff. Valve shall have a position indicator with memory stop, pressure taps, and a drain tap. Valve shall be rated for 300 psi at 250°F. Section 23 05 23-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2. Balancing valves 2 1/2 inches to 4 inches shall be Bell and Gossett Model CB, or equal, with cast iron body, brass ball, and flanged connections. Valve shall have two pressure/temperature ports, drain tap, and a calibrated nameplate with a memory stop. Valve shall be rated for 175 psi with operating temperature of-4°F to 250°F. 3. Balancing valves greater than 4 inches shall be Bell and Gossett Model CB, or equal, with cast iron body for flanged connections or ductile iron body for grooved connections. Valve shall have a multi-turn globe valve, brass disc, and EPDM seat. Flanged valve shall be rated for 175 psi working pressure with 125# flanged connections. Grooved valve shall be rated for 300 psi working pressure with grooved end connections. Valve shall have two pressure/temperature ports, calibrated nameplate with a position indicator (0 to 100% open), and a memory button for positioning after closing. 4. Balancing valves greater than 4 inches shall be butterfly valves meeting these -- specifications. 5. Provide CITY with one Bell and Gossett Model RO-X, or equal, portable balancing readout meter for differential pressure measurement. Portable readout meter shall be compatible with balancing valve provided and with the appropriate differential pressure suitable for the valves on the project. C. Ball Valves: 1. Shutoff valves 2 inches and smaller shall be Nibco S-585, or equal, ball valves with two-piece bronze body, 316 stainless steel ball and stem, and TFE seat. Valve shall be rated for 600 psig WOG. 2. Provide stem extensions where necessary for access. 3. Provide a lever operator for each valve. D. Butterfly Valves: 1. Where shown on the drawings and for balancing and shutoff valves 2 1/2 inches and larger, provide Bray Series 31 H, or equal, fully lugged butterfly valves. 2. Valve body shall be cast iron in accordance with ASTM A126 Class B, rated at 250 psi. Flanges shall meet ANSI 125/150 standards, drilled and tapped. Valves located in Class I, Division 1 or corrosive areas shall have epoxy coated bodies. 3. Disc shall be aluminum bronze in accordance with ASTM A148 C954. Stem shall be 416 stainless steel in accordance with ASTM A276 Grade 416. Seat shall be EPDM. 4. Provide lever-type manual operator with locks for valves 2 1/2 inches to 6 inches and wheel-type operator with position indicator for valves 8 inches and larger. E. Swing Check Valves: 1. 2-Inch and Smaller: Class 125, bronze body, threaded or soldered ends, regrindable seat, bronze disc, threaded cap, suitable for installation in a horizontal or vertical line with flow upward. Crane 137/1342, Milwaukee 509/1509, Nibco T-413-B/S-413-B. 2. 2 1/2-Inch and Larger: Class 125, cast iron body, flanged ends, bronze trim, bolted cap, renewable bronze seat and disc, non-asbestos gasket, suitable for installation in a horizontal or vertical line with flow upward. Crane 373, Milwaukee F2974, Nibco F918. F. Spring Loaded Check Valves: 1. 2-Inch and Smaller: Class 125, bronze body, threaded, solder or wafer ends, bronze trim, stainless steel spring, teflon seat unless only bronze available. APCO 300 series, Nibco T-480-Y/S-480-Y, Val-Matic 1400 series. 2. 2 1/2-Inch and Larger: Class 125, cast iron or semi-steel body, wafer or globe flanged type, bronze trim, bronze or EPDM seat, stainless steel spring, stainless steel stem if stem is required. Valves with ductile iron in contact with the working fluid will not be Section 23 05 23-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 accepted. APCO 600 series, Milwaukee 1800 series, Nibco F910 series, Val-Matic 1800 series, Victaulic series 716. G. Drain Valves: Use 3/4-inch ball valve with threaded hose adapter except strainer blowdown valves to be the same size as the blowdown connection. Provide hose connection caps pressure rated for 150 psig at 180°F. 2.03 NATURAL GAS SYSTEM A. Interior Shutoff Valves: 1. 2-Inch and Smaller: Ball valve, bronze body, threaded ends, chrome-plated bronze or stainless steel ball, full or conventional port, Teflon seat, blowout-proof stem, two-piece construction, suitable for 150psig working pressure. U.L. listed for use as natural gas shut-off. Manufacturers Apollo 77G-UL, Nibco T-585-70-UL, Crane 9201. 2. 2 1/2-Inch through 4-Inch: Cast iron body, flanged ends, bronze bearings, electroless nickel plated cast iron plug with Hycar resilient plug seal, Buna-N stem seal packing, lever actuator, 175 psi W.O.G., U.L. listed for use as natural gas shut-off. Manufacturers DeZurik 425, Homestead, Rockwell, or Walworth. 3. 5-Inch and Larger: Cast iron body, flanged ends, stainless steel bearir gs, resilient faced plugs, totally enclosed hand wheel actuators, 175 psi W.O.G., U.L listed for use of natural gas shut-off. Manufacturers DeZurik 425, Homestead, Rockwell, or Walworth. B. Pressure Regulators: 1. Manufacturers: Rockwell, Maxitrol, Fischer, or equal. 2. All pressure regulators shall be designed, manufactured and approved for natural gas service. 3. Pressure regulators for individual service lines shall be capable of reducing distribution line pressure to pressures required for users. Pressure relief shall be set at a lower pressure than would cause unsafe operation of any connected user. Regulator shall have a single port with orifice diameter no greater than that recommended by manufacturer for the maximum gas pressure at the regulator inlet. Regulator vent valve shall be of resilient materials designed to withstand flow conditions when pressed against valve port. Regulator shall be capable of limiting buildup of pressure under no-flow conditions to 50% or less of the discharge pressure maintained under flow conditions. Provide commercial-grade diaphragm type with internal relief valve, vent valve, cast iron body, and Buna-N diaphragm. 4. Pressure regulators indicated to be installed on gas piping exceeding 2 psig shall be provided with a tested and approved, integral overpressure protection device (OPD). Pressure regulators and OPD shall comply with ANSI Z21.80 (line regulators) or ANSI Z21.18 (appliance regulators). 5. Appliance regulators may be provided with a vent limiting device, where entire regulator and vent limiter complies with ANSI Z21.80 as an assembly and is installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and NFPA 54. 2.04 SPECIALTY VALVES AND VALVE ACCESSORIES A. Gauge Valves: Water Service: Use 1/4-inch ball valves. B. Valve Operators: Provide valve chain operator type on shutoff valves noted on the Drawings. Chain operator shall be chain wheel of cast iron or malleable iron and designed to provide positive grip on wheel. Provide chain guide to prevent chain from slipping or jumping on Section 23 05 23-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 wheel. Employ rustproof chain complete with closing link of sufficient length to operate at 6 feet 6 inches above floor level. C. Stem Extensions: Provide stem extensions when valve operators interfere with pipe insulation. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Properly align piping before installation of valves in an upright position; operators installed below the valves will not be accepted. B. Install valves in strict accordance with valve manufacturer's installation recommendations. Do not support weight of piping system on valve ends. C. Install all valves with the stem in the upright position. Valves may be installed with the stem in the horizontal position only where space limitations do not allow installation in an upright position or where large valves are provided with chain wheel operators. Where valves 2 1/2-inch and larger are located more than 12-foot 0-inch above mechanical room floors, install valve with stem in the horizontal position and provide a chain wheel operator. Valves installed with the stems down, will not be accepted. D. Install stem extensions when shipped loose from valve. E. Prior to flushing of piping systems, place all valves in the full-open position. F. Install all valves, and piping specialties, including items furnished by others, as specified and/or detailed. Make connections to all equipment installed by others where that equipment requires the piping services indicated in this section. G. Install valves for shutoff and to isolate equipment, parts of systems, or vertical risers. All valves shall be located such that servicing and operation is possible with adequate clearance for access. Install line shutoff valve at each branch connection to riser. Branch line shutoff valves shall be automatic type where shown on drawings. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted unless required otherwise by the valve manufacturer. H. Valves, regulators, flanges, unions, and similar appurtenances shall be accessible for operation and servicing and shall not be located within chases, above ceilings, within walls/partitions, or nonaccessible locations. I. Identify all gas regulators, including utility-provided regulators, in accordance with Section 20 05 53—Identification for Fire Suppression, Plumbing and HVAC Piping and Equipment. J. Locate all valves so that the removal of their bonnets is possible. All flanged valves in horizontal lines with the valve stem in a horizontal position shall be positioned so that the valve stem is inclined one bolt hole above the horizontal position. Screw pattern valves placed in horizontal lines shall be installed with their valve stems at a minimum 30-degree angle above the horizontal position. All valves must be true and straight at the time the system is tested and inspected for final acceptance. Install valves as nearly as possible to Section 23 05 23-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 the locations indicated on the Drawings. Any change in valve location must be so indicated on the Record Drawings. K. Shut-Off Valves: Install shut-off valves at all equipment, at each branch take-off from mains, and at each automatic valve for isolation or repair. L. Balancing Valves: Provide balancing valves for all major equipment and at each major branch takeoff and at the discharge of each pump as indicated on drawings and details. M. Drain Valves: Provide drain valves for complete drainage of all systems. ._ocations of drain valves include low points of piping systems, equipment locations spE:.oified or detailed including reheat coils, other locations required for drainage of systems. N. Safety Relief Valves: 1. Setpoint for water relief valves is indicated on the drawings. 2. Use air pressure to clean piping prior to installation of safety relief valves. 3. Install relief valves in locations indicated on drawings, downstream of all pressure reducing valves, and on all boilers. 4. Install valves in the vertical position, with drain holes, including those from dip pan elbows, piped to the nearest drain. 5. Inlet and outlet piping connecting to valves must be the same size as .'alve connections or larger. 6. Support piping and drip pan elbow independently to prevent stress at connections to safety valves. Install vent pipe so that its weight does not rest on the drip pan elbow. Extend drain line from drip pan elbow and relief valve to nearest drain. 7. Pipe discharge from water system relief valves to nearest drain. 8. Gas vent discharge lines as indicated on the drawings, as detailed, and as specified for each specific valve or piping specialty item. In no event is a termination to occur less than 6 feet above a roof line. Each gas pressure reducing valve vent and relief valve vent shall be run separately to a point outside of the building, terminated with a screened vent cap, and located according to gas utility regulations. 9. Pipe vents from gas pressure reducing valves and pipe casing sleeves to the exterior of the building and terminate with outlet turned down and capped with corrosion resistant insect screen. Vent terminations shall be at least 7 feet abovegrade or pedestrian traffic and a minimum of 3 feet above or 10 feet horizontally from all air intakes or building openings. Provide stainless steel insect screens on vent outlets. O. Spring Loaded Check Valves: Install a spring-loaded check valve in each pump discharge line where two pumps operate in parallel and no combination shutoff, check and balancing valve is being used. P. Swing Check Valves: Provide swing check valves where specified, detai ed, and at steam condensate lines where they rise at outlet of traps. In such cases, provice isolation valves to allow repair or replacement of check valve. Q. Gas Pressure Regulators: When the gas pressure regulator is equipped with a vent connection, run a connection size vent to outside air in accordance with cedes. Use a larger size vent when required by the manufacturer's installation instructions. END OF SECTION Section 23 05 23-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Balancing air systems. 2. Balancing water systems. 3. Thermal performance testing. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by a specific edition date. B. All material, installation, and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references. 1. ASHRAE 11—Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Building Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems. 2. SMACNA—HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Prior to final balancing, submit a preliminary report that includes the following design information for all control modes. Design information shall be from approved shop drawings. Report shall compare design and field tested data. 1. For each supply, return and exhaust register, and ceiling outlet: a. Room number. b. Type of register and outlet and catalog size. c. Air flow factor. d. Design CFM and velocity. e. Actual CFM and velocity. f. Percent of design CFM. g. Room pressure relationship. 2. For each fan and pump: a. Unit number. b. Fan size and wheel type (pump size and impeller size). c. Motor horsepower. d. Motor nameplate voltage and amps. e. Design CFM and static pressure (total pressure) (pump GPM and head). f. Actual CFM and static pressure (total pressure) (pump GPM and head). g. Actual fan RPM (pump RPM). h. Actual motor voltage and amps (each phase). Section 23 05 93-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3. For piping: For piping system, record water flow through all equipment and inlet and outlet water pressure at each pump together with motor nameplate and actual current. C. Provide summary sheet describing mechanical system deficiencies. Where not physically observable, provide pressure and/or flow readings to demonstrate suspected deficiencies. Describe objectionable noise or drafts found during testing, adjusting, and balancing. All — deficiencies shall be corrected prior to final balancing. D. Upon completion of final balancing, provide updated report indicating thermal performance testing and changes to system during final balancing for all control modes including updated airflows, pressures, velocities, etc. Final report shall be submitted prior to substantial completion. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Obtain services of an independent testing organization to perform testing and balancing work. The organization shall have a certified membership in the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or certification by the National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB). B. Division 23 shall provide a technician and/or controls contractor to observe and assist in balancing the system. Balancing report must include verification of participation, including name and contact information of assisting party. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 BALANCING EQUIPMENT A. CONTRACTOR shall have the following minimum equipment for balancing systems: 1. Duct air velocities below 1,000 fpm: Pitot tube and Micro-Manometer or Alnor velometer and duct-jet using zero to 1,000 fpm range. 2. Water Flows: Ultrasonic Dopler Flow Meter for water systems. 3. Supply Register Velocities: Alnor velometer and applicable jet or Anemotherm. 4. Fan Rotative Speed: Timec tachometer or RPM counter and stop watch (1-minute reading, minimum). 5. Contact pyrometer 0 to 300°F range. 6. Amprobe model RS-3, or equal. 7. Calibrated pressure gauge (0 to 100 feet water head). 8. Inclined manometer 0 to 30 inches of water. 9. Instruments used for measurements shall be accurate, and calibration shall be calibrated by the manufacturer or an AABC-approved method. 10. Instruments shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. All instruments used for measurements shall be accurate, and calibration histories for each instrument to be available for examination upon request. Calibration and maintenance of all instruments to be in accordance with the requirements of NEBB or AABC Standards. -- Section 23 05 93-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 PRELIMINARY BALANCING A. Division 23 shall provide an experienced installer to review the air distribution system with the testing and balancing agency for completion to confirm the test openings and volume dampers indicated on the drawings or called for in the specifications are installed, that dampers are in the open position, that the fans operate properly during all control modes, air filters are clean, and that the system is ready for balancing. Add test openings, volume dampers, air scoops, deflectrols, turning vanes, etc., as required. Adjust and change fan drives and belts, remove and reinstall ceilings, air terminals, access doors, and air devices as required to balance the system. Maintain the air handling equipment in good operating condition during the testing and balancing procedures. 3.02 PRESSURE DIAGRAM A. Provide a diagram indicating, at minimum, the static pressure at the following points while system is operating at 100% airflow. 1. FCU inlet. 2. FCU outlet. 3. Supply fan inlet. 4. Supply fan outlet. 5. Existing relocated makeup air unit. B. Diagram shall include all components in an air handling unit and additional pressure points as required in thermal performance testing. C. Coordinate with Division 23 and equipment manufacturer to obtain readings where access is difficult or limited. Lack of readings due to inaccessibility will not be accepted. 3.03 SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES A. Final air system measurements shall be within the following range of specified cfm: 1. Fans: 0% to +10%. 2. Supply grilles, registers, diffusers: 0% to +10%. 3. Return/exhaust grilles, registers: 0% to -10%. 4. Room pressurization air: -5% to +5%. B. Final water system measurements shall be within the following range of specified gpm: Heating flow rates: 0% to -10%. 3.04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Perform testing, balancing, and adjusting procedures in accordance with AABC or NEBB, unless specified below. B. Contact the Division 23 Contractor for assistance in operation and adjustment of controls during testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. Cycle controls and verify proper operation and setpoints. Include in report description of temperature control operation for all control modes and any deficiencies found. Section 23 05 93-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. Permanently mark equipment settings, including damper and valve positions, control settings, and similar devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops. D. Division 23 shall correct any installation deficiencies found by the test and balance agency that were specified and/or shown on the Contract Documents to be performed as part of that division of work, including sheave and pulley replacement or corrections to the controls system. Test and balance agency shall notify CONTRACTOR of these items and instructions will be issued to Division 23 for correction of the deficient work. Testing and balancing reports shall be submitted only after all deficiencies have been corrected and balancing completed upon the corrected system. E. In areas with suspended ceilings, remove ceiling tiles to accomplish balanc ng work. Replace tiles when work is complete. If ceiling tile is damaged during balancing, it shall be balancing contractor's responsibility to replace at no additional cost to CITY. 3.05 THERMAL PERFORMANCE TESTING A. Measure and record system measurements for each system described below during all control modes. Measurements shall be taken with airflows at 100% ar d coils at 100% — capacity. CONTRACTOR shall make provisions for seasonal testing. B. Hot Water Coils: 1. Coil location. 2. Design and actual water flows. 3. Actual airflow during testing. 4. Design and actual entering air temperature (dry bulb and wet bulb). 5. Design and actual leaving air temperature (dry bulb and wet bulb). 6. Actual pressure drop across the coil (both water and air). 7. Design and actual entering water temperature. 8. Design and actual leaving water temperature. _ C. Direct Expansion (DX) Coils: 1. Coil location. 2. Actual airflow during testing. 3. Design and actual entering air temperature (dry bulb and wet bulb). 4. Design and actual leaving air temperature (dry bulb and wet bulb). 5. Actual pressure drop across the coil. 6. Refrigerant saturated suction temperature. — 7. Designation of wet or dry coil. D. Natural Gas Burners in Make-up Air Units and Gas Duct Furnaces: 1. Coil location. 2. Actual airflow during testing. 3. Design and actual entering air temperature (dry bulb and wet bulb). 4. Design and actual leaving air temperature (dry bulb and wet bulb). 5. Actual pressure drop across the coil. E. Electric Heating Coils: 1. Coil location. 2. Actual airflow during testing. 3. Design and actual entering air temperature (dry bulb and wet bulb). 4. Design and actual leaving air temperature (dry bulb and wet bulb). Section 23 05 93-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 5. Actual pressure drop across the coil. 6. Actual voltage and amperage (each phase). F. Hot Water Boilers: 1. Boiler location. 2. Design and actual water flow. 3. Design and actual water pressure drop. 4. Design and actual entering water temperature. 5. Design and actual leaving water temperature. *. 6. Design and actual water AT. G. Water-To-Water Heat Exchangers: 1. Heater exchanger location. 2. Design and actual water flow (hot and cold side). 3. Design and actual entering water temperature (hot and cold side). 4. Design and actual leaving water temperature (hot and cold side). 5. Design and actual water AT (hot and cold side). 6. Design and actual water pressure drop (hot and cold side). END OF SECTION Section 23 05 93-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 23 07 13 DUCTWORK INSULATION FOR HEATING, AIR CONDITIONING, AND VEN—ILATION PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work includes: 1 . Rigid board fiberglass insulation. 2. Wrap type bubble insulation. 3. Adhesives, mastic, sealants, and reinforcing materials. 4. Jacketing. 5. Accessories. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by a specific edition date. B. All material, installation, and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references: 1. ASTM B117—Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog)Apparatus. 2. ASTM C168—Standard Terminology Relating to Thermal Insulation. 3. ASTM C272—Water Absorption of Core Materials for Sandwich Const-uctions. 4. ASTM C547—Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation 5. ASTM C518—Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. 6. ASTM C591—Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation. 7. ASTM C612—Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation. 8. ASTM C916—Standard Specification for Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation. 9. ASTM C1071—Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation (Thermal and Sound Absorbing Material). 10. ASTM C1290—Standard Specification for Flexible Fibrous Glass Blanket Insulation Used to Externally Insulate HVAC Ducts. 11. ASTM C1427—Standard Specification for Extruded Preformed Flexible Cellular Polyolefin Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form. 12. ASTM D1000—Methods for Pressure-Sensitive Adhesive-Coated Tapes Used for Electrical and Electronic Applications. 13. ASTM E84—Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 14. ASTM E96—Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 15. FED L-P-535E: Plastic Sheet (Sheeting): Plastic Strip: Poly (Vinyl Chloride) And Poly (Vinyl Chloride-Vinyl Acetate), Rigid. 16. EPA Method 8260B—Volatile Organic Compounds By Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry (Gc/Ms). 17. NFPA 262—Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for Use in Air-Handling Spaces. Section 23 07 13-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Submit a schedule of all insulating materials to be used on the project, including adhesives, fastening methods, and fitting materials, along with safety data sheets and intended use of each material. Include manufacturer's technical data sheets indicating density, thermal characteristics, jacket type, and manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All components of this specification section shall meet or exceed the requirements and quality of the items herein specified, or as denoted on the drawings. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the site in such a manner as to protect the materials from shipping and handling damage. Provide materials on factory provided shipping skids and lifting lugs, if required for handling. B. Materials that could be damaged by the elements should be packaged in such a manner — that they could withstand short-term exposure to the elements during transportation. C. Store materials in a clean, dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage. D. Use all means necessary to protect insulation before, during, and after installation. E. All scratched, dented, and otherwise damaged insulation shall be repaired or replaced at no additional cost to CITY. 1.06 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Unless otherwise indicated, all duct covering, jackets, insulation, vapor barriers, adhesive, and mastics shall have flame spread rating of 25 or less and smoke spread rating of 50 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. B. Exposed insulation with All Service Jacketing shall be painted in accordance with Section 09 91 00—Painting. In lieu of painting All Service Jacket insulation, CONTRACTOR may provide PVC jacketing as specified herein. CONTRACTOR shall not paint PVC jacketing. Where painted insulation transitions to PVC jacketing, CONTRACTOR shall coordinate colors with CITY. Colors shall be in accordance with Section 20 05 53—Identification for Fire Suppression, Plumbing, and HVAC Piping and Equipment. C. Exposed ductwork shall be painted in accordance with Section 09 91 00—Painting. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate colors with CITY. Section 23 07 13-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 RIGID BOARD FIBERGLASS INSULATION A. Acceptable manufacturer is Johns Manville Spin-Glas Series 814, Owens Corning Type 703, or Knauf Insulation Board. B. Insulation shall be mineral fiber type conforming to ASTM C612. -- C. Minimum nominal density shall be 3 lbs/ft3. D. K-factor shall not exceed 0.23 (btu-in)/(hr-ft2-°F) at 75°F mean. E. Insulation shall be rated for service to 450°F. 2.02 WRAP TYPE BUBBLE INSULATION A. Acceptable manufacturer is Reflectix Insulation Solutions Duct Insulation Bubble, or equal. B. Insulation shall be reflective type duct insulation with two outer reflective surfaces enclosing bubble layers. C. Provide all accessories for a complete system installation including space`s. 2.03 ADHESIVES, MASTIC, SEALANTS, AND REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Products shall be compatible with surfaces and materials on which the are applied and shall be suitable for use at operating temperatures of systems to which they are applied. B. All adhesives used for ductwork insulation shall conform to ASTM C916, Type II. C. Fiberglass Insulation Adhesive. Acceptable Manufacturers: Foster 85-60, Childers CP-127, and Duro Dyne SSG. D. Vapor Retarding Mastic: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Foster 30-65 Vapor Fas, Childers CP-34, and Vimasco 749. 2. For ductwork insulation operating below 50°F, mastic water vapor permeance shall be less than 0.03 perms at 45 mils dry film thickness conforming to ASTM E96. 3. Use insulation joint sealant at all joints. Acceptable manufacturers are Foster 95-50 Flextra, Childers CP-76 Chil-Byl, or Pittsburgh Corning CW Sealant. E. Weather Barrier Breather Mastic: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Foster 46-50 Weatherite, Childers Vi-Cry CP-10/CP-11, or Vimasco WC-5. 2. For ductwork insulation operating at 50°F or above, mastic water vapor permeance shall be greater than 1.0 perms at 1/16-inch dry film thickness conforming to ASTM E96. F. Sealant for Metal Jacketing. Acceptable Manufacturers: Foster 95-44 E iastolar, Childers CP-76 Chil-Byl, Pittsburgh Corning 727. Section 23 07 13-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.04 JACKETING A. Self-Adhering Jackets (SAJ): 1. Acceptable manufacturers are 3M VentureClad 1577CW, or equal. 2. Jackets shall be 5-ply, self-adhering multiple laminated waterproofing material with reflective aluminum foil, high density polymer films and cold weather acrylic adhesive providing zero (0.0) moisture permeance. 3. Jackets in corrosive (NEMA 4X) areas shall be 3M VentureClad 1577CW-WM, 4-ply poly vinyl fluoride, self-adhering multiple laminated waterproofing material with reflective aluminum foil, high density polymer films and cold weather acrylic adhesive providing zero (0.0) moisture permeance. 4. Minimum material thickness shall be 6 mils. 5. Minimum puncture resistance shall be 25 lbs conforming to ASTM D1000. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. All products shall be compatible with surfaces and materials on which they are applied and be suitable for use at operating temperatures of the systems to which they are applied. — B. Adhesives, sealants, and protective finishes shall be as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications specified. C. Insulation bands shall be 3/4-inch wide, constructed of aluminum or stainless steel. Minimum thickness shall be 0.015-inch for aluminum and 0.010-inch for stainless steel. D. Staples shall be clinch style. E. Tack fasteners shall be stainless steel ring grooved shank tacks. F. Joint sealants and metal jacketing sealants shall be non-shrinking and permanently flexible. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. All insulation damaged during construction shall be replaced in accordance with these specifications. B. All insulation shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's written recommendations. Destructive methods such as sheet metal screws are not acceptable. C. Install insulation with smooth and even surfaces. Poorly fitted joints or use of filler in voids will not be accepted. Provide neatly beveled and coated terminations at all nameplates, uninsulated fittings, or at other locations where insulation terminates. D. All duct insulation shall be continuous through walls, ceiling or floor openings and through sleeves except where firestop or firesafing materials are required. Section 23 07 13-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.02 RIGID BOARD FIBERGLASS INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Provide finished edges at all access doors and ends of insulation. B. Provide additional insulation trim pieces over flanged ductwork joints to completely insulate and seal to the thickness specified. C. For exterior ductwork, insulate duct such that minimum thickness is maintained and is sloped/peaked to shed water. D. Flexible connections from ducts to HVAC equipment shall not be insulates. 3.03 WRAP TYPE BUBBLE INSULATION A. Ductwork including flexible ductwork shall be insulated per manufacturer's recommendations. Ducts in unconditioned concealed spaces shall have minimum of R-6 insulation. 3.04 PROTECTIVE JACKET INSTALLATION A. Self-Adhering Jackets (SAJ): 1. Install according to manufacturer's recommendations. Cut allowing minimum 4-inch overlap on ends and 6 inches on longitudinal joints. Align parallel to surface. Remove release paper and press flat to surface to avoid wrinkles. Rub entire surface for full adhesion and sealing at joint overlaps. On exterior applications, provide a bead of compatible caulk along exposed edges. 2. Wrap elbows, fittings, valves and butt joints with two layers of vapor retarding tape. Vapor retarding tape shall be compatible with the jacket material used. 3.05 DUCTWORK INSULATION _ A. Provide insulation on new and existing remodeled ductwork as indicate i in the following schedule: Service Insulation JackE., Thickness Outside Air Ducts Rigid Board Fiberglass SAJ 2.0" Concealed Supply Ducts Wrap Type Bubble Wrap NonE R-6 Exhaust/Relief Ducts from Exterior to Rigid Board Fiberglass SAJ 2.0" 12 Inches Beyond Damper Ductwork Exterior to Building or in Rigid Board Fiberglass SAJ 3.0" Unconditioned Spaces Intake and Exhaust Damper Frames Rigid Board Fiberglass SAJ 2.0" 3.06 SPECIAL AREAS A. All areas indicated on the Drawings as "Hazardous", Class I Division 1, or Class I Division 2 shall include SAJ jackets. B. All areas indicated on the Drawings as "Corrosive" or NEMA 4x shall inclu ie SAJ jackets. END OF SECTION Section 23 07 13-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 23 07 19 HVAC PIPING INSULATION PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work includes insulation for all piping provided under Division 23—HVAC. 1. Formed polyisocyanurate insulation. 2. Adhesives, mastic, sealants, and reinforcing materials. 3. Jacketing. 4. Insulation inserts and pipe shields. 5. Accessories. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by a specific edition date. B. All material, installation, and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references. 1. ASTM C168—Standard Terminology Relating to Thermal Insulation. 2. ASTM C272—Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Core Materials for Sandwich Constructions. 3. ASTM C518—Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. 4. ASTM C533—Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation. 5. ASTM C547—Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation. 6. ASTM C591—Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation. 7. ASTM C612—Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation. 8. ASTM C1427—Standard Specification for Extruded Preformed Flexible Cellular Polyolefin Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form. 9. ASTM D1000—Standard Test Methods for Pressure-Sensitive Adhesive-Coated Tapes Used for Electrical and Electronic Applications. 10. ASTM E84—Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 11. ASTM E96—Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 12. FED L-P-535E: Plastic Sheet (Sheeting): Plastic Strip: Poly (Vinyl Chloride) And Poly (Vinyl Chloride-Vinyl Acetate), Rigid. 13. NFPA 262—Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for Use in Air-Handling Spaces. Section 23 07 19-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Submit a schedule of all insulating materials to be used on the project, including adhesives, fastening methods, and fitting materials, along with safety data sheets and intended use of each material. Include manufacturer's technical data sheets indicating density, thermal characteristics, jacket type, and manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All insulation or components of this specification section shall mee. or exceed the requirements and quality of the items herein specified, or as denoted on t[ e drawings. B. Label all insulating products delivered to the construction site with the mar ufacturer's name and description of materials. C. Insulation systems shall be applied by experienced contractors. Within the past five years, CONTRACTOR shall be able to document the successful completion of a minimum of three projects of at least 50% of the size and similar scope of the work specified in this section. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 60 11)0—Materials and Equipment. B. Deliver materials to the site in such a manner as to protect the materials f'om shipping and handling damage. C. Materials that could be damaged by the elements should be packaged i such a manner that they could withstand short-term exposure to the elements during trap:,portation. D. Store materials in a clean, dry place and protect from weather and ccnstruction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage. E. Use all means necessary to protect insulation before, during, and after installation. F. All scratched, dented, and otherwise damaged insulation shall be repaired or replaced as requested by CITY without additional cost to CITY. 1.06 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Unless otherwise indicated, all pipe covering, jackets, insulation, vapor barriers, adhesives, and mastics shall have flame spread rating of 25 or less and smoke spreE d rating of 450 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. B. All pipe covering, jackets, insulation, vapor barriers, adhesive, and mastics within active return or supply air plenums shall have flame spread rating of 25 or less and smoke-developed rating of 50 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Section 23 07 19-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. Exposed insulation with All Service Jacketing shall be painted in accordance with Section 09 91 00—Painting. In lieu of painting All Service Jacket insulation, CONTRACTOR may provide PVC jacketing as specified herein. All PVC jacketing provided shall come factory finished. CONTRACTOR shall not paint PVC jacketing. Where painted insulation transitions to PVC jacketing, CONTRACTOR shall coordinate colors with CITY. Colors shall be in accordance with Section 20 05 53—Identification for Fire Suppression, Plumbing and HVAC Piping and Equipment and Section 09 91 00—Painting. D. All insulation and associated materials shall be free of asbestos. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMED POLYISOCYANURATE INSULATION A. Acceptable manufacturers are ITW Insulation System Trymer 2000, Owens Corning Foamular 2000 XP, and Malama Composites AinaCore. B. Insulation shall be rigid polyisocyanurate conforming to ASTM C591, Grade 2, Type IV. C. Minimum nominal density shall be 2.0 lbs/ft3. �F D. K-factor shall not exceed 0.19 (btu-in)/(hr-ft2-°F) at 75°F mean. E. Insulation shall be rated for service range of-290°F to 300°F. 2.02 ADHESIVES, MASTIC, SEALANTS, AND REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Products shall be compatible with surfaces and materials on which they are applied, and shall be suitable for use at operating temperatures of systems to which they are applied. B. Fiberglass Insulation Adhesive: Acceptable Manufacturers: Foster 85-60, Childers CP-127, and Duro Dyne SSG. C. Sealant for Metal Jacketing: Acceptable Manufacturers: Foster 95-44 Elastolar, Childers CP-76 Chil-Byl, Pittsburgh Corning 727. 2.03 JACKETING A. All Service Jackets (ASJ): Heavy duty, fire retardant material with white kraft reinforced foil vapor retarding jacket, factory applied to insulation with a self-sealing pressure sensitive adhesive lap, maximum permeance of .02 perms and minimum beach puncture resistance of 50 units. B. PVC Jackets (PVJ): 1. PVC film, gloss finish one side, semi-gloss other side. 2. PVC film shall conform to FED L-P-535D, Composition A, Type II, Grade GU. 3. Jacket thickness shall be minimum 0.03 inch. Section 23 07 19-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.04 INSULATION INSERTS AND PIPE SHIELDS A. Acceptable manufacturers are B-Line, Pipe Shields, or Value Engineered =P rod ucts. B. Construct inserts with calcium silicate or polyisocyanurate with r linimum 140 psi compressive strength. Piping 12 inches and larger shall be supplemented with high density -- 600 psi structural calcium silicate insert. Provide 16-gauge galvanized steel shield, 12 inches long. Insert and shield shall include minimum 180 degree coverage on bottom supported piping and full 360 degree coverage on clamped piping. On roller mounted piping and piping designed to slide on support, provide additional load distribution stainless steel plate. C. Where contractor proposes shop/site fabricated inserts and shields, submit schedule of materials, thicknesses, gauges and lengths for each pipe size to demonstrate equivalency to pre-engineered/premanufactured product described above. On low temperature systems, _ high density rigid polyisocyanurate may be substituted for calcium silicate provided insert and shield length and shield gauge are increased to compensate for lower insulation compressive strength. D. Wood blocks will not be accepted. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. All products shall be compatible with surfaces and materials on which the\, are applied, and be suitable for use at operating temperatures of the systems to which the are applied. B. Adhesives, sealants, and protective finishes shall be as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications specified. C. Insulation bands shall be 3/4 inch wide, constructed of aluminum or stainless steel. Minimum thickness shall be 0.015 inch for aluminum and 0.010 inch for stainless stuel. D. Load distributing metal shields shall be constructed of aluminum or stainless steel. Minimum thickness shall be 0.015 inch for aluminum and 0.010 inch for stainless sb,el. E. Staples shall be clinch style. F. Tack fasteners shall be stainless steel ring grooved shank tacks. G. Joint sealants and metal jacketing sealants shall be non-shrinking and permanently flexible. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. All insulation damaged during construction shall be replaced in accordance with these specifications. B. All insulation shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's written recommendations. Destructive methods such as sheet metal screws are not acceptable. All — pipe insulation shall be installed with joints butted firmly together. Section 23 07 19-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. All valves and fittings shall be insulated with mitered sections of insulation equal in density and thickness to adjoining insulation. D. Install insulation with smooth and even surfaces. Poorly fitted joints or use of filler in voids will not be accepted. Provide neatly beveled and coated terminations at all nameplates, uninsulated fittings, or at other locations where insulation terminates. E. All pipe insulation shall be continuous through walls, ceiling or floor openings and through sleeves. F. All uninsulated penetrations through the insulation system shall be insulated along their length to a minimum distance of four times the insulation thickness. To prevent moisture migration behind the insulation, these penetrations shall be sealed with a sealant as recommended by the manufacturer and flashed to shed water. 3.02 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. For each pipe hanger, provide a hanger block on the bottom half of the pipe in place of the insulation. B. Pipe hangers and supports shall be sized large enough to be installed over the outer surface of the insulation. C. Load distributing metal shields shall be installed around the lower one-third circumference of the insulation and jacket. D. Blocks and shields shall be provided at all supports regardless of orientation, except inserts may be omitted on 3/4 inch and smaller copper piping provided 12-inch long 22 gauge pipe shields are used. 3.03 FORMED POLYISOCYANURATE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Fittings, valves, unions, flanges, couplings and specialties shall be insulated with factory molded insulation of the same thickness as adjoining insulation. Secure insulation sections with two wraps of nylon filament tape 9 inches to 12 inches on center. On single insulation layer systems and on the outer layer of double insulation layer systems, apply a thin coat of flexible closed cell joint sealant rated for system operating temperatures to all longitudinal and butt insulation joints covering entire face of joint. Allow sealant to fully cure before applying protective covering. Where two layers of insulation are used, do not use sealant on the inner layer or adhere the inner layer to the outer layer. Apply vapor stop bead of joint sealant between pipe and insulation on both sides of valves, expansion/contraction joints, flanges, thermometers/gauges, attached vent and drain lines. Insulate attached non-circulated lines, control lines, vents, etc. for a minimum distance of 6 inches from pipe. Cover insulation with a protective jacket as specified below. Do not penetrate protective covering or insulation with mechanical fasteners. 3.04 PROTECTIVE JACKET INSTALLATION A. All Service Jackets (ASJ): Install according to manufacturer's recommendations using factory supplied lap seals and butt strip seals. Section 23 07 19-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. PVC Fitting Covers and Jackets (PVJ): Lap seams and joints a minimum of 2 inches and continuously seal PVC with welding solvent recommended by jacket manufacturer. Lap slip joint ends 4 inches without fasteners where required to absorb expansion and contraction. For sections where vapor retarding jacket is not required and jacket requires routine removal, tack fasteners may be used. Secure PVC fitting covers with tack fasteners. For systems requiring a vapor retarding jacket, apply a 1 1/2-inch band of mastic over ends, throat, seams and penetrations. 3.05 PIPING INSULATION A. Provide insulation on new and existing remodeled piping as indicated in the following schedule: INSULATION THICKNESS BY PIPE SIZE 1" to 1-1/2" 4" to 8" and SERVICE INSULATION JACKET < 1" < 1 1/2" to < 4" < 8" Larger Heating Hot Water Formed Polyiso. PVJ 1.5" 1.5" 2" 2" 2" Heating Hot Water Formed Polyiso. ASJ 0.5" 0.5" - - - Runouts between control valve and coil, within 4 feet of coil B. All piping exterior to buildings shall be provided with a PMJ or SAJ jacket. END OF SECTION -- Section 23 07 19-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 23 09 13 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Electrical components. 2. Thermostats. 3. Dampers and actuators. 4. Temperature elements. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provision of Section 01 33 00-Submittals. -. B. Submittal shall include control schematics with wiring and logic diagrams in addition to equipment information. All wiring shall be color coded and labeled at each end with corresponding numbers in accordance with Section 20 05 53-Identification for Fire Suppression, Plumbing, and HVAC Piping and Equipment. This numbering shall be shown on the shop and record drawings. Wiring diagrams shall be job-specific and indicate all point-to-point wiring connections. Manufacturer's standard wiring diagrams are not acceptable. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Temperature control equipment including panels and other standard marketed apparatus shall bear the nameplate of the manufacturer. The entire system including temperature control wiring shall be installed by mechanics employed by or under contract to the temperature control provider, a factory-licensed distributor, or factory-licensed dealer. The provider shall be responsible for the quality and satisfactory operation of all materials. B. All control panels shall bear a serialized UL label. C. Comply with the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) and any and all local codes as applicable to construction of electrical wiring devices, material, and equipment herein specified. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS A. Provide electrical work in accordance with Division 26. All line voltage wiring and conduit shall be provided by Division 26 contractor. All low voltage wiring (100 volts and below) shall be provided by Division 23 contractor and be installed in raceways provided by Division 26 contractor. Section 23 09 13-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. Provide all components necessary to complete the work of this section including, but not limited to relays, transformers, motors, solenoid valves, starters, switches, override controls, operator linkages, and associated low voltage wiring. Outdoor wiring and equipment shall be NEMA 4X, or as indicated. C. All relays, time clocks, transformers, motors, operator linkages, wiring, etc., not specifically mentioned herein but necessary to make the control system complete and operative in accordance with the sequence of operation shall be provided as part of This section. D. All boxes for thermostats shall be provided by Division 26 contractor. 2.02 THERMOSTATS A. Manufacturer shall provide control devices for installation by Division 23 B. Provide low voltage programmable thermostat, Viconics Model VT86(0 series or equal. Thermostat shall be capable of heating, cooling, economizing, and shall have programmable occupancy schedules. Thermostat programming shall be saved to non-volatile memory such that the programming is not erased when power is removed. Thermostat shall receive 24 VAC power from the associated unit. Thermostat shall have password protection to prevent unauthorized access to the configuration menu parameters. C. Thermostat shall include: 1. Start/stop of the cooling. 2. Start/stop of the supply fan. 3. Minimum two digital outputs. 4. Terminal for remote room sensor. 5. Terminal for outdoor air temperature sensor. 6. Terminal for mixed air temperature sensor. 7. Terminal for supply air temperature sensor. 8. Modulation of the electric heat. D. Where required or show on the drawings provide remote sensors compatible with thermostat. 2.03 DAMPERS AND ACTUATORS A. Outside Air Intake and Exhaust Outlet: 1. Dampers shall be TAMCO Series 9000 BF, Alumavent Series 3900SS, or Arrow AFDTI-25LT, thermally insulated control damper with aluminum construction. Dampers for corrosive and Class I, Division 1 environments shall be TAMCO Series 9000 SW provided with an anodized coating and stainless steel linkage. 2. Dampers shall be parallel blade. 3. Extruded aluminum (6063T5) damper frame shall be thermally broken, minimum 0.080-inch thickness. Damper frame to be 4 inches deep and shall be insulated with polystyrene on four sides. Damper shall be rated at a leakage of less than 8.0 cfm per square foot at 4.0 inches of water column pressure differential at 20°F. 4. Blades to be extruded aluminum (6063T5), internally insulated with non-CFC, expanded polyurethane foam and shall be thermally broken. Complete blade shall have an insulating factor of R-2.29 and a temperature index of 55 as tested in accordance with -` AMCA Standard 511. 5. Blade gaskets shall be extruded EPDM; blade seals shall be silicone Section 23 09 13-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 6. Shaft to actuator shall be hex type, material to match damper construction. 7. Side seals shall be silicone. 8. Dampers shall be flanged to duct type. Clear opening in damper shall be same size as ductwork. B. Actuators: 1. Actuators shall be Belimo NFBUP, Honeywell MS4110, or Siemens GCA, maintenance-free actuator rated at minimum 88 in-lb. of torque. Dampers shall be power-to-open, spring-closed unless otherwise specified. Provide auxiliary switch where noted on drawings. Actuator shall be capable of accepting 120-volt power for operation and control. 2. Actuators shall include electronic overload protection and visual position indication throughout range of motion. 3. Actuators shall include a manual override via a manufacturer-supplied hex crank. 4. Where actuators are located in Class I, Division 1 rated spaces, provide Belimo ZS260 or equal, explosion-proof housing for actuators. 5. Provide Belimo ZS300, or equal, 316 stainless steel enclosure for actuators in NEMA 4X or exterior locations, unless noted otherwise below. 6. Provide Greenheck, or equal, NEMA 4X plastic enclosure for actuators in the following areas: Chemical rooms. 7. All actuators shall be direct-coupled to damper and mounted outside the air stream utilizing TAMCO motor mounting bracket model AL-0001, or equal unless otherwise noted. CONTRACTOR shall verify suitability of mounting bracket prior to ordering. 8. If auxiliary switch is not used, terminate cord in nearest junction box. 9. All actuators shall be of the same manufacturer. Manufacturer shall be responsible for furnishing quantity of actuators required to meet minimum damper torque rating, plus an additional 10% torque. 2.04 TEMPERATURE ELEMENTS (TE) A. Temperature elements shall be thermistor or 1000 platinum RTD with temperature �- transmitter. Thermistor shall be ACI model A/10K, or equal, with an accuracy of ±0.36°F. Transmitters, where required, shall be ACI model A/TT100, or equal, with 4-20 mA linear output signal. Transmitter shall have an accuracy of ±0.1°F. Range shall be as specified below. B. Outdoor air temperature sensors shall have a range of-30°F to 130°F. C. Water temperature sensors shall be immersion type with stainless steel thermal well. D. Sensors for heating hot water systems shall have a range of 40°F to 240°F. E. Duct temperature sensors shall be insertion type, unless noted otherwise, with a range of -30°F to 130°F. All mixed air and coil discharge air sensors shall be averaging type. Temperature sensors for ductwork larger than 8 square feet shall be averaging type. Section 23 09 13-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install all equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and Division 26. B. Coordinate location of exposed devices prior to rough-in. ThermostatE shall be mounted where shown on the drawings. Thermostats on exterior walls shall have nsulated bases. 3.02 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION A. Electrical Room Heating and Cooling Unit (330-FCU-01): 1. Unit shall be controlled by a low voltage remote mounted thermosta 2. Occupied and unoccupied modes shall be determined by time-of-da scheduling within the thermostat. 3. Occupied Mode: a. Unit supply fan shall run continuously. b. When the room temperature rises above the room temperature setpoint, the associated condensing unit, 330-ACCU-01, shall turn on, or the unit shall be economizing as described below, until the room temperature fa !s below the room temperature setpoint. c. Outside air damper shall open to the minimum position, unless the unit is economizing as described below. d. When the room temperature falls below the room temperature setpoint, the electric heat shall turn on and modulate until the room temperature is satisfied. 4. Unoccupied Mode: a. Supply fan, cooling, and heating shall cycle as required to maintain an adjustable night setback room temperature setpoint. b. Outside air damper shall be closed. 5. Economizer Control: a. When the outside air temperature is below 55°F (adjustable at thermostat), the associated condensing unit 330-ACCU-01, shall be disabled, and the outdoor air damper shall modulate to maintain the room air temperature setpoint. b. When the outside air temperature is above 55°F (adjustable at thermostat), the economizer shall be disabled and cooling shall be provided by condensing unit 330-ACCU-01. B. Gas unit heaters (GUH) shall be controlled by a low-voltage remote-mounted thermostat — furnished by the manufacturer with a fan on when room temperature falls below thermostat setpoint. Provide wiring between thermostat and unit heater. Control power shall be from control power transformer at unit. C. Electric wall heaters (EWH) shall be controlled by an integral thermostat. D. Controls for electric unit heaters (EUH) shall be provided by Division 26 contractor. Thermostats shall be suitable to meet room electrical rating. Control power shall be from control power transformer at unit. E. Devices and control logic for the following fans shall be provided by the Division 26 contractor. Refer to Section 26 09 00-Controls and Instrumentation. 1. 170-EF-01. 2. 170-EF-02. Section 23 09 13-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 F. The following fans shall run continuously. No means of shut off shall be provided except at the equipment disconnect or lighting panel circuit breaker. The motor-operated damper at the fan and the associated dampers shall be open when the fan is running and closed when the fan is off. 1. 300-EF-01. 2. 330-EF-01. 3. 330-EF-02. 4. 330-EF-03.5. 330-EF-04. 6. 330-EF-05. 7. 330-EF-06. 8. 330-EF-07. 9. 330-S F-01. G. Electric duct heaters (EDH) shall be controlled by a duct mounted thermostat and setpoint adjuster furnished by the manufacturer and installed by the Division 23 contractor in raceways provided by Division 26 contractor. H. Existing relocated makeup air unit (330-MAU-01) shall run continuously. When heating is required, MAU burner shall fire and modulate to maintain a desired discharge air temperature. I. Gas duct furnaces (GDF) shall be controlled by a duct mounted thermostat and remote, wall-mounted setpoint adjuster furnished by the manufacturer and installed by the Division 23 contractor in raceways provided by Division 26. END OF SECTION Section 23 09 13-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 23 11 23 FACILITY FUEL GAS PIPING PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: All facility fuel gas pipe and fittings unless otherwise not,)d. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 govim.n work under this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Proje 3t unless identified by a specific edition date. B. All material, installation, and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references. 1. NFPA 54—National Fuel Gas Code (Current Edition). 2. ANSI B16.3—Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. 3. ASTM A53—Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc Coated Welded and Seamless. 4. ASTM A234—Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures. 5. 2018 International Fuel Gas Code. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All materials, equipment and Work shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and local requirements and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code and applicable state labor regulations. C. Order all Type E and Type S steel pipe with heat numbers rolled, stamped, or stenciled to each length or each bundle, depending on the size of the pipe, and in accordance with the _ appropriate ASTM specification. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept piping on-site in shipping containers with labeling in place, inspect for damage and store with a minimum of handling. Store plastic piping under cover out of direct sunlight. Do not store materials directly on the ground. B. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. Section 23 11 23-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by installing temporary covers, completing sections of the work and isolating parts of completed system. D. Cover pipe to eliminate rust and corrosion while allowing sufficient ventilation to avoid condensation. Do not store materials directly on grade. Protect pipe, tube, and fitting ends so they are not damaged. Where end caps are provided or specified, take precautions so the caps remain in place. 1.06 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Use only new material, free of defects, rust and scale, and meeting the latest revision of ASTM specifications as listed in this specification. B. Construct all piping for the highest pressures and temperatures in the respective system in accordance with ANSI B31, but not less than 125 psig unless specifically indicated otherwise. C. Non-metallic piping will be acceptable only for the services indicated. It will not be acceptable in occupied spaces and ventilation plenum spaces, including plenum ceilings. D. Use only long radius elbows having a centerline radius of 1.5 pipe diameters. E. Where ASTM A53 grade A pipe is specified, ASTM A53 grade B pipe may be substituted at Contractor's option. Where the grade or type is not specified, Contractor may choose from those commercially available. 1.07 WELDER QUALIFICATIONS A. Before any metallic welding is performed, CONTRACTOR to submit his Standard Welding Procedure Specification together with the Procedure Qualification Record as required by Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and/or the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau. B. Before any polyethylene fusion welding is performed, Contractor to submit certification that the welders to be used on this project have successfully demonstrated proper welding procedures in accordance with the Code of Federal Regulations, Title 49, Part 192, Section 192.285. C. The CONSULTANT and CITY reserves the right to test the work of any welder employed on the project, at the Contractor's expense. If the work of the welder is found to be unsatisfactory, the welder shall be prevented from doing further welding on the project. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state, and local requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Natural gas pressures shall not exceed 5 psig on customer side of the meter. Section 23 11 23-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. Buried natural gas shall be in accordance with Section 33 30 10-Buried Piping and Appurtenances. D. Biogas piping shall be in accordance with Section 40 05 02—Piping and Appurtenances. 2.02 NATURAL GAS A. 2-Inch and Smaller: ASTM A53, type E or S, standard weight (schedule 40) black steel pipe with ASTM A197/ANSI B16.3 class 150 black malleable iron threaded fittings or ASTM A234 - grade WPB/ANSI B16.9 standard weight, seamless, carbon steel weld fittings. B. 2 1/2-Inch and Larger: ASTM A53, type E or S, standard weight black steel pipe with ASTM A234 grade WPB/ANSI B16.9 standard weight, seamless, carbon steel weld fittings. C. Exposed piping shall be painted in accordance with Section 09 91 00—Painting. All aboveground piping shall be labeled in accordance with Section 20 05 53—Identification for Fire Suppression, Plumbing, and HVAC Piping and Equipment. 2.03 VENTS AND RELIEF VALVE DISCHARGE PIPING A. Use pipe and pipe fittings as specified for the system to which the reli-;f valve or vent is connected. 2.04 UNIONS AND FLANGES A. 2-Inch and Smaller: ASTM A197/ANSI B16.3 malleable iron unions with brass seats. Use black malleable iron on black steel piping and galvanized malleable iron on galvanized steel piping. Use unions of a pressure class equal to or higher than that specified for the fittings of the respective piping service but not less than 250 psi. B. 2 1/2-Inch and Larger: ASTM A181 or A105, grade 1 hot forged steel flanges of threaded, welding and of a pressure class compatible with that specified for valves, piping specialties and fittings of the respective piping service. Flanges smaller than 2 1/2-inch may be used as needed for connecting to equipment and piping specialties. Use raised face flanges ANSI B16.5 for mating with other raised face flanges on equipment with flat ring or full face gaskets. Use ANSI B16.1 flat face flanges with full face gaskets for mating with other flat face flanges on equipment. C. Provide ASTM A 193 B7 grade bolts and A 194 2H grade nuts and hardened washers for connections (star washers for grounding). 2.05 GASKETS A. Natural Gas Systems: Branded, compressed, non-asbestos sheet gaskets. Klingersil C4401, Garlock 3000, or JM Clipper 978-C. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Remove all foreign material from interior and exterior of pipe and fittings. Section 23 11 23-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Support: 1. All interior or exposed pipelines shall be securely supported by adjustable metal saddles, brackets, or adjustable hangers supported directly by concrete, masonry work, or tile. 2. Strap hangers, tin clips, or U-hooks will not be acceptable. 3. In general, the maximum spacing of supports shall not exceed 10 feet on centers. 4. Insulation saddles shall be used. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and place hangers, supports, wall pipes, sleeves, and floor boxes in the forms before concrete is poured wherever needed or shown on the drawings. 5. The weight of the piping shall be supported independently of connected equipment. 6. All supports and parts shall conform to the latest requirements of ASME B31 and shall have a structural safety factor of 5. Accurate weight balance calculation shall be made by CONTRACTOR to determine the required supporting force at each hanger location and the pipe weight load at each equipment connection. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the installation and application of the supports. Pipe hangers shall be capable of supporting the pipe weight load in all conditions of operation. The hangers shall allow free expansion and contraction of the piping to prevent excessive stress in the piping. Hangers and supports shall be spaced in accordance with ASME B31 and as indicated in this specification. Pipe supports shall be placed before and after a valve, expansion joint, or equipment so that stress will not be transferred to them. 7. CONTRACTOR shall provide calculations of pipe supports if requested by CONSULTANT 8. The following maximum spacings shall be provided for supports: MAXIMUM HORIZONTAL PIPE HANGER AND SUPPORT SPACING Black Steel Nominal Pipe or (See Note 1) Tube Size ft 3/4 8 1 8 1 1/4 8 1 1/2 8 2 10 2 1/2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 10 8 10 10 10 12 10 Note 1: Provide at least one hanger per pipe length located as close to the flange or joint on barrel as possible. Section 23 11 23-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 9. The length of hanger span and support spacing in the above tab e refers to straight lengths of pipe. When there are changes of direction in pipe, twc: supports shall be placed less than three-fourths the full span in the table. When prat ical, a hanger shall be located immediately adjacent to a change in direction of piping. Where there are concentrated loads between supports such as valves, spacing sha I be based on load calculations rather than this table. 10. Provide saddles or shields under piping hanger and supports for all insulated piping to prevent crushing of insulation. Provide stainless steel pipe shields u 'der stainless steel piping to prevent indentation of piping from the support or clamp. 11. Vertical piping shall be supported at each floor level and at intervi.ls as specified for horizontal piping. B. Penetrations: 1. Where pipes pass through concrete members without wa fittings shown, CONTRACTOR shall provide sleeves in the forms for the piping. 2. The sleeve diameter shall not exceed the pipe O.D. (or flange O.D. where applicable) plus 2 inches, unless otherwise shown on drawings. 3. If the concrete members are to be watertight, the annular space around the pipe shall be sealed with an approved mechanical seal. 4. Where pipes pass through a roof, they shall be run through an approvi_)d roof penetration with flashing and counter-flashing. 5. Where pipes pass through nonwatertight walls, the annular space shall be grouted full. 6. Where pipes pass through nonwatertight floors, the sleeve shall expend 1-inch above the finished floor elevation, and the annular space shall remain open 7. Space between wall sleeve or wall pipe and concrete shall be filled with nonshrinking -- mortar. 8. The annular space between the wall sleeve and pipe shall be sealec with an approved mechanical seal. 9. Where new pipes go through existing nonwatertight concrete or masonry members, holes shall be cored and grouted full (walls), remain open (floors). 10. Plug abandoned pipes and wall pipes, after pipe and fitting rem:)val, flush to the concrete surface with nonshrinking mortar, or as otherwise acceptable, to achieve a watertight seal. 11. No chases or recesses shall be made in poured concrete for pipe installation, and no pipe shall run in poured concrete unless called for in the drawings or specifications or permitted by CONSULTANT. The cutting or core drilling of concrete for pipe shall be avoided wherever possible, and in no case, where such cutting or core drilling is necessary, shall reinforcing rods be cut or disturbed without prior consultation with CONSULTANT. 12. All openings for pipe work shall be neatly patched in a workmanlike manner. C. Layout: 1. Install all piping parallel to building walls and ceilings and at heights that do not obstruct any portion of a window, doorway, stairway, or passageway. Where interferences develop in the field, offset or reroute piping as required to clear such interferences. In all cases, consult drawings for location of pipe spaces, ceiling heights, door and window openings, or other architectural details before installing piping. 2. Exposed piping shall run straight, in neat parallel lines, and shall be located far enough from walls, ceilings and floors, to permit access for covering of pipe and painting work. 3. Care shall be taken in laying out piping that there is no interference with the proper location of piping for other purposes or other equipment, and shall be run with regard to the requirements of each service. 4. Piping shall not interfere with headroom or clear floor space. Section 23 11 23-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 5. Plates shall be provided on all uncovered pipes passing through floors, walls, and ceilings, constructed of materials other than poured concrete. Plates shall be on exposed sides and shall be chrome-plated, spring and snap type. 6. An ample number of unions shall be provided in all threaded, soldered, and glued pipelines and at all equipment to facilitate removal and replacement. Install a shutoff valve at each appliance. 7. In joining two dissimilar types of pipe, standard fittings shall be used when available. The proposed joint shall be submitted by CONTRACTOR to CONSULTANT for review prior to installation. 3.03 ERECTION A. Provide anchors, expansion joints, swing joints and/or expansion loops so that piping may expand and contract without damage to itself, equipment, or building. B. Mitered ells, notched tees, and orange peel reducers are not acceptable. On threaded piping, bushings are not acceptable. C. "Weldolets" and "Threadolets" may be used for branch takeoffs up to one-half the diameter of the main. D. Do not route piping through transformer vaults or above transformers, panelboards, or switchboards, including the required service space for this equipment, unless the piping is serving this equipment. 3.04 WELDED PIPE JOINTS A. Welding of pipe in normally occupied buildings is prohibited. Off-site welding is acceptable. B. If welding is required in a normally occupied building for connecting to an existing welded system, written approval from CITY shall be obtained and shall comply with building's fire and life safety, as well as hot work requirements. C. Piping and fittings shall be welded and fabricated in accordance with ASME/ANSI latest editions of B31 for all systems from the Code for Pressure Piping. Machine beveling in CONTRACTOR'S shop is preferred. Field beveling may be done by flame cutting to recognized standards. D. Provide complete penetration of deposited metal with base metal. Provide filler metal suitable for use with base metal. Maintain inside of fittings free from globules of weld metal. E. All welded pipe joints shall be made by the fusion welding process, employing a metallic arc or gas welding process. All pipes shall have the ends beveled 37 1/2 degrees and all joints shall be aligned true before welding. Except as specified otherwise, all changes in direction, intersection of lines, reduction in pipe size and the like shall be made with factory-fabricated welding fittings. Mitering of pipe to form elbows, notching of straight runs to form tees, or any similar construction shall not be permitted. F. Align piping and equipment so that no part is offset more than 1/16 inch. Set all fittings and joints square and true and preserve alignment during welding operation. Use of alignment rods inside pipe is prohibited. Section 23 11 23-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 G. CONTRACTOR shall not permit any weld to project within the pipe so Cis to restrict it. Tack welds, if used, must be of the same procedure as the completed weld. Otherwise, remove tack weld during welding operation. H. Do not split, bend, flatten or otherwise damage piping before, during or after installation. I. Remove dirt, scale or other foreign matter from the inside of the piping, by swabbing or flushing, prior to the connection of other piping sections, fittings, valves or equipment. J. Schedule 40 pipe shall in no case be welded with less than three passes including one stringer/root, one filler and one lacer. Schedule 80 shall be welded wit I no less than four passes, including one stringer/root, two filler and one lacer. In all cases the weld must be filled before the cap weld is added. K. Weld Testing: 1. All welds are subject to inspection, visual and/or x-ray, for compliance with Specifications. CITY will at CITY's option, provide employees or employ a testing laboratory for the purposes of performing said inspections and/or x-ray testing. Initial visual and x-ray inspections will be provided by CITY. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all labor, material and travel expenses involved in the reinspection and retesting of any welds found to be unacceptable. In addition, CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the costs involved in any and all additional testing required or recommended by ASME/ANSI Standards B31.1 and B31.3 because of the discovery of poor, unacceptable or rejected welds. 2. Welds lacking penetration, containing excessive porosity or cracks, or are found to be unacceptable for any reason, must be removed and replaced with an original quality weld as specified herein. All qualifying tests, welding and stress relieving procedures shall, moreover, be in accordance with Standard Qualification for Welding Procedures, Welders and Welding Operators, Appendix A, Section 6 of the Code, current edition. 3.05 THREADED PIPE JOINTS A. Use a Teflon based thread lubricant or Teflon tape when making joints; nc hard setting pipe thread cement or caulking will be allowed. 3.06 NATURAL GAS A. Pitch horizontal piping down 1-inch in 60 feet in the direction of flow. Install a 4-inch minimum depth dirt leg at the bottom of each vertical run and at each appliance. When installing mains and branches, cap gas tight each tee or pipe end which will not be immediately extended. All branch connections to the main shall be from the top or side of the main. B. Do not install gas pipe in a ventilation air plenum. C. If an above ground vent terminates in an area subject to snow accumulation, terminate the line at least five feet above grade. D. Piping through a roof shall be run through an approved roof penetration with flashing and counter flashing. E. Each gas pressure reducing valve vent and relief valve vent shall be rui separately to a point outside of the building, terminated with a screened vent cap, and located according to gas utility regulations. Section 23 11 23-7 4463.004/City Contract No.994 F. Clean all welded piping before all regulators and control valves. Test by placing target cloth over piping and blow with compressed air. Clean piping until target cloth is clean and free of debris. 3.07 VENTS AND RELIEF VALVE DISCHARGE PIPING A. Install vent and relief valve discharge lines as indicated on the drawings, as detailed, and as specified for each specific valve or piping specialty item. In no event is a termination to occur less than 6 feet above a roof line. Each gas pressure reducing valve vent and relief valve vent shall be run separately to a point outside of the building, terminated with a screened vent cap, and located according to gas utility regulations. B. Pipe vents from gas pressure reducing valves and pipe casing sleeves to the exterior of the building and terminate with outlet turned down and capped with corrosion resistant insect screen. Vent terminations shall be at least 7 feet abovegrade or pedestrian traffic and a minimum of 3 feet above or 10 feet horizontally from all air intakes or building openings. Provide stainless steel insect screens on vent outlets. 3.08 UNIONS AND FLANGES A. Install a union or flange, as required, at each automatic control valve and at each piping specialty or piece of equipment which may require removal for maintenance, repair, or replacement. Where a valve is located at a piece of equipment, locate the flange or union connection on the equipment side of the valve. Concealed unions or flanges are not acceptable. B. Provide dielectric isolation device where nonferrous lines connect to ferrous lines or equipment, such as dielectric union, coupling, or dielectric flange fitting. 3.09 PIPING SYSTEM LEAK TESTS A. Piping system shall be tested as a complete unit or in sections. Under no circumstances shall a valve in a line be used as a bulkhead between gas in one section and test medium in an adjacent section, unless two valves in series are installed with a valved "telltale" located between these valves. B. Verify that the piping system being tested is fully connected to all components and that all equipment is properly installed, wired, and ready for operation. If required for the additional pressure load under test, provide temporary restraints at expansion joints or isolate them during the test. Verify that hangers can withstand any additional weight load that may be imposed by the test. C. All natural gas systems shall be inspected, tested, purged and placed into operation in accordance with NFPA 54 and as required by local code. Tester shall submit pneumatic tests to CONSULTANT. D. Conduct pressure test with air. Test time and pressure shall be as indicated in the table below; additional time may be necessary to conduct an examination for leakage. Each test must be witnessed by CONSULTANT. If leaks are found, repair the area with new materials and repeat the test; caulking will not be acceptable. Section 23 11 23-8 4463.004/City Contract No.994 System Pressure Medium Duration Natural Gas Test pressure shall be no Air, carbon dioxide, 1/2 hour per 500 cubic feet less than 1.5 times the nitrogen, or inert gas. pipe volume not to exceed proposed maximum working 24 hours. Test duration shall pressure, but not less than be not less than 1/2 hour for 3 psi. Where the test each 500 cubic feet of pipe pressure exceeds 125 psi, volume or fraction thereof. test pressure shall not When testing a system exceed 50% minimum yield having a volume less than strength of pipe. 10 cubic feet the test duration shall be a minimum of 60 minutes. The duration of the test shall not be required to exceed 24 hours. E. Gradually increase the pressure to not more than one half of the test pressure; then increase pressure in steps of approximately one-tenth of the test pressure until the required test pressure is reached. Examine all joints and connections with a soap bubble solution or equivalent method. After testing is complete, slowly release the pressure in a safe manner. F. All necessary piping, fittings, blind flanges, and apparatus for conducing tests shall be furnished by CONTRACTOR and shall comply with the requirements cf NFPA 54 and as required by local codes. G. All new rough-in distribution piping and affected portions of existing systems connected to, shall be subjected to a pneumatic test pressure utilizing clean, dry air and must be demonstrated to be absolutely tight when subjected to the pressures and time durations listed in table above. All equipment and components designed for operating pressures of less than the test pressure shall not be connected to the piping system during test. H. Test pressure shall be measured with a manometer or with a pressure-measuring device designed and calibrated to read, record or indicate a pressure loss causes: by leakage during the pressure test period. I. Piping system shall withstand test pressure specified without showing any evidence of leakage or other defects. Any reduction of test pressures as indicated by pressure gauges shall be deemed to indicate a leak unless can be attributed to some other cause. J. Leakage shall then be located by means of a gas detector, a noncorrosive leak detection fluid, or other leak detection method. Matches, candles, open flames or other methods that provide a source of ignition shall not be used. K. When placing system into operation, appliances and equipment shall not be placed into operation until piping system has been checked for leakage with above requirements. END OF SECTION Section 23 11 23-9 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 23 21 13 HYDRONIC PIPING (BID ALTERNATIVE NO. 4) PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This section contains specifications for all HVAC hydronic pipe and pipe fittings for this project. Included are the following topics: 1. Heating Hot Water. 2. Makeup Water. 3. Vents and Relief Valves. 4. Unions and Flanges. 5. Gaskets. 6. Mechanical Grooved Pipe Connections. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 govern work under this section. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by a specific edition date. B. All material, installation, and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references. 1. ANSI B16.3—Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. 2. ANSI B16.4—Cast Iron Threaded Fittings. 3. ANSI B16.5—Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. 4. ANSI B16.22—Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 5. ASTM A53—Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc Coated Welded and Seamless. 6. ASTM A74—Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 7. ASTM A105—Forgings, Carbon Steel, for Piping Components. 8. ASTM A126—Gray Cast Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings. 9. ASTM A181—Forgings, Carbon Steel for General Purpose Piping. 10. ASTM A197—Cupola Malleable Iron. 11. ASTM A234—Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures. 12. ASTM A380—Practice for Cleaning and Descaling Stainless Steel Parts, Equipment, and Systems. 13. ASTM B75—Seamless Copper Tube. 14. ASTM B88—Seamless Copper Water Tube. 1.03 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit under provisions of 01 33 00—Submittals. Section 23 21 13-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Order all Type E and Type S steel pipe with heat numbers rolled, stamped, or stenciled to each length or each bundle, depending on the size of the pipe, and in accordance with the appropriate ASTM specification. B. Any installed material not meeting the specification requirements must be replaced with material that meets these specifications without additional cost to CITY. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Delivery, storage and handling shall be in accordance with Section 01 6( 00—Materials and Equipment. 1.06 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Use only new material, free of defects, rust and scale, and meeting tht latest revision of ASTM specifications as listed in this specification. B. Construct all piping for the highest pressures and temperatures in the respective system in accordance with ANSI B31, but not less than 125 psig unless specifically indicated otherwise. C. Where weld fittings or mechanical grooved fittings are used, use only long radius elbows having a centerline radius of 1.5 pipe diameters. 1.07 WELDER QUALIFICATIONS A. Before any metallic welding is performed, CONTRACTOR shall submit his Standard Welding Procedure Specifications, Procedure Qualification Records and Qualification Test Records for each Welder along with associated continuity records to demonstrate compliance with ASME Section IX, paragraph QW-322. B. CONTRACTOR shall maintain a complete set of welder qualification cocuments at the jobsite, including Test Records and Continuity Records for each welder. PART 2—PRODUCTS — 2.01 HEATING HOT WATER A. 2-Inch and Smaller: ASTM A53, type E or S, standard weight (schedule 4L) black steel pipe - with ASTM A197/ANSI B16.3 class 150 black malleable iron threaded fittings or ASTM A234 grade WPB/ANSI B16.9 standard weight, seamless, carbon steel weld fitt ngs. B. 2 1/2-Inch and Larger: ASTM A53, type E or S, standard weight blacK steel pipe with ASTM A234 grade WPB/ANSI B16.9 standard weight, seamless, carbon steel weld fittings. C. CONTRACTOR may use ASTM B88 seamless, type L, hard temper topper tube with ANSI B16.22 wrought copper solder-joint fittings in lieu of steel pipe for all sizes. Mechanically formed tee fittings may be used in lieu of wrought copper sold r-joint tee fittings for branch takeoff up to one-half (1/2) the diameter of the main. Pipe sizing shown on drawings is for carbon steel piping. CONTRACTOR shall submit calculations and drawings Section 23 21 13-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 indicating updated pipe sizing to utilize copper piping. Maximum fluid velocity within copper piping shall be 4 feet per second for 140°F systems and 2 feet per second for 180°F systems. 2.02 MAKEUP WATER A. Extend from where left by the Plumbing Contractor with the same materials. 2.03 VENTS AND RELIEF VALVES A. Use pipe and pipe fittings as specified for the system to which the relief valve or vent is connected. 2.04 UNIONS AND FLANGES A. 2-Inch and Smaller: ASTM A197/ANSI B16.3 malleable iron unions with brass seats. Use black malleable iron on black steel piping and galvanized malleable iron on galvanized steel piping. Use ANSI B16.18 cast copper alloy unions on copper piping. Use unions of a pressure class equal to or higher than that specified for the fittings of the respective piping service but not less than 250 psi. B. 2 1/2-Inch and Larger: ASTM A181 grade I or A105, grade III hot forged steel flanges of threaded, welding and of a pressure class compatible with that specified for valves, piping specialties and fittings of the respective piping service. Flanges smaller than 2 1/2-inch may be used as needed for connecting to equipment and piping specialties. Use raised face flanges ANSI B16.5 for mating with other raised face flanges on equipment with flat ring or full face gaskets. Use ANSI B16.1 flat face flanges with full face gaskets for mating with other flat face flanges on equipment. C. Provide ASTM A 193 B7 grade bolts and A 194 2H grade nuts and hardened washers for connections (Star washers for grounding.) 2.05 GASKETS A. Water Systems: Branded, compressed, non-asbestos sheet gaskets. Klingersil C4401, Garlock 3000, JM Clipper 978-C, or approved equal. 2.06 MECHANICAL GROOVED PIPE CONNECTIONS A. Manufacturers: Victaulic, Anvil Corp., or Grinnell. B. Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings may be used with steel pipe on the systems indicated below. Either cut-groove or equivalent roll-groove products are acceptable providing the system temperature and pressure requirements are met.Where malleable iron fittings are indicated, they shall conform to ASTM A47. Where ductile iron fittings are indicated, they shall conform to ASTM A 536. Where forged steel fittings are indicated, they shall conform to ASTM A106, Grade B. Where fabricated steel fittings are indicated, they shall conform to ASTM A53, type F in sizes 3/4-inch through 1 1/2-inch and type E or S, grade B in sizes 2-inch through 20-inch. Do not use fabricated fittings where malleable or ductile iron or forged steel fittings are available. Gaskets in all cases shall be EPDM suitable for temperatures to 230 F. Section 23 21 13-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. The following service may use mechanical grooved pipe connections \A thin the building in mechanical spaces and above accessible ceilings. Mechanical chases are not considered accessible. Heating hot water. D. Mechanical grooved pipe connections shall not be used in heating plants or below grade utility distribution systems. E. Mechanical grooved pipe connections shall not be used in chilled water :)iping between the cooling coil and the isolation valve for that cooling coil. F. Fittings and couplings must be suitable for the temperature and press ire involved. In no case is the final system to have a pressure rating of less than 125 :)sig at the design temperature of the fluid. G. Acceptable fittings and couplings are listed below, based on Victaulic. When used on galvanized piping, fittings and couplings shall be galvanized. When used on black steel piping, fittings and couplings shall have an enamel coating. When used on stainless steel piping, fittings and couplings shall be stainless steel. H. Couplings: Ductile iron standard couplings, Style 77; lightweight couplings, Style 75; and rigid couplings. Reducing couplings are not acceptable. I. Flanges: Ductile iron Style 741 or 742 except at lug type butterfly valves where standard welding flanges shall be used. J. Fittings: Ductile iron elbows and tees of the manufacturer's standard line may be used in all sizes except bullhead tees will not be accepted. Fabricated steel fittings may be used in all sizes where fitting wall thickness conforms to standard weight pipe. Mechanical-T Style 920 fittings with malleable iron housings may be used for up to 2-inch outlet s ze. K. Mechanical grooved pipe couplings are not allowed as a substitute for expansion compensation. L. Mechanical grooved flexible couplings are not allowed as a substitute for the flexible connectors at pump connections. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION A. Carefully inspect all pipe, fittings, valves, equipment and accessories before installation.Any items that are unsuitable, cracked or otherwise defective shall be rejected and removed from the job site immediately. Excluding minor surface rust, piping that exhibits significant oxidation or corrosion will be rejected. B. Exercise care at every stage of storage, handling, laying and erecting tc prevent entry of foreign matter into piping, fittings, valves, equipment and accessories. Do :lot erect or install any item that is not clean. Section 23 21 13-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. Remove all lose dirt, scale, oil, chips, burrs and other foreign material from the internal and external surfaces of all pipe and piping components prior to assembly, including debris associated with cutting, threading and welding. D. During fabrication and assembly, remove slag and weld spatter from internal pipe surfaces at all joints by peening, chipping and wire brushing. E. During construction, until system is fully operational, keep all openings in piping and equipment closed except when actual work is being performed on that item of the system. Use plugs, caps, blind flanges or other items designed for this purpose. F. Furnish and install all flanges, caps, bypasses, drains, valves, etc. required to facilitate flushing and draining all piping. G. Install all piping parallel to building walls and ceilings and at heights which do not obstruct any portion of a window, doorway, stairway, or passageway. Where interferences develop in the field, offset or reroute piping as required to clear such interferences. In all cases, consult drawings for exact location of pipe spaces, ceiling heights, door and window openings, or other architectural details before installing piping. H. Provide anchors, expansion joints, swing joints and/or expansion loops so that piping may expand and contract without damage to itself, equipment, or building. I. Mitered ells, notched tees, and orange peel reducers are not acceptable. On threaded piping, bushings are not acceptable. J. "Weldolets" and "Threadolets" may be used for branch takeoffs up to one-half the diameter of the main. K. Install drains throughout the systems to permit complete drainage. L. Do not route piping through transformer vaults or above transformers, panelboards, or switchboards, including the required service space for this equipment, unless the piping is serving this equipment M. Install all valves, control valves, and piping specialties, including items furnished by others, as specified and/or detailed. Make connections to all equipment installed by others where that equipment requires the piping services indicated in this section. 3.02 WELDED PIPE JOINTS A. Make all welded joints by fusion welding in accordance with ASME Codes, ANSI B31, and State Codes where applicable. B. All pipe welding shall be completed by Qualified Welders in accordance with the Contractor's Procedure Specifications. C. CONTRACTOR will see that these steps are followed where pipe sections will be joined by welding: 1. Cleaning—Welding surfaces will be clean and free of defects. --- 2. Alignment—Inside diameter of piping components will be aligned as accurately as possible. Internal misalignment shall not exceed 1/16-inch. Section 23 21 13-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3. Spacing—Pipe sections will be spaced to allow deposition of weld fil er material through the entire weld joint thickness. g 4. Girth Butt Welds: a. Girth butt welds shall be complete penetration welds. b. Concavity will not exceed 1/32-inch. c. Under cuts will not exceed 1/32-inch. d. As welded surfaces are permitted however surfaces will be free from coarse ripples, grooves, abrupt ridges and valleys. D. Electrodes shall be Lincoln, or approved equal, with coating and diameter as recommended by the manufacturer for the type and thickness of work being done. 3.03 THREADED PIPE JOINTS A. Use a Teflon based thread lubricant or Teflon tape when making joints; no hard setting pipe thread cement or caulking will be allowed. 3.04 COPPER PIPE JOINTS A. Remove all slivers and burrs remaining from the cutting operation by reap ling and filing both pipe surfaces. Clean fitting and tube with emery cloth or sandpaper. Remove residue from the cleaning operation, apply flux, and assemble joint. Use 95-5 solder or brazing to secure joint as specified for the specific piping service. B. Where mechanically formed tee fittings are allowed, form mechanically extracted collars in a continuous operation, consisting of drilling a pilot hole and drawing out the tube surface to form a collar having a height of not less than three times the thickness of the tube wall. Use an adjustable collaring device. Notch and dimple the branch tube. Remove all debris created by the forming process from the inside of the pipe. Braze the joint, applying heat properly so that pipe and tee do not distort; remove distorted connections. 3.05 WATER SYSTEMS A. Run water mains level or pitch horizontal mains up 1 inch in 40 feet in the direction of flow. Install manual air vents at all high points where air may collect. If vent is not in an accessible location, extend air vent piping to the nearest code acceptable drain location with vent valve located at the drain. B. Main branches and runouts to terminal equipment may be made at the top, top 45 degree, side, and/or bottom 45 degree of the main provided that there are drain valves suitably located for complete system drainage and manual air vents are located at all top and top 45 degree connections. Bottom connections are not acceptable unless otherwise noted. C. Use top or top 45 degree connection to main for upfeed risers and bottom 45 degree connection to main for downfeed risers. D. Use a minimum of two elbows in each pipe line to a piece of terminal equipment to provide flexibility for expansion and contraction of the piping systems. Offset pipe connections at equipment to allow for service, such as removal of the terminal device. E. Use eccentric fittings for changes in horizontal pipe sizes with the fittings installed for proper air venting. Concentric fittings may be used for changes in vertical pipe sizes. Section 23 21 13-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.06 MAKEUP WATER A. Install where indicated and/or specified, including all valves, piping specialties and dielectric unions required for a functional system. 3.07 VENTS AND RELIEF VALVES A. Install vent and relief valve discharge lines as indicated on the drawings, as detailed, and as specified for each specific valve or piping specialty item. In no event is a termination to occur less than 6 feet above a roof line. 3.08 UNIONS AND FLANGES A. Install a union or flange, as required, at each automatic control valve and at each piping specialty or piece of equipment which may require removal for maintenance, repair, or replacement. Where a valve is located at a piece of equipment, locate the flange or union connection on the equipment side of the valve. Concealed unions or flanges are not acceptable. 3.09 GASKETS A. Store horizontally in cool, dry location and protect from sunlight, water and chemicals. Inspect flange surfaces for warping, radial scoring or heavy tool marks. Inspect fasteners, nuts and washers for burrs or cracks. Replace defective materials. B. Align flanges parallel and perpendicular with bolt holes centered without using excessive force. Center gasket in opening. Lubricate fastener threads, nuts and washers with lubricant formulated for application. C. Draw flanges together evenly to avoid pinching gasket. Tighten fasteners in cross pattern sequence (12-6 o'clock, 3-9 o'clock, etc.), one pass by hand and four passes by torque wrench at 30% full torque, 60% full torque and two passes at full torque per ASME B16.5. 3.10 MECHANICAL GROOVED PIPE CONNECTIONS A. Use pipe factory grooved in accordance with the coupling manufacturer's specifications or field grooved pipe in accordance with the same specifications using specially designed tools available for the application. B. Lubricate pipe and coupling gasket, align pipe, and secure joint in accordance with the coupling manufacturer's specifications. C. Support each horizontal pipe section at least once between couplings and whenever a change in direction of line flow takes place. Support vertical pipe at every other floor or every other pipe length, whichever is most frequent. Set the base of the riser or the base fitting on a pedestal or foundation. D. Follow coupling manufacturer's installation recommendations if they are more stringent that the above requirements. Section 23 21 13-7 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.11 PIPING SYSTEM LEAK TESTS A. Verify that the piping system being tested is fully connected to all components and that all equipment is properly installed, wired, and ready for operation. If required for the additional pressure load under test, provide temporary restraints at expansion joints or isolate them during the test. Verify that hangers can withstand any additional weight load that may be imposed by the test. B. Provide all piping, fittings, blind flanges, and equipment to perform the testing. C. Conduct pressure test with test medium of water unless specifically indicated. Minimum test time is indicated in the table below; additional time may be necessary to conduct an examination for leakage. Each test must be witnessed by CITY's representative. If leaks are found, repair the area with new materials and repeat the test; caulking will not be acceptable. System Pressure Medium Duratior Heating Hot Water 100 psig Water 8 hr Makeup Water 100 psig Water 8 hr D. Do not insulate pipe until it has been successfully tested. E. For hydrostatic tests, use clean water and remove all air from the piping being tested by means of air vents or loosening of flanges/unions. Measure and record test pressure at the high point in the system. F. For air tests, gradually increase the pressure to not more than one half of the test pressure; then increase the pressure in steps of approximately one-tenth of the test pressure until the required test pressure is reached. Examine all joints and connections with a soap bubble solution or equivalent method. The piping system exclusive of possible localized instances at pump or valve packing shall show no evidence of leaking.After testing is complete, slowly release the pressure in a safe manner. G. On piping that cannot be tested because of connection to an active line, provide temporary blind flanges and hydrostatically test new section of piping. After completion of test, remove temporary flanges and make final connections to piping. Die penetrate test pass weld or x-ray the piping that was not hydrostatically tested up to the active syster i. 3.12 HYDRONIC PIPING SYSTEM FLUSHING A. All new system piping shall be flushed thoroughly before the systems are put in to operation. Subsequent to executing the chemical cleaning processes specified in Section 23 25 00—HVAC Water Treatment, and prior to adding scale and corrosion inhibitors, flush all piping and components with a clean source of water until the discharge from the system is clean. Discharge shall be from drains provided at all low points in the piping, ends of headers and as otherwise necessary to flush and drain the entire system. B. A clean water source shall be tapped into the system downstream of the main circulation pump(s). Provide minimum 2-inch connection between water source and hot water/chilled water systems including taps with ball valves (or line size tap and ball valve for piping systems smaller than 2-inch). Provide minimum 2-inch taps (or line size if mains are smaller than 2-inch) at the ends of headers, the low pint of each of the mains on each floor and as otherwise necessary to flush and drain the entire system. Provide minimum 2-inch bypass Section 23 21 13-8 4463.004/City Contract No.994 with shut off valve (or line size if mains are smaller than 2-inch) between the supply and return mains. CONTRACTOR shall identify proposed clean water source along with the method/location of drain discharge and review with CITY or CONSULTANT prior to installing flushing connections to water source and drain outlets. Provide code required temporary backflow prevention for the clean water source if needed. Provide all temporary taps, valves, piping, bypasses and hoses as needed to accomplish flushing procedures. C. Flush piping systems using the following procedure. Flushing sequence for water systems is as follows: 1. Close isolation valves at all coils and wall fin. 2. Open the temporary bypasses that connect the ends of supply and return mains. 3. Flush mains by turning on flushing water source and sequentially opening drains on mains on each floor until the discharge is clean. This will flush the mains without forcing water/debris into the branches and run out pipes. 4. Close isolation valves located downstream of coils/wall fin. 5. Open isolation valves located upstream of coils/wall fin. 6. Open individual drain valves upstream of coils/wall fin until the discharge is clean. This will flush the supply branch and run out lines between the mains and the coils/wall fin without running water/debris through the TCV or coils/wall fin. 7. Close the individual drain valves upstream of coils/wall fin. 8. Open drain valves at low points in the return piping mains. 9. Open the individual isolation valves located downstream of the coils/wall fin. This will flush the return branch and run out lines located between the coils/wall fin and the mains back into the mains and out the drains on the return mains. The water going through the coil/wall fin should be already be clean since this section was flushed previously. 10. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to clean debris from the mains. D. Isolate all coils while flushing risers and mains. Flush the mains on each floor individually, starting at the top of the building and working down towards the basement level. After risers and mains have been flushed clean, individually open the drain valves in each branch circuit to discharge any debris that may have accumulated in the branch piping. E. After flushing operations are complete, drain and/or blow out any residual water, clean and replace all strainers, and add scale and corrosion inhibitors as specified in Section 23 25 00—HVAC Water Treatment. Leave flushing connections/valves in place and cap. F. All flushing procedures shall be documented by completing and submitting the report form included at the end of this Section. 3.13 INITIAL FILL AND VENT A. Fill hydronic systems with appropriate working fluids as specified. All system fluids shall be chemically treated as specified in Section 23 25 00—HVAC Water Treatment. B. For closed piping systems, all air trapped at high points shall be relieved through the manual air vents prior to the systems being tested and balanced. END OF SECTION Section 23 21 13-9 4463.004/City Contract No.994 PIPING SYSTEM LEAKAGE TEST REPORT — Date Submitted: Project Name: Location: Project No: — Contractor: — ❑ HVAC ❑ Refrigeration ❑ Controls ❑ Power Plant ❑ Plumbing ❑ Sprinkler — Test Medium: ❑ Air ❑ Water ❑ Other Test performed per specification section No. Specified Test Duration Hours Specified Test Pressure PSIG System Identification: Describe Location: — Test Date: Start Test Time: Initial Pressure: PSIG Stop Test Time: Final Pressure: PSIG Tested By: Witnessed By: Title: Title: Signed: Signed: — Date: Date: Comments: — Section 23 21 13-10 4463.004/City Contract No.994 PIPING SYSTEM FLUSHING REPORT Date Submitted: Project Name: Location: Project No: Contractor: System Identification (check one): 0 Chilled Water 0 Process Chilled Water 0 Heat Reclaim 0 Heating Hot Water 0 Other Describe procedure: Flush Date: Start Time: Stop Time: Pressure of Water Source: PSIG Describe water source and method of connection to source: Section 23 21 13-11 4463.004/City Contract No.994 PIPING SYSTEM FLUSHING REPORT Flushed By: Witnessed By: — Title: Title: Company: Agency: Signed: Signed: — Date: Date: _ Describe results: — Section 23 21 13-12 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 23 21 16 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES (BID ALTERNATIVE NO. 4) PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Temperature and pressure indicators. 2. Strainers. 3. Flexible connections. 4. Suction diffusers. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by a specific edition date. B. All material, installation, and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references. 1. ASTM A47—Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. — 2. ASTM A53—Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless. 3. ASTM A183—Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts.4. ASTM A234/A234M—Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service. 5. ASTM B88—Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. 6. ASTM D2000—Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE INDICATORS A. Acceptable manufacturer is Trerice,Ashcroft, and Dwyer.All gauges and thermometers shall be mounted so that they can be read from the floor. B. Temperature Indicators (TI): 1. Temperature indicators shall have adjustable 9-inch cast aluminum case, and glass-enclosed spirit-filled column. Section 23 21 16-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2. Temperature range shall be from 30°F to 240°F. 3. Furnish and install where shown on drawings. 4. Furnish and install a brass well with a length suitable to extend past pipe insulation. C. Pressure Indicators (PI): 1. Pressure indicators shall be Trerice D8OLFSS, or equal. 2. Pressure indicators shall have a 304 stainless case with a 4-inch dial. Window shall be acrylic. 3. Pressure range shall be from 0 to 100 psig. 4. Furnish and install gauges where shown on drawings. 5. Furnish and install pressure snubber. 6. Maximum operating temperature shall be at least 250°F. 2.02 STRAINERS A. Provide cast iron Y type strainers with a 304 stainless steel strainer, 1/E--inch perforations, dirt leg, blowoff valve, and 125 psig rating. Strainer sizes and locations shall be as shown on the drawings. 2.03 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS A. Provide twin spherical neoprene flexible connections with flange connections. Connector shall be constructed of multiple layers of rubber and fabric reinforced with internally spirally wound tempered steel. Connectors shall be rated for 125 psig and 220°F operation. Flexible connection sizes and locations shall be as shown on the drawings. 2.04 SUCTION DIFFUSERS - A. Suction diffusers shall be Bell and Gossett, or equal. B. Provide cast iron flanged suction diffuser with steel vanes and orifice cylinder. Start-up strainer shall be 16 mesh bronze. Seals shall be EPDM. Suction diffuser shall have a maximum working pressure of at least 175 psig. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Support: The weight of the piping shall be supported independently of conr ected equipment. B. Layout: 1. An ample number of unions shall be provided in all threaded, soldered, and glued pipelines and at all equipment to facilitate removal and replacement. Install a shutoff valve at each appliance. 2. CONTRACTOR shall provide 3/8-inch tapped and plugged connections in suction and discharge of all pumps for testing. 3. The appropriate number, size, and lengths of spool pieces and flange fillers needed for plumbing and leveling any existing piping shall be included in the price bid. 4. Valves and strainers serving pumps shall be line size. - Section 23 21 16-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 5. Provide unions in supply and return connections to all equipment. Piping shall be arranged so that coils and equipment may be removed without dismantling piping beyond unions. Provide double swing joints at equipment connections. 6. Connect piping to equipment served without strain as shown on the drawings. Install pipe loops in piping to allow for expansion and contraction. 7. Provide thermal transfer gel in all thermowells. 3.02 CLEANING AND DISINFECTION A. All equipment and materials shall be clean before installation. CONTRACTOR shall disinfect and flush the system before it is put on line. B. Broken concrete, rubble fill, and other excess material shall be removed from the site and wasted. C. All surplus material, tools, and equipment shall be removed and the premises shall be left free of everything of the kind. 3.03 SUCTION DIFFUSER STRAINERS A. At completion of startup and prior to balancing, strainers shall be removed from suction diffusers. END OF SECTION Section 23 21 16-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 23 21 23 HYDRONIC PUMPS (BID ALTERNATIVE NO. 4) PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Base-mounted pumps. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 sl all govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Proje ;t unless identified by a specific edition date. B. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references: 1. ANSI/UL 778—Motor Operated Water Pumps. 2. ANSI B58.1—American Standard for Vertical Turbine Pumps. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All equipment or components of this specification section shall meet or exceed the requirements and quality of the items herein specified, or as denoted on the drawings. B. Ensure pump operation at specified system fluid temperatures without \apor binding and cavitation, is non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operates to ANSI/HI 9.6.3.1 standard for Preferred Operating Region (POR) unless ot'ierwise approved by ENGINEER. C. Ensure pump pressure ratings are at least equal to system's maximum operating pressure at point where installed but not less than specified. D. Equipment provider shall be responsible for providing certified equipment start-up and, when noted, an in the field certified training session. New pump start-up shall be for the purpose of determining pump alignment, lubrication, voltage, and amperage readings. All proper electrical connections, pump's balance, discharge and suction gauge readings, and adjustment of head, if required. A copy of the start-up report shall be made and sent to both CONTRACTOR and to ENGINEER. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Include data concerning dimensions, required clearances, capacities, materials of _ construction, ratings, weights, pump curves with net positive suction head requirements, manufacturer's installation requirements, manufacturer's performance limitations, and appropriate identification. Section 23 21 23-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. Pump curves shall identify design point of operation. Submittal shall include pump curves, system curve, and variable speed pump curves (where applicable). Include NPSH curve. D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. E. Submittals must be specific to this project. Generic submittals will not be accepted. F. Hanging and support requirements should follow the recommendations in the manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the site in such a manner as to protect the materials from shipping and handling damage. Provide materials on factory provided shipping skids and lifting lugs, if required for handling. B. Materials that could be damaged by the elements should be packaged in such a manner that they could withstand short-term exposure to the elements during transportation. C. Store materials in a clean, dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage. D. Use all means necessary to protect equipment before, during, and after installation. E. All scratched, dented, and otherwise damaged units shall be repaired or replaced as directed by OWNER. 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Include installation instructions, assembly views, lubrication instructions, recommended maintenance schedule and activities. B. Include replacement and spare parts lists. 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide one set of replacement seals for each size pump. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Standard One-Year Warranty: Unless otherwise stated below, manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from Substantial Completion of the project. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable manufacturers are Bell and Gossett, Taco, or Aurora. Section 23 21 23-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. Drawings and specifications are based on the scheduled manufacturer and model number. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the cost of any changes because of substitutions or alternates of other manufacturers or model numbers including, but not limited to, structural, mechanical, and electrical work. CONTRACTOR shall pay all costs for revisions of drawings by ENGINEER. Any changes shall be coordinated and provided at no additional cost to OWNER. 2.02 BASE-MOUNTED PUMPS A. Provide base-mounted circulating pumps with performance as shown or drawing schedule and in locations as shown on drawings. B. Pumps shall be base-mounted, single-stage, end suction design with a f(Jot-mounted volute to allow servicing of the impeller and bearing assembly without disturbing piping connections. Pumps shall be of cast iron construction with standard mechanical seals (rotating carbon vs. ceramic) and shaft sleeve. Casing shall be designed for 175 psi working pressure. Casing shall have gauge ports on suction, discharge, and drain port. C. The impeller shall be cast bronze enclosed type. Impeller shall be dynamically balanced, keyed to the shaft, and secured with a locking cap screw. D. Each pump and motor is to be provided with a nameplate giving the manufacturer's name, serial number of pump, capacity in GPM and head in feet at design condition, horsepower, voltage, frequency, speed, and full load current. E. Each pump and motor combination shall be capable of delivering 110`o of fluid quantity scheduled at scheduled head pressure. The motor furnished with the pump shall not operate into the motor service factor when operating under these conditions. 2.03 MOTORS A. Motors provided for pumps shall meet the following requirements. Motors :hall not be loaded beyond nominal rating, not including service factor, at any design conditic n. 1. Physical Construction: a. Copper windings with ball or roller bearings in end brackets of s.gel or cast iron or aluminum brackets with steel bearing sleeves. b. Motor shaft shall be high strength steel protected by a bronze sh..-rft sleeve secured to the shaft to prevent rotation. The maximum allowable noload shaft runout shall be 0.002 inches. c. Motors shall be equipped with grease fittings and automatic grease reliefs. Bearings shall be prelubricated and field regreasable. Openings for additicin of grease shall have grease fittings provided. 2. Mounting: Horizontal. 3. Enclosure: TEFC. 4. Efficiency: Premium efficiency. 5. Service Factor: 1.15. 6. Power requirements: 60 Hertz, operating voltage as listed on the drawing schedules, ±10% voltage variation. 7. Load type: Variable torque. 8. NEMA Design: B. 9. Insulation: Class F rated for a Class B temperature rise. Section 23 21 23-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 10. Nominal operating speed as indicated on drawing schedules. 11. VFD requirements: Motors shall be inverter ready, meet the requirements of NEMA MG1, Part 31 for motor insulation. Provide shaft grounding split ring kit as manufactured by AEGIS, or equal. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install pumps in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Provide all necessary flanged connections to supply and return piping. C. Installation of all equipment furnished under this Contract shall be supervised by a qualified representative of the equipment manufacturer. All equipment shall be placed in operation, and operators shall be trained to the satisfaction of OWNER by a qualified representative of the equipment manufacturer. OWNER may videotape training presentations given by manufacturer's representatives. Final payment for various items of equipment will not be -� made by OWNER until the equipment is operating to their satisfaction. D. Pumps shall be provided with a minimum 5 pipe diameters upstream of the pump suction inlet. If space is not available for 5 pipe diameters, CONTRACTOR shall provide a suction diffuser. E. Reduction from line size to pump connection size shall be made with eccentric reducers attached to the pump with tops flat to allow continuity of flow. F. Proper access space around pump shall be left for servicing the equipment. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for clearance and maintenance access requirements. Provide no less than a minimum of three feet, not including piping and piping appurtenances. G. Provide an adequate number of isolation valves for service and maintenance of the system and its components. H. Set and level and grout in place. I. All piping shall be brought to pump connections in such a manner to prevent the possibility of any loads or stresses being applied to the connections or piping. J. All piping shall be fitted to the pumps even though piping adjustments may be required after the pipe is installed. K. Lubricate pumps before startup. END OF SECTION Section 23 21 23-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This section contains specifications for all refrigerant piping for this proje( t. Included are the following topics: 1. Refrigerant piping. 2. Refrigerant piping accessories. 3. Refrigerant. 1.02 REFERENCE A. Applicable provisions of Division 01 govern work under this section. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Proje:;t unless identified by a specific edition date. B. All material, installation, and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references. 1. ANSI B16.22—Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 2. ASTM B88—Seamless Copper Water Tube. 3. ASTM B280—Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and F efrigeration Field Service. 4. ASHRAE 15—Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. 5. NFPA 70—National Electric Code. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Contractor shall submit schedule indicating the ASTM specification number of the pipe being proposed along with its type and grade and sufficient information to indicate the type and rating of fittings for each service. 1.05 COPPER TUBE A. Statement from manufacturer on his letterhead that the pipe furnished meets the ASTM specification contained in this section. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All equipment or components of this specification section shall meet or exceed the requirements and quality of the items herein specified, or as denoted on the drawings. Section 23 23 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. Order all copper refrigeration tube with each shipping unit marked with the purchase order number, metal or alloy designation, temper, size, and name of supplier; with soft straight lengths or coils identified with a tag indicating that the product was manufactured in accordance with ASTM B280; and with each hard temper straight length identified throughout its length by a blue colored marking not less than 3/16-inch in height and a legend at intervals of not greater than three feet that includes the designation "ACR" and pipe outside diameter. C. Any installed material not meeting the specification requirements must be replaced with material that meets these specifications without additional cost to the Owner. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Promptly inspect shipments to review that the material is undamaged and complies with specifications. B. Cover pipe to eliminate rust and corrosion while allowing sufficient ventilation to avoid condensation. Do not store materials directly on grade. Protect pipe, tube, and fitting ends so they are not damaged. Where end caps are provided or specified, take precautions so the caps remain in place. If end caps are not present on tube bearing the "ACR" designation, clean and re-cap in accordance with ASTM B280. Protect fittings, flanges, and unions by storage inside or by durable, waterproof, above ground packaging. C. Offsite storage agreements will not relieve the contractor from using proper storage techniques. D. Storage and protection methods must allow observation to verify products. 1.08 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Use only new material, free of defects and scale, and meeting the latest revision of ASTM specifications as listed in this specification. B. Where ASTM B88, type L hard temper copper tubing is specified, ASTM B88, type K hard temper copper tubing may be substituted at Contractor's option. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 REFRIGERANT PIPING A. ASTM B88 type L hard drawn copper tube, cleaned and capped in accordance with ASTM B280, and marked "ACR", with ANSI B16.22 wrought copper or forged brass solder-type fittings. B. Precharged tubing line sets may be used on systems 3 1/2 tons and less in size. 2.02 REFRIGERANT PIPING ACCESSORIES A. Acceptable manufacturers are Sporlan, Alco, or equal. Section 23 23 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. Provide all refrigerant piping specialties with a maximum working pressure of full vacuum to 450 psig and a maximum working temperature of 225°F. For systems using R-410A, provide all refrigerant piping specialties with a maximum working pressure of full vacuum to 850 psig and a maximum working temperature of 225°F. C. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Double braided bronze hose flexible pipe con lectors with solder end connections. D. Filter Dryers: For circuits 15 tons and over provide angle pattern filter dryers with replaceable core. For circuits below 15 tons provide straight pattern filter dryers without. replaceable core. E. Sight Glasses: Two piece brass construction with solder end connect')ns. Include color indicator for sensing moisture. F. Solenoid Valves: Two-way, normally closed with two piece brass body, full port, stainless steel plug, stainless steel spring, teflon diaphragm and solder end connections. Provide replaceable coil assembly. G. Thermostatic Expansion Valves: Brass body, bronze disc, neoprene seat, bronze bonnet, stainless steel spring and solder end connections. H. Charging Valves: Provide 1/4-inch SAE brass male flare access ports witf• finger tight, quick seal caps. Provide 2-inch long copper extension sections. I. Check Valves: Spring loaded type with bronze body, bronze disc, neoprene seat, bronze bonnet, stainless steel spring and solder end connections. 2.03 REFRIGERANT A. Refrigerant shall be R410A: Difluoromethane/Pentafluoroethane mixture i accordance with ASHRAE 34. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Remove all foreign material from interior and exterior of pipe and fittings. 3.02 ERECTION A. Install all piping parallel to building walls and ceilings and at heights which do not obstruct any portion of a window, doorway, stairway, or passageway. Where interferences develop in the field, offset or reroute piping as required to clear such interferences. In all cases, consult drawings for exact location of pipe spaces, ceiling heights, door and window openings, or other architectural details before installing piping. B. Do not route piping through transformer vaults or above transformers. panelboards, or switchboards, including the required service space for this equipment, ur less the piping is serving this equipment C. Do not install piping running through any means of egress. -- Section 23 23 00-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 D. Install all valves and piping specialties, including items furnished by others, as specified and/or detailed. Make connections to all equipment installed by others where that equipment requires the piping services indicated in this section. 3.03 REFRIGERANT PIPING A. Refrigeration piping to be installed by firms who are experienced in installation of such piping and in accordance with the requirements of the International Mechanical Code. B. All brazing filler metals shall have a melting temperature above 1400 degrees F and contain a minimum of 6% silver. C. Tubing to be new and delivered to the job site with the original mill end caps in place. Clean and polish all joints before brazing. Avoid prolonged heating and burning during brazing. Purge all lines with nitrogen during brazing. Provide manual shut-off and check valves as required. D. No refrigerant is to be vented directly to the atmosphere except that which may escape through leaks in the system during leak testing. During evacuation procedures, use equipment designed to recover and allow recycling of the refrigerant. E. Leak test the system by charging the system to a pressure of 10 psig with an HFC refrigerant, with the compressor suction and discharge valves closed and with all other system valves open. Increase pressure to 300 psig with dry nitrogen. Rap all joints with a mallet and check for leaks with an electric leak detector having a certified sensitivity of at least one ounce per year. Seal any leaks that may be found and retest. F. After completion of the leak test, evacuate the system with a vacuum pump to an absolute pressure not exceeding 1500 microns while the system ambient temperature is above 60°F. Break the vacuum to 2 psig with the refrigerant to be used in the system. Repeat the evacuation process, again breaking the vacuum with refrigerant. Install a drier of the required size in the liquid line, open the compressor suction and discharge valves, and evacuate to an absolute pressure not exceeding 500 microns. Leave the vacuum pump running for not less than two hours without interruption. Raise the system pressure to 2 psig with refrigerant and remove the vacuum pump. G. Charge refrigerant directly from original drums through a combination filter-drier. Each drier may be used for a maximum of three cylinders of refrigerant and then must be replaced with a fresh drier. Charge the system by means of a charging fitting in the liquid line. Weigh the refrigerant drum before charging so that an accurate record can be kept of the weight of refrigerant put in the system. If refrigerant is added to the system through the suction side of the compressor, charge in vapor form only. 3.04 REFRIGERANT PIPING ACCESSORIES A. Install accessories in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. END OF SECTION Section 23 23 00-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 23 25 00 HVAC WATER TREATMENT (BID ALTERNATIVE NO. 4) PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Chemical cleaning. 2. Scale and corrosion inhibitor. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 sf all govern work in this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals for shop drawing submittal procedures. B. Drawings and specifications are based on the scheduled manufacturer aid model number. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the cost of any changes because of substitutions or alternates of other manufacturers or model numbers including, but not lir cited to, structural, mechanical, and electrical work. CONTRACTOR shall pay all costs for rep, isions of drawings by CONSULTANT. Any changes shall be coordinated and provided at nc additional cost to CITY. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The calculated water volume of the hydronic hot water system is 1,500 gHtllons. B. CONTRACTOR is responsible for recording the actual system water volume as part of the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Provide water meters as required. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable manufacturers are Lakeland, Ecolab, Nalco, or equal. 2.02 CHEMICAL CLEANING A. Entire hydronic system water supply and return piping system including existing and new piping shall be cleaned with Lakeland Chemical No. CL-5650 cleaner, or equal, at a dosage of 2.5 gallons of chemical per 1,000 gallons of water, or as recommended by the manufacturer. Section 23 25 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.03 SCALE AND CORROSION INHIBITOR A. Entire hydronic system water supply and return piping system including existing and new piping shall be inhibited with Lakeland Chemical No. CL-5610 cleaner, or equal, at a dosage of 2.5 gallons of chemical per 1,000 gallons of water, or as recommended by the manufacturer. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide the initial chemical treatment for all systems based on a complete system fluid analysis prior to the equipment installation. The initial chemical treatment supply of chemicals for each system shall be adequate for the start-up and testing period, for the time the systems are being operated by the Contractor for temporary heating and cooling, and for one year after start-up of the system. C. Furnish service and maintenance of treatment systems for one year from date of substantial completion. D. Provide quarterly technical service visits to perform field inspections and make water analysis on-site. Detail findings in writing on proper practices, chemical treating requirements, and corrective actions needed. Submit two copies of field service report after each visit. E. Provide laboratory and technical assistance services for the correction period. F. Include one-hour training course for operating personnel, instructing them on installation, care, maintenance, testing, and operation of the treatment systems. Arrange course at start-up of systems. G. Provide site inspection of equipment during scheduled shutdown to evaluate success of the treatment program. Make recommendations in writing based on these inspections. H. Installation of all equipment furnished under this Contract shall be supervised by a qualified representative of the equipment manufacturer. All equipment shall be placed in operation, and plant operators shall be trained to the satisfaction of CITY by a qualified representative of the equipment manufacturer. CITY may videotape training presentations given by manufacturer's representatives. Final payment for various items of equipment will not be made by CITY until the equipment is operating to their satisfaction. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prior to cleaning, verify that systems are operational, filled, started, and vented. Use water meter to record capacity in each system. B. Place terminal control valves in the full-open position. Section 23 25 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.03 CLEANING SEQUENCE A. Systems are to be cleaned before they are used for any purpose except to conduct pressure test before cleaning. Add cleaner to closed systems at concentrations recommended by the manufacturer. Remove water filter elements from the system before starting circulation. For steam systems, fill boilers only, using the water and cleaner solution. B. Use neutralizer agents on recommendation of the system cleaner supplier and approval of CITY. C. Flush open systems with clean water for 1 hour minimum. Drain complet,tly and refill. D. Remove, clean, and replace strainer screens. E. Inspect, remove sludge, and flush low points with clean water after cleaning process is completed. Include disassembly of components as required. 3.04 HOT WATER HEATING SYSTEMS A. Add cleaner to the system water until the M-alkalinity value is 250 above that of the initial fill water. Verify the M-alkalinity level before and after the addition of the cleaner by means of chemical tests that are observed by CITY's construction representative; include results of all tests in the Operation and Maintenance manuals.Apply heat while circulating, slowly raising temperature to 160°F and maintain for 12 hours minimum; vent all high points to assure 100% system circulation. Remove heat and circulate to 100°F or less; drain system as — quickly as possible and refill with clean water. Circulate for 6 hours at design temperature, vent air at all high points, then drain. Refill with clean water and repeat until the system cleaner is removed and the M-alkalinity level returns to normal. Remove and clean all strainers. Revent the system and install clean filter elements in water filters. Treat with scale and corrosion inhibitors before using the system for building heating. 3.05 WATER QUALITY TESTING A. For each piping system, a water sample shall be sent to an independent resting lab for the following: 1. Appearance (color, clarity, and solids visibility). 2. pH. 3. Alkalinity. 4. Inhibitors. 5. Corrosion products (iron, copper, zinc as minimum). 6. Contaminants. 7. Scale promoters (calcium, magnesium as minimum). B. Submit results to CONSULTANT. END OF SECTION Section 23 25 00-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 23 31 00 DUCTWORK PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Duct Pressure/System Class. 2. Duct Materials. 3. Fasteners, Hangers and Supports. 4. Duct Sealants and Gaskets. 5. Ductwork Fabrication. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Provide layout drawing for review prior to ductwork fabrication. Layout drawings shall be coordinated between all other trades prior to review. 1.04 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 77 00—Contract Closeout. B. Record actual locations and sizes of ducts and duct fittings. Record changes in fitting location sizes and types. Show additional fittings used. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with SMACNA—HVAC Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A standards. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant manufacturers. B. Maintain recommended minimum temperatures during and after installation of duct sealants. Section 23 31 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. Ductwork shall be stored indoors or in durable, waterproof, abovegrade packing. 1.08 DUCTWORK DESIGN A. Duct layout and design shown on the drawings are based on design of supply, return and exhaust system components. Any changes to the design for installation shall be submitted to and approved by CITY and CONSULTANT. Proposed changes shall be submitted with layout and pressure drop calculations. CONTRACTOR shall be responE ible for the cost of any changes to the duct system or any system components. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect textile air dispersion system and suspension components from damage during shipping, storage, and handling. B. Store products inside and protect from weather. 1.10 REPLACEMENT TEXTILE DUCTWORK A. A second set textile ductwork shall be supplied in addition to the set bein I installed. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCT PRESSURE/SYSTEM CLASS (METAL DUCTWORK) A. Ductwork shall be constructed to the static pressure class as sha.vn below, unless otherwise noted: 1. Supply ductwork: 2-inch positive pressure class. 2. Exhaust air ductwork: 2-inch negative pressure class. 3. Return air ductwork: 2-inch negative pressure class. 4. Outside air ductwork: 2-inch negative pressure class. 2.02 DUCT MATERIALS A. All sheet metal used for construction of duct shall be 24 gauge, or heavier, except for round ductwork 12 inches and smaller shall be 26 gauge where allowed by SMACNA. B. Galvanized steel ducts shall be ASTM A653 galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming quality, having G90 zinc coating of 1.25 ounces per square foot in conformance with ASTM A90. Sheet metal for ductwork noted or specified to be painted shall include "Paint Grip" finish. C. Stainless Steel Ducts (Structure 330 Truck Bay/Dewatering Room): ASTM A240/A240M and A480/A480M, Type 304 or 316 as indicated on Drawings. Provide NL mber 2B finish for concealed work and number 3 finish for exposed work. D. PVC Ducts (Chemical Rooms): 1. PVC piping (round duct) material less than 22 inches in diameter shall conform to ASTM D1784, Class 12454. PVC piping and fittings shall be PVC 1120, Schedule 80, high impact pipe conforming to ASTM D1785 with bells conforming to ASTM D2672. Solvent weld fittings shall conform to ASTM D2467, and for threaded, ASTM D2464. - Section 23 31 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 PVC round duct and fittings greater than or equal to 22 inches in diameter shall be of PVC conforming to ASTM D1784, Class 16444-D. 2. All rectangular ductwork material shall conform to ASTM D1784, Class 16444-D. Ductwork shall be shop fabricated in accordance with SMACNA Thermoplastic Duct (PVC) Construction Manual. Duct shall be joined by hot gas fusion welding or solvent welding per manufacturer's instructions. PVC welders shall be DVS certified. 3. All duct delivered to the job site shall be properly marked for type, grade, and design stress rating. Expansion joints shall be provided where needed. In general, all joints shall be solvent weld, except where flanges are required or as shown on the Drawings or where transition to another pipe material is required. 4. All exterior exposed duct shall be formulated with sufficient ultraviolet-light screeners to provide for long-term outdoor exposure with no deleterious effects. 5. Entire duct shall be of PVC construction. PVC-coated materials are not acceptable. 6. All PVC shall have a flame-spread rating of 25 or less in accordance with ULC S102.2. E. All ductwork within and all negatively pressurized ductwork serving corrosive areas shall be PVC. Material proposed shall be compatible with corrosive vapors present in environment. 2.03 FASTENERS, HANGERS, AND SUPPORTS A. Ductwork shall be supported in accordance with SMACNA—HVAC Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible. Secure wire method of support is not acceptable. B. Inserts and Fasteners: 1. Concrete inserts installed prior to pouring shall be manufactured inserts. 2. Concrete fasteners installed after pouring shall be powder-actuated except for lightweight aggregate concrete or in slabs less than 4 inches thick. 3. Fasteners for structural steel shall be beam clamps or welded studs. Stud locations shall be coordinated with structural engineer. 4. Fasteners to ductwork shall be 316 stainless steel unless otherwise indicated. C. Hangers: 1. Strip hangers shall be galvanized steel. 2. Hanger rod shall be ASTM A36 galvanized steel for galvanized ducts or 316 stainless steel for ducts other than galvanized. Rods shall be continuously threaded. D. Supports: 1. Duct support material shall be galvanized steel for galvanized duct. Material for supports in corrosive spaces shall be electro-galvanized. 2. Acceptable supports for trapeze hangers are steel angles or uni-strut. Exposed ductwork shall be supported by steel angle supports painted to match duct. 3. Riser supports shall be angles or channels secured to the sides of the duct with welds or fasteners. 2.04 DUCT SEALANTS AND GASKETS A. Duct sealant shall be United McGill—United Duct Sealer, or equal for indoor applications and United McGill—Uni-Weather Duct Sealer, or equal for outdoor applications. Sealant shall be UL classified for flame and smoke development and shall be suitable for mating materials. Section 23 31 00-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. Gaskets at flanged joints shall be butyl rubber or EPDM. 2.05 DUCTWORK FABRICATION A. Rectangular Field and Shop Fabricated Ductwork: 1. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA—Duct Construction Standards- - Metal and Flexible. Duct material, gauges, reinforcing, joint types and sealing shall be in accordance with required pressure class in the standard. 2. Construct tees, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1 1/2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible, rectangular elbows may bE used with turning vanes in accordance with Section 23 33 00—Air Duct Accessories. 3. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degree divergence wherever possible; maximum 30 degree divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degree convergence downstream. 4. Provide 45 degree expanded entry takeoffs unless otherwise indicated. Flange ductwork for attachment to grille registers and outlets, unless otherwise noted. 5. Provide reinforcement and rigidity required for pressure class. 6. Provide cross breaking or cross beading on duct sides larger than 18 inches. 7. Seal all joints airtight with gaskets and sealants. B. Round Manufactured Ductwork and Fittings: 1. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA—Duct Constri..ction Standards- - Metal and Flexible. Duct material, gauges, reinforcing, joint types ar d sealing shall be in accordance with required pressure class in the standard. 2. Ductwork shall be fabricated spiral seam round. 3. Ductwork shall be constructed with locktight spiral grooved seams, Gored elbows with centerline radius of 1 1/2 times the duct diameter, and male/female fittings. Conical tees, conical 45 degree laterals, conical bellmouth taps, and fittings E hall be used. 4. Seal all joints airtight with gaskets and sealants. 5. Where grilles and registers are shown to be tapped into ductwork sides, the entire assembly including the round duct section and the rectangular ap shall be fully welded and provided by the manufacturer. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC D.act Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible. C. Duct sizes are inside clear dimensions. D. Provide openings in ductwork to accommodate testing equipment and c,Dntrollers. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install a metal insulatior sleeve of same material as ductwork. E. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. Make all necessary incidental changes in cross-section, offsets, etc., to avoid interference with other equipment and supports. Section 23 31 00-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 F. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports. G. Connect air diffusers, registers, and grilles to supply and return ducts directly. Where registers and grilles are to be mounted on exposed ductwork, provide flanged opening for finished appearance. H. During construction, provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. I. Provide an experienced installer to go through the air distribution system with the balancer. J. Any modifications to the ductwork shown on the drawings must be reviewed by CONSULTANT prior to installation. K. The weight of the ductwork shall be supported independently of connected equipment. L. Inserts shall be coordinated with general contractor for installation in concrete. M. Strip hangers are acceptable in concealed spaces only. N. Where ducts pass through non-fire rated partitions in interior or exterior walls, provide stainless steel flange on four sides on both sides of partition concealing opening. Flange shall overlap opening all around by 2 inches. Fill space with insulation if duct is insulated on either side of partition. O. Where ducts pass through fire rated partitions in interior or exterior walls, install fire damper sleeve, and firestopping sealant to meet applicable code. END OF SECTION Section 23 31 00-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1 . Air turning devices. 2. Backdraft dampers. 3. Duct access doors. 4. Duct test holes. 5. Flexible duct connections. _ 6. Duct screens. 7. Balancing dampers. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 sr all govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Proje ;t unless identified by a specific edition date. B. All material, installation, and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references. 1. NFPA 90A—Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 2. SMACNA—HVAC Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible. 3. UL 33—Heat Responsive Links for Fire-Protection Service. 4. UL 555—Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Damper submittals shall include actual pressure drop, free area, and torque requirements for each type of damper provided. 1.04 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 77 00—Contract Closeout. B. Record actual locations of access doors, fire dampers, flexible duct Conn-actions, dampers, and screens. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and handle products in accordance with manufacturers reco nmendations and Section 01 60 00—Materials and Equipment. Section 23 33 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1.06 WARRANTY A. Standard One-Year Warranty: Unless otherwise stated below, manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the earlier of either the date established for partial utilization or Substantial Completion of the project. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 AIR TURNING DEVICES A. Provide factory-fabricated metal air turning vanes in all square elbows and bends according to SMACNA Standards. Turning vanes shall be constructed of the same material specified for the ductwork. 2.02 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS A. Provide multiblade, parallel gravity, self-acting, backdraft dampers where indicated. Dampers shall be heavy-duty with 16 gauge galvanized steel frame, ball bearings, and 20 gauge, 6-inch maximum aluminum blades. Unit shall be rated for 3,000 fpm face velocity. 2.03 DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. Provide Ductmate Model FD&H, or equal, access doors for ductwork. Access door hinge and cover shall be constructed of material similar to that specified for ductwork. Provide insulated access doors where ductwork is insulated. All access doors shall be gasketed. B. Provide Chicago Plastics Systems PVC gasketed duct access doors with hinges and plastic knobs in all PVC ductwork, or equal. 2.04 DUCT TEST HOLES A. Provide Ventfabrics, Inc. No. 699 Instrument Test Holes, or equal, complete with gaskets and screw caps. Coordinate test hole height with insulation thickness. B. On uninsulated ductwork only, plastic pull-tab centered tapered plugs may be used. Plugs shall be Caplugs CPT-3, or equal, with minimum diameter of 0.36-inch. 2.05 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS A. Flexible duct connections in unrated spaces shall be Ventfabrics, Inc. Ventglas® , or equal, neoprene-coated glass fabric. Fabric shall be suitable for continuous operation up to 200°F. Fabric shall have zero leakage at±10 inches water column. B. Flexible duct connections in rated spaces shall be Ventfabrics, Inc. "Venter", or equal,Teflon fluorocarbon resin-coated glass fabric. Fabric shall be suitable for continuous operation up to 500°F. Fabric shall have zero leakage at ±8 inches water column. Section 23 33 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.06 DUCT SCREENS A. Provide screens equal to Ryerson Ryex Standard, 3/4 inches, 12-gauge sheet metal with border frame for protection on open duct inlets and outlets, and aE, indicated on the Drawings. Frame and screen shall be of similar material to ductwork. B. In PVC ductwork, provide screen equal to Harrison Machine and Plastic, 3/4 inches with border frame for protection, in lieu of metal. Install screen at sufficient angle to provide 60% of duct-free area through screen. 2.07 BALANCING DAMPERS A. All balancing dampers shall be provided with locking devices to hold the dampers in a fixed position without vibration. Single blade dampers shall be stiffened to c perate in a stable manner. 1. Balancing dampers for rectangular metal ductwork 12 inches high or less and for round metal ductwork shall be single blade manual balancing dampers of same material as specified for the ductwork. Dampers shall conform to SMACNA st indards for single blade-type volume dampers. 2. Balancing dampers for rectangular ductwork over 12 inches high s tall be Greenheck VCD-20, or equal, multi-blade volume dampers of same material as specified for the ductwork. Damper blades shall be 3V type of 16-gauge construction. Bushings shall be nylon.Axles shall be 1/2-inch diameter. Blade operation shall be oppc sed. Damper shall include an indicator to show position of the blades. Where dampE rs are installed in vertical ductwork, provide dampers with jamb seals designed for vertical duct installation. B. Dampers for PVC ductwork shall be Chicago Plastics Systems Blas-gate or quadrant damper, or equal. Dampers shall be PVC with lockable blades for balanc ng. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible. Refer to Section 23 31 00—Ductwork for duct construction and pressure class. B. Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts where indicated. C. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after intake louver screens, filters, coils, fans, automatic dampers, at fire dampers, underneath duct smoke detectors, and elsewhere as indicated. Provide minimum 8-inch by 8-inch size for hand — access, 18-inch by 18-inch size for shoulder access, and as indicated. D. Division 23 shall be responsible for coordinating with testing and balancing agency and providing test holes in all locations required for testing and balancing agency to complete their scope of work. E. Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and motorized equipment. Metal-to-metal gap shall be approximately 4 inches. Section 23 33 00-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 F. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger ducts for air balancing and where indicated on the Drawings. Install minimum two duct widths from duct takeoff. G. Provide balancing dampers on duct takeoff to diffusers, grilles, and registers regardless of whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, grille, or register assembly. END OF SECTION Section 23 33 00-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 23 34 23 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Centrifugal roof exhaust fans. 2. Ceiling or cabinet fans. 3. Centrifugal blowers. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES " A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Proje t unless identified by a specific edition date. B. All material, installation, and workmanship shall comply with the applic,-ible requirements and standards addressed within the following references. 1. AMCA 99—Standards Handbook. 2. AMCA 210—Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating. 3. AMCA 300—Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans. 4. AMCA 301—Method for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data. 5. ASTM B117—Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog)Apparatus. 6. NFPA 70—National Electrical Code. 7. NEMA MG 1—Motors and Generators. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All equipment or components of this specification section shall meet or exceed the requirements and quality of the items herein specified, or as denoted on the drawings. B. Fans shall bear AMCA-certified rating seals. C. Electrical components shall be UL listed for the service specified. D. Electrical components and work shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Include data concerning dimensions, required clearances, capacities, materials of construction, ratings, weights, manufacturer's installation requirements, manufacturer's performance limitations, and appropriate identification. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details. — Section 23 34 23-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. Submittal shall include fan-specific performance curves showing airflow, head, and motor horsepower. D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. E. Submittals must be specific to this project. Generic submittals will not be accepted. F. Hanging and support requirements should follow the recommendations in the manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the site in such a manner as to protect the materials from shipping and handling damage. Provide materials on factory provided shipping skids and lifting lugs, if required for handling. B. Materials that could be damaged by the elements should be packaged in such a manner that they could withstand short-term exposure to the elements during transportation. C. Store materials in a clean, dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage. D. Use all means necessary to protect equipment before, during, and after installation. E. All scratched, dented, and otherwise damaged units shall be repaired or replaced at no additional cost to CITY. F. Motors, shafts and bearings shall be protected from weather and dust. 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Include installation instructions, assembly views, lubrication instructions, recommended maintenance schedule and activities. B. Include replacement and spare parts lists. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Standard One-Year Warranty: Unless otherwise stated below, manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the earlier of either the date established for partial utilization or Substantial Completion of the project. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF EXHAUST FANS A. Acceptable manufacturers are Greenheck, Cook, or Twin City Fans. Section 23 34 23-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. Centrifugal roof exhaust fans shall be of drive type listed on drawing schedules. Fan installation shall include roof curb, and bird screen. Fan performance sf all be as indicated on drawing schedules. Fans shall be UL listed. C. Fan housing shall be aluminum with all fasteners either aluminum or stainless steel. -- D. All fan wheels shall have backward-inclined or forward-curved blades, and the fan wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced. -- E. The entire drive assembly shall be mounted on neoprene vibration isolators to provide quiet, vibration-free operation. Fan performance shall include AMCA-certifid air and sound ratings, and fans shall bear the AMCA seal. F. The fan motor shall be totally enclosed, fan-cooled, and shall be NEMA-approved. Motor shall be provided with a 1.15 service factor. Starters and disconnects shall be provided as _ part of Division 26. Motors 1 hp and higher shall have NEMA premium efficiency rating. G. Each fan and motor combination shall be capable of delivering 110% of air quantity scheduled at scheduled static pressure. The motor furnished with the fan shall not operate into the motor service factor when operating under these conditions. H. The fan shaft shall be mounted in prelubricated, sealed ball bearing pillow blocks. Bearings shall have a minimum L10 life of 100,000 hours. Belt drives shall have an adjustable motor plate for belt tensioning. Belt-driven fan motors and drives shall be mounted out of the air stream. I. Provide an aluminum bird screen on the fan's discharge. J. Manufacturer shall furnish a prefabricated, insulated aluminum roof curb with wood blocking to level curb on roof. Curb shall be sized for 1/4-inch clearance on all sides between curb and fan. The roof curb insulation shall be 1-inch thick, 3 pounds per cubic foot rigid fiberglass _ board. Curb height shall be nominal 12 inches unless otherwise indicated. For fans on pitched roof, manufacturer shall furnish a pitched cricketed roof curb. Finish shall match finish of fan. Roof curb shall be provided with a foam seal and aluminum Diner. K. Where schedules indicate fans are to be suitable for corrosive environments, all surfaces of the fan, bird screen, and curb liner shall be coated with 2 to 3 mils of Hi-Pro Polyester powder coating. Wheel shall be rebalanced statically and dynamically by the fan manufacturer after application of the coatings. L. Provide baked-enamel finish. Color shall be selected by CITY. Submit co or chart with shop —. drawings. 2.02 CEILING FANS OR CABINET FANS A. Acceptable manufacturers are Greenheck, Cook, or Twin City Fans. B. Fans shall have acoustically insulated housings and shall have maximum sound level rating not to exceed 4.0 sones in accordance with AMCA Bulletin 300-74. Fins shall bear the AMCA-certified ratings and seal for air capacity, sound, and UL label. C. Unit shall be equipped with integral chatter proof backdraft damper. Section 23 34 23-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 D. Fans shall have centrifugal wheel with inlet perpendicular to grille. Ceiling grille shall be aerodynamically designed and shall provide 80% free area. E. Terminal box shall be furnished with cord, plug, and receptacle inside housing. Entire fan, motor, and wheel assembly shall be removable without disturbing the housing. Motor speed shall not exceed 1,100 rpm. F. Fan shall be mounted on vibration isolators furnished by fan manufacturer. G. Manufacturer shall furnish line voltage internally-mounted and wired variable speed controller for fan. Controller shall be used for balancing only and shall be inaccessible to room occupants unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. The fan motor shall be open drip proof as indicated on Drawings. Starters and disconnects shall be provided as noted on equipment schedules. Where indicated on equipment schedules, provide electronically — commutated motor (ECM) capable of varying speed based on external 0 to 10 VDC control signal. 2.03 CENTRIFUGAL BLOWERS A. Blowers, as shown on the drawings, shall be manufactured Plastec Ventilation, or equal. B. Blower housing shall be single-piece, seamless, UV-resistant polypropylene. Split-molded housings are not acceptable. All supporting hardware shall be PVC or FRP. C. The blower wheel shall be constructed of polypropylene and be forward-curved type. Blower wheel shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Blower wheel shall be provided with a motor shaft bushing and hubcap made of polypropylene. D. The blower motor shall be UL listed for continuous-duty. Motor shall be totally enclosed, fan-cooled (TEFC), and provided with a motor junction box. Starters and disconnects shall be provided as a part of Division 26. Motors 1 hp and higher shall have NEMA premium efficiency rating. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install units level and plumb, maintaining manufacturer's recommended clearances and tolerances. B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. Test for proper operation and adjust until satisfactory results are obtained. C. Install units with vibration isolators as recommended or supplied by manufacturer. D. Provide flexible duct connections on all duct connections to unit in accordance with Section 23 33 00—Air Duct Accessories. E. Provide lubrication line extenders as required to allow regreasing of bearings without removal of equipment components. Section 23 34 23-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 F. Provide all mounting hardware and accessories necessary for complete nstallation. G. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products at no additional cost to C TY. H. Installation of all equipment furnished under this Contract shall be supervised by a qualified representative of the equipment manufacturer. All equipment shall be placed in operation, and plant operators/building maintenance personnel shall be trained to the satisfaction of the CITY by a qualified representative of the equipment manufacturer. C TY may videotape training presentations given by manufacturer's representatives. Final p, yment for various items of equipment will not be made by CITY until the equipment is operating to their satisfaction. I. Drawings and specifications are based on the scheduled manufacturer and model number. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the cost of any changes because of substitutions or alternates of other manufacturers or model numbers including but not limited to, structural, mechanical, and electrical work. CONTRACTOR shall pay all costs for revisions of drawings by CONSULTANT. Any changes shall be coordinated and provided at no additional cost to CITY. END OF SECTION Section 23 34 23-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 23 37 08 LOUVERS AND VENTS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Louvers. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by a specific edition date. �. B. All material, installation, and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references. 1. ADC 1062—Certification Rating and Test Manual. 2. AMCA 500—Test Method for Louvers, Dampers, and Shutters. 3. ARI 650—Air Outlets and Inlets. 4. ASHRAE 70—Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets. 5. NFPA 90A—Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Performance of air terminals shall be in accordance with ADC 1062.B. Louvers shall be tested and certified in accordance with AMCA 500 and shall bear the AMCA seal. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Include a louver schedule that includes louver model, screen type, screen location, louver size, finish type, free areas, face velocity, and pressure drop for each louver. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. D. Submit color selection chart with submittal for selection by CITY. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the site in such a manner as to protect the materials from shipping and handling damage. Section 23 37 08-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. Materials that could be damaged by the elements should be packaged in such a manner that they could withstand short-term exposure to the elements during traisportation. C. Store materials in a clean, dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage. D. Use all means necessary to protect equipment before, during, and after istallation. E. Scratched, dented, and otherwise damaged units shall be repaired o replaced with no additional cost to CITY. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 LOUVERS(EXTRUDED ALUMINUM) A. Acceptable louvers are Greenheck ESD 635, or equal. See drawings for sizes and locations. B. Blades and frame shall be extruded aluminum 6063-T5 alloy and 0.08-inch thickness. C. Blades shall be 35-degree drainable type spaced at 4 inches on center. Louver shall be capable of a velocity of 1,077 fpm with no water penetration. Performance shall include AMCA-certified air and moisture penetration data and louver shall bear the AMCA seal. Vertical and horizontal mullions and connections between panels shall not be exposed. D. Provide channel frame unless noted otherwise on the drawings. E. Provide aluminum screen on louver (type and location) in accordance w th louver schedule and detail on the Drawings. All fastenings shall be stainless steel or alum mum. F. Louver free area shall be equal to or greater than attached ductworl and damper free area. G. Louvers shall be furnished with 3 coats of 70% Kynar 500 finish with custom color selected by CITY. Submit manufacturer's standard color chart with shop drawings. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify CONSULTANT of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturE r for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. Section 23 37 08-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install units level and plumb, maintaining manufacturer's recommended clearances and tolerances. B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, drawing details, and approved submittals. C. Clean surface of louvers after installation. END OF SECTION Section 23 37 08-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 23 37 13 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Diffusers, registers, and grilles. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 sf all govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Proje ;t unless identified by a specific edition date. B. All material, installation, and workmanship shall comply with the applic�thle requirements and standards addressed within the following references. 1. ADC 1062—Certification Rating and Test Manual. 2. AMCA 500—Test Method for Louvers, Dampers, and Shutters. 3. ARI 650—Air Outlets and Inlets. 4. ASHRAE 70—Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performan:;e of Outlets and Inlets. 5. NFPA 90A—Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. All equipment or components of this specification section shall meet or exceed the requirements and quality of the items herein specified, or as denoted on tie Drawings. B. Performance of air terminals shall be in accordance with ADC 1062. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Include data concerning dimensions, required clearances, capacities, materials of construction, ratings, weights, manufacturer's installation requirements, manufacturer's performance limitations, and appropriate identification. C. Submittal shall include a schedule that includes model, size, and finish t}pe. D. For product requiring color selection, provide a hard copy color chart o CITY for color selection. E. CONTRACTOR shall provide all required sizes and quantities as shown o i Drawings. Section 23 37 13-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the site in such a manner as to protect the materials from shipping and handling damage. Provide materials on factory provided shipping skids and lifting lugs, if required for handling. B. Materials that could be damaged by the elements should be packaged in such a manner that they could withstand short-term exposure to the elements during transportation. C. Store materials in a clean, dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage. D. Use all means necessary to protect equipment before, during, and after installation. E. All scratched, dented, and otherwise damaged units shall be repaired or replaced at no additional cost to CITY. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES A. Acceptable manufacturers are Carnes (C), Price (P), Nailor (N), or Titus (T). Submit standard color chart with shop drawings for selection by CITY. B. CD-1: Ceiling supply diffusers for lay-in ceilings shall be (C) SFAB, (N)ARNS, (T)TMS-AA or (P)ASCDA. 24 by 24 diffusers shall be fixed aluminum stamped-type with round neck duct connection. C. CD-2: Ceiling supply diffusers for lay-in ceilings shall be (C) SJAB, (N) ARNSA, (T) TMSA-AA, or (P) ASCD. 12 by 12 diffusers shall be aluminum stamped-type with round neck duct connection. 12 by 12 diffuser shall be set in 24 by 24 panel. D. RG-1: Eggcrate-type return, transfer, and exhaust grilles for lay-in ceilings shall be (C) RAPB, (N)4260AA, (T) 50F, or(P) 80. Grilles shall be full-face egg crate with 1/2-inch by 1/2-inch by 1/2-inch aluminum core and frame. Ducted grille connection shall be round neck duct connection. Grilles open to plenum shall be provided with a light shield painted flat black. E. RG-2: Return, exhaust, and transfer grilles for sidewall and surface mounting shall be (C) RSLA, (N) 6145H, (T) 350RL, or (P) 530. Grilles shall be steel construction with 45-degree horizontal louvered blades. F. EG-1: Stainless steel return, exhaust, and transfer grilles for sidewall and surface mounting shall be (C) RLAB, (N) 6745H, (T) 350RL-SS, or (P) 730. Grilles shall be 304 stainless steel construction with 45-degree horizontal louvered blades. G. SG-1: Supply grilles for sidewall and surface mounting shall be (C) RSDB, (N) 61DH, (T) 300RL or (P) 520. Grilles shall be steel construction with double deflection blades. Section 23 37 13-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 H. SG-2: Stainless steel supply grilles for sidewall and surface mounting >hall be (C) RLDB, (N) 67DH, (T) 300RL-SS, or (P) 720. Grilles shall be 304 stainless steE::l construction with double deflection blades. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install units level and plumb, maintaining manufacturer's recommendEd clearances and tolerances. B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved subr�ittals. C. Provide all mounting hardware and accessories necessary for complete i istallation. D. Clean surface of diffusers, grilles, and registers after installation. E. Drawings and specifications are based on the scheduled manufacturer ald model number. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the cost of any changes because of substitutions or alternates of other manufacturers or model numbers including but not lin ited to, structural, mechanical, and electrical work. CONTRACTOR shall pay all costs for rep isions of drawings by CONSULTANT. Any changes shall be coordinated and provided at nc additional cost to CITY. END OF SECTION -- Section 23 37 13-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 23 51 00 BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY _. A. Work Included: 1. Type B Gas Vents and Breeching. 2. Single Wall Special Gas Vent. 3. Breechings/Connector Vents 4. Terminations. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by a specific edition date. B. All material, installation, and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following reference. 1. ASTM A167—Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. 2. ASTM A525—Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, General Requirements. 3. ASTM A527—Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Lock-Forming Quality. — 4. ASTM D1784—Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. 5. NFPA 54 (ANSI Z223.1)—The National Fuel Gas Code. 6. NFPA 211—Standard for Chimneys, Fireplaces, Vents, and Solid Fuel-Burning Appliances. 7. SMACNA—HVAC Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible. 8. UL 103—Standard for Factory Built Low Heat Chimneys. 9. UL 441—Standard for Gas Vents. 10. UL 641—Standard for Low Temperature Venting Systems. 11. UL 959 (ANSI Z181.1)—Medium Heat Appliance Factory Built Chimneys. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Factory-built vents and chimneys used for venting natural draft appliances shall comply with NFPA 211 and be UL listed and labeled. Section 23 51 00-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Engineered generator exhaust systems shall be submitted with layout an section drawings by the manufacturer. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to NFPA 54 and local codes for installation of natural ge s appliances and equipment. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and handle products in accordance with manufacturers' recc mmendations and Section 01 60 00—Materials and Equipment. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Standard One-Year Warranty: Unless otherwise stated below, manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the earlier of either the date established for partial utilization or Substantial Completion of the project. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. For each fuel-fired appliance, provide venting of category recommended oy manufacturer. B. Size vents in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2.02 TYPE "B" GAS VENTS AND BREECHING (BOILERS) A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Selkirk Metalbestos, DuraVent, Metal-Fab, Air-Jet, Hart & Cooley, General Products Co. B. Gas vent stack for gravity vented and forced draft heating equipment shall be AGA and UL-listed (UL 441 and UL 1777) Type B double-wall vent with 1-inch space between casings. C. Vent shall be rated for up to 400°F maximum continuous temperature. D. Clearance to combustibles shall not exceed 1-inch. Assemblies requiri ig a clearance to combustibles greater than 1-inch will not be accepted. Section 23 51 00-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 E. Fabricate inner pipe of sheet aluminum or stainless steel, and outer pipe of galvanized sheet steel, tested in compliance with UL 441. Minimum thickness of inner and outer pipes shall be as follows: Thickness Thickness Pipe Size Inner Pipe Outer Pipe Round, up to 6" 0.012" 28 gauge Round, 7" to 18" 0.014" 28 gauge Round, 20" to 24" 0.018" 26 gauge Oval, up to 4" 0.012" 28 gauge Oval, 5" and 6" 0.014" 28 gauge F. Provide all necessary accessories including flashing, counter flashing, storm collar, rain cap with bird screen, clean out, fittings and all necessary supports. G. Single wall breeching is acceptable where allowed by the manufacturer and NFPA 54 and joined to vertical sections of Type B vent in accordance with UL listings. Single wall breeching shall be of galvanized steel construction and not less than 0.034-inch thick. 2.03 SINGLE WALL SPECIAL GAS VENT (GAS UNIT HEATERS) A. Acceptable manufacturers are DuraVent Duraseal; Metal-Fab Corr/Guard; or Z-Flex Z-Vent. B. Maximum rated continuous temperature shall be 550°F. C. Vent shall be listed for an internal static pressure of at least 8-inch w.g. and tested to at least 15-inch w.g. D. Material shall be corrosion resistant Type 316 stainless steel, AL29-4C, or superior as approved by ENGINEER. Gaskets shall be of Viton material. E. Vent connections shall be secured by lock tabs. Joints shall be sealed with factory installed gasket. F. All joints and seams shall be gas-tight. Vents shall be leak tested in accordance with UL 1738. G. Provide all necessary accessories including flashing, counter flashing, storm collar, insulated thimble, rain cap with bird screen, clean out, fittings and all necessary supports. 2.04 TERMINATIONS A. Small (<500 MBH) gas appliance vent terminations shall be as allowed by the appliance and vent system manufacturers. B. Boiler stack terminations shall direct flow upward and away from the structure. "Rain-hat", "flip-top", and "goose-neck" type terminations which impede or redirect vertical flue gas flow are not acceptable. Section 23 51 00-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install stack and accessories in accordance with the manufacturer's -ecommendations, maintaining minimum clearances from combustibles specified in UL list ng, NFPA 54, and - local codes. B. Level and plumb stacks. C. Install breechings with as few joints as possible. Align connections accut ately and maintain smooth internal surfaces.All joints of positively pressurized exhaust vents shall be leak tight. D. Clean stacks internally during and after installation to remove dust and del ris. Clean external surfaces to remove welding slag and mill film. E. At appliances, provide slip joints permitting removal of appliances v,Ithout removal or dismantling of stacks. F. Provide minimum 2-foot length of breeching to connect appliance to chirr ney. G. Locate exhaust termination and combustion air intake in accordance with appliance manufacturer's recommendations to prevent re-entry of products of comk ustion. H. Termination of exhaust within 10 feet of operable windows, other buildir g openings, or air intakes will not be accepted. I. Locate terminations with respect to normal wind direction so that the products of combustion are not likely to enter the building, regardless of the distance from the vent to the building openings or air intakes. Provide adequate termination height to avoid contamination of building recirculation zones in accordance with guidelines of ASHRAE Fundamentals. J. Seal all joints of positive pressure stacks and breeching in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, using only sealants recommended by stack manufacturer. K. Provide drain points as indicated and per the manufacturer's recomrr endation to allow proper draining of condensate. Provide Flue Gas Condensate pH Neutra zation at each 3.02 AIR INLETS AND VENT TERMINATIONS A. Coordinate air intakes with other vent terminations, plumbing vents, a id HVAC exhaust -- openings. B. Terminations shall not be within 10 feet horizontally or less than 3 feet aDove openings for HVAC intakes or combustion air inlets. END OF SECTION Section 23 51 00-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 23 52 39 FIRE TUBE BOILERS (BID ALTERNATIVE NO. 4) PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Boiler shell. 2. Hot water boiler trim. 3. Fuel burning system. 4. Gas-fired burners. 5. Controls. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum 10 years experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in installing and servicing the products of this section with minimum 5 years experience. C. Conform to ASME Section 4 and AGA Z21.13 Code for construction of boilers. D. Units: AGA certified. E. Conform to applicable NFPA 70 Code for internal wiring of factory-wired equipment. F. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00—Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate general assembly, components, controls, safety controls, wiring diagrams with electrical characteristics and connection requirements, and service connections. C. Test Reports: Indicate specified performance and efficiency is met or exceeded. Provide combustion test that includes boiler firing rate, overfire draft, gas flow rate, heat input, burner manifold gas pressure, percent carbon monoxide (CO), percent oxygen (0), percent excess net stack temperature, percent stack loss, percent combustion efficiency, and heat output. Section 23 52 39-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 D. Submit Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate assembl support details, connection requirements, and include start-up instructions. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that units meet or exceed specified requirements. F. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate condition of equipment after start-up, including control settings and performance chart of control system. G. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive I :erature, operating instructions, cleaning procedures, replacement parts list, and maintenan ;e and repair data. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01 60 00—Materials and Equipment: Transport, handle, store, ar protect products. B. Protect boilers from damage by leaving factory inspection openings and :;hipping packaging in place until final installation. 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Provide service and maintenance of boilers for one year from data of substantial completion. 1 .07 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide wire brush and one-piece hinged handle for tube cleaning. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Standard One-Year Warranty: Unless otherwise stated below, manufac Curer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the earlier of either the date established for partial utilization or Sub,mtantial Completion of the project. B. Extended Warranty: Manufacturer shall warrant boiler package for a peri,>d of 10 years from the earlier of either the date established for partial utilization or Substa Itial Completion of - the project. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Burnham, or equal. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00—Materials and Equipment. 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Boiler shall be Burnham Commercial Model 4FH563, or equal. Boiler shall be sized for 30 psi water service and have a gross output of 4001 MBH. The unit shall be factory-assembled, factory-fire tested, self-contained, and ready for automatic operation except for water, fuel, electrical, and vent service piping. Section 23 52 39-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. Boiler shall contain no less than 563 sf of fireside heating surface and no less than 800 gallons of water storage. 2.03 BOILER SHELL A. Construct to applicable ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessels Code for allowable working pressure of 125 psi water. B. Provide two lifting eyes on top of boiler. C. Gas tight front and rear smokeboxes. Front smokebox shall be welded to shell. Rear smokebox shall be removable. D. Front and rear tube sheets and flue fully accessible for inspection and cleaning when doors are open. E. Glass observation port shall be provided on rear smokebox. F. Provide handholes and armholes for boiler inspection and cleaning. G. Boiler shall be insulated with 1-inch minimum fiberglass insulation with rectangular steel jacket. Jacket shall have enamel finish. H. Boiler shall have welded on skid base with factory installed firebox floor insulation. I. Boiler shall be three pass firebox design with two passes of horizontal firetubes. All tube shall be roller expanded at each end and shall also be flared. J. See drawings for unit connection locations and sizes. 2.04 HOT WATER BOILER TRIM A. ASME rated pressure relief valve, 125 psig. B. Water temperature gauge. C. Water pressure gauge. D. Low water cutoff to prevent burner operation when boiler water falls below safe level. E. Operating temperature controller to control burner to maintain water temperature setpoint. F. High limit temperature controller with manual reset for burner to prevent boiler water temperature from exceeding safe system temperature. G. Boiler air vent. H. Flue cleaner brush with handle. Section 23 52 39-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 2.05 FUEL BURNING SYSTEM A. A forced draft burner, integral with the front of the unit shall be designed or natural gas and digester gas. Burner control shall be modulating with low fire position and shall automatically maintain fuel-air ratios. 2.06 GAS-FIRED BURNERS A. The natural gas/digester gas burner shall be forced draft multi-jet tpe with electronic ignition. B. Gas burner shall be complete with integral motor driven blower, gnition assembly, combustion safeguard, motor starter, and complete gas trains. C. The gas pilot shall be of a premix type with automatic electric ignition.An electronic detector shall monitor the pilot so that the primary gas valve cannot open until the pilot flame is verified. The pilot train shall include manual shutoff valves, solenoid valve, and pressure regulator. D. Main gas train shall include shut off valve, pressure regulator, leak test vilve, automatic gas valve, solenoid valve, and high and low pressure switches. 2.07 CONTROLS A. Boiler shall be integrated into existing boiler controls system. All wiring ar d conduit for boiler controls shall be by Division 26. 2.08 PERFORMANCE A. Minimum Efficiency: Minimum 85.9% from 30 to 100% of full load firing rate, verified by factory and site tests. 2.09 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide factory tests to check construction, controls, and operation of ur t. B. Provide authorized boiler inspection prior to shipment; submit copy of i ispection report to CONSULTANT. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in accordance with NFPA 54. C. Install boiler on concrete housekeeping base, sized minimum 4 inches (1 00 mm) larger than boiler base. D. Provide connection of natural gas/digester gas service in accordance with N F PA 54 (AGA Z223.1). Section 23 52 39-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 E. Provide piping connections and accessories as indicated. F. Pipe relief valves to nearest drain. G. Install circulator on boiler. H. Mount thermometer in boiler breeching within 12 inches (300 mm) of flue nozzle; refer to Section 23 51 00—Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks. 3.02 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Prepare and start systems under provisions of Section 01 91 00—Starting of Systems. B. Provide field representative for starting unit and training operator. 3.03 SCHEDULES A. See drawings for schedules. END OF SECTION Section 23 52 39-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 23 55 13 FUEL-FIRED DUCT HEATERS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Gas-fired duct furnaces (GDF). B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 sf all govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Proje:t unless identified by a specific edition date. B. All material, installation, and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references. 1. ASHRAE 103—Heating Seasonal Efficiency of Central Furnaces anc Boilers, Methods of Testing. 2. NFPA 54 (AGA Z223.1)—National Fuel Gas Code. 3. NFPA 70—National Electrical Code. 4. NFPA 90A—Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 5. NFPA 90B—Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems. 6. NFPA 211—Chimneys, Fireplaces, Vents, and Solid Fuel-Burning Appliances. 7. ASHRAE 90A—Energy Conservation in New Building Design. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All equipment or components of this specification section shall me,:tt or exceed the requirements and quality of the items herein specified, or as denoted on tne drawings. B. Equipment provider shall be responsible for providing certified equipment start-up and, when noted, an in the field certified training session. New start-up shall be for the purpose of determining alignment, lubrication, voltage, amperage readings, and all proper electrical — connections.A copy of the start-up report shall be made and sent to both the CONTRACTOR and to the CONSULTANT. -- C. All gas-fired heating equipment shall be design-certified by the American 3as Association. D. All control panels shall be UL listed. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of 01 33 00—Submittals. Included in submittals shall be detailed control wiring diagrams that show logic circuits for the unit, as well as all ex'ernal connections (i.e., thermostats, SCADA, etc.) Section 23 55 13-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. Include data concerning dimensions, required clearances, capacities, materials of construction, ratings, weights, manufacturer's installation requirements, manufacturer's performance limitations, and appropriate identification. C. Submittals for motors associated with equipment specified in this section shall include data sheets from the motor manufacturer. Data sheets from the equipment manufacturer or supplier are not acceptable. D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. E. Submittals must be specific to this project. Generic submittals will not be accepted. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the site in such a manner as to protect the materials from shipping and handling damage. Provide materials on factory provided shipping skids and lifting lugs, if required for handling. B. Materials that could be damaged by the elements should be packaged in such a manner that they could withstand short-term exposure to the elements during transportation. C. Store materials in a clean, dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage. D. Use all means necessary to protect equipment before, during, and after installation. E. All scratched, dented, and otherwise damaged units shall be repaired or replaced at no additional cost to CITY. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Standard One-Year Warranty: Unless otherwise stated below, manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the earlier of either the date established for partial utilization or Substantial Completion of the project. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 GAS-FIRED DUCT FURNACE (GDF) A. Acceptable manufacturers are Modine, or equal. B. The unit shall be separated combustion type. The unit shall have a factory-mounted power exhauster enclosed in the unit casing. The unit shall include a factory-mounted differential pressure switch designed to prevent pilot and main burner ignition until positive venting has been proven. A removable gasketed door shall contain both the vent and combustion air connection collars to allow for servicing of the power exhauster. C. The duct furnace unit casing shall be constructed of not less than 20 gauge aluminized steel. Section 23 55 13-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 D. The duct furnace shall include separate access doors for the power e x:hauster, electrical controls, and gas train. E. All duct furnace doors shall be fully gasketed to prevent infiltration of thy, room air into the combustion process. F. The burner shall be made of the same material as the heat exchanger with a thickness of not less than 28 gauge. Burner shall have nonclogging, slotted ports with a stainless steel separator strip designed for good lighting characteristics. The burner shall be located for service removal without disconnecting the main gas supply piping. G. The bottom of the unit shall be angled for draining any condensation to thf center of the unit. The condensation shall be removed through the connection of a drai'i to the knockout opening in the bottom pan. The drain pan shall be constructed of 20 gauge 409 stainless steel. Provide drain connector kit. H. The ignition controller shall be 100% shutoff with continuous retry. I. Controls: Provide an electronic modulating/regulating gas control, comtination gas valve, and ignition control, and modulating signal conditioner. The gas shall be modulated from a manufacturer provided, field installed duct mounted thermostat and set point adjuster, Maxitrol TS121 discharge air sensor and TD121 set point adjuster, respectively. Gas controls shall modulate the gas flow between 40% and 100% full fire to meet the manually selected discharge air temperature. Coordinate with Division 26 on the wiring of the duct furnace controls. J. Electrical: 1. All electrical components shall carry UL listing. 2. A single step-down transformer shall be provided for all unit controls. 3. A step-down transformer from line voltage to 115 V shall be provided for operation of the power exhauster motor. 4. Equipment disconnect shall be provided by Division 26 contractor. K. Provide the following factory-installed options: 1. Low gas pressure switch. 2. High gas pressure switch. 3. Air flow proving to ensure air flow across the heat exchanger. 4. Concentric vent kit for vertical termination. 5. Automatic reset high limit switch. 6. Mild weather stat. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide vent connections in accordance with NFPA 211. Refer to Section 23 51 00—Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks. Provide combustion air intake and vents in accordance with drawings and manufacturer's recommendations. B. Drawings are based on the scheduled equipment make and model nun ber. Any changes because of substitutions shall be provided and coordinated at no additional cost to CITY. — Section 23 55 13-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. Installation of all equipment furnished under this Contract shall be supervised by a qualified representative of the equipment manufacturer. All equipment shall be placed in operation, and plant operators shall be trained to the satisfaction of CITY by a qualified representative of the equipment manufacturer. CITY may videotape training presentations given by manufacturer's representatives. Final payment for various items of equipment will not be made by CITY until the equipment is operating to their satisfaction. D. CONTRACTOR shall install the equipment and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, NFPA 54, NFPA 90A, and as indicated on the drawings. Provide connection to gas system. E. All equipment shall be installed plumb and level and anchored to structure. F. Proper access space around equipment shall be left for servicing the equipment. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for clearance and maintenance access requirements. Provide no less than a minimum of three feet, not including piping and piping appurtenances. G. Provide an adequate number of isolation valves for service and maintenance of the system and its components. H. Install the equipment under the direct supervision of an authorized representative of the manufacturer. I. All piping shall be brought to equipment connections in such a manner so as to prevent the possibility of any loads or stresses being applied to the connections or piping. J. All piping shall be fitted to equipment connections even though piping adjustments may be required after the pipe is installed. K. CONTRACTOR shall furnish the services of the equipment manufacturer's authorized �- representative to supervise prestart checkout, initial start-up, performance testing, and operator instruction. Time available shall be as required to properly start up. L. Any operational deficiencies noted in equipment start-up shall be promptly corrected. END OF SECTION Section 23 55 13-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 23 55 33 FUEL-FIRED UNIT HEATERS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Gas-fired unit heaters (GUH). B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 sr all govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Proje;t unless identified by a specific edition date. B. All material, installation, and workmanship shall comply with the applic tble requirements and standards addressed within the following references. 1. ASHRAE 103—Heating Seasonal Efficiency of Central Furnaces anc Boilers, Methods of Testing. 2. NFPA 54 (AGA Z223.1)—National Fuel Gas Code. 3. NFPA 70—National Electrical Code. 4. NFPA 90A—Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 5. NFPA 90B—Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems. 6. NFPA 211—Chimneys, Fireplaces, Vents, and Solid Fuel-Burning Appliances. 7. ASHRAE 90A—Energy Conservation in New Building Design. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All equipment or components of this specification section shall meet or exceed the requirements and quality of the items herein specified, or as denoted on the drawings. B. Equipment provider shall be responsible for providing certified equipment start-up and, when noted, an in the field certified training session. New start-up shall be for the purpose of determining alignment, lubrication, voltage, amperage readings, and all proper electrical connections.A copy of the start-up report shall be made and sent to both tre CONTRACTOR and to the CONSULTANT. C. All gas-fired heating equipment shall be design-certified by the American :3as Association. D. All control panels shall be UL listed. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the site in such a manner as to protect the materials rom shipping and handling damage. Provide materials on factory provided shipping skids and lifting lugs, if required for handling. Section 23 55 33-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. Materials that could be damaged by the elements should be packaged in such a manner that they could withstand short-term exposure to the elements during transportation. C. Store materials in a clean, dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage. D. Use all means necessary to protect equipment before, during, and after installation. E. All scratched, dented, and otherwise damaged units shall be repaired or replaced at no additional cost to CITY. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of 01 33 00—Submittals. Included in submittals shall be detailed control wiring diagrams that show logic circuits for the unit, as well as all external connections (i.e., thermostats, SCADA, etc.) B. Include data concerning dimensions, required clearances, capacities, materials of construction, ratings, weights, manufacturer's installation requirements, manufacturer's performance limitations, and appropriate identification. C. Submittals for motors associated with equipment specified in this section shall include data sheets from the motor manufacturer. Data sheets from the equipment manufacturer or supplier are not acceptable. D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. E. Submittals must be specific to this project. Generic submittals will not be accepted. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Standard One-Year Warranty: Unless otherwise stated below, manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the earlier of either the date established for partial utilization or Substantial Completion of the project. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 GAS-FIRED UNIT HEATERS (GUH) A. Acceptable manufacturers are Modine, Sterling, or Reznor. B. The unit cabinet shall be constructed of 22 gauge galvanized steel with a baked-enamel finish. C. The unit fan shall have a propeller fan with a direct-drive motor and fan guard. D. The unit heat exchanger shall be an indirect-fired, power-vented heat exchanger constructed of 409 stainless steel. Section 23 55 33-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 E. Unit shall have an indirect-fired burner with power venting constructed of 409 stainless steel. Burner shall be furnished with a solid-state intermittent-spark electronic ignition system with electronic flame supervision and stack damper. Unit heaters shall have an 80% thermal J4 efficiency. F. Where schedules indicate, burner shall be sealed combustion, direc' vent. Provide all combustion air and vent piping, including concentric vent terminals, in accordance with drawings and manufacturer's recommendations. G. Provide a gas train including 24-volt solenoid gas valve, main and pilot regulators, On-Off gas valve, transformer, high limit, stack damper, and fan On-Auto switch to operate fan without firing the burner. H. All burner and blower controls including motor starters shall be furnished by unit manufacturer and shall be factory-prewired. Equipment disconnect shall be provided by Division 26 contractor. Unit shall be equipped with controls for two-stage heating. I. Manufacturer shall furnish low-voltage thermostat. Thermostat shall be Honeywell Model Number T8575D, or equal, with fan auto-on selector switch with room temperature setpoint adjustment. Control range shall be from 50°F to 90°F. Provide adaptor plate with thermostat for mounting to junction box. J. Provide two-way adjustable air deflector louvers. K. Mount units to provide 8 feet 0 inches clearance below, unless othery ise shown on the drawings. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide vent connections in accordance with NFPA 211. Refer to Section 23 51 00—Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks. Provide combustion air intake and vents in accordance with drawings and manufacturer's recommendation:,. B. Drawings are based on the scheduled equipment make and model number. Any changes because of substitutions shall be provided and coordinated at no additional cost to CITY. C. Installation of all equipment furnished under this Contract shall be supervised by a qualified representative of the equipment manufacturer. All equipment shall be placed in operation, and plant operators shall be trained to the satisfaction of CITY by a qualified representative of the equipment manufacturer. CITY may videotape training presentations given by manufacturer's representatives. Final payment for various items of equipment will not be made by CITY until the equipment is operating to their satisfaction. D. CONTRACTOR shall install the equipment and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, NFPA 54, NFPA 90A, and as indicate on the drawings. Provide connection to gas system. E. All equipment shall be installed plumb and level and anchored to structu e. Section 23 55 33-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 F. Proper access space around equipment shall be left for servicing the equipment. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for clearance and maintenance access requirements. Provide no less than a minimum of three feet, not including piping and piping appurtenances. G. Provide an adequate number of isolation valves for service and maintenance of the system and its components. H. Install the equipment under the direct supervision of an authorized representative of the manufacturer. I. All piping shall be brought to equipment connections in such a manner so as to prevent the possibility of any loads or stresses being applied to the connections or piping. J. All piping shall be fitted to equipment connections even though piping adjustments may be required after the pipe is installed. K. CONTRACTOR shall furnish the services of the equipment manufacturer's authorized representative to supervise prestart checkout, initial start-up, performance testing, and operator instruction. Time available shall be as required to properly start up. L. Any operational deficiencies noted in equipment start-up shall be promptly corrected. END OF SECTION Section 23 55 33-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 23 62 13 PACKAGED AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT COMPRESSOR AND CONDENbER UNITS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Staged air-cooled condensing units. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 sl all govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this ProjE ct unless identified by a specific edition date. B. All material, installation, and workmanship shall comply with the applic able requirements and standards addressed within the following references. 1. ASHRAE 15—Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. 2. ARI 210/240—Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment. 3. ARI 270—Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment. 4. UL 207—Refrigerant-Containing Components and Accessories, Nontdectrical. 5. UL 900—Test Performance for Air Filter Units. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All equipment or components of this specification section shall meet or exceed the requirements and quality of the items herein specified, or as denoted on the drawings. B. Equipment provider shall be responsible for providing certified equipment start-up and, when noted, an in the field certified training session. C. Electrical components shall be UL listed for the service specified. D. Electrical components and work shall be in accordance with the Nationa Electrical Code. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Include data concerning dimensions, required clearances, capacities, materials of construction, ratings, weights, manufacturer's installation requirements, manufacturer's performance limitations, and appropriate identification. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details. C. Project specific wiring diagrams for power, signal and control. D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. Section 23 62 13-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 E. Submittals must be specific to this project. Generic submittals will not be accepted. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the site in such a manner as to protect the materials from shipping and handling damage. Provide materials on factory provided shipping skids and lifting lugs, if required for handling. B. Materials that could be damaged by the elements should be packaged in such a manner that they could withstand short-term exposure to the elements during transportation. C. Store materials in a clean, dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage. D. Use all means necessary to protect equipment before, during, and after installation. E. All scratched, dented, and otherwise damaged units shall be repaired or replaced at no additional cost to CITY. 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Include installation instructions, assembly views, lubrication instructions, recommended maintenance schedule and activities. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Standard One-Year Warranty: Unless otherwise stated below, manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year -- from the earlier of either the date established for partial utilization or Substantial Completion of the project. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 STAGED COMPRESSOR AIR-COOLED CONDENSING UNITS A. Acceptable manufacturers are Daikin, York, or Trane. B. Unit shall be a self-contained, packaged, factory-assembled and prewired air-cooled condensing unit suitable for outdoor use. Unit shall consist of casing, coils, fans, compressors, and controls as indicated on equipment schedule. C. Casing shall provide a fully weatherproof enclosure for outdoor installations. Construction shall be galvanized steel with baked-enamel finish. Provide latched access panels for service access and openings for power and refrigerant connections. D. Condenser coils shall be micro channel with aluminum tubes and fins or copper tube mechanically bonded to aluminum fins. All refrigerant tubing must share a common header. Provide subcooling circuits. E. Condenser fans shall be vertical discharge direct-driven propeller-type with fan guard on discharge. Section 23 62 13-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 F. All motors shall be suitable for outdoor use or weather-protected with pe-manent lubricated ball bearings and thermal overload protection. G. Compressors shall be of serviceable reciprocating design with external spring isolators. Provide factory-installed crankcase heater. H. Unit shall have lead refrigeration circuit with hot gas reheat. Unit shall be provided with refrigerant tubing and charge, liquid and suction shutoff valves, and all refrigerant specialties for complete installation. See Section 23 23 00—Refrigerant Piping and Specialties for refrigerant piping and specialties. I. All controls shall be factory-wired and located in a separate enclosure. Controls shall include high- and low-pressure cutouts, compressor overload cutout, anti-short-cycle timer, and low ambient controls to allow operation down to 0°F. All required control power and other transformers shall be factory-furnished and installed. J. Division 26 contractor shall provide equipment disconnect mounted exte-ior to the unit and within sight. K. Compressor shall receive Enable/Disable signal from thermostat. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install units level and plumb, maintaining manufacturer's recommend(-d clearances and tolerances. B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved s jbmittals. Test for proper operation and adjust until satisfactory results are obtained. C. All electrical wiring and interconnections shall be furnished and in-stalled as part of Division 26. D. Provide connection to refrigerant piping system and evaporators. E. Protect installed products until completion of project. F. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products at no additional cost to C TY. G. Installation of all equipment furnished under this Contract shall be supervised by a qualified representative of the equipment manufacturer. All equipment shall be placed in operation, and plant operators/building maintenance personnel shall be trained to the satisfaction of the CITY by a qualified representative of the equipment manufacturer. CITY may videotape training presentations given by manufacturer's representatives. Final payment for various items of equipment will not be made by CITY until the equipment is operating to their satisfaction. Section 23 62 13-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 H. Drawings and specifications are based on the scheduled manufacturer and model number. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the cost of any changes because of substitutions or alternates of other manufacturers or model numbers including but not limited to, structural, mechanical, and electrical work. CONTRACTOR shall pay all costs for revisions of drawings by CONSULTANT. Any changes shall be coordinated and provided at no additional cost to CITY. 3.02 CLEANING A. Unit shall be cleaned and new filters shall be furnished and installed prior to final acceptance by CITY. One spare set of filters shall remain for CITY. END OF SECTION Section 23 62 13-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 23 73 13 FAN COIL UNITS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Fan coil units (FCU). B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 sr all govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Proje ,t unless identified by a specific edition date. B. All material, installation, and workmanship shall comply with the applic ible requirements and standards addressed within the following references. 1. ASHRAE 15—Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. 2. ASHRAE 62—Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality. 3. ASHRAE 84-87P—Method of Testing Air-to-Air Heat/Energy Exchangers. 4. ASTM B117—Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog)Apparatus. 5. ARI 410—Forced Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils. 6. ARI 430—Central Station Air-Handling Units. 7. ARI 1060—Performance Rating of Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers for Energy Recovery. 8. NFPA 70—National Electrical Code. 9. NFPA 90A—Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 10. UL181—Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors. 11. UL900—Test Performance for Air Filter Units. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All equipment or components of this specification section shall meet or exceed the requirements and quality of the items herein specified, or as denoted on the drawings. B. Equipment provider shall be responsible for providing certified equipment start-up and, when noted, an in the field certified training session. C. Electrical components shall be UL listed for the service specified. D. Electrical components and work shall be in accordance with the National :electrical Code. E. Insulation and insulation adhesive shall comply with NFPA 90A requirements for flame spread and smoke generation. F. Unit performance shall be certified in accordance with ARI 430 fo Central Station Air-Handling Units. Section 23 73 13-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 G. Direct expansion coils shall be designed and tested in accordance with ASHRAE 15 Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration, latest edition. H. Fan motors shall be sized such that the fan brake horsepower shall be less than 90 percent of the motor's rated horsepower, excluding service factor. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Include data concerning dimensions, required clearances, capacities, materials of construction, ratings, weights, manufacturer's installation requirements, manufacturer's performance limitations, and appropriate identification. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details. C. Project specific wiring diagrams for power, signal and control. D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. E. Submittals must be specific to this project. Generic submittals will not be accepted. F. Hanging and support requirements should follow the recommendations in the . manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the site in such a manner as to protect the materials from shipping and handling damage. Provide materials on factory provided shipping skids and lifting lugs, if required for handling. B. Materials that could be damaged by the elements should be packaged in such a manner that they could withstand short-term exposure to the elements during transportation. C. Store materials in a clean, dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage. D. Use all means necessary to protect equipment before, during, and after installation. E. All scratched, dented, and otherwise damaged units shall be repaired or replaced at no additional cost to CITY. 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Include installation instructions, assembly views, lubrication instructions, recommended maintenance schedule and activities. B. Include replacement and spare parts lists. Section 23 73 13-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 1.07 WARRANTY A. Standard One-Year Warranty: Unless otherwise stated below, manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the earlier of either the date established for partial utilization or Substantial Completion of the project. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 FAN COIL UNIT (FCU) A. Acceptable manufacturers are Daikin, York, or Trane. B. Drawings and specifications are based on the scheduled manufacturer aid model number. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the cost of any changes because of substitutions or alternates of other manufacturers or model numbers including, but not lir ited to, structural, mechanical, and electrical work. CONTRACTOR shall pay all costs for re\ isions of drawings by CONSULTANT. Any changes shall be coordinated and provided at nc additional cost to CITY. C. Air handling unit shall be factory-assembled air-handling units consistir g of the following - sections: 1. Supply fan. 2. Economizer/mixing section. 3. Direct expansion coil. 4. Combination filter section. 5. Electric heating section. D. Unit Casing: 1. Construct walls, roof and floor from 2-inch thick double wall panel a>semblies. Panels shall be injected with polyurethane foam insulation and shall have a minimum thermal conductivity (R-value) of 12.5. 2. The outer shell shall be constructed of solid G90 galvanized steel with baked enamel finish. The inner liner shall be constructed of solid G90 galvanized steel. 3. Panels shall be gasketed with permanently applied bulb-type gaskets and able to be removed without affecting the integrity of casing structure. 4. Wall/Roof panel deflection shall not exceed L/240 ratio at a maximum ±5 inches of static - pressure. Deflection shall be measured at the midpoint of the panel. 5. A full perimeter base rail shall be installed at each air handling unit. '-he base rail shall be constructed from a minimum of 12 gauge G60 galvanized steel ar d shall be at least 8 inches high. Panels shall be able to be removed without affecti )g the integrity of casing structure. 6. Leakage rate shall not exceed 1% of the total system air quantity when subjected to ±5 inches static pressure. 7. Install sealing collars to the interior and exterior of each penetration to prevent air leakage where coil piping, humidifier piping, air vents, drain piping, and electrical conduits penetrate air handling unit casing. Silicone sealants and duct sealants are not acceptable to seal pipe penetrations of the air handling unit casing. Section 23 73 13-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 E. Access Sections and Doors: 1. Provide access sections where shown on the drawings. 2. Access sections shall be of the same construction as the unit casing. 3. Access doors shall be double wall, of same construction and thickness as casing, hinged with quarter turn latches and piano type hinges, continuously gasketed with bulb type gaskets. F. Cooling Coils: 1. Unit shall be provided with coil connections that extend beyond unit casing for ease of installation. All coil connections shall be factory sealed with grommets on interior and exterior panel liners to minimize air leakage. Coils shall be removable through side and/or top panels of unit without the need to remove and disassemble the entire section from the unit. 2. Direct Expansion Coil a. Sweat type copper suction headers shall be provided.b. Fins shall have a minimum thickness of 0.0075 inch aluminum plate construction. c. Tubes shall be mechanically expanded into the fins to provide a continuous bond over the entire finned length. Bare copper tubes shall not be visible between fins. d. Coil tubes shall be 5/8 inch OD seamless copper, 0.020 inch nominal tube wall thickness. e. Sweat type copper suction connections located at the bottom of the suction headers for gravity oil drainage. Coils shall be uniformly circuited in a counterflow manner for either single circuit, row, face, interlaced, or interlaced face split capacity reduction as shown on unit schedule. Coils shall be tested with 315 psig of air pressure under warm water, and suitable for 250 psig working pressure. f. Coil casing shall be a formed channel frame of galvanized steel. G. Supply Fan Section: 1. Fans shall be double width, double inlet centrifugal fan. 2. Fan and motor combination shall be capable of delivering 110% of air quantity scheduled at scheduled static pressure. The motor furnished with the fan shall not operate into the motor service factor when operating under these conditions. 3. Fans to be fastened to solid steel shafts and designed for continuous operation at maximum rated static pressure. 4. Fan bearings shall be self-aligning, pillow block, regreasable ball type selected for a minimum average L-50 life of 200,000 hours. 5. Furnish extended grease lines from bearings to allow servicing without entering the unit. — Grease lines can be terminated within the unit as long as they are able to be easily serviced by opening the access door. 6. Fan drive and motor assembly shall be mounted inside fan casing section and integrally isolated within unit. 7. Motors shall be premium efficient, open drip proof NEMA Design B with size and electrical characteristics as shown on the drawings. Insulation shall be Class F rated for a Class B temperature rise. H. Electric Heating: 1. Unit shall include an electric heater consisting of electric heating coils, fuses, and a high temperature limit switch, with capacities as shown on the drawings. 2. Electric heating coils shall be located in the reheat position downstream of the supply fan. Section 23 73 13-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 3. Electric heater shall have full modulation capacity controlled by an SCR (Silicon Controlled Rectifier). Controller shall provide the heating control si_Inal to control the amount of heating. I. Mixing and Economizer Section: 1. Mixing/Economizer section shall be provided with a top outside air opening and end _ return air opening with parallel low leak airfoil damper blades. 2. Dampers shall be hollow core galvanized steel airfoil blades, fully gasketed and have continuous vinyl seals between damper blades in a galvanized steel frame. Dampers shall have stainless steel jamb seals along end of dampers. Provide linkage and ABS plastic end caps. 3. Return air and outside air dampers shall be driven by a modulating a;tuator. 4. Damper leakage rate shall be tested in accordance with AMCA Stant:ard 500. 5. Modulating actuator shall be Belimo NFB24-SR, or equal. Actuator to be provided by Division 23 contractor. J. Filter Sections: 1. Filter sections shall accept standard filters in a flat orientation. Pre}ilter section shall accept 2-inch-thick MERV 7 pleated filters. 2. Provide two full sets of filters. K. Electrical: Unit shall have terminal strip for control as indicated. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify CONSULTANT of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install units level and plumb, maintaining manufacturer's recommended clearances and tolerances. B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved a bmittals. Test for proper operation and adjust until satisfactory results are obtained. C. Pipe and trap condensate to nearest floor drain in accordance as shown c n drawings. D. Install units with vibration isolators as recommended or supplied by manufacturer. �- Section 23 73 13-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 E. Provide flexible duct connections on all duct connections to unit in accordance with Section 23 33 00—Air Duct Accessories. F. Provide lubrication line extenders as required to allow regreasing of bearings without removal of equipment components. G. Protect installed products until completion of project. H. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products at no additional cost to CITY. I. Installation of all equipment furnished under this Contract shall be supervised by a qualified representative of the equipment manufacturer. All equipment shall be placed in operation, and plant operators/building maintenance personnel shall be trained to the satisfaction of CITY by a qualified representative of the equipment manufacturer. CITY may videotape training presentations given by manufacturer's representatives. Final payment for various items of equipment will not be made by CITY until the equipment is operating to their satisfaction. J. Drawings and specifications are based on the scheduled manufacturer and model number. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the cost of any changes because of substitutions or alternates of other manufacturers or model numbers including but not limited to, structural, mechanical, and electrical work. CONTRACTOR shall pay all costs for revisions of drawings by CONSULTANT. Any changes shall be coordinated and provided at no additional cost to CITY. 3.04 CLEANING A. Unit shall be cleaned and new filters shall be furnished and installed prior to final acceptance by CITY. One spare set of filters shall remain for CITY. END OF SECTION Section 23 73 13-6 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 23 81 26 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Split systems (SS). B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 sr all govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Proje ;t unless identified by a specific edition date. B. All material, installation, and workmanship shall comply with the applic tble requirements and standards addressed within the following references. 1. ASHRAE 15—Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. 2. ASHRAE 62—Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality. 3. ASHRAE 90A—Energy Conservation in New Building Design. 4. NFPA 70—National Electrical Code. 5. NFPA 90A—Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 6. UL900—Test Performance for Air Filter Units. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All equipment or components of this specification section shall met or exceed the requirements and quality of the items herein specified, or as denoted on .he drawings. B. Equipment provider shall be responsible for providing certified equipment ;tart-up and, when noted, an in the field certified training session. C. Electrical components shall be UL listed for the service specified. D. Electrical components and work shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code. E. Insulation and insulation adhesive shall comply with NFPA 90A requirements for flame spread and smoke generation. F. Direct expansion coils shall be designed and tested in accordance with b,-SHRAE 15 Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration, latest edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. Section 23 81 26-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. Include data concerning dimensions, required clearances, capacities, materials of construction, ratings, weights, manufacturer's installation requirements, manufacturer's performance limitations, and appropriate identification. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details. C. Project specific wiring diagrams for power, signal and control. D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. E. Submittals must be specific to this project. Generic submittals will not be accepted. F. Hanging and support requirements should follow the recommendations in the manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the site in such a manner as to protect the materials from shipping and handling damage. Provide materials on factory provided shipping skids and lifting lugs, if required for handling. B. Materials that could be damaged by the elements should be packaged in such a manner that they could withstand short-term exposure to the elements during transportation. C. Store materials in a clean, dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage. D. Use all means necessary to protect equipment before, during, and after installation. E. All scratched, dented, and otherwise damaged units shall be repaired or replaced at no additional cost to CITY. 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Include installation instructions, assembly views, lubrication instructions, recommended maintenance schedule and activities. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Standard One-Year Warranty: Unless otherwise stated below, manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the earlier of either the date established for partial utilization or Substantial Completion of the project. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 SPLIT SYSTEM (SS) A. Acceptable manufacturers are Daikin, Mitsubishi, or Sanyo. Section 23 81 26-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 B. General: 1. Split system unit shall be an indoor blower section and matching oi. tdoor condensing section. 2. Systems shall bear the ARI label showing that the system is ARI 210 or 240, and 270 Certified. Systems shall be listed by ETL Testing Laboratories and bear the ETL label. Matching systems shall meet or exceed the minimum Federally mandated Seasonal Energy Efficiency Rating (SEER) of 10, as certified by the ARI testing programs. 3. Matching indoor and outdoor sections shall be connected by deoxidized, annealed refrigerant copper tubing, type "L" cleaned and capped. All systems shall have flared refrigeration connections on both indoor and outdoor sections. 4. Systems indoor and outdoor sections shall be completely factory assembled and wired with a precharge of refrigerant. A single power source shall provide voltage to both the outdoor and indoor units. Electrical wire and connections to outdoor section and between indoor and outdoor sections shall be sized, installed and grounded by the installer in conformance with the National Electrical Code (NEC), to codes, as well as manufacturer's instructions. 5. System shall be equipped with a microprocessor control system with a wired remote controller with LCD display, that provides access to all system functions, and transmits room conditions and programs to the indoor microprocessor every 3 minutes. Infrared remote controller shall be capable of operating system mounted up to 26 feet from the indoor section according to manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. System shall have the capability of continuous operation in the case of a lost or damaged remote controller, utilizing a factory-installed integral manual switch in conjunction with the system microprocessor. C. System Wired Remote Controller: Controller shall include system mode selection, programmable temperature control, 24-hour programmable timer, automatic three-speed indoor fan speed control, constant fan speed selection, night setback moce, user selectable room temperature sensor located on the remote controller. D. Outdoor Condensing Section: 1. Outdoor condensing section shall be factory assembled, wired, pipet, and precharged with a start-up amount of R-410a refrigerant. 2. Unit shall be constructed of G90 galvannealed steel with corrosion inhibiting, acrylic, baked-on enamel finish. 3. Unit shall be furnished with a high-efficiency, rotary compressor with internal overload protection, mounted with vibration isolators to reduce noise and vibration. 4. Condenser coil heat exchanger shall be constructed of nonferrous rifled copper tubing with enhanced aluminum slit fins mechanically bonded to the copper. A suction line accumulator, a coil temperature sensor, and cap tube metering device shall be factory installed. 5. Fan motor shall be direct drive with internal overload protection, permanent lubrication, with propeller-type fan, mounted for horizontal air discharge. 6. Brass valves with refrigeration flare connections and flare nuts and service ports shall be factory mounted prior to shipment for installation. 7. Low ambient outdoor section shall contain a printed circuit board, factory mounted and wired, to assist in control of low ambient operation. Unit shall be able to operate in the A/C mode down to 0°F outdoor temperature. A factory-installed 20-watt crankcase heater shall provide additional compressor protection. Section 23 81 26-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 E. Indoor Evaporator Section: 1. Indoor section shall be single direction airflow, factory assembled and wired. 2. Unit shall contain an evaporator heat exchanger constructed of nonferrous, rifled copper tubing with enhanced aluminum slit fans, mechanically bonded to the copper. 3. A single centrifugal blower wheel, statically and dynamically balanced shall be attached to a single direct-drive PSC fan motor with overload protection, permanent lubrication, and multispeed capability. 4. Unit shall contain a printed circuit board with a control circuit fuse and microprocessor, factory mounted and wired, that receives and processes all commands and transmissions from the system Infrared Remote Controller. Indoor unit shall also contain an Operation Switch with visible lamps for operation, standby and timer functions, as well as a system test switch and manual ON/OFF switch. ffi 5. Unit shall contain an air sensor thermistor, a coil-freeze safety thermistor to prevent freeze-up, a factory-installed condensate drain pump, drain pan, hose and fitting, and refrigeration line connections with flare nuts. 6. Indoor section shall be provided with factory assembled supply and return air grille with a motorized louver/flap on the supply air opening. The motorized louver/flap, controlled by the infrared remote controller, shall provide automatic, full-oscillating supply airflow, as well as being capable of being placed in a set, stationary position. 7. Unit shall also contain adjustable horizontal air louvers to provide user defined directional airflow. Indoor unit will be furnished with an in-ceiling plenum which surrounds the evaporator coil section. 8. Unit shall be furnished with antimold, poly type washable air filters that can be removed without removing indoor unit casing. Indoor unit shall be powered by voltage from the matching outdoor unit. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify CONSULTANT of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install units level and plumb, maintaining manufacturer's recommended clearances and tolerances.B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. Test for proper operation and adjust until satisfactory results are obtained. Section 23 81 26-4 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. Pipe and trap condensate to nearest drain in accordance with Section 22 13 16—Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping and as shown on drawings. D. Protect installed products until completion of project. E. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products at no additional cost to CITY. F. Installation of all equipment furnished under this Contract shall be supervised by a qualified representative of the equipment manufacturer. All equipment shall be placed in operation, - and plant operators/building maintenance personnel shall be trained to the satisfaction of the CITY by a qualified representative of the equipment manufacturer. CITY may videotape training presentations given by manufacturer's representatives. Final payment for various items of equipment will not be made by CITY until the equipment is operating to their satisfaction. G. Drawings and specifications are based on the scheduled manufacturer a Id model number. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the cost of any changes because of substitutions or alternates of other manufacturers or model numbers including but not lirr ited to, structural, mechanical, and electrical work. CONTRACTOR shall pay all costs for rev sions of drawings by CONSULTANT. Any changes shall be coordinated and provided at no additional cost to CITY. 3.04 CLEANING A. Unit shall be cleaned and filters shall be cleaned prior to final acceptance by CITY. END OF SECTION Section 23 81 26-5 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 23 82 16 AIR COILS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Electric duct coils (EDH). B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by a specific edition date. B. All material, installation, and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references. 1. ARI 410—Forced Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils. 2. NFPA 70—National Electrical Code. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All equipment or components of this specification section shall meet or exceed the requirements and quality of the items herein specified, or as denoted on the drawings. B. Electrical components shall be UL listed for the service specified. C. Electrical components and work shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code. D. Coil performance shall be certified in accordance with ARI 410. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Include data concerning dimensions, required clearances, capacities, materials of construction, ratings, weights, manufacturer's installation requirements, manufacturer's performance limitations, and appropriate identification. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the site in such a manner as to protect the materials from shipping and handling damage. Provide materials on factory provided shipping skids and lifting lugs, if required for handling. B. Materials that could be damaged by the elements should be packaged in such a manner that they could withstand short-term exposure to the elements during transportation. Section 23 82 16-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. Store materials in a clean, dry place and protect from weather and c)nstruction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage. D. Use all means necessary to protect equipment before, during, and after it stallation. E. All scratched, dented, and otherwise damaged units shall be repaired Jr replaced at no additional cost to CITY. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Standard One-Year Warranty: Unless otherwise stated below, manufacy Jrer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a )eriod of one year from the earlier of either the date established for partial utilization or Subsantial Completion of the project. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 ELECTRIC DUCT COILS (EDH): A. Acceptable manufacturer is Thermolec, or equal. B. Coil shall be size and capacity as listed in Drawings. C. Coils shall be of nickel chrome alloy and shall be insulated by floating cera nic bushings from the galvanized steel frame. Coil terminal pins shall be stainless steel insulated by nonrotating ceramic bushings. Control box shall be gasketed. D. Heaters shall be slip-in type as shown on the drawings. Heaters shall be a'table for insertion into the duct through an opening on its side, and shall have a flange for securing it to the duct side. Mounting flanges shall be independent of the terminal bo< so as to allow installation without opening the box or drilling into it. E. All duct heaters shall be equipped with fail-safe, automatic reset and manual reset disc-type thermal cutouts. F. Cutouts shall be shielded from impact and shall deenergize the heater in case of insufficient air flows. G. Duct heaters shall be nonsensitive to airflow direction and interchangeab e for horizontal or vertical ducts. H. Duct heaters shall be equipped with magnetic contactors, 24-volt transformer, airflow sensor, SCR control, solid-state relays, and protective screens. Duct heater shall be controlled by manufacturer provided duct thermostat and remote dial (Model RADS, or equal). I. Heater shall be equipped with a built-in disconnect to switch the power off at the heater location. J. Load fuses shall be supplied as required by local codes. Section 23 82 16-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 K. Pilot lights shall be provided for power on (Green), and no air flow (Red). L. Heater control cabinet shall be equipped with door interlock to disconnect power to the unit while door is open. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install units level and plumb, maintaining manufacturer's recommended clearances and tolerances. B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. Test for proper operation and adjust until satisfactory results are obtained. C. Provide all mounting hardware and accessories necessary for complete installation. D. Installation of all equipment furnished under this Contract shall be supervised by a qualified representative of the equipment manufacturer. All equipment shall be placed in operation, and plant operators/building maintenance personnel shall be trained to the satisfaction of CITY by a qualified representative of the equipment manufacturer. CITY may videotape training presentations given by manufacturer's representatives. Final payment for various items of equipment will not be made by CITY until the equipment is operating to their satisfaction. E. Drawings and specifications are based on the scheduled manufacturer and model number. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the cost of any changes because of substitutions or alternates of other manufacturers or model numbers including but not limited to, structural, mechanical, and electrical work. CONTRACTOR shall pay all costs for revisions of drawings by CONSULTANT. Any changes shall be coordinated and provided at no additional cost to CITY. END OF SECTION Section 23 82 16-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 SECTION 23 82 39 UNIT HEATERS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Electric Unit Heaters. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 01 sh ill govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Prole( t unless identified by a specific edition date. B. All material, installation, and workmanship shall comply with the applicible requirements and standards addressed within the following references. 1. ARI 410—Forced Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils. 2. NFPA 70—National Electrical Code. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All equipment or components of this specification section shall meet or exceed the requirements and quality of the items herein specified, or as denoted on the drawings. _ B. Electrical components shall be UL listed for the service specified. C. Electrical components and work shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code. D. Coil performance shall be certified in accordance with ARI 410. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittals. B. Include data concerning dimensions, required clearances, capacities, materials of construction, ratings, weights, manufacturer's installation requirements, manufacturer's performance limitations, and appropriate identification. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the site in such a manner as to protect the materials from shipping and handling damage. Provide materials on factory provided shipping skids and lifting lugs, if required for handling. B. Materials that could be damaged by the elements should be packaged in such a manner that they could withstand short-term exposure to the elements during transportation. — Section 23 82 39-1 4463.004/City Contract No.994 C. Store materials in a clean, dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage. D. Use all means necessary to protect equipment before, during, and after installation. E. All scratched, dented, and otherwise damaged units shall be repaired or replaced at no additional cost to CITY. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Standard One-Year Warranty: Unless otherwise stated below, manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the earlier of either the date established for partial utilization or Substantial Completion of the project. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS A. CONTRACTOR shall provide electric heaters of the type, size, capacity, and accessories as listed on the equipment schedule. All units shall be UL listed. B. All electric unit heaters shall be factory-assembled and tested. C. Electric Unit Heaters (Standard) (EUH): 1. Acceptable manufacturers are Chromalox, QMark, Indeeco, or equal. 2. The cabinet shall be constructed of heavy gauge, die-formed steel with baked enamel coating. Manufacturer shall provide mounting bracket. 3. Provide a propeller fan with direct-drive, totally enclosed motor. 4. Provide an aluminum-finned copper-clad steel sheath heating element. 5. Provide an automatic reset thermal cutout to protect the element. 6. Unit-mounted equipment disconnect shall be ABB OT Series, or equal, provided by manufacturer and meet the requirements of Division 26. 7. Mount units to provide 8 feet 0-inch clearance below, unless otherwise shown on the drawings. 8. Unit shall include a thermal fan delay to dissipate heat when coil deenergizes, and prevent cold air drafts when it starts. 9. Line voltage thermostat shall be provided by Division 26. D. Electric Unit Heaters (Corrosion-Resistant) (EUH): 1. Acceptable manufacturers are: a. QMark Model QWD. b. Berko Model BWD. c. Chromalox Model HD3D. d. INDEECO Model TRIAD. 2. The cabinet shall be constructed of heavy gauge stainless steel with stainless steel adjustable air deflectors and stainless steel wall-mounting bracket. Heating elements shall be 316 stainless steel sheathed with 316 stainless steel fins. 3. Unit shall include a direct-drive totally enclosed epoxy coated motor, wired to a NEMA 4X enclosure. Section 23 82 39-2 4463.004/City Contract No.994 4. Unit shall include an automatic reset thermal cutout to protect the element and a thermal fan delay. 5. Line voltage thermostat shall be provided by Division 26. 6. Unit-mounted equipment disconnect shall be ABB OT Series provided by manufacturer suitable for corrosive locations and meet the requirements of Division 26. 7. Mount bottom of units 8 feet 0 inch above finished floor, unless otherwise shown on drawings. E. Electric Wall Heaters (EWH): 1. Acceptable manufacturer is QMark, or equal. 2. Furnish and install a steel cabinet for recessed mounting in standard ._-by-4 stud wall or surface mounting on a standard block wall as shown on drawings. ,Jrovide a cabinet with 16 gauge steel grille bars and finished in baked enamel. 3. Provide a direct-drive propeller fan and permanently lubricated totall enclosed motor. 4. Provide steel-finned metal sheath electric heating elements. 5. Provide manual reset thermal overheat protection to disconnect pov er in the event of overheating. Provide an integral, tamper-resistant thermostat. Provide integral contactors and disconnects. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install units level and plumb, maintaining manufacturer's recommended clearances and - tolerances. B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved sL bmittals. Test for proper operation and adjust until satisfactory results are obtained. C. Provide all mounting hardware and accessories necessary for complete it stallation. D. Installation of all equipment furnished under this Contract shall be supervised by a qualified representative of the equipment manufacturer. All equipment shall be placed in operation, and plant operators/building maintenance personnel shall be trained to the satisfaction of CITY by a qualified representative of the equipment manufacturer. CITY may videotape training presentations given by manufacturer's representatives. Final payment for various items of equipment will not be made by CITY until the equipment is operating to their - satisfaction. E. Drawings and specifications are based on the scheduled manufacturer and model number. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the cost of any changes because of substitutions or alternates of other manufacturers or model numbers including but not limited to, structural, mechanical, and electrical work. CONTRACTOR shall pay all costs for revisions of drawings by CONSULTANT. Any changes shall be coordinated and provided at no additional cost to CITY. END OF SECTION Section 23 82 39-3 4463.004/City Contract No.994 For more location information please visit www.strand.com Office Locations Brenham. Texas I 979.836.7937 Cincinnati, Ohio I 513.861.5600 Columbus, Indiana I 812.372.9911 Columbus, Ohio I 614.835.0460 Indianapolis, Indiana I 317,423.0935 Joliet, Illinois I 815.744.4200 Lexington, Kentucky I 859.225.8500 Louisville, Kentucky I 502.583.7020 Madison, Wisconsin* I 608.251.4843 Milwaukee, Wisconsin I 414.271.0771 Phoenix, Arizona I 602.437.3733 L *Corporate Headquarters L L LI ASSOCIATES